i 


GIFT  OF 
Dr,   Horace  Ivie 


a 


il.>^ 


FIEST  BOOK  II  LATH; 


CONTAINIWQ 


GRAMMAR,  exercise's;  AlN'^li'VbCAteULAVifi'sV 


ON    THE    MKTHOD    OF 


CONSTANT  IMITATION  AND  REPETITION. 


JOHN    M*C  L  I  N  T  O  C  K,  A.M., 

FBOFESSOR   OF   LANQUAGES, 


GEORGE   R.  CROOKS,  A.M., 

ADJUNCT  PBOFESSOB  OF  LANGUAGES  IN  DICKINSON  COLLEOS. 


SEVENTH  EDITION. 


HARPER  &   BROTHERS,  PUBLISHERS 

82  CLIFF  STREET,  NEW  YORK. 

18  52. 


»)I' J 


*..•> 


'»        *      »^     "'(      '1  ,v 


*      «     • 


GIFT  OF 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1846, 

By  Harper  6c  Brothers, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  Southern  District  of  New  York. 


EDUCATION 


DePt. 


PREFACE. 


This  book  is  designed,  as  the  title-page  states,  to 
contain  within  itself  Grammar,  Exercises,  Reading- 
book,  and  Dictionary;  in  short,  all  that  the  pupil  will 
need  before  commencing  the  regular  reading  of  Cae- 
sar or  any  other  easy  Latin  author.  It  has  been  pre- 
pared, as  far  as  possible,  on  the  following  principles : 

1.  The  object  of  studying  languages  is  twofold  :  (1), 
the  acquisition  of  the  languages  themselves  ;  and  (2), 
the  mental  discipline  gained  in  acquiring  them. 

2.  No  language  can  be  thoroughly  acquired  with- 
out the  outlay  of  much  labour  and  time.  All  schemes 
which  promise  to  dispense  with  such  outlay  must  be 
pronounced  visionary  and  chimerical. 

3.  But  labour  without  fruit  does  not  contribute  to 
mental  cultivation.  Labour  and  pain  are  not  neces- 
sary companions :  learning  should  not  be  "  wrung 
from  poor  striplings  like  blood  from  the  nose,  or  the 
plucking  of  untimely  fruit."* 

4.  The  grammar  of  a  language  cannot  be  understood 
until  the  language  itself  is  at  least  partially  acquired. 

5.  The  vernacular  may  be  learned,  so  far  as  its  use 
is  concerned,  without  grammar :  a  foreign  living  lan- 
guage may  be  so  learned,  but  never  so  thoroughly, 
nor  even  so  rapidly,  as  with  grammatical  aids.  In  the 
study  of  a  dead  language  grammar  is  indispensable. 

6.  "A  grammar  intended  for  beginners  should  be 
formed  altogether  differently  from  one  intended  for 


Milton. 


924208 


IV  .  PREFACE. 

the  higher  classes,  both  in  the  distribution  of  the  mat- 
ter and  in  the  mode  of  presenting  it.  Those  who  think 
that  the  pupil  should  use  the  same  grammar  from  the 
beginnmg  of  his  course  to  the  end,  are  quite  in  error."* 

7.  In  elementary  books,  or  in  teaching,  no  etymo- 
logical form  nor  grammatical  principle  should  be  pre- 
sented to  the  pupil  without  an  immediate  apphcation 
thereof  to  practice,  which  should  be  kept  up,  both 
orally  and  in  writing,  from  the  very  first  lesson. 

8.  The  all-important  rule  of  practice,  in  the  acqui- 
sition of  language,  is  imitation  and  repetition.  This 
is  no  new  invention ;  all  good  teachers  have  known 
and  used  it ;  but  yet  it  has  been  but  slightly  employ- 
ed in  elementary  books  heretofore. 

9.  Models  for  imitation  should  be  simple  at  first, 
and  gradually  made  more  complicated ;  but  they 
should  always  be  selected  from  pure  authors,  say,  in 
Latin,  from  Cicero  and  Ceesar. 

10.  The  pupiFs  ear  should  be  trained  to  correct- 
ness from  the  beginning,  and  the  simplest  rules  of 
prosody  learned  and  applied  as  soon  as  possible. 
For  this  purpose,  the  quantity  of  all  syllables  should 
be  marked  in  elementary  books,  and  attention  to  it 
should  be  strictly  enforced  by  the  teacher. 

11.  The  foreign  idiom,  both  as  to  the  use  and  ar- 
rangement of  words,  should  be  made  familiar  to  the 
pupil  by  constant  practice.  Nothing  can  be  more 
hurtful  than  exercises  in  which  foreign  words  are  used 
in  the  idiom,  and  according  to  the  arrangement  of  the 
vernacular. 

How  far  we  have  been  successful  in  carrying  out 
these  principles,  the  book  itself  must  show. 

•  Kiihner 


PREFACE.  y 

We  have  aimed  to  combine  the  advantages  of  con- 
stant repetition  and  imitation  of  Latin  sentences  from 
the  beginning,  with  a  more  thorough  drilHng  in  ety- 
mological forms  than  is  common.  In  order  to  effect 
this  combination,  we  have  necessarily  deviated  from 
the  ordinary  grammatical  com-se  to  some  extent ;  but 
we  trust  that  experienced  teachers  will  find,  from  an 
examination  of  the  table  of  contents  alone,  that  our 
arrangement  is  not  devoid  of  systematic  and  even 
logical  order. 

While  we  have  not  gone  out  of  our  way  to  bring  in 
novelties,  we  have  yet  adopted  every  new  method 
which  we  have  deemed  to  be  an  improvement.  None 
of  the  class-books  of  any  repute  in  England  or  Ger- 
many have  escaped  our  notice  in  the  preparation  of 
this  work ;  and  we  have  made  free  use  of  them  all, 
without  slavish  adherence  to  any.  Perhaps  the  most 
marked  peculiarity  of  the  etymological  part  of  the 
book  will  be  found  to  be  the  doctrine  of  the  genders  of 
nouns  of  the  third  declension,  which  we  have  reduced, 
for  the  first  time,  to  a  form  at  once  philosophical,  we 
hope,  and  practical.*  Some  steps  toward  the  meth- 
od here  presented  have  been  taken  by  Madvig,  Weis- 
SENBORN,  and  others  in  Germany ;  but  none  of  these 
writers  has  brought  out  a  clear  exposition  of  the  doc- 
trine, adapted  to  the  actual  purposes  of  instruction. 
The  arrangement,  also,  of  the  verbs,t  according  to 
the  formation  of  the  perfect-stem,  founded  mainly 
upon  the  classification  of  Grotefend  (better  set  forth 
by  Allen),  will  be  found,  we  trust,  to  be  an  improve- 
ment upon  any  yet  offered. 

*  The  summary  of  rales,  with  all  the  exceptions,  "vnll  be  fotind  to  occa* 
py  two  pages  only,  viz.,  p.  132,  133. 

♦  Lessons  Ixii.-lxix.,  and  p.  268-279.     ^ 

1* 


VI  PREFACE. 

The  Syntax,  in  its  details,  generally  follows  Zumpt, 
but  in  the  arrangement,  especially  of  Part  II.,  we 
have  approached  nearer  to  the  plan  of  Billroth* 
The  admirable  syntax  of  Becker,  adopted  by  Kuhner 
in  his  Greek  and  Latin  Grammars,  we  deem  too  dif- 
ficult for  beginners. 

The  Exercises  are  selected,  as  far  as  possible,  from 
Caesar's  Gallic  War.  Although  we  have  laboured 
nard  to  keep  out  bad  Latin,  we  do  not  hope  that  all 
our  sentences  will  escape  criticism.  We  have  found, 
from  actual  experiment  in  our  classes,  that  the  exer- 
cises to  be  rendered  from  English  into  Latin  are 
within  the  capacity  of  any  student  of  ordinary  indus- 
try who  studies  the  book  in  order ;  and  we  do  not 
know  that  this  can  be  said  of  any  book  of  the  kind, 
of  equal  extent,  in  use  among  us. 

A  few  words  as  to  the  use  of  the  book  may  not  be 
out  of  place.  Our  own  method  has  been  to  employ 
the  lessons,  for  a  considerable  time  at  least,  entirely 
in  oral  instruction,  the  teacher  pronouncing  first  the 
Latin  sentences  distinctly,  and  requiring  the  pupil  to 
give  the  corresponding  English  without  book  ;  and 
then  pronouncing  the  English  sentences,  and  requi- 
ring the  pupil  to  give  the  corresponding  Latin.  At 
the  quantities  are  marked  (in  Part  I.)  in  all  syllable? 
except  those  to  which  the  general  rules  apply,  we 
require  the  pupil  to  observe  quantity  in  his  pronun 
ciation  from  the  very  beginning,  so  that  he  learns 
prosody  by  practice  before  the  rules  are  given.  For 
the  purpose  of  review,  the  summary  of  Etymology 
(Part  III.),  which  contains,  in  short  compass,  all  that 
is  necessary  to  be  learned  by  heart,  will  be  found 
very   convenient.      After    the    student    has    passed 


PREFACE.  Vll 

through  Parts  I.  and  11. ,  he  will  find  little  difficulty 
in  committing  accurately  the  Rules  of  Syntax  (Part 
IV.),  with  most  of  which  he  will  be  already  familiar. 
The  Reading  Lessons  at  the  end  will  give  nim  easy 
practice  in  the  syntax  and  in  word-building.  For 
the  convenience  of  those  who  may  need  it,  we  have 
condensed  into  a  few  pages,  in  Appendix  I.,  all  of 
Prosody  that  is  essential  for  the  understanding  of 
hexameter  verse. 

The  preparation  of  this  book  was  originally  sug- 
gested by  our  sense  of  the  inadequacy  of  the  ordina- 
ry modes  of  instruction,  and  especially  by  the  ad- 
vantage which  we  ourselves  had  derived  from  the 
use  of  Ollendorff's  method  in  the  study  of  the  Ger- 
man language.  Finding  that  Rev.  T.  K.  Arnold 
had  prepared  a  series  of  books  on  the  same  principle, 
we  used  them  in  our  own  classes  for  some  time,  with 
a  view  to  revising  them  for  republication.  They 
were  found  unsuited  to  our  purpose  in  many  respects, 
and  we  therefore  formed  the  design  of  preparing  an 
entirely  new  series,  adapted  to  the  use  of  American 
schools.  The  first  of  these  is  now  presented  to  the 
pubhc. 

Dickinson  College,  April  7,  1846. 

*^*  In  Part  I.  the  quantity  is  marked  on  all  syllables  except  those  to 
which  the  general  rules  apply.  At  the  beginning  of  Part  II.  additional 
rules  of  quantity  are  given,  and  the  marks  ai"e  subsequently  omitted  on 
many  syllables,  in  order  to  afford  the  pupil  exercise  upon  the  rules.  In  the 
Syntax  and  Reading  Lessons  they  are  omitted  almost  entirely.  Great  pains 
have  been  taken  to  ensure  accuracy  in  tlie  marks  of  quantity,  but  we  can- 
not hope  to  have  avoided  error  entirely. 


PREFACE  TO  SECOXD  EDITION, 


In  this  edition,  a  number  of  errors  in  the  marks  ol 
qaantity,  which  had  crept  into  the  first,  are  corrected. 
We  have  also  placed  a  series  of  Examination  Ques- 
tions at  the  end  of  the  book,  which  will  add.  we  hope, 
to  its  practical  value. 

€3tHkie, 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


INTaODUCTION. 

Pag* 

^1.  Division  of  the  Letters 1 

$  2.  Syllables,  duantity,  Accent 1 

$  3.  Pronunciation  .        .        .        , 3 

i  4.  Division  of  Words •  4 

PART  L 

PARTIAL  EXHIBITION  OF  THK  PORMS  OP  WDIUDt. 

Summary  of  Essential  Points 8 

f  5.  First  Declension  of  Nouns. — First  Conjugation  of  Verbs.    (I. — V.)  10 
First  Declension  of  Nouns,  Nominative,  Vocative,  and  Genitive 

Cases  10 

First  Conjugation  of  Verbs»/n^ra7wi^«re 14 

First  Declension  of  Nouns,  Accusative  Case. — ^First  Conjuga- 
tion of  Verbs,  Transitive 17 

First  Declension  of  Nouns,  Dative  and  Ablative  Cases     .        .  19 
$  6.  Second  Declension  of  Nouns. — Secand  Conjugation  of  Verbs. 

(VI.— Vm.) 22 

Second  Declension,  Masculine 22 

Second  Declension,  Neuter. — Second  Conjugation  of  Verbs        .  26 
^7.  Adjectives  of  First  Class,  Three  Endings.     (DC.— X.)  .        .        .28 

Forms  of  Adjectives  in  us,  a,  um 28 

Some  forms  of 'Esse,  to  be ,        ,30 

$  8.  Third  and  Fourth  Conjugations  of  Verbs.     (XL)         .        .        .33 

$  9.  Passive  Verbs.     (XIL— XIH.) 38 

$  10.  Third  Declension  cf  Nouns,  Partial  Treatment.  (XTV.— XV.) .  40 
\  11.  Adjectives  of  Second  Class,  Two  Endings.  (XVI.)  .  .  .44 
$  12.  Adjectives  of  Third  Class,  One  Ending.    (XVTL)        .        .        .46 

^■[2.  Fourth  Declension  of  Nouns.     (XVm.) 48 

^\A.  Fifth  Declensimi  of  Nouns.     (XIX) 51 

5  15.  Pronouns.     (XX.— XXXL)    ........  53 

Pronoun,  Personal,  1st  Person.    Verb,  1st  Person     .        .        ,53 
Pronoun,  Personal,  2d  Person.    Verb,  2d  Person       .        .        ,5? 

Pronoun,  Personal,  3d  Person ,  61 

Pronouns,  Demonstrative .        .  63 

Pronoun,  Relative ,        .  .68 

Pronoun,  Interrogative 7f 


X  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Pronouns,  Indefinite .72 

Pronouns,  Correlative 74 

^\Q.  Numerals.     (XXXIL— XXXm.)        .        .                 .        .  77 

$  17.   Verbs  of  Third  Conjugation  in  io.     (XXXIV.)          .        .  81 

^    8.   Verbs,  Deponent.     (XXXV.)         ......  83 

\  19.  Adverbs.     (XXXVI.) 85 

\  20.  Prepositions.     (XXXVII.— XXXVIII.) 88 

\  21.  Analysis  of  Tense  formations.    (XXXIX.— XLI.)      ...    92 

PART  II. 

FULLER  EXHIBITION  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  WOKBS. 

$  1.  Additional  Rules  of  Quantity 99 

$  2.   Tenses  of  Verbs  for  Completed  Action,  Partial    Treatment. 

(XLIII.— XLVI.) 102 

Perfect  Tenses  of  E  s  s  e 102 

Perfect  Tenses  of  1st,  2d,  and  4th  Conjugations  .        .        .        .104 

Perfect  Tenses  of  3d  Conjugation 106 

^  3.  Third  Declension  of  Nmcns,  Fuller   Treatment.     (XL  VII. 

— LVII.)     .       • 110 

Irregular  Nouns 129 

Summary  of  Rules  of  Gender,  Third  Declension  ....  132 

$4.  Comparison  of  Adjectives.    (LVIII. — LX.)         ....  134 

$  5.  Comparison  of  Adverbs 140 

$6.  Supine.    (LXI.) 141 

§  7.  Tenses  of  Verbs  for  Completed  Action,  Active  Voice.    Fuller 

Treatment.     (LXII.— LXIX.) 144 

Forms  of  Perfect  Stem,  1st  Conjugation                        .        .        .  141 

Forms  of  Perfect  Stem,  2d  Conjugation                .        .    *    .        .  146 

Forms  of  Perfect  Stem,  3d  Conjugation        .....  149 

Forms  of  Perfect  Stem,  4th  Conjugation 159 

$8.  Tenses  for  Completed  Action,  Passive  Voice.     (LXX.)       .        .162 

I  9.  Participles.     (LXXI.— LXXV.)                   165 

Present  Participle  Active 165 

Futm-e  Participle  Active 168 

Perfect  Participle  Passive 170 

Ablative  Absolute 172 

^IQ.  Infinitive.     (LXXVL— LXXIX.)        .        .        .        .        .        .  176 

Forms  of  Infinitive .  176 

Accusative  with  Infinitive 178 

$11.  Gerund.     (LXXX.) 184 

1 12.  Gerundive.     (LXXXI.— LXXXII.) 187 

Gerundive  used  for  Gerund 187 

Gerundive  used  to  express  Duty  or  Necessity    ....  189 

$  13.  Imperative  Mood.     (LXXXIII.) 192 

$  14.  Sentences 194 

\  15    Conjunctions.     (LXXXIV.— LXXXV.) 195 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


XI 


Paga 

f  16.  Subjunctive  Mood.    (LXXXVI.— XCm.) 199 

Subjunctive  Present 199 

Subjunctive  Perfect 202 

Subjunctive  Imperfect    and  Pluperfect.     Conditional   Sen- 
tences        .        .        .        . 205 

Subjunctive  with  ut,  ne  (Pwrpose) 209 

Suh^xmctive  with  nt  {Consequence).    Succession  of  Tenses        .212 
Subjunctive  with  quin,  quo,  quominus.    Periphrastic  Forms  214 

Subjunctive  with  qunm 217 

Subjunctive  in  Relative  Sentences 220 

$  17.  Oratio  Obliqua.     (XCIV.)    ...  ....  223 

\  18.  Impersonal  Verbs.     (XCV.— XCVI.) 226 

$  19.  Irregular  Verbs.    (XCVIL— CI.) 230 

Posse 230 

Velle,  Nolle,  Mails 232 

.234 

236 

....  238 
241 


Perre 

Fieri,  Edere 
Ire,  duire,  Neqnire 
$  20.  Defective  Verbs.    (CII.) 


PART  in. 

SUMMARY  OF  ETTMOLOGT. 


91. 
$2. 
$3. 

$4. 
$5. 
$6. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 


10. 


Letters,  Quantity,  S^c, 

Noun     , 

Adjective 

Numerals 

Pronoun 

Verb      . 

Classes  of  Verba 

Parts  of  the  Verb 

Conjugation  . 

The  Auxiliary  E  B  s  e,  <o  ie 

Paradigms  of  Regular  Verbs 

Verbs  in  io  of  the  3d  Conjugation 

Deponent  Verbs    . 

Periphrastic  Conjugation 

Formation  of  Perfect  Stem 

Lists  of  Verbs,  with  various 

First  Conjugation 

Second  Conjugation 

Third  Conjugation 

Fourth  Conjugation 

Deponent  Verbs 

Inchoative  Verbs 
Irregular  Verbs,  Paradigmi 
D'^ferrive  Verbs    . 


Perfects  and  Supines 


247 
248 
251 

254 
255 
258 
258 
258 
259 
260 
261 
266 
266 
266 
267 


271 
270 
277 
279 
279 
289 


Xll  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Pac« 

13.  Impersonal  "Verbs .  283 

$  7.  Adverb 285 

$  8.  Preposition ,  288 

$  9.  Conjunction 289 

J 10.  Interjection 290 

PART  IV. 

SUMMARY  OF  SYNTAX. 
FART  I.      SIMPLE  SENTENCE!. 

L  Subject  and  Predicate 293 

II.  Use  of  Cases 295 

Nominative 295 

Genitive 295 

Dative 298 

Accusative • 300 

Ablative ^ 302 

UI.  Use  of  the  Indefinite  Verb    .       .      '' 306 

Infinitive 306 

Participle 307 

Gerund 308 

Gerundive 308 

Su^ne 309 

PART  II.   COMPOUND  SENTENCES. 

I.  CJo-ordinate  Sentences  .        .        . 310 

II.  Subordinate  Sentences .  310 

A.  Participial  Sentences .311 

B.  Accusative  with  Infinitive 312 

C.  Conjunctive  Sentences 313 

D.  Relative  Sentences 316 

E.  Interrogative  Sentences 318 

Oratio  Obliqua    .      ' 319 


Appendix  I.  Prosody .        .323 

Appendix  II.  Greek  Nonns         ..,,,...  326 
Appendix  III.  The  CaJendar       ........  327 

Appendix  IV.  Abbreviations 329 

Word-building 333 

Reading  Lessons •       •        .       .        .  340 

Latin-English  Vocabulary ,       .  355 

BnOLISH-LaTIN  V6CABULART       .•••••..  383 


INTRODUGT^ION.^ 


^  1.  DIVISION  0]?^.Tiffi,liETXERSr'.i  JA 

(1.)  The  letters  are  the  same  as  in  English,  with 
the  omission  of  w ;  k  Is  used  in  but  few  words,  and  y 
and  z  only  in  words  borrowed  from  the  Greek. 

(2.)  Six  are  vowels j^  viz.,  a,  e,  i,  o,  m,  ?/ ;  the  remaining 
nineteen  are  consonants,^ 

1  Sounds  formed  by  an  uninterrupted  emission  of  the  air  from  the  throat 
Called  voivels  (vo c ale s  =  sounding  letters),  because  capable  of  being 
sounded  by  themselves. 

'  Sounds  formed  by  interTnipting  the  emission  of  air  from  the  throat. 
Called  consmianta  (con-son are  =  to  sound  together),  because  incaimble 
of  being  sounded  by  themselves. 

(3.)  The  consonants  are  divided  into 
(a)  Liquids,'  Z,  m,  n,  r; 
(6)  Spirants,^  ^,  5,  J  ; 

(c)  Mutes,'  i,  c,  c?,/,  g,  Tc^  p^  q^  t,  v ; 

3  The  Liquids  are  formed  by  a  partial  interruption  of  the  voice  ;  the  Spir 
rants  chiefly  by  the  breath ;  and  the  Mutes  by  a  more  complete  interrup- 
tion of  the  passage  of  the  air  from  the  tlu-oat.  //is  regarded,  indeed,  sim- 
ply as  an  aspiration,  though  in  many  words  it  fills  the  place  of  a  conso- 
nant. 

[d)  Double  consonants,*  .r,  z. 

*  X'ls  compounded  of  c  s,  g  s,  and  z  (occurring  only  in  Greek  words)  of  d  s. 

(4.)  The  union  of  two  vowels  into  one  syllable  forms 
a  diphthong.  These  are^  in  Latin,  a  u,  e  u,  a  e,  o  e  (gen- 
erally written  cb,  «),  and,  in  a  few  words,  ei,  oi,  ui. 

§  2.  SYLLABLES,  QUANTITY,  ACCENT. 

(5.)  Every  word  contains  as  many  syllables  as  vow- 
els ;  e.  ^.,  m  i  1  e  s,  a  soldier,  is  not  pronounced  in  one  syl- 
lable, as  the  English  word  miles,  hnX  in  two,  mi-les. 

(6.)  The  quantity  of  syllables  (that  is,  their  length, 

*  This  Introduction  may  be  omitted  by  very  young  pupils  in  their  first 
Btudy  of  the  work;  but  the  references  to  it  in  the  subsequent  lessooji 
•hoaJd  be  carefully  attended  to. 


2  QUANTITY. ACCENT. 

or  shortness)  depends  upon  that  of  the  vowels  which 
they  contain.  The  dash  ("")  placed  over  a  vowel  de- 
notes that  it  iR  Zon^,;  .t;J[ie;,  semicircle  (^),  that  it  is  short. 
A  v(?wfc/l  that  'jtiEty Vbfe  .i^ed  either  as  long  or  short  is 
marked  (p)^  and  is  Sfti4  tb'he  common. 
•'*  ■(7;)  'JFlie  'following' r'ttles  for  the  quantity  of  sylla- 
bles must  be  carefully  observed: 

(a)  All  diphthongs  are  long ;  e.  g.,  mens-£e,  tables; 
au-rum,  gold. 

{b)  A  vowel  followed  by  another  vowel  is  sho7^t ; 
e.  g.9  Deus,  God. 

This  rule  applies,  even  though  h  intervene  between  the  two  vowels^  as 
ft  is  not  regarded  as  a  consonant  (3,  b,  n.  3) ;  e.  g.,  triho,  veho. 

(c)  A  vowel  followed  by  two  consonants,  or  a  doub- 
le one  (3,  d)y  is  long  by  position  ;  e.  g.,  in  am  ant,  the 
a  before  n  t  is  long  by  position. 

I^*  [Every  syllable  to  which  none  of  these  three  rules  is  applicable  will  b« 
marked  with  j.ts  proper  quantity  in  the  following  pages,  until  other  rules  are  given.] 

(8.)  A  word  of  but  one  syllable  is  called  a  Monosyl- 
lable ;  of  two,  a  Dissyllable ;  of  more  than  two,  a  Pol- 
y syllable.  Thus,  1  e  x  is  a  monosyllable  ;  1  e  g  i  s,  a  dis- 
syllable; in  col  as,  a  polysyllable. 

(9.)  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is  called  the  ulti- 
mate ;  the  next  to  the  last,  the  penult ;  the  second  from 
the  last,  the  antepenult.  Thus,  in  the  word  in  col  as, 
the  syllable  las  is  the  ultimate,  c6,  the  penult,  and  in 
the  antepenult. 

(10.)  The  accent  of  a  syllable  is  a  stress  or  eleva- 
tion of  the  voice  in  pronouncing  it.  Observe  the  fol- 
lowing rules : 

{a)  Every  dissyllable  is  accented  on  the  penult ;  e, 
g  ,  bonus,  pono. 

(6)  Every  polysyllable  is  accented, 

1.  On  the  penultt  when  the  penult  is  long;  e.  g,, 
§,mare. 


PRONUNCIATION.  3 

2.  On  the  antepenult,  when  the  penult  is  short; 
e.g.,  animus. 

^  3.  PRONUNCIATION. 

(11.)  [Almost  every-modem  nation  has  its  own  way  of  pfronouncing  Lafc* 
in.  But  as  the  vowels  have  nearly  the  same  sounds  in  all  the  different 
coimtries  of  Continental  Europe,  there  is  something  approaching  to  uni- 
formity  in  their  pronunciation;  the  English,  however,  give  peculiar 
sounds  to  some  of  the  vowels,  and  they  pronoimce  Latin,  therefore,  unlike 
all  the  rest  of  the  world.  In  this  country  two  methods  prevail,  which,  for 
convenience'  sake,  may  be  called  the  Continental  and  the  English.  Wa 
give  them  both,  stating,  at  the  same  time,  our  decided  preference  for  the 
first,  both  on  the  score  of  consistency  and  convenience.  In  both  methods 
tUe  consonants  are  pronounced  nearly  as  in  English.] 

(a)   The  Continental  Method. 

Table  of  Vowel  Sounds. 

Short  a,  as  in  hat.  Long  i,  as  in  machine. 

Long  a,  as  in  father.  Short  5,  as  in  not. 

Short  e,  as  in  net.  Long  6,  as  in  no. 

Long  e,  as  in  there.  Short  u,  as  in  tub. 

Short  I,  as  in  sit.  Long  u,  as  in  full. 

Diphthongs, 

SB  or  OB,  as  e  in  there. 

au,  as  ou  in  our. 

eu,  as  eu  in  feud. 

ei  (rarely  occurring),  as  i  in  nice. 

{b)  The  English  Method. 
The  vowels  have  the  English  long  or  short  sounds. 
Exc.  A  final,  in  words  of  more  than  one  syllable, 
has  a  broad  sound  ;  as,  fama  (fame-ah). 

Monosyllables, 

In  monosyllables,  if  the  vowel  be  the  last  letter,  it 
has  the  long  sound ;  as  me,  do ;  if  any  other  letter,  the 
short  sound  ;  as  d^  d&. 


4  DIVISION  or  WORDS. 

Dissyllables  and  Polysyllables. 

(1.)  The  vowel  of  an  accented  penult  has  the  long 
sound, 

(a)  Before  another  vowel ;  as,  D  e  us. 

(b)  Before  a  single  consonant;   as,  J 6 vis. 
It  has  the  shoi't  sound, 

(a)  Before  two  consonants,  or  a  double  consonant ; 
as,  mundus,  rexit. 

(2.)  The  vowel  of  an  accented  antepenult  has  the 
short  sound  ;  as,  r  e  g  ibus. 

(3.)  An  accented  vowel  before  a  mute  and  liquid 
has  usually  the  long  sound ;  as,  s  a  era. 

^  4.  DIVISION  OF  WORDS. 

(12.)  I.  Words  are  divided,  according  to  their  5?^- 
nijlcation,  into  eight  classes,  called  Parts  of  Speech, 
viz..  Noun,  Adjective,  Pronoun,  Verb,  Adverb,  Prep- 
osition, Conjunction,  Interjection. 

(13.)  The  Noun  is  the  name  of  an  object  (person, 
or  thing)  ;  e.  g.,  John,  man,  house. 

Nouns  are  divided  into, 

(a)  'Proper,  denoting  individual ob]ects;  e.g.,  John, 
CcBsar,  Rome. 

(6)  Common,  denoting  one  or  more  of  a  class  of 
objects  ;  e.  g.,  man^  house,  horses. 

(c)  Abstract,  denoting  a  quality;  e.  g.,  goodness, 
haste,  virtue. 

(14.)  The  Adjective  expresses  a  quality  or  property 
belonging'  to  an  object ;  e.  g.,  good,  small ;  as,  a  good 
boy,  a  small  house. 

(15.)  The  Pronoun  is  a  substitute  for  the  noun;  e. 
g.,  he,  she,  it,  are  substitutes  for  man,  woman,  book. 

(16.)  The  Verb  declares  something  of  a  person  or 
thing. 


DIVISION  OF  WORDS.  %     O 

E.  g.,  the  boy  dances ;  the  boy  sleeps ;  the  boy  is  good.     (In  this 

last  case  tlie  quality  "  good"  is  affirmed  of  "  boy,"  by  means  of 

the  verb  is.) 

S 
^^  Participles,  Gerunds,  and  Supines  are  words  partaking  in  the 

meaniyig  of  the  verb,  and  in  ih.e  form  of  the  noun. 

(17.)  The  Adverb  qualifies  the  meaning  of  a  verb, 
adjective,  or  other  adverb  ;  e.  g.,  the  boy  learns  rapid- 
ly ;  the  boy  is  remarkably  faithful ;  the  boy  learns  very 
rapidly. 

(18.)  Prepositions  express  the  relations  of  objects 
simply  ;  e.  g.^from  me  ;  in  the  house. 

(19.)  Conjunctions  connect  words  and  sentences ; 
e.  g.f  Thomas  and  John  went  to  town ;  Thomas  went, 
but  John  remained. 

(20.)  Interjections  are  merely  signs  of  emotion ;  e. 
g.f  alas! 

(21.)  11.  Words  are  divided,  according  to  their 
form,  into, 

(1)  Four  inflected,  viz..  Noun,  Adjective,  Pronoun, 
Verb. 

(2)  Four  uninflectedf  viz..  Adverb,  Preposition,  Con- 
junction, Interjection. 

Eem.  Inflection  is  the  variation  of  a  word  to  express  different  rela- 
tions ;  e.  g.,  boy,  boys,  the  boy's  hat ;  I  love,  I  am  \oved,  &c.  The  in- 
flection of  Nouns  is  called  Declension ;  of  Verbs,  Conjugation.  The 
Latin  language  makes  much  more  use  of  inflection  than  the  English. 

(22.)  III.  Words  are  divided,  according  to  their/or- 
mation,  into, 

(1)  Derivative f  i.  e.,  derived  from  other  words. 

(2)  Primitive^  i.  e.,  not  derived  from  other  words. 

E.  g.,  manly,  manlwod,  are  derivatives  from  the  primitive  man. 

(3)  Compound,  i.  e.,  made  up  by  the  union  of  two 
or  more  w^ords. 

(4.)  Simple,  i.  e.,  not  so  made  up. 

E.  g.,  man-kind  is  a  compound,  made  up  of  the  two  simple  word* 
vtan  and  kind. 

A  2 


PARI     1. 


PARTIAL  EXHIBITION  OF  THE  FORMS  OF  WORDS, 


TENSES  OF  VERBS  FOR  INCOMPLETE  ACTION 


SUMMARY. 


r 


[The  rules  and  statements  on  this  page  and  the  following  are  to  be 
thoroughly  learned,  as  they  must  be  applied  constantly.] 

(23.)  Of  the  Letters. 

(1)  Six  are  vowels,  a,  c,  2,  o,  «,  y ; 

(2)  Four  liquids,  I,  m,  n,  r ; 

(3)  Three  c-sounds,  c,  g,  q ; 

(4)  Two  ^-sounds,  6,  p  ; 

(5)  Two  ^-sounds,  d,  t ; 

(6)  Two  double  consonants,  .r,  z. 

(7)  The  diphthongs  are  au,  eu,  ae,oe  (and  rarely  cf,  oi, 
ui). 

(24.)  General  Rules  of  Quantity. 

(1)  A  vowel  before  another  is  sJiort ;  e.  g.,  v?  a. 

(2)  A  vowel  before  two  consonants,  or  a  double  one,  is 
long  hy  j)osition  ;  e.  g.,  am  a  nt. 

[As  a  mute  followed  by  a  liquid  causes  some  exceptions  to  this 
rule,  we  shall  mark  the  quantity,  in  that  case,  doubtful ;  thus, 
I  gi-i.] 

(3)  All  diphthongs  are  long  ;  e.  g.,  mens  ss,  au-rum. 

[In  the  following  pages  of  Part  I.,  the  quantity  of  all  syllables  is 
marked,  except  those  which  are  covered  by  the  above  rules.] 


(25.) 


General  Rules  of  Gender. 


[In  English,  gender  is  determined  by  sex  alone ;  e.  g.,  man  is  mas- 
culine, woman  feminine.  But  in  Latin,  gender  is  determined  partly  by 
the  meaning  of  nouns,  and  partly  by  their  endings.  The  general  rules 
here  given  from  the  meanings  apply  to  nouns  of  all  the  declensions.] 


SUMMARY.  9 

I.  Masculines:  'Nn.mes  of  male  beings  ;  of  most  rivers^ 
winds,  mountains,  months,  and  nations. 

II.  Feminizes:  'Namesof female  beings,  cities,  countries, 
trees,  plants,  and  islands. 

III.  Neuters  :  All  indeclinable  words. 

IV.  Common  :  Such  as  have  but  one  form  for  masculine 

and  feminine;  e.  g.,exu  1,  an  exile  (male  or  female). 
[These  four  rules  are  contained  in  the  following  verses.] 

(25.  a.)  Males,  rivers,  winds,  and  mountains  most  we  find 
With  months  and  nations  Masculine  declined ; 
"But  females,  cities,  countries,  trees  we  name, 
As  Feminine  ;  most  islands,  too,  the  same. 
Common  are  such  as  both  the  genders  take, 
And  Neuter  all  words  undeclined  we  make. 

[There  are  many  exceptions  from  these  rules,  which  must  be  learned 
by  observation.] 

Explanation  of  Marks  and  Abbreviations. 
The  mark  ^^  ipdicates  a  short  vowel. 
"        "      —  indicates  a  long  vowel. 
"       *'      =  indicates  that  two  words  or  phrases  are  equiv- 

alent  to  each  other. 
"        "      -\-  between  two  words  shows  that  they  are  com- 
pounded together. 
e.  g.  means, /or  example  (exempli  gi-atia). 
Passages  in  brackets  [  J  are  not  meant  to  be  committed  to 
memoiy. 

In  the  Exercises,  words  in  parentheses  (  )  are  not  meant 
to  be  translated. 

The  References  are  made  to  paragraphs,  not  to  pages. 
In  a  reference,  R.  means  Remark  ;  N.  means  foot-note. 


§  5. 

FIRST  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS.— FIRST  CON 
JUGATION  OF  VERBS.     (I.— V.) 


LESSON  L                          '     ^ 

First  Declension  of  Nouns. — Nominative,  Vocative,  and 

Genitive  Cases, 

(26.)     Examples. 

{a)  Shade  or  shadow. 

Umbra. 

(&)  Of  the  shade. 

Umbrae. 

(c)    The  wood, 

Sylva. 

\d)  Of  the  wood. 

Sylva. 

(27.)  The  Latin  has  no  article.  Umbra  maybe  a 
shade,  or  the  shade,  according  to  its  connection  with 
other  words. 

(28.)  The  words  umbra  and  sylva  are  names  of 
things  belonging  to  certain  classes,  and  are,  therefore, 
common  nouns  (13,  h), 

(29.)  In  English,  certain  words  (of,  with,  by,  &c.) 
are  generally  placed  before  nouns,  to  express  their  re- 
lations to  other  words  ;  e.  g.,  of  the  wood,  &c. ;  but  in 
Latin  these  relations  are  commonly  indicated  by  dif- 
ferent endings  of  the  noun  (21,  (2),R.) ;  e.  g.,  sylv-a, 
the  wood;  sylv-se,  of  the  wood. 

(30.)  That  part  of  the  noun  to  which  the  ending  is 
added  is  called  the  stem;  e.  ^.,  sylv-  is  the  stem  of 
sylv-a;  terr-  is  the  stem  of  terr-a,  the  earth. 

(31.)  There  are  in  Latin  six  endings,  which,  added 
to  the  stem,  form  six  cases,  the  Nominative,  Genitive, 
Dative,  Accusative,  Vocative,  Ablative. 

(32.)  And  as  we  may  speak  of  objects  as  one  or 
moret  there  are  two  numbers,  the  singular  and  plural^ 


FIRST  DECLENSION. 


11 


distinguished  by  their  endings  ;  e.  g.,  umbra,  the  shad' 
ow ;  umbr  £§,  the  shadows.      A 

(33.)  In  this  lesson  we  shall  use  but  three  cases,  the 
nominative,  vocative,  and  genitive. 

(«)  The  nominative  answers  to  the  question  who  ? 
or  what  ?  and  gives  the  simple  name  of  the  thing  spok- 
en of.  In  the  example  (26,  a),  umb r a,  shade,  is  in  the 
nominative. 

(6)  The  same  form  of  the  noun,  when  spoken  to,  is 
called  the  vocative  ;  e.  g.,  umbra,  shade;  O  shade  ! 

(c)  The  genitive  expresses,  in  general,  those  rela- 
tions which  are  expressed  in  English  by  the  possessive 
case,  or  by  the  preposition  of,  and  answers  to  the  ques- 
tion whose?  of  whom?  of  v)hat?  e.  g.,  umbra,  the 
shade  (of  what  ?),  s y  1  v se  (of  the  wood).  Here  s y  1  v se 
is  in  the  genitive. 

(34.)  There  are  five  declensions  of  nouns,  distin- 
guished from  each  other  by  the  endings  of  the  geni- 
tive singular.  In  this  lesson  we  shall  use  only  nouns 
of  the 

FIRST  DECLENSION. 

Case-Endings  and  Paradigm. — Nominative  and  GeU" 


itive. 

ENDINGS. 


(35.)  (a) 


(6)  By  adding  these  endings  to  the  stem  sylv-,  we 
get  the  following 

PARTIAL    PARADIGM. 


Norn,  and  Voc. 
Gen. 

Sing.  • 

a 

Plur, 
ffi 

ai-um. 

Nom.  and  Voc. 
Gen. 


Sing. 

sylv-a,  the  wood ;  O  wood : 
sylv-a?,  of  the  nood. 


sylv-BB,  the  woods ;  O  woods  ! 
sylv-arum,  of  the  woods. 


(36.)  (a)  Thus,  nouns  of  the  first  declension  have  the  nom. 
and  voc.  ending  ft  {<ihort),  and  the  gen.  ending  ae  {long^  24,  3). 


12  FIRST  DJ3CLENSI0N. 

(6)  The  penult  a  of  the  gen.  pi.  is  long,     (c)  They  are  of  the 
feminine  gender,  except  the  names  of  men  or  male  beings,  or 
rivers:  thus,  sy  Iv-a  is  fern.;  but  naut-ti,  a  sailor,  poet-a, . 
npoet,  and  the  like,  are  masc. 

[A  few  Greek  nouns  of  this  declension  end  in  e  fern.,  and  as,  es,  masc. 
See  Appendix.] 

(37.)  EXERCISE. 

[In  the  Vocabularies,  the  nom.  case  is  always  given,  with  the  genitive 
endi?ig-  subjoined.] " 

I.  Vocabulary. 

Queen,  reglna,  se. 
Crown,  corona,  ra. 
PFiVi"",  ala,  SB. 
Dove,  columba,  bb. 
Feather,  pluma,  ae. 
Daughter,  filia,  se. 
A  Celt,  Celta,  ib. 
Farmer,  agricola,  eb.  (m.) 
Rose,  rosa,  ob. 
Maid-servant,  ancilla,  ae. 

II.  Translate  into  Latin. 

Of  a  crown. — Of  a  queen. — O  Galba ! — Of  crowns. — Of  a 
feather.  —  Of  eagles. — Of  the  Celt.  —  Wings.  —  Roses. — Of 
doves. — Of  injm-ies. — Of  a  daughter. — O  daughter! — Of  tlie 
province. — Languages.  —  Provinces. — Belgians. — Of  the  prov- 
inces.— Of  the  maid-servant. — O  maid-servant ! — The  farmers. 
— O  farmer! — Of  memory.  —  O  Belgian!  —  Of  Gaul. — The 
eagles.  y 

III.  Answer  the  questions  in  the  foot-note.* 

[A  few  questions  are  subjoine^in  tlie  foot-notes,  merely  as  specimens  to 
the  fii'st  lessons.] 


Galba,  Galba,  03.  (m.) 
Flight,  fi'iga,  CB. 
Province,  provincia,  ae. 
Memory,  recollection,  mSmoriS, 
Gaul,  Gallia,  se. 
Eagle,  aquila,  se. 
A  Belgian,  Belga,  ae. 
Injury,  injixiia,  ae. 
Language,  lingua,  ae. 


LESSON  II. 
First  Declension  of  Nouns. — Nominative,  Yocative,an4 
Genitive  Cases. 
(38.)     Exampks. 
(a)  The  queen's  crown.  j  CoronS,  regina?. 

*  What  is  the  quantity  of  u  in  umbra  ?  ($24,  2.)  Of  as  in  sylv-te  ?  (24,  .?.) 
Of  u  in  columba?  (-24,  2.)  Of  the  penult  (9)  in  fTha  7  (24,  1.)  Ofi  in 
lingTiS?     Ofi  in  ancilla?  (24,  2.) 


FIRST  DECLENSION. 


13 


(a)  Rule  of  Position.— The  genitive  (when  uncmph.itic) 
stands  after  the  noun  on  which  it  depends;  e.  g.,  re- 
gin  ee  in  (a)  stands  after  corona. 
(6)  The  ^Mec7i'5  crown  (i. e.,  I  Reginss  corona. 
not  the  king's).  j 

(&)  Rule  of  Position.  —  The   genitive   (when  emphatic) 
stands  before  the  noun  on  which  it  depends  ;  e.  g.^  in  {h) 
r  e  g  i  n  ae  stands  before  corona. 
[Words  in  the  exercises  considered  emphatic  are  in  italics.] 

(39.)  EXERCISE. 

I.   Translate  into  English, 


Ala  columbsB. 
Pluma  aquilse. 
O  regina  (voc). 
Filia  agricolae. 
Regina  filia. 
Columbee  plumd,. 


Rosa  ancillse. 
Galbce  f  uga. 
Provincia  Gallice. 
Memoria  fugae. 
6  filia! 
Aquildrum  f  uga. 


Fuga  Belgarum. 
Plumae  aquilarum. 
Injuridrum  memorid. 
Lingua  Celtariim. 
Filise  reginariira. 
Lingua  Belgarum. 


II.  Answer  the  questions  in  the  foot-note, 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 


The  queen's  dove. 
The  dinner's  eagle. 
The  flight  of  doves. 
The  girVs  rose. 
The  queen's  rose. 
The  flight  of  the  Celts. 
The  winffs  of  the  doves. 


The  wings  of  eagles. 

O  eagle. 

Galba's  daughter. 

The  shades  of  the  woods. 

The  memorj'  of  the  queen. 

The  girl's  dove. 

The  lanc^uage  of  the  province. 


The  recollection  of  an  injury.    O  Belgians  ! 

O  Celts !  The  flight  of  the  queen. 


*  1.  What  is  the  quantity  of  the  ultimate  (9)  of  a  n  c  i  1 1  re  ?  Why  ?  [24, 
3.)  Of  its  penult?  (9.)  Why?  (24,2.)  Of  the  penult  of  Gallice  ?  Why? 
(24.  1.) 

2.  What  is  the  quantity  of  a  in  injuri  arum?  {2G,b.)  in  memoria? 
(Stf,  a.) 

?.  What  is  the  stem  ofcolumba,  ala,  rosa?  &c.  (30.) 

4.  What  is  the  gender  of  r  o  s  ft,  a  1  a,  f  u  g  a  ?  &c.  (36,  c.)  What  is  the 
gender  of  G  alb  a,  agri col  a?  (25,  a.) 

5.  What  is  the  case  of  rosa,  provincioe,  iujuriarum,  memo- 
ria?    What  their  number  ? 

fi.  How  many  cases  have  Latin  nouns?  (31.)     What  are  they?  (31.) 


B 


14  FIRST  DECLENSION. 

LESSON  III. 
First  Declension  of  Nouns. — Nominative  and  Genitive 
Cases. — First  Conjugation  of  Verbs. — Intransitives. 
(40.)     Examples. 


To  fly, 

To  dance., 
(a)  The  eagle  flies, 
(6)   Tlie  girl  dances, 


volare. 
saltarg. 
aquila  voldt. 
piiella  saltat. 


(41.)  SUBJECT    AND    PREDICATE. 

{a.)  Every  sentence  (e.  g.y  the  eagle  flies)  consists 
of  two  parts : 

1.  The  subject,  i.  e.,  that  of  which  something  is  de- 
clared (a  noun,  or  some  word  used  instead  of  a  noun) ; 
e.  g.,  eagle. 

2.  The  predicate,  i.  e.,  that  which  is  declared  of 
the  subject  (generally  a  verb) ;  e.  g.,  flies. 

Rem.  The  predicate  is  frequently  an  adjective  or  participle  coiinected 
with  the  subject  by  the  verb  is  ;  e.  g.,  the  rose  is  sweet. 

(6.)  The  verb  in  the  predicate  agrees  with  the  sub- 
ject in  number  and  person;  e.  g.,the  eagle  flies:  here 
flies  is  in  the  third  person  singular,  to  agree  with  eagle. 


(42.)  Active  Verbs  are  those  which  express  activi 
ty ;  e.  g.,  the  eagle ^ze5,  the  boy  dances.    Active  verbs 
are  either 

{a)  Transitive,  i.  e.,  such  as  require  an  object  to 
complete  their  meaning  ;  e.  g.,  the  boy  killed  (whom  ? 
or  what?)  the  squirrel.  Here  M/ec?  is  a  transitive  verb. 

{b)  Intransitive,  i.  e.,  such  as  do  not  require  an  ob- 
ject; e.  g.,  the  birds  ^y;  the  boy  dances. 

[All  the  verbs  used  in  this  lesson  are  intransitives.] 

(43.)  (a)  The  infinitive  form  of  a  verb  expresses 
its  action  indefinitely,  without  reference  to  person  or 
time  ;  e.  g.,  to  dance,  to  plough. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS.  15 

(b)  The  indicative  mood  of  a  verb  expresses  its 
action  definitely ,  as  a  fact  or  question  ;  e.  g.^  he  ploughs. 
Does  he  dance? 

[The  imperative  and  subjunctive  moods  are  treated  of  here- 
after.] 

(44.)  Tenses. 

{a)  The  present  tense  expresses  incomplete  action 
in  present  time  ;  e.  g.^  I  am  ploughing,  I  plough. 

(6)  The  imperfect  tense  expresses  incomplete  ac- 
tion in  past  time  ;  e.  g.,  I  was  ploughing,  I  ploughed, 

(c)  The  future  tense  expresses  incomplete  action  in 
future  time  ;  e.  g.,  I  shall  be  ploughing,  I  shall  plough. 

[Rem.  As  these  three  forms  all  express  imperfect  or  incomplete  action, 
they  should  be  called  Present  Imperfect,  Past  Imperfect,  Future  Im- 
peifect.  But  as  the  present  names  are  fixed  by  almost  universal 
usage,  we  retain  tliem ;  advising  the  student  to  fix  distinctly  in  his 
mind  the  principle  that  these  forms  properly  express  action  as  con- 
tinuing  or  incomplete.  The  tense-forms  for  completed  action  will  be 
given  hereafter.] 

(45.)  Conjugations. 

{a)  In  Latin,  the  different  moods,  tenses,  numbers, 
and  persons  of  verbs  are  expressed  by  various  end- 
ings ;  and  the  affixing  of  these  to  the  proper  stem  of 
the  verb  is  called  conjugation.     (21,  Rem.) 

(6)  There  are  four  conjugations  of  verbs,  distin- 
guished by  their  infinitive- endings, 

(c)  The  infinitive-ending  of  the  j^r5^  conjugation  is 
are  (along)  ;  e.g.,  v6l-are,  to  fly  ;  ar-are,  to  plough, 

{d)  To  find  the  stem  of  any  verb,  strike  off  the  in- 
finitive-ending;  e.  g.,  vol-are,  stem  vol-;  ar-are, 
stem  ar-.  To  form  any  mood,  tense,  &c.,  of  a  verb, 
affix  the  proper  ending  to  the  stem  thus  found. 


16 


FIRST  CONJUGATION. mTRANSITIVES. 


(46.) 


SOME  ENDINGS  OF  THE  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


1 

INFINITIVE,  are. 

i| 

j                                                                                 IKDICATIVE.                                                                                  II 

3d  Sing. 
3d  Plural. 

Pre^erit. 

at. 
ant. 

Imperfect 

abat. 
abaiit. 

Future. 

abit.      . 
abunt. 

(47.)  By  affixing  these  endings  to  the  stem  v  6 1- 
we  get  the  following 


PARTIAL  PARADIGM. 


INFINITIVE,  vol-are,  to  fly. 


INDICATIVE. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Present. 

v61-at,  he,  she, 

it  fiies. 
vol-ant,      they 

fiy- 


Iniperfett. 

vol-iibat,  he,   she,  it 

was  Jiyin^. 
vol-abant,  tin 

Jlyirii 


hey  were 


Future. 

vol- abit,  he,  she,  it 

will  fiy. 
vol-abuiit,  they  vnll 

fiy- 


Rem.  In  Latin  we  need  not  use  the  personal  pronouns  he,  she,  it,  or 
they,  with  the  verb,  as  in  English,  because  the  person-endings  t  and 
n  I  indicate  the  person  sufficiently.* 
(48.)  EXERCISE. 

I.   Vocabulary, 


Girl,  puella,  oe. 
Forces,  c6pife,t  arum  (pi.). 
Sailor,  nauta,  ts  (m.). 
A  Belgian,  Belga,  ae. 
To  hasten,  festln-are.   _; 
To  watch,  vigil-are. 


Galha,  Galba,  ae. 

To  fiy,  vol-are. 

To  dance,  salt-ar^. 

To  cry  out,  exclam-are. 

To  sup,  coen-arp. 

To  walk,  ambul-arft. 


II.  Example. 

The  eagle  fiies.  \  A  qui  la  volat. 
Rule  of  Position. — The  subject  nominative  generally  pre- 
cedes the  verb;    e.  g.,  in  the  above  example,  aquilS. 
precedes  volat. 

[In  the  above  example,  which  word  is  the  subject?  Why?  (41,  a,  1.) 
Which  the  predicate?  Why?  (41,  a,  2.)  How  does  vulat  agree  with 
aquila?     Why?  {41,  b.]] 

III.  Translate  into  English, 

Columbse  volant. — Ancilla  saltat. — Puellae  exclamant. — Re- 
gina  ccenabat. — Puella  ambulabat. — Copia?  festinant. —  \qui- 
lae  volabant. — Galba  festinabit. — Regina  saltat. — Nautce  vigi- 
labant. — Filia   reglnas   saltabit. — Belgse  festinant. — Filia  Gal- 

*  But  when  a  new  subject  is  introduced,  or  emphasis  is  required,  the 
personal  pronoun  must  be  used  in  Latin. 

t  Copia,  in  the  singular,  means  abundance;  in  the  plural, /orc«» 


•  FIBST  CONJUGATION. TRANSITIVES.  17 

bae  exclamat. — Puellae  ambulabant. — Copise  Belgarfim  festina 
bunt.— Saltabant. — Ambulabant. — Coenabunt. — Nauta  ambula-i 
bit. — Vigilabunt. — Nautse  saltant. — Agricola  coenabit. 

IV.  Answer  the  questions  in  the  foot-note** 

V.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  dove  flies. — The  gu-1  walks. — The  maid-servant  hastens. 
— The  sailors  dance. — The  queen's  maid-servant  cries  out.— The 
farmer  was  supping. — The  queen  will  sup. — The  sailor  was 
watching. — The  farmer's  daughter  will  dance. — The  girl's  dove 
will  fly. — The  queen's  maid-servant  will  Avalk. — She  was  hast- 
ening.— They  were  watching. — He  (or  she)  was  supping. — 
The  eagles  were  flying. — Galba  was  hastening. — The  forces  of 
the  Belgians  will  hasten. — Eagles  will  fly. — The  sailors  were 
crying  out. — The  queen  was  walking. 


LESSON  IV. 
First  Declension  of  Nouns,  Accusative  Case. — First 
Conjugation  of  Verbsj  Transitives. 
(49.)  To  love, 


Queen, 
Daughter, 
(a)     The    queen    loves    her 
dauprhter. 


am-are. 

re  gin  a. 

filia. 

Regina      filiamdm&t. 

The  queen  her-daughter  loves. 

Rem.  Tho  possessives,  his,  her,  &c.,  are  not  expressed  in  Latin,  except 
for  the  sake  of  perspicuity  or  emphasis. 

(50.)  (a)  It  has  been  stated  (41)  that  every  sentence 
consists  of  two  parts,  subject  and  predicate;  so  the 
Enghsh  sentence  (49, «)  contains  the  subject,  queen,Sind 
the  predicate,  loves.     But  this  predicate  is  limited  by 

*  What  is  the  quantity  of  the  ultimate  of  Columbts  ?  Why  ?  (24,  3.)  Of 
the  penult?  Why?  (24,2.)  Oi' the  nhimate  a  of  puella?  (36,a.)  Of  the  pe- 
nult? (24,2.)  Why?  Of  the  anteijenult  ?  Why?  (24,1.)  What  kind  of 
action  does  volant  express  ?  (44,  a.)  In  what  time  ?  What  kind  does  am- 
hnldhat  ?  (44,  h.)  In  what  time  ?  In  what  tenses  may  incomplete  action 
be  expressed?  (Pres.,  past,  and  fut.)  'Whtatin  the  siem  of  volant?  Ofex- 
cldmant  1  Of  cm)iabant  1  [The  stem  may  be  found  by  striking  off  any 
tense-ending.]  Why  can  the  personal  pronoun  be  omitted  in  Latin  ?  (47, 
Rem.)    When  must  it  be  used  ?     (47,  Rem.,  N.) 

B2 


18  OBJECT  ACCUSATIVE.  * 

the  Word  daughter,  which  is  called  the  direct  object  of 
the  verb.     So,  in  the  Latin  sentence  (49,  a),  we  have, 

Subject.  Direct  object.  Predicate. 

Regina.  filiam.  amat. 

(b)  A  verb  thus  taking  an  object  is  called  a  Trans- 
itive verb  (42,  a),  and  its  direct  object  is  said  to  be 
in  the  Objective  case  in  English  (e.  ^.,  daughter),  and 
in  the  Accusative  case  in  Latin  (e.  g.,  filiam).  We 
have  thus  the  following : 
(51.)  Rules  of  Syntax, 

(a)  The  Accusative  is  the  case  of  the  direct  object, 
{b)  Transitive  verbs  govern  the  accusative. 
(52.)  The  accusative-endings  of  the  first  declension  are, 
Sing,  am;  e.  g.,  fili-am,  regin-am,  daughter,  queen, 
Plur.  as ;  €.  g.,  fiK-as,  regin-as,  daughters,  queens. 

(53.)  EXERCISE.  * 

L  Vocabulary. 

To  take  possession  of;  1  QccuparS 
or,  to  seize,  J 


Island,  insula,  83. 

To  call,  vocare. 

To  (prep.),  ad.  (with  accus.) 

Poet,  poeta,  se. 

To  praise,  laudard. 

To  love,  amare. 

Earth,  terra,  ae. 


Moon,  luna,  35. 

To  delight,  delectare. 

Medicine,  mediclna,  oe. 

To  prepare,  parare. 

Shadeor)^^.^^^ 

Shadow,    > 

To  obscure,  obscurare. 

To  arm,  armare. 

Through  (prep.),  per  (with  ace). 

II.  Example. 

The  poet  praises  the  queen,  j  Poeta  reginamlaudat. 

Rule  of  Position. — The  object  accusative  stands  before  the 
ti'ansitive  verb ;  e.  g.,  in  the  above  example,  the  object 
reginam  stands  before  the  transitive  verb  laud  at. 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Luna  nautas  delectat. — Agricola  f ilias  amat. — Ancillae  medi- 
cinam  parant. — Umbra  terree  (33,  c)  lunam  obscurat. — Nautas 
reginam  laudant. — Galba  copias  armabat. — Umbra  sylvarum 
agricolas  delectat. — Galba  sylvas  occiipat. — Copise  Belgarum 
sylvas  occupabant. — Columbae  per  sylvas  volabant. — Regin^ 
ancillas  voc^t. — Ancillae  reginam  amant. — Agricola  filiam  voca- 


WEST  DECLENSION. DATIVE  AND  ABLATIVE.  19 

bat. — Regina  poetam  laudabit. — Rosae  ancillas  delectant. — Co- 
pias  armabunt  (47,  Rem.). — Sylvas  occiipabunt  (47  Rem.). 

IV.  Answer  the  questions  in  the  foot-note  * 

V.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  moon  delights  the  fai-mer. — The /armer's  daughter  (38, 6) 
prepares  the  medicine. — The  eagle's  feathers  delight  the  queen. 
• — The  Belgians  arm  (their)  forces. — The  shade  of  the  wood  de- 
lights the  poet. — Galba  will  take  possession  of  the  wood. — 
(They)  walk  through  the  woods. — (They)  take  possession  of  the 
island. — The  farmer  loves  (his)  daughter. — The  farmer's  daugh- 
ter praises  the  poet. — The  queen  will  call  tlie  maid-servants. — ■ 
The  queen  loves  (her)  maid-servants. — The  shadow  of  the 
earth  will  obscure  the  moon. — The  poet  will  praise  the  sailors. 


LESSON  V. 

First  Declension. — Dative  and  Ablative  Cases, 

(54.)  The  dative  case  of  nouns  expresses  the  object 

to  or  for  which  any  thing  is  done  ;  e.  g.,  the  man  gives 

{to)  the  hoy  a  book.     Here  hoy  is  in  the  dative  case. 

Rem.  The  accusative  case,  hook,  is  the  direct  object  of  the  verb  gives ; 
the  dative,  boy,  the  remote  object. 

(55.)  {a)  The  ablative  case  of  nouns  expresses  the 
person  or  thing  with,  from,  in,  or  by  which  any  thing 
is  done ;  e.  g.,  he  filled  the  cup  with  wine.  Here,  with 
wine  would  be  expressed  in  Latin  by  one  word,  in  the 
ablative. 

{b)  The  ablative  is  also  governed  by  prepositions 
expressing  the  relations  with,  from,  by,  &c. 

(56.)  The  Dative  endings  are,  Sing,  se  :  Plur.  is 
{long). 

*  (1.)  What  pronouns  are  not  expressed  in  Latin?  (47,  R,,  49,  R.)  Forwhat 

Eurpose  are  they  sometimes  used  ?     (2.)  By  what  is  the  transitive  verb 
raited  ?  (By  a  direct  object.)     What  is  the  case  of  the  direct  object  in 
tatin  1  (51,  a.)    What  is  the  direct  object  ofSmat,  laad&t?  &o. 


20 


DATIVE  AND  ABLATIVE. 


The  Ablative  endings  are,  Sing,  a  (long)  .  Piu?\  is 
(long), 

(57.)  "FIRST  DECLENSION. 

CASE-ENDINGS    AND    PARADIGM    COMPLETE. 


Singular. 

I'lural. 

Norn. 

a. 

8S. 

Geu. 

SB. 

arum. 

Dat. 

ae. 

Is. 

Ace. 

am. 

as. 

Voc. 

a. 

88. 

Abl. 

a. 

..     »«• 

b                         Singular. 

I'lural.                               1 

Nom. 

sylv-a,  a  wood. 

svlv-re,  V!oods. 

Gen. 

sylv-se,  of  a  wood. 

sylv-ariim,  of  woods. 

Dat. 

svlv-oe,  la  a  wood. 

sylv-is,  to  woods. 

Ace. 

s\  Iv-am,  a  toood. 

sylv-as,  woods. 

Voc. 

sylv-a,  O  wood  ! 

sylvffi,  O  woods  ! 

Abl. 

sylv-a,  7cith,  &c.,  a  wood. 

sylv-ls,  ivith,  &c.,  woods. 

Rem.   Some   nouns  of  this  declension  are  used  only  in  the  plural; 
viz.,  d  i  v  i  t  i  SB,  Hches ;  n  u  p  t  i  ae,  a  marriage ;  i n  s  I  d  i  ob,  an  ambush. 


(58.) 

I.   Vocabulary. 


EXERCISE. 


Wai/,  via,  CB. 

To  show,  monstrare. 

Ambush,   or   snares,    insTdlae,  arum 

(used  only  in  the  pi.). 
JVild  lea^t,  ferii,  ee. 
To  give,  dare.* 
To  beseech,  obseeriire. 
Letter,  litterae,  ai-um.f 
Friendship,  amieitla. 

II.  Examples. 
(a)    The  farmer  shows    the 
way  to  the  girls. 


confimi5r5. 


To  establish, 

To  streJigthen, 

With  (prep.),  cum  (governing  the  ab. 

lative  case). 
To  aboimd,  abundare,  (with  abl.). 
Deserter,  perfuga,  ae. 
Tear,  lacr5iiia,  ae. 
Inliabitaut,  incola,  ae  (25,  IV.). 


Agncola  puellis  viam  mon- 
strat. 

Rule  of  Position. — The  remote  object  usually  precedes 
the  dh-ect ;  e.  g.,  in  example  («),  puellis  precedes  vidm. 
{h)  The  queen  walks  with  thelKegmsi  ciim  ancillis  ambii- 
niaicl-servants.  |      lat. 

Rule  of  Position. — The  preposition  and  its  noun  precede 
the  verb;  e.  g.,  in  example  (6),  the  words  cii7n  ancillis 
precede  amhuldt. 


*  Dare  has  a^hort  before  re. 

t  Littfira,  si7ig.,  means  a  letter  (as  of  the  alphabet) ;  littfirae,  plw.,  a 
letter=  an  epistle. 


4 


FIRST  DECLENSION.  21 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Galba  insidias  parat. — Galba  Belgis  (54)  insidias  pS-rdt. — Bel- 
gje  araicltiam  confirmant. — Belgse  cum  regina  amici tiara  confir- 
mant. — Insula  feris*  abundat. — Poeta  reginae  (dat.,  54)  rosam 
dabat. — Copia;  per  insulam  festlnant. — Perfugae  reginam  obsS- 
crabant. — Perfiigae  cum  laciymis  reginam  obsecrabant. — Per- 
fiiga  reginae  (dat.,  54)  litteras  dabat. — Incolae  reginam  obsS- 
crabant. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  poet  praises  the  queen. — Galba  establishes  friendship. — 
Galba  establishes  friendship  with  the  Belgians. — The  Belgians 
will  prepare  snares. — The  Belgians  will  prepare  snares  for  the 
inhabitants  (54). — The  islands  abound  (in)  herbs  (58,  III.,  note). 
— Poets  give  roses  to  queens  (54). — The  Belgians  are  beseech- 
ing Galba. — The  Belgians  are  beseeching  Galba  with  tears. — 
The  queen  will  establish  friendship. — The  queen  will  establish 
friendship  with  the  Belgians. — The  deserters  will  beseech  the 
queen. — The  deserters  will  beseech  the  queen  with  tears. — 
The  Belgians  were  preparing  snares. — The  Belgians  were 
preparing  snares  for  the  deserters  (54). 

*  F6ris  is  the  ahl.  Rule  of  Syntax. — The  abl.  case  is  used  with  all 
▼erbs  and  acyectives  of  abounding  and  wanting. 


§  6. 


SECOND  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS.— SECOND 
CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS.     (VI.— VIII). 


LESSON  VL 
Nouns. — Second  Declension^  Masculine, 
(59.)  Examjdes. 


Crassus, 
Messenger, 
To  hasten, 

The    messenger 
hastens. 

The  messeng-ers  hasten 


Crass-iis. 

nunti-us. 

festinare. 

of   Crass  us 


Of  Orassus, 
messengers, 


Crass-i. 
nunti-i. 


Nunti-us  Crass-i  festinS,t. 


Nunti-i  festinant. 


(60.)  The  Second  Declension  comprises  all  nouns 
whose  gen.  sing,  ending  is  i  (long).  The  nom.  has 
two  endings,  us  for  masc.  gender,  and  um  for  the 
neut. 

(61.)  The  case-endings  for  the  masculine  gender  are 
as  follows : 


1 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Nom. 

US. 

Nom. 

Gen. 

1. 

Gen. 

orum. 

Dat. 

6. 

Dat. 

Is. 

Ace. 

fiin. 

Ace. 

OS. 

Voc. 

e. 

Voc. 

I. 

Abl. 

0. 

Abl. 

Is. 

Rem.  The  nouns  in  lis  of  this  declension  are  the  only  Latin  nouns  ia 
which  the  vocative-ending  difters  from  the  nominative. 

(62.)  By  adding  these  endings  to  the  stem  s  e  r  v-  of 
the  noun  serv-us  (a  slave),  we  get  the 

PARADIGM. 


Sing. 

Plur.                             1 

Nom. 

serv-us,  a  slave. 

serv-i,  slaves. 

Gen. 

serv-I,  of  a  slave. 

serv-orum,  of  slaves. 

Dat. 

serv-6,  to  or  for  a  slave. 

serv-ls,  to  or  for  slaves. 

Ace. 

serv-i":m,  a  s^ave. 

serv  OS,  slaves. 

Voc 

sei-v-e,  O  slave  ! 

serv-I,  O  slaves  ! 

Abl. 

serv-6,  with,  by,  &e,,  a  slave. 

serv-Is,  with,  by,  &c.,  slaves. 

SECOND  DECLENSION.  23 

[Rem.  1.  Nearly  all  nouns  in  us  are  masc. ;  but  the  names  of  trees,  plants, 
&.C.,  are  fern,  by  the  general  rule  (25,  a).  The  four  nouns,  alvus, 
bell^;  coluB,  distaff;  humus,  ground;  ya.nn us,  fan,  are  alsc 
fern.  Yirus,  juice ;  pelagus,  the  sea;  vulgus,  the  common 
people,  are  neuter. 

Rem.  2.  F  i  1  i  u  s ,  son,  and  proper  names  in  i  u  s ,  take  i  for  the  voc- 
atiye-ending ;  e.  g-.,  fill,  O  son  !  Tulli,  O  Tulli/ ! 

Rem.  3.  D  e  u  s ,  God,  has  d  e  ii  s  for  voc.  sing. ;  and  in  the  plural  N. 
and  V.  dii,  G.  deorum,  D.  and  Abl.  diis,  Ace.  deos.] 
[For  Greek  nouns  of  this  declension,  see  Appendix.] 

(63.)  EXERCISE. 

I.   Vocabulary. 

Master  (of  a  family  or  of  slaves),  do-    Captive,  captlv-us,  i 

min-us,  1.  A  German,  Gennan-us,  I 

Slave,  serv-us,  I. 
Village,  vic-us,  i. 

Ambassador,  or  lieutenant,\^Q^t-\\s,  i 
Garden,  hort-us,  I. 
To,  ad  (prep,  with  ace). 
In,  in  (prep,  with  abl,). 


To  call,  vocare. 

To  recall,  re  vocare.* 

To  call  together,  convocare.* 

An  ^duan,  jEdu-us,  i. 

To  flog,  verberarg. 

To  ride  (on  horseback),  Squltarg. 


1^^  He  rides  to  the  village,  Sd  vicilm  equitat.  When  to  implies 
motion,  it  must  be  translated  by  ad  with  the  accusative. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

Dominus  servum  vocat. — Serviis  domino  (54)  medicinam  par- 
fi.t. — Grassus  vlcum  occiipat. — Nuntius  Crassi  vigilat. — Servi 
ad  vicum  festlnant.— Nuntius  legato  (54)  viam  monstrat. — Servi 
dominos  laudant. — Agricola  ad  viciim  equitat. — Captivi  festina- 
bunt. — Galba  copias  (48,  I.)  Germanoriim  convocat.* — Nun- 
tius  captivos  revocat. — Servi  in  horto  ambulabunt. — ^dui 
Crasso  (54)  insidias  parabant. — Nuntius  copias  ^duorum  revo- 
cabat. — Dominus  servos  verberat. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

[Recollect  that  words  in  parentheses  (  )  are  not  to  be  translated.] 
The  messengers  call-together  the  iEdua»B.~The  slaves  pre- 
pare medicines  for  (their)  master  (dat.,  54). — The  ^Eduans  take- 
possession-of  the  woods. — The  master  praises  (his)  slaves. — The 
slave  is  hastening  to  (ad,  with  ace.)  the  w^oods.— The  ambassa- 
dors ride  to  the  village. — Crassus  will  prepare  an  ambush  for  the 

*  The  prefix  con  gives  the  verb  the  additional  meaning  of  tog-ee^^er;  the 
prefix  re  of  back,  as  in  revocare  and  convocare. 


24 


BECOND  DECLENSION. 


iEduans. — The  lieutenant  calls  together  the  Germans. — The 
messenger  will  show  the  way  to  tlie  captives  (54). — The 
slaves  are  watching. — The  master  flogs  (his)  slave. — Galba  will 
recall  the  lieutenant. — The  Germans  were  preparing  an  ambush 
for  Galba  (54). — The  slave  was  showing  the  way  to  the  mes- 
senger (54). — The  messenger  was  hastening  to  the  village. — 
The  slaves  are  watching  in  the  garden. 


LESSON  VII. 
Nouns. — Second  Declension,  Masculines  continued, 

(64.)  All  nouns  of  the  second  declension  whose 
stem  ends  m  r  reject  the  ending  us  in  the  nom.  and  e 
in  the  voc. ;  e.  g.y  N.  and  V.  ager,  j^e/c?,  instead  of 
ager-u  s,  ager-e.  Moreover,  most  of  those  which  have 
e  in  the  nominative  drop  it  in  the  obHque*  cases ; 
e,  g.f  N.  age  r,  G.  Sgri  instead  of  ager-i. 

(65.)  Learn  the  following 


PARADIGM. 

j                                                                                    SINGULAR.                                                                                   Il 

Nom. 

K^ei-.Md  (m). 

puer  (m.),  boy. 

vir,  man. 

Ge  . 

t-r-\,oftheJ!eld. 

puer-I,  of  the  boy. 

vir-T,  of  the  man. 

Dat. 

a, TO.  to  or  forjield. 

puer-6,  to  or  for. 

vir-o,  to  or  for. 

!acc. 

izr-um,  field. 

puer-um,  boy. 

vir-uxn,  man. 

Voc. 

a-er,  OJicld  ! 

puer,  O  bov  ! 

vIr,  O  man  ! 

Abl. 

azr  6,  7cith,  by,  SfC,  field. 

puer-6,  witk,  by,  SfC. 

vir-o,  with,  by,  Spc. 

] 

'LUilAL. 

Nom. 

^gr-lfields. 

puer-i,  boys. 

vir-I,  men.              \ 

Gen. 

agr-orum,  of  fields. 

puer-crum,  of  boys. 

vir-orum,  of  men. 

Dat. 

8.gr-is,  to  or  for  fields. 

puer-Is,  to  or  for. 

vir-is,  to  or  for. 

Ace. 

^^zr -OS,  fields. 

pu6r-6s,  boys. 
puer-T,  O  boys  ! 

vir-cs,  men. 

Voc. 

a-i--i,  O  fields  ! 

vir-I,  O  men  ! 

Abl. 

figr-!s,  with  fields. 

puer-Is,  with,  by,  SfC. 

V  YAs,vnth,by,SfC. 

Rem.  Only  the  following  nouns  keep  the  e  in  all  the  cases,  viz.,  adul- 
ter, adulterer ;  puer,  boy ;  socer,  father-in-laio ;  gener,  son-in-law ;  ves- 
per, evening ;  iTberl  (used  only  in  plural),  children ;  with  the  com- 
pounds offer  and  ger ;  e.  g.,  Lucifer,  Lxicifer ;  comiger,  horned. 

•  The  ohliq^ve  cases  include  all  the  cases  except  the  nominative  and 
vocative. 


SF.CONU  IJE0I> ENSIGN. 


(QG.)  EXERCISE. 

I.  Vocabulary, 

Boy,  puSr,  i. 

Master  (of  a  school),  mSg^stgr,  tin  (64). 

Faiker-in-law,  socer,  1  (65,  li.). 

Herb,  herba,  ae. 

Scholar,  disclpul-us,  i. 

Son,  fiU-us,  i  (62,  R.  2). 

II.  Example. 
(a)   The  wood  abounds  in 

wild  beasts. 


Man,  vir,  I. 
Game,  lud-us,  i. 
Son-in-law,  g€nSr,  i  (65,  R.). 
Children,  llbgri,  orum  (rarely  used  in 

singxilar). 
Field,  ag6r,  agri  (64). 


Sylva  fSris  ftbundat. 

The      wood     in  -  wild  -  beasts 
abounds. 


{a)  Rule  of  Syntax. — The  ablative  case  is  used  with  ad- 
jectives and  verbs  of  abounding  and  wanting. 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Pu6r  magistrum  dmat. — ReginS,  soc^riim  &mabit. — Pu6ri  in 
&gi*6  ambulabunt. — Agri  herbis  (abl.,  66,  II.,  a)  abundant. — Ag- 
ricola  per  agros  (58,  II.,  b)  ^qmtat. — Agncoia  s6c6rum  voc^t. — 
Puellae  magistrum  laudant. — Viri  in  agris  ambulabant. — Liidi 
pueros  delectant. — Regind,  generos  ftmabit. — Viri  ad  viciim 
festinabant. — Agricola  Kb6r6s  amdt. — Mftgistfir  discipulos  con- 
vocat. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  girls  walk  in  the  fields. — The  field  abounds  in  herbs  {66^ 
XL,  a). — The  sailor  calls  back  the  boys. — The  queen  loves  (her) 
son-in-law.' — The  queen  gives  (her)  son-in-law (dat.,  54)  arose. 
— The  scholars  love  (their)  master. — The  fields  abound  in  herbs 
{66,  11.,  a). — The  farmers  were  walking  through  the  fields. — 
The  son  of  the  master  calls  the  boys. — The  master  walks  in 
the  garden  with  (his)  sons. — The  herbs  of  the  field  delight  the 
poet. — Games  delight  girls. — The  farmer  shows  the  way  to 
the  boy. — The  master  will  praise  (his)  scholars. — The  master 
will  flog  (his)  scholars. 

c 


26 


SECOND  CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS. 


LESSON  VIII. 

Nouns, — Second  Declension^  Neuter, — Verbs,  Second 

Conjugation. 


(67.) 

1                        Slave. 

serviis 

(masc). 

Cup. 
To  Jill. 
The  slave  Jills  his  master's 

poculum  (neut.). 
implere. 
Servus     p  5  c  ii  1  ii  m     domini 

cup.                                        implet. 

The-slave  the-cup  of-his-master 
Jills. 
(68.)  The  case-endings  of  the  second  declension  for 

the  neuter  gender  are, 

Nona.  Ace,  Voc. 

Gen. 

Dat.,  Abl. 

Sing. 

um. 

i. 
6. 

^Plur. 

a. 

orum. 
Is. 

JRjem.  The  endings  of  the  nom.,  ace,  and  voc.  are  always  the  same  in 
neuter  nouns.    In  this  declension,  those  of  dat.  and  abl.  are  alike  also. 

(69.)  By  adding  these  endings  to  the  stem  pocul-, 
we  get  the 


PARA  DIG 

M. 

Sing. 

'     Plur. 

Nom. 

pocul-iim,  a  cup. 

p6cul-a,  cups. 

Gen. 

p6cul-i,  of  a  cup. 

pocul-orum,  of  cups. 

Dat. 

p6ci)l-6,  to  or  for  a  cup. 

pocul-is,  to  or  for  cups. 

Ace. 

p6cul-um,  a  cup. 

p6cul-a,  cups. 

Voc. 

p6cul-um,  O  cup  ! 

p6cul-a,  O  cups  ! 

Abl. 

p6cul-5,  with,  by,  Ice,  a  cup. 

Tpocul-is,  with,  from,  &.C.,  cups. 

THE  SECOND  CONJUGATION  OF  VEUBS. 

(70.)  The  second  conjugation  comprises  all  verbs 
whose  infinitive-ending  is  ere  (e  long  before  re) ;  e.  g., 
m  on- ere,  to  advise;  doc -ere,  to  teach. 

(71.)   SOME  ENDINGS  OF  THE  SECOND  CONJUGATION  OF  VERBS. 


INFINITIVE,  ert. 


INDICATIVE. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plural. 


Present. 
6t. 
ent 


Imperfect. 

ebat. ' 
ebant. 


Future. 

cblt. 
ebunt 


SECOND  CONJUGATION  OP  VERBS. 


(72.)  By  affixing  these  endings  to  the  stem  mon-,  we 
get  the  following 


PARTIAL  PARADIGM. 


!                                          INFINITIVE,  mon-er6,  to  advise.                                          1 

INDICATIVE. 

J3d  Sing. 
|3d  Plur. 

Present. 

mon-et,  lie,  she,  &.C., 

advises. 
inon-eut,  thei/  advise. 

Imperfect- 

mon-ebat,  he,  she,  &c,, 
was  advising. 

mon-ebant,  they  were 
advising. 

Future. 

mon-ebit,  he,  she,  Sec, 

will  advise. 
mon-ebunt,  they  will 

advise. 

(73.)                                EXERCISE. 

I.  V 

Assistanc 
To  ask,  e 
Camp,  ca 
To  move. 
Cup,  poc 
Witie,  vie 

ocahulary, 

e,  auxilium,  i  (68). 
ntreat,  rogarg. 
stra,  orum  (pi.) 
moverg  (70). 
ilum,  1. 
tum,  L 

• 

Tofll,  implerg  (70). 
Danger,  pgriculum,  u 
To  fear,  timere  (70). 
Forum,  forum,  i. 
Town,  oppidum,  I. 

II.  Translate  into  English, 

I^egatiis  auxilmm  rogat. — Galbacopias  ad  (63, 1.,  I!£S^)  ca.str& 
revocat. — Serviis  pociilum  vino  (55,  a)  implet. — Crassiis  castr& 
movet. — Copiae  ad  oppidiim  festinabant. — Xgricol^  oppidum 
laudat. — Copiae  Germanorum  ad  castra  festinabunt. — Nuntiiis 
periculiim  timet. — Pueri  p6r  forum  ambulant. — -German!  peri- 
cula  non  timent. — Legati  per  oppidum  ambulabunt. — AgricoB. 
oppida  ^diioriim  laudabat. — Crassiis  oppidum  occiipabat. — 
Servi  pocula  implebant. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin, 

The  ^duans  were  asking  assistance. — The  Germans  will 
move  (their)  camp. — The  Germans  were  praising  the  town. — 
The  ambassadors  of  the  iEduans  hasten  to  (63,  I.,  I^')  the 
camp. — The  forces  of  the  Belgians  fear  the  danger. — The  mes- 
senger will  recall  the  ambassadors  to  tlie  camp. — Galba's  mes- 
senger will  recall  the  Germans  to  the  town. — The  ambassadors 
praise  the  towns  of  the  Germans. — The  farmers  were  walking 
through  the  forum. — The  boy  walks  through  the  town. — The 
sailors  will  not  fear  the  danger. — Crassus  will  not  move  (his) 
camp. — The  Germans  were-taking-possession-of  the  town.— - 
The  servant  was  filling  the  cup. 


§  7. 
ADJECTIVES  OF  FIRST  CLASS.    (IX.— X.) 


LESSON  IX. 
Adjectives. — Class  /,  us,  ct,  um. 

(74.)  The  Adjective  (14),  in  Latin,  agrees  with  the 
noun  in  gender,  number,  and  case,  and  therefore  has 
endings  to  distinguish  these;  e.  g.,  puer  bon-us,  a 
good  hoy ;  pUelld  bon-a,  a  good  girl;  donum  bon- 
u  m,  a  good  gift. 

(75.)  We  divide  adjectives  into  three  classes,  ac- 
cording to  their  endings.  Those  of  \h&  first  class  have 
the/e/w.  ending  of  the  first  decl.  of  nouns,  and  the  masc, 
and  neut.  endings  of  the  second.     Thus, 


(76.) 

ENDINGS. 

PARADIGM. 

8INGULAB.                                                                                      1 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N. 

us. 

a. 

um. 

bon-us. 

bon-a. 

bon-iim. 

G. 

i. 

88. 

1. 

bon-i. 

bon-ae. 

bon-i. 

D. 

6. 

IB. 

o. 

bon-o. 

bon-ae. 

bon-o. 

A. 

um. 

am. 

um. 

bon-um. 

b6n-am. 

bon-um. 

V. 

e. 

a. 

um. 

bon-g. 

bon-a. 

bon-um. 

A. 

6. 

a. 

o. 

b6n-5. 

bon-a. 

bon-6. 

PLUBAL.                                                                                             1 

N. 

i. 

8B. 

a. 

bon-i. 

bon-ae. 

bon-a. 

G. 

5ram. 

arum. 

orum. 

b6n-5rum. 

b  on- arum. 

bon-orum. 

D. 

IS. 

IS. 

IS. 

bon-ls. 

bonis. 

bon-is. 

A. 

OS. 

as. 

a. 

bon-oa. 

bon-as. 

bon-i. 

V. 

I. 

OB. 

a. 

bon-i. 

bon-ae. 

bon-a. 

A. 

is. 

IS. 

IS. 

bon-is. 

bon-is. 

bon-is. 

(77.)  Adjectives  whose  stem  ends  in  er  do  not 
take  the  endings  u  s  of  the  nominative  and  e  of  the 
vocative. 

(a)  Most  of  them  drop  the  6  in  mflection ;  e.  g,, 

pulcher,     pulchr-a,     pulchr-um,     beautiful; 
pulchr-T,    pulchr-ae,    pulchr-i,    &c. 


ADJECTIVES    OF    FIRST    CLASS. 


29 


(6)  Butaspdr,  rough;  lacer,  torn;  Mh^T^free;  misSr, 
miserable ;  prosper,  fortunate ;  t  e  n  e  r,  tender  (and  the  com- 
pounds of  ger  and  f  er;  e.  g.,  corniger,  flammifer),  re- 
tain it ;  e.  g.f . 

raiser,      miser-a,     miser-iim, 
miser-i,    miser-ae,    miser-i,     &c. 


(78.) 

I.    Vocabulary. 

Good,  bon-us,  a,  um. 
Great,  magn-us,  a,  um. 
Many,  malt-us,  a,  um. 
Thick,  dens-US,  a,  um. 
Broad,  icide,  lat-us,  a,  um. 
Ml/,  me-us,  a,  um. 
Thy,  tu-us,  a,  um. 


EXERCISE. 


His,  hers,  its  (own),  su-us,  a,  um. 

To  see,  videre. 

Master  (of  slaves),  herus,  L 

To  have,  habere. 

Example,  exemplum,  L 

River,  fluvius,  i. 

To  frighten,  terrere. 


II.  Examples, 
(a)  The  slave  fills  the  large 
cup. 


Servus  poculum  magnum 
implet. 

Rule  of  Position. — (a)  The  adjective,  unless  emphatic,  fol- 
lows the  noun ;  e.  g.^  in  the  above  example,  magnum 
follows  poculum. 


(6)  The  slave  fills  the  queen* s 
large  cup. 


Servus  magnum  rgginae  poc- 
ulum implet. 

Rule  of  Position. — (&)  When  the  noun  governs  another  in 
the  genitive,  the  adjective  stands  first,  and  the  genitive 
betweenit  and  its  noun ;  e.  g.,  in  example  (6),  magnum 
reginae  poculum. 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Regina  f  iliam  suam  ^mat. — Servus  poculum  meiim  impl6t. — 
Jiervi  pociila  magna  implent. — Pueri  magistrum  bonum  amant. 
— Belgge  vicos  multos  habent. — Agricola  bonus  viam  monstr^t. — 
Magister  puSros  bonos  docebit. — Magistii  boni  exempla  bona 
pueris  (54)  dant. — Legatus  magnam  reginae  (78,  II.,  b)  coronam 
videt. — Perfugae  ad  fluvium  latum  festinant. — Servus  magnum 
pueri  (78,  II.,  6)  poculum  implebat. — Sylvae  densae  nuntios  tor- 
rent.— Pueri  syMm  densam  timebunt. — Servus  bonus  heriim 
&mat. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  .Siduans  have  many  villages. — The  queen  loves  (her) 
C3 


30  SOME    FORMS    OF    ESSE. 

good  son. — The  farmer  shows  the  thick  wood. — Good  slaves 
love  (theu-)  masters. — Good  masters  love  (theh-)  slaves. — The 
Belgians  have  many  towns. — The  broad  rivers  frighten  the  de- 
serters.— The  boy  sees  tlie  large  town. — Crassus  recalls  the  good 
lieutenant. — The  son  praises  tJie  great  queen. — The  Germans 
have  large  villages. — He  praises  thy  slave. — He  loves  thy  daugh- 
ter.— He  will  praise  his  own  daughter. — The  deserters  were 
hastening  to  the  broad  river. — The  slave  will  fill  the  large  cup 
of  his  master  (78,  II.,  b). — The  lieutenant  will  see  many  villages 
of  the  Belgians  (78,  II.,  b). — The  thick  wood  will  frighten  the 
boys. 


LESSON  X. 
Some  Forms  of  E  s  s  e. — Adjectives  continued, 
(79.)  Learn  the  following  forms  of  the  irregular 
verb  Esscj  to  be : 


INFINITIVE,  esse,  to  he. 

INDICATIVE. 

3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 

Present. 

est,  is. 
sunt,  are. 

Imperfect, 

erat,  was. 
erant,  were. 

Future. 

6nt,  he,  she,  it  will  be. 
erunt,  they  will  be. 

(80.)  (a)  Indolence  is  a  vice.  1 1^^^^^  ^i^^^"™  est- 

I  Indolence   a  vice     is. 

Here  inertia  is  the  subject  of  the  sentence ;  v  i- 
t  i  ii  m  is  the  predicate  ;  both  in  the  nominative. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — {a)  The  noun  in  the  predicate  must  be 
in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  when  it  denotes  the  same 
person  or  thing. 
(81.)  (6)   The  rose  is  teawfi- 1  Rosa  pulchra  est. 
ful.  I  The  rose  beautiful  is. 

Here  r  6  s  a  is  the  subject^  and  pulchra  the  pred- 
icate ;  both  in  nom.  sing.  fem. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — (&)  The  adjective  in  the  predicate  agrees 
with  the  subject  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 
[As  a  general  rule,  a  sentence  should  not  end  with  a  monosyUabU ;  but 
in  short  passages,  such  as  the  above,  especially  when  the  word  before  est 
ends  in  a  vowel,  or  m,  it  is  admissiblc.l 


ADJECTIVES,    CLASS    FIRST. 


31 


(82.)  EXERCISE. 

[Refer  to  Rules  of  Position  (78, 11.)  and  to  Rem.  on  adjectives  ending  in 

■  (77).] 

I.   Vocabulary. 


Happy,  beatus,  a,  um. 

True,  verus,  a,  um. 

Friendship,  amlcitia,  oe. 

Everlasting,  sempiternus,  a,  um. 

Labienus,  Labienus,  i. 

Foolish,  stoltus,  a,  um. 

Tender,  tener,  a,  um  (77,  b). 

Flame,  flamma,  ae. 

JRed,  ruddy,  ruber,  a,  um  (77,  a). 

A  leaf,  folium,  u 

Bull,  taurus,  1. 

Homed,  comiger,  5,  um  (77,  b). 

Lamb,  ag^us,  L 


Europe,  Europa,  89. 

Peninsula,  peninsiilS,  09. 

Anger,  ira,  es. 

Illustrious,  clarus,  S,  vm. 

Crow,  corvus,  I. 

Black,  niger,  a,  um  (77,  a). 

Not,  non  (always  placed  be&re  tiia 

word  which  it  qaaHfies) 
Always,  sempSr  (adv.). 
Cow,  vacca,  se. 
Attica,  Attica,  as. 
Britain,  Britamifii,  ». 
Ireland,  Hibemia,  oe. 


Miserable,  miser,  a,  nm  (77,  b). 

Rem.  In  such  phrases  as  the  good,  the  wise.  Sec,  the  noun  (men)  is 
omitted  in  Latin,  as  in  English ;  e.  g.,  good  metb  =  b  6  n I ;  fools  => 
Btalti ;  the  happy  ==  beati.  Also,  many  things  =  multa  (neat); 
all  things  =  omnia. 

II.  Examples. 

The  good  are  always  happy. 

True  friendships  are  everlast- 
ing. 

Labienus  was  a  lieutenant. 

The  foolish  are  not  happy. 


Boni  semper  beati  sunt. 
Yerae     ^micitiae     sempltems 

sunt. 
Labieniis  l6gatus  Sr&t. 
Stulti  non  sunt  beati. 


III.  Translate  into  English. 

Puella  pulchf a  est  (81,  6). — Herbae  &gr6rumtSngrsBSunt(81, 
h). — Alae  aquilarum  magnae  sunt. — Flamma  rubra  est. — F6K& 
rosarum  pulchra  sunt. — Tauri  cornigeri  sunt. — Agnl  t^neri  in 
&gris  sunt. — Rggina  pulchr^  in  horto  ambulabat. — Puer  agnos 
pukhros  vid6t. — Vera  a,micitia  sempiterna  est. — Stulti  miseri 
sunt. — EuropS,  peninsula  (80,  a)  est. — AtticS,  peninsula  est. — IxH 
vitiiim  est  magnum. — Crassiis  legatus  Srat. — Labienus  leg&tus 
clarus  6rat. — Corvus  plumas  nlgras  habet. — Stulti  non  sunt 
Ifiati. — Bonus  sempgr  beatus  est. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  queen  was  beautiful. — The  queen's  daughter  was  beau- 


32  ADJECTIVES  OF  FIRST  CLASS. 

tiful. — The  beautiful  daughter  walks  in  the  garden. — The  fields 
abound  in  tender  herbs  (66,  II.,  a). — The  feathers  of  doves  are 
beautiful. — The  feathers  of  crows  are  black. — The  flames  were 
ruddy. — The  leaves  of  roses  are  tender. — Cows  are  horned. — 
The  queen  walks  in  the  garden  with  {cum)  her  beautiful  daugh- 
ters (f  iliabiis*). — The  girl  will  see  the  tender  lambs  in  the  fields. 
— The  good  are  not  always  happy. — Fools  are  not  always  mis- 
erable.— Crassus  was  a  great  lieutenant. — Britain  is  an  island. — 
Ireland  is  an  island. — Geneva  is  a  large  town. — Anger  is  always 
a  vice. — Everlasting  friendships  are  true. — Friendships  are  not 
always  everlasting. 

*  Fllia,  daughter,  anddea,  goddess,  have  abl.  pi.  in  abus,  instead  of 
If,  to  distinguish  them  from  fill  Is,  sons,  dils,  gods. 


§8. 


THIRD  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS  OF 
VERBS. 


LESSON  XI. 
Verbs, — Third  and  Fourth  Conjugations. 
(83.)  The  Third  Conjugation  comprises  all  verbs 
whose  infinitive  ending  is  ere  (e  short  before  r  e) ; 
e.  g.,  scrib-ere,  to  write, 

(84.)      SOME  ENDINGS  OF  THE  TklRD  CONJUOATION. 


INFINITIVE,  fire. 


INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 
Plural. 


Present. 
It. 

unt. 


Imperfect. 

ebat. 
ebant. 


Future. 

et. 
eut 


(85.)  By  affixing  these  endings  to  the  stem  scrib-, 
we  get  the  following 


PARTIAL  PARADIGM. 


INFINITIVE,  ficrlb-«re,  to  write. 


INDICATIVE. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Present. 

scrib-it,  he,  she,  Sec, 

writes. 
scrib-unt,  they  "write. 


Imperfect. 

scrlb-ebat,  he,  she, 
&c.,  was  writing. 

scrib-  ebant,  they  were 
writing: 


Future. 

scrib-6t,  he,  the,  &c., 

will  write.  ^ 

scrib-ent,    they    will 
write. 


THE  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 

(86.)  The  Fourth  Conjugation  comprises  all  verbs 
whose  infinitive-ending  is  ire  (i  long  before  re)  ;  e.  g,, 
aud-ire,  to  hear, 

(87.)  SOME  ENDINGS  OF  THE  FOURTH  CON.TUGATION. 


INFINITIVE,  Ire. 


INDICATIVE. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Present. 

it. 

lunt. 


Imperfect 

iebat. 
iebant. 


Future. 

iet. 
ient. 


(88.)  By  affixing  these  endings  to  the  stem  aud-, 
we  have  the  following 


34       THIRD    AND    FOURTH    CONJUGATIONS    OF    VERBS. 


PARTIAL  PARADIGM. 


INFINITIVE,  aud-ire,  to  hear. 

INDICATIVE. 

3d  Sing. 
3dPlur. 

Present 

aud-it,  he,  she,  &c 

hears. 
aud-iunt,  they  hear. 

Imperfect. 

,  a.ud-ieba.t,  he,  she,  &c., 

was  hearing. 
aud-iebant,  thei/  were 
hearing. 

Future. 

aud-iet,  he,  she,  Ac, 

will  hear. 
aud-ient,    they    will 

hear. 

(89.)                         I 
I.   Vocabulary, 

To  send,  mittere  (83). 
In  (prep.),  in.* 
To  sleep,  dormire  (86). 
Bed-chamber,  ctibiculum,  I. 
To  i-un,  curr6r6  (83). 
To  rule,  regere  (83). 

:x  EI 

I  CI  S  E. 

Small,  parvus,  a,  um. 
To  come,  venire  (86). 
A  Roman,  Romanus,  T. 
To  lead,  ducere  (83). 
World,  mundus,  i. 
To  conquer,  vincere  (83). 

A  Gaul,  GaUiis,  I. 
Tower,  castellum,  I. 

To  fortify,  munire  (86). 
Divitiacus,  Divitiacus,  1. 

II.  Example. 

Crassus  comes  to  the  Zar^e  I  Crassus  magniim  ad  op  pi* 

town.  I      dum  venit. 

Rule  of  Position. — The  adjective  belonging  to  a  noun  gov^ 
erned  by  a  preposition  is  frequently  placed  hefore  the 
preposition,  c.  ^.,  rnagniim  in  the  example. 

III.  Translate  into  English, 

Belgae  legates  mittunt. — Belgae  legates  ad  Crassum  mittunt. — 
Pueri  in  cubiciilo  dormiunt. — Puellse  parvo  (89,11.)  in  ciibiculd 
dormiebant. — Regina  magnum  ad  oppidiim  veniet. — Galba  c6- 
pias  Romanorum  ducit. — Dii  (62,  R.,  3)  mundum  regunt. — 
Deiis  mundum  semper  regit. — Roman!  Gallos  vincebant. — Le- 
gatiis  castella  muniebat. — uEdui  nuntium  ad  Labieniim  mittunt. 
—  Copise  Belgarum  ad  oppidiim  venient.  —  Di^'itiacus  copias 
iEduoriim  ducebat. 

TV.   Translate  into  Latin, 

The  horse  runs. — The  boy  sleeps. — The  boy  was  running. — 
The  slave  comes. — Crassus  fortifies  many  towers. — The  slave 
was  coming  to  (63, 1.,  S^")  his  master. — The  beautiful  boy  will 
sleep  in  a  little  bed-chamber  (89,  II.). — The  gods  always  govern 

*  In,  signifying  into  or  unto,  governs  the  accusative ;  signifying  in ' 
governs  the  ablative. 


THIRD  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS  OP  VERBS.    35 

the  world. — The  Romans  are  coming  to  the  large  town. — The 
farmer  was  sleeping  in  the  field. — Divitiacus  was  leading  the 
forces  of  the  iEduans. — The  Belgians  send  messengers  to  Cras- 
sus. — Crassus  sends  a  messenger  to  the  Belgians. — The  girls 
win  sleep  in  a  little  bed-chamber. — Crassus  will  fortify  the 
towers. — The  Romans  take-possession-of  the  towers  of  Gaul. 


§  0, 


PASSIVE  VERBS.    (XIL— XIII.) 

LESSON  XII. 

Verbs. — Passive  Voice. — First  and  Second  ConjugU" 
tions. 
(90.)  The  endings  of  the  third  persons  of  verbs,  in 
the  tenses  for  incomplete  or  continued  action  (44),  are 
the  same  in  the  passive  as  in  the  active  voice,  with 
the  addition  of  the  syllable  u  r .     Thus,  we  have  in  the 

(91.)  FIRST    CONJUGATION. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Active. 

am-ai,  he,  she,  it,  loves, 
dim-ant,  they  love. 


Passive. 

ain-at-«r,  he,  slie,  it  is  lovcdJ 
am-ant-tJr,  they  are  loved. 


IMPERFECT. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


tm-dbat,  he  was  loving, 
aindbant,  they  were  loving.  \ 


km-ahht-ur,  lie  was  loved. 
am-abant-tir,  they  were  loved. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Ava-dbit,  he  shall  or  will 

love, 
ann-dbunt,   they    shall    or 

will  love. 


am-ablt-ur,  he  shall  or  will  be  loved. 

am-abunt-ur,  they  shall  or  will  be 
loved. 


(92.) 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Active. 

mon-e^,  he  advises, 
mon-ent,  they  advise. 


Passire. 

mon-et-wr,  he  is  advised. 
mon-ent-iir,  they  are  advised. 


IMPERFECT. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


vabn-ebdt,  he  was  advising, 
mon-ebant,  they  were  advi- 
sing: 


m6n-ebat-«7%  he  was  advised. 
nion-ebant-iir,  they  were  advised. 


3d  Sing.'  mbn-ebit,  he  will  advise. 
3d  Plur.  \m6n-ebunt,  they  will  ad- 
vise. 


mon-ehit-ftr,  he  ivill  be  advised. 
mon-ebunt-wr,  they  will  be  advised 


*  The  English  language  has  no  forms  for  incomnlete  action  in  the  pass- 
ive voice.  He  is  loved,  he  teas  loved,  &c.,  the  house  is  built,  &c.,  properly 
•xpress  fiction  complete.    An  awkward  periplirasis — he  is  being  hved. 


Crassus  legatiim  vdc&t. 
Lggatiis  a  Crasso  vocatur. 


PASSIVES    OF    FIRST    AND    SECOND    CONJUGATIONS.    37 
(93.)  EXEECISE. 

I.  Vocabulary. 

Game,  sport,  ludus,  I.  j  To  teach,  ddcere. 

To  delight,   delectarS.  |  Seize,  occuparS. 

II.  Examples, 

(a)  Crassus  calls  the  lieuten- 
ant. 

(h)  The  lieutenant  is  called 
hy  Crassus. 

In  these  examples,  the  same  action  is  expressed  (viz.,  the  calling  of 
the  lieutenant)  in  (a)  by  the  active  form,  in  (Z>)  by  the  passive.  Ev- 
ery sentence  in  which  a  transitive  verb  occurs  may  thus  be  changed 
into  the  passive  form.  The  agent  (Crassus)  is  the  subject  nomina- 
tive in  (a) ;  and  in  {b)  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  (Crasso)  with  the 
preposition  a,  by. 

Rem.  If  the  subject  be  a  thing,  not  a  person,  nor  considered  as  a  per- 
son, the  preposition  is  omitted ;  e.  g.,  Poculum  vino  impletur,  the 
cup  is  filled  with  wine.    (This  is  the  abl.  of  cccuse  or  means.) 

III.  Translate  into  English, 

Auxifium  a  legato  rogatur. — Auxilium  a  legato  rogabatiir. — 
Auxilium  a  legato  rogabitur. — CopisB  a  Galba  revocantiir. — Pocii- 
liim  a  servo  implebatur. — OppidS.  a  Crasso  occupabantur. — M6- 
dicina  ab  ancillis  pftrabitur. — Pueri  boni  a  magistro  laudantur. 
— Copiae  Germanorum  a  Labieno  rSvocabuntiir. — Pociila  vino 
(93,  II.,  R.)  implentur.— PuSri  ludis  (93,  II.,  R.)  delectantiir. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  master  is  loved  by  (his)  scholars. — The  master  will  be 
loved  by  (his)  good  scholars. — The  cups  will  be  filled  (with) 
wine  (93,  II.,  R.). — The  Germans  were  called  together  by 
Crassus. — The  villages  were  seized  by  the  Romans. — The 
towns  will  be  seized  by  the  ^duans. — Medicines  are  prepared 
by  the  slaves. — Good  boys  will  be  praised  by  their  masters. — 
The  good  boys  will  be  advised  by  their  masters. — TPie  scholars 
are  taught  by  their  master. — The  scholar  was  taught  by  his 

the  house  is  being  built- — is  sometimes  employed,  but  is  not  to  be  approved. 
The  house  is  building  is  a  form  sanctioned  by  usage,  but  in  many  verbs  it 
v^ould  be^Nambiguous.  The  pupil  must  remember,  then,  that  in  the  exer- 
cises in  the  First  Part,  the  forms  is  loved,  is  advised,  was  advised,  &c.,  are 
UBed  to  express  incomplete  action. 

D 


38    PASSIVES    OP    THIRD    AND    FOURTH    CONJUGATIONS. 

master. — The  girls  are  delighted  with  games  (93,  II.,  R.). — 
The  slaves  will  be  delighted  with  games. — The  queen  is  praised 
by  (her)  maid-servant. — The  queen  was  praised  by  (her)  mud- 
Bervant. — The  queen  will  be  praised  by  (her)  maid-servant. 


LESSON  XIII. 

Verbs, — Passive  Voice. — Third  and  Fourth  Conjuga-' 

tions. 

(94.)  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


reg-ii,  he,  she,  it  rules. 
T^g-unt,  they  rule. 


Passive. 

r6git-fir,  he,  she,  it  is  ruled. 
rggtmt-Mr,  they  are  ruled. 


IMPERFECT. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur 


Y^g-ebat,  he  was  ruling.      jjr6geb5t-tir,  he  was  ruled. 
:  \t&g-ehant,  they  were  ruling \rege\)Kat-iJLr,  they  were  ruled. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


reg-et,  he  shall  or  will  rule, 
reg-ent,  they  shcdl  or  will 
rule. 


r6get-Mr,  he  shall  or  will  be  ruled. 
r6gent-«r,  they  shall  or  will  be  ruled. 


(95.) 


FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


Actire. 

aud-Tt,  he  hears. 
aud-iunt,  they  hear. 


Passive. 

audlt-tir,  he  is  heard. 
audiunt-«r,  they  are  heard. 


IMPERFECT. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


aud-iebat,  he  was  hearing. 

aud-iebant,  they  were  hear 

ing. 


audiebat-«r,  he  was  heard. 
audiebant-tir,  they  were  heard. 


3d  Sing. 
3d  Plur. 


aud-igt,  he  shall  or  will 

hear. 
aud-ient,  iliey  shall  or  will 

hear. 


aud-iet-iir,  he  shall  or  will  be  heard. 
audient-tir,  they  shall  or  will  be  heard. 


(96.) 

L   Vocabulary. 


X  E  R  C  I  S  E. 


A  Gavl,  Galliifl,  i. 
To  distribute,  ?  -.    .  ^  „ 
arrange,     ) 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

Legftti  a  Belgis  mittxmtur. — Mundus  &  Deo  rSgKtur. — C6pi» 


A  Roman,  Romanus,  I. 
To  lay  aside,  deponerS. 
Garrison,  praesidium,  L 


PASSIVES  OF  THIRD  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS.     39 

Romanorum  a  Galba  ducuntur. — Galli  a  Romanis  vincuntur. — 

Ird  a  reglna  deponitur. — Castelliim  a  Labieno  munitur. — Praesi- 

dia  a  legato  disponuntiir. — Legati  ad  iEduos  mittebantur. — Co- 

_^  pise  JEduoriim  ad  vicujn  ducentur. — E  pis  tola  a  regina  scribitiir. — 

•     Oppida  Belgarum  muniebantiir.— Nuntii  ad  Crassiim  mittentur. 

III.   Translate  into  Latin, 

Galba  is  conquered  by  the  Belgians. — The  camp  is  fortified 
by  Crassus. — The  forces  of  Crassus  ai-e  led  to  the  camp. — The 
forces  of  the  iEdui  are  sent  to  the  village. — Anger  will  be  laid- 
aside  by  the  queen. — Galba  was  conquered  by  the  Gauls. — Let- 
ters will  be  written  by  the  queen. — Letters  are  written  to  (ad) 
Crassus. — The  garrisons  are  not  distributed  by  Cmssus. — The 
towers  are  not  fortified  by  the  Belgians. — The  world  is  always 
governed  by  God. — The  Germans  are  ruled  by  a  lieutenant. — 
A  letter  will  be  written  by  the  queen. 


§  10. 

THIRD  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS.— PARTIAL 
TREATMENT.     (XIV.— XV.) 


LESSON  XIV. 
Nouns. — Third  Declension. 

(97.)  The  Third  Declension  comprises  all  nouns 
whose  gen.  sing,  ends  in  is. 

Rem.  To  find  the  stem  of  any  noun  of  this  declension,  strike  off  is 
from  the  gen.  sing.;  e.  g.,  gen.  hominis  {of  a  man),  stem  homiii. 

(98.)  The  case-endings  are  as  follows : 


» 

Sinpular. 

Plural.                                      1 

M.  &r. 

Neut. 

M.  &F. 

Neut. 

N. 

N. 

es. 

a  (ia). 

G. 

is. 

is. 

G. 

um  (ium). 

um  (ium). 

D. 

I. 

1 

D. 

ibus. 

ibus. 

A. 

gm  (Tm). 

like  N. 

A. 

es. 

a(ia). 

V. 

likeN. 

like  N. 

V. 

es. 

a  (ia). 

A. 

e{i). 

e[l). 

A. 

ibus. 

ibus. 

F' 

Rem.  1.  The  nom.  ending  is  not  given,  because  of  the  many  forms  in 
which  that  case  occurs.  Of  the  changes  to  which  the  stem  is  sub- 
ject, see  hereafter  (Part  II.). 

2.  Of  the  endings  j  m,  i  (in  ace.  and  abl.  sing.),  and  ia,  iiim  (plur.),  see 
hereafter  (Part  II.). 

3.  The  genders  of  all  nouns  of  this  declension  are  marked  in  the  vo- 
cabularies. The  general  rules  of  gender  (25,  a)  of  course  apply  to 
this  declension :  special  rules  are  given  (355).    We  give  here  only 

(99.)  Partial  Rule  of  Gender. — Most  nouns  which  add  5  to 
the  stem  to  form  the  nominative  are  feminine. 

(100.)    PARADIGMS MASCULINE  AND  FEMININE  FORMS. 


Sing. 

Speech  (m.). 

Honour  (m.). 

City  (f.). 

Nation  (race),  f. 

Law  {f.>.         1 

N.  and  V. 

serm6. 

honor. 

urb-s. 

gens  (gents). 

lex  (legs). 

Gen. 

sermon-is. 

honor-is. 

urb-is. 

gent-Is. 

leg-is. 

Dat. 

sermon-i. 

honor-i. 

urb-I. 

gent-i. 

leg-T. 

Ace. 

serm6n-6m. 

honor-em. 

urb-6m. 

gent-6m. 

leg -6m. 

Abl. 

serm6n-6. 

honor-e. 

urb-6. 

gent-6. 

leg-e. 

Plur. 

Speeches. 

Honours. 

Cities. 

Races. 

Laws. 

N.,  A.,  V. 

sermon-es. 

honor-es. 

urb-es. 

gent-es. 

leg-es. 

Gen. 

sermon-iim. 

honor-um. 

urb-iQm. 

gent-ium. 

leg-um. 

D.  and  A. 

sermon-ibus. 

honor-ibus.  urb-Ibus. 

gent-IbCs. 

leg-ibus. 

THIRD  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS.  41 

Jiem.  1.  Observe  that  d  or  t  in  the  stem  is  dropped  in  the  noa.  before 
s;  and  c  or  g"  combined  with  s  to  form  x ;  e.g.,  laus  =  laud-s; 
arx  =  arc-s;  lex  =  leg-s;  gens  =  gents. 

2.  All  the  endings  are  short  but  i  (dat.  sing.)  and  es  (N.,  A.,  V.  plur.). 
(101.)  EXERCISE. 

l.   Vocabulary. 

[In  the  following  vocabularies,  the  stem  of  every  noun  of  the  third  ia- 
clension  is  placed  immediately  after  the  nominative  Ibnn,  and  before 
the  genitive  ending.] 

Rock,  petra,  ve. 

Tree,  arbor,  (arbor)  is,  f. 

To  build  a  nest,  nidif  icarS. 

Ccesar,  Caesar,  (Caesar)  is. 

And,  6t  (conj.)- 

Consul,  consul,  (consul)  is,  m. 

General,  imperator,  (imp6rator)  is,  m. 

A  Helvetian,  Helvetius,  I. 


K'.ng,  rex,  (reg)  is,  m. 
Law,  lex,  (leg)  is,  f. 
To  abrogate,  abrogare. 
Just,  Justus,  a,  iim. 
Worthy,  diguus,  a,  itra. 
Part,  pars,  (part)  is,  f. 
Common-people,  plebs,  (pleb)  is,  f. 
To  leave,  reUnquerg. 


II.    Translate  into  Ens:lis1i 


Rex  leg-es  abrogat. — Copiae  ad  urb-em  festinant. — Leg-es 
justae  sunt. — Pars  pleb-is  urb-em  relinqiiit. — Magn^  pars  pleb- 
is  urb-em  relinquit. — Aquilse  m  pStris  et  arbor-ibus  nidificant. — 
Leg-es  a  reg-e  abrogantiir. — Copiae  ad  urb-em  revocantur. — 
Helvgtii  ad  Caesar-em  legates  mittunt. — Nuntius  sermon-em 
consul-is  laudat. — Imj)6rat6r  nuntios  revocat. — Rex  dignis  (54, 
and  82, 1.,  R.)  honor-es  dabit. — Copiae  Belgariim  urb-em  relin- 
quebant. — Caesar  ad  vicos  festinabat. — Legati  ad  imp6rat6r-em 
niittuntiir. —  Imperator  nuntios  ad  urb-em  mittet. —  Legatus 
part-6m  copiarum  revocabit. 

III.   Translate  into  Latin, 

The  laws  were  just. — The  king  will  revoke  the  laws. — The 
general  will  leave  the  village. — The  consuls  send  ambassadors. — 
The  consuls  recall  the  ambassadors. — Doves  build  their  nests  in 
gardens  and  trees. — The  consuls  are  praised. — The  city  is  for- 
tified.— Honours  will  be  given. — Honours  are  given  to  the  wor- 
thy (82,  I.,  R.). — Ambassadors  will  be  sent  to  the  consuls. — 
Honours  are  given  to  Caesar  (54). — The  speech  of  the  consul 
is  praised. — Honours  are  given  to  the  general. — A  great  part 
of  the  common-people  will  leave  the  city. — The  consuls  will 
recall  the  common-people. — The  ambassadors  wiU  leave  the 
city. — The  general  will  be  sent. — Caesar  will  be  recalled.— 
The  laws  were  unjust. 

D2 


43 


THIRD  DECLENSION. 


(102.) 


LESSON  XV. 
Nouns. — Third  Declension,  continued, 

PARADIGMS. NEUTER  FORMS. 


S.ng. 

Sea  (n.). 

Song  (n.). 

Work  (n.). 

Animal  (n.). 

N.,  A..  V. 

D. 

Abl. 

mar-e. 
mar-Is. 
mar-I. 
mar-I. 

carmSn. 
cannin-is. 
carmin-i. 
cannin-e. 

optis. 
6p6r-is. 
6per-i. 
opgr-e. 

animal, 
animal-is. 
animal-i. 
animal-i. 

Plur. 

Seas. 

SongB. 

Works.                         Animals.              || 

N.,A.,V. 

G. 
D.,  Abl. 

mar-ia. 

mar-ium. 

mar-ibus. 

carmm-a. 

carmin-um. 

carmin-ibus. 

6per-a. 

6per-um. 

oper-ibus. 

animal-la. 

animal-ium. 

animal-ibuff. 

Rem.  1.  Neuters  whose  nom.  ends  in  al,  ar,  or  e,  take  i  for  abl.  Bing. 

ending;  la,  nom.  plur.,  and  i\im,  gen.  plur. 
2.  Partial  Rule  of  Gender. — ^Nouna  whose  stems  end  in  a  1  or  a  r  are 

neuter. 


(103.) 

I.   Vocabulary. 


EXERCISE. 


To  cure,  heal,  sanar6. 

To  mitigate,  mitigare. 

River,  flumen,  (flumin)  is  (n.). 

To  swim  across,  transnarS  (gov.  ace.). 

Work,  opus,  (oper)  is  (n.). 

Fish,  piscis,  (pise)  is  (m.). 

Tim£,  tempus,  (tempor)  is  (n.). 

To  change,  mutar6. 

Man,  homfi,  (homin)  is  (m.). 

Stormy,  turbid,  turbidus,  ft,  &n. 


^ame,  nomSn,  (nomin)  is  (n.). 

To  enrol,  conscriberg. 

Treaty,  foediis,  (foedfir)  is  (n.). 

To  violate,  violare. 

Spoil  or  booty,  praada,  as. 

AtHy,  Bocius,  i. 

Summer,  sestas,  (eestat)  is  (f.). 

Cold,  frigus,  (frigor)  is  (ru). 

Burden,  onus,  (oner)  is  (n.). 

To  carry,  portar6. 

Wound,  vulnus,  (vxdner)  is  (n.). 

II.   Translate  into  English, 

Consul  nomina  conscribit. — Caesar  foedus  {ace.)  violab&t,  6t 
prsedam  sociis  (54)  d§,bat. — iEstas  frigus  {ace.)  mitigat. — Per- 
fugae  flumen  {ace.)  transnabant. — Magnum  opus  est. — Flum6n 
piscibus  abundat  (66, 1.,  a). — Tempus  homines  mutat. — Tem- 
pora  mutantur. — Frigus  aestate  (93,  II.,  R.)  mitigabitur. — 
Copiae  Belgarum  fluminS,  transnabant.  —  Servus  onus  {ace.) 
magnum  portat. — Caesar  nomina  non  conscribet. — Onus  mag- 
num est. — Medicine  vulniis  sanat. — Carmina  puellas  dslectant. 
— Nomina,  hominiim  mtitabuntur. — Maria  turbida  sunt. — Fla- 
mSn  magnum  erat  turbidiim. — MagnS,  sunt  5n6r&  captivorura. 


THIRD  DECLENSION.  43 

III.  Translate  into  Latin, 

The  Germans  violate  treaties. — The  consuls  will  not  enrol 
the  names. — The  slaves  were  carrying  great  burdens. — The 
messenger  was-swimming-across  the  river. — The  boy  swims- 
across  the  river. — Great  burdens  are  carried. — The  burden  vn\\ 
be  carried  by  the  slave. — The  rivers  abound  in  fish  {QQ,  II.,  a).— 
The  wounds  are  healed. — The  burdens  are  gi-eat. — The  lieu- 
tenant will  not  violate  the  ti'eaty. — The  names  are  enrolled  by 
the  consuls  (93,  II.). — The  treaty  is  violated. — The  treaty  is 
violated  by  Caesar. — The  treaty  will  be  violated,  and  the  spoil 
will  be  given  to  the  allies  (dat.). — The  consul  enrols  the  names 
of  the  deserters. — The  names  of  the  deserters  will  be  enrolled. 
,     The  wounds  of  the  prisoners  will  be  healed. 


Uh 


§  n, 


ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  SECOND  CLASS. 


LESSON  XVL 

Adjectives. — Second  Class. — Two  Endings. 

(104.)  Adjectives  of  the  Second  Class  have  is  in 

the  nom.  sing,  for  masc.  and  fern,  endings,  and  e  for 

the  neuter.     They  are  dechned  throughout  Uke  the 

third  declension  of  nouns  ;  e.  ^.,  brevis,  short. 

(105.)  PARADIGM.  ! 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL.                                    j 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut 

N.V. 

brev-is. 

brev-is. 

brgv-e. 

brev-es. 

brev-es. 

brgv-Ta. 

a. 

brev-is. 

brev-is. 

brev-Is. 

brev-ium. 

brev-ium. 

brev-ium. 

D. 

brev-i. 

brev-I. 

brev-I. 

brev-ibus. 

brev-ibus. 

brev-ibus. 

Ace. 

brev-em. 

brev-em. 

brev-6. 

brev-es. 

brgv-es. 

brev-ia. 

Abl. 

brev-I. 

br6v-i. 

brev-I. 

brev-ibus. 

brev-ibus. 

brev-ibiis. 

Rem.  1.  Twelve  adjectives*^  of  this  class  take  Sr  for  the  ending  of 
the  nom.  sing.  masc.  instead  of  Is;  e.  g".,  acer,  acrls_,  acre;  cele- 
ber,  celSbris,  celdbre. 

Rem.  2.  The  abl.  has  e  instead  of  I  in  jiivenls,  a  yottth^k^diliB, 

cedile.    The  gen.  pi.  has  um  instead  ofiuminceler,  swijL^ 
(106.)  EXERCISE. 

L   Vocabulary. 

.Uncertain,  incertiis,  S,  um. 
Useful,  utlKs,  6. 
Iron,  ferriSm,  I. 
Gold,  aurum,  f. 
Severe,  heavy,  gravis,  S. 
Life,  vita,  ae  (f). 
Brave,  fortis,  6. 
Patiently,  pitient^r  (adv.). 
Wolf,  lupus,  i  (m.). 
Lihe,  similis,  6, 

A  chief,  princeps,  (princip)  is  (o.,  2\ 
IV.). 


omnis,  8. 


Father,  pSter,  (patr)  is. 

Noble,  nobilis,  6. 

Every, 

All,  the  whole, 

Sweet,  dulcis,  6. 

To  demand,  poscSre. 

Soldier,  miles,  (milit)  is  (m.). 

Study,  zeal,  stiidium,  i. 

iiCtVid,  benignus,  a.  um. 

Dog,  cams,  (can)  is  (c,  25,  IV.). 

To  endure,  tolSrarS. 

Hostage,  obses,  (6bsid)ls  (c,  25,  IV.) 


Acer,  sharp. 
Alacer,  cheerful. 
Campester,  of  the  plain. 
C€l<5b6r, /a»u?MS. 


Cel6r,  swift. 
E  que  s  ter,  equestrian. 
Paluster,  marshy. 
Pedest(5r,  pedestrian. 


Saluber,  salubrious. 
Sylvester,  woody. 
Terrestgr,  terrestrial , 
Volucer,  swift. 


ADJECTIVES,  SECOND  CLASS.  '45 

II.  Examples. 


Pater  filio  bgnignus  est. 
Canis  liipo  simiKs  est. 


(a)   The  father  is  kind  to  his 

son. 
{b)   The  dog  is  like  {to)  the 
wolf. 

(c)  Rule  of  Syntax. — The  dative  case  is  used  with  all  adjec- 
tives that  are  followed  by  the  words  to  or  for  in  Eng- 
lish :  hence  with  adjectives  expressing  {a)  advantage  or 
disadvantage,  {b)  likeness  or  unlikeness. 
[Adjectives  of  likeness  or  unlikeness  also  take  the  gen.] 

tIL  translate  into  English. 

Milites  omnes  periciiliim  timent. — Imp^rator  fortis  milit§s 
omnes  convocat. — Vita  brevis  est. — Vita  est  brevis  et  incerta. — 
Viniim  est  dulce. — Principes  fortes  oppida  omnia  muniebant. — 
Caesar  obsidgs  nobiles  poscit. — Tempiis  breve  est. — Non  omnes 
milites  sunt  fortes. — Ferriim  utile  est. — Auriira  et  ferriim  sunt 
Qtilia  hominibus  (106,  II.,  c). — Miles  vulniis  grave  patienter 
tolerat. — Consul  fortis  perictila  non  timebit. — Ferriim  util6 
hominibus  (106,  II.,  c)  est. — Milites  fortes  vulnSra  gravia  pS,- 
tienter  tolerabunt. — Studiiim  est  puSris  (106,  II.,  c)  utile. — 
Iraperator  militibus  (106,  II.,  c)  benigniis  erat. — C3,nis  liipo 
similis  est. 

IV.   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  noble  queen  comes  to  the  city. — The  brave  lieutenant  en- 
dures patiently  (his)  severe  wound. — All  the  soldiers  hasten  to 
the  camp. — The  brave  chiefs  will  fortify  many  towns — Tho 
noble  hostages  come  to  Caesar  (63,  I.,  i^"). — The  time  is  un- 
certain.— Soldiers  are  not  always  useful. — Towns  are  useful 
for  men  (106,  II.,  c). — Noble  ambassadors  are  sent. — Many 
hostages  are  demanded  by  the  consuls  (93,  II.).— All  the 
soldiers  will  be  called  together. — Not  all  chiefs  are  noble. — 
Wine  is  sweet  and  iron  is  useful. — The  dangers  are  not  fear- 
ed by  the  brave  soldiers  (93,  II.). — The  brave  lieutenant 
praises  the  noble  chief. — Dogs  are  like  wolves  (106,  II.). — 
The  study  of  letters  (litterariim)  is  useful  for  all  (106,  II.).— 
The  soldiers  are  kind  to  the  prisoners  (106,  II.). — Gold  is  heavy. 
— Iron  is  not  like  gold  (106,  II.). 

Even  in  these,  the  ending  is  is  sometimes  foimd  in  nom.  sing.  masc.  j 
e.  g.,  tumultus  equestris,  Liv.,  xxix.,  35. 


}  12. 


ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  THIRD  CLASS. 

. % 


LESSON  XVIL 

Adjectives. — Third  Class. — One  Ending. 

(107.)  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Class  have  but  one 
ending  in  the  nominative  for  all  three  genders ;  e.  g., 
f  e  1  i  X  (m.,  f.,  n.),  happy  ;  a  u  d  a  x  (m.,  f.,  n.),  hold : 
pauper  (m.,  f.,  n.),  poor. 

(108.)  PARADIGM. — Felix^  happy. 


1                                            SINGULAR. 

PLURAI,,                                 i 

1                      Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

N.V. 

fellx. 

felix. 

felix. 

fellc-es. 

fellc-es. 

felic-Ia. 

G. 

feKc-is. 

fellc-is. 

felic-is. 

felic-ium. 

felic-ium. 

felic-ium. 

D. 

felTc-I. 

felic-1. 

fellc-i. 

fellc-ibus. 

felJc-ibus. 

felic-ibus. 

Aco. 

fellc-em. 

felic-em. 

ftlix. 

felio-es. 

felic-es. 

felic-ia. 

Abi. 

felic-i. 

fellc-I. 

felic-I. 

felic-Ibus. 

felic-ibus. 

felic-ibus. 

[Rem.  1.  The  abl.  has  e  instead  of  I  (a)  in  pauper,  poor;  sen  ex,  old 
(gen.  senis) ;  p  r  i  n  c  e  p  s.  chief;  compos,  possessed  of,  and  most  end- 
ing in  es;  e.  g.,  hospes,  guest;  pub 6s,  grown  up,  &c.  Also  in 
the  compounds  of  corpiis,  color,  and  pes. 

(5)  Participles  in  ns  have,  as  participles,  e,  but  as  adjectives  i;  e.  g., 
florente  r6sa,  the  rose  blooming;  florenti  rosa,  in  a  blooming 
rose. 

(c)  Adjectives  used  as  nouns  take  e;  e.  g.,  sapiens,  a  wise  man, 
abl.  sapiente. 

Rem.  2.  The  gen.  pi.  takes  u  m  instead  ofiiiminvetus,  old  (v6tSrQm) ; 
censors,  partaking  of;  deggnSr,  degenerate;  divgs,  WcA  ; 
I  n  o  p  s,  helpless  ;  m e m o r,  mindful ;  i m m 6 m o r,  unmindful ;  sup. 
pi  ex,  suppliant;  ub6r,  rich;  vigil,  watching.  Also  in  all  which 
take  €  in  the  abl. ;  e.  g.,  princeps,  princlpg,  princlpitm.] 


ADJECTIVES. THIRD  CLASS.  47 


(109.)  EXERCISE, 

I.  Vocabulary, 

War,  bellum,  i. 

Fierce,  Strox,  (Stroc)  is  (107). 

To  wage,  carry  on,  gerere. 

Horse-soldier,  equ6s,  (equit)  Is  (m.' 

Tenacious,  tenax,  (tfinac)  is  (107). 

Wise,  sapiens,  (sapient)  is  (107). 

Death,  mors,  (mort)  is  (f.). 

To  renew,  redintSgrare. 

Rich,  dives,  (divit)  is  (107). 

To  terrify,  terrer6. 

II.  Example, 

The  inhabitants  carry  on  a  j  Incolae  bellum  §,trox  gerunt 


Stag-,  cerviis,  L 

Powerful,  potens,  (potent)  U  (107). 

Scout,  explorator,  is  (m.). 

To  kill,  occIdSrg. 

Battle,  praelium,  1. 

And,  et  (conj.). 

Swift,  velox,  (veloc)  is. 

Horse,  6quus,  I. 

Citizen,  civis,  (civ)  is  (c,  25,  IV.). 


fierce  war.  I  [Refer  to  78,  II.,  a.] 

III.  Translate  into  English, 

Incolae  bella  magna  et  Strocia  genmt. — Nmitiiis  Telox  ad  castr^ 
vgnit. — Eqmtes  veloces  ad  sylvam  festinant. — Vir  sapiens  mor- 
tem non  timet.— Discipiilus  memoriam  tenaceni  habet. — Me- 
moria  in  pueris  est  tSnax. — Imperator  nuntium  velocem  mitt^t. 
— Principes  fortes  praelium  atrox  redintegrabunt. — Cervus  ve- 
lox est. — Equus  velox  currit. — Canes  sunt  veloces. — Sapiens 
(82,  I.,  R.)  non  semper  dives  est. — Divites  non  semper  beatJ 
sunt. — Princeps  potens  legates  mittit. — Principes  potentes 
captivos  occidunt. — Imperator  principes  omnes  convocat. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin, 

The  thick  woods  terrify  the  swift  messenger. — The  fierce 
battle  tei-rifies  all  the  inhabitants. — The  noble  general  was  prais- 
ing the  swift  messenger. — The  illustrious  consul  sends  ambas- 
sadors to  (63,  I.,  1^")  the  powerful  chief. — The  powerful 
chief  will  kill  all  the  prisoners. — Rich  (men)  are  not  always 
wise. — ^The  wise  (man)  does  not  fear  the  fierce  battle. — The 
^  soldiers  praise  the  rich  citizen. — The  memory  in  boys  is  al- 
ways tenacious. — Dogs  and  horses  are  swift. — The  consul 
will  not  renew  the  fierce  battle. — The  illustrious  general  will 
recall  the  swift  horse-soldiers. — Rich  citizens  fear  fierce  wars. 
— The  fierce  battles  were  teiTifying  all  the  hostages. — The 
wise  general  calls-together  all  the  ambassadors. — The  fierce 
battle  will  be  renewed. — All  the  prisoners  will  be  killed  by  the 
powerful  chiefs  (93,  II.). — The  swift  messengers  are  frighten- 
ed.— Great  wars  are  carried  on. — Rich  citizens  are  killed. 


§  13. 
FOURTH  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

LESSON  XVIIL 
Nouns. — Fourth  Declension. 
(110.)  The  Fourth  Declension  comprises  all  nouns 
whose  gen.  sing,  ends  in  us  {long).     The  nom.  ending 
iov ^masculines  is  u  s,  and  for  neuters  u  ;  e.  g.,  f  r  u  c  t- 
u  Sffi-uit,  masc. ;  c  o  r  n  -  u,  horn,  neut. 
(111.)  The  case-endings  are  as  follows: 


Sing. 

Ma«c. 

Neut. 

Plur. 

Masc. 

Neut. 

N.  and  V. 

US. 

U. 

N.  and  V. 

us. 

ua. 

Gen. 

US. 

US  or  u. 

Gen. 

Mm. 

uum. 

Dat. 

Ul. 

u. 

Dat. 

Ibus. 

ibus. 

Ace. 

um. 

u. 

Ace. 

us. 

ua. 

Abl. 

u. 

u. 

Abl. 

ibus. 

ibus. 

(112.)  By  adding  these  endings  to  the  stems  fruct- 
and  corn-,  we  get  the 


PARADIGM.* 


Sins-,  fruit  (m.). 

Plur.,  fruit. 

Sing.,liorn(ii.). 

Plur..  horns. 

N.  and  V. 

ftuct-us. 

fhict-us. 

Gen. 

fraet-us. 

fruct-uum. 

N.,  A.,  V. 

corn-u. 

com-tta. 

Dat. 

fract-ui. 

fruct-Ibus. 

Gen. 

corn-US,  or  u. 

com-uum. 

Aec. 

fract-um. 

fract-us. 

Dat.,  Abl. 

com-u. 

corn-ibiis.  t 

Abl. 

fruct-u. 

fruct-ibus. 

1 

[Rem.  1.  The  following  take  u  b  u  s  in  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  instead  of 
ibus,  viz.,  acus  (f),  needle;  areus  (m.),  bow ;  artus  (m.),  joint; 
fieus  (S.), Jig-tree;  lacus  (m.),  lake;  partus /m.),  birth;  portus 
[m.), harbor ;  querevis  (S-),  oak ;  specus  (m.),  den;  tribus  (f.), 
tribe;  peeu  (n.),  cattle;  v6ru  (n.),  a  spit^'l 

2.  The  feminine  nouns  of  this  declension  are,  acQs,  needle;  anus, 

*  The- fourth  declension  is  only  a  contracted  form  of  the  third :  thus. 
^  N.      fruct-us. 

G.      fruct-uis,  contr.  fructus. 
D.      fruct-uT. 

Ace.  fruct  uim,  eontr.  fructum,  &c. 
t  The  following  verses  embrace  these  : 

Arcvis,  acus,  portus,  vgru, 

Ficus,  lac\is,  artus, 
SpgdJs,  querciSs  :  also,  pScu, 
Tribtis  too,  and  partfif. 


NOUNS. FOURTH  DECLENSION. 


4d 


old,  woman;  domus,  house;  flcus,  fig  ;  mSnus,  hand;  niirus, 
daughter-in-lato  ;  ^ on fi ens,  gallery  ;   tribus,  tribe;   querctta, 
oak.    Also,  Idus,  -uum  (used  only  in  plural),  the  Ides.* 
3.  Domus  (f.),  house,  is  thus  declined : 


r 


ir. 


N.,  V.  • 
dom-us. 

dbm-us. 


G. 

-us.  ? 

-uum.    l 
-orum.  ^ 


D. 

-uT. 

-ibus. 


Ace. 


-OS, 

-lis  (rarely). 


Abl. 
-o. 

-ibus. 


4.  The  gen.  domi  is  used  only  in  the  sense  of  at  home;  e.  g.,  ddml 

m  e  oe,  a^  my  home,  at  my  house. 
(113.)  EXERCISE. 

I.   Vocabulary. 


.Grief,  luctus,  fist  (m.). 
To  lay  aside,  deponerS. 
Sadness,  moeror,  orisf  (m.). 
Tempest,  procella,  89. 
To  raise,  toUere. 
Wave,  fluctus,  lis  (m.). 
Star,  sidus,  (sider)  is  (n.)  (102). 
Shore,  llttus,  (iTttor)  is  (n.)  (102). 
Wind,  ventus,  i  (m.). 
Roll,  volvgrg. 

Boundary,  finis,  (fin)  Ts  (m.). 
2V^e  Rhine,  Hhenus,  L 
Ship,  navis,  (nav)  is  (f.). 

HelvStii    partem     copiarum 
Rheuiim  transducunt. 


To  lead,  over,  or  across,  transducers. 

Approach,  adventus,  us  (m.). 

To  await,  expectare. 

Singing,  eantiis,  (is  (m.). 

Fmit,  fructus,  us  (m.). 

To  adorn,  omare. 

Four,  quattuor  (indeclin.). 

To  build,  aedificarg. 

Horn,  comu,  us  (n.). 

Army,  exercltus,  iis  (m.). 

Harbour,  portus,  us  (m.). 

Enemy,  hostls,  (host)  is  (c,  25,  IV.). 

Bird,  avis,  (av)  is  (f.). 

II.  Examples. 
(a)    The    Helvetians     lead 

'part  of  their  forces  across 

the  Rhine. 
(6)  Casar  leads  a  great  ar-    Caesar     magniim    GermanO- 

my  of  Germans  across  the       rum     exercitum     trans 

Rhine.  Rhenum  ti-ansduclt. 

Rule  of  Syntax.— {a)  Verbs  compounded  with  the  prepo- 
sition trans  are  generally  followed  by  two  accusatives ;  e. 
g-.,  partem  and  Rhenum  in  {a). 

(b)  But  sometimes  the  preposition  is  repeated ;  e.  g.,  trans 
in  (6).    - 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Helve  til  Casdris  (38,  b)  adventum  expectabant. — Adventa 

*  Acus,  manus,  tribus,  domus,  porticus,  and  Idtts.    The  rest  are  fem.  by 
the  general  rule  (25,  II.). 
i  Masr6r  =  silent  grief;  lucttta  =  mourning. 

E 


50  NOUNS. FOURTH  DECLENSION. 

(abl.,  55,  a)  Caesaris  hostes  terrentur. — Avis  puellam  cantu  (55, 
a)  delectat. — Fiuctus  arbores  {acc.pl.)  ornant. — Fructus  terrse 
agncolam  delectant. — Pater  domus  {ace.  pi.)  quattuor  aedifica- 
bit. — Naves  in  portu  sunt. — Regina  luctum  deponit. — Sapientes 
luctum  et  mcerorem  deponunt. — Procella  magnos  fiuctus  {ace. 
pi.)  toliebat. — Procella  fiuctus  {ace.  pL)  ad  sidera  tollit. — Puer 
tauriim  cornu  (abl.,  55,  a)  tenet. — Cornua  cervi  magna  sunt. — 
Fiuctus  magni  ventis  (55,  a)  volvuntur. — Legatiis  exercitum  du- 
c'it. — Legatiis  ab  ^duis  (from  the  ^Eduans  ;  i.  e.,  their  country) 
exercitum  ducit. — Agilcola  taurum  cornibiis  (55,  a)  tenebat. — 
Adventiis  patiis  puellam  delectabit. — CcBsar  exercitum  flumen 
transducit  (113,  II.,  a). — Legatiis  per  fines  Helvetiorum  exer- 
citiim  diicet. — Ai'iovistiis  Germanos  ti'ans  Rheniim  ti'ansdilcit 
(113,  II.,  b). 

Rem.  Home  is  translated  by  do  mum,  the  ace.  of  domus;  thus,  The 
sailor  leads  the  hoy  home — ^Nauta  puerum  do  mum  ducit. 

IV.   Translate  into  Latin. 

My  father  will  build  four  houses. — The  tempest  is  rolling 
great  waves  to  the  shores  (63, 1.,  1^^). — Vast  waves  are  raised 
to  the  stars  by  tempests. — The  turbid  sea  is  rolling  va«t  waves 
to  the  shores. — The  farmer  leads  the  girls  home  from  {ah)  the 
city. — Caesar  will  lead  the  army  over  the  turbid  river. — Cassius 
leads  the  army  through  the  boundaries  of  the  ^duans  and 
Helvetians. — The  Helvetians  await  the  coming  of  Csesai*. — 
The  boy  will  hold  the  bull  by  the  horns  (55,  a). — The  farmer 
is  delighted  by  the  fruits  (55,  a)  of  the  earth. — The  king  lays 
aside  his  griefs  and  sadness. — The  singing  of  the  birds  (aviiim) 
will  delight  the  soldiers. — The  ti'ees  are  adorned  by  many  fruits. 
— There  are  many  large  ships  in  the  harbour. — The  winds  raise 
the  great  waves  to  the  stars. — The  lieutenant  was  leading  the 
army  of  the  ^duans  across  the  Rhine.  (Repeat  trans  (113, 
II.,  h)  ). — The  horns  of  bulls  are  large. — The  queen  will  lay 
aside  her  grief  and  sadness. — The  master  sends  his  slaves  home 


§14. 
FIFTH  DECLENSION  OF  NOUNS. 

LESSON  XIX. 
Nouns. — Fifth  Declension. 
(114.)  The  J<'ifth  Declension  comprises  all  nouns 
whose  gen.  ending  is  e  i.     The  nom.  ending  is  e  s. 

(115.)  There  are  but  few  nouns  of  this  declension, 
and  they  are  all  feminine  except  dies,  day,  and  me- 
ridies,  mid-day;  and  even  dies  is  fern,  in  the  sing, 
when  it  means  a  fixed  day. 

(116.)  The  case-endings  are  as  follows: 


Sing. 
Plur. 

N.V. 

es. 

es. 

G. 

61. 
erum. 

D. 

ebus. 

Ace. 
em. 

es. 

Abl. 
e. 

ebfls. 

Hem.  In  the  gen.  and  dat.  the  e  in  e  i  is  long  when  a  vowel  stands  be- 
fore it ;  e.  g.,  di-el:  short  when  a  consonant  stands  before  it ;  e.  g., 
fid-ei. 

(117.)  By  adding  the  endings  to  the  stems  r-  and 
di-,  we  get  the 

PARADIGMS. 


Thing  (f.). 
Singular. 

N.V. 

G. 

D. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

r-es. 

r-el. 

r-el. 

r-em. 

re. 

Plural. 

r-es. 

r-erum. 

r-ebiis. 

res. 

r-ebus. 

Dayim). 

Singular. 

di-6s. 

di-el. 

di-el. 

di-gm. 

dT-e. 

Plural. 

dT-es. 

di-erum. 

di-ebiis. 

di-es. 

di-ebus. 

Rem.  Only  res,  dies,  sp6cies,  have  the  plur.  complete;  the  gen., 
dat., and  abl.  plur.  are  wanting  in  all  others. 

(118.)  EXERCISE. 


I.   Vocabulary. 


Hope,  spes,  6i. 

Day,  dies,  el  (m.). 

To  appoint,  constitiierS. 

To  lead  out,  educerg. 

To  lead  back,  reducerS. 

Line  of  battle,  acies,  el. 

To  draw  up,  instruere. 

About,  circiter  {prep,  with  ace). 

About  mid-day,  circitfir  meridiem. 

Victory,  victOrift,  ae. 


Mid-day,  mgrldies,  el  (m.). 

Sixth,  sextus,  a,  Qm. 

Reward,  praemium,  i. 

Sun,  sol,  (sol)  Is  (m.). 

Setting,  occasus,  us. 

Seventh,  septimus,  a,  ilm. 

Out  ofeores.  {prep,  with  ablatiro). 

Faith,  promise,  fides,  ei. 

The  next,  postfirus,  &,  tlm 

Tojight,  pagnarft. 


52  NOUNS. riFTH  DECLENSION. 


Caesar  aciem  instriiit. 
Postero  die  castra  movent. 


II.  Examples, 
{a)  Casar  draws  up  the  line 

of  battle. 
{h)  The  next  day  they  move 
the  camp. 
(c)  Rule  of  Syntax. — The  point  of  time  at  which  any  thing 

occm's  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  ;  e.  g.^   in  {b)  postero 

die. — At  sun-set  =  solis  occasu. 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Spes  victorias  milites  delectat. — Milites  spe  (93,  II.,  R.)  vie 
toriae  delectantiir. — Dies  venit. — Caesar  diem  constitiiit. — Caesar 
diem  ciim  legatis  constituit. — Imperator  fortis  exercitum  educit, 
et  aciem  instruit. — Circiter  meridiem  pugnant. — Caesar,  circiter 
meridiem,  exercitum  in  castra  reducit. — Sexto  die  (118,  11. ,  c) 
Caesar  exercitum  ex  castris  educit. — Spes  praemiorum  pueros 
delectat. — Piigri  spe  praemiorum  delectantur. — Soils  occasu 
Helvetii  castra  movebant. — Septimo  die  Belgae  copias  omnes 
ex  castris  educebant. — Solis  occasu  Ariovistiis  aciem  instruit. 
— Circiter  meridiem  proelium  redintegrabunt. — Consul  clariis 
diem  cum  legfitis  constituit. — Principes  nobiles  fidem  violant. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  hope  of  victory  delights  the  noble  chiefs. — The  consul 
about  mid-day  leads  out  the  army  and  renews  the  fierce  battle. 
— The  powerful  chiefs,  at  the-setting  of-the-sun  (118,  II.,  c), 
kill  all  the  prisoners. — The  day  will  come. — The  consul,  at  the 
setting  of  the  sun,  will  renew  the  great  battle. — At  the  setting 
of  the  sun  the  great  battle  will  be  renewed. — On  thfe  sixth  day 
all  the  forces  will  be  led  back  to  the  camp. — The  Germans  ap- 
point a  day  with  Caesar. — The  next  day  the  Germans  move 
(their)  camp — Ariovistus,  on  the  next  day,  draws  out  the  line 
of  battle. — Caesar  appoints  the  mid-day  with  the  ambassadors. — 
About  mid -day  the  messengers  come. — About  mid-daj'' the  con- 
sul will  come. — Caesar  will  not  violate  (his)  promise. 


§  15. 
PRONOUNS.     ^XX.— XXXI.) 


LESSON  XX. 

Prontuns. — Substantive- Personal  and  Adjective- 
Personal. —  Verbs,  First  Person. 

(119.)  The  three  pronouns  ego,  I;  tii,  thou;  su'i,  of 
himself,  herself,  itself,  are  called  Substantive,  because 
they  are  used  as  substantives,  not  as  adjectives ;  and 
Personal,  because  they  express  the  person  speaking, 
the  person  spoken  to,  and  the  person  spoken  of. 

(120.)  The  Substantive-Personal  Pronoun  of  the 
first  person  is  thus  declined : 


Noin.                          Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Ab,.                   1 

Sing.    6g6,  I.       mel,  of  me. 
Plur.    nos,  we.     ^o«JrI       )^f^ 
1                              nostrum,  J 

mlhl,  to  me. 
nobis,  to  us. 

me,  me. 
nos,  us. 

me,  by  me,  &c.     j 
nobis,  by  us,  &c.[ 

(121.)  Derived  from  the  Substantive-Personal  Pro- 
nouns are  the  Adjective-Personal  or  Possessive  Pro- 
nouns ;  called  Adjective,  because  they  agree  with 
nouns ;  and  Possessive,  because  they  express  possession 
(my,  thy,  his,  &c.). 

(122.)  The  Adjective-Personal  Pronouns  of  ihe  first 
person  are  declined,  in  both  sing,  and  plur.,  like  adjec- 
tives of  the  First  Class  (76,  77,  a).     They  are, 

(a)  Derived  from  mel,         N.  m6us,  mea,    meum,  my,  rnhie. 

G.  mel,  meae,    mel,  of  my  (voc.  masc-  ml). 

&c.  &c.  (like  bonus,  76.) 

{b)         "        from  nostrl,    N.  noster,  nostra,     nostrum,  our,  ours, 

G.  nostrl,  nostroe,    nostrl,  of  our. 

Sec.  Sec.  (like  p  u  1  n  h  6  r,  77,  a). 

(123.)  The  follow^ing  forms  of  Verbs  in  the  first  per 
son  must  now  be  learned : 

E2 


M 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


FIRST    CONJUGATION  :    FIRST    PERSON    ENDINGS. 


INFIN.  ACT.,  are. 

INFIN.  PASS.,  art.                                 j 

Indie,  present. 

Imperfect. 

Future.                  j 

1st  Sing. 
1st  Plur. 

Act.        Pass. 
6.            or. 
amiis.      amur. 

Aa. 
abam. 
abamus. 

Pass. 
abar. 
abamiir. 

Act. 
abo. 

abimus. 

Pass. 
iibor. 
ablmur. 

(124.)  Thus,  from  the  stem  am,  of  am- a  re,  to  love, 
we  have ; 


INFIN.  ACT.,  dmdre,  to  love. 


INFIN.  PASS.,  amarl,  to  be  loved. 


Indio.  Pre3, 


Inipprfect 


Act.      I      Pass.  Act. 

am-6,  am-6r,  jam-abam. 

I  love.  \  I  am  loved.  Vl  was  loving; 
am-amiia, :  am -am  ur,  |  am-abam  us, 
we  love.     ,  we  are  loved.  \  [we  were  loving. 


am-abar, 
I  was  loved. 
am-abamur. 


A  a. 
am-abd, 
I  shall  love. 
am-abimus. 


we  were  loved,  we  shall  love. 


Pass. 
am-abor, 
/  shall  be  loved. 
am-abimur, 
ice  shall  be  loved. 


[Rem.  The  student  will  learn  the  passive  endings  readily  by  observing 
that  r  is  the  passive  characteristic,  which  is  added  to  the  active ;  the  con- 
sonant ending  of  the  active,  where  it  has  one,  being  dropped.] 
(125.)  EXERCISE. 

I.  Vocahulary. 

Book,  liber,  bri  (m.),  (64). 

Friend,  amicus,  I  (m.). 

Brother,  frater,  (fratr)  is  (m.). 

Cicero,  Cicevo,  (Cic6r6n)  is  (m.). 

Sister,  sorOr,  (soror)  is  (f.). 

With    (i.   e.,  at  one's  house),  ftpud 

(prep.  ace). 
Fault,  culpa,  85. 
Yesterday,  heri  (adv.). 

II.  Examples. 
(a)  I  have  a  hook. 


All    my    (possessions),   omnia    meft 

(neut.  pi.). 
Five,  quinque. 
Sharply,  dcriter. 
To-morroio,  eras  (adv.). 
Very  much,  greatly,  valde  (adv.). 
To  blame,  vTtuperarS. 
To  si7ig,  cantare. 
Three,  tres,  tiia  (adj.  of  Class  II.). 


Est  mlhi  liber  (i.  e.,  there  is 
a  book  to  me). 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  dative  case  is  used  with  est  or  sunt, 
to  denote  the  person  who  has  or  possesses  something.* 
The  thing  possessed  is  nom.  to  est  or  sunt. 


Puer   meciim   in  horto  heri 
ambulabat. 


(6)  The  hoy  was  walking 
with  we  in  the  garden  yes- 
terday. 

Rule  of  Position. — The  preposition  cum  is  suffixed  to  the 
personal  pronouns ;  e.  g.,  m e c u  m,  icith  me;  n o bi s c u m, 
with  us,  instead  of  cum  me,  ciim  nobis. 
[Recollect  that  the  personal  and  possessive  pronouns  are  not  expressed 
in  Latin,  unless  emphasis  or  perspicuity  demands  it.] 

*  This  is  called  the  Dative  of  Possession,  and  shonld  always  be  referred 
to  as  such  by  the  pupiL 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. FIRST  PERSON.  55 

III.  Translate  into  English. 

Ego  canto,  amicus  audit. — Ego  et  frater  ambulamus.* — Ego 
St  filius  meus  festlnamiis. — Sunt  mihi  tres  libri  (125,  II.,  a). — 
Sunt  mihi  quattuor  equi  et  quinque  canes. — In  horto  ambiila- 
bam. — A  bonis  (82,  I.,  R.)  amabor. — Cicero  a  me  laudatiir. — 
Hostes  nobiscura  (125,  II.,  b)  acriter  pugnant. — Heri  in  agris 
ambiilabamus. — Pater  ad  nos  nuntium  raittet.- — Culpa  nostra  est. 
— Cras  in  horto  caenabimus. — Delectabamiir. — Pueri  in  horto 
noblscum  anibulabunt. — Litterariim  studiumf  (38,  h)  mihi  (106, 
II.)  utile  erit. — A  magistr5  laudabar. — Omnia  mea  mecum 
porto. — Ego  a  fratre  valde  amor. — Nos  laudamur,  puellae  vitu- 
peratitur. — Nos  a  magistro  verberabimur. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

We  praise  the  beautiful  girl. — We  have  (125,  II.,  a)  four  large 
cups — I  have  (=  there  are  to  me)  four  sons  and  three  daughters 
(125,  II.,  a). — We  shall  praise  Ceesar's  brave  soldiers. — I  walk, 
my  friend  rides. — I  and  my  sister  will  ride.* — 1  and  my  brother 
will  walk*  in  the  king's  garden.^ — I  and  my  father  will  sup*  in 
the  garden  to-morrow. — We  shall  always  ])raise  the  wise  and 
good. — The  works  of  Cicero  will  be  praised  by  us  (93,  II.,  6), 
the  works  of  Caesar  by  the  soldiers. — The  fault  is  mine. — We 
have  many  large  cups  (125,  II.,  a). — I  have  three  beautiful  sisters. 
— I  have  four  brothers. — My  father  will  walk  with  me  in  Cae- 
sar's garden  [Cecsdris  in  horto). t — The  study  of  literature  is 
useful  to  us  (106,  II.). — To-day  we  shall  sup  with  (apud) 
Crassus. 


LESSON  XXI. 

Pronouns,  Personal  and  Possessive,  continued. — Verhs^ 
First  Person,  continued. 
(126.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  endings  for 
theirs/  person  in  verbs  of  the 

*  If  a  predicate  have  two  or  more  nominatives,  connected  by  a  conjunc- 
tion, it  takes  generally  the  plural  number ;  and  if  the  nominatives  be  of 
dilferent  persons,  the  verb  takes  the  first  person  rather  than  the  second, 
the  second  ratlier  than  the  third. 

t  Litterarum  studium=^Ae  pursuit  (or  study)  of  literature  (letters). 

X  In  all  such  cases,  put  the  prep,  betiveen  the  genitive  and  the  nouo 
governed  by  the  prep. 


56 


VERBS. FIRST  PER&ON. 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


STEM. 

SIXGULAK  ENmNGS. 

PLURAL  ENDINGS.            |1 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

mon- 
mon- 
mon- 

Active. 

e6. 

ebftm. 

ebd. 

Passive. 

eor. 

ebar. 

ebor. 

Active. 

emus. 

ebamus. 

ebimus. 

Pa-HSive. 

emilr.     ' 
ebamur. 
ebimur. 

[Rem.  The  student  will  learn  these  fonns  readily  by  obseiving  that 
they  differ  chiefly  from  those  of  the  Jlrst  conjugation  in  having  e  be- 
fore the  last  syllable  instead  of  a.  By  adding  the  endings,  as  above 
given,  to  the  stem  mon-,  w^hich  stands  at  the  left  hand,  he  will  fonn 
the  paradigm  of  m  one  re,  to  advise] 

(127.)   The  following  are  some  of  the  endings  for 
the  first  person  in  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations. 

THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


STEM. 

SINGULAR  ENDINGS. 

PLURAL 

ENDINGS. 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

reg- 
reg- 
reg- 

Active. 

6. 

ebam. 
km. 

Passive. 

or. 

ebar. 

ar. 

Active. 

imus. 

ebamus. 

emiis. 

Passive. 

Tmnr. 

ebamur. 

emur. 

[Hem.  Compare  these  with  the  endings  of  the  2d  conj.,  and  observe 
that, 

1.  In  the  pres.  e  is  dropped  in  the  sing.,  and  i  assumed  in  the  plur. 

2.  The  imperfect  is  precisely  the  same. 

3.  But  the  future  is  a  new  form. 

4.  By  adding  the  eiidiugs  to  the  stem  placed  at  the  left,  you  form  the 
paradigm  of  r  e  g  6  r  e,  to  rule.] 


(128.) 


FOURTH   CONJUGATION. 


STEM. 

SINGULAB  ENDINGS. 

PLURAL  ENDINGS.       ^ 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

aud- 
aud- 
aud- 

Active. 

id. 

iebam. 
iam. 

Passive. 

ior. 

iebar. 

iar. 

Active. 

Imus. 

iebamus. 

iemiis. 

Passive. 

Imilr. 

iebamur. 

iemur. 

fRem.  Observe  that  the  endings  of  the  4tb  conj.  differ  from  those  of 
the  3d  simply  by  prefixing  the  letter  ?.  In  the  1st  plur.  the  t  pre 
fixed  combines  with  that  of  the  endings  imiis,  imur,  and  forms  Imua 
imur.] 


(129.) 

I.  Vocabulary. 

Fierce,  ferox,  (feroc)  Is  (107). 
Nothing,  nihil  (neut.  indecl.). 
To  be  well,  valere. 
To  arrange,  disponere. 

II.  Example, 

I  have  nothing  to  do 
Antony  (125,  XL,  a). 


EXERCISE. 


with 


Wicked,  improbus,  a,  xim. 
Garrison,  proesidiiim,  L 
Latin,  Latiniis,  a,  iim. 
Antony,  Anton'iis,  i. 

Nihil  est  mihi  cum  Antonio 
(i.  c,  there  is  nothing  to  me 
with  Antony). 


VERBS. SECOND  PERSON 


67 


III.  Translate  into  English, 

2d  Conjugation. — Ego  et  frater  valemiis  (125,  III.*). — A 
magistro  docebimur. — Linguam  Latinam  doceo. — A  patrn  m5- 
ueor. — A  magisti-o  bono  docemur. — Ab  hoste  timebar. — Hos- 
tium  adventum  non  timebo.  ScZ  Conjugation. — Regebamiir. — 
Praesidia  disponebamus. — A  Deo  regimiir. — Ego  exercitiim 
ducam. — A  filio  meo  relinquar. — Liipos  f^roces  occidimus. 
Ath  Conjugation. — Castella  muniemus. — Avium  cantiim  audi- 
mus. — (h'as  ad  urbem  veniam. — Nihil  est  mihi  cum  improbis. 
— Nihil  est  nobis  cum  hostibus. 

IV.  Translate  into  Latin. 

2d  Conjugation. — I  and  my  son  are  well  (125,  III.*). — 
We  shall  see  the  brave  soldiers. — I  am  taught  by  good  masters. 
— We  were  fearing  the  approach  of  the  enemy. — 1  was  teach- 
ing the  Latin  language. — We  shall  be  feared  by  the  enemy.— 
We  shall  be  advised  by  our  father.  3d  Conjugation. — We 
were  led  by  a  brave  general. — I  was  killing  three  wolves. — We 
are  ruled  by  a  good  liing. — We  shall  arrange  the  garrisons. — 
I  shall  bring  (dQcere)  my  daughter  from  (ab)  the  city. — We 
shall  lead  the  forces  of  the  Germans.  Ath  Conjugation. — We 
were  heard  by  the  master. — We  shall  sleep  in  the  little  town 
(89,11.). — We  shall  come  to  the  town  to-morrow. — I  shall  be 
heard  by  the  girls. — We  were  fortifying  the  towns. — We  have 
nothing  to  do  with  the  foolish  (129,  II.). — I  have  nothing  to  do 
with  Caesar. 


LESSON  XXIL 
Pronouns. — Substantive- Personal  and  Adjective-Per- 
sonal.—  Verbs,  Second  Person. 
(130.)   The  Substantive-Personal  Pronoun  of  the 
second  person  is  thus  declined  : 


I       Nom. 


Sing,  tu,  thov. 
jPlur.  vos,  you 


Gen. 


I)  at. 


tuT,  nf  thee.        itibl,  to  thee. 
vesti-L      }    of     -,  -     , 


te,  tJiee. 
vos,  you. 


V-l: 


tii,  tJio^i 
vos,  you. 


te,  by. 
vobis,  by. 


(131.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  endings  of  tho 
second  person  of  verbs  of  the 


68 


PERSONAL  PRONOUN. SECOND  PERSON. 


FIRST 

CONJUGATION. 

1 

STEM. 

SINGULAR  ENDINGS.        [ 

PLURAL  ENDINGS.                 j 

Pres. 
Imp. 
Fut. 

am- 
am- 
am- 

Acl. 

as. 

abas, 
abls. 

I'ass.           1 

aris.          1 

abarls. 

aberis. 

Act. 

utIs. 

abatis. 

abitls. 

Pass. 

ammT. 

abamini. 

abiniinl. 

(132.)  EXERCISE. 

I.  Vocabulary, 

Yesterday,  hCrl.  (adv.).  j  To  wound,  \'xilnerare. 

To-day,  hodie  (adv.).  I  Tojight,  pugnarS. 

II.  Translate  into  English. 

Cras  mecura  coenabis. — Tu  me  amas,  Sgo  te  arao. — VOa 
v5biscum  pugnatis. — Tu  cantas,  nos  audimiis. — In  hortd  ambu- 
labatis. — Tu  a  patre  valde  amaiis. — Vos  vituperamini,  nos  lau- 
damur. — Nihil  est  tibi  ciim  Csesare. — Cras  vobiscum  ccEnabo. 
— Nos  laudabimur,  vos  vituperabimini. — Nihil  vobJs  est  ciim  bo- 
nis.— Heri  ambulabatis. — Hodie  pugnabitis. — Laudabamini.^ — 
Vulnerabimini. — Vocatis. — Vocamini. — Amatis. — Aruamini. 
— Cantabatis. — Vocabamini. 

III.  Translate  into  Latin. 

To-day  ye  were  supping  with  us  (125,  II.,  h). — Ye  love  us, 
we  love  you. — Ye  were  singing,  we  were  heai'ing. — Ye  have 
nothing  to  do  with  the  king  (129,  II.). — Thou  wast  greatly 
loved  by  Caesar. — Ye  shall  be  praised  by  our  master. — Ye  shall 
oe  blamed  by  the  good  (82, 1.,  R.). — Ye  are  called  by  the  mes- 
senger.— Thou  fightest  with  thyself*  (125,  II.,  6).— Ye  shall, 
sup  with  us  to-morrow. — Thou  wilt  fight  to-morrow. — Thou 
wast  loving. — Thou  wast  loved. — Thou  wnlt  blame. — Thou 
wilt  be  blamed. — Ye  are  praising. — Ye  are  praised. — Thou 
woundest. — Thou  art  wounded. 


LESSON  XXIII. 

Pronouns,  Personal  and  Possessive,  continued. — Verbs, 
Second  Person,  Second  Conjugatio)i. 
(133.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  endings  for 
the  second  person,  in  verbs  of  the  

*  Tecilm. 


VERBS. SECOND  PERSON. 


59 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


1! 

STEM. 

SINGULAR  ENDINGS. 

PLURAL  ENDINGS. 

11 

Act. 

Pa.ss. 

Act. 

FiWS. 

Pres. 

mon- 

es. 

ens. 

etis. 

emini. 

Imp. 

moii- 

ebas. 

ebarls. 

ebatis. 

ebaiuTnT. 

1  Put. 

mon- 

ebis. 

eberls. 

ebitis. 

ebiminl. 

(134.)  The  Adjective-Personal  (or  Possessive)  Pro- 
nouns of  the  Second  Person  are,  tuus,  a,  um,  thy  ; 
and  V  e  s  t  e  r,  V  e  s  t  r  a,  V  e  s  t  r  ii.  m,  your. 

N.  tuiis,  a,  um,  thy,  thine. 

G.  tui,  ae,  i,  of  thy,  &cc. 

N.  vester,  vestrS,,  vesti-iim,  your. 

G.  vestri,  vestrae,  vestri,  of  your, 

(135.)  EXERCISE. 

1.   Vocabulary. 


(a)  Derived  from  tui, 

(b)  Derived  from  vestri. 


Thou  art,  es-(2d.  person  sing.  ind. 

pres.  of  esse). 
Ye  are,  estis  (2d  person  pi.  of  do.). 
/  was,  6rSm  (1st  imperf.  do.). 
Cause,  )  causa. 

For  the  sake  of,  )  causa  (abl). 
To  learn,  discgre. 

II.  Examples, 

(a)  N  e  is  an  interrogative  particle  used  in  asking  questions. 
It  is  annexed  to  the  vs^ord  to  which  it  especially  refers ;  c.  g.^ 


Of,  concerning,  de  (prep.  abl.). 
To  laugh,  riderS. 
To  rejoice,  gauderg. 
Safety,  salus,  (salut)  Is  (f.). 
Leader,  guide,  dux,  (due)  is  (m.). 
Why,  cur  (adv.). 
Because,  that,  quod  (conj.). 


(1 )  Do  you  teach  the  boy  ? 

(2)  Do  you  teach  the  boy  ? 

(3)  Do  you  teach  the  602/ .^ 


T  u  n  6  puerum  d6c6s  ? 
D  6  c  e  s  n  6  puerum  ? 
Puerumn6  doces  ? 
In  (1)  tu  has  the  emphasis;  in  (2)  doces;  and  in  (3) 
puerum. 
(6)  Ye  are  warned, /or  i/ze  I  Ves tree    s^lutis    causa 
sake  of  your  (own)  safety.  \      monemini. 
Rule  of  Position. — C  a  u  s  a,  for  the  sake  of  (the  abl.  of 
causa,  a  cause),  is  always  placed  after  the  genitive  which 
depends  on  it. 
(c)  I  was. your  leader.  jDux   ego    vester  dram. 

III.   Translate  into  English. 

Videsne  sei-vum  meum?  (135,  XL,  2). — Tua3  salutis  causa 
(135,  II.,  h)  moneris.  —  Cur  ridetis  ? — Vestrge  salutis  causa 
mbnBminl. — GaudeS  qu6d  tii  6t  patfir  tutis  valetis  (125,  III.,  *). 


60 


VERBS. SECOND  PERSON. 


— Videbasng  milites  ? — De  culpa  tua  monebans. — Cur  rideba- 
tis. — Hostium  adventum  non  timebis. — Tuae  salutis  causa  mfin- 
ebeiis. — Nos  discemus,  vos  docebimini. — Timetisne  CsBsaris 
adventum? — Esne  tu  beatus  ? — ^Culpa  tua  est  {the  fault  is  thine). 
•^— Pueri  in  horto  vobisciim  ambiilabant. — Mdgister  ego  vester 
eram  (135,  II.,  c). 

IV.   Translate  into  Latin* 

[The  emphatic  words  are  in  italics.] 
Did  you  see  your  master  ? — Do  you  fear  the  approach  of 
Caesar? — Are  you  happy? — You  were  warned  (advised)  for 
the  sake  of  your  own  safety. — Are  you  and  your  father  well  ? 
(125,  III.,  *). — The  fault  was  yours. — You  shall  see  the  ene- 
my, but  (sed)  shall  not  fear  (them). — I  am  your  friend. — I  was 
your  friend. — You  teach,  but  we  learn. — You  shall  teach,  but 
we  shall  learn. — ^Why  do  you  not  (non)  fear  the  master  ? — You 
were  warned  of  (d  e)  your  fault. — Do  you  see  your  slaves  ? — 
Are  you  Csesar  ? — Why  do  you  fear  the  master  ?— You  shall 
see  gi'eat  cities  and  many  men. — We  shall  sup  with  you  to-mor- 
row.— You  shall  be  warned,  for  the  sake  of  your  own  safety. — 
We  rejoice  that  you  and  your  daughter  are  well  (125,  III.,  *). 


LESSON  XXIV. 
Verbs,  Second  Person,  Third  and  Fourth  Conjugations, 
(136.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  endings  of 
the  second  person  in  verbs  of  the 


THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


STEM. 

ACTIVE  ENDINGS. 

PASSIVE  ENDINGS.                   | 

•2d  Sing. 

2d  Plur. 

2a  Sing. 

2d  Plur. 

Pres. 

reg- 

is. 

itis. 

eris. 

Tmini. 

Imper. 

reg- 

ebas. 

ebitls. 

ebaris. 

ebiimim. 

Fut. 

reg- 

es. 

etis. 

erls. 

eminl. 

(137.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  endings  of 
the  second  person  in  verbs  of  the 

FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


STEM. 

ACTIVE  ENDINGS. 

PASSIVE  ENDINGS.                   j] 

Pres. 
Imp. 

aud- 
aud- 
aud- 

2d  Sing. 

is. 

iebas. 

ies. 

2d  Piur. 

itis. 

iebatis. 

ietTs. 

2d  Siug. 

iris. 

iebaris. 

ierls. 

2d  Plur.           I| 

imini.           1 
iebamini.   \\ 
iemini.        |{ 

*  When  3/0M,  1/our,  occnr,  translate  them  both  in  sing,  and  plur.,  for 
the  sake  of  practice. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  61 

(138.)  Observe, 
(o)  That  the  present  ending-s  of  the  3d  and  4th  conjugations  are  nearly 

alike,  the  vowel  (i)  oi  the  fourth  being  long  (i). 
(h)  That  the  imperfect  and  future  endings  of  the  fourth  conjugation 

differ  from  those  of  the  third  by  prefixing  the  letter  i. 

EXERCISE. 

(139.)   Vocabulary. 


Plant,  planta,  oe. 

To  soio,  to  plant,  ser6r6. 

To  find,  invenire. 

Orator,  orator,  (orator)  Is  (m,). 

Voice,  vox,  (voc)  Ts  (f.). 

To  read,  legerg. 


Wlience,  und6  (adv.). 
Long,  longe  (adv.). 
Badly,  mal6. 
To  punish,  piinlrS. 
So,  tarn  (adv.). 
Bird,  avis,  (av)  Is  (f.) 


(140.)   Translate  into  English. 

2d  Conjugation. — Cur  non  scribis. — Arbores  et  plantas  s6r6- 
batis. — Hodle  ad  Csesarem  mitteris. — Curtain  male  scribis? — 
Ad  castra  reduce  mini. — Legis-ne  Ciceronis  opera  ? — Scribis- 
ne  epistolam  ad  Csesarem?  Ath  Conjugation. — Unde  venis? 
— Cur  tam  longe  dormis  ? — Magistrum  boniim  invenies. — Audis- 
-ne  magistri  vocem? — Cur  non  venietis? — A  Csesare  audiris. 
— A  magistrO  puniemini. — Orat5rem  audietis.— In  horto  dor- 
miebatis. — Cantum  avium  auditis. 

(141.)   Translate  into  Latin.     [Refer  to  135,11.] 

3d  Conjugation. — Are  you  writing  a  letter  ? — Thou  wast 
planting  a  tree  to-day. —  Were  (you)  reading  the  works  of  Cicero  ? 
— Why  do  you  read  »o  badly  ? — Are  you  writing  a  letter  to  the 
messenger? — Thou  wilt  read  Caesar  to-day. — Thou  art  sent 
to  the  camp. — Thou  wilt  be  led  by  the  ambassadors.  4th  Con- 
jugation.— Why  do  you  not  come  ? — Ye  shall  hear  the  voice  of 
Caesar. — Thou  wilt  sleep  in  the  camp. — Ye  shall  be  heard  by 
the  master. — Thou  shalt  be  punished. — Ye  are  heard. — Thou 
shalt  hear  the  singing  of  the  birds. 


LESSON  XXV. 
Pronouns. — Substantive- Personal  and  Adjective-Per 
sonal,  Third  Person. 
(142.)  The  Substantive  Pronoun  of  the  third  per- 
son IS  thus  decHned : 

F 


62 


PERSONAL  PRONOUN.- — THIRD  PERSON. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


suT,  of  himself  , 
herself,  itself 

sui,    of     them- 
selves. 


slbl,   to  him-  \se,  himself,  &.c.se,  by  himself, \ 

self,  &.C.  j     (Sec.                j 

sibi,  to  them-  se,  themselves. \se,    hy    thefmA 

selves.  selves,  Sec. 


(143.)  The  Adjective  Pronoun  of  the  third  person 

is  decUned  Uke  an  adjective  of  the  first  class :  thus, 

Derived  from  sui,  I  N/  suus,  a,  um,  his,  hers,  its,  his  own. 

I  G.  siii,     ae,  i,      of  his,  hers,  its,  &c. 

Rem.  Observe  that  siil  is  not  a  regular  pronoun  of  the  third  person, 
like  the  English  lie,  she,  it,  but  reflexive ;  e.  g.,  puer  se  laudat,  tin 
boy  praises  himself.  It  therefore  has  no  no'm.  ease.  [The  nom. 
pronouns  he,  she,  it,  are  not  often  expressed  in  Latin ;  but  when 
they  must  be,  a  demonstrative  pix»noun,  generally  hie,  is,  or  ills, 'is 
employed.] 


EXERCISE. 


(144.)    Vocabulary. 


Among,  intSr  (prep.). 

Com,  fnimentum,  I. 

From  (prep.)  a  or  ab.t 

A  legion,  legid,  (legion)  Is  (f ). 

To  rule,  command,  iniper-arg  (with 

dat.  of  person). 

To  send  away,  )  ,     . 

>  dImitt-erS. 


Hand,  manus,  us  (f.)  (112,  2). 
To  love  {with  esteem),  dilig-6rg. 
IZ'o  live,  vlv-6r6. 
To  contend,  contend-er6. 
To  defend,  defend-erg. 
To  burn,  inceud-ere. 
Townsman,  oppTdanus,  1. 
A  Sequanian,  Sequanus,  i. 

(145.)  Examples. 

(a)    Casar   calls  i)iyi^iacMS  I  Caesar  Divitiaciim  ad  s6  v6c3,t. 

to  himself. 
(&)    The  girl  writes  the  Ze^-    Puella  gpist6ia,m   mS,nu  suS. 

ter  with  her  oivn  hand.        I      scribit. 

[Rem.  Se  is  often  doubled,  for  the  sake  of  emphasis.] 


(c)  Men  ahvays  love  them- 
selves. 

{d)  The  good  live  not  for 
themselves,  but  for  all. 


Homines    semper    sese    dili- 

gunt. 
Boni    non    sibi,  sed  omnibus 

vivunt. 


(146.)   Translate  into  English. 

Hostes  inter  se  contendunt. — Oppidani  se  sudque  ab  hostJ- 
biis  defendebant. — Helvetii  oppida  sua  omnia  incendunt. — CfB- 
sar  tres  legiones  secum  liabet. — Consul  legates  ab  se  dimittet. 
• — Sapiens  omnia  sua*  seciim  portat. — Helvetii  et  Sequani  ob- 

*  Omnia  sua=  all  his  [projxTty) ;  the  noun  being  understood. 

t  A  is  used  before  consonants  only ;  fib  before  either  vowels  or  consonants 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


63 


sides  inter  sgse  dabant. — Boni  sese  non  diligunt.— HelvStii 
frumentiim  orane*  secum  portabant. — Improbi  sibi  semper  vi- 
vunt. — Sapiens  sibi  semper  imperat  (147). 

(147.)    Rule  of  Syntax. — The   Dative  is  used  with  some 
verbs  signifying  to  command,  to  rule,  to  obey. 

(148.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Good  men  do  not  praise  themseh'es. — The  townsmen  were 
fighting  with  each  other  (inter  s e). — The  wise  man  always 
carries  all  his  (property)  with  him. — Bad  men  ahvays  love  them- 
selves.— The  general  has  three  legions  with  him. — The  towns- 
men will  carry  all  their  corn  with  them. — Bad  men  do  not  rule 
themselves  (147). — The  iEduans  will  defend  themselves  and 
their  (property)  from  the  soldiers. — Caesar  was  dismissing  the 
messenger  from  him  self. — The  Germans  will  burn  their  villages 


LESSON  XXVI. 
Demonstrative  Pronouns. 
(149.)  The  Demonstrative  Pronouns  are  so  called 
because  they  are  used  to  point  out  an  object ;  e.  g.^ 
this,  that,  these,  those. 

(150.)  Is,  that  (often  used  for  he,  she,  it  (143,  R.), 
is  thus  declined;  also  idem,  the  very  same,  com- 
pounded of  i  s  and  d  e  m . 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Sinfrular. 

Plural.              1 

N. 

Is,  ea,  id. 

il,  eoe,  ea. 

Idem,     eadem. 
Idem. 

iidem,  eoedem, 

eaJem. 

G. 

ejtts. 

eorOm,  earum, 
eorum. 

ejugdem. 

eorundem,  ea- 
rundem,  eo- 
rundem. 

D. 

ex. 

us,  or  eis. 

eldem. 

ilsdem. 

Ace. 

eum,  gam,  Td. 

eos,  eas,  ea. 

gundem,     ean- 
dem,  Idem. 

eosdem,     e5s- 
dem,  eadem. 

Abl. 

eo,  ea,  eo. 

us,  or  eis. 

eodem,  eadem, 

ilsdem. 

eodem. 

(151.)  The  following  forms  of  the  verb  esse,  to  be, 
must  now  be  learned. 

*  F  r urn entiim  onmd  =»  all  their  com. 


64 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


TENSES. 

SINGULAR.                                                                1 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

1st. 

sum,  I  am. 
eram,  was. 
ero,  shall  or  will  be. 

2d. 

es,  thou  art. 

eras. 

ens. 

3d. 

est,  he,  she,  &.c.,is. 

erat. 

grit. 

PLURAL.                                                                   1 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

l8t. 

sumus,  we  are. 
eramus,  were. 
erimus. 

2d. 

estis,  ye  are. 

eratis. 

gritis. 

3d. 

sunt,  the^  are. 

grant. 

erunt. 

EXERCISE. 


prohibere. 


(152.)   Vocabulary. 

To  keep  off, 

To  prevent. 

To  refrain,  temperarg. 

Merchant,  mercator,    (mercator)   is 

(m.). 
Colour,  color,  (color)  is  (m.). 
Arid,  atqu6  (conj.), 
Plato,  Plato,  (Platon)  is. 

(153.)  Examples. 

p,)  The  Helvetians  contend 

with    the    Germans,    and 

keep  them  off  from  their 

boundaries, 
{b)  The  father  calls  his  {own) 

son  to  hv[n{self). 
(c)  The    father     calls     his 

daughter  and  her  son  to 

him{self). 

!^"  Observe  carefully,  that  if  his,  hers,  its,  refers  to  the  principal  sub- 
ject of  the  sentence,  it  is  expressed  by  the  possessive  (suus.,  a,  um);  but 
if  not,  by  the  genitive  (ejus)  of  the  demonstrative  (is,  ea,  id). 

(154.)   Translate  into  English. 

(1)  is,  ea,  id,  used  for  he,  she,  it  (personal). 

li  ab  injiiria  temperant. — Is  est  in  provincia  tua. — Merqa- 
tores  ad  eos  ssepe  veniunt. — Ab  lis  multa  (82,  I.,  R.)  poscimiis. 
— BelgsB  cum  ^duis  contendunt,  eosqiie  suis  finibiis  (153,  a) 
prohibent. 

(2)  I  s,  used  as  demonstrative,  this,  that ;  also,  i  d  e  m,  as  the  same 

*  Suisjinibus  is  in  the  ablative.  All  verbs  of  separating,  depriving.  Sec  . 
may  take  a  noun  in  the  ablative,  with  the  direct  object  in  the  accusative* 


Elegant,  elegans,  (elegant)  is. 
Gladly,  willi7igly,  libenter  (adv.). 
Way,  journey,  ItSr,  (itin6r)  is  (n.). 
Kingdom,  regmlm,  i. 
Flower,  flos,  (flor)  is  (m.). 
Writer,  scriptor,  (scriptor)  is  (m.) 
Never,  nunquam  (adv.). 


Helve  til  cum  Germanis  con- 
tendunt, eosqiie  suis  flni- 
biis  prohibent.* 

PatSr  f ilium  suum  ad  se  v6- 

cat. 
PatSr  filiam  suam  gt  f iliiim 

ejiis  ad  se  vocat. 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


65 


In  eo  itinere  Caesar  Grassura  videt. — Dumnorix,  ed  teniporS 
(118,  ii.,  c)  regaum  tenebat.— Non  semper  idem  floribus  (125, 
II.,  a)  est  color. — In  ea  provincia  sunt  quattuor  legiones. 

(3)  Distinction  between  ejus  and  suus,  a,  um. 

Cicero  est  scriptor  clarus  ;  ejus  libros  libenter  legimus. — 
Caesar  ad  se  Dumnorigem  atque  filiiim  ejus  vocabit. — Plato  est 
scriptor  elegans  ;  ejus  opera  libenter  lego. 

Dux  ego  vester  eram. — £s-ne  tu  Socrates  ? — Estisn6  beati? 
— Caesar  dux  vester  erat. 

(155.)    Translate  into  Latin. 

They  were  walking  in  the  garden  yesterday. — The  king 
will  give  them  (dat.,  54)  rewards. — They  are  in  Gaul. — Mer- 
chants never  come  to  them. — We  were  demanding  rewards  of 
(ab)  them. — In  that  province  Caesar  finds  many  deserters. — In 
that  province  there  are  three  legions. — At  that  time  (abl.,  118, 
II.,  c)  Caesar  was  leading  the  army. — Horses  (125,  II.,  a)  have 
not  always  the  same  colour. — Caesar  calls  Divitiacus  and  his 
brothers  to  him  (self). — Caesar  is  an  elegant  writer ;  we  read  his 
works  with  pleasure. — I  am  your  leader. — You  shall  be  our 
leader. — Caesar  was  our  leader. — The  iEduans  contend  with 
the  Helvetians,  and  keep  them  oflf  their  boundaries. 


^  LESSON  XXVII. 

Demonstrative  Pronouns^  continued. 
(156.)   The  Demonstrative  hie,   haec,   h5c,  this, 
points  out  an  object  which  is  present  to  the  speaker, 
and  is  called  demonstrative  of  the^r^^  person;  e.  g., 
this  hook  {of  mine) ,  h  i  c  1 1  b  e  r. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

hie,  haec,  hoc. 
hi,  hae,  hsDC. 

hujus. 

horum,  hariim, 
horiim. 

huic. 
his. 

hunc,  hanc, 

hoc. 
hos,    has, 

h^c. 

hoc,  hac,  hoc. 
his. 

Rem.  Hic  is  used  also  (as  was  stated  143,  R.)  for  he,  she,  it ;  e.  g.,  hi o 
dicit,  he  (this  man)  speaks. 

(157.)  Iste,  ista,  istud,  this,  that,  points  out  an 
F  2 


66 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


object  which  is  present  to  the  person  spoken  to,  and  is 
called  the  demonstrative  of  the  second  person  ;  e.  g.j 
that  hook  {of  yours),  iste  liber. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace.            1              Abl. 

Sing. 

iste,  ista, 

istius. 

istl. 

istum,  istam,  ista,  ista,  isto. 

istud. 

istud. 

Plur. 

isti,  istae, 

istorum,    aruin, 

istls. 

istos,  istas, 

istls. 

ista. 

orum. 

ista. 

Rem.  Ist6  is  often  used  to  denote  contempt;  e.  g.,  iste-ne  dicit? 
Does  thatfelloxo  speak  1 

(158.)  II le,  ilia,  illiid,  points  out  an  object  re- 
mote from  the  speaker  {that,  the  former,  opposed  to 
hie),  and  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  third  per- 
son. It  is  used  often  for  the  personal  pronoun  he,  she, 
U  (143,  R.). 

E^^  It  is  declined  throughout  like  istd,  ista,  istiid. 

Rem.  In  the  genitives,  istius,  illlus,  ipslus,  the  penult  T  is  long, 
contrary  to  the  general  rule  (24,  1)  that  a  vowel  before  another  is 
short. 

(159.)  Ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum,  is  properly  an  adjunc- 
tive pronoun,  as  it  is  added  to  other  pronouns ;  e.  g., 

I  (and  not  another)  praise  myself.      I  £go  me  ipse  laudd. 
J  praise  myself  (and  not  another).      |  JEgo  me  ipsiim  laudd. 


EXERCISE. 


(160.)   Vocabulary. 

opinion,  sententia,  oe. 
To  please,  placere. 
To  displease,  displicere. 
Soul,  animtis.  i. 
Proverb,  proverbiiim,  i. 
Lazy,  ignavus,  a,  um. 
Excellent, 


Celebrated, 


praeclarus,  a,  um. 


Animal,  animal,  (animal)  is  (neut.). 
Pleasing,  agreeable,  gratus,  a,  tlm. 
Base,  turpis,  e  (104). 
Friend,  amicus,  i. 
To  boast,  prsedicare. 
To  obey,  pavere  (vpith  dat.,  147). 
Old,  vetus,  (veter)  is  (108,  R.,  2). 
Song,  carmen,  (cannin)  is  (n.). 
Precept,  praeceptum,  I. 


Reason,  ratid,  (ration)  is  (f.). 

(161.)     Examples. 

{a)  ^\ns  opinion  pleases  me,  \'H.?RC   sententia   mihi  pldcSt 
XhBX  displeases  {me).  |      ilia  displicdt. 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS.  67 

Rule  of  Syntax. — Verbs  of  pleasing,  obeying,  persuading, 
commanding,  favouring,  and  the  reverse,ta\ie  the  Dative 
case. 


Iste  tuus  amicus  vir  clariis 

est. 
Animus  ipse  se  movet. 

Turpe  est  de  seipso  prs3- 
dicare. 


.  (6)  That  friend  of  yours  is 
an  illustrious  man. 

(c)  The  soul  itself  moves  it- 
self. 

(d)  It  is  base  to  boast  of  one'' s 
self. 

Mule  of  Syntax. — The  infinitive  is  used  as  the  subject  of 
a  verb,  and  is  then  regarded  as  a  noun  in  the  neuter  gen- 
der; e.  ^.,  prgedicare  (to  boast),  in  (d),  is  nom.  to  est, 
and  turpe  (base)  agrees  with  it  in  the  neuter. 

(162.)   Translate  into  English. 

(a)  Hi  pueri  magisti-o  parent. — Hae  littSrae  valde  me  delec- 
tant. — Ciceronis  libri  valde  mihi  placent :  eos  libenter  lego. — 
Hoc  bellum  grave  est. — Hie  puer  bonus  est,  ill6  ignavus. 

(b)  Ista  tua  filia  pulchra  est. — Istud  tuum  carmen  mihi  (106, 
II.,  c)  gi'atum  est. — Praeclara  sunt  ista  tua  praecepta. — Vetiia 

.illiid  proverbiiim  mihi  placet. 

(c)  Omne  animal  seipsiim  diligit. — Impgrator  ipsS  militibus 
(147)  imperat. — Ego  me  ipse  non  laudabam. — Tii  teipsum  laud- 
abis. — Sapiens  sib!  ipsi  imperat. 

{d)  Jucundiim  est  amare. 

(163.)  Translate  into  Latin. 

(a)  That  illustrious  precept  was-pleasing-to  (placebat)  Cato. 
— That  brave  general  will  command  the  soldiers. — The  soldiers 
willingly  obey  this  brave  general. — This  precept  pleases  me, 
that  displeases  (me). — The  works  of  Caesar  please  me  very 
much;  I  read  them  gladly  (libenter). 

{b)  That  horse  of  yours  is  a  beautiful  animal. — I  keep  in 
memory  (memoria  teneo)  that  excellent  precept  of  ycurs. — 
Those  songs  of  yours  are  pleasing  (giata)  to  me. — That  letter 
of  yours  was  delighting  me  very  much. 

(c)  The  soul  rules  itself  (161,  c)  by  reason  (ra,ti5ne,  55,  a). — 
The  poet  himself  praises  himself  (159). — Ccesar  himself  wiU 
command  the  legions  (161,  c). — The  soldiers  willingly  (libenter) 


68 


RELATIVE   PRONOUN. 


obey  Caesar  himself. — Do  you  (135,  II.,  1)  praise  yourself?-— 
Wise  men  themselves  always  rule  themselves  (147). 

{d)  It  is  pleasant  to  love  (one's)  friends. — It  is  base  to  boast 
of  (one's)  friends. — It  is  agrepable  to  please  (one's)  father. 


LESSON  XXVIII. 
(164.)  The   Relative  Pronoun  (whoy  which),  qu 
q  u  se,  quod,  is  thus  declined  : 


1 

Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl.               1 

Sing. 

Plur. 

• 

qui,  quae, 
quod. 

qui,  quae, 
quae. 

cujus. ' 

quorum,  quarum, 
quonim. 

cui. 
quibus. 

quem,    quam, 

quod, 
quos,  quas,  quae. 

quo,  qua,  quo.l 
qmbus. 

Rem.  Ci,uicunqu6,  quoecunqug,  quodcuuque  {whosoever,  which- 
soever, whatsoever)  is  declined  like  qui,  quae,  quod;  cuuque  be- 
ing simply  annexed  to  the  different  cases. 

(165.)  The  Relative  commonly  refers  to  some  preceding 
word,  which  is  therefore  called  the  antecedent ;  e.  g..  The  man, 
who  lives  well,  is  happy.  Here  7nan  is  the  antecedent;  who, 
the  relative.  The  sentence  in  which  the  relative  occurs  is  call- 
ed the  relative  sentence  ;  the  other  the  principal  or  antecedent 
sentence ;  e.  g.  (above),  the  man  is  happy,  is  the  principal  sen- 
tence :  who  lives  well,  the  relative  sentence. 
.EXERCISE. 

(166.)    Vocabulary. 

Poor,  egens,  (egent)  is  (108). 

Enough,  satis  (adv.). 

Nearest  to,  neighbours  to,  proximus, 

a,  ilm. 
To  dwell,  incolere  {intrans). 
To  inhabit,  incolere  [trans). 
Blood,  sanguis,  (sanguin)  Is  (m.). 
Also,  etiani  (conj.). 
Heart,  coi;  (cord)  is  (n.). 
To  despise,  contemnere. 
Magnanirtious,  magnanimus,  a,  iam. 
Honest,  Iwiidurahle,  honestus,  a,  iim. 


Fountain,  fons,  (font)  is  (m.). 

Water,  aqua,  se. 

Winter-quarters,  hibema,  drum  (pl.)t 

To  winter,  hifimarS. 

Arethusa,  Arethusa,  ae. 

To  return,  restore,  reddere. 

Virtue,  virtiis,  (virtut)  is  (f.). 

To  repel,  propulsare. 

To  vaunt,  ostentare. 

Fame,  famu,  ae. 

To  do,  to  %iake,  fScgrg. 

One,  unus,  a,  um. 


(167.)  Examples. 
(a)   The   boy,    who    reads, 
learns. 


P  u  6  r,  qui  ISgit,  disdt. 


il^^£ 


RELATIVE    PRONOUN. 


The  girl,  who  readsy  learns, 
{b)   The  boy,  whom  we  see, 

is  handsome. 
The  girl,  whom  we  see,  is 

handsome. 


Puella,  quae  legit,  discit. 
P  u  e  r,    quern    videmus,    est 

pulcher. 
Puella,  quam  videmus,  est 

pulchra. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  Relative  Pronoun  must  agree  witli 
its  antecedent  in  gender  and  number  (as  in  («)  ),  but  its 
case  is  fixed  by  the  construction  of  the  relative  sentence 
(e.  g.,  in  {a)  qui  is  norain.  to  legit:  in  (&)  quern  is 
ace,  governed  by  videmus). 


(c)  7  who  write. 
We  who  write. 


yi)  He  is  poor  who  has  not 
enough. 


Ego,  qui  s c r i b 6. 

Nos,  qui  scribimiis. 
Rule  of  Syntax. — The  verb  in  the  relative  sentence  agrees 
with  the  relative  in  number,  but  takes  the  person  of  the 
antecedent. 

(1)  Egens  est  is,  qui  non 
satis  habet. 

(2)  I  s    egens   est,    qui   non 
satis  ha,bet. 

(3)  Qui  non  sS,tis  hS,bet,  is 
egens  est. 

(4)  Qui    non    satfs    h&bet, 
egens  est. 

Rule  of  Position. — The  relative  generally  stands  at  the  be- 
ginning of  its  sentence,  and  (1)  as  near  to  its  antecedent 
as  possible.  (2)  Is  and  qui  are  made  emphatic  when 
is  begins  the  principal  sentence  and  qui  the  relative 
sentence ;  (3)  and  still  more  emphatic  when  the  relative 
sentence  stands  first.  (4)  The  antecedent  is  often 
omitted  entirely. 

(168.)  Translate  into  English. 

{a)  Proximi  sunt  Germanls,  qui  trans  Rheniim  incolunt.— " 
Orane  S,nima,l,  quod  sanguinem  habet,  habet  etiam  cor. — Cae- 
sar, tres  legiones,  q  u  sb  in  provincia  hiemabant,  ex  hibernis  edu- 
cit. — Omnia  (82,  I.,  R.)  quae  pulchra  sunt,  honestS,  sunt. 

(6)  Felix  est  rex,  quern  omnes  cives  araant. — In  hac  insu- 
la est  fons  aquae  dulcis,  cui  nom^n  est  Ar6thus&  (125,  II.,  a). 


70  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

— Arjovistiis  obsides  reddit,  quos  habet  ab  ^duis. — Galliaa 
sunt  partes  tres,  quai'iim  unam  Belgae  incolunt. 

{d)  (1)  Beat!  sunt  ii,  quorum  vita  virtute  (abl.,  55,  a)  rggi- 
tiir. — (2)  is  fortis  est,  qui  injuriara  propulsat. — (3)  Qui  se 
ostentat,  is  stultiis  dicitiir  {is  called  a  fool). — (4)  Qui  famam 
bonam  contemnit,  virtutem  contemmt. — Fortis  et  magnS-nimus 
est,  non  qui  facit,  sed  qui  propulsat  injuriam. 

(169.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

{a)  The  songs  which  we  hear  are  pleasant  (gi'ata)  to  us 
(106,  II.,  c). — The  king  who  rules  wisely  is  happy. — All  animals 
which  have  blood  have  also  hearts. — Cajsar  leads  across  the 
Rhine  the  five  legions  which  were  wintering  in  the  province. 

(6)  Happy  is  the  teacher  whom  all  (his)  scholars  love. — In 
that  (ea)  island  (there)  is  a  city  whose  name  is  {to  which  the 
name  is*^  125,  II.,  a)  Syracuse  (Syracusse). — In  this  (hac) 
city  there  is  a  fountain  whose  name  is  Arethusa. — Of  Britain 
(there)  are  three  parts,  of  which  (gen.)  the  English  inhabit 
one. 

{d)  (1)  Happy  is  he  whose  hfe  is  ruled  by  the  precepts  of 
vutue. — He  is  wise  who  diligently  serves  (colit)  the  gods. — 
(2)  They  are  brave  who  repel  an  injury. — (3)  They  who  vaunt 
themselves  are  called  fools. — (4)  Who  repels  an  injury,  \a 
brave  and  magnanimous. 


LESSON  XXIX. 
Interrogative  Pronoun, 

(170.)  The  Interrogative  Pronoun  is  precisely  likfa 
the  Relative  in  form,  excepting  that  for  the  nom.,  sing., 
and  masc.,  it  has  qui s,  and  for  the  nom.  and  ace,  neut., 
quid;  thus,  quis,  quae,  quid. 

(171.)  Quisnam,  qusenam,  quidnam,  express  a  more 
emphatic  interrogation  than  the  simple  q  u  i  s,  q  u  ae,  quid,  the 
syllable  nam  answering  to  our  English  " pray  ;"  e.  g.., 

Pray,  what  are  you  doing  ?  |   '  Quidnam  §,gis  ? 

*  S  u  n  t,  plm-al,  because  Sjr&ctstB  is  plural. 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


71 


(172.)  In  asking  questions,  the  different  cases  of  quis  can  be 
used  as  substantives  or  as  adjectives,  excepting  that 

(1)  In  the  nom.  sing,  masc,  quis  is  used  as  a  substantive. 
In  the  nom.  sing,  masc,  qui  is  used  as  an  adjective. 

(2)  In  the  nom.  and  accus.,  neut.,  quid  is  used  as  a  sub- 

stantive. 
In  the  nom.  and  accus.,  neut.,  quod  is  used  as  an  ad- 
jective. 


Quis  v6nit  ? 

Qui  homo  venit  ? 

Quis  homo  est  ? 

Quid  times  1 

Quod  periciilum  times  ? 


(1)  Who  comes  ? 
What  man  comes  ? 
Who  is  the  man  ? 

(2)  What  do  you  fear  ? 
What  danger  do  you 

fear  ? 

(173.)  The  answer  yes  is  given  by  repeating  the  verb  which 
isks  the  question ;  no,  by  repeating  the  verb  with  non.  Ver8 
{certainly),  added  to  the  verb  in  an  affirmative  answer,  gives  it 
more  emphasis  ;  e.  g., 


Are  you  writing  ? 

I  am  writing. 

Are  you  reading  ? 

I  am  noi  reading. 

Will  you  do  what  I  ask  ? 

Twill  certainly  do  {it). 


Scribis-ne  ? 
ScribS. 
Legis-ne  ? 
Non  leg6. 
Fdcies-nS  quse*  r5g8? 
Faciam  ver6. 


EXERCISE. 


(174.)   Vocabulary. 

Neio,  novus,  5,  um. 

Neios,  novl  (neut.  gen.  of  novus,  used 
with  a  neut.  adj.  or  pronoun). 

Nilm,  interrogative  particle,  used 
when  no  is  expected  as  the  an- 
swer. 

To  do,  agSrS. 

To  he  among,  intSressS  (inter + 
esse) ;  but  quid  interest  1  =  what 
is  the  difference  ? 


Between,  among,  hitSr  (prep.,  ace). 

Beast,  brute,  bestia,  ae. 

An  evil,  malum,  i. 

Without,  sing  (prep.,  abl.). 

Figure,  iignra,  se. 

Mortal,  mortalis,  S. 

Certainly,   verd   (affirmative  parti 

cle). 
To  carry,  vehSrS. 
Immortal,  immortalis,t  S. 


*  Haec,  quae,  plural,  should  be  translated  this,  what,  singular, 
t  Observe  the  force  of  in  prefixed  to  adjectives.    Mortalis  =  mortal i 
H  4-  tnortalis  =  immortalxs,  immortal. 


72  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


(175.)  Examples. 
(a)    What  is  the  news  ? 

(6)  Is  there  anything  new  1 

(There  is  not,  is  there  ?) 
(c)    Why  do  you  laugh  1 


Quid  est  novi?  (=What 
is  there  of  new  1) 

Niim  est  quidnam  novi? 
(N  u  m  expects  the  answer  no.),. 

Quidrides? 

(176.)   Translate  into  English. 

Quis  nos  vocat?  —  Cujus  hie  liber  est? — Quem  vides?— 
Quid  agis. — Quid  interest  inter  hominem  et  bestiara  ? — Quam 
domum  inv^nies  sinS  mails? — Quid  legis? — Epistolam. — Quae 
anaicitia  est  inter  improbos  ? — Num  Caesarem  times  ? — Non  ti- 
rneo. — Qua  in  urbe  (125,  IV.,  N.,  X)  siimus? — Quis  h6m6 
est? — £g6  sum  Caesar. — Num  animus  figur^m  habet? — Sunt 
ne  homines  mortales  ? — Sunt  vero. — Quid  tames  ?  Caesarem 
v6his. 

(177.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Who  calls  me  ? — Whose  are  those  books  ? — ^What  men  do 
you  see  ? — What  are  you  writing  ? — A  letter. — What  book  are 
you  reading  ? — What  is  the  difference  between  the  good  and 
the  wicked  ? — Who  is  the  soldier  ? — What  is  the  difference  be- 
tween wolves  and  dogs  ? — Do  you  not  fear  the  enemy  ? — I  do 
not  fear  (them.) — What  man  will  you  find  without  a  fault  (cul- 
pa) ? — In  what  town  are  we  ? — Whose  house  is  this  ? — What 
city  will  you  find  without  evils? — What  is  the  difference 
between  men  and  beasts  ? — What  do  you  fear  ?  You  are  car- 
rying the  king. — Are  men  immortal  (niim)  ? — They  are  not. 


LESSON  XXX. 
Indefinite  Pronouns. 
(178.)  1^  11^  Indefinite  Pronouns  denote  an  object  in 
a  general  way,  without  reference  to  a  particular  indi- 
vidual ;  e.  g.f  any  one,  some  one,  &c.     They  are, 

1,  duidam,  a  certain  one,  &ic.,  plural,  some.  .  ■    . 

2.  duivis,      )  , 


INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 


73 


3.  duisquam,  any,  any  one  [e.  g.,  when  it  is  denied  that  there  are  any) . 
[Neut.  q  u  i  c  q u  a  m  (sziZ»s^.) ;  q u o  d  q u  a m  {adj) .    This  pronoun  is  us ed 

chiefly  in  negative  sentences.] 

4.  duispiSm,  somebody,  some  (neut.). 

5.  Aliquis,  some  one,  something  (neut.);  any  (adj.). 

.  6.  Cluisqu6,eacA,unusquisque,eac/i  owe  (stronger  than  quisqu6). 
7.  Ecquis?  used  interrogatively,  (does)  any  one?  anything? 
B^^  Observe  carefully  that  each  of  the  above  takes  quid  in 
neuter  nom.,  and  ace,  when  used  substantively;   and  quod 
when  used  adjectively. 

EXERCISE. 


(179.)   Vocabulary. 

The  tenth,  d6cimus,  S,  um, 

A  javelin,  tragula,  oe. 

To  see,  to  notice,  conspIcerS. 

Judgment,  discretion,  consilium,  i. 

Eternity,  setermtas,  (setemitat)  is  (f.). 

Maker,  artificer,  fab6r,  fabri  (m.). 

Fifth,  quintus,  a,  um. 

Youth,  juventus,  (juventut)  is  (f.). 

Fortune,  fortunfi,  oe. 

Forever,  in  aetemum. 

Belong,  pertinerS. 

(180.)  Examples, 


Art,  ars,  (art)  is  (f.). 

Form,  forma,  89. 

To  discover,  invSnirS. 

For,  6t6nim,  conj.  (always   stands 

first  in  its  clause). 
Cultivation,  humanity,  humanitag, 

atis  (f.). 
Commx)n,  communis,  Is,  6. 
Bond,  vinculum,  i. 
Dignity,  dignitas,  (dignitat)  is  (f.)- 
Body,  corpus,  (corp6r)  is  (n.). 


{a)  Something  new. 
Each  one  of  us. 
A  certain  thing  new. 
Some  dignity. 


Aliquid  novi. 
Unusquisque  nostrum. 
Quidddra  novi. 
Aliquid  dignitatis. 
Rule  of  Syntax. — The  indefinite  pronouns  may  be  used 
partitively,  and  then  govern  the  genitive. 


{b)  A  certain  one  of  the  sol- 
diers. 
Some  of  the  soldiers. 


Quid^m  {sing.)  ex  mlliti- 

bus. 
QuidS.m  {plur.)  ex  militl- 

bus. 

Rem.  The  ablat.  with  ex  is  used  instead  of  the  genitive,  especially 
with  quidam. 

(181.)   Translate  into  English. 

Quidain  ex  militibus  decimge  ISgionis  v^nieb&t. — Quinto  die 
(118,  II.,  c)  tragiila  a  quo  dam  milite  conspicitur. — -^^ri,  in 
quibus  aliquid  consilii  (180,  a)  est,  magnanimi  simt. — Tempus 

G 


74 


CORRELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


est  pars  qusedam  seternitatis. — Cuivis  (125,  II.,  a)  &nimali 
corpus  est. — Quilibet  est  fab6r  fortunae  suae. — Unicuique* 
(125,  II.,  a)  nostrum  (180,  120)  est  animus  immortalis.— 
Qui s que  nostrum  (180)  in  seterniim  vivet. — Animus  non  habet 
formam  aliquam,  nee  figuram. — Aliquid  novi  invenies. — ■ 
Etenim  omnes  ai'tes,  quae  ad  humanitat6m  pertinent,  habent 
quod  dam  commune  vinculum. 

(182.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

[The  pronouns  of  the  lesson  are  italicized  in  the  exercise.] 
Some  of  the  soldiers  of  the  fifth  legion  are  wounded  (pres.).— 
On  the  fifth  day  (118,  II.,  c)  the  enemy  is  noticed  by  a  certain 
soldier  of  the  tenth  legion. — Men,  in  whom  there  is  some  dignity 
(180),  are  magnanimous. — To  each  man  (=of  men)  there  is 
a  soul  and  a  body. — I  "^ill  give  the  book  to  any-one-you-please 
of  the  scholars.  Each  one  of  us  shall  live  forever. — You  will 
discover  a  certain  thing  new. — Some  of  the  soldiers  are  in  the 
city. — For  all  the  arts  which  belong  to  cultivation  have  a  certain 
common  bond. — Youth  is  a  certain  part  of  life. — Is  not  (estne) 
any  man-you-please  the  maker  of  his  own  fortune  ? — Has  the 
soul  {use  num)  any  form  or  figure  ? 


LESSON  XXXI. 

Correlative  Pronouns. 
(183.)  Correlative  Pronouns  are  such  as  answer  to 
each  other ;  e.  g.,  how  great  ?  so  great.     How  many  ? 
so  many,  &c. 

[This  correlation  is  often  expressed  in  English  by  adverbs  or  conjunc- 
tions :  such  a  man  as :  as  is  the  general,  so  are  the  troops,  &c.] 
(184.)  The  Correlative  Pronouns  are 


D  eraonstrative. 


qualiscunqu6,    of    whatever 

kind. 
quantuscunquS,        however 

great. 
aliquantus,  somewhat  great. 
^aliquot,  some. 
*quotqu6t,  however  many. 


talis,  such. 


tantfis,    so    great,    so 
Trnich. 

*t6t,  so  many. 
*t6tid6m,  just  so  many. 


quaJis  ;  as,  of  what 
kind. 


qa.axi.tn8,  as  great. 
^qu6t,  as  many. 


*  Unus  and  quisqnS  are  both  declined  in  unusquisquS.    Unus 
aas  gen.  unius,  dat.  uni. 


CORRELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


75 


Rem.  I.  dualis  ?   of  what  kind?   quantus?   how  great?   qu6t? 

how  many  ?   are  also  used  interrogatively. 
2.  Those  marked  thus  (*)  are  indecliaable  ;  the  rest  are  decliuied  like 

adjectives. 

EXERCISE. 


(185.)   Vocabulary. 

Where,  ubi  (adv.). 

Toil,  opera,  ae. 

Pleasure,  voluptas,  (voluptSt)  Is  (f.). 

Retoard,  praemiiim,  L 

Gold,  aurum,  I. 

Money,  pficunia,  ae. 

(186.)  Examples, 
{a)  So  much  toil  (=  of  toil). 

How  much  pleasure  ?  {=  of 
pleasure  7) 

No  reward  (=  nothing  of  re- 
ward). 

Much  gold  {=  of  gold). 


A   pretty    large   piece    of 
ground. 


Fear,  timSr,  (timor)  is  (m.). 

Or,  v6l  (conj,). 

Advantages,  bona  (neut.  adj.). 

To  afford,  praebere. 

To  covet,  expgtere.  [is  (f.). 

Liberality,    liberalitas,    (lib6ralitat) 


Tantiim  operas. 
Quantum  voluptatis? 

Nihil  praemii. 

Multiim  auri.  (But,  much 
money  =  magn&  pecuniS,, 
not  multura  pecuniae.) 

Aliquantiim  agri. 


Rule  of  Syntax. — ^The    neuters,    tantiim,    quanttim, 

aiiquantiim;  also,  multiim,  nihil,  quid,  S,liquid, 

and  others,  are  used  as  neuter  nouns,  and  followed  by  the 

genitive  (Synt.,  695,  6.,  R.). 

Obs.  Tantum,  quantum  in  neut.,  with  genitive  =  so  much,  so 
many,  how  much,  how  many ;  but  in  masc.  and  fern.,  agreeing  with 
the  noun,  so  greats,  how  great;  e.  g.,  Iww  many  books  ?  quantum 
librorum;  so  great  fear,  tantus  timOr. 


{b)  As  is  the  master,  so  are  the 
scholars. 


Qualis  est  magister,  tales 
sunt  discipuli ;  or  (with  est 
and  sunt  omitted),  qualis 
ma^ster,  tales  discipiili. 

(187.)   Translate  into  English. 

Quales  sunt  duces,  tales  sunt  milites. — FortiinaB  bonS,  (82, 
II.),  quantacunque  sunt,  incerta  sunt. — Tantiis  timor  omnem  ex- 
ercitiim  occupabftt. — Ubi  tantam  virtut^m  invSnies? — Quan- 
tum voluptatis  virtiis  praebSt! — Fratri  est  (125,  II.,  a)  &liquan- 


76  CORRELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

tiim  pecuniae. — Virtus  nihil  pvsemii  vel  pecuniae  expert. — P^t6r 
milii  magnam  pecuni^m  dabit. — Quantum  (186,  Ob^  librorum 
habes  ? — Quot  homines,  tot  sententise. 

(188.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

As  are  the  generals,  so  are  the  soldiers. — As  is  the  king,  so 
are  the  leaders. — As  are  the  masters  (heri),  so  are  the  slaves. 
— As  ai'e  the  fathers,  so  are  the  children. — So  great  an  army 
is  coming. — The  advantages  of  the  body,  however  great  they 
may  be  (sunt),  are  uncertain. — Where  will  you  find  so  great 
Ubei-ality  ? — How  many  (186,  Ohs.)  rewards  does  virtue  afford  ? 
— Good  (men)  covet  no  (186,  a)  reward. — Will  your  father 
give  (135,  II.)  you  much  money? — Has  your  brother  much 
gold  ? — ^As  are  the  chiefs,  so  are  the  citizens. — My  father  has 
(125,  XL,  a)  a  pretty  large  piece  of  ground. 


4  §  116. 

NUMERALS.     (XXXII.— XXXIII.) 


LESSON  XXXIL 


Numerals. — Partial  Table, 
(189.)  Numerals  are  divided  into  the  four  classes 
following,  of  which  the  first  three  are  adjectives,  the 
fourth,  adverbs. 


CAKDINAL. 

OKDINAX. 

DISTRIBUTIVE. 

ADVEHBIAT.. 

One  apiece,  one  by 

One,  two,  &;c. 

First,  second,  &.C. 

one,  one  at  a  time, 
&c. 

singuU,  se,  S. 

Once,  twice,  &c. 

I. 

unus,  a,  um. 

primus,  &,  um. 

sSmel. 

II. 

duo,  XB,  6. 

secundus,a,um. 

blnl,  86,  a. 

bis. 

III. 

tres,  es,  tril 

teitius,  a,  um. 

temi,  ae,  &. 

ten 

IV. 

quattuor. 

quartus,  &,  uia, 

quatemi,  ae,  a. 

quatfir. 

V. 

quinque. 

quintus,  a,  um. 

quini,  ae,  a. 

qumquiea. 

VI. 

sex. 

sextfis,  a,  um. 

seni,  ae,  a. 

sexies. 

VII. 

septSm. 

Septimus,  a,  iim. 

septeni,  ae,  &. 

septies. 

VIII. 

octo. 

octavus,  a,  um. 

octoni,  ae,  a. 

octies. 

IX. 

n6v6m. 

nonus,  a,  um. 

noveni,  ae,  a. 

novies. 

X. 

d6c6m. 

d^cimus,  a,  iim. 

denl,  ae,  a. 

decies. 

XL 

undecim. 

undecimus,      a, 

undeni,  ae,  a. 

undgcies. 

xn. 

du6d6cim. 

du6d6cimus,   &, 

duodeni,  ae,  &. 

duodecies. 

um. 

Rem.  For  the  declension  of  uniis  and  duo,  see  194.  Tres  is  declined 
like  a  plural  adjective  of  second  class,  194.  The  remaining  cardinals 
are  undeclined.  The  ordinals  and  distributives  are  declined  like 
adjectives  of  the  first  class. 

EXERCISE. 

(190.)   Vocabulary, 


In  all,  altogether,  omnind. 
Multitude,    multatudd,    (multltudin) 

is  (f.). 
Hour,  hora,  89. 
To  he  distant,  distarS. 
Mile,  millia,*  (miU)  ium  (pi.  n.). 
Year,  annus,  T. 
Month,  mensis,  (mens)  fs  (m.). 


Another,  altSr,  a,  tlm  (194,  R.  1.). 
Thirty -six,  sex  et  triginta. 
To  levy,  conscriberS. 
Night-watch,  vigilia,  83. 
From,  after,  de  (with  abl.). 
To  strive,  to  hasten,  contenders. 
Italy,  Italia,  88. 


*  Mi  116,  plur.  millia 
=  a  mik.. 


1000.    Millia  (passuum,  of  paces  understood) 

G2 


78 


NUMERALS. 


(19 J.)  Examples, 

(a)  They  fight  four  hours. 
(6)   The  city  is  distant  five 

mihs. 
(c)  A  ditch  eleven  feet  wide. 


Horas  qliattuor  pugnant. 
Urbsdistatquinque  millia 

Fossa  und^cim  pedes  lata. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  accusative  answers  to  the  questions 
how  long  ?  (whether  of  time  or  space),  how  broad  1  how 
high?  &c. ;  e.  g.,  in  {a)  horas;  in  (6)  millia;  in  (c) 
p6des. 
{d)  How  long  ?  may  also  be  expressed  by  a  noun  in  the  geni- 
tive, depending  on  another  noun ;  e.  g.^  a  ditch  of  ten  feett 
fossa  decern  pedum. 

(192.)   Translate  into  English. 

Erant  omnino  itinera  duo. — Galliae  sunt  partes  tres,  quarum 
unam  incolunt  Belgee,  alteram  Aquitani. — tJnus  e  multitudmS 
vulneratur. — Horas  sex  pugnabant. — Urbs  distat  decern  millia. — 
In  anno  duodecim  menses  sunt. — Caesar  duas  legiones  conscri- 
bit. — Caesar  tres  legiones  quae  in  Gallia  hiemabant  educit. — 
Caesar  tres  legiones  ex  hibernis  educit. — Sunt  omnino  itinerd 
quattuor.— Caesar  de  quarta  vigilia  legiones  educit. — Consul 
legiongm  decim^m  in  castra  rSducit. — Caesar  ciim  quinquS  le- 
gidnibiis  in  Italiam  contendit. — Er^t  omnjno  in  Gallia  legiS 
una. 

(193.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

There  are  in  all  three  ways. — There  are  of  Gaul  three  parts, 
of  which  the  Sequanians  inhabit  one. — There  are  of  the  city 
five  parts. — Four  of  (=  out  of)  the  multitude  are  wounded. — 
The  soldiers  fight  seven  hours. — In  three  years  are  thirty-six 
months. — The  villages  are  distant  nine  miles. — The  wood  is  dis- 
tant four  miles. — The  consuls  will  levy  six  legions. — Caesar  will 
lead  out  five  legions  from  Italy. — The  general  was  levying  two 
legions  in  Gaul. — Caesar  will  lead  out  the  soldiers  in  the  second 
watch. — The  consul,  in  the  third  watch  leads  back  the  soldier? 
into  the  camp. — The  tenth  legion  fights  (pugnat). — There  aro 
altogether  in  Gaul  two  legions. — Caesar  brings  back  the  fifth  le- 
gion.— Caesar  brings  back  the  fifth  legion  after  the  second  w^atch. 


NUMERALS. 


79 


LESSON  XXXIII. 
Numerals,  continued. 
(194.)  Declension  of  unus,  duo,  and  tres. 


n 

One,  Sing. 

Two,  Plur. 

Three,  Plur. 

N. 

a. 

anus,  a,  um. 
unlus,  lus,  lus. 
ual,  i,  i. 
the  rest  regular. 

N.V. 
Gen. 
D.Ab. 
Ace. 

duo,  duae,  duo. 
duorum,  duarum,  duorum. 
duobus,  duabus,  duobus. 
duos  and  duo,  duas,  duo. 

tres,  tres,  tria. 
trium,  trium,  trium. 
tribus,  tribus,  tribiis. 
tres,  tres,  tria. 

Rem.  (1.)  Like  unus  are  declined 
Alius,  5,  lid,  anotJier.* 
AltSr,  a,  um,  the  one,  the  other  (of  two). 
Neut6r,  trS,  tram,  neither  of  the  two. 
Nullus,  a,  um,  no  one. 
Solus,  a,  um,  alone. 
Totus,  ft,  um,  the  whole. 


UUus,  a,  um,  any  one. 

UtSr,  trS,  trum,  which  of  the  two. 

UterqnS,  traquS,  trumque,  each  of 

the  two,  both;  and  other  compoundg 

oi  liter. 


(2.)  Like  diid  is  declined  ambo,  oe,  o,  both. 


EXERCISE. 

(195.)   Vocabulary. 

JVhat  one,  quotus,  ft,  um. 

Most,  plerusqu6,  ftqu6,  umqu6  ;  e.  g., 

most  men,  hSmines  pleriquS  j  most 

insa:ts,  insectft  pl6raqu6. 
Virgil,  VirgUius,  L 
More,  iflftgis  (adv.). 

[Refer  to  the  column  of  distributives  (189).] 

(196.)  Examples. 


A  beam,  trabs,  (trftb)  is  (f.).' 

Insect,  insectum,  I. 

Horace,  Horatius,  T. 

To  migrate,  migrare. 

Writer,  scriptSr,  (script6r)  is  (m.). 

Mother,  matSr,  (matr)  is  (f.). 


{a)  My  father  will   give  us 

two  hooks  apiece. 
(&)  What  hour  is  it  7     The 

third, 
(c)  He  will  come  for  my  sake 

alone. 
{d)   Which    pleases     you  ? 

Neither. 
ie)    The    beams    are    three 

feet  distant  {apart)  from 

each  other. 


P^tSr  nobis  binos  libros  da,- 

bit. 
Quota    hora   est?     Tertia. 

Me  a  uniiis  causa  {ahl.)  vS- 

ni6t. 
titer  tibi  placet?     NeutSr. 

Trabes  int6r  se  distant  ternos 
pedes  (191,  c). 


When  ilias  is  repeated,  it  means  som£,  others. 


m 


NUMEUALH. 


(197.)   Translate  into  English. 

Mater  nobis  quaternos  libros  dabit. — Nobis  sunt  (125,  II.,  a) 
terni  equi. — Binse  omnibus  avibiis  alse  sunt. — Insecta  plerdciue 
senos,  ^lid  octonos,  pedes  habent. — Quota  hora  est  ?  Nona. — 
Milites  utriusque  exercitus  sunt  fortes. — Tua  unius  causa  ve- 
nient. — Virgilius  atque  Horatius  poetae  sunt,  prseclari  ;  uter  tibi 
magis  placet?  (161,  a.)  Virgilius. — Bis  in  anno  milites  veni- 
unt. — September  est  noniis  anni  mensis. — Trabes  intSr  se  dis- 
tant binos  pedes  (191,  c). 

(198.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

[Some  of  the  words  will  be  found  in  194,  R.  1.] 
We  have  (125,  II.,  a)  four  dogs  apiece  (196,  a). — The  mas- 
ter gives  us  five  books  at  a  time. — All  men  have  (125,  II.,  a) 
two  eyes  apiece.  —  Most  insects  have  six  (senos)  feet;  some 

(194*)  nine,  others  (194*)  ten,  others  (194*)  twelve What 

o'clock  (hour)  is  it  ?— The  fifth.— The  eighth The  eleventh. 

— The  twelfth. — The  generals  of  each  army  are  brave. — Why 
do  you  come?  For  your  sake  alone  (196,  c). — Cicero  and 
CsBsar  are  excellent  writers ;  which  pleases  you  ?  Neither. 
— Which  pleases  you  more  ?  Caesar. — The  birds  migrate  twioft 
in  the  year. — The  soldiers  will  come  eight  times  a  year. — Oc- 
tober is  the  tenth  month  of  the  year ;  November  the  eleventh ; 
December  the  twelfth. — The  beams  are  four  feet  distant  fi'oni 
each  other. — The  beams  are  seven  feet  apart  from  each  other 


§  17. 
V^ERBS  OF  THE  THIRD  CONJUaATION  IN  i5. 


LESSON  XXXIV. 


Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation  in  to, 

(199.)  Some  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation,  instead 
of  taking  the  simple  verb-stem  for  the  tense-stem  in 
the  tenses  for  incomplete  action,  add  i  to  the  verb- 
stem  in  these  tenses.     They  form  the  infinitive,  how- 
ever, in  ere,  like  other  verbs  of  the  third. 

(200.)  Infin.  Active,  cap- g re,  to  ^aAre. 


!                                                                                     SINGULAR.                                                                                     p 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

cap-i-6. 

cap-i-ebam. 

cap-i-am. 

cap-is, 

cap-i-6bas. 

cap-i-es. 

cap-it 

cap-i-ebat. 
cap-x-6t. 

PLUHAI,.                                                                             II 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

cap-i-mus. 

cSp-i-ebamus. 

c^p-i-emus. 

cSp-i-tis. 

cSp-i-ebatis. 

cip-i-etis. 

cap-i-unt.          1 

cap-i-ebant. 

cap-i-ent. 

Infin.  Passive,  cap-i,  to  6e  taken. 

\                                                                              SINGULAK.                                                                                1 

Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future. 

cap-i-6r. 

cap-i-ebar. 

cap-i-ar. 

cap-6-ris. 

cap-i-ebaris. 

cap-i-eiis. 

cap-i-tiir. 

cap-i-gbatur. 

cap-i-etur. 

PLTJEAL.                                                                                  1 

Present. 
Imperfect. 
Future.     , 

cftp-i-mur. 

cap-i-ebamur. 

cap-i-emur. 

cap-I-mmi. 

cap-i-ebamini. 

cap-i-emlni. 

cap-i-untur. 

cap-i-ebantur. 

cap-i-entur. 

EXEI 

I  C  I  S  E. 

(201.)   Vocabulary. 

[In  all  cases,  verbs  of  the  class  described  above  will  be  indicated  in 
the  vocabularies  by  the  ending  id,  after  the  infinitive  form ;  e,  g.,  to 
make,  ftlc6r6  (id),] 


82  VERBg    OF    THIRD    CONJUGATION    IN    lO. 


Pardon,  favour  vfinifi,  09. 

Excuse,  excusatiS,   (excusation)  is 

(f.). 
To  receive,  accept,  accipgrS  (io). 
Way,  road,  it6r,  (itingr)  is  (neut.). 
To  undertake,  suscipgrg  (io). 
To  make,  fac6rS  (16). 

(202.)  Example. 
Willingly  Ccesar  gives  par- 
don and  receives  the  excuse. 


And,  quS.* 

Ship,  navis,  (nav)  is  (fi). 

To  repair,  to  renew,  to  rebuild,  r6fl- 

c6rS  (16). 
Long;  longus,  a,  um. 
Wall,  rauriis,  i. 
Harbour,  portus,  us  (m.). 


Llbenter    Caesar   dat  veni&m, 
excusati6nemqu6*  accipit 

(203.)   Translate  into  English. 

Labieniis  multa  Germanorum  (78,  II.,  b)  oppida  capiebat. — 
Helvetii  per  provinciam  nostram  iter  faciunt. — Vulnera  gravid 
a  militibus  accipiuntur. — iEdui  belliiin  magnum  suscipiebant. 
—Llbenter  Caesar  nuntios  accipit,  iisque  (201,  N.)  veniam  dat. 
.— Imperator  obsides  civitatis  libenter  accipiet. — Nuntium  a 
patrS  eras  accipies. — Crassiis  naves  longas,  quae  in  portu  sunt, 
rSficit. — Consul  muros  urbis  reficit. 

(204.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  enemy  were  making  (their)  way  through  our  province. — 
The  Romans  were  rapidly  (c  e  1  e  r  i  t  e  r)  making  their  way  through 
Gaul. — We  shall  receive  a  messenger  from  the  city  to-day. — 
The  Helvetians  were  undertaking  a  severe  and  great  war. — 
The  soldiers  receive  many  and  severe  wounds. — We  shall  make 
(our)  way  through  Britain. — Caesar  will  willingly  receive  tlie 
excuse  of  the  ^duans,  and  gi-ant  them  (iisque)  favour. — The 
gifts  of  a  father  are  gladly  (libenter)  received. — The  long  ships 
are  repaired  by  Caesar. — The  general  was  rebuilding  the  old 
(ve teres)  ships  which  were  in  the  harbour. — We  shall  re- 
build the  old  walls. 

(205.)  Observe  the  formation  of  the  following 
words : 

AccipSrS  {to  receive),  —  Sd  {to)+c&p&r6  {to  take). 
Suscip^re  {to  undertake),  •=■  sub  («7iier)-}-c&perS. 
R6f ic6r6  {to  rebuild),  =  rS-Hac6r6  (to  make  again). 
^^  In  the  composition  of  verbs  with  prepositions,  £1  frequ  ontly  passei 
into  i,  as  in  these  examples. 

*  E  t  joins  words  or  sentences  which  are  considered  indej^endent  and 
of  equal  importance  with  each  other ;  qu6  joins  a  word  or  sejitence  close' 
ly  to  another,  as  an  appendage  to  it 


§  18. 
DEPONENT  VERBS. 


LESSON   XXXV. 

Deponent  Verbs. 

(206.)  Deponent  verbs  are  such  as  have  the  pasS' 
ive  form,  but  an  active  meaning ;  e.  ^.,  hortor,  /ea:- 
hort  (not  /  am  exhorted). 

(207.)  The  forms  of  deponents  in  the  tenses  for 
incomplete  action  of  the  indicative  mood  are  precisely 
the  same  as  those  of  passive  verbs  (Lessons  XII., 
XIII.) ;  we  therefore  need  only  give  the  first  persons. 

(208.) 


DEPONENT    FORMS. 


INDICATIVE. 


let  conj. 
2d  conj. 
3d  conj. 
4th  conj. 


hortSr,  I  exhort. 
f  ateor,  I  confess. 
sequor,  I  follow. 
metior,  I  measure. 


hortabar,  /  was  exhorting'. 
f  atehar,  I  was  confessing'. 
eequCbar,  I  was  fallowing. 
metieb&r,  I  was  measuring. 


hortabor,  I  wiU  exhort. 
f  atgbor,  I  will  confess. 
sequar,  /  roill  follow. 
metiar,  I  roill  measure. 


INFINITIVE. 


1.  hort-ari, 
to  exhort. 


2.  fat-en, 
to  confess. 


3.  sSqu-i, 
to  follow. 


4.  mfit-lrl, 


[  t^  In  the  vocabularies  deponent  verbs  are  always  given  by  the  in- 
flnitive  forms.  Observe  that  the  ending  -ari  shows  that  the  verb  is  of 
the  1st  conj.;  -eri,  the  2d;  -i,  the  3d;  -iri,  the  4th.] 


EXERCISE. 


(209.)   Vocabulary. 


[Transitive  deponents  govern  the  accusative,  unless  it  is  otherwiso 
mentioned  in  the  vocabularies.] 


To  embrace,  amplect-i. 

To  gain,  to  possess  one's  self  of,  p6t- 
iri  (with  gen.  or  abl. ;  general- 
ly gen.  in  Cses.). 

To  endeavour,  con-ari. 

To  follow,  s6qu-I. 

Asi  as  if,  tanquam  (adv.), 


To   strive  after,  pursue,  pers8qu-i 

(per  +  sequi,  to  follow  through). 
Glory,  gloria,  ae. 
All,  totiis,  a,  una  (194,  R.,  1). 
Bravery,  virtue,  virtus,  (virtut)  is  (f.). 
Long,  diu  (adv.). 
Sin,fauU,  peocatum,  i. 


84  DEPONENT    VERBS. 


Helvetii  per  provinciam  nos- 
ti*S,mitdrfac6i*e  conantur. 


(210.)  Example. 

The  Helvetians  endeavour  to 

pass    (=  tx)    make  way) 

through  our  province. 

Rule  of  Syntax, — The  infinitive  is  used  in  Latin  (as  in 
English)  to  complete  the  imperfect  ideas  expressed  by 
certain  verbs ;  e.  g.y  I  wish,  I  can,  I  hasten,  I  endeavour^ 
&c.,  as  facere  in  the  above  example.* 

(211.)   Translate  into  English.  «, 

Pater  filium  et  filiam  amplectitiir. — ImpSrator  milites  diu  hor- 
tabatur. — Dumnorix  totius  (194,  R.  1)  Galliae  potitur. — Pecca- 
t§,  mea  fatebor. — Principes  totius  Gallise  potiri  conabantiir. — 
Romani  per  Britanniam  iter  facere  conantur. — Gloria  virtutem 
tanquam  umbra  sequitur. — Magnos  h'omines  virtute  (55)  meti- 
miir,  non  fortuna. — Milites  semper  gloriam  persdquuntiir. — 
Milites  ducem  libenter  sequebantur. 

(212.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  father  will  embrace  (his)  sons  and  daughters. — The  chiefs 
possess  themselves  of  all  the  province. — Do  you  confess  (135, 
II.)  your  fault? — The  Helvetians  were  endeavouring  to  pass 
through  Gaul. — Glory  will  follow  bravery  as  a  shadow. — We 
were  exhorting  the  soldiers  yesterday. — We  shall  gladly  follow 
Caesar. — They  are  rapidly  making  their  way  through  oiu-  prov- 
ince.— You  measure  men  by  (their)  fortune,  not  by  (their) 
bravery. — The  chiefs  will  endeavour  to  lead  the  army  across  tli& 
Rhine  (113,  II.,  a). — Generals  always  sti-ive  after  glory. — Are 
you  exhorting  (135,  II.)  your  son? — The  Romans  always  fol- 
lowed glory. 

*  Observe  carefully  that  a  purpose  is  never  expressed  by  the  simple 
infinitive  in  Latin.  It  would  not  be  Latin  to  say  discerg  ye  nit,  he  comes 
toleam. 


§  19. 
ADVERBS. 


LESSON  XXXVI. 
Adverhs. 


[This  section  need  not  be  learned  by  heart  in  the  first  course  but  the 
distinction  of  primitive  and  derivative  should  be  acquired ;  and  the  section 
■hould  be  afterward  referred  to  whenever  examples  occur.] 

(213.)  Adverbs  (17)  are  either  Primitive  or  Deriva- 
tive. 

[We  give  but  a  few  here ;  a  fuller  Ust  will  be  given  hereafter. — See 
Summary  of  Etymology,  680.] 

(214.)  Primitive  Adverbs : 

1.  Negative. — ^Non,  not;  baud,  not;  ne  (interrog.  or  imper.),  not;  n6  • 
quid  em  (always  separated  by  some  word),  n^t  even. 

2.  Of  Place.—V hi,  where;  ibi,  there;  quo?  whither?  hue,  hither ^ 
illuc,  thither;  und6,  whence;  ind6,  thence,  &c. 

3.  Of  Time. — Nunc, wow;  tumor  tunc,  #^fi/i;  nu.-p6T, lately ;  eras, 
to-morrow ;  hSdie,  to-day ;  h6ri,  yesterday,  &c. 

4.  Of  Quality,  &c. — Admodum,  very;  &n,  whether;  cur,  why  [in- 
terrog.) ;  etiam,  also;  fSre,  almost,  &c. 

(215.)  Derivative  Adverbs  are  nearly  all  formed 
from  adjectives  or  participles  by  adding  e  or  iter  to 
their  stems. 

1.  Add  e  to  the  stem  of  adjectives  of  the  Jirst  class ;  e.  g., 


Adjectives. 
Alt-US,  high. 
Jjih&r,  free. 
Clar-us  illustrious. 
&c. 


Adrerba. 

Alt-e,  high, 
liih&r-e,  freely . 
Clar-e,  illustriously. 
&c. 
Rem.  Bonus  makes  b  6  n  6,  well,  and  m  a  1  u  s  [bad),  m  a  1 S,  badly.   All 

others  end  in  a  [long). 
2.  («)  Add  1 1 6  r  to  the  stem  of  adjectives  of  the  second  and  third  class- 
es ;  e.  g., 

Adjectives.  Adverbs. 

C6l6r,  swift.  Celer-it6r,  swiftly. 

BrSv-is,  hicf.  Brev-iter,  briefly, 

{h)  But  those  which  end  in  ns  do  not  take  the  connecting  vowel  i- 

H 


86 


ADVERBS. 


Prudens,  prudent.  I  Pruden-t6r,  prudently. 

Sapiens,  wise.  j  Sapien-t6r,  wisely. 

Rem.  Audax,  hold,  makes  audac-tSr,  boldly. 

3.  Some  are  derived  from  nouns  by  adding  tus  or  tim  to  the  stem 
by  means  of  a  connecting  vowel,  e.  g.,  coel-itus,/rom  heaven;  fund- 
itus, /rom  tlie  ground,  totally  ;  grgg-a-tim,  by  flocks,  &c. 

(216.)  Cases  of  adjectives,  especially  in  the  neutei 
gender,  are  often  used  as  adverbs  ;  e.  g.,  dulce,  sweet- 
ly;  primum,  j^r5^ ;  falso, /aZseZy,  &c. 

EXERCISE. 

(217.)   Vocabulary, 

Well,  b6n5,  derived  irregularly  from 

bonus,  good. 
Bravely,  fortitSr,  derived  regularly 

(215,  2,  a)  from  fortis,  brave. 
Sharply,  spiritedly,  acritSr,  derived 

regularly  from  acer  (acr-is),  sharp. 
Swiftly,  celSiiter,  derived  regularly 

from  c6l6r,  swift. 
Happily,  beate,   derived  regularly 

(215,  1)  from  beatus,  happy. 
Honestly,  honeste,  derived  regularly 

from  honestus,  honest. 


Almost,  f  erS, 

Rightly,  recte,  derived  regulariy 
from  rectus,  right. 

Impiously,  impie,  derived  regularly 
from  impius,  impious. 

In  flocks,  gregatim.  ' 

To  labour,  laborarfi. 

To  blame,  to  accuse,  find  fault  with, 
incusarg. 

Socrates,  Socrates,  (SocrSt)  is. 

Not  even,  nequidem  (always  separa- 
ted by  one  or  more  words). 


Honeste  et  recte  viverS  est 
ben6  et  beate  viv6r6. 


(218.)     Examples. 

{a)   To    live    honestly    and 

rightly  is  to  live  well  and 

happily. 

Rule  of  Position. — The  adverb  is  generally  placed  before  the 
word  which  it  qualifies. 

(6)  Almost  all  men  love  them-  [  Omnes  f  6r  e  homines  sese  diE- 
selves.  I      gunt. 

Fere  is  generally  placed  between  the  adjective  and  noun. 


(c)  He  does  not  praise  even 
Socrates. 


N  e  S  ocrat^m  q  u  i  d  6  m  laud&t. 


(219.)   Translate  into  English. 

Hostes  nobiscum  (125,  II.,  b)  acrit^r  pugnabant.— :::Equi  in 
agris  celeriter  currebant. — ^Bene  viv6r§  est  beate  viv6r6. — Cer- 
vi  gregatim  semper  currunt. — Semper  sapiens  rects  vivlt. — Diu 


ADVERBS.  87 

et  acntSr  milites  pugnabant. — Omnes  fere  homines  impiS  viviint. 
— Omnes  fere  aves  bis  in  anno  migrant. — Ne  CiceronSm  qmdSm 
laudabit. — Ne  hoc  quidem  (not  even  with  this)  delectabitur. 

(220.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  ^duans  were  fighting  long  and  bravely. — Caesar  sharply 
accuses  the  Helvetians. — Horses  and  stags  run  swiftly. — The 
farmers  were  labouring  long  in  the  fields. — Almost  all  men  love 
their  (own)  children. — Caesai*  led  almost  aJl  the  Germans  across 
the  Rhine  (113,  II.,  a). — I  waited  for  you  long. — The  bad  do 
not  live  happily. — To  live  happily  is  to  live  rightly. — You  will 
not  be  delighted  even  with  this. — Not  even  this  wiU  delight  (my) 
father. — Not  even  Caesar  will  be  praised. — Almost  all  birds  fly  in 
flocks. — They  do  not  praise  even  Virgil. — Almost  all  wise  (men) 
jive  happily. — Almost  all  men  strive-after  glory. — To  live  pru- 
dently is  to  live  happily. — The.  commander  will  blame  the 
lieutenant  shm-ply . 


§  20. 


PREPOSITIONS.     (XXXVIL— XXXVI  £1.) 

LESSON  XXXVII. 
Prepositions. 

[This  section  (221)  need  not  be  learned  by  heart  in  the  first  course,  but 
Bhould  be  constantly  referred  to  whenever  examples  occur.] 

(221.)  The  following  prepositions  govern  the  ac- 
cusative case : 

Id,  to. 

Apud,  at. 

Ante,  before  (of  time  and  place). 

Adversus,  adversum,  against. 

Cis,  citra,  on  this  side. 

Circa  and  circum,  around,  about. 

Circit6r,  about,  towards  (indefi- 
nitely of  time  or  number). 

Contra,  against. 

Erga,  towards. 

Extra,  beyond,  without. 

Infra,  beneath,  below  (the  contrary 
of  supra). 

Inter,  between,  among. 

Intra,  within  (the  contrary  of  ex- 
tra). 


Juxta,  near  to,  beside. 

O  b,  on  account  of. 

Penes,  m  tJie  power  of. 

P  6  r,  through. 

PonS,  behind. 

Post,  after  (both  of  time  and  space). 

ProetSr,  beside. 

Props,  Tiear. 

Propter,  near,  on  account  of. 

Secundum,  after,  in    accordance 

with. 
Supra,  above. 
Trans,  ore  the  other  side. 
Versus  (is  put  after  its  noun  J,  to- 

wards  a  place. 
Ultra,  beyond, 

(222.)  The  following  govern  the' ablative  case  : 

A,  ah,  from,  by. 

Clam,  without  tlie  knowledge  of. 

Coram,  in  the  presence  of. 

Cum,  with. 

De,  down  from,  concerning. 

%  ex   (e   before   consonants    only, 

ex  before   both   consonants   and 

vowels),  out  of,  from. 

The  following  lines  contain  the  prepositions  governing  thcf-aMative,  and 
can  be  readily  learned  by  heart : 

Absqu6,  a,  ab,  abs,  and  de, 
Coram,  clam,  cum,  ex,  and  e, 
Tenus,  sine,  pro,  and  prae. 

(223.)  The  following    govern    the    accusative    or 
ablative  : 

1.  In,  (a)  witT^Ahe  accus.,  (1)  into,  on,  to  (to  the  question  tohither?)  (2) 
against,    {b)  Wtm  the  ablative,  in,  on  (to  the  question  where  ?) 

2.  Siib,  («)  toithlhe  accus.,  [1]  under  (to  the  question  whither?)  (2)  about 


Prae,  before,  owing  to. 
Pro,  before,  for. 
Sin 6,  without. 

TSnus  (is  put  after  its  noun),  as  fat 
as,  up  to. 

0' 


PREPOSITIONS.  89 

or  towards  (indefinitely  of  time).   »(i)  With  the  ablative,  ander  (to  the 
question  where  1) 

3.  Sup6r,  [a]  with  the  accus.,  above,  over,     [h]  With  tJie  ablative,  upon, 
concerning. 

4.  SubtSr,  under,  beneath  (but  Kttle  used). 


EXERCISE. 


(224.)   Vocabulary. 

The  Garonne  (river),  GarumnS,  ae. 
A,n  Aquitanian,  Aquitanus,  I. 
Aquitania,  Aquitanii,  89. 
The  Leman,  or  Geneva  (lalxe),  LS- 

mannns,  T. 
Jura  (mountain),  Jurft,  se  (m.  25,  a). 
To  extend  or  carry,  perduc6r6  (per 

+duc6re). 
State,  civitas,  (civitat)  is  (f.). 
Royal  power  (kingdom),  regniim,  r. 


History,  historiS,  ae. 

Fable,  fabula,  8B. 

To  bound  (limit),  continerS  (con+tS- 

ner6). 
Part  or  side,  pars,  (part)  is  (f.). 
On  one  side,  xma  ex  parts. 
The  Rhone  (river),  Rhodanus,  I. 
To  divide,  dividere. 
Lake,  lacus,  us  (m.),  (112,  R.  1) 
To  remain,  minerg. 


Gallos  ab  Aquitanis  Garuni 
na  fltimen  dividit. 


(225.)  Examples, 
{a)  The  river  Garonne  sepa- 
rates the  Gauls  from  the 
Aquitanians. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — Two  nouns  expressing  the  same  person 
or  thing  take  the  same  case,  and  are  said  to  be  in  appo- 
sition with  each  other ;  e.  g.,  in  the  above  example,  G  &- 
rumna  flumen. 


Csesarin  Galliam  contendit. 
Erat  omnin5  In  Gallia  legiS 
tinS,. 


(6)  Caesar  hastens  into  Gaul. 
(c)  There  was  altogether  in 
Gaul  one  legion. 

(226.)   Translate  into  English. 

Caesar  a  lacu  ad  montem,  murum  perducit. — Apud*  Herodo- 
tum,  patrem  hist6rise,  sunt  multae  fabulse. — Caesar  a  lacti  Le- 
manno  ad  montem  Juram,  murum  perducit. — Mercator  in  urbe 
mSnet. — PuSri  in  domo  sunt. — Princeps  regnum  in  civitate  oc- 
ciipat. — Consul  exercitum  in  fines  Sequanorum  ducit. — Hel- 
v^tii  continentur  una  ex  parte  (125,  IV.,  N.J)  flumine  Rheno ; 
altera  ex  parte  mont^  Jiira,  tertia  ex  parte  lacu  Lemanno  et 
flumine  Rhodano. 

*  Apud  is  used  with  the  names  of  authors  (instead  of  in,  with  the  name 
of  their  works) ,  e.  g.,  Spud  Cicfironem  Iggimus,  we  read  in  Cicero. 

H2 


1^0  PREPOSITIONS. 

(227.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

Caesar  was  extending  walls  and  ditches  (fossasque)  from  the 
river  to  the  camp. — The  soldiers  remain  in  the  camp. — Caesar 
will  seize  the  royal  power  in  the  statei* — The  river  Rhine  sep- 
arates the  Gauls  from  the  Germans. — Caesar  hastens  into  Italy 
and  levies  (conscribere)  five  legions. — The  deserters  remain  in 
the  town. — The  general  will  lead  the  soldiers  into  Italy. — Aqui- 
tania  is  bounded  on  one  side  by  the  river  Garumna ;  on  another 
side  by  mountains ;  on  the  third  side  by  the  river  Rhone. — 
You  will  find  (invenies)  many  fine  (praeclara)  precepts 
in  (apud)  Cicero. — You  will  find  many  fables  in  Herodotus,  the 
father  of  history. 


LESSON  XXXVIII. 
Prepositions  in  Composition, 

(228.)  Most  of  the  prepositions  given  in  Lesson 
XXXVII.  are  used  as  prefixes  in  composition  with 
verbs,  and  modify  their  signification;  e.  ^.,  pone  re, 
to  place;  post-ponere,  to  place  after, 

(229.)  The  following  prepositions  are  never  used 
alone,  but  always  as  prefixes  in  composition : 

1.  Amb,  round,  about  (from  ambo,  both) ;  ambirfi  (from  amb-flr6,  to 
go  round),  to  walk  round,  to  canvass  for  votes. 

2.  Con,  together  (a  variation  of  c  a  m,  with)  ;con-jting6rS(co  n+j  u  n- 
g6r6),  to  join  together,  to  unite. 

3.  Di  or  dis,osM7i^r  (a  variation  of  de,/row);  dis-ced6r6  (dis+cS- 
d6r6,  to  give  place  asunder),  to  depart. 

In,  with  adjectives,  means  not;  in-doctus,  unlearned;  with 
verbs,  means  in,  into;  e.  g.,  ir-rump6r6  (in+rump6r6),  to 
burst  into. 

4.  R  e,  back,  again ;  r  S  -  fi  c  S  r  6  (r  fi+f  ft  c  6  r  S,  to  make  again),  to  refit 

5.  86,  aside,  se-diic6rS  (se+duc6rS,  to  lead  astray),  to  adduce. 


PREPOSITIONS.  91 


EXERCISE. 


Cohort,  cohors,  (c6hort)  is  (f.) 

To  station,  collocare  (con+l6car6). 

To  distribute,  distribufirS   (dis+trf- 

bu6re). 
Africa,  Africa,  ce. 
Europe,  Europe,  as. 
HorsemaUi  6qu6s,  (Squit)  &  (m.) 


(230.)   Vocabulary. 

Again  (adv.),  rursus. 

To  join  together,  conjungerS. 

To  burst  into,  imimperS. 

To  burst  into  the  camp,  in  castri  ir- 

rump6r6. 
Mediterratiean,    MSditerraneus,    ft, 

um. 
To  separate,  sepgrarS  (se+pSrarg). 

(231.)   Translate  into  English. 

Consul  rursus  legiones  in  hiberna  reducit. — Legatiis  quinquS 
cohortes  cum  exercitu  conjungit. — Milites  omnes  in  oppidiim 
irrumpunt. — Mare  Mediterraneum  Africam  ab  Europa  sepa,rat. 
— Belgae  se  ciim  Germanis  conjungebant. — ImpSrator  exercitiim 
in  hibernis  collocat. — Germani  equites  in  castra  (223,  1,  a) 
irrumpere  conantur. — Galba  exercitum  in  hibernis  coll6cS,t, 
legionesque  in  civitates  distribuit. 

(232.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

Caesar  will  lead  the  cohorts  back  again  into  winter-quarters. 
— ^AJl  the  Germans  were  bursting  into  the  camp. — The  Belgi- 
ans will  unite  themselves  with  Caesar. — The  brave  soldiers  were 
trying  to  burst  into  the  town. — The  illustrious  general  was  sta- 
tioning the  soldiers  in  winter-quarters. — The  legions  are  distrib- 
uted among  (in,  with  accus.)  the  states. — The  legions  are  led 
back  into  winter-quarters. — The  Mediterranean  Sea  separates 
Spain  (Hispania)  from  Africa. — Caesar  will  join  all  the  horsemen 
with  the  army. 


§  21. 

ANALYSIS  OF  TENSE-FORMATIONS.    (XXXIX 
—XL  I.) 


LESSON  XXXIX. 
Active  Voice, 
(233.)  (a)  The  student  must  have  observed  that  in 
all  the  tenses  for  incomplete  action  in  the  active  voice 
the  person-endings  are  as  follows  : 


Sing.  I     1st  person,  o  or  m.  2d  person,  s.  3d  person,  t. 

Plur.  f     1st  person,  7»ti5.  2d  person,  ^is.  3d  person,  tc^ 


(b)  He  must  have  observed,  also,  that  these  end- 
ings are  added  to  the  proper  tense-stem  in  each  tense. 
We  take  up  the  tenses  in  order. 

(234.)  PRESENT    TENSE. 

(«)  Person-endings,  o,  s,  t,  m  u  s,  t  i  s,  n  t. 
(6)  The  Tense-stem  is  the  simple  verb-stem. 

(c)  To  connect  the  person-endings  with  the  tense- 
stems,  certain  connecting  vowels  are  used.  In  the 
present  tense  these  are,  for 

(1.)  First  conjugation,  a;  e.g.,  km-a-t. 

(2.)  Second       "  e ;  e.  g.,  mon-e-^. 

(3.)  Third         "  i ;  e.  g.,  veg-i-t. 

(4.)  Fourth       "  i ;  e.  g.,  a.ud-i-t.* 

Rem.  1.  Observe  that  in  the  1st  person  of  the  1st  and  3d  conjugalLafls 
the  connecting  vowel  does  not  appear ;  a  m  -  o,  r  e  g  -  o  (not  am-a-o, 
reg-i-o). 

Rem.  2,  In  the  3d  person  plural,  the  third  conjugation  uses  u  instead 
of  i;  e.  g'.,  r  e  g - u - n t ;  the  fourth  inserts  u ;  e.  g.,  a u d -i - u^n t. 

*  Ama,  mone,  audi,  are  the  proper  crude  farms  of  these  verbs  re- 
spectively. They  are  classed  together,  in  a  philosophical  treatment  of  the 
language,  as  one  conjugation  oi pure  verbs  ;  while  those  of  the  third  con 
jugatiou  form  the  conjugation  of  consonant  verbs. 


ANALYSIS    OF   TENSE-FORMATIONS. 


93 


(235.) 


Teuse- 
Stem. 

Connect. 
Vowel. 

Person- 
Endings. 

FORMS   COMPI.ETK.                                   1 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

.  1. 

am- 

a. 

0. 

amo  (ama-o). 

mone-o. 

reg-o. 

audi-o. 

s. 

ama-s.    - 

mone-s. 

reg-is. 

audi-8. 

2. 

mon- 

e. 

t. 

ama-t. 

mone-t. 

reg-i-t 

audi-t. 

3. 

reg- 

i. 

mug. 

ama-mus. 

mone-mus. 

reg-i-mus. 

audl-mus. 

tis. 

g,nia-tis. 

mone-tis. 
mone-m. 

reg-i-tis. 

audi-tis. 

4. 

aud- 

i(u). 

nt. 

ama-nt. 

reg-u-nt 

audi-u-nt 

Rem.  Observe  that  the  vowels  are  long  before  the  person-endings  in 
1st,  2d,  and  4th  conjugations,  except  where  they  come  before  o  or 
t.  In  those  before  o,  the  general  nde  (24, 1)  prevails  ;  and  it  is  also 
an  invariable  rule,  in  Latin,  that  no  vowel  in  ajlnal  syllable  can  be 
long  before  t. 


(236.) 


EXERCISE. 


[The  pupil  should  hereafter  analyze  the  tense-forms,  as  they  occur,  some- 
what as  follows :] 

A  mas:  verb-stem,  am-;  pres.  tense-stem,  ^in-;  connecting 
vowel,  a;  2d pers.  ending,  s. 

Monemiis:  verh-stem,  mon- ;  pres.  tense-stem,  mo n-;  con- 
necting vowel,  e;  1st  plur.  ending,  mus. 

Regitis:  verb-stem,  reg-;  pres.  tense-stem,  reg-;  connect- 
ing vowel,  i ;   2d  plur.  ending,  tis. 

Audiunt:  verb-stem,  aud-;^re5.  tense-stem,  aud-;   con- 
necting vowels,  i  and  u ;  3d  plur.  ending,  n  t. 

In  like  manner,  analyze 
Festinas,        hS,bet,  vidStis,        convoco,        festinatis, 

Vigilamus,      prohibent,      legit,  habetis,         pugnat, 

Vocatis,  poscimus,      dormimiis,  muniunt,      laudant, 

R*v6cant,       veniunt,         auditis,        ambulamus,  vulnSramug. 


LESSON   XL. 

Analysis  of  Tense-Formations y  continued. 
Active. 

(237.)  IMPERFECT    TENSE. 

(fl)  Person-endingSf  m,  s,  t,  mus,  tis,  nt. 
(b)  The  tense-stem, 

(1.)  In  1st  conj.  adds  ab  to  the  verb-stem  ;  c.  g.,  am-ab. 

(2.)  In  2d  conj.    "     eb  *'  e.  g.,  mon-eh. 

(3.)  In  3d  conj.     "     eb  "  c.  ^.,  reg-eb. 

(4.)  In  4th  conj.    "    leb  "  «.  ^.,  aud-ieb. 


94 


ANALYSIS   OF   TENSE-FORMATIONS. 


(c)  The  connecting  vowel  a  is  used  to  join  the  tense- 
stems  and  person-endings;  e.  g.,  amab-a-m. 




Con. 

stem. 

Vow. 

Endings. 

FORMS    COMPLETE. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

m. 

1  amaba-m. 

m5neba-m. 

regeba-m. 

audieba-m. 

1. 

am-ab- 

s. 

]  amaba-s. 

moneba-s. 

regeba-s. 

audieba-s. 

2. 

mon-eb- 

a. 

t. 

Umaba-t. 

moneba-t. 

regeba-t 

audieba-t. 

3. 

reg-eb. 

mus. 

amaba-mus. 

moneba-mus. 

regeba-mus. 

audieba-mus. 

4. 

aud-ieb- 

tis. 

amaba-es. 

moneba-tis. 

•regeba-tis. 

audieba-tis. 

— 

nt 

amaba-nt. 

moneba-nt 

regeba-nt 

audieba-nt 

FUTURE    TENSE. 


(238.)  I.  We  treat  the  1st  ^nd  2d  conjugations  first. 
In  these,  ^ 

{a)  ^hQ person-endings  are,  o,  s,  t,  mus,  tis,  nt. 

(5)   The  tense-stemSf  precisely  like  the  imperf,  in 
the  same  conjugations, 

(1.)  In  1st  conj.,  add  ab  to  the  verb-stem;  e.  g.,  ^m-ab. 
(2.)  In  2d  conj.,      "    eb  "  e.  ^.,  mon-eb. 

(c)  The  connecting  vowel  i  is  used  to  join  the  tense 
stems  and  person-endings;  e.  ^.,  amab-i-t ;  moneb- 
i-t.    But  in  the  third  person  plural,  u  is  used  instead 
of  i;  e.  g.i  amab-u-nt. 

Rem.  In  the  1st  person  the  connecting  vowel  is  dropped  (as  in  234, 
c,  R.  1) ;  thus,  amab-o  (not  amab-i-o). 


(239.) 

TABLE 

• 

1. 

2. 

Tense-Stem. 

Connectiiig 
Vowel. 

Person- 
Endings. 

FORMS  COMPLETE.                    jj 

&m-ab- 
m6n-gb- 

i. 
u. 

0. 

)  mus. 

I  tis. 

nt. 

1. 

amab-o. 

«TYl«bi-S. 

amabi-t. 
amabi-mus. 
ftmabi-tis. 
amabu-nt. 

2. 
m6neb-o. 
m6nebi-8. 
monebi-t. 
monebi-mus. 
monebi-tis. 
monebu-nt. 

(240.)  II.  The  3d  and4th  conjugations  present  some 
irregularity  in  the  future. 

(a)  The  person-endings  are,  m,  s,  t,  mus,  tis,  nt. 

(b)  The  tense-stem, 

(1)  In  the  3d  conj.,  is  the  simple  verb-stem;  e.  g.,  rSg. 

(2)  In  the  4th  conj.,  it  adds  i  to  the  verb-stem ;  c.  ^.,  au  d  - 1. 


ANALYSIS    OP   TENSE-FORMATIONS. 


95 


(c)  The  connecting  vowel  e  is  used  to  join  the 
tense-stem  and  person-endings  ;  reg-e-miis,  aud-i- 
6-mus.  But  in  the  j^rs^  person  a  is  substituted  for  e 
in  both  conjugations;  e.  g.,  reg-a-m,  aud-i-a-m, 
not  reg-e-m,  audi-e-m. 

(241.)  TABLE. 


Tense-Stem. 

Con'g. Vowel. 

Pers.  Endings. 

FORMS 

COMPLETB. 

3. 

4. 

rfig- 

a. 

m. 

rSga-m. 

atidia-m. 

(s. 

r6ge-s. 

audie-s. 

t. 

rggS-t. 

audie-t. 

audi- 

e. 

•i  mus. 

r6ge-inus. 

audie-mus. 

tis. 

r6ge-tis. 

audie-tis. 

Ut. 

r6ge-at. 

audie-nt. 

(242.)    (a)  EXAMPLES. 

Amabatis:  i?er&-5fe»i,  dm-;  tense-stem^  amab-;  imperf.  con 
roiZJcZ,  a;  2d plur. ending, -tis. 

Amabitis:  verh-stem,  S,m-;  tense-stem,  ^mah-;  fut.  con. 
voweU  i ;  2d  plur.  ending,  - ti  s. 

Audiemiis:  verb-stem,  aud-;  fut.  tense-stem,  audi-;  con- 
necting vowel,  e;  1st plur.  ending,  -mus. 

[^^  The  pupil  should  keep  up  the  habit  of  finding  any  tense-form 
which  hte  may  need  to  use,  hy  putting  together  its  proper  parts;  eg., 
stem,  ending,  &c.,  rather  than  by  recurring  to  the  pai*adigms.] 

(b)  Analyze  the  following : 

Laudabam,  laudabo,  laudabitis, 

Docebamiis,  muniebamus,  legdm, 

Occidebant,  dormiebatis,  scribemus, 

DormiSm,  audiet,  docqbunt, 

&c.  &c.  &c. 


LESSON  XLI. 
Analysis  of  Tense-Formations,  continued, 

PASSIVE    VOICE. 

(243.)  The  passive-endings  are, 

Sing.   1st  person,  r;   2d  person,  r  i  s  or  r  6 ;   3d  person,  tur. 
Plur.   1st  person,  mur;   2d  person,  mini;   3d  person,  n tur. 

(244.)  These  endings  are  affixed  to  the  tense-stems, 
formed  as  in  the  active  voice,  and  with  the  same  con- 


96 


ANALYSIS   OF  TENSE-FORMATIONS. 


necting  vowels.  Only  the  following  apparent  irregu- 
larities are  to  be  noticed. 

(a)  In  the  1st  pers.  pres.  indie,  the  ending  r  is  added  to  the 
full  present  active  form ;  e.  ^.,  amo,  amo-r;  d6ceo,  doceo-r, 
&c. 

(6)  In  the  3d  conj.,  2d  pers.  sing.,  pres.,  e  is  used  for  con- 
necting vowel  instead  of  i;  e.  g.,  r6g-e-ris,  reg-e-re,  in- 
stead of  re  g-i-ris,  &c. 

(c)  In  the  1st  and  2d  conj.,  future,  2d  pers.  sing.,  e  is  used 
for  connecting  vowel  instead  ofi;  e.^.,  moneb-e-ris,  amab- 
6-ris,  instead  of  amab-i-ris,  moneb-i-ris. 

(245).  EXERCISE. 

Examples. — D6cent-uy:  verb-stem,  doc-;  pres.  tense-stem, 

doc-;  connecting  vowel,  e;  3d plur. pass,  ending,  -ntiir. 
Amabamiir:  verb-stem,  am-;  imperf.  tense-stem,  amab-; 

imperf.  conn,  vowel,  a;  1st  plur.  pass,  ending,  -miir. 
Audientur:  verb-stem,  aud-;/wi.  tense-stem,  audi-;/M^ 

conn,  vowel,  e;  ^d plur.  pass,  ending,  -ntur. 
RSgor:  verb-stem,  reg-;  pres.  dct.  1st  pers.,  rego-;  Ist 

pers.  pass,  ending,  -  r. 


laudantiir, 
videblmiir, 
docebuntur, 
regitiir, 
dec. 


(246.)  Analyze 
Regebamur,  occidemiir, 

Docebimur,  audiemini, 

Timebaris,  docebSris, 

Docebamini,  amatiir, 

Ace.  &c. 


PART    11. 


FULLER  EXHIBITION  GF  THE  FORMS  OF  WORDS 


§1. 

ADDITIONAL  RULES  OF  QUANTITY. 


LESSON  XLIL 

[The  student  should  now  learn  thoroughly  the  following  rules  of 
quantity,  most  of  which  he  has  seen  illustrated  frequently  already.] 

GENERAL  RULES. 

(246.)  (1)  A. vowel  before  another  is  short;  e.  g.,  vi-a. 

(2)  A  vowel  before  two  consonants,  or  a  double  one,  is  long 
by  position;  e.  g.,  bellum. 

Hem.  A  mute  followed  hy  a  liquid  u)  the  same  syllahle  renders  the 
preceding  short  vowel  common  ui  verse;  e.  g.,  volfl-cris.  _(In 
prose,  the  short  vowel  remains  short.) 

(3)  All  diphthongs  and  contracted  syllables  are  long ;  e,  g,^ 
au-rum,  co-go  (for  co+ago). 

SPECIAL  RULES. 

(1.)  Final  Syllables. 
1.  Monosyllables. 
(247.)  (a)  Most  monosyllables  ending  in  a  vowel  are  long ; 
bat  the  particles  qu#,  v6,  ne,  pte,  &c.,  attached  to  other  words, 
are  short. 

(6)  Most  monosyllables  ending  in  a  consonant  are  long  ;  but 
the  nouns  cor,  f  e  1,  m  e  1,  v i r,  i)  s  (ossis) ;  the  pronouns  q u i  s, 
quid,  quot;  and  the  particles  n 6 c,  in,  an,  ad,  s 6 d,  with 
all  ending  in  t,  are  short ;  also  6s,  2d  person  of  sum. 

2.  Dissyllables  and  Polysyllables. 
(A)  Final  Vowels. 

(248.)  a  final  is  short  in  nouns,  except  the  abl.  of  the  1st  de^ 
clension  ;  long  in  verbs,  and  in  indeclinable  words, 
except  1 1  a,  quia,  e  j  &. 

(249.)  e  final  is  short  in  nouns  (except  5th  declension)  and 
verbs  (except  imperatives) ;  long  in  adverbs  de- 
rived from  adjectives  of  the  first  class,  with 
fermg,  fere,  ohe. 

(260.)  t  final  is  Zon^;  but  mihl,  tibl,  stb!,  ib?,  lib!,  are 
common ;  nisi,  q  u  a  s  !,  short. 


100  ADDITIONAL  RULES  OF  aUANTITY. 

(251.)  }  final  is  common ;  but  long  in  dat.  and  abl.  cases  of 
nouns  and  adjs.  used  as  adverbs  {e.g.,  falso» 
&c.);  ego,  duo,  6c to,  sre  short. 

(252.)  u  final  is  always  long ;  e.  g.,  d  i  u. 

(B)  Final  Consonants. 

(253.)  All  final  syllables  ending  in  a  consonant  (except  s)  are 
short. 

Rules  for  s  final. 

(254.)  Final  as,  es,  os,  are  generally  Zon^ ;  e.g.,  am  as, 
doc  e  s,  equ  6  s. 

Rem.  -1.  6  s  is  sJiart  (1)  in  noons  which  have  short  penult  in  the  gen. , 

€.  g.,  mil  6  s  (mil  i  t-is). 
2.  6  s  is  sliorl  in  comp  6  s,  imp  o  s. 

(255.)  Final  is  and  us  are  generally  short;  e.  g.,  reg-is, 
lomin-  us. 

Rem.  Lis  is  long'  (!)  in  dat,  and  abl.  plural  of  nouns ;  (2)  in  2d  per- 
son sing,  of  verbs  of  4th  conjugation  ;  (3)  compounds  of  vis ;  e.  g., 
ma v i s,  quam vis,  &c. 

2.  us  is  long  (1)  in  nouns  of  3d  decl.  which  have  u  long  in  the  penult 
of  gen.;  e.  g-.,  virtus  (fit  Is),  pal  us  (udis);  (2)  in  gen.  sing.,  and 
N.,  A.,  V.  plur.  of  4th  declension. 

(2.)  Derivation  and  Composition. 
(256.)  Derivative  and  compound  words  generally  retain  the 
quantity  of   the    primitive    and    simple    words  ;    e.  g.,   a  mo, 
fi,  micus  ;  p  6  no,  im  p  o  no. 

(3.)  Increase. 
[A  noun  is  said  to  increase  when  it  has  more  syllables  in  the  gen. 
than  in  the  nom.  {e.g.,  mil-6s,  mil- it-is  ;  here  it  is  the  increase); 
a  verb,  when  it  has  more  syllables  than  the  2d  pers.  sing,  indie. 
{e.g.,  am-as,  Sm-at-isJ ;  here  at  is  the  increase. 1 

(257.)  In  the  increase  of  nounSi  a  and  o  are  generally  long  ; 
€,  i,  u,  y,  short. 

(258.)  In  the  increase  of  verhs,  c,  c,  and  o  are  generally 
long ;  i,  w,  short. 

(4.)  Penults. 
(259.)  Every  perfect  tense  of  two  syllables  has  the  first  long 
(as  vidi),  except  bibi,  fldi,  tuli,  d6di,  st6ti,  and  scidi. 
(260.)  Penults  of  adjectives,    (1)  Xdus,   icus,   short;  (2) 


ADDITIONAL  RULES  OF  aUANTITY.  101 

I  n  us,  douhtful  (often  Zong) ;  (3)  i  1  is  and  b  i  lis,  derived  from 
verbs,  short ;  from  nouns,  long. 

[All  exceptions  to  the  above  rules  that  are  not  stated  will  be  marked 
in  the  vocabularies.] 

(261.)  EXERCISE  ON   qUANTlTIES.  ' 

[Give  the  quantity  of  the  unmarked  syllables  of  the  following  words, 
with  the  rule  for  each.] 

1.  Final  Vowels. 

Ipse,  agmine,  die,  r6g6re,  rgge,  d6c§b6re,  re,  mSve,  m6v6re,  b6ne  (adv., 
from  bdnus),  Caesire,  optime  (adv..  from  optimus),  me,  d6mini,  vigilia,  audi, 
adventu,  ire,  hi,  consilio,  consule,  de,  tertia,  vigflioe,  contra,  roga.  mdneo, 
ita,  fructu,  amo. 

2.  Final  Consonants. 

Obsldes,  bonas,  vigilias,  Smat,  miles  (militis),  milites,  r6gav6ras,  has, 
bSnum,  lampas  (lampadis),  pedes  (peditis),  pgdites,  illas,  adventus  (gen.), 
r6gis,  simul,  audis,  linter,  auditis,  vigiliis,  eftput,  virtua  (virtutis),  d6minis, 
mSnus,  regitur,  rfegitis,  munis,  munivfiras. 

3.  Increase. 

Amatis,  militis,  audiris,  obsidem,  mdnemus,  monebatis,  itineris,  rSgabas, 
mSnebamur,  audimus,  monebimini,  vSluptatis,  sermonis,  mumiure,  p6dites, 
clamorem,  milites,  vulturem,  amatis,  mSnebatis,  mOnetote,  audite,  ifigimua, 
pedem,  sfigetis  (from  seges). 

4.  Penults. 

Maledicus,  mirificufl,  bgngficus,  filcilis  (from  filcio),  pafirilis  (from  poer)^ 
imabilis  (from  ftmo),  servilis  (from  servos). 


pi         *    *•* 

•  ••»  »  , 


§  2. 

TENSES  OF  VERBS  FOR  COMPLETED  AC- 
TION.—PARTIAL  STATEMENT.  (XLIIL— • 
XLVL) 


^LESSON  XLIII. 
Tense  Forms  for  Completed  Action. — Indicative, 

(262.)  In  Part  I.  we  made  use  only  of  those  tenses 
of  the  verb  which  express  action  as  continuing  or 
incompletCt  viz.,  the  present,  imperfect,  and  future. 
There  are  three  tenses  also  for  completed  action,  viz., 
perfect  (J  have  i^jnV^en),  pluperfect  {I  had  written),  fu- 
ture perfect  {I  shall  have  written).  The  stem  for  all 
these  is  the  same. 

(263.)  The  endings  for  these  three  tenses  are. 


SINOXJLAK. 

PLURAL.                            .      ll 

Perfect. 

Pluperf. 
Fut.  Perf. 

1st. 
I. 

6ram. 
erd. 

2d.                 3d. 

isti.        it. 

Sras.        6rat. 
6ris.         6rit. 

Ist 

xmus. 

6rarQus. 
erimus. 

2d. 

istis. 

gratis, 
eritis. 

3d. 

(  erunt,  or 
I  ere. 

grant. 

grint. 

(264.)  By  adding  these  endings  to  the  perfect-stem 
fu-  of  the  verb  esse,  to  be,  we  obtain  the  forms  per- 
.fect.(/ Afl!i>e  .t>e^'A)^  pluperfect  (I  had  been),  future  per- 
{G^t\I  shall'  have  heen),. . 


u^^P^%^^,    .; 

"..    P^fctjCt^      . 

Pluperfect. 

Future  Perfect 

^yv7^'v'  • 

'(\\    ' 

grim. 

erd. 

isti. 

gras. 

gris. 

Fu- 

<    ^*' 

grat. 

grit. 

\  imus. 

gramus. 

erimus. 

j  istis. 

gratis. 

Sritis. 

V  erunt,  or  ere. 

grant. 

grint. 

(265.)  Double  use  of  the  Perfect. — It  must  be  carefully  ob' 
served  that  the  Latin  perfect  has  two  uses,  one  answering  to 
the  English  perfect,  and  the  other  to  the  English  imperfect 


TBNSEfi  FOR  COMPLETED  ACTION. 


103 


Thus,  ful  ^aeans  not  only  /  have  been,  but  /  was.  We  call 
the  former  the  perfect  present ;  the  latter  the  perfect  aorist^* 
which  expresses  momentary  action  in  past  time ;  e.  g.,  Crassus 
w  f      chief  of  the  embassy — Crassus  princeps  legationis  f  u  i  t. 

EXERCISE. 

(266.)   Vocabulary. 


To  be  over,  to  preside  over,  to  com- 
mand, praeessfi  (proe+esse,  to  he 
before). 

To  be  wanting,  de-ess6  (de-j-ess6, 
to  be  from). 

To  he  in,  to  be  present  at,  interess6 
(inter+essS,  to  be  among). 

Sick,  aeger,  gra,  grum  (77,  a). 

(267.)  Examples. 

(a)  If  we  shall  hav&  been  al- 
ways virtuous  in  life^  after 
death    also   we    shall    be 


Praise,  laus,  (laud)  is  (£). 
After,  post  (prep.  ace). 
Before,  ante  (prep.  ace). 
Because,  quia  (conj.,  248). 
How  long  ?  quamdiu  (adv.). 
Afterward,  postea. 
Virtuous,  probtis,  a,  mn. 


Si  in  vita  semp6r  pr6bi  fuSrl- 
miis,  6ti^m  post  mortfim 
beat!  6  rim  us. 


Milites  Romani  pi-aeliis  multis 
interfuerunt. 


(&)  The  Roman  soldiers 
were  present  at  many  bat- 
tles. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  compounds  of  esse  with  the  prepo- 
sitions p  r  ae,  i  n  t  e  r,  0  b,  p  r  Ord  e,  take  the  dative  case. 

(268.)   Translate  into  English. 

Thgmist6cles  vir  magniis  6t  clariis  fuit. — Cur  hSri  in  schola 
non  fuisti  ? — Quia  cum  patre  in  horto  fui. — Quamdiu  in  urbS 
fuistis  ? — Sex  dies  (191,  c). — Ant6  bellum  in  urb6  fueramiis.- 
— Crassus  legatiis  (225,  a)  copiis  Romanorum  praefuSr^-t. — 
Nunquam  deSrit  tibi  laus  hominiim,  si  sempSr  probiis  fueris. 
— iEgernS  (135,  II.,  a)  fuisti  heri  ?— Ant6  Ciceroms  aetatgm 
oratores  multi  gt  clari  fuerant,  ndc  postea  defuerunt. — CaBS&r 
proeliis  multis  interfuit. 

(269).   Translate  into  Latin. 

[Recollect  the  double  use  of  the  perfect  {present  and  aorist,  265).] 
Divitiacus  commanded  (p  r  ae  f  u  i  t)  the  forces  of  the  iEduans. 


*  The  aorist  use  of  the  perfect  is  more  common  in  Latin  t^an  tho 
pment. 


104 


TENSES  FOR  COMPLETED  ACTION. 


— ^If  you  shall  have  been  always  virtuous  in  life,  after  death 
also  you  shall  be  ha})py. — If  we  are  always  virtuous,  the  praise 
of  men  shall  never  be  wanting  to  us. — ^We  were  not  in  school 
yesterday,  because  we  had  been  in  the  garden  with  (our)  fa- 
ther.— Had  you  been  (135,  II.,  a)  in  our  garden  ? — Have  you 
been  sick  ? — How  long  have  you  been  in  the  city  ?  Four 
days  (191,  c). — The  lieutenant  had  been  in  the  city  before  the 
war. — Before  the  age  of  Cgesar  there  had  been  many  and 
great  generals  ;  nor  were  they  wanting  aftei-ward. — Csesar  and 
the  Komaa  soldiers  were  present  at  many  battles. 


LESSON  XLIV. 


Tenses  of  Verbs  for  Completed  Action,  continued, 

(270.)  The  tense-stem  of  the  perfect  tense  is  form- 
ed in  most  verbs  as  follows  : 

(1)  In  1st  conj.  by  adding  av  to  the  verb-stem ;  e.  g.^  am- av. 

(2)  In  2d  conj.        "         u  "  c.^.,  m6n-ii. 
(4)  In 4th conj.        "         iv               "  e.g.,  aud-iv 

[The  third  conjttgation  is  treated  in  the  next  lesson.] 

(271.)  By  adding  the  perfect-endings  (263)  to  thts 
tense-stems  formed  (as  in  270),  we  obtain  the  follow- 
ing perfect- tense  forms  of  am  are,  to  love  ;  monere> 
to  advise;  audi  re,  to  hear* 


1st  conj. 
2cl  conj. 
4th  conj. 


Smav- 
monu- 
audiv- 


/,  thou,  he,  we,      ye. 


M,   isti,    It, 


imus,  istis,  grant,  or 
6r6, 


have  loved, 
have  advised, 
have  Jieard. 


*  In  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjugations,it  is  obvious  that  the  per- 
feet  is  made  up  of  the  crude-form  o^  the  verb  9.ndfui;  e. g.,_  amafui^ 
Smftvi;  mone-fui  =  monui ;  audi- fui  ;=  audi vi. 


PERFECl   TENSE.  105 


EXERCISE. 

(272.)   Vocabulary. 


Preceptor,  prasceptor,  (praeceptor)  is 

(m.). 
Tribune,  tribunus,  i  (m.). 
Sister,  soror,  (soror)  is  (f.). 
Disgrace,  ignomlnia,  ae  (f.). 

(273.)  Examples. 


Pleasant,  jucundus,  S,  um. 
All  night,  p6r  totSm  noct6m. 
Diligently,  diligentSr  (215,  2,  b). 
From  every  side,  undiquS  (adv.). 
To  excite,  excitarg. 


Pu^riim  3.mavi. 
A   puero  (i.  c,  from  a   hoy) 
matrem  amavi. 


(a)  /  loved  the  hoy. 
(6)  From  my  hoyhood  I  have 
loved  my  mother. 

[Obs.  In  (a)  the  perfect  aorist  is  used ;  in  {b)  the  perfect  present.'} 

(274.)   Translate  into  English. 

Caesar  omnes  undique  mercatores  ad  se  (145,  a)  convocavit. 

— A  pu^ro  fratrSm  et  sororem  amavi. — Cur  per  totam  noctein 

vigilavisti  ? — Quia  pater  aeger  fuit. — MilTtes  diu  et  acriter  pug- 

naverunt. — Hos   pueros*    magister   diligenter   docuit  linguam 

Latinam.* — Tua  ipsius  (159)  causa  (135,  II.,  h)  te  saepe  monul. 

— Timor  ignominiae  Germanos  ad  virtutem  excitavit. — Jiicun- 

diim  avium  (78,  II.,  h)  cantum  audivimus. — Dormivistine  ? — 

Non  dormivi. — Caesaris  adventus  oppidanos  terruit. 

[Inflect  all  the  verbs  in  this  lesson  through  the  perfect  tense,  and 
foi-m  the  perfect  according  to  (270).] 

(275.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Caesar  called  together  all  the  lieutenants  from  every  side  to 
himself  (145,  a). — From  my  boyhood  I  have  loved  my  precep- 
tors.— The  good  preceptor  taught  me*  the  Greek  language. — 
Caesar  caUed-together  aU  the  lieutenants  and  tribunes  (tiibunos- 
qu6,  202,  N.)  of  the  soldiers  to  himself. — The  slaves  liave 
watched  all  night. — (Your)  father  has  often  advised  you  for 
your  own  sake  (135,  II.,  b). — The  Gauls  took-possession-of 
Rome. — The  love  of  glory  has  always  excited  the  Romans  to 
braveiy. — We  have  diligently  taught  the  boys. — Why  did  you 
not  sleep  ?  Because  my  mother  was  sick. — They  have  heard 
the  pleasant  singing  of  the  birds. — We  have  fortified  all  the 

*  Verba  of  teaching  take  two  accusatives,  one  of  the  person,  the  other 
of  the  thing. 


lot  PBtFECT  T«NflB. 

towers  of  Gaul. — The  coming  of  Cassar  terrified  the  ^Eduans 
and  Helvetians. — I  have  often  walked  in  Caesar's  garden,  on- 
the-other-side-of  the  Tiber  (trans  Tiberlm). 


LESSON  XLV. 

Tenses  for    Completed  Action,   continued,  —  Perfect 
Tense,  Third  Conjugation, 
(276.)  The  perfect  tense-stem  of  most  verbs  of  the 
third  conjugation  is  formed  by  adding  5  to  the  verb- 
stem  ;  e.  g., 

Perfect-stem. 
rSg-gr6,  '      to  rule^        r6g-s     =    rex- 

scrib-ere,      to  write^       scrib-s  =     scrips- 

lud-er6,  to  play ^       lud-s     =    lus- 

(277.)  Rules  of  Euphony. 

(1)  A  c-sound  before  s  forms  x;  duc-s  =  du.x;  r$g-8  = 
rex. 

Rem.  c,  g,  h,  gu,  qu,  are  classed  among  k-sounds.    v  also  (generally) 
before  s  fonns  x;  viv-s  =  vix. 

(2)  b  before  s  is  changed  into  p;  €. ^.,  scrib-s  =  scrips; 
nu  b-s  =  nups. 

(3)  A  t-sound  is  (generally)  dropped  before  s;  lud-s  =  lus; 
claud-s  =  claus. 

Rem.  t  and  d  are  the  t-80tmds. 

(278.)  By  adding  the  perfect-endings  (263)  to  the 
stems  of  reg-ere,  scrib-ere,  lud-ere,  we  obtain 
the  perfect  tense-forms  {have  ruled,  have  written,  have 
played). 


PEHFECT-STEMS. 

ENDINGS. 

(r6g-s=)  rex- 
(scrib-s  = )  scrips- 
(lad-s  =  )  lus- 

/,  thou,  he,  we,      ye,     they, 
'\                                                            { 1  hriTe  rilled. 

>  I,  isti,    Jt,   Jmus,  istis,  ©runt,  or  {    have  written. 

>  er6.         i    have  played. 

PERFECT  TENSE.  lOt 


EXERCISE. 

(279.)   Vocabulary, 

Snddenly,  subiCo. 

To  say,  dicerS, 

To  draw  (as  a  sword),  string6r6. 

Sword,  gladlus,  i. 

Trial,  judicium,  i. 

To  lead  together,  conducgrS. 

(280.)  Examples, 
{a)  Did  not  Ccesar  say  these 
things  ? 


To  divide,  dividers. 

Household,  familiS,  ae. 

Orgetorix,  OrgStorix,  (Org^tSrlg)  is. 

A  dependent,  cliens,  (client)  Is  (c). 

Nature,  natura,  ae. 

Stoic,  stoicus,  i. 


(6)  Did  Casar  say  this  {i. «., 
is  it  possible  that  he  did)  ? 


N  o  n  n  6  Caes&r  haec  dixit  ? 
(NonnS  is  used  in  asking  ques- 
tions when  the  answer  yes  is 
expected.) 
N  u  m  Caesar  hsec  dixit  ? 
(N  u  m  is  used  when  the  answef 
no  is  expected.) 

(281.)   Translate  into  English, 

[Recollect  double  use  of  perfect  (265).] 
Caesar  duas  legiones  conscripsit ;  tres  ex  hibernis  eduxit. — 
Principes  Germanoriim  omnes  suas  copias  Rhenum  (113,  II., 
«)  transdux6runt. — Consul  giadium  strinxit. — Nonn6  (280,  a) 
giadios  strinxistis? — Niim  imp^rator  giadiiim  strinxit? — Or- 
getorix ad  judicium  omnem  suam  familiam  et  omnes  clientfis 
conduxit. — Caesar  exercitiim  in  duas  partes  divisit. — Nonn6 
epistolam  ad  pati'6m  scripsisti  ? — Stoici  diviserunt  naturam 
hominis  in  animura  &t  corpus. — Multas  litt^ras  hodie  scrip- 
simiis. 

[What  is  the  force  of  6  in  eduxit  ?  of  con  in  conduxit  ?  of  trans  in 
transduxit?  Describe  the  formation  of  the  perfect,  and  the  euphonic 
changes,  in  all  the  verbs  of  this  lesson.] 

(282.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

The  soldiers  suddenly  drew  their  swords. — Csesar  levied  five 
legions  in  Italy. — Csesar  levied  six  legions  in  Italy,  and  led  out 
four  from  (their)  winter-quarters  in  Gaul. — The  iEduans  en- 
deavour to  lead  (113,  II.,  a)  all  their  forces  across  the  Rhine. 
—The  general  divided  the  army  into  five  parts. — Did  C?Esar 
say  these  (things)  yesterday  (280,  h)  1 — Did  you  not  write  a  let- 
ter to  your  brother  ? — Have  you  written  a  letter  to  the  king 
(280,  I)  ? — Orgetorix  led-together  all  his  household  to  the  trial. 


108 


PLUPERFECT  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT. 


— Orgetorix  led-together  to  the  trial  all  his  household  and  a!l 
(his)  dependents. — ^Why  have  you  drawn  (your)  sword  ? — Why 
have  you  not  written  to  (your)  father  ?-^The  ^duans  levied 
many  soldiers. — We  have  divided  the  nature  of  man  into  soul 
and  body. 


LESSON  XL VI. 

Tenses  for  Completed  Action,  continued. — Pluperfect 
and  Future  Perfect  Tenses. 

(283.)  {a)  The  pluperfect  tense  simply  adds  to  the  perfect 
tense-stem  the  imperfect  of  esse  {to  he) ;  viz.,  6  r  a  ra, 
fir  as,  &c. 

{b)  The  future  perfect  simply  adds  to  the  perfect  tense-stem 
Ihe  future  of  esse;  viz.,  e  r  6,  6  ri  s,  &c. ;  but  in  3d  plural  it 
changes  u  into  i ;  viz.,  6  r  i  n  t,  instead  of  e  r  u  n  t. 

(284.)  Thus,  from  am-are,  mon-ere,  reg-er6 
aud-ire,  we  have, 


PRF.-STEM.I                                PLUPERFECT-KNDINO. 

1.  amav- 

2.  m6nu- 

3.  rex- 

4.  audiv- 

/,        thou,  he,     we,         ye,        they, 
\  gram,  grfts,  6rftt,  6ramus,  eratis,  grant,  < 

had  loved, 
had  advised, 
had  ruled, 
had  heard. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

1.  amav- 

2.  monu- 

3.  rex- 

1  4.  audiv- 

I  6r«,     grfs,  grit,  grimus,  gritis,  grint,  I 

shall  have  loved, 
shall  have  advised, 
shall  have  ruled, 
shall  have  heard. 

EXERCISE. 


(285.)   Vocabulary. 


To  attach,  oppngnftrg. 
Near,  juxta  (prep.  ace). 
Already,  jam  (adv.). 
To  take  by  storm,  expugnarB 


Defiles,  angustiae,  arum  (pi.). 

To  err,  errarg. 

To  draw,  ducgrg. 

A  principle,  principium,  i. 

(286.)   Translate  into  English. 

(a)  Pluperfect. — MiKtes  diu  et  acritSr  pugnaverant. — PS,t6r 
filium  saepS  moniierat. — Duas  legiones  in  Italia  conscripsera- 
in\Ss. — Helv6«:ii  JS,m  p6r  angustias  copias  suas  transduxferant. — 


PLUPERFECT  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT.       109 

CsBs^r  castella  GaUiae  munlverat  et  tres  legiones  ex  hibernis 
eduxerat. 

(6)  Future  Perfect.  _         "  . 

Rem.  The  future  perfect  is  sometimes  used  in  Latin,  when  in  Eng. 

lish  we  should  use  the  simple  perfect  or  future ;  e.  g., 
When  I  {shall)  have  written  the  I  daum  epistolam  scripserd,  adte 
letter,  I  shall  come  to  you.        \     veniam. 

Quum  amicum  in  hortum  duxero,  ad  te  veniam. — Haud 
erravero,  si  a  Platone  principiiim  duxero. — Quum  hostes  cas- 
tella expugnaverint,  urbera  ipsam  (159)  oppugnabunt. — Haud 
erraveris,  si  a  CicerSne  principiS,  duxeris. 

(287.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

{a)  Pluperfect. — The  general  had  drawn  his  sword. — Near 
the  city  the  soldiers  had  fought  long  and  spiritedly. — Caesar  had 
levied  one  legion  in  Italy,  and  led-out  seven  from  (their)  win- 
ter-quarters in  Gaul. — The  Helvetians  had  aheady  led  their 
forces  across  the  Rhine  (113,  H.,  a),  through  the  boundaries 
of  the  Sequanians. — I  had  often  advised  you  for  your  own 
sake  (135,  H.,  h). 

(6)  Future  Perfect  (R.,  286,  I). — When  we  have  written 
the  letters,  we  shall  come  to  the  city. — We  shall  not  have  err- 
ed, if  we  shall  have  drawn  (ducere)  our  principles  from  Plato. 
— When  Caesar  shall  have  taken-by-storm  the  city,  he  will  at- 
tack the  tower  itself  (159) . 

K 


^      -       §  3. 

NOUNS  OF  THIRD  DECLENSION.— FULLER 
TREATMENT.  (X^VII.— LVII ; 

[The  third  declension  contains  more  nouns  than  all  the  others  togeth- 
er. It  also  involves  greater  difficulties  ;  and  we  therefore  give  it  a 
full  treatment  in  the  following  section,  which  should  be  carefully 
studied.] 


LESSON  XLVII. 

(288.)  The  .genitive-ending  of  the  third  declension 
aS  is. 

Rem.  To  find  the  stem  of  any  noun  of  this  declension,  strike  off  i  B 
from  the  gen.;  e.g.,  G.,  n  6m  In  is  {of  a  name),  stem,  nomin. 

(289.)  ENDINGS   FOR  ALL  THE  CASES. 


'  SINGULAR. 

PLUBAL.                       ^ 

M. and  F. 

N. 

M.  and  F. 

N. 

N. 

— 

N. 

es. 

a  (ift). 

G. 

is. 

is. 

G. 

um  (ium). 

flm  (ium). 

D. 

I. 

I. 

D. 

ibus. 

ibds. 

A. 

6m  (im). 

like  Nom. 

A. 

es. 

&  (i&). 

V. 

like  Nom. 

like  Nom. 

V. 

es. 

a  (ii). 

A. 

6(i). 

6(i). 

A. 

ibus. 

Ibus. 

(290.)  The  nom. -ending  is  not  given,  because  of  the  many 
forms  in  which  that  case  occm's.  The  most  common  nom.-end- 
ing  is  s  ;  but  the  stem  itself  is  often  employed  as  the  nom. ; 
and  rs  often,  again,  changed.  We  make  six  classes,  which 
must  be  carefully  distinguished,  viz. : 

(291.)  CLASSES. 

I.  Nouns  which  add  s  to  the  stem  in  the  nominative  with- 
out any  vowel  change.     {Feminines.) 
II.  Nouns  which  insert  a  connecting  vowel  (e  or  i)  iTefore 
adding  s.     {Feminines.) 

III.  Nouns  which  change  the  stem-vowel  (i  into  e)  before 

adding  s.     {Masculines,) 

IV.  Nouns  which  add  6  to  the  stem.  (Neuters.) 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  I. 


Ill 


V".  Nouns  which*  present  the  unchanged  stem  in  the  nom- 
inative without  adding  s.  {Masculines^  except  -al, 
-ar,  -ur,  which  are  Neuter.) 
VI.  Nouns  which  present  the  stem  changed  in  the  nomina- 
tive without  adding  s.  {Masculines,  Feminines,  and 
Neuters.) 

(292.)  [Before  entering  upon  the  paradigms,  the  student  should  learn 
thoroughly  the  following  rules  of  eupiwny,  which  prevail  generally 
in  Latin  nouns  and  verbs.] 

(1)  c  or  g  before  s  unites  with  it  to  foi-m  x  ;  e.  g*.,  le  g-s  is 
written  lex;  arc-s  =  arx;  voc-s  =  vox,  &c. 

(2)  d  or  t   before   s    is   dropped;  e.  g.,   laud-s  =  laus; 
quiet-s  =  quies ;  parent-s  =  parens. 

(293.)  Class   I. — The  Nominative   adds   s    to   the 
Stem,  without  any  Vowel  change,     {Feminines.) 


Sing. 

City  (f.). 

Citadel  (C). 

PraUa  .((■•)• 

Race  (nation),  f. 

Quiet  (f.). 

N.  and  V. 

urb-s. 

arx  (arc-s). 

laus  (laud-s). 

gens(gent-s). 

quies.  , 

Gen. 

urb-is. 

arc-is. 

laud-Is. 

gent-is. 

quiet-Ts. 

Dat. 

urb-i. 

arc-I. 

laud-I. 

gent  I. 

quiet-i. 

Aoc. 

urb-em. 

arc- em. 

laud-em. 

gent-em. 

quiet-6m. 

Abl.       urb-6. 

arc-6. 

laud-e. 

gent-e. 

quiet-e. 

Plur. 

C,t..s. 

C.tiidels. 

Praises. 

Races  (n-ations). 

N.,  A.,  V. 

urb-es. 

arc -63. 

laud-es. 

gent-es. 

quiet-es. 

Gen. 

urb-ium 

arc-ium. 

laud-um. 

gent-ium. 

quiet-um. 

D.  and  A. 

iirb-ibus. 

arc-Tbus. 

laud-ibus. 

gent-ibus. 

quiet-ibus. 

On  this  class,  observe  carefully  that, 

(294.)  As  to  the  case-endings,  i  u  m  is  the  gen.  plur.  ending 
of  those  nouns  whose  stems  end  in  tivo  consonants  ;  e.  g.,  urb-s, 
urb-is,  urb-ium;  nox,  noct-is,  noct-ium;  cohors,  cohort- 
Js,  cohort- iiim. 

(295.)  As  to  gender,  they  are  mostly  feminine.     Hence, 

Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  add  s  to  the  stem,  without 
changing  the  stem-vowel,  to  form  the  nom.,  axe  feminine. 
[Rem.  Exceptions.    The  following  are  masculines : 


1.  dens  (dent-is),  tooth. 

mons  (mont-Ts),  mountain. 
fons  {iont-\s),foimtain. 
pons  (pont-is),  bridge. 
rudens  (rudent-Is),  rope. 


*bldens  (bident-fs),  hoe. 
*torrens  (ton-ent-is),  torrent. 
*tridens  (trident-is),  trident. 
*6i-iens  (orient-is),  east. 
*occideus  (occident-Ts),  west. 


*  These  nouns  in  ens  are  properly  adjectives,  with  a  masc  noun  under- 
{Stood ;  e.  g.,  oriens  sol,  torrens  amnis,  &c. 


112 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  I. 


2.  Grex  (greg)  is,  a  flock ;  also  a  few  noune  in  ix  and  ax. 

3.  Paries^  (pariet)  Is,  wall;  pes  (ped.is),/(?c^;  lapis,  (lapid)  is,  stone , 
viis  (vad-is),  surety.] 

\^^  The  rules  of  gender  should  be  learned  by  heart ;  the  lists  of  ex- 
ceptions need  not  be,  unless  they  are  very  short.  -AH  exceptions  are 
marked  in  the  vocabularies ;  and  the  lists  should  be  referred  to  whenever 
cases  occur.] 

To  Class  I.  belong  the  nouns  of  the  following  endings,  of  which  the 
pupil  has  had  frequent  examples  : 

Libertas,  libertat-is,  liberty;  dignitas,  dignitat-Ts,  dig 

nity ;  and,  in  short,  all  nouns  in  as,  at i s. 
Virtus,  \\ri\i\.-\s,  virtue;  and  all  others  in  us,  utis. 
P a  1  u s,  p a  1  u d -is,  swamp ;  and  others  in  us,  u d i s. 

In  the  following  exercise  several  of  the  exceptions  will  be  found. 
EXERCISE. 

(296.)   Vocabulary. 

Highest  {iJbe  top),  summus,  a,  um. 

Middle,  medius,  a,  um. 

To  leave,  relinquere  (perf.-stem,  r5- 

Hqu-). 
To  secede,  B&cgd6rg  (perf.-stem,  se- 

cess-).  , 

To  take  care  of,  curare. 
To  touch  upon,  to  reach,  attingerg. 
To  seek,  to  aim  at,  petfire. 
To  cut  down,  rescindere. 


Romulus,  Romulua,  T. 
Hercynian,  Hercynius,  5,  una. 
Senate,  senatus,  us  (m.). 
Agrippa,  Agrippa,  38  (m.). 
W7iere,  ubinam  ? 

The  common  people,  plebs,  (pleb)  ta. 
Patricians  (of  Rome),  patres,  (patr) 

um  (pi.). 
An  interreign,  interregnum,  I. 
Speedy,  citus,  a,  um. 

[The  nouns  which  occur  in  the  preceding  lesson  are  not  named  in  the 
vocabulary :  the  learner  will  find  tiiem,  and  observe  their  ge7ider.] 


(297.)  Examples, 
{a)  On  the  top  of  the  mount- 
ain. 

(b)  On  the  tops  of  the  trees. 

(c)  In  the  middle  of  the  city, 
{d)    Where  in  the  world  1 


Insumm5mont6. 

In  summis  arbSribus. 
In  media  urb6. 
Ubinam  gentium? 


(298.)   Translate  into  English. 

Magna  pars  plebis  urbera  reliquit,  et  in  montem  (295,  R.  1) 
secessit. — Tiimpati-es  Agripp§,mad  plebemmiserunt(401,3, 6) 
— Hercynia  sylva  fines  multarum  gentium  attingit. — Cassius, 
ISgatus  (225,  a),  tres  cohortes  in  ai-c6m  oppidi  duxit. — Ubi 
nSi.m  gentium  siimus  ? — Deiis  cur^t  gentes. — Aquilse  in  sum 


NOUNS,  THIRD  PECLENSION,  CLASS  II. 


113 


mis   montibus   nidificanl. — Magnus   (78,   II.,   h)    a,vium   grex 

(295,  R.,  2)  sumrnam  arcem  petunt. — Milites  pontem  (295,  R., 

1)  rescindunt. — Leges  Romanorum  justae  fuerunt. — Summus 

mons  (295,  R.,  1)  ab  hostibua  tenetur. — Caesar  ad  utramque 

(194,  R.  1)  partem  pontis  praesidmm  reliquit. — Post  RomuK 

mortem  unius  (194)  anni  inteiTegniim  fuit. — Sapientes  mortem 

non  timent. — Mors  cita  veni^t. 

[All  the  nouns  should  be  declined,  the  rule  of  gender  given,  and  the  ex- 
ceptions refen-ed  to  if  necessary.  The  formations  of  the  verbs  should  be 
carefully  analyzed.] 

(299.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  laws  were  just. — The  fountain  was  beautiful. — The 
Hercynian  forest  touches  the  boundaries  of  five  nations. — The 
common-people  left  the  city,  and  seceded  to  tlie  mountain. — 
The  doves  built- their-nest  in  the  top  of  the  citadel  (297,  a). — A 
large  flock  of  birds  flew  over  the  city. — The  soldiers  fought 
long  on  the  middle  of  the  bridge  (297,  c). — Then  the  senate  sent 
an  ambassador  to  the  common-people. — God  takes  caire  of  cities 
and  nations. — The  Belgians  inhabit  one  part  of  Gaul,  the  Aqui- 
tanians  another. — -Where  in  the  world  (297,  d)  are  we  ?  in 
what  city  do  we  live  ? — Caesar  fortified  each  part  of  the  bridg© 


LESSON  XLVIIL 

Nouns. — Third  Declension^  continued, 
(300.)  Class  IL — The  Nominative  inserts  a  Con- 
necting-vowel (e  or  i)  before  adding  s  to  the  Stem. 
(Feminines.) 


1 

e  inserted. 

i  inserted. 

Singular. 

Cloud  (1.). 

Ship  (f.). 

N.  and  V. 

nub-<?-sl 

nav-?-s. 

Gen. 

nub-is. 

nav-is. 

Dat 

nub-I. 

nav-i. 

Ace. 

nub-6m. 

nav-em  or  im. 

Abl. 

nub-6. 

nav-6  or  I. 

I'luraU 

ciouas. 

Si.ips. 

N.   A.  V. 

nflb-es. 

nav-es. 

Gen. 

niib-ium. 

nav-ium. 

D.  and  Abl. 

nub-ibus. 

nav-ibus. 

=£± 

K  2 


£14 


NOUNS,    THIRD    DECLENSION,    CLASS    II. 


On  this  class,  observe  carefully, 

(301.)  As  tb  the  case-endings:  [(1)  The  acc.-ending  Im 
instead  of  e  m  is  used  :  1.  sometimes  (but  rarely)  in  the  words 
c  la  VIS,  key;  mess  is,  harvest;  navis,  ship:  2.  commonly 
in  f  ebri  s, /eijer ;  pelvis,  basin;  puppis,  stern;  restis, 
rope;  securis,  axe;  turris,  tower:  3.  always  in  araussis, 
a  rule  ;  s i 1 1 s,  thirst ;  t u s s i s,  cough ;  vis,  force.] 

[(2)  The  abl.-ending  i  instead  of  &  is  used  (not,  however,  to 
the  exclusion  of  e)  in  all  those  words  which  take  im  in  the 
ace;  e.g.,  turris,  turrim,  turri:  vis,  vim,  vi  (al- 
ways).    Also  in  i g n i s, ^re ;  ci vis,  citizen.'] 

(3)  The  gen.  plur.  ending  iiim  instead  of  iim  is  used  in 
most  nouns  which  insert  e  or  i  before  adding  s  to  the  stem. 
[Proles,  canis,  panis,  vates,  juvenis  have  iim.] 

(302.)  Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  insert  a  vowel  (e  or  i) 
before  adding  s  in  the  nominative  are  feminines. 
[Rem.  Exceptions: 


Amuis  (m.),  river. 
Axis  (in.),  axle. 
Callis  (m.),  path. 
Caualis  (m.),  canal. 
CoUTs  (m.),  hill. 
Crinis  (m.),  hair. 
Ensis  (m.),  sword. 


fascTs  (m.),  bundle. 
fbllis  (m.)-,  bellows. 
funis  (m.),  rope. 
fustis  (m.),  club. 
ignis  {to..),  fire. 
mensis  (m.),  month. 
orbis  (m.),  circle. 


panis  (m.),  bread. 
piscis  \^),fish. 
postis  (m.),  post. 
sentis  (m.),  bramble. 
unguis  (m.), fingernail. 
vectis  (m.),  lever. 
vermis  (m.),  worm.] 


EXERCISE. 
[In  the  vocabularies,  the  Roman  numerals  I.,  IL,  &c. 
nouns,  refer  to  the  class  to  which  they  belong.] 

(303.)    Vocabulary, 

To  dread,  formidarS. 

Pilot,  gubemator,  is  (m.). 

To  bring,  ag6r6  (perf.-stem,  gg-). 

To  procure,  comparare. 

A  Carthaginian,  Carthaginiensis,  is. 

To  raise,  to  kindle,  excitare. 

Power,  potestas,  (potestat)  is  (f.,  I.). 

Barbarian,  barbSrus,  i. 

Vehemently,    greatly,    vehfimentfir 

(215,  2,  b). 
To  build,  oedlf  icare. 


placed  after 


Afi^,  classis,  is  (f.,  II.). 
And,  ac. 

Twenty,  vlglnti  (indecl.). 
Lofty,  altus,  fi,  iim. 
Thirteen,  tredgcim  (indecl.). 
The  Druids,  Druides,  um  (m.,  pL). 
Thirst,  sitis,  (sit)  is  (f.,  II.). 
To  relieve,  levarS. 
To  dispute,  disputarS. 
To    terrify,    terrerg    (perfect-steto, 
terre-). 

(304.)   Translate  into  English. 
Nubes  sFBpS  lun&m  obscurant. — Civ^s  classSm  host) dm  for- 


NOUNS,    THIRD    DECLENSION,    CLASS    III. 


115 


mid  ant. — Caesar  naves  longas  gBdificavit,  et  nautas  giibemato- 
resque  (202,  N,)  comparavit. — Crassus  ad  oppidiim  tm-res 
altas  egit. — Ve teres  Romani  vim  Carthagimensium  non  formi- 
davenmt. — Csesar  tmTes  tredecim  excitavit. — Milites  ignea 
magnos  in  summo  monte  (297,  a)  excitaverunt^ — Druides  de 
deorum  immortalium  vi  ac  potestate  disputant. — Classis  adven- 
tiis  cives  terruit. — Aqua  sitim  (301,  1)  levat. — Nova  navlum 
figura  vehementer  (215,  2,  b)  bai'baros  terruit. 

(305.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

Lofty  towers  are  raised  by  Csesar. — The  general  prepared 
twenty  long  ships. — The  lieutenant  brought  the  towers  to  the 
wall  of  the  city. — The  power  of  the  Romans  terrified  the  Oauls. 
— Wine  does  not  relieve  thirst. — The  sun  is  often  obscured 
by  the  clouds. — The  approach  of  the  fleet  and  the  soldiers  ter- 
rified the  citizens. — A  great  fire  is  kindled  on  the  top  of  the 
mountain  by  the  ^duans. — The  general  stationed  the  ships 
near  the  wall  of  the  city. — The  clouds  are  black. — The  coming 
of  our  fleet  and  the  sti'ange  (n  6  v  a)  figure  of  the  ships  terrified 
all  the  barbarians. 


LESSON  XLIX. 
Nouns, — Third  Declension,  continued. 
(306.)  Class  III. — The   Nominative    changes    the 
Stem-vowel  (i  into  e)  before  adding  s  to  the  Stem, 


Vowel  i  changed  into  e.                                                    ] 

Singular. 

Soldier  (m.). 

Book  (m.). 

N.  and  V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

mil^-s  (milet-s). 

milTt-is. 

milit-i. 

milit-gm. 

milit-6. 

c6d(5x  (codecs). 

c6dic-is. 

c6dTc-i. 

codic-em. 

codTc-e. 

Plural.       , 

SoWiers. 

Books. 

N.  A.   V. 

Gen. 
D.  and  A. 

milTt-es. 

milit-um. 

millt-ibus. 

c6dic-es. 

c6dic-um. 

codTc-ibus. 

On  this  class,  observe  that, 

(307.)  As  to  the  case-endings^  they  are  all  regular. 

(308.)  As  to  gender,  they  are  masculine.     Hence, 


116 


NOUNS,    THIRD    DECLENSION,    CLASS    III. 


Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  change  the  stem-vowel 
i  into  6  before  adding  s  in  the  nominative  are  masculine, 

Exc.  Merges  (f.),  (mergitis),  a  sheaf. 


EXERCISE. 


(309.)    Vocabulary, 

To  double,  duplicar6. 

Brutus,  Brutus,  I. 

Sharp,    spirited,    acer,    acris,    acre 

(105,  R.  1). 
Defender,    vindex,  (vindic)    is    (m., 

III.). 
Liberty,  libertas,  (libertit)  Is  (f.,  I.). 
Foot-soldier,  footman,  pedSs,  (p6dit) 
'  Is  (m.,  III.). 
Embark  upon,    conscendSrS,  con-f- 

scandere    (perf.-stem,    consceud), 

(for  upon,  iu  with  the  accusative). 
To  depart,  discedgrg. 
/  began,  coepi.    Perfect,  defective. 
To  sustain,  sustTnere  (sub  and  t6- 

nere),  perf.-stem,  sustinu. 


At   his  own  expense,  sumptu    suo 

(abl.). 
Expense,  sumptus,  us. 
To  support,  alere  (perf -stair,  alu). 
Greatness,  magnitudd,  (magnltudln) 

Is  (f ). 
A  Briton,  BrTtannus,  I. 
Guest,  hospes,  (hospit)  Is  fm.  and  L, 

25,  a). 
To  injure,  to  maltreat,  vi6larg. 
Companion,  c6m6s>  (comit)  la   (no. 

aiid  f.,  25,  a). 
Narrow,  angustus,  a,  um. 
Place,  lociis,  i  (nom.  pL,  I6ci  and 

loca). 
Conspiracy/,  conjuratio  (nis)  (f ). 


(310.)   Translate  into  English. 

Ceesar  niimeriim  obsidum  duplicabit. — Brutus  erat  ac6r 
libertatis  vindex. — Equites  et  pedites  in  naves  con- 
scenderunt. — Dumnorix  cum  equitibiis  discedere  coepit. — 
Dumnorix  magnum  numeriim  equitum  suo  sumptu  aiuit. — 
M  i  1  i  t  e  s  omnes  magnitudinem  sylvariim  timuerunt. — Bii- 
tanni  antiqui  hospites  nunquam  violaverunt.  —  Comites 
principis  angusto  in  loco  equitum  nostroriim  vim  diu 
sustinnerunt. 

(311.)  Translate  into  Latin. 

The  chiefs  began  to  go  aw^ay  with  all  the  horsemen. — The 
horse-soldiers  and  foot-soldiers  did  not  sustain  the  attack  (vim)  of 
the  enemy. — The  general  supported  the  soldiers  at  his  own 
expense. — The  companions  of  Dumnorix  sustained  bravely  the 
attack  of  our  footmen. — The  Germans  maltreated  the  ambas- 
sadors.—The  companions  of  the  lieutenant  are  erabarking-upon 
the  ships. — The  greatness  of  the  woods  terrifies  the  horsemen 
uud  the  footmen. — Dumnorix  always  maltreats  (his)  guests. — 
The  messenger  began  to  depart  with  all  the  guests. — ^Bmtus, 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSIO??,  CLASS  IV. 


117 


the  defender  of  liberty,  made  (fecit)  a  conspiracy.- -The 
townsmen  for  a  long  time  supported  a  large  number  of  footmen 
at  their  own  expense. — The  chie|s  doubled  the  number  of 
horsemen. 


LESSON  L. 
Nouns.- — Third  Declension,  cenzinuett 

(312.)  Class  IY. — The  Nominjtive  adds  ^  to  the 
Stem. 


N.,  A.,  V. 

Gen. 
Dat..  Abl. 


Sea  (n.). 


mar-6 

mar-is. 

mdr-i. 


niar-Ia. 

mar-ium. 

mlr-ibus. 


^et  (n.). 

ret-e. 
ret-is, 
ret-i. 


Nets. 


retHi. 
ret-i  una. 
ret-Tbus. 


On  this  class,  observe  that, 

(313.)  As  to  the  case-endings,  the  abl.  is  always  i,  the  nwa. 
plur.  ia,  and  the  gen.  plur.  iiim. 

(314.)  As  to  gender,  they  ai-e  all  neuter.     Hence, 

Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  add  e  to  the  stem  (instead 
of  s)  in  the  nom.  are  neuter. 

EXERCISE. 


(315.)   Vocabulary. 

By  sea  and  land,  terra  mSrique,  all. 
(not  mari  et  terra). 

To  wash,  alluere  (ad+luei*e). 

To  use,  uti  (dep. governs  abl). 

To  be  acnistomed,  consuescSre  {per- 
fect-stem, consuev). 

Navigation,  navigatio,  (navigatidn) 
IS  (f.). 

Vast,  vastus,  ft,  um. 

Open,  ftpertus,  ft,  um. 

Ocean,  Oceftnus,  i. 

The  Venetians,  V6n6ti,  orum  (pi.). 

Broad,  latus,  &.  um. 


But,  aut6m  (not  so  strongly  advers- 
ative as  sM,  and  always  placed  af- 
ter one  or  more  words  of  the  sen- 
tence). 

Other,  different,  alius  (194,  R.  1) 

Bed,  cubile,  (ciibll)  Is  (IV.). 

Splendid,  splendidiis,  ft,  um. 

A  dock-yard,  nftvalg,  (naval)  is  (JiY.\. 

To  commit,  to  join  (as  battle),  corr.- 
mittere  (perf.-stera,  commis) 

In  the  mean  time,  interim  (adv.). 

HnntsTnan,  venator  (is),  m. 

Far,  longS  (adv.). 


118  NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  IV. 


(316.)  Examples, 
{a)  For  Marseilles  is  washed 
■    on  three  sides  hy  the  sea. 


Massilia  6nim  tribus  ex  parti 
bus  mari  (abl.,  93,  II.,  h, 
R.)  alluitiir. 

Nosti-o  marl  (55)  longis  navl- 
bus  uti  consuevimus. 


(6)  In  our  sea  {i.  c,  the  Med- 
iterranean) we  were  accus- 
tomed to  use  long  ships. 
Rule  of  Syntax. — The  deponent  verb  uti,  to  use^  governs 
the  ablative;  e.  g.,  navibus,  in  {b). 

(317.)   Translate  into  English. 

Longe  alia  navigatio  est  in  angusto  mari  atquS  in  vasto 
atque  ^perto  oceano. — Longge  fuerunt  naves  quibus  (abl.,  316, 
b)  nostro  mari  (55)  uti  (infin.)  consuevimus. — Veneti  autem 
latis  navibus  uti  consueverunt.— Mihi  (125,  II.,  a)  cubile  est 
terra. — Romanoriim  c  u  b  i  1  i  a  magna  fuerunt  et  splendid^. — 
Imperator  quinque  naves  ex  navali  eduxit  et  prselium  com- 
misit. — Turris  erat  proxima  portui  (106,  II.,  c)  navalibus- 
que. — Caesar,  interim,  omnes  naves  quae  erant  in  navalibus 
incendit. — Venator  rete  dUigenter  parabat. — Venatores  retia 
cervis  (54)  parabant. 

(318.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  fai'mers  were  preparing  nets  for  the  (54)  doves. — Cor 
inth  is  washed  on  two  sides  by  the  sea. — The  ships  which  (316, 
b)  the  Venetians  were  accustomed  to  use  in  our  sea  were  long. 
— In  the  vast  and  open  ocean  we  use  broad  ships. — Navigation 
is  far  different  (1  o  n  g  e  a  1  i  a)  in  a  narrow  river  and  in  the  open 
sea. — I  had  (125,  II.,  a)  a  high  tree  (for  my)  bed. — Csesar  was 
pmsuing  Pompey  by  sea  and  land. — The  tower  was  very  near 
to  the  dockyard. — The  general,  in  the  mean  time,  was  rebuild 
ing  all  the  old  ships  in  the  port  and  dockyards . 


N0UN3,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  V. 


119 


LESSON  LI. 

Nouns. — Third  Declension,  continued. 

(319.)  Class   V. —  The   Nominative  presents   the 

Stem  unchanged. 

1.  Masculine  Forms. 


Singular. 

Honour  (m.). 

Consul  (ra.)- 

Goose  (m.). 

Brother  (m.). 

N.andV. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

honor. 

honor-is. 

h6nor-i. 

honor-em. 

honor-g. 

consul. 

consul-is. 

consiil-i. 

consul-6m. 

consul-6. 

anser. 

ans6r-is. 

anser-i. 

ans6i'-6m. 

ans6r-e. 

frater. 
fratr-is. 

fratr-r. 

fratr-gm. 
fratr-e. 

Plural.           1         Honours. 

Consuls. 

Geese. 

Brothers. 

N.,  A.,  V.        honor-es. 
Gen.             honor-um. 
D.  and  Abl.      honor-ibus. 

consul-es. 
consul-um. 
cohsiil-ibus. 

anser-es. 

anser-um. 

anser-ibus. 

fratr-es. 

fi-atr-um. 

fratr-ibus. 

On  these,  observe, 

(320.)  As  to  case-endings^  they  nearly  all  take  the  regular 
endings  throughout ;  but  those  whose  stem  ends  in  ter  or  ber 
drop  the  e  in  all  cases  but  the  nom. ;  e.  g.,  f r  a t e r,  f r a t r is  ; 
i  ra  b  e  r  {a  shower)  i  m  b  r  i  s. 

Rem.  Imbgr,  linter,  venter,  take  i urn  for  gen.  pi.  ending. 
(321.)  As  to  gender, 

Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  present  the  unchanged 

stem  in  the  nom.  (except  those  whose  stems  end  in  al, 

ar,  ur,  6r)  are  masculine. 

[Exception  (1.)  In  or:  arbdr,  6113  {tree),  ia  feminine;  and  ad6r,  firis, 

{pure  wheat),  sequor,  6ris  {sea),  marmSr,  6ris  {marble),  are  neut.     (Obs., 

masculines  have  6  (long)  in  the  stem ;  neuters  6  (short) ).     The  ending  td 

generally  belongs  to  names  of  male  beings  (e.  ^.,  consul):  if  applied  to 

females,  it  may  be  feminine  also  (e.  g.,  exul,  a  female  exile). 

Exception  (2.)  Sr:  linter  {boat)  is  masc.  or  fern. :  the  following  are 
neuter:  cadaver  {corpse),  uber  {teat),  ver  {the  spring),  verber  {lash) 
also,  all  names  of  plants  in  er:  e.  g.,  piper  {pepper),  zingiber  {ginger), 
arc] 

EXERCISE. 

(322.)   Vocabulary. 


Noise,  clamSr  (oris,  V.,  1). 
Cassius,  Cassius,  L 
Yoke,  jugum,  1. 
Archer,  Sagittarius,  i. 
Slinger,  funditor  (oris,  "V., 
Succour,  subsidium,  i. 
Rain,  imb6r  (is,  320). 


1). 


Continuance,  contmiiatifi,  (continuft- 

ti6n)  is  (f.). 
STcin,  tent  made  ofsktnn,  pellls,  (pell) 

is  (f.  n.). 
Desert,  dSsertum,  i. 
Shepherd,  pastSr  (6ris,  V.,  1). 
Hunter,  v6nat6r  (6ris,  V.,  1). 


'^ 


120  NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  V. 

(323.)   Translate  into  English, 

Imperator  ad  se  mercatores  undique  convocavit.— 
Milites  omnes  magno  cum  clamore  in  oppidum  irruperunt. 
— Helvetii  Cagsmm  consulem  occidunt,  exercitumque  ejus 
(153,  c)  sub  jiigum*  mittunt.-r-Gassar  sagittarios  et  fundi- 
tores  subsidiof  (dat.)  oppidanisf  (dat.)  misit. — Miiites  con- 
tinuatione  imbrium  (320,  R.)  sub  pellibus  continentur. — 
Incolge  desertorum  sunt  pastores,  vena  tores,  et  mer- 
catores.— Divitiae  mercatorura  sunt  incertge.  —  Caesar 
©mnem  ^quitatum  funditores  sagittarios  que  pontem  (113 
II.,  a)  transduxit  et  adliostes  contendit. 

(324.)   Translate  into  Laiin. 

The  Britons  slew  the  general,  and  sent  all  the  soldiers  under 
the  yoke. — The  archers  and  slingers  killed  the  chief. — By  the 
continuance  of  the  rains,  the  merchants  are  kept  in  the  town. — 
The  townsmen  burst  into  the  tents  (pelles)  with  a  great  noise. 
— The  archers  and  the  slingers  hasten  to  the  town. — The  con- 
sul Cassius  led  all  the  slingers  over  the  bridge. — The  Britons 
killed  the  scouts  (exploratores),  and  sent  the  archers  and  sling- 
ers under  the  yoke. — The  scouts  hasten  to  the  consul. — The 
general  sent  twenty  soldiers  for  a  succourf  (dat.)  to  the  mer- 
chants, f — The  inhabitants  of  the  town  are  merchants. — The 
riches  of  merchants,  however  great  (184)  they  are,  are  uncer- 
tain.— The  soldiers  slew  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  desert. — The 
illustrious  consuls  led  all  the  footmen  over  the  bridge  (113, 
II.,  a). 

*  A  conquered  army  was  made  to  march  Tinder  a  sort  of  yoke  or  gallows 
as  a  mark  of  disgrace. 

t  Rule  of  Syntax. — Dcnihle  Dative.  Two  datives,  one  of  the  person,  the 
other  of  the  thing,  may  be  vised  with  esse,  and  with  verbs  oi  giving^ 
comiyig ^tiding,  due. 


N0UN3,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  V. 


121 


LESSON^  LII. 

Nouns. — Third  Declension,  continued, 

(325.)  Class  V. —  The   Nominative   presents 

Stem  unchanged. 

2.  Neuter  Forms. 


the 


Singular. 

Animal  (n.). 

Spur  (n.). 

Lightning  (n.).   j 

Marble  (n.).       1! 

N.,  A.,  V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Abl. 

animal.  ^ 
Snimal-rs. 
finimal-i. 
&nimal-i. 

calcSr. 
calcar-is. 
calcar-i. 
calcar-i. 

III 

marmor. 
marm6r-is. 
marm6r-i. 
marm6r-6.    • 

Plural. 

Animals. 

Spurs. 

Lightnings. 

Marbles. 

N.,  A.,  V. 

Gen. 
D.  and  Abl. 

animal-ia. 

animalium. 

&nimal-ibus. 

calcar-ia. 

calcar-Tiim. 

calcar-ibus. 

fulgiir-a. 

fulgur-um. 

folgiir-ibus. 

marm6r-&. 

marmor-um. 

marmor-ibus. 

On  these,  observe, 

(326.)  (a)  As  to  case-endings,  those  in  al,  ar,  make  abl.  i, 
nom.  plur.  i  a,  gen.  plur.  i  ii  m. 

(6)  As  to  gender,  they  are  neuter.     Hence, 

Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  present  in  the  nom.  the 
unchanged  stem  in  al,  ar,  ur,  and  or  (short),  are  neuter. 

Exceptions  in  al:  Sftl  [salt)  is  masc.  and  neut.  in  the  sing.,  and  masc. 
sales,  in  plur.    L  ar,  laris  [household  god),  masc. 

Exceptions  in  ur:  Fur  [thief),  furfur  [bran),  turtur  [turtle-dove)^ 
vultur  [vulture),  are  masc. 

Exceptions  in  6r.  (Recollect  that  6r,  6rls  (with  o  long),  is  a  masc. 
ending  (321) ;  and  that  ftrbor,  oris  [tree),  is/ew.) 
Rem.  Os,  ossis  [bone),  is  neut. 

EXERCISE. 

(327.)   Vocabulary. 

Level,  plain,  planus,  a,  um. 

A  plain,  the  sea,  aequ6r,  is  (V.,  2), 

(derived  from  sequus,  plain:  see 

below,  328). 
Revenue,  tax,  vectigSl,  (vectigal)  is 

(V.,  2). 
To  create,  ere  are. 
Hatred,  odium,  6dium,  i. 
Many,  very  many,  complur6s,  &  or 

ift  (gen.  um  or  ium),  used  only  in 

plural. 
Class,  ggnus,  (g?n6r)  Is,  neut. 


Temple,  templum,  i. 

To  place,  ponCrg. 

Abode,  d6micilium,  L 

To  goad,  concitarS. 

Frugality,  parsImoniS,  iB. 

Indeed,  quidem  (adv.). 

Placid,  placidus,  8,  um. 

A  marble  temple,  a  temple  of  marble, 

templum  de  marm6r6.  • 

Sharp,  acutiis,  S,  um. 
Glare,  splendSr,  (splendor)  is  (V.,  1) 
To  farm,  rSdimfire  (rfidem). 


122  NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  V. 


(328.)  Example. 

The  sea  is  level,  from  which 

also     the    poets     call    it 

aequor  {the  sea). 


M3,rS  planum  est ;  ex  quo 
etiam  ae,  q  u  o  r  illiid  poetse 
vocant. 


^^  Here  the  antecedent  of  quo  is  the  sentence  m&r6  planum  est. 

(329.)   Translate  into  English. 

Magnum  hoc  fuit  vectigal,  sed  magnum  creavit  odium. — 
Dumnorix,  complures  annos  (191,  a,  Rule)  omnia  jEdu5rum 
vectigalia  redemerat. — Complura  {or  compluria)  sunt  gene- 
ra animalium. — Teraplum  de  marmore  in  fbro  ponam. 
Crassus  domum  magnum  de  marmore  splendido  aedif icavit. 
— F  u  1  g  ii  r  a  milites  v6h6menter  terruerunt. — Ten-a  est  dom 
icilium  hominiim  etanimaliii m. — Milites  subit5  gquos  c a I- 
c  a  r  i  b  ii  s  (abl.,  55,  a)  concitare  coeperunt. — C  a  1  c  a  r  i  a  acut^ 
smit. 

(330.)  Translate  into  Latin. 

Glory  is  a  great  spur  to  brave  men. — The  horses  fear  the 
sharp  spurs. — The  glare  of  the  lightnings  terrified  the  horses. 
— Almost  (fere,  218,  b)  all  animals  are  useful  to  men. — These 
were  great  revenues  indeed,  but  they  created  great  hatreds. — 
The  seas  were  level  and  placid. — Frugality  is  a  great  revenue. 
— We  shall  place  a  temple  of  splendid  marble  in  the  midst  (in 
medio  foro,  297,  c)  of  the  forum. — The  poets  call  (mare)  the 
sea  aequor,  because  (quia)  it  is  level. — The  woods  are  the 
abode  of  many  animals. — Pompey  for  many  years  had  farmed 
the  revenues  of  Asia. — The  cavahy  (equites)  began  to  put 
spurs  to  their  horses  (=  to  goad  the  horses  with  spurs). 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  VI. 


123 


LESSON  LIII. 

Nouns. — Third  Declension,  continued. 

(331.)  Class  Y1.— The   Nominative   pr^esents    the 

Stem  changed. 

1.  Masculine  Forms. 


(a)  u  qft/'ia  -Stem  dropped.] 

[h)  r  oft/te  Sti'm  changed  to  a. 

(c)  VerhalsinU,  (all fern.). 

Singular. 

Speech  (m.)-    -       | 

r)ust(m.). 

Flower(m.) 

Reason  (!'.). 

N.andV. 

senii6. 

pulvis. 

flos. 

ratio. 

Gen. 

sei-mon-is. 

pulv6r-is. 

f!6ris. 

ration-is. 

Dat. 

sermon-i. 

pulver-i. 

flor-L 

ration-i. 

Ace. 

sermou-em. 

pulver-em. 

flor-em. 

ration-em. 

Abl. 

serm6u-e. 

pulv6r-6. 

flor-e. 

ration-e. 

PluraJ. 

Speeches.                1 

Flowers. 

Reasons. 

N.,A.,V. 

sermon-es. 

pulv6r-es. 

flor-es. 

.  rariou-es. 

Gen. 

sermon-um. 

pulv6r-um. 

flor-um. 

ration-um. 

D.&Abl. 

sennon-ibus. 

pulver-ibus. 

flor-ibus. 

ration-ibus. 

On  this  class,  observe, 

(332.)  As  to  case-endings :  1.  Final  n  of  the  stem  is  gener- 
ally dropped  in  Latin  nouns  in  the  nominative.  (In  sanguis, 
sanguin-is  {blood) ^  it  is  changed  into  s*.) 

2.  Final  r  of  the  stem  is  ofte7i  changed  into  s,  as  in  pulvis, 
flos,  mos,  &c. 

(333.)  Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  simply  drop  n  of  the 
stem  in  the  nom.  are  masculine  (except  abstract  nouns 
in  jo). 

Special  Rem. — Abstract  nouns  in  io  (6nis)  are  feminine  ;  e.  g.,  ratio, 
reason ;  ultio,  revenge.  (They  are  a  very  large  class,  formed  by  add- 
ing io  to  the  supine-stem  of  verbs.) 

(334.)  Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  change  6r  of  the 
stem  into  is,  or  into  os,  are  masculine;  e.  g.,  pulvit 
(pulv6r),  flos  (flor). 

EXERCISE. 

(335.)   Vocabulary. 


Manner,  custom,  mos,  (mor)  is  (VT., 

l,i). 
Robber,  la* ' ',  (latrdn)  is  (VI.,  1,  a). 
Pirate,  praJ<j8,  (praedon)  is  (VI.,  1,  a). 
Centurioin^  centurid,  (centuridn)  is 

(VI.,  1,  a). 
Lion,  lefi,  (leon)  is  (VI.,  1,  a). 


Speech,  language,  sermd,  (sermftn) 

is  (VI.,  1,  a). 
Surreiider,    deditiS,    (dedition)    Ts 

(VI.,  1,  c). 
Rebellion,    rgbellid,     (rgbellidn)    Ts 

(VI.,  1,  C). 
The  Sacred  Wav,  Via  Sacrfi. 


124 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  VI. 


To  day,  trucldare. 

Nurse,  nutrix,  (nutrlc)  is  (L). 

Devoid  of,  expers,  (expei't)  Is  (107;. 

To  draw,  trfihgrg  (trax- ;  277,  1). 

Eloquent,  disertus,  a,  um. 

Adorned,  omatus,  S,  um. 

2'o  go,  ir6. 

By  chance,  fortS  (adv.). 

As,  sicut. 

Kind,  blaudus,  S,  iim. 

More  latronum. 
More  s  u  6. 


Speech  (iu  the  abstract),  or  an  ora- 
tion, oratio,  (oration)  is  (VI.,  1,  c). 

Dust,  pulvis,  (pulv6r)  is  (VI.,  1,  b). 

Egyptian,  .^Egj'ptius,  i. 

Sweet,  pleasant,,  suavis,  is,  S. 

To  ivander,  en-are. 

To  employ,  uti  (with  abl.,  316,  b).  . 

To  finish,  conficer6  (io). 

The  rest,  the  remaining,  rfeliquus,  ft, 
um. 

(336.)  Examples. 

{a)  After  the  manner  of  rob- 
bers. 

(6)  After  his  {her  or  their) 
own  manner. 
■   (c)  Devoid  of  reason.  R^tionis  expers. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — ^Adjectives  signifying  abounding,  want, 
privation,  &cc.,  govern  the  genitive  (sometimes  abl.). 

{d)  We  say,  a  cloud  of  dust ;  the  Latin  says,  a  power  of 
dust — ^vis  pulveris. 

(337.)   Translate  into  English. 

1.  {Masculines,  Class  VI.,  1,  n  dropped.) — Centuriones 
miKtiim  Labienum  libenter  sequebantur. — Legatus  sermo- 
nam  longum  conficit. — Multi  iEdui  CEesaris  sermoni  (da,t., 
267,  b)  interfuerunt. — Imperator  reliquos  latrones  prsedo- 
nesque  trucidavit. — Africa  nutrix  est  leonum  ferociiim. 

3.  {Verbal  Nouns  in  ion,  all  Feminine.) — Helvetia  legates 
de  {concerning)  deditione  ad  Caesarem  miserunt. — BarbS,ri 
rebellionem  turpem  fecerunt. — Legatus,  oratione  acri 
(abl.,  ^5,  a),  barbaros  addeditionem  traxit. — Oratio  diserta 
et  ornata  omnibus  (161,  a)  placet. — Ferae  sunt  rationls  et 
orationis  expertes. 

3.  {Nouns  changing  er  of  the  Stem  into  is,  or  into  5s;  all 
Masculines.) — Pulvis  et  umbra  sumus. — Milites,  eodem  tem- 
pore (118,  IL,  c)  magnam  vim  pulveris  videbant. — Ibam 
forte  via  sacra  (abl.,  55,  a)  siciit  meus  est  mos. — ^gyptii, 
more  prsedonum  (336,  a),  naves  incendere  (infin.,  210)  con- 
sueverunt. — Suaves  tui  mores  mihi  (161,  a)  valde  pMcent. — 
Praedones,  more  suo,  oppida  incendere  coeperunt. 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS   VI. 


125 


(338.)    Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  {Masculines^  Class  VI.,  1,  n  dropped.) — Caesar  employs 
kind  language*  (abl.,  316,  b),  and  draws  the  barbarians  to  a  sur- 
render.— Many  of  the  Helvetians  heard  the  severe  speech  (78, 
II.,  6)  of  Caesar. — The  bands  of  robbers  and  pirates  wander  by 
sea  and  land. — The  general  slew  all  the  wicked  pirates. — Is 
(i;35,  II.,  a)  Africa  the  nui-se  of  lions  ? — Is  Em-ope  (num.  280, 
b)  the  nurse  of  fierce  lions  ? 

2.  {Verbals  in  io,  all  Feminine.) — Caesar  drew-out  from 
(their)  winter-quarters  the  four  legions  which  he  had  levied 
(conscripserat)  in  Italy. — The  eloquent  oration  pleased  all. 
— The  barbarians  made  a  base  rebellion  after  (their)  surrender. 
— Lions  are  devoid  of  reason  and  speech. 

3.  {Nouns  changing  er  of  the  Stem  into  is,  or  into  6  s  ;  Mas- 
culines.)— The  flowers  are  beautiful. — The  customs  of  j;he 
Germans  were  good.— Death  turns  (vertit)  all  things  into 
dust. — At  the  same  time  (118,  II.,  6),agreat  cloud  of  dust  (336, 
d)  was  seen  by  the  soldiers. — I  was  sleeping  in  the  garden,  as 
is  my  custom. — The  iEduans,  after  the  manner  of  pirates,  slew 
the  ambassadors. 


LESSON  LIV. 

Nouns. — Third  Declension,  continued. 

(339.)  Class  VI. — The   Nominative  presents    the 

Stem  changed. 

2.  Feminine  Forms. 


*  Sermo. 

L2 


n  of  the  Stem  dropped,  and  i  changed  into  6.                                 \\ 

Singular. 

Image  (f.). 

Hail  (f.). 

N.  and  V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

unagd. 

Tmagin-Ia. 

imagln-I. 

imagin-6m. 

Imagin-6. 

grandd. 

grandin-is.               j 
grandin-i. 
grandin-6m. 
grandin-S. 

Plural. 

Images. 

Hail. 

N.,  A.,  V. 

Gen. 
D.  and  Abl. 

tmagin-es. 

imagin-nm. 

unagin-Ibiis. 

grandin-es. 

grandin-um. 

grandin-ibus. 

126 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  VI. 


On  these,  pbserve, 

(340.)  Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which  drop  n,  and  change 
i  into  o  in  the  nora.,  are  feminine. 
Exceptions.  Ord6  {order),  cardd  {hinge),  turbS  (whirlwind),  are 
masculine.    Nem6    {nobody),   inarg6   {margin),   are   common 
(Homo,  man,  is  masc.  by  the  general  rule,  25,  a) 
Rem.  C«Lr6  {Jiesh)  makes  gen.  carnls,  dat.  carnl,  &c.,  contracted 
from  carinis,  carini,  &c. 

EXERCISE. 

(341.)   Vocabulary. 

Sleep,  somnus,  i. 

Sam^,  idem,  ead6m,  Id6m  (150), 

Multitude,  multitude,  (multitudin)  is 

(VI.,  2). 
To  set  forth,  exponere. 
Svmllow,  hirundd,  (hirundin)  Is  (VL, 

2). 
Harbinger,  praenuntiS,  as. 
Spring,  ver,  is  (321,  exc.  2). 
Resemblance,    similitudS,    (simiytii- 

din)  is  (VI.,  2).* 
To  preserve,  keep,  servar6. 
To  coil  {name),  appellarS. 
Council,  concilium,  i. 

(342.)   Translate  into  English. 

1.  Somnus  imag5  mortis  est. — Legati  eMem  quae  Caesar 
dixerat  multitudini  exponunt. — Hirundines  praenuntiae 
veris  sunt. — Galli  oppidiim  ex  similitudine  floris  Liliiira 
appellabant. — Consiil  matriim  virginum-que  precibus  exci- 
tatur. — Poetae  celebrant  Romuliim,  origin^m  gentis. 

2.  Principes  JEdu5rum  magnam  mujtitudinem  homi- 
niim  ex  agris  coegerunt. — Milites  ordines  non  servant.— 
Caesar  centiiriones  primoriim  ordiniim  ad  concilium  convocat. 
— Cicero  in  magnis  turbinibus  navem  reipublicae  (351,  3) 
giibemavlt,  &t  salvam  in  portu  collocavit. 

(343.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  Speech  (sermo)  is  the  image  of  the  mind. — Sleep  is  often 
the  harbinger  of  death. — The  soldiers  feared  the  force  of  the 


Lily,  lilium,  i. 

Virgin,  virg6,  (virgin)  Is  (VI.,  2). 

Prayer,  prex,  nom.  not  used,  (prSc) 

is  (I.). 
To  celebrate,  to  extol,  celebrare. 
Origin,  orig6,  (origin)  is  (VI.,  2). 
To  collect,  cog6r6,  c6n+%6r6  (perf.- 

stem,  coeg). 
Order,  rank,  ord6,  (ordin)  is  (VI.,  2) 

(m.). 
Whirlwind,  turbfi,  (turbln)  Is  (VI.. 

2,  340,  exc). 
Safe,  salvus,  ft,  Om. 


Similitude  floiis  «=  rescTublance  to  ajlower. 


NOUNS,  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  VI. 


127 


hail. — The  centurions  were  setting-forth  the  same  (things) 
whicli  the  general  had  commanded. — The  brave  soldiers  are 
moved  by  the  prayers  of  the  mothers  and  the  virgins. 

2.  The  consuls  collect  a  great  multitude  of  men  from  the 
tov^ns. — Caesar  dismisses  from  (ab)  the  council  the  centurions 
of  the  first  ranks. — The  archers  and  the  slingers  did  not  keep 
their  ranks. — Ceesar  calls  (vocare)  to  the  council  the  centuri- 
ons of  all  the  ranks. — The  brave  consul  in  the  great  whirlwinds 
will  govern  the  ship  of  state  (351,  3). — Caesar  will  place  the 
ship  of  state  safe  in  the  port. 


LESSON   LV. 

Nouns. — Third  Declension^  continued, 

(344.)  Class   VI. — The   Nominative  presents   the 

Stem  changed. 

3.  Neuter  Forms. 


(a)  Voioel  changed 

(b)  Vowel  and  Cons,  changed.  | 

(c)  Cont.changed. 

Singular. 

Song  (n.). 

strength  (n.). 

Work  (n.). 

Body  (n.). 

Law  (n.). 

N.,A.,V. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Abl. 

carmen, 
carmin-is. 
carmin-I. 
cannin-e. 

robur.           6pus. 
r6b6r-is.       6p6r-is. 
rob6r-i.         6p6r-!. 
robor-e.        6p6r-6. 

corpus. 
corpor-Is. 
corpor-i. 
corp6r-e. 

jur-is. 

jur-i. 

jur-6. 

Plural. 

Song8. 

1      Works.  - 

Bodies. 

Laws. 

N.,A.,V. 

Gen. 
D.,Abl. 

carmm-ft. 

carmin-um. 

carmin-ibus. 

robor-a. 

robor-iim. 

robor-ibus. 

op6r-a. 

oper-iim. 

op6r-ibus. 

corp6r-a. 

corp6r-um. 

corpor-ibus. 

jur-ft. 
jur-iim. 
jur-Ibus.     || 

On  this  class,  observe, 

(345.)  As  to  gender^  they  are  all  neuter.     Hence, 

Rule  of  Gender. — Nouns  which,  in  the  nominative,  change 
the  stems  in  into  Sn,  or  into  iir,  and  6r,  6r,  or  tir  into 

u  s,  are  neuter. 

Exceptions.  (1.)  In  Sn:  only  pectSn,  pectinis  (masc),  a  comb. 
(2.)  or  into  ur:  none. 
(3.)  6  r  into  u  s :  none. 

(4.)  or  into  us :  only  iSpiis,  iSporis  (masc),  a  hare. 
(5.)  ur  into  us:  miis,  muris  (masc),  mouse;  tellus.  flria 
(fern.),  earth 


•  28 


NOUNS.  THIRD  DECLENSION,  CLASS  VI. 


(346.)  Under  this  head  may  be  classed  the  follow- 
ing nouns  of  rare  endings  : 

.1.  Poem  a,  atis  {neuter),  a  poem.  Nouns  of  this  foi-m  are 
derived  from  the  Greek,  and  are  all  neuters.  They  prefer  the 
ending  is  to  i b u  s  in  the  dat.  and  abl.  plur. 

2.  Halec  {neuter),  halecis,  brine,  and  lac  {neuter)^  lactis, 
milk,  are  the  only  Latin  nouns  ending  in  c  in  the  nom. 

3.  caput,  capitis,  head,  is  the  only  Latin  noun  ending  in 
t  in  the  nom.     It  is  neuter. 

EXERCISE. 


(347.)   Vocabulary. 

ArrogaTice,  arrogantia,  ee. 

Crime,  crimen,  (crimin)  is  (VI.,  3, 

a). 
To  want  (lack),  to  be  free  from,  ca- 

rerg  (with  abl.). 
FoUy,  staltitia. 
Wonderful,  mirif iciis,  a,  um  {mirus 

+facio). 
Naked,  uudus,  i,  um. 
Strong,  validus,  ft,  um. 
The  whole  qffair,  omnis  res. 

(348.)  Examples, 
{a)   To  condemn  to  death. 


To  delay,  tardarfi. 

Gift,  munus,  (mtmer)  is  (VI.,  3,  b). 

Quickly,  cit6  (adv.). 

Hare,  16piis,  (lep6r)  is  (m.,  345,  4). 

Alilk,  lac,  (lact)  is  (n.,  346,  2). 

Flesh,  card,  (cam)  is  (f.,  340,  R.). 

Young  man,  juvenis,  is  (m.) :  gen. 

pi.,  um. 
Danube,  Danubius,  i  (m.). 
Jugurtha,  JugurthS,  ae. 
if,  si  (conj.). 


Capitis  {or  capite)  condem- 
nar6  ( =  ^o  condemn  of  the 
head). 

Rule  of  Syntax. — With  verbs  of  condemning,  the  punish- 
ment {i£  capital)  is  put  in  the  gen.  or  abl. 

(6)    To  he  free  from  a  crime.    Crimine  carere  {  =  to  want 

crime). 

Hule  of  Syntax. — The  ablative  case  is  used  with  verbs  (and 
adjectives)  of  abounding  and  wanting. 

(349.)   Translate  into  English. 

Socrates  aiTogantise  et  stultitiae  crimine  c3,rebat. — Kheniis 
et  Rhodaniis  magna  sunt  flu  mi  n  a. — Magna  et  mirifica  sunt 
omnia  Dei  opera. — G  alii  semper  nu  do  corpore  (syiJt.,716,  2) 
pugnabanti— Corpora  Germanoriim  valida  et  mirificS,  fuerunt. 
— Magnitudo   operum   omnem  rem  tardibat. — Si  munerS 


lEEEGULAR  N<rtJN«.  129 

tardaa,  nihil  das  ;  bis  dd,t,  qui  cito  dat, — Venator  le pores  timi- 
dos  in  sylvis  persequitiir. — Athenienses  Socrat^m  capite  con 
demnarunt.*  —  Cur   talem    virum    c&pitis    condejnnastis ?— 

B  ritanni  1  a  c  1 6  e  t  came  vivunt. 

'  '* 

(350.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  bodies  of  the  young  men  were  sti-ong. — The  man  (vii*> 
was  free  from  the  crime  of  folly. — The  Danube  and  the  Rhine 
are  great  rivers. — Do  the  Gauls  (num,  280,  h)  fight  with  naked 
body  1- — The  works  of  Cicero  are  excellent :  I  read  them  (eos) 
\^A\h  pleasure  (libenter).— The  Romans  condemned  Jugurtha 
to  death  (348,  a). — Did  the  Athenians  (S80,  6)  condemn  Socra- 
tes to  death  ? — The  captives  were  condemned  (imperf.  pass.)  to 
death. — The  timid  hare  was  wandering  in  the  woods  and  fields. 
— Is-it-possible-that  (280,  h)  the  Britons  live  (on)  (abl.)  milk 
and  flesh? — Your  pleasant  songs  (161,  h)  delighted  (delec- 
tare)  me. 


LESSON  LVl. 

Irregular  Nouns. 

(351.)  We  give  here  the  declension  of  a/ew)  irreg- 
ular nouns. 


1.  Jupiter. 

Nom. 

Jupiter. 

Gen. 

J6V1S. 

Dat. 

Jovi. 

Ace. 

Jovem. 

Abl. 

J6v6. 

*  The  perfj  and  phcp.  tenses  are  often  thus  contracted:  amdrdt  for 
dmdvSrat ;  vigilastls  for  vigUavistu. 


ISO 


IRREGULAR  NOUNS. 


2. 

B 

OS, 

an  ox  or  cow.     • 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Nom. 

Bos. 

Boves. 

Gen. 

Bovis. 

Bourn. 

Dat. 

Bovi. 

Bobiis  or  Bubus. 

Ace. 

Bovem. 

Boves. 

Voc. 

Bos. 

Boves. 

Abl. 

Bove. 

Bobiis  or  bubiis. 

[In  double  nouns,  each  noun  is  inflected ;  e.  g.,] 

3    Respublica  (res+publica),  a  republic,  state. 

Singular. 

Nom.  Respublica. 


Gen.  Reipublicae. 

Dat.  E^ipublicas. 

Ace.  RempubKeam. 

Voc.  RespubKca. 

Abl.  Republica. 


Plural. 

Respublicas. 

Rerumpublicarum. 

Rebuspublicis. 

Respublicas. 

RespublicsB. 

RebuspubKcis. 


-  4.  Jusjurandum  (jus+jurandiim),  an  oatn. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Nom.  Jusjurandum.  Jurajuranda. 

Gen.  Jurisjurandi.  

Dat.  Jurijurando.  

Ace.  Jusjurandum.  Jurajuranda. 

Abl.  Jurejurando.  

Rem.  The  genitive,  dative,  and  ablative  plural  are  not  txsed. 


E  X  ER 

(352,)   Vocabulary. 

Faith,  promise,  fides,  ei. 

To  bind,  obstringerg,  (6b+string6rg) 
(perf.-stem,  obstrinx). 

To  take  care  of,  curarS. 

Folly,  stultitia,  83. 

Tp  lose,  amitt6rS,  (a+mittSrg)  (pert- 
stem,  amis). 

To  intrust,  committ6r6,  (con+mit- 
tSrg)  commis  (veith  dat.). 

EspedaUy,  maximS  (adv.). 

To  worship,  c6l6r6  (perf.-stem,  c6- 
lu-). 


CIS  E. 


Apis,  Apis,  is  (m.). 

Sacred,  sanctus,  S,  um. 

Formerly,  olim. 

Guardian,   custos,  (custod)  Is   (m. 

and  f.j. 
Juno,  Jun6,  (Junon)  is  (f.). 
Husband  or  icife,  conjux,   (conjQg) 

is  (m.  and  f.). 
Nation,  nati6,  (nation)  Is  (f.). 
An  Egyptian,  jEgyptius,  I. 
But  especially,  maxima  autSm. 
Minerva,  MinervS.  ao. 


I 


lEEEGULAR  NOUNS.  131 

(353.)   Translate  into  English. 

Principes  inter  se  fidem  et  jusjurandum  dS,bant. — Ario- 
vistiis  civitatem  jurejurando  (55)  §t  obsidibiis  obstrinxit. — 
Apiid  Romanos,  consules  rempublic^m  curaverunt. — Multge 
nationes  per  stultitiam  respublicas  suas  amiserunt. — Vete- 
res  maxime  Jovem  coluenmt.  —  Mgy^lXi.  Apim,  sanctum 
bovem  (225,  a),  olim  coluerunt. — JupitSr  ^st  hujus  urbia 
custos. — Juno  erat  Jovis  conjux — Gives  iram  Jo  vis  timent. 
— Cornua  boiim  sunt  magna. 

(354.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The'  robbers  will  give  an  oath  among  themselves. — Csesar 
binds  all  the  Germans  by  a  promise  and  an  oath. — Csesar  bound 
the  chiefs  of  the  state  by  an  oath  and  by  hostages. — The  senate 
intrusts  (committit)  the  whole  republic  to  Cicero. — The 
consuls  will  take  care  of  our  republic. — The  ancients  worship- 
ped many  gods,  but  especially  Jupiter. — We  have  lost  the  re- 
public by  (per)  our  own  folly. — Jupiter  is  the  guardian  of  our 
house. — ^Apis,  the  sacred  ox,  is  the  guardian  of  this  city. — • 
Minerva  was  the  daughter  of  Jupiter. — Good  men  do  not  fear 
the  anger  of  Jupiter. 


133     RULES  OF  GENDEK,  THIRD  DECLENSION. 

(355.)  LESSON  LVIT. 


Summary  of  Rules  of  Gender  from  the  Nominative 
Formation.* 


I.  Masculines  either 

1.  Add  s,  and  change  the  stem-Vowel  before  it;  e.  g.^ 
gurges,  gurgit-is,  whirlpool;  miles,  milit-is,  sol- 
dier;  codex,  c6dic-is,  6oc»^- 


2.  Present  the  stem  er,  ul,  or,  without  adding  s  ;  e.  g.^ 
anser,  anser-is,  goose;  consul,  consul-is,  consul; 
honor,  honor-is,  Aowowr. 


3.  Drop  n  without  adding  s;  e.  g.^  sermo,  sermon -is. 


•1 


speech  ;  car  bo,  carbon -is,  coa 
4.  Change   er  of  the  stem,  into  is,  or  into  6s;  e.  g. 
cinis,   cin§r-is,    ashes;  pulvis,   pulver-is,  dust 
flos,  flor -IS,  flower. 

IL  Feminines  either 

1.  Add  s  without  changing  the  stem-vowel;  e.  g.,  urb-s, 
urb-is,  city;  nox  (noct-s),  noct-is,  night;  vox 
(v6c-s),  voc-is,  voice  ;  quies,  quiet-is,  quiet. 


2.  Insert  a  vowel  (e  or  i)  before  adding  s  ;  e.  g-.,  nu  b- e-s. 
nuh -19,  cloud  ;  nav-i-s,  nav-is,    "' 


3.  Drop  n,  and  change  i  into  o  ;  e.  g.,imSigo,  im  agin -is. 
image;  grando,  grandin-is,  hail. 

III.  Neuters  either 

1.  Add  e  to  the  stem  ;  e.  g.,  m^re,  mS,r-i8,  the  sea. 

2.  Present  the  unchanged  stem  al,  ar,  ur,  or ;  e.  g.,  §,ni- 
mal,  animal-is,  animal;  calcar,  calcar-is,  spur; 
fulgiir,  fulgiir-is,  lightning;  aequor,  sequor-is,  sea. 

3.  Change  i  n  of  the  stem  into  e  n,  o  r  into  u  r,  and  e  r,  6  r, 
or  ur  into  us;  e.^.,  carmen,  carmin-is,  sotj^;  Sbiir, 
6b6r-is,  ivory;  opus,  6per-is,  work;  corpus,  cor- 
p6r-is,  body  ;  crus,  crur-is,  leg. 


*  Abundant  illustrations  of  these  rules  have  been  given.  The  student 
should  now  learn  them  thoroughly  by  heart,  and  apply  them  in  the  sub- 
se()ueut  lessons 


EXCEPTIONS.  133 


Exceptions. 


I.  1.  Only  merges,  mergitis  {f.)^  sheaf. 

'  e  r,  feminine  :  linter,  boat. 

e  r,  neuter :  c^davSr,  uber,  verber,  ver,  tubSr,   spin- 
ther,  with  all  the  names  of  plants  in  e  r, 
I.  2.  -^  6  r,  feminine  :  arbor,  tree. 

or,  neuter:  cor,  adSr,  eequor,  marmor. 

Rem.  The  neuters  have  6  (short)  in  the  stem ;  the  mas- 
culines, 6  [long). 

r    o  S  The  abstract  nouns  in  lo  are  b31  feminine  ;  e.  g.,  r3,tio 
*     *  \      (f.),  rationis,  reason. 

I.  4.  None. 


Masculines.      Viz.,    fons,  mons,  pons,  dens  and  its 
yy    ^    \  compounds,  torrens,  occidens,  orlens. 

'     *  ^  Grex,  Greek  nouns  in  ax,  and  a  few  in  ix  ;  Iftpis, 

vas,  paries,  pes.* 
Masculines.     Latin  nouns  ending  in  nis  ;  e.g.,  ignts 
{m.),Jire  ;  with 
Piscis,  orbis,  callis,  and  canalis  ; 
Unguis,  caulis,  axis,  and  annalis  ; 
Fascis,  sentis,  fustis,  canis,  ensis  ; 
Vectas,  vermis,  postis  ;  also  mensis. 
,r    „  ^  Masculines.     Ordo,  cardo,  homo,  turbo. 
■  I  Common.  Nemo,  margo. 


II.  2.-^ 


III.  1.  None. 

C  Sal,  masculine  and  neuter  in  singular;  masculine  in 
TTI.  2.  <      plural.     Lar,  laris,  masculine. 

(  Fur,  furfur,  turtiir,  vultur,  masculine. 

(  Masculine  :  changing  i  n  into  &  n,  only  pecten,  comb  ; 
jrj    „    I  changing  or  into  iis,  only  lepus,  hare  ;  chang- 

j  ing  ur  into  us,  only  mus,  mouse.     Feminine  : 

\  teUus,  earth. 


*  There  are  also  a  few  Greek  words  that  are  masculine. ,  As,  assis, 
coin,  is  masouline  ;  vas,  vasis,  vase,  is  neuter. 

M 


§  4. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES.    (LVIII.— LX.) 

(356.)  Adjrctives   are  inflected  both  in  English 
and  Latin  to  express  degrees  of  quahty.;  e.  g.^ 


Positive. 

Brave, 
Fort- IS, 


Comparative. 

braver, 
fort-  i  6  r, 


Superlative 

hravest. 
fort-is  SI  mils. 


LESSON  LVIII. 


The  Comparative  ^Degree. 

(357.)  The  comparative  has  the  ending  ior  for 
the  masculine,  and  iiis  for  neuter.  These  endings 
are  added  directly  to  the  stem  of  the  adjective  ;  e.  g.^ 


Brave,  fort-is  ; 
Hard,  dur-us ; 


Masculine. 

braver,  fort-  ior; 
harder,  dur-ior; 


fort-  i  u  s. 
dur-ius. 


Beautiful,    pulch-er  >  .  /.  ,  ,  ,     . 

{stem,  pulchr-) ;  S    '^''''^  beautiful,  pulchr-ior ;     pulchr-ius. 

Rsm.  If  the  stem  ends  in  a  vowel,  the  comparative  is  fonned  by  the 
use  of  mdgis,  more,  instead  of  the  ending;  e.  g., 

pious,  pi-US ;  more  pious,  migis  pius. 

Jit,        idone-us ;  more  Jit,        magis  idoneus. 


(358.) 


DECLENSION  OF    COMPARATIVES. 


1                          SINGULAR. 

PLITBAJ,.                          1 

Masc.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

Masc.  and  Fem. 

Neut. 

N.  and  V. 

dur-ior. 

dur-ius. 

dur-iores. 

dur-iora. 

Gen. 

dur-iorts. 

dur-ioris. 

dur-iorum. 

dur-iorfim. 

Dat. 

dur-iori. 

dur-iori. 

dur-ioribus. 

dur-ioribils. 

Ace. 

dur-iorem. 

dur-ius. 

dur-iores. 

dur-iora. 

Abl. 

dur-iorS. 

dur-iorg. 

dur-ioribus. 

dur-ioribus. 

Rem.  In  the  later  writers,  i  is  used  for  abl.  sing,  ending  freqaenfcly 
instead  of  e. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


135 


EXERCISE. 

(359.)   Vocabulary. 


Like,  similar  to,  siimlis  (takes  dot., 

sometimes  gen.,  106,  II.,  c). 
Amiable,  amabilis,  is,  6. 
Eloquent,  el6quens. 
Excellent,  praestans. 
Ignorance,  Ignoratio,  (ignoration)  is. 
Knowledge,  scientia,  ae. 
Silver,  argentom,  i. 
VUe,  paltry,  vilis,  is,  6. 
Jttsiwre,  justitia,  85. 

(360.)  Examples. 
(a)  A  pirate  is  more  liJce  a 
wild  beast  than  a  man. 


Deavj  precious,  cariis,  fi,  um. 
Few,  pauci,  ae,  &  (used  only  in  pi.). 
Indeed,  quidem  (adv. ;  always  stands 

next  after  the  word  to  which  it 

refers). 
Stoift,  celer  (105,  R.  1). 
TAotTt,  quam  (conj.). 
To  seek,  qujererS. 
Antonine,  Antoninus,  i. 
Future,  futurus,  a,  um. 


(5)  Nothing  is  more  amiable 
than  virtue. 


Praedo  f^rae  (106,  II.,  h)  est 
s  1  m  i  1  i  o  r     quam     homini 
(dat). 
Nihil  est  amabilius  quam 

V  i  r  t  u  s,  or 
(c)  Nihil  est  virtute  ama- 
bilius. 

(c)  Rule  of  Syntax. — The  conjunction  quam  {than)  is  fre- 
quently omitted,  and  then  the  noun  with  the  compara- 
tive must  be  put  in  the  ablative  case. 


Cicero    was    more    eloquent 
than  Caesar. 


Cicero  fuit  Cses&re  elo- 
quent i  o  r. 

(361.)   Translate  into  English. 

Nihil  est  virtute  prsBstantius. — Virtus  est  prsestantior 
quam  robur  (344). — Ignoratio  maiorum  utilior  est  quam  sci- 
entiS,. — Aurura  gravius  est  argents. — Argentum  villus  est 
auro,  virtutibus  aurum. — Liipi  ferociores  sunt  quam 
c^nes. — TuUus  Hostilius  ferocior  erat  Romiilo. — Justitiam 
quaerimus  ;  rem  (app.,  with  justitiam,  225,  a)  auro  cario- 
rem. — Panels  (dat.  gov.  bycarior,  106,  II.,  b)  carior  fides 
est,  quam  pecunia. — Mihi  (dat.)  Amicus  fuit  me  ipso  carior. 
— Omnes  suos  {i.  e.,  his  friends)  caros  habet  {he  holds) ;  me 
(ace.)  quidem  se  ipso  cariorSm. — Nemo  Romanorum  {par- 
titive gen.)  eloquentior  fuit  Cicerone. 

(362.)   Translate  into  Latin. 
1.   With  qua  m. — The  horse  is  swifter  than  the  dog. — Igiio- 


136  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

ranee  of  future  evils  is  better  than  knowledge  (of  them). — Lions 
are  fiercer  than  wolves. — Antonine  was  more  pious  (357,  R.) 
than  Ca?sar. — The  son  was  more  amiable  than  the  father. — A 
robber  is  more  like  a  wolf  (dat.,  106,  II.,  6)  than  a  man. 

2.  Without  quam  (with  ablative). — Justice  is  a  thing  more 
precious  than  gold. — Gold  is  more  paltry  than  virtue. — Nothing 
is  more  amiable  than  virtue. — To  Crassus  his  friends  were 
dearer  than  himself.— He  (had)  held  all  his  own  (friends) 
dear,  but  Cicero  even  dearer  than  himself. — What  (170)  is 
heavier  than  water  ?  Gold. — What  is  more  excellent  than 
strength  ?     Virtue. 


LESSON  LIX. 

Superlative  Degree, 
(363.)  The  superlative  ending  is  i  s  s  i  m  u  s,  which 
is  added  to  the  stem  of  the  adjective. 

Positive.  Comparative.  Superlative. 

Dear,  car-us  ;  clearer,  car-ior ;  dearest,  cBX-'i^simus. 

Brave,  fort-is ;  braver,  fort-ior  ;  bravest,  fort-  i  s  s  i  m  ii  s. 

Happy,  more  happy,  most  happy, 

felix  (felic-s) ;  felic-ior ;  felic-  i  s  s  i  m  ii  s. 

(364.)  But  adjectives  whose  stems  end  in  e  r  add 
the  ending  r  i  m  u  s. 

Unhappy,  miser ;  most  unhappy,  miser- r  i  m  u  s. 

Swift,  cel6r ;  swiftest,  cSler-  r  i  m  u  s. 

Beautiful,  pulcher  ;  most  beautiful,  pulcher-  r  i  m  u  s. 

(365.)  Several  adjectives  whose  stems  end  in  I  add 
1 T  m  u  s. 

Easy,  {a,ci\-is  ;  easiest,  {a,ci\-\im. us. 

EXERCISE. 

(366.)   Vocabulary, 


Cyrus,  Cyrus,  I. 

Hannibal,  Hannibal,  (Hannibal)  is. 

Difficult,  difFicilis  (di-1-facxlis). 

Moderation,  m6dus,  i. 

Darius,  Darius,  i. 


To  preserve  moderation,  m6dum  h3 

berS  (=  to  leave  moderaiion). 
Carthage,  Carthago,  (Carthagm)  is 
Metal,  mStallum,  I. 
To  stain,  macularS. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES.  13Y 

(367.)  Examples. 

(a)  Socrates  was  very  wise,   i  Socrates    sapientissimus 
I      fuit. 

A  high  degree  of  quality  [very  good,  very  wise,  &c.)  is  expressed  in 

Latin  by  the  superlative. 

(&)  Of  all   these,    the   Bel-    Horatn  omnium  fort  is  si  mi 

gians  are  the  bravest.  sunt  BelgsB. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — ^The  genitive   plural  is  used  with  the 

superlative  degree  :  the  most  learned  of  the  Romans  ; 

doctissimiis  Rpmanorum  (partitive  gen.,  synt.,  697). 


(c)  Among    the    Helvetians 
the  nohlest  was  Orgetorix. 


A  pud    Helvetias     no  bi- 
lls simus  fuit  Orgetorix. 


(368.)   Translate  into  English. 

Urbs  SyracussB  (app.,  225,  a)  Grsecarum  urbium  est  pul- 
cherrima. — Prsestantissimi  Persarum  regfesfuerunt  Cyrus  et 
Darius. — Pompeius  magnam  belli  gloriam  morte  (55,  a)  tur- 
pissima  maculavit. — Hannibal  fortissimus  erat  omnium 
Carthaginiensium. — Galiorum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Bel- 
gae. — Cicero  eloquentissimus  fuit  Romanorum.— Difficilli- 
mum  est  modum  haber^  (161,  d). — Apud  iEduos  nobilissi- 
mus  et  fortissimus  fuit  Divitiacus. 

(369.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

Plato  was  veiy  wise  (367,  a). — Plato  was  the  wisest  of  all 
the  Greeks  (367,  h). — The  city  Rome  was  the  most  beautiful 
of  all  the  Roman  cities. — Of  all  these,  the  Britons  are  tlie  bra- 
vest.— The  most  excellent  leaders  of  the  Romans  were  Caesar 
and  Pompey. — Carthage  was  a  very  beautiful  city. — Of  all 
things,  the  most  difficult  is  to  preserve  'moderation. — Of  all 
(men),  the  most  happy  (beatus)  is  the  wise  (man). — The  hard- 
est of  all  metals  is  iron. — Among  the  Greeks  Themistocles 
was  the  noblest. — Caesar  led  the  bravest  soldiers  across  the 
veiy  broad  river. 

M2 


■^. 


138 


IRREGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


LESSON  LX. 
Irregular  Comparison  of  Adjectives. 
(370.)  Several  adjectives  are  quite  irregular  in 
their  comparison.     The  following  are  the  most  im- 
portant. 


nl 


Comparative. 


Superlatii 


food,  bonus. 
ad,  malus. 
great,  magnus. 

much,  multiis. 

small,  parvus. 
old,  senex. 
young,  juvenis. 
outward,  extfirus. 
below,  inf  ems. 

above,  sup§rus. 

hind,  posterus. 


better,  melior. 
worse,  pejor. 
greater,  major. 

(  plus  (n.  sin?.)- 
^^^'Jplures,a(pl-)- 
less,  minor. 
older,  senior. 
younger,  junior» 
more  outward,  exterior. 
lower,  inferior. 

higher,  supSrIor. 

hinder,  post6ri6r. 


best,  optimiis. 

vjorst,  pessimus. 

greatest,  maximus. 

m,ost,  ?    1  -  "    « 

'  >  plurmius. 

very  many,  ^  ^ 

least,  minimus. 

wanting. 


outermost,  extremus. 
lowest,  infimvls,  or 

imvis. 
highest,  supremus,  or 

eummus. 
hindmost,  postremus. 


(371.)  Several  adjectives  have  no  positive,  but  form 
the  comparative  and  superlative  from  a  preposition, 
adverb,  or  obsolete  word. 


Comparative. 

Superlative. 

(o?i  this  side,  citra.) 
{within,  intra.) 

{beyond,  ultra.) 

{near,  prope.) 
{bad,  deter.) 

nearer,  exterior. 
inner,  interior. 

fartlier,  ulteri6r. 

nearer,  pfopior. 

worse,  deteriSr. 
former,  prior. 

nearest,  citimus. 
inmost,  intimus. 

worst,  deterrimus. 
first,  primus. 

Rem.  1.  Dives,  rich;  richer,  ditior,  divitior;  richest,  ditissimus,  divi- 
tissTmus.     (Cicero  uses  the  longer  form,  Cassar  the  shorter.) 

2.  Compound  adjectives  in  dicus,  ficus,  volus,   add  eiitior  for  the 
comp.,  and  entissimus  for  the  super]. ;  e.  g.,  ben6-v6lu8  {benevolent), 
benevol-entior.  benevol- entissimus. 
EXERCISE. 


(372.)   Vocabulary, 

Disgraceful,  unworthy,  indignua,  a, 

fim  (in+dignus). 
Infamy,   disgraceful    crime,    flagi- 

tiiSm,  T. 
Whdom,  sapientii,  oe. 


The  Suevians,  Suevi,  orum. 
Warlike,  bellicosiis,  a,  um. 
Condition,  conditio,  (condition)  is. 
America,  America,  ro. 
Empvror,  iuipgrator,  oris  (3*5, 1.,  3U 


IRREGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES.  139 


(373.)  Exmnples,     ■ 
(a)  It  is   disgraceful  to  he 

conquered  hy  a  superior  ; 

more    disgraceful    {to    be 

conquered)  by  one  inferior 

and  lower. 


Indignum  est  a  s  u  p  e  r  i  6  r  e 
vinci ;  indignius  ab  inferi- 
or e  atque  hiimiliore. 


[Here  the  infm.  pass,  vinci  is  used  as  a  neut.  noun,  nom.  to  est,  and 
indignum  agrees  with  it  in  the  predicate.] 


(&)    What  is  better  for  man 
than  wisdom  ? 


Quid  est  ho  mini  melius  s  ^- 
p  i  e  n  t  i  a  (360,  c)  ? 


[Here  honuni  is  in  the  dat.  (advantage  or  disadvantage,  106,  II.,  b).] 

(374.)   Translate  into  English. 

Nihil  est  melius  quam  (360,  b)  sapientia. — Hiberni3. 
minor  est  qUam  Britannia. — Nihil  est  pejiis  flagitio. — Hos- 
tes  celeriter  loca  (309)  siiperiora  occupabant. — MaximS, 
pars  Aquitanise  obsides  ad  Cgesarem  misit. — Suevorum  gens 
est  longe  maxima  et  beilicosissima  Germanorum  omnium 
(367,  b). — Ariovistus  agrum  Sequanum,  qui  optimus  6rat 
totius  GallisB  occiipavit. — Infima  est  conditio  et  fortune  ser- 
vorum. — Primus  et  maximus  regum  Romanorum  fuit 
Romulus.  , 

(375.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

It  is  disgraceful  to  be  conquered  by  a  junior,  more  disgrace- 
ful by  a  senior. — What  is  better  than  virtue  ?  what  worse  than 
vice  ? — What  is  better  for  man  than  honour  ?  Wisdom. — Eu- 
rope is  less  than  Asia;  Asia  than  America — The  bravest  of 
the  Belgians  were  seizing  the  higher  grounds  (loca). — The 
greatest  part  of  Gaul  made  (f  e  c  i  t)  a  surrender. — The  first 
and  greatest  of  the  Roman  emperors  was  Caesar. — The  poor 
are  often  more  benevolent  (371,  R.  2)  than  (quam)  the  rich. 
— The  worst  (men)  are  often  more-happy  than  (quam)  the 
best. — Among  the  Helvetians  (by)  far  the  richest  and  noblest 
was  Orgetorix. 


§  6. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS. 

(376.)  Adverbs  4erived  from  adjectives  admit  of 
comparison.  The  comp.  is  the  neuter  form  of  the 
comparative  of  the  adjective :  the  superlative  substi- 
tutes e  for  u  s. 


Learnedly, 
doct-  e ; 

Joyfully, 
Iset-  e  ; 

Happily, 
felic-1  ter 

Well,  bene  ; 


more  learnedly, 
doct-  i  ii  s  ; 

more  joyfully, 
Iget-  i  u  s  ; 

more  happily, 
felic-ius  ; 

better,  melius : 


most  learnedly, 
doct-  i  s  s  i  m  e. 

most  joyfully, 
laet-issime. 

most  happily, 
felic-  i  s  s  !  m  e. 

best,  optime. 


(No  separate  exercise  upon  these  is  necessary.] 


§  6.  • 

SUPINE. 

(377.)  The  Supine  presents  the  action  of  the  verb 
under  the  form  of  a  noun  in  two  cases,  the  accusative 
and  ablative.  The  former  supine  ends  in  um,  the  lat- 
ter in  u ;  which  endings  are  added  to  the  supine-stem 
of  the  verb. 

LESSON  LXI. 
Supines. 
(378.)  The   Supine-stem  is  formed  by  adding  to 
the  verb-stem, 

(1)  In  1st  conj.,     ......     at;  e.  ^.,  am-at-.     • 

(2)  In  2d  conj., it;    c.  g.,  mon-it-. 

(3)  In  3d  conj.,  t;      c.  ^.,  reg-t  =  rect 

(4)  In  4th  conj., it;    c.  ^.,  aud-it-. 

[Rem.  Many  supines,  however,  use  different  connecting  vowels,  or 

take  s  (and  not  t)  before  um  and  u.  For  this  reason,  therefore,  all 
supine-stems  will  be  given  in  the  following  vocabularies.  Where 
no  supine-stem  is  given,  it  is  to  be  understood  that  the  verb  has  no 
supine.] 

(379.)  The  supine  in  um  is  a  verbal  noun  of  the  accusative 
case,  and  is  put  after  verbs  of  motion  to  express  the  design  of 
that  motion  ;  e.  g.^ 


Legati    M   Cses^rem   vSniunt 

rogatum*  auxiliiim. 
Ire  d  o  r  m  i  t  ii  m. 


(a)  Ambassadors    come     to 

Ccesar  to  ask  assistance. 
(6)   To  go  to  sleep  {to  sleep- 
ing). 

(380.)  The  supine  in  u  is  a  verbal  noun  of  the  ablative  case, 
and  is  used  after  adjectives  signifying  good  or  bad,  easy  or  diji- 
cult,  pleasant  or  unpleasant,  &c. 

*  R6gfttam=  accus.  answering  to  the  question  whither 


1 


142 


SUPINE. 


Est  mirabilg  d  i  c  t  u. 


(a)  It  is  {a  thing)  easy  td  do    Est  f  acil6  f  a  c  t  u.* 

(or,  to  be  done), 
{h)  It  is  {a  thing)  wonderful 

to  tell  (or,  to  he  told). 
(381.)  The  following  are  nearly  all  the  supines  in  u  whicn 
are  in  use  :  dictu,  audit u,  cognitu,  factu,  invent fl, 
mSmoratu. 

EXERCISE. 

(382.)    Vocabulary. 


To  ask,  demand,  postulate  (postu- 

lat). 
To   congratulate,    gratulan    (gratii- 

lat},  dep. 
To  come  together,  conv&iirg  (con+ 

venlrg,  conven-,  convent-). 
To  complain,  queror  (quest). 
Custom,   consuetudd,   (consuetudui) 

IS  (f.,  355,  II.,  3). 
To  collect  com,  frumentarl  (friimen- 

tat). 
A  Trevirian,  Trevir  i  (65), 


To  besiege,  oppugnarS  (oppugnatj. 

Hand,  band  of  men,  raaxius,  us. 

Wonderful,  mirabilis,  e  (104). 

Very  easy,  perfacTlis,  6  (104). 

To  do,  fac6r6  (fact). 

T-o  say,  tell,  dic6re  (diet). 

Best,  optimus,  a,  um  (370). 

To  find,   invenlre   (in+vSnirS),  ii 

vent. 
To  happen,  accxd6r6i 
To  endure,  tolfirarg  (tolSrat). 
Senate,  sfinatus,  us. 


(383.)  Example. 


Divitiacus   came   to    Rome 
to  ask  assistance. 


Divitiacus      R  o  m  a  m      venit 
auxilium  postiilatum. 
Rule  of  Syntax. — The  accusative  is  used  with  the  names 
of  towns  and  «mall  islands,  to  answer  to  the  question 
whither  ;  e.  g.,  in  (a)  Romam. 

(384.)   Translate  into  English. 

1.  Supine  in  iim. — Principes  civitatis  ad  C3esS,rem  gratij 
latum  convenerunt. — Treviri  magna  manu  (55,  a)  castr^  op 
pugnatum  venerunt. — Legatl  ab  iEduis  venerunt,  questiim. 
— CaesSr  ex  consuetudine  unam  16gi6nem  misit  frumenta- 
tum. — Legatl  Romam  ad  senatum  venerunt  auxilium  pos- 
tiilatum. 

2.  Supine  in  u — Est  perfacilS  factu. — Est  jucundiim  au- 
dita.— Qusedam  (178,  1)  sunt  turpia  dictu. — Quod  optimum 
est  factu,  faciam. — Virtus  difficilis  est  inventu. — Multa 
accidunt  durS,  toleratu. 


F  a c  tu  =  ablative  of  respect,  wherein. 


SUPINE.  143 

(385.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

[Words  in  Italic  to  be  rendered  by  supines.] 

1.  Supine  in  um. — The  consuls,  according  to  (ex)  <;ustom, 
sent  a  lai'ge  band  to  collect  eorn. — All  the  chiefs,  of  the  ^duans 
were  coming  to  Rome  to  ask  assistance. — All  the  ambassadors, 
according  to  custom,*  came-together  to  Caesar  to  congratulate 
(him). — The  soldiers  of  the  tenth  legion  came  tb  the  general  to 
complain. — The  Germans  came  (in)  a  large  band  to  attach  the 
town. 

2.  Supine  in  u. — It  is  (a  thing)  wonderful  to  he  heard. — 
"What  (quod)  is  base  to  he  said,  I  will  not  say. — What  is  diffi- 
cult to  he  done,  I  wiU  do. — A  true  (verus)  friend  is  difficult  to 
be  found. — Some-things  are  ver^r  easy  to  be  done. 

•  According  to  custom  =  ex  consuetadra^. 


5  7. 

TENSES  OF  VERBS  FOR  COMPLETED  AC- 
TION.—PERFECT,  PLUPERFECT,  AND  FU- 
TURE PERFECT.  — FULLER  STATEMENT. 
(LXIL— LXIX.) 

(386.)  It  has  been  stated  (262)  that  the  tense-stem  of  the 
perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  tenses  is  the  same.  In 
Lessons  XLIV.,  XLV.  we  gave  one  mode  of  forming  this 
tense-stem  for  each  conjugation.  There  are  several  other 
modes,  which  we  now  proceed  to  state,  taking  up  the  conjuga- 
tions separately.  To  make  the  tables  complete,  we  shall  repeat 
the  Jirst  method  at  the  head  of  each. 


LESSON  LXII. 
Forms  of  Perfect-stem. — First  Conjugation, 
(387.)  There  are  four  ways  of  forming  the  per- 
fect-stem in  the^rs^  conjugation. 

I.  Hy  adding  a.y  to  the  verb-stem  ;  am -are,      am-av 
II.  "  u  "  son-are,     s6n-u 

III.  reduplicating*  the  first  con- }  ,  „  „  ,„, 

^     'Ti  ^  >d-are,         ded- 

sonant  with  e  ;  > 

IV.  lengthening  the  stem-vowel ;    juv-are,    juv 
On  this  table,  observe  that  Class 

I.  contains  most  of  the  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation. 
II.  contains  eleven  simple  verbs  (of  which  a  Ust  may  be  found,  664). 

III.  contains  but  two  simple  verbs,  viz.,  ddrS,  to  give,  and  starg,  to 

stand. 

IV.  contains  but  two  simple  verbs,  viz.,  jiivarg,  to  assist,  and  ISvarS. 

to  wash. 
(388.)  To  form  the  perfect,  pluperfect,  or  future  perfect  of  a 

*  To  reduplicate  a  consonant  is  to  prefix  it  to  a  stem  with  some  con- 
necting-vowel;  thus,  mord-,  redufjlicate  with  o,  momord;  st-fire,  re- 
duplicate  with  e.  stest-,  but  the  second  s  is  dropped,  st6t-. 


PERFECT-STEM,  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


14& 


Ferb  of  any  of  the  above  classes,  simply  add  the  endings  of  those 
tenses  respectively  to  the  perfect-stem  ;  thus  : 


Infinitive.  Perfect-stem.  Perfect  tense. 

'i. 


To  forbid,  y6t-&r&,  v6tu- 
To  give,     d-&r6,      d6d- 
To  help,     jiiv-arS,   j  u  v  - 


isti. 
it. 

imtis. 
istis. 
^erant,  or  6re. 


Pluperfect 

6ram. 

6ras. 

6rat. 

Sramds. 

gratis. 

6rant. 


Future  Perfect. 

Sr6. 

6ri8. 

6rit. 

erimtis. 

6ritis. 

6rint. 


EXERCISE. 


(389.)  [  ^^  Hereafter,  in  all  the  vocabularies,  the  perfect  and  supine 
stems  of  verbs  will  be  given  in  parentheses,  immediately  after  the  infini- 
tive. When  no  perfect  or  supine  stem  is  given,  it  vrill  be  understood  that 
those  forms  of  the  verb  are  wanting ;  and  where  two  are  given,  that  the 
verb  uses  both.  Thus  :  to  help,  juvarg  ( juv-,  jut-) ;  to  glitter,  micarS 
(niicu-) ;  to  fold,  plicare  (plicav-,  pllcu-,  plicat-,  plicit-).  In  these  exam 
pies  micar6  has  no  supine ;  plicare  has  two  perfect  and  two  supine  forma.] 

(390.)   Vocabulary, 

To   demand   [command),   impgrare 

(av-,  at-). 
To  give,  dare  (dSd-,  dat-,  387,  HI.). 
Hunger,  fames  (is),  (300). 
To  tame,   domare   (domu-,   dSmit-, 

387,  II.). 
To  shine,  or  flash  forth,  enucSre 

(gmicu-,  e+micare,  387,  11.). 
To  surround,  circumstare  (stit-  and 

stfet-). 
The  sand,   dry  ground,  aridum,  i 

(neut.  o/aridus,  dry). 
An  attack,  impetus,  us  (110). 
To  assist,  adjuvarS  (juv-,  jut-,  ad+ 

juvare). 

(391.)  Examples, 

(1)  Stare  =  to  stand;  con-stare,  to  stand  together,  to 
halt ;  circum-stare,  to  stand^uround,  to  surround. 
(The  compounds  of  stare,  with  prepositions  oi one  sylla- 
ble, have  stit-  for  perfect-stem  ;  those  with  two,  st6t-.) 

(2)  To   resist  or  withstand    Alicui  rfisistSre. 
any  one. 

Partial  Rule  of  Syntax. — Many  verbs  compounded  with 
prepositions  govern  the  dative. 

N 


Door,  foris,  (ftr)  Is  (300). 

To  creak,  cr6par6  (crepu-,  creplt-). 

To  chide,  reprove,  incrfipare  (in+ 

creparg,  crgpu-,  erg  pit-). 
A  little  while,  pauUispfir  (adv.). 
To    with^and,    rSsistfirS    (restit-, 

rg+stare). 
To   halt,    constarg  (constit-,,  con-f- 

stare)!' 
As  soon  as,  simulatque  (adv.). 
To  slay,  kill,  interficgre  (interfSc-, 

interfect-). 
To   make,   fScgre,    id    (fgc-,    fact-, 

199). 


146  FERFECT-STEM,  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


Aliquem    in    fugam    d&re 

{  =  to  give  unto  jiight). 
Impetum  facere. 


(3)  7^0  put  any  one  to  Jiight. 

(4)  To  make  an  attack. 

[The  Latin  words  in  the  following  exercises  which  illustrate  the  fes- 
sofis  are  spaced.] 

(392.)   Translate  into  English. 

Oppidani,  obsides  quos  Cgesar  imperav-6rat,  dSd-erunt. — 
Venat5res  faiTi6  (abl.,  55,  a)  lupoadomu-erunt. — Ex  monte 
subito  (adv.)  flammsB  emicu-erunt. — Imperator  oppidanos 
frumento  (55)  a d j  u v - i t. — Num  crepu-erunt  fores  ? — Cae- 
sar v^hementer  (215,  2,  6)  mllites  increpu-it. — Hostes 
nostris  paullisper  restit-erunt. — Hostes  militibus  (391,  2) 
circumstfit-erunt,  multosque  interfec-erunt.  —  Nostri  in 
hostes  impetum  fec-erunt,  atque  eos  (391,  3)  in  fugam  dfed- 
erunt. — Nostii  slmulatque  in  an  do  constit-erunt,  in  hostes 
impStum  fec-erunt  atque  eos  in  fugam  dSd-erunt. 

(393.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  flame  shone-forth. — From  (ex)  the-top-of  the  mountain 
(297,  a)  the  flame  suddenly  shone-forth. — ^The  huntsman  had 
tamed  the  wolf.— The  townsmen  had  given  the  hostages. — 
The  Belgians  gave  all  the  hostages  that  {rel.  pron.)  Csesar  had 
demanded. — The  general  had  reproved  the  lieutenant  and 
(que)  the  soldiers. — Our  (men)  were-withstanding  the  enemy 
(dat.) — Our  (men)  bravely  withstood  the  enemy,  and  (que) 
killed  many. — The  Belgians  surrounded  our  {men)  (dat.,  391, 
2),  and  killed  many. — The  Romans  often  put  the  Belgians  to 
flight. — Our  men  halted  upon  {in)  the  dry-ground. — As-soon-as 
our  men  halted  upon  dry-ground,  they  bravely  withstood  the 
enemy  (391,  2). — Our  men  put-to-flight  the  enemy  whom 
(dat.,  391,  2)  they  had  bravely  withstood. 


LESSON  LXIII. 
Perfect-stem. — Second  Conjugation, 
■.-  (394.)  The  perfect-stem  in  second  conjugation  is 
formed  inj^ue  ways. 


PEKFECT-STEM,  SECOND  CONJUGATION.  147 

I.  By  adding  u  to  the  verb-stem  ;  m  5  n-ere,   m  6  n-  ii-. 
II.  "  ev  "  del-ere,      del-ev-. 

III.  "  s  "  man-erg,   man-s-. 

IV.  reduplicating;  the  first  con- }  ,  _  „       „  , 

^  °       -^ .  >  mord-ere,  mo-mordi. 

sonant  and  vowel ;  > 

V.         lengthening  the  stem-vowel ;  v  i  d  -ere,      v  i  d  '. 
(395.)  On  this  table,  observe  that  Class 

I.  contains  most  of  the  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation.* 

II.  contains  only  f  1  e  r  S,  to  weep ;  n  e  r  6,  to  spin ;  d  e  1  e  r  6,  to  destroy , 

with  the  compounds  of  the  obsolete  words   pi  ere,  to  Jill; 
6lere,t  to  grow;  suere,t  to  be  accustomed.     [For, a  list,  see 
665,  XL] 
in.  contains  many  verbs,  of  which  a  list  may  be  found  (665,  III.). 
The  rules  of  euphony  must  be  applied  here, 
(a)  b  before  s  sometimes  passes  into  s. 

Infinitire.  Perfect.  Snp-ne. 

To  command,      jub-ere,      jub-si=jussi,      jussum  (jub-sum). 
ip)  t-soxmd  before  s  dropped. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  laugh,  rid-ere,       rld-si  =  risT,  risum  (rid-sum). 

(c)  c-sound  4- s  =  X.     Any  c-sound  before  t  =  c. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  increase,         aug-ere,      aug-sl  =  aux-i,     auctiim  (aug-tum). 
{d)  c-soond  after  1  or  r  dropped  before  s. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  glitter,  fulg-ere,      ful-si  (ful(g)s-i),  ful-sum  (ful(g)siim). 

IV.  contains /owr  simple  verbs.    See  list  (665,  IV.). 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  bite,  champ,   mord-ere,    m6-mord-i,    morsum  (mord-sum). 
To  vow,  promise,  s^ondi-ere,  sp6-pond-i,    sponsum  (spond-sum). 
[The  compounds  of  these  verbs  drop  the  reduplication ;  e  g., 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  _  Supine. 

To  answer,  respondere,    respond-i,    responsum  (respond-sum).] 
V.  contains  eight  simple  verbs,  for  which  see  list  (665,  V.). 

Infinitive.  Perfect  Supine. 

To  favour,  i2t,y-Qre,  fav-i,  fautum. 

To  move,     m6v-Sr6,  mov-i,  mdtum. 

EXERCISE. 

[Refer  to  386  and  389.] 

(396.)    Vocabulary. 

Carthage,  Carthago,  (Carthagin)  Is 

(339). 
To  destroy,   delerS    (dfilev-,    delet-, 

395,  II.). 


To  Jill  up,  complere  (complev-,  com' 
plet-,  395,  II.)  [con4-plere]. 

Good  will,  voluntas,  (voluntat)  ia 
(293). 


*  Many  examples  of  this  class  have  already  occurred. 

t  Some  of  these  have  sco  in  present  indicative  :  adolesco,  consaesco 


148  PERFECT-STEM,  SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


Scipio  )  Sclpio,  nis. 

{surnamed)  > 
Africanus,      )  Africanus,  i.    ■ 
Numantia,  Numantia,  se. 
A  defence,  fortification,  munitio  (nis). 

(f.,  333,  R.)- 
Eve7i  up  to,  as  far  as,  usqu6  (adv.)- 
Great,  ingens,  (ingent)  is  (107). 
Standard,  signum,  L 
Tooth,  dens,  (dent)  is,  (m.,  295,  R.). 


To  remain,  mSnerS  (mans-,  mans-, 

394,  III.). 
To  come,  v6nlr6  (ven-,  vent-). 
A  slayer,  interfector,  oris  (319). 
To  see,  videre  (vid-,  vis-,  395,  V.). 
To  open,  aperlre  (ap6i-u-,  apeit-). 
Gate,  porta,  se. 

To  flee,  frigere  (io),  (fug-,  fugit-). 
Bit,  bridle,  fraenum,  I  (plur.  i  and  a). 
Saguntum,  Saguntum,  i. 
Hill,  coUIs,  is  (m.,  302,  R.). 

(397.)  Example.. 

On  the  very  day  of  his  ar-  [Eodem  quovenSrat  die 
rival.  {=^the  very  day  on  which 

1      day  he  had  come). 

(398.)   Translate  into  English. 

Hannibal  Saguntum  delevit,  Scipio  Carthaginem. — Scipio 
Africanus  urbes  duas  potentissimas,  Carthaginem  et  Numan- 
tiam  delevit. — Ctesar  has  mfinitiones  diligenter  auxit. — 
Galli  partem  coUis,  usque  ad,  murum  oppidi,  castris  (55,  a) 
com  pie  ver  ant. — Advejitiis  legati  summa  spe  et  voluntate 
urbem  complevit.— Diu  barbari  in  fide  manserant. — Ita 
complures  dies  (191,  a)  manserant  castra. — Cassar  eodem 
die  (118,  II.,  c)  in  iEduos  castra  movit. — Imperator,  eodem 
quo  venerat  die  (397)  castra  movit. — Brutus  0t  Cassius,  in- 
terfectores  (225,  a)  Csesaris,  bellum  ingens  move  runt.* — 
Ijegiones,  simiilatqiie  nostra  signa  viderunt,  portas  aperue- 
runt. — Equus  fraenos  momordit. — Spopondistine  pro  am- 
ico  ?     Spopondi. 

(399.)   Translate  into  Latin.' 

Scipio  destroyed  Carthage,  a  most  powerful  city. — God  has 
filled  the  world  with  all  blessings  (bona,  neuL). — Socrates 
never  laughed. — The  forces  of  the  Gauls  had  filled  the  whole 
(o  m  n  e  m)  place,  even-up  to  the  wall  of  the  town. — The  Gauls 
had  fiUed-up  the  higher  (superior)  part  of  the  hill  with 
(their)  very-crowded  (d  e  n  s  i  s  s  i  m  u  s)  camp. — The  coming 
of  Csesar  filled  the  army  with  the  highest  hope  and  good-will. 
For  many  years  the  barbarians  had  remained  in  friendship  and 

*  In  the  sense  of  excited,  stirred  up. 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION*  149 

fidelity  (fide que). — CfEsar  moved  (his)  camp  into  the  (terri- 
tory of  the)  iEduans  on  the  very  day  of  his  arrival. — The  ene- 
my saw  our  soldiers,  and  fled. — The  hofses  were  champing  the 
bits. — The  wolf  bit  the  dog  with  hia  teeth  (55,  a). 


LESSON  LXIV. 

Pei^fect- stems. — Third  Conjugation, 

(400.)  The  perfect-stem  in  the  third  conjugation  8 
formed  in  six  ways. 

I.  By  adding  s  to  the  verb-stem  ;  scrib-ere,  scTijT-s-. 
II.  *'  u  *'  col-ere,        c61-u-. 

III.  "  V,  or  Tv    ♦'  pet-6re,       pet-iv-. 

IV.  reduplication  ;  c  u  r  r  -ere ,     c  u  c  u  r  r  -. 
V.         lengthening  the  stem-vowel ;  fu  g-ere,      f  u  g-- 

VI.         taking  the  simple  verb-stem ;  v  o  1  v  -ere,     v  o  1  v  -. 

We  shall  take  up  these  separately,  treating  in  this  lesson 
only  the  first. 

(401.)  Class  I. — Perfect-stem  formed  by  adding  s 
to  the  Verb-stem. 

Most  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  come  under  this  class. 
It  has  already  been  illustrated,  but  we  here  give  a  fuller  ac- 
count of  the  rules  of  euphony,  in  connexion  with  the  various 
stem-endings. 

1 .  b  before  s  or  t  passes  into  p. 

Infinitive.  Perfect  Supme. 

To  write,   scrib-ere,        scrips-i  (scrib-s-i),        scriptum  (scrib-tum). 
To  marry,  nub-6r5,  nups-i  (nub-s-i),  nuptum  (nub-tum). 

2.  A  c-sound  -f-s  =  x  (c,  g,  h,  v,  gu,  qu  are  classed  with  c-sounde.    If  a 

stem  ends  in  ct,  the  t  is  dropped,  and  the  c  unites  with  %  to  form 
x).     Any  c-sound  before  t  =  c. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Siipin«. 

To  lead,      duc-6r6,  dux-I  (duc-s-I),  dup-tum. 

To  cover,    t6g-€r6,  tex-i  (teg-s-i),  tec-tum  fteg-tum). 

To  draw,    trfth-6r6,         trax-I  (trab-s-i),  trac-tam  (trah-tum). 

N2 


150 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


InfinitiTC. 

To  live,       viv-er6, 


Perfect. 

vix-i  (viv-s-i), 


Supine, 
vic-ttun  (viv-tum). 

To  quench,  extmgu-6rS,  extdnx-I  (extingxi-s-i),  ]      /     ^        ^.^     \ 

To  boil,        c6qa-6re,        cox-I  (coqu-s-i),  coc-tum  (coqu-tum). 

We  class  here  also, 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  flow,       flu-ere  (fluv-),         flux-I  (fluv-s-i),         flux-um  (fluv-stun). 
To  build,     stru-ere  (struc-),     strux-i  (struc-s-i),    struc-tum. 

3.  d  or  t  before  s  either  {a)  is  dropped,  or  {b)  passes  into  s. 

_ ,  _  Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

(a)  To  divide,    divid-erg,      divis-i  (divid-s-i),      divi-sum  (divid-ssc). 

[b)  To  yield,  go,  ced-erg,         cess-i  (ced-s-I),  ces-sum  (ced-sum). 
To  send,       mitt-erS,        mis-l  (mit-s-I),  mis-sum  (mit-sum). 

4.  (a.)  m  or  r  before  s  sometimes  passes  into  g. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  press,   prem-6re,       press-i  (prem-s-i),       pres-sum  (prem-sum). 
To  bear,     ger-er6,  gess-i  (ger-s-i),  ges-tum  (ger-tum). 

(i.)  But  if  m  be  retained,  it  assmnes  p  before  it. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  take,     sum-$rg,        smn-ps-i  (sum-s-I),       sump-tum  (sum-tam). 

5.  If  the  stem  ends  in  rg,  the  g  is  dropped  before  s. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  scatter,  sow,   sparg-6r6,        spars-i  (sparg-s-iX         spar-sum. 
EXERCISE. 


(402.)    Vocabulary. 

To  bind,  surround,  cing6re  (cinx-, 

cinct-,  401,  2), 
To  draw  -up,  instruere  (instrux-,  in- 
struct-, 401,  2),^  ^ 
To   shut,   claudfire   (claus-,   claus-, 

401,  3,  a). 
To    retreat,    recedere    (re+cedSre, 

cess-,  cess-,  401,  3,  b). 
To-approach,  accedere  (ad+cedere, 

cess-,  cess-,  401,  3,  b). 
To  gra7tt,,  conceA^re  (con+c§d6re, 

cess-,  cess-,  401,  3,  b). 
To  bear,  carry  on,  ggrere  (401,  4,  a). 
To  spend,  consumere  (con+sumere, 

sumps-,  simipt-,  401,  4,  b). 

(403.)  Examples, 
{a)  In  all  directions, 
(h)   Upon  an  expedition. 


Rampart,  vallum,  i. 

Triple,  triplex,  (tripHc)  is  (107). 

Janus,  Janus,  I. 

Numa,  Numa,  se. 

Veteran,  veteranus,  a,  um. 

In  three  divisions,  tripartito  (adv.). 

Suddenly,  repente  (adv.). 

By-night,  noctu  (adv.). 

There,  ib!  (adv.). 

Dragon,  drSco,  (drScon)  is  (333). 

Arms,  arma,  orum  {used  only  in  plu« 

ral). 
Neighbouring,  finitimus,  g,  um. 
State,  clvitas,  (civitat)  is  (293). 


In   oranes   partes. 
In   expedition  em. 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION.  IM 

(404.)   Translate  into  English, 

In  tua  epistola  nihil  mihi  scrip  sis ti  de  tms  rebus. — ^Bar- 
bari  vallo  et  fossa  (55,  a)  hiberna  cinxerunt. — Caesar  ti'ipK- 
cem  aciem  instruxit  legiomim  veteranarum. — Romani  tera- 
plum  Jani  bis  post  NumEB  regnum  clauserunt. — Imperator 
exercitum  in  duas  partes  divisit. — Caesar  tripartito  milites 
eqintesque  in  expSditionem  mi  sit. — Principes  repente  ex 
oppido  cum  copiis  recesserunt. — Milites  noctu  usque  ad 
castra  accesserunt. — C8esS,r  obsidibus  (54)  libertatem  con- 
cessit.— Gefmani  cum  Helve tiis  bellum  gesserunt. — Mag- 
num et  grave  onus  armorum  milites  press  it. — Explorator  ad 
castra  hostium  access  it,  atque  ibi  magnara  partem  diei  con- 
Bumpsit. — Cadmus  dentes  draconis  spar  sit.  * 

(405.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  ambassador  wrote  nothing  concerning  his  own  affairs. — 
The  scout  approached  even-up  to  the  walls  of  the  town. — The 
aeutenant  sent-away  messengers  in  all  directions. — Caesar  sent- 
away  the  horsemen  in  three  divisions  into  the  neighbouring 
states. — Cadmus  slew  (interfecit)  the  dragon  and  sowed 
liis  (ejus)  teeth. — Caesar  drew  up  the  veteran  legions  in  (abl.) 
a  triple  line. — The  soldiers  spent  a  great  part  of  the  day  in  the 
camp. — The  enemy  approached  the  town  by-night. — The 
townsmen  shut  the  gates. — The  Helvetians  retreated  by  night 
with  all  (their)  forces. — Caesar  sent-away  the  scouts  in  three 
divisions  upon  an  expedition. — The  general  sent-away  the  mes- 
sengers by  night  in  all  directions. — The  soldiers  approached 
even-up-to  the  rampart,  and  there  spent  a  grf  at  part  of  the  day. 


LESSON  LXV. 
Perfect-stem,— Third  Conjugation^  continued, 
(406.)  Class  II. — Perfect-stem  adds  H  to  the  Verb' 

stem, 
(a)   Without  change  of  the  verb-stem  (see  list,  666,  II.,  a) ; 

To  nourish,  maintain,        al-6rS,  Sl-ii-I,  al-tum. 

To  hovvur,   cultivate,         c6l-Sr6,  c6]-u-i,  cul-tum. 


152 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


{b)   With  change  of  verb-stem  (666,  II.,  b). 
To  place,  p6n-«r6,  p6s-u-I,*  pos-Ttum. 

To  beget,  gign-6rg,  gSn-4-I,  gen-i-tum. 

Class  III. — Perfect-stem  adds  v  or  Iv  to  the  Verb" 

stem. 
(a)  Adds  V  (and  lengthens  stem-vowel,  if  short).     (List,  666, 
III.,  a.) 

[These  generally  drop  n,  r,  or  s  c,t  or  change  the  order  of  the  letters. 
They  must  be  carefully  observed,  as  they  occur  in  the  vocabularies.] 
To  despise,  spem-ere,      sprev-I,  spre-tum  (spem-tum). 

To  be  accustomed,  suesc-6rS,      suev-i,  sue-tum. 

(6)  Adds  iv  (list^  666,  III.,  b). 
To  seek,  strive  ajter^  pSt-€r6,  p6t-iv-I,  pSt-I-tum. 

EXERCISE. 

(407.)   Vocabulary. 


Spaniard,  HispSnus,  i. 

Command,  jussus,  us. 

Against,  contra  (prep.,  acc.}^. 

People,  populus,  I. 

Immediately,  statim. 

Avienus,  Avienus,  T. 

To    instigate,    stir    up,    instlgSre 

(5v-,  at-). 
To  place  in,  to  put  into,  impongrg 

(in+p6n6re,  406,  b). 
To  remove,  removerS   (rSmov-,  rS- 

mot-,  re-f-movere). 
To  arrange,   distribute,   dispongrS 

(dis+p6n6re,  406,  b). 
To  relate,  conun6m6rarg   (av-,   at-, 

con-l-m6morar6). 


Property,  ftmilia,  jb. 

To  cross  over,  transirS  (transHhird, 

iv-,  it-). 
To    decree,     determine,     decemSrS 

(decrev-,  decret-,  de-(-cem6re). 
To    discourse,    diss6r6r6    (disseru-, 

dissert-,  dis-+s6rer6). 
To  plunder,  diripere   (ripu-,   rept- 

di+rapere).t 
A  beast  of  burden,  jiimentum,  i. 
Sacred  rites,  sacra,  oram  (n.,  pL). 
Instead  of,  pro  (prep.,  abl.). 
Advice,  counsel,  consilium,  I. 
On  account  of,  6b  (prep.,  ace). 
To  despise,  spemSre  (406,  III.,  a). 
Winter,  hiems,  (hi6m)  is  (293). 


(408.)  Examples. 
(a)  By  the  command  of  C(B-  I  J  u  s  s  u  (abl.,  55,  a)  Csesaris. 


*P6nft  =  p6sino;  p6suI  =  pos-iv-i. 

t  In  these  verbs  the  n  or  sc  does  not  properly  belong  to  the  root,  but  is 
employed  simply  to  strengthen  the  present  indicative  and  infinitive ;  to 
know,  no-ere,  strengthened  nosc-ere,  &c. 

t  Observe  that  the  compounds  of  rap6r6,  facgr8,  cSp6r6,  with  prep- 
esUions,  change  a  into  i  m  the  infinitive;  diripSrg,  confic6r§,  accl- 
p6r6. 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION.  153 


(6)   To  place  on  shipboard. 


In  naves  impon^re  {put 

into  ships). 
Ad   exercitum. 
Ad  fines   iEduorum. 


(c)   With  (near)  the  ariny. 
On  the   borders   of   the 
JEduans. 

Ad  is  often  used  by  Cassar  in  the  sense  of  near  or  with  (i.  e.,  along 
with).  ^ 

(409.)   Translate  into  English. 

Hispani,  jussu  Caesaris,  eos  exercltus  quos  (165)  conti'a  pop- 
lilum  Romanum  multos  jam  annos  (191,  a)  aluerant,  statim 
diinlseruni.. — Aviene  (voc),  quod  {because)  in  Italia  milites 
popiili  Romani  contra  rempublicam  instig^sti  (349,  N.) ;  et, 
pro  militibus,  tuam  familiam  in  naves  imposuisti;  6b  eas 
res,  ab  exercitu  meo  te  removeo. — CaesS,r  legiones  quas  in 
Italia,  hibernorum  causa  (135,  II.,  5),  disposuerat,  ad  se 
revocavit. — Cur  consilium  meum  sprevisti? — Cajsar,  his  do 
causis  quas  commemoravi,  Rheuum  transire  deer  eve  rat. — 
Multi  salutem  sibi  (dat.)  in  fuga  petiverunt  {or  petierunt,  349, 
N.). — Caesar  totam  hiemem  (191,  a)  ipse  ad  exercitum  (408,  c) 
manere  decrevit. — Caesar  duas  legiones  ad  fines  jfEduorum 
posuit. 

(410.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  Spaniards  had  maintained  an  army  (for)  many  years 
(191,  a). — Orgetorix  maintained,  at-his-o\vn- expense  (sumptti 
suo),  a  large  number  of  soldiers. — Caesar  placed  the  camp  on- 
the-borders-of  (408,  c)  the  Sequanians. — Socrates  discoursed 
concerning  (de)  the  immortality  of  the  soul.— The  pirates 
plundered  many  towns. — Caesar  distributed  three  legions  in 
Itaiy,  for-the-sake-of  winter-quarters.  —  Thou-hast-despised 
my  counsels  ;  thou-hast-instigated  the  soldiers  against  the  re- 
public ;  thou  hast  put  beasts-of-burdep  instead  of  soldiers  into 
the  ships  :  on-account-of  these  things,  I  remove  thee  from  my 
army. — The  Romans  honoured  most-religiously  (maxima 
religion e)  the  sacred-rites  of  Jupiter. — Caesar,  for  (de) 
these  reasons,  had  determined  to  cross  the  Rhine. — Many  sol 
diers  sought  safety  for  themselves  (by)  flight. — The  inhabitants 
sought  peace  from  (a)  the  Romans. 


154 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


LESSON  LXVI. 
Perfect-stem. — Third  Conjugation,  continued, 

(411.)   Class   IV. — Perfect-stem    reduplicates    the 
first  Consonant. 

[Some  of  these  present  vowel-changes,  which  must  be  carefully  ob- 
served, {a)  When  the  first  vowel  is  i  or  u,  the  first  consonant  is 
reduplicated  with  that  vowel ;  {b)  in  other  verbs,  with  e.  (c)  The 
compounds  of  dare,  to  give,  with  i.] 

{a)  First  vowel  i,  o,  or  u. 

Infinitive.  Perfect.  Supine. 

To  learn,  disc-er6,  di-<Hc-i  (s  d/ropped),  (no  supine). 

To  demand,       posc-ere,  p6-posc-i,  (no  supine). 

.  To  beat,  tund-6rg,  tu-tud-i,  tu-sum  (tud-sum). 


(6)  Other  verbs  reduplicate  with  e  (note 

vowel-changes  in 

jtems). 

Infinitive.                   Perfect 

To  fall,              ciid-gre,             cS-cid-I  (i  short). 

To  drive,  repd,  pell-€r6,            pg-pul-i. 

To  fell,  kill,       c8Bd-ere,            c6-cld-i  (i  long). 

Supine. 

ca-sum  (cad-sum), 
pul-sum. 

C8BS-um. 

(c)  Compounds  of  dfi,r6. 

Infinitive.                    Perfect. 

To  add,             ad-der6,           ad-did-I, 

Supine. 

ad-di-tum. 

To  lose,              per-der6,          per-did-i, 

per-di-tum. 

EXERCISE. 

(412.)    Vocabulary. 

The  whole,  universus,  a,  um. 
Duty,    service,    munus,    (mungr)   is 

(345). 
Walls,  maenia,  ium  (pi.,  neut.). 
Coming  together,  conflict,  congres- 

Eus,  us. 
Seventy,  septua^ta  (indecL). 
To  touch,  tanger6  (tStTg-,  tact-,  411, 

b). 
To  spare,  parcere  (pgperc-,  parcit-, 

pars- ;  governs  dative). 

(413.)  Examples. 
(1)   To    demand   peace   of 
Csesar. 


To  surround,  cinggre  (401,  3). 
Nobody,  nemo,  (nemin)  is  (m.   and 

f.,  25,  a). 
Woman,  mulier,  is  (f.,  25,  a). 
Child,  infant,  iufans,  (infant)  is  (c. 

25,  a). 
Thirty,  triginta. 
Eighty,  octoginta. 
Immense,  immensus,  ft,  iim. 
Sum-of-money,  pficiinia,  ee. 
To  add,  addere  (411,  c). 

'(a)  Caesargra   pac6m  pos 
c6r6  ;  or  (6)  pacSm  a  Cj»- 
s&r6  posc6r6. 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIHD  CONJUGATION.  155 

Rule  of  Syntax. — Verbs  oi  demanding  {a)  govern  two  ac- 
cusatives, one  of  the  person,  the  other  of  the  thing ; 
but  (h)  the  person  may  be  put  in  the  ablative  with  the 
preposition  a  or  ab. 


(2)  About  twenty. 

(3)  To  give  one's  self  wholly 
up. 

(4)  The  leader  spared  wom- 
en. 


C  irciter  vi  ginti. 

T  6 1  u  m   se  dare   ( =  to   give 

one's  seZf  whole  up). 
Dux  mulieribus  p6per- 
cit. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — Verbs  o^  sparing  govern  the  dative. 
1^^^  Observe,  the  perfect  of  cidere,  to  fall,  is  c^oidi ;  ofcaedSyS, 
to  fell  or  kill,  cecidi.  ^  •      ' 

(414.)   Translate  into  English, 

Legati  ad  Caesarem  venerunt,  eumquo  pacem  (413,  1,  a) 
poposcerunt. — Hoc  a  me  (413,  1,  h)  munus  imiversa  pro- 
vincia  p6  pose  it. — Pueri  linguam  Latinam  didic6rant. — A 
Greecis  Galli  urbes  maenibus  cingere  didicerunt. — Nostri,  in 
primo  congressu,  circiter  septuaginta  o^ciderunt;  in  his 
Quintus  Fulginius. — Arbor  v6tus  cecldit,  quam  (165)  ferro 
(55,  a)  nemo  cecidit. — Legatus,  simiilac  provinciam  1 6  tig  it, 
inertias  (dat.)  totura  se  dedit. — Postquam  Caesar  vanit,  obsides, 
arma,  servos  p6  pose  it. — Milites  non  mulieribus,  non  infanti- 
bus,  pepercerunt. — Caesar  legionibus  cohortes  circiter  tri- 
ginta  addtdit. — Mors  nuUi  (194,  R.  1)  hominum  {partit.  gen.) 
pdpercit  (413,  4). 

(415.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

The  iEduans  demanded  peace  of  Caesar  (413,  1,  h) The 

whole  province  demanded  peace  of  the  Romans  (413,  1,  a). — 
Of-our-men  (nostri,  nom.,  pi.)  about  eighty  fell;  among 
them,  Labienus. — Have  you  (135,  II.,  a)  learned  the  Latin 
language? — The  farmer  felled  very-many  (plurimas)  trees 
in  the  wood. — As  soon  as  the  lieutenant  touched  the  province, 
he  plundered  many  towns. — The  general  demanded  seventy 
hostages,  and  an  immense  sum  of  money. — The  old  trees  fell. 
— This  service  the  general  demanded  of  me. — The  leader 
spared  all  the  temples  of  the  gods  ;  but  the  soldiers  spared  not 
(non)  women  nor  (non)  children. — Caesar  added  to  the  foot- 
soldiers  about  twenty  cohorts. — Caesar  added  to  the  foot-soldiers 
thirty  horse-soldiers. 


156 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


LESSON  LXVII. 
Perfect-stem. — Third  Conjugation^  continued, 

(416.)  Class  V. — Perfect-stem  lengthens  the  Stem^ 

vowel  of  the  Verb, 
{a)   Without  vowel-change. 


To  read,  gather,          leg- 

Srg, 

leg-V 

lec-tum. 

To  conquer,                 vine 

-SrS, 

vic-i, 

vic-tuna. 

(6)   With  vowel-change. 

To  drive,             '       ag-SrS, 

Sg-i, 

ac-tum. 

To  break,                     frang-SrS, 

freg-i. 

frac-tum. 

(c)  io  verbs  (199). 

Tojly,               fug-i«, 

fug-6r6, 

■    fflg-i, 

ftig-Y-tum. 

To  take,             cap-id, 

cap-grS, 

cep-i, 

cap-turn. 

To  cast,             jac-i<J, 

jac-grS, 

jec-i, 

jac-tum. 

To  dig,              f  6d-id, 

f6d-6re, 

fod-i. 

fos-sum. 

To  make,  do,     f  Sc-id, 

f4c-6re, 

fec-I, 

fac-tum. 

EXERCISE. 

(417.)   Vocabulary, 

Remains,  remnant,  reliquiae,  arum 

(pi.)  (57,  R.). 
To  collect,  colligSr6  (leg-,  lect-,  con-f- 

iSggre). 
To  receive,  take  hack,  rgciperS  (cep-, 

cept-,  rS-|-caperg). 
Headlong,   prseceps,   (praecipit)    is 

(adj.,  107). 
To  receive,  accTpSre  (cep-,  cept-,  ad-|- 

capgre). 
To  bring-together,  to  compel,  coggrS 

(coeg-,  coact-,  coii-l-&g6r6). 
To  break  through,  perfringSrS  (freg-, 

frac^,  per-}-frang6r6). 
Dart,  javelin,  telum,  I. 

(418.)  Examples, 
[a)  To  betake  one's  self  back. 
He  went  back  to  his  house. 
{h)  Within  the  memory  of  our 
fathers. 


To  hurl,  conjicSrS  (jec-,  ject-,  con-|- 

jacere). 
To  undertake,  suscip6r6  (cep-,  cept-, 

sub+capere). 
To  finish,  conf  ic6rS  (fee-,  feet-,  con-|- 

facer  6). 
To  begin,  incipSre  (incep-,  incept- 

in-l-cap6r6). 
Safe,  tutus,  fi,  um, 
Cappadocia,  CappSdOcia,  se. 
A  district,  pagus,  i. 
^gypt,  iEgyptus,  i  (f.). 
Easily,  facile  (adv.). 
Trial,  judicium,  i. 
Family  of  slaves,  f  SmTlia,  ». 


Se  r^cipSrS. 
Se  domum  recepit. 
Patrum  nostrorum  mft- 
m6ria  (abl.,  55,  a). 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION.  157 

(c)  Lucius  Cassius,  the  con-    L.  Cassius,  consul. 

sul. 
The  {prcenomen)  first  name  is  rarely  written  out.    L .  stands  for  L  u  c  i u  s 
T.  for  Titus,  &c.     Consul  is  in  apposition  (225,  a)  with  L.  Cassius. 

{d)  In  mid-summer.  IMediaajstate  (118,  II.,  c). 

(419.)   Translate  into  English. 

Servus  mens  orationes  et  historias  et  carmina  legit. — Le- 
gatus  reliquias  exercitus  co lie  git,  itineribusque  tutis  per'Cap- 
padociam  se  in  Asiam  recepit. — Nostri  acriter  impetum  fe- 
cerunt  atque  praecipites  hostes  ggernlit. — Labienus,  cum 
his  copiis  quas  a  CaesS,re  acceperat,  ad  fines  iEduorum  con- 
tendit. — Pompeius  magnara  ex  Asia  et  iEgypto  classem  coe- 
gerat. — Miiites  facile  (adv.)  hostium  aciem  perfregerunt 
atque  in  eos  impetum  fecerunt. — Hie  pagus  unus,  patrum 
nostrorum  memoria,  L.  Cassium  consulem  (418,  c)  interfece- 
rat,  et  ejus  exercitum  sub  jugum  (323,  N.)  miserat. — Hostes 
subito  tela  in  nostros  conjecerunt. — Pompeius  bellum  verS 
{in  the  spring,  118,  II.,  c)  suscepit,  media  sestat^  confecit. 

(420.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  general  had  collected  (c  o  g  e  r  e)  great  forces. — Pompey 
brought- together  a  great  army  from  Asia  and  Egypt. — Have 
you  read  the  books  of  Cicero  ? — The  general  collected  the 
'remnant  of  his  army,  and  betook  himself  into  Gaul.  —  Our 
(men)  drove  the  enemy  headlong,  and  slew  many. — Labienus 
had  received  four  legions  from  Caesar.-^Labienus,  with  the 
legions  which  he  had  received  from  Caesar,  hastened  to  the 
confines  of  the  iEduans. — Orgetorix  brought-together  to  the 
trial  all  his  family-of-slaves  from  every  side. — The  enemy 
brought-together  all  (their)  ships  into  one  place. — The  Romans 
easily  broke-through  the  line-of-battle  of  the  iEduans. — Caesar 
finished  the  great  war  in-mid-summer  (418,  d)  which  he  had 
begun  in-the-spring  (118,  II.,  c). 

o 


158 


PERFECT-STEM,  THIRD  CONJUGATION* 


LESSON  LXVIII. 
Perfect-stem Third  Conjugation^  concluded. 

(421.)  Class  VI. — Perfect-stem  =  simple  Verb-stem, 

{a)  Stems  ending  in  u  or  v  (list,  666,  VI.,  a). 

To  sharpen,  acu-6re,  icu-T,  acu-tum. 

To  roll,  volv-Sre,  volv-i,  volu-tum. 

(6)  Consonant-Stems  (list,  666,  VI.,  b). 

To  turii,  vert-erS,  vert-i,  ver-sam. 

(c)  Compounds  of  can  do  and  fendo  {ohs.)  belong  here; 
I-  g'. 

To  burn,  incend-6rg,  incend-i,  incen-sum. 

To  defend,  ward  off,       defend-6re,  '  defend-i,  defen-sum. 

EXERCISE. 

(422.)   Vocabulary. 


The  back,  tergum,  I. 

To  flow  together,  conflu6re  (conflux-, 
conflux-,  con+flu6re,  401,  2). 

Discipline,  disciplina,  se. 

Austerity,  severity,  severitas,  (seve- 
ritat)  IS  (293). 

To  dissolve,  dissolvSrS  (solv-,  s6lut-, 
dis+solvere). 

To  return,  revertSre  (rSvert-,  ro- 
vers-, re-|-vertere). 

(423.)  Examples. 
(a)   The  general  appointed 

a  day  for  the  council. 
(6)    What  {number  of)  long 

ships  he  had. 
(c)   To  divide  or  distribute 

among. 


To  appoint,  to  station,  to  determine, 

constituerS  (stitu-,  stitut-,  con-f  st4- 

taere). 
To  divide,  to  distribute,  distribuSrS 

(bu-,  but-,  dis+tribuere). 
Desirous,  covetous,  cupidus,  &,  um 

(governs  genitive). 
To  knoro,  learn,  cognosc6r§  (cognoY-, 

cognit-,  con-f  noscSrS). 
To  turn,  vert^re  (421,  b). 

Imperator     diera     concilio 

(dat.)  constituit. 
Quidquid  navium(180)lon- 

garum  habebat. 
Distribuere  (with  ace.  of 

things  and  dat.  oi person). 


(424.)    Translate  into  English. 

Hostes  terga  verterunt. — Divitise  (57,  R.)  quae  ad  Romam 
confluxerunt,  morum  disciplinam  seveiitatemque  dissol- 
verunt — Caesar  diem  cum  legatis  constituit. — Dies,  quam 
CfBsar   constitnerat   cum  leg§tis,  venit,  et  l^gati   ad  eum 


PERFECT-STEM,  FOURTH  CONJUGATION.  159 

(150)  rSverterunt.— Milites  sese  (145,  c)  fortiter  (215,  2) 
defend erunt. — Hostes  copias  suets  in  tres  partes  distribu- 
erant. — Caesar,  quidqtiid  navium  longarum  habebat,  legatis 
praefectisquiB  (423,  c)  distribuit. — Procellae  fluctus  vastos  ad 
littora  volverant. — Csesar  exercitum  flumen  (113,  II.,  a) 
transducere  constituit.— Caesar  Dumnorigem  ^duum  se- 
cum  (125,  II.,  b)  ducere  constituit,  quod  (conj.)  eum  cupi- 
dura  imperii  (synt.,  698,  b,  1)  cognoverat. — ^dui  ex  itin^re 
domum  (113,  III.,  R.)  reverterunt. 

(425.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  soldiers  defended  the  city  very  bravely  (376). — The 
general  stationed  the  foot-soldiers  near  (ad,  408,  c)  the  wall  of 
the  town. — On-the-next-day  (118,  II.,  c)  Caesar  stationed  all 
the  horse-soldiers  in-front-of  (p  r  o)  the  camp. — ^The  chiefs  of 
the  states  returned  to  Caesar.— The  day  which  Ceesar  had  ap- 
pointed for  the  council  came,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  states  re- 
turned to  him. — Our  (men)  turned  their  backs. — The  riches 
of  the  Romans  had  dissolved  (their)  discipline  and  austerity  of 
manners. — What  money  (423,  b)  he  had  he  distributed  among 
(423,  c)  the  lieutenants  and.  soldiers. — The  ^Eduans  divided 
their  forces  into  two  parts — The  tempests  rolled  vast  waves  to 
the  stars. — The  general  determined  to  take  (ducere)  the 
lieutenant  with  him. — The  seas  were  rolling  great  waves  to 
the  shores. 


LESSON  LXIX. 
Perfect-stem. — Fourth  Conjugation. 
(426.)  The  perfect-stem  in  \\\q  fourth  conjugation 
IS  formed  mfive  ways. 

I.  By  adding  iv  to  verb-stem  ;  a u d -ire,  a  u  d - i  v -. 

II.  "  u  "  aper-irS,        aper-fl-. 

III.  "  s  "  sep-ire,  sep-s-. 

IV.  lengthening  stem-vowel ;  v  6  n  -ir6,  v  g  n  -. 

V.         taking  simple  verb-stem ;  c  o  m  p  $  r  -irS,  c  o  m  p  6  r - 


160 


PERFECT-STEM,  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


(427.)  On  this  table,  observe  that  Class 

I.  contains  most  of  the  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugatioc. 

[Numerous  examples  have  already  occurred.  -Any  peculiar  supines 

are  given  in  the  vocabularies.] 
II.  contains  jfottr  simple  verbs  (see  list,  667,  II.). 

Infinitive.  Perfect  SupinA 

To  open,  uncover,   aper-ire,  apSr-u-J,  aper-tum. 

To  leap,  sal-Ire,  sSl-u-I,  sal-tum. 

III.  contains  nine  simple  verbs  (see  list,  667,  III.). 
To  bind, 
To  think,  sent-Ire 

IV.  contains  but  one  verb.  ■ 

InfinitiTe.  Perfect 

To  come,  ,    ven-ire,  ven-i, 

V.  contains  two  verbs. 

Infinitive.  Perfect 

To  ascertain,  find,  comper-ir6,    comper-i. 
To  discover,  rep6r-ire,       reper-i, 

EXERCISE. 


Infinitive. 

vinc-ire, 


Perfect  Supine. 

vinx-i  (vinc-s-i),    vinc-tum. 


sens-i  (sent-s-i), 


sen-sum 
(sent-sum). 


supine. 

ven-tum. 


Supine. 

comper-tum. 
r6per-tum. 


(428.)   Vocabulary, 

To  leap  down,  desflire  (desflu-  and 

desili-,  desult-,  de-|-salire). 
To  come  near,  to  approach,  apprS- 

pinqu&re   (jftd  +  propinquare,  av-, 

at-),  vfith  dat. 
To  agree,  cons  entire  (con+s  entire, 

427,  TIL). 
To  disagree,  dissentire  (dis+sentire, 

427,  III.). 
To  come  to,  reach,  arrive  -at,  perve- 

nire  (p6r+v6nire,  427,  IV.). 

Example. 

{a)  In  a  battle  of  cavalry,      ifiquestri  prselio. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  ablative  is  used  to  express  the  mau' 
ner  of  an  action,  especially  with  an  adjective. 

.  (423.)   Translate  into  English. 

Milites  ex  navibus  desili erunt  et  hostibus  (391.  2)  appro- 

pinquarunt  (349,  N.). — Oppidani  portas  apgruerunt,  et  se, 

atque  oppidum  CaBs&ri  dedenint. — Hostes  inter  se  dissensg- 

runt.  —  Omnes  cives    una  mente  (abl.,  428,  a)  consensS- 


J'o  come  together,  assemble,  conve- 
nire  (c6n+venire,  427,  IV.). 

To  find,  invSnire  O^n-f-venlre,  427, 
IV.). 

Thither,  to  that  place,  eo  {adv.). 

To  open,  aperire  (427,  II.). 

When,  quum. 

Youth,  juventus,  (jiiventut)  is  (f.). 

To  lay  waste,  populari,  dep.  (popu- 
lat-). 

After  that,  postquam  {adv.). 


PERFECT-STEM,  FOURTH  CONJUGATION.  161 

runt. — Helvgtii  jam  per  angustias  copias  suas  transdux^rant, 
et  in  iEduorum  fines  pervenerant,  eorumque  agros  popiila- 
bantui". — Caesar  cum  Labieno  Numantiam  (713)  pervenit, 
ibique  consules  invenit.  —  Quum  milites  eo  convene- 
runt,  naves  unum  in  locum  coegerunt. — Eo  postquam  Cse- 
8S,r  pervenit,  obsides  et  arma  poposcit. 

(430.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

After-that  the  townsmen  S9m  the  standards,  they  opened  the 
gates,  and  gave  themselves  (up)  to  Caesar. — The  Germans,  in  the 
cavalry  battle  (428,  a),  leaped-down  from  (their)  horses. — The 
general  led  the  army  through  the  straits,  and  on  the  seventh 
day  arrived  at  the  boundaries  of  the  Germans. — The  towns- 
men leaped-down  from  the  wall.  —  All  the  soldiers  agreed 
(with)  one  mind  and  voice  (vox). — When  Caesar  amved-at  the 
town,  the  townsmen  opened  the  gates. — ^When  the  general 
reached  Numantia,  he  called  together  the  citizens. — When  the 
horsemen  reached  the  town,  the  townsmen  opened  the  gates. 
— The  lieutenant  led-back  the  soldiers  to  the  town,  and  there 
found  the  general. 

02 


§8. 

FORMS   OF    TENSES    FOR    COMPLETED   AC- 
TION,  PASSIVE.      , 


LESSON  LXX. 

Tenses   of  Verbs  for   Completed  Action. — Indicative 
Passive. 

(43L)  The  tenses  for  completed  action,  passive 
(perfect,  pluperfect,  future  perfect),  are  compounded 
of  the  perfect  participle  passive  and  of  the  tenses  of 
the  verb  esse,  to  be:  thus,  amatiis  sum,  I  have  been 
loved;  amatus  es,  thou  hast  been  loved,  &c. 

(432.)  (a)  The  perfect  participle  of  any  verb  is  the  form  of 
which  the  supine  is  the  accusative,  and  is  inflected  (like  an  ad- 
jective of  three  terminations)  with  the  endings  us,  a,  iim; 
thus  : 


^    Supines. 

Amat-iim, 

Perf.  Part. 

amat-us,  a,  um, 

loved. 

M6nit-um, 

monit-iis,  a,  iim, 

advised. 

Rect-um. 

rect-iis,  a,  um, 

ruled. 

Audit-iim, 

audit- lis,  a,  iim. 

heard. 

(b)  The  perfect  participle,  then,  of  any  verb,  is  formed  by 
adding  the  inflection-endings  iis,  &,  6m  to  the  supine-stem. 


Perfect  forms,  passive. 


163 


(433.) 

PARADIGM. 

PERFECT   PASSIVE.                                                                          | 

C 

amatiis,  a,  urn,  j 

Singular. 

sum,  /  have  heen^  loved. 
6s,  thou  hast  been  loved. 
est,  he,  she,  it,  has  been  loved.                           | 

amati,  OB,  a,      5 

Plural. 

sumus,  we  have  been  loved. 
estis,  ye  or  you  have  been  loved. 
smit,  they  have  been  loved. 

PLUPEIIFECT.                        >                                                        (1 

Smatus,  a,  urn,  5 

Singular. 

6ram,  I  had  been  loved. 
eras,  thou  hadst  been  loved. 
grat,  he,  she,  it,  had  been  loved. 

amati,  oe,  a,      5 

Plural. 

eramus,  we  had  been  loved. 
Gratis,  ye  or  you  had  been  loved. 
grant,  they  had  been  loved. 

i                                                                              FUTURE    PERFECT.                                                                               j| 

amatus,  a,  urn,  < 

Singular. 

ero,  /  shall  have  been  loved. 
6rTs,  tho7i  wilt  have  been  loved. 
erit,  he,  she,  it,  will  have  been  loved. 

amati,  se,  a,      < 

Plural.                            ^ 

erimiis,  we  shall  have  been  loved. 
eritis,  you  will  have  been  loved. 
grunt,  they  will  have  been  loved. 

(434.)    Vocabulary. 

To  rout,  to  d^eat,  pellgre  (p6pul-, 

puis-,  411,  b). 
To  divulge,  enuntiare  (e+nuntiare, 

av-,  at-). 
Sure,  certain,  certus,  a,  um. 
To    drive    back,   rgpellgre    (rgpul-, 

repuls-,  rg-|-pellere). 
Private  information,  indicium,  i. 

(435.)  Examples, 
{a)   To  inform  any  one. 


(6)  Ccesar  was  informed* 


(c)  All  Gaul  is  divided  into 
three  parts. 


Beginning,  Tnitium,  i. 

Casticus,  Casticus,  i. 

Conference,  colloquium,  T. 

To  hold,  obtinerg  (obtinu-,  obtent-, 

ob+tenere). 
Departure,  discessiis,  us. 
Nobility,  nobilrtas,  (nobffitat)  ts  (f., 

293). 


Aliqugm  certi6r6m  fa- 

c  6  r  e  ( =  to  make  any  one 

more  certain). 
Caesar     certior    factus 

est    ( =  Ceesar    was    made 

more  certain). 
Gallia  estomnisdivlsa 

in  partes  tr6s. 


164  PERFECT  FORMS,  PASSIVE. 

The  perfect  passive  participle  i&  sometimes  used  with  est  as  an  ad- 
jective, and  is  then  to  be  rendered  as  a  present  tense;  e.  g.,  in  [c),  est 
d  i  V  i  s  a  =  is  divided. 

(436.)   Translate  into  English. 

Miles  vulueratns  est. — Bella  gesta  erant. — Exercitus  Cassii 
ab  Helvgtiis  pulsus  erat,  et  sub  jugum  missus  ei^at. — Ea 
res  Helvetiis  (54)  per  indicium  enuntiata  est. — Helvetii  de 
Caesaris  adventu  certiores  facti  sunt. — tjhi  de  Csesaris  ad- 
ventu  Helvetii  certiores  facti  sunt,  legates  ad  eum  miserunt. 
— Barbari  telis  (93,  II.,  h,  R.)  et  munitione  repulsi  sunt. — 
initium  fugse  a  Dumnorige  et  ejus  equitibus  factum  est. — 
Legati  a  Divitiaco,  iEduo  (225,  a)  ad  Caesarem  mis  si  erant. 
— Pater  Castici'regnum  in  Sequanis  multos  annos  (191,  Rule) 
obtinuerat  eta  s^natu  populi  Romani  amicus  (80,  a)  appella- 
tus  erat. — Dies  coUoquio  (54)  constitutus  est,  ex  eo  die 
quintus. 

(437.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  centurions  of  the  first  ranks  were  wounded  on  the  same 
day  (118,  II.,  c).— Cassar  was  informed  (435,  a)  of  (de)  the 
approach  of  the  enemy.— The  general  had  been  informed  of 
the  departure  (d  i  s  c  e  s  s  u  s)  of  the  Germans. — The  beginning 
of  the  flight  had  been  made  by  the  soldiers  of  the  tenth  legion. 
— The  tenth  legion  had  been  defeated  by  the  Germans,  and  had 
been  sent  under  the  yoke. — The  conspiracy  of  the  nobility  was 
divulged  to  the  Helvetians  through  private-information. — The 
war  had  been  camed-on  (for)  many  years  (191,  Rule). — The 
enemy  were  driven-back  by  the  darts  of  the  soldiers. — Ambas- 
sadors were  sent  by  Cassius  the  consul  (225,  a)  to  the  chiefs. 
— The  ^duans  were  called  friends  (80,  a)  by  the  senate  of  the 
Roman  people. — The  townsmen  were  wounded  by  the  darts 
of  the  soldiers. — The  horsemen  of  the  enemy  were  driven-back 
by  the  darts  of  the  soldiers. — ^A  day  had  been  appointed  for  the 
conference. 


§9. 

PARTICIPLES.     (LXXL— LXXV.)     ' 

(438.)  The  Participle  presents  the  idea  of  the  verb 
under  the  form  of  an  adjective  :  {a)  the  rising  sun  ; 
(6)  I  saw  the  boy  writing  a  letter.  Sometimes,  as 
in  (a),  its  use  is  wholly  adjective  ;  again,  as  in  (6),  it 
governs  the  case  of  its  verb.  There  are  two  active 
participles  in  Latin,  the  participle  of  the  present  and 
the  participle  of  i\i&  future  ;  two  passive,  the  pe?'fect 
and  the  verbal  in  dus. 


LESSON  LXXL 

Present  Participle  Active. 

(439.)  {a)  The  endings  of  the  present  participle  active  for 

the  four  conjugations  are, 

1.  2.  3.  4. 

-aijs,  -ens,  ens,  -iens. 

(b)  By  adding  these  endings  to  the  stems  respectively  of  the 
verbs  am-are,  mon-ere,  reg-6re,  aud-ire,  we  obtain  the 
present  participle  active  : 

Lovingj  advising,  ruling,  hearing. 

Am-ans,      mon-ens,      rSg-ens,      aud-iens. 
(440.)  The  present  participle  is  declined  like  an  adjective  of 
the  third  class  (108). 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  V.  Amans.  N.  V.  Amantes,  amantia. 

Gen.     Amantis.  Gen.     Araantiiim. 

Dat.      Amanti,  &c.  Dat.      Amantibus,  &c. 

Rem.  The  abl.  sing,  ending  is  i  when  the  part,  is  used  strictly  as  aa 
adj. ;  e.  g.,  in  florenti  TOB&,  in  a  hloominf(  rose. 


166 


PRESENT  PARTICIPLE  ACTIVE. 


(a)  Observe  cai-efully  that  the  Latin  present  paiticiple  ac- 
tive expresses  incomplete  or  continued  action ;  the  language  has 
no  active  participle  to  express  complete  action.  We  cannot 
translate  the  English  having  loved  by  any  Latin  active  parti- 
ciple. 

(&)  But  deponent  verbs  (206)  have  both  participles,  the  pres- 
ent and  the  perfect ;  exJwrting,  h  o  r  t  -  a  u  s  ;  having  exhorted^ 
hort-atiis. 


EXERCISE. 


(44  L)   Vocabulary, 


It-, 


To  rise,  6rM  {dep.,  ort-). 
To  desire,  cup6r6  (id-,  iv- 
in.,  h). 

Labour,   toil,  labor,  (labor)  is   (m., 

319). 
Watching,  watchfulness,  vigllantiS, 

86. 

Especially,  proesertim  (adv.). 

To  depart,  discedSrS  (dis+cedere, 

401,  3,  b). 
To  weep,  flerg  (flev-,  flet-,  395,  II.). 
To  look  upon  or  at,  intueri  (dep.). 
All,  the  whole,  cunctus,  a,  um. 
To  worship,  adore,  adorare. 
Eye,  oculus,  i. 


A  Persian,  PersS,  se. 

To  doubt,  dubitare  (av-,  at-). 

To  set  out,  pr6f  icisci  {dep.,  profect-). 

To  sit,  B&dere  (sed-,  sess-,  394,  Y.).  , 

Firmament,  heaven,  caelum,  i. 

To  shine,  micare  (389,  E^*). 

The  sun,  sol,  (sol)  is  (m.,  319). 

F^dl,  plenus,  8,  tim  (with  gen.). 

To  be  wanting,  de-ess6  (vi^ith  dat.). 

Star,  Stella,  se. 

To  set  {e.  g.,  as  the  heavenly  bod- 
ies), occid6re  (occid-,  occas-,  ob+ 
cad6rS). 

To  throw  before,  projTcerg  (jeo, 
ject-,  pro+jacere). 

(442.)  (<z)  RecoUect  that,  to  form  pres.  part,  act.,  you  add  to  the  stem 
ans  in  1st  conj. ;  e.  g.,  am-ans :  ens  in  2d  and  3d  conjs. ;  e.  g., 
mon-ens,  dlc-ens  :  i  e  n  s  in  4th  conj. ;  e.  g.,  aud-iens.  Also,  add 
iens  in  the  id  verbs  (199)  of  3d  conj.;  e.  g.,  ciip-io,  cup-iens; 
fic-io,  fac-iens. 
(jb)  In  deponent  verbs,  the  same  rules  apply:  hort-§,ri,  hort-ans: 
fir-iri,  6r-iens;  intu-eri,  intu-ens,  &c.  The  perf  act.  part 
in  deponents  adds  us,  a,  ura  to  the  supine-stem:  hort-ari, 
hortat-us,  &c. 
(c)  The  participle  is  used  to  abridge  discourse. 

(1)  He  heard  me  when  Ij  He  heard  me  saying  that, 
said  that=  (  Me  id  die  en  tern  audivit. 

(2)  God,  who  governs  all  (  God,  governing  all  thinga. 
things=  (  Deus,  omnia  gubernans. 

^.  _    , .      ,    ,  ,    .         (  (The  man)  desiring. 

(3)  To  him  that  destres=  <  V,  -    -      /- 

(  Cupienti. 


PEESENT  PARTICIPLE  ACTIVE.  167 


/  Tx    TT     ^1,  1  •       ir     .  (  -^^^  threw  himself  before  Ccesar,  at 

(d)  He   threw  himself  at  l       ,  .    .  "^      -^ 

Caesar's  feet,  )  o- n  -vj     -j-        ^ 

\  Se  Gossan  Sd  pedes  projccit. 

(e)  Can  enim,  vero,  or  autem  stand  first  in  a  clause  or  sen- 
tence ?     (No.) 

(443.)   Translate  into  English. 

Me  id  d i c e n t e m  aiidi\istine  ?  —  Persae  solem  6rien- 
tem  (442,  c)  adorant. — Labienus,  suos  {his  men)  hortatus, 
cupientibus  signum  dat. — Non  enim  labor  aut  vigiJantia, 
cupienti  praesertim  aliquid  (178,  5),  Cassio  deerat  (267,  b). 
•^Caesar  ab  hibemis  in  Italiam  discedens,  legates  convocat. 
— Mulieres  flentes  sese  Caesai-i  (442,  d)  ad  pedes  projece- 
nint. — Nemo,  cunctam  i  n  t  u  e  n  s  terram,  de  divina  providen- 
tia  diibltabit.  —  Caesar,  in  Italiam  pro  f i  c  i  s  €  e  n  s,  legates 
omnes  ad  se  revocavit.  —  Divitiacus,  flens,  a  Caesare  haec 
{these  things)  petebat.^^ — Cicero  Cat5nera  vidit  in  horto  s6- 
dentem.  —  Quanta,  (184,  R.  1)  est  s^pientia  Dei,  omm& 
gubernantis  ? 

(444.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

[The  words  which  illustrate  the  lesson  are  in  Italic] 
The  firmament  is  full  of  shining  (438,  a)  stars. — No  one, 
when  he  looks  at  (  =  looking,  442,  c,  1)  the  firmament  and  stars, 
will  doubt  respecting  (d  e)  the  wisdom  of  God. — Did  they  hear 
me  (135,  II.,  a)  when  I  said  (  =  saying)  that  (id)  ? — The  bar- 
bai'ians  were-worshipping  the  setting  sun. — Labienus,  having 
exhorted  (440,  h)  his  men,  made  an  attack  upon  the  enemy 
(in  hostes). — Caesar  willingly  gave  the  signal  to  the  soldiers 
when  they  desired  it  {  =  desiring). — To  him  that  desires  { =  de- 
siring) anything,  no  labour  will-be-wanting  (267,  h). — Caesar, 
departing  from  winter-quarters,  gives  rewards  to  the  soldiers. 
— The  eye,  not  seeing  itself  (se,  ace.),  sees  other-things 
(alia). — The  ^duans,  weeping,  threw  themselves  at  the  feet 
of  Caesar  (442,  d). — I  saw  my  brother  sitting  in  the  garden 
yesterday.  —  How-great  is  the  power  of  God,  who  governs 
(  =  governing)  the  world  ? 


168  PARTICIPLE  FUTURE  ACTIVE. 

LESSON  LXXII. 

Participle  Future  Active. 

(445.)  The  ending  of  the  future  participle  active  is 

u  i  u  s,  which,  added  to  the  supine-stem,  forms  the 

pai'-iple;  e.g., 

Ahonit  ^  love,        or    one  who  will  love,       S,mat-urus. 

Abou    i  ^dvise,    or    one  who  will  advise,   monit-uriis. 

(446.)  PERIPHRASTIC   CONJUGATION 

The  different  tenses  of  e  s  s  e  (to  &e),  joined  with  the  participle 
future  active,  form  what  is  called  the  periphrastic  conjugation^ 

C  amaturiis  sum,  I  will  love,  am  about  to  love,  intend  to  love. 
Pres.  \  amaturus  6s,  thou,  »      &c.,  &c. 

(      So  through  all  the  persons. 

C  amaturus  Sram,  /  was  about  to  love,  intended  to  love,  &c 
Past.  \  ^Unatiirus  6ras,  thou,  &,c.,  &c 

(_      So  through  all  the  persons. 

C  amaturus  6ro,  I  shall  be  about  to  love,  shall  be  on  the  point  aflov- 

Fut.  \         *^^'  ^^' 

j  Smaturus  eris,  thou,  &c.,  &C. 

t     So  through  all  the  persons. 

EXERCISE. 

(447.)   Vocabulary. 

To  call  upon,  inv6care  (in+vocare, 

av-,  at-). 
To  collect  into  a  jhoch,  congregare 

(av-,  at-). 
Foreign,  alienus,  a,  um. 
To  'procure,  compSrare  (av-,  at-,  con 

4-parare). 
To  last,  durare  (durav,  durat).* 
To  implore,  implorare   (in+plorare, 

av-,  at-). 


Alone,  solus,  ft,  iim  (194,  1). 

To  cross  over,  trajTcere  (traj§c-,  trft- 
ject-,  trans+jacere).t 

Ammon,  a  surname  of  Jupiter,  Ham< 
mon,  IS. 

To  behold,  spectare  (av-,  at). 

To  proceed,  pergSre  (perrex-,  per- 
rect-). 

To  consult,  consiilSre  (consulu-,  con- 
sult-). 


(448.)  Example. 

The  Athenians  sent  amhas-  j  Athenienses  legates  miserunt, 
sadors  to  consult  the  oracle.  \      oraculum  consulturos. 

*  Durare,  transitive,  =  to  harden;  intrans.,  =  to  become  hard,  i.  e.,  to 
last. 
t  Transjtcere,  transit,  =  to  convey  over ;  intrans.,  =  to  crost  over. 


PARTICIPLE  FUTURE  ACTIVE.  169 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  future  active  participle  is  used  after 
a  verb  of  motion  to  express  the  design  of  that  motion. 

(449.)   Translate  into  English, 

1.  Aves,  in  alienas  terras  migraturaB,  congregantur.— 
Caesar,  in  Galliam  profecturus,  centiiriones  convocat. — 
Germani,  bellum  gesturi,  Deos  invocaverunt.  —  Sapiens 
bona  (  neu(,  pi.)  comparat  semper  d  ti  r  a  t  u  r  S,. 

2.  Periphrastic  Conjugation  — Cgesar  de  quaita  vigilia  castra 
moturus  es t. — S  cripturuf?  sum.— Dumnorix  inlpgrium 
suse  civitatis  o  b  t  e  n  t  u  r  u  s  e. r  a  t.  —  ImpSrator,  cum  sola 
ddcima  legione  pr6fecturus  erat.  —  iEdui  auxilium  a 
populo  Romano  imploraturi  s u n t.  —  Germani  bellum 
gesturierant. 

3.  Future  Participle  ttsedto  express  a  purpose  (448). — Scipio 
in  Africam  trajecit,  Carthaginem  d  e  1  e  t  u  r  u  s. — Ingens  h6m- 
inura  multitudo  in  urbem  congregatur,  ludos  spectatur ft, — 
Alexander  in  Asiam  contendit,  regnum  Persarum  occiipa- 
turus. — Alexander  ad  Jovem  Hammonem  pergit,  consul- 
t  u  r  u  s  de  origine  sua. 

(450.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  The  soldiers,  when-cmout-to-set-out  for  (in)  Spain,  called- 
upon  the  gods.  —  Many  (men)  have  procured  possessions 
(bona)  which-will-not-last  (  =  not  about- to-last). — The  gen- 
eral, when-about-to-cross  the  river,  sends-away  the  horse-sol- 
diers.— Caesar,  intending-to-send  a  messenger,  calls  together 
the  centurions. 

3.  Periphrastic  Conjugation. — Dumnorix  vras  ahout-to-seiz€- 
wpon  the  royal-power. — The  genev^  \s  ahout-to-set-out  iram  the 
camp  with  five  legions.. — The  JEduans  are  ahout-to-carry-on  a 
fierce  war. — The  hostages  were  intending-to-implore  aid  from 
the  general. 

3.  Future  Participle  to  express  a  purpose. — The  ^duans 
sent  ambassadors  to-implore  help  from  Caesar. — The  enemy 
crossed  the  river  in-order-to-hesiege  the  town. — The  men  flock 
(congregor)  from-every-side  to  the  town,  to-behold  the 
games. 

P 


170 


PERFECT  PARTICIPLE  PASSIVE. 


LESSON  LXXIII. 

Perfect  Participle  Passive. 
(451.)  («)  The  perfect  passive  pai-ticiple  is  formed  (as  stated 
432,  h)  by  adding  the  adjective-endings  us,  a,  um  to  the  su- 
pine-stem ;  e.  g., 


Inf. 

Smarg, 


Supine-stem. 

aoaat-, 


Perf.  Part. 

&m&t-us,  &,  nm, 


loved,  or  having  been  loved. 
C  conquered,    or   having   been 
vinc6r6,     vict-,  • ,    vict-us,  «,  um,    J      conquered. 

{h)  It  is  declined  throughout  like  an  adjective  of  the  first 
class  (76),  and  must  agree  with  the  substantive  in  gender,  num- 
ber^ und  case  ;  e.  g.,  puer  laudatus,  puella  1  a u d a t S,. 

(c)  The  deponent  verbs  use  the  perfect  participle  form  ac- 
tively  ;  e.  g.,  h  o  r  t  a  t  u  s,  having  exhorted. 

EXERCISE. 


(452.)   Vocabulary/. 

Sudden,  rfipentTnus,  a,  um. 
To  alarm,  perturbare  (5v-,  at-). 
To  seize,  snatch  up,  arriperg  (arrip- 

io,  arripu-,  arrept-,  ad-|-rap6r6). 
Auxiliaries,  auxilii,  orum.* 
To  put-to-Jlight,  discomfit,  f  iigare. 
To  drive-on  or  together,  compellere 

(compul-,  compuls-,  con+pellere). 
To  induce,   adducere   (dux-,  duct-, 

ad+duc6r6). 
Influence,  auctoritas,  (auctoritat)  is. 
To  prevail  upon,  permSverS  (mov-, 

mot-,  per-|-m6ver6,  i.  e.,  to  move 

thoroughly/). 

(453.)  Examples. 


I  A  wagon,  carrtis,  I. 
To  buy  up,  co6m6r6   (em-,  empt-, 

con-f6m6re). 
Aristides,  Aristldes  (Aristid)  is. 
Pharsalus,  Pharsalus,  i  (f.,  25>  a). 
To  depart-out-of,  excgderS  (excess-, 

excess-,  ex-fced6re). 
Rlietoric,  rhetoric^,  se. 
To   expel,    expell6re    (expul-,    ex- 

puls-). 
To  stimulate,  induoSrS  (dux-,  duo^). 
Strong-desire,    cupiditas,     (tSt)    Is 

(293). 


(a)  At  Corinth,  CorinthT. 

At  Rome.  R  o  m  se. 

At  Carthage.  ,   CarthaglnS. 

At  Athens.  Athenis. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  place  where  is  put  in  the  ablative 


Auxiliumin  sing.  =  aid,  assistance  :  in  plvr.  =  auxiliary  troops. 


PERFECT  PARTICIPLE  PASSIVE. 


171 


if  the  name  be  of  the  third  declension  or  plural  number; 
otherwise  in  the  genitive. 


(b)   From  Rome. 
Froyn  Carthage. 


Roma. 
CarthaginS. 
Rule  of  Syntax. — The  plac6  whence  is  put  in  the  ablative* 
tc)   To  Rome.  R6nii§,m. 

To  Athens.  Athenas. 

Rule  of  Syntax. —The  place  whither  is  put  in  the  accusa- 
tive if  rt  be  a  town  or  small  island. 
Rem.  With  the  names  of  countries  or  large  islands,  the  prep,  in  or 
a d  is  employ ed :  to  Italz^,  in  lta.\ia,Th;  to  Egi/pt,  a.dMgy]?txiia. 


{d)  The  soldiers,  having  been 
defeated,  took  to  flight. 
(Lat.  The  soldiers,  defeat- 
ed, threw  themselves  into 
flight.) 

{e)  The  chief,  when  he  was 
expelled  from  his  country, 
fled  to  Rome. 

(/)  As  large  a  number  as 
possible. 

(g)  A  sudden  occurrence. 


Milites,  pulsi,  in  fugam  se 
conjecerunt. 


Princeps,  patria  expulsiis, 
Romam  fugit. 

Quam  maximus    niimfir- 

US. 

RSpentina  res. 


(454.)   Translate  into  English. 

Nostri  {our  men),  repentina  re  (55,  a)  perturb ati,  armi 
arripiunt. — Auxilia  perturbat^,  in  fugam  se  conjecerunt. — 
Milites  hostes  f  ii  g  at o  s  in  flumen  compulerunt. — Helv6tii,  his 
rebus  adducti,  legates  ad  Caesarem  de  deditione  mittunt. — 
Galli,  his  rebus  adducti,  et  auctoritatS  Orgetorigis  per- 
moti,  jumentorum  et  carrorum  quam  maximum  numfirum 
coemerunt. — Principes,  adventu  Romanorum  permoti,  lega- 
tes ad  Caesarem  de  deditione  mittunt. — Aristides,  patria  ex- 
pulsus,  LacSdaemonem  fugit. — Dionysius,  Sj/^ractisis  e  x  p  u  1- 
8  u  s,  Corinthi  pueros  docebat.— Principes,  oppido  e  x  p  u  1  s  I, 
Romam  (453,  c)  venerunt. — Legatus,  repentina  re  pertur- 
b  a  t  u  s,  centiiriones  convocat. 

(455.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  Helvetians,  prevailed  upon  by  the  influence  of  Caesar, 
led  (their)  army  across  the  Rhine. — The  chiefs,  induced  by 


172  ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 

these  coD'Siderations  (=  things),  give  hostages  and  an  immense 
sum-of-money  to  the  lieutenant. — Poinpey,  ivhen  he  had  hec-n 
defeated  {■=  defeated,  453,  d)  at  Pharsalus,  fled  to  Alexandria 
— Jugurtha,  when  he  was  expelled  from  Africa,  canie  to  liome 
— The  soldiers,  alarmed  by  the  sudden  occurrence  (453,  g) 
take  to  flight  (453,  d). — For  (enira)  Pompey,  although-he-had- 
been-defeated  (=  defeated)  (in)  no  (nulio)  battle,  departed-out- 
of  Italy.  —  Our  (men)  drove  on  tha  alarmed  and  discomfited 
enemy  into  the  River  Rhine. — The  Helvetians,  induced  by 
these  considerations  (=  things),  bought-up  as  large  a  number  as 
possible  (453,/)  of  horses  and  beasts-of-burden. — The  orator, 
havirig-been-expelledfrom  Athens,  taught  rhetoric  at  Carthage 
(453,  a,  R.). — The  general,  induced  by  these  considerations, 
gave  great  rewards  to  the  soldiers. — Orgetorix,  stimulated  by  a 
strong-desire  of  royal-power,  made  a  conspiracy  of  the  nobility. 


LESSON  LXXIV. 
Participles. — Ablative  Absolute. 

[The  ablative  absolute  is  a  very  important  part  of  Latin  construction, 
and  should  be  thoroughly  learned.] 

(456.)  The  participle  is  used  in  the  ablative  with  a 
noun,  when  it  is  independent  of  the  subject  and  object 
of  the  sentence. 


(a)  When  Tarquin  was 
reigning,  Pythagoras 
came  into  Italy. 


Pythagoras,  Tarquinio 
regnant e,  in  Itaiiara  ve- 
nit. 


Here  Tarquin  is  independent  of  Pythagoras,  the  subject  of  the  sen- 
tence. 

(457.)  The  want  of  a  perfect  active  participle  in 
Latin  is  frequently  supplied  by  the  ablative  absolute 
with  a  passive  participle. 

(b)  Labienus,  having  <<2-    Labienus,  mont6  occiipa- 
ken  possession  of  the  \      to,  nostros  expectabat. 
mountain,  was  waiting\ 
for  our  men.  I 


ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE.  173 

Here  it  v/ould  be  impossible  to  say  Labienus,  occupatas  inon- 
tem,  as  occupdtus  is  passive,  not  active. 

(458.)  A  noun  may  be  put  in  the  ablative  absolute 
with  another  noun  without  a  participle. 


(a)  In  the  preetorship  of  Cce- 
sar. 

(J)  In  the  consulship  of  Mar- 
cus Messala  and  Marcus 
Piso. 


Caesare  pr8et5r6  (=  Caesar 

being  praetor). 
M.  Messala  et  M.  Pisonfi 

Gonsiilibus  (=Messalaand 

Piso  heing  consuls). 


[This  construction  is  used  mostly  to  designate  the  time  of  an  event.] 
EXERCISE. 

(459.)   Vocabulary i 


To  avail,  vSlerS  (valii-). 

Tiberius,  Tiberius  (i). 

To  die,  moriri  and  morl  (mortu),  dep. 

A  pleading,  dictio,  (diction)  is  (333). 

Catiline,  Catillna,  se. 

Christ,  Christus,  i. 


To  Jinish,  perflcere  (per+facere, 
perf  ec-,  perfect-) ;  also,  conf  ic6re 
(fee-,  feet-). 

To  reign,  regnare  (ftv-,  at-). 

Night,  nox,  (noct)  is  (294). 

Territories,  fines  (pi.  of  finis,  300). 

(460.)    Translate  into  English, 

Nihil  praecepta  v^lent,  nisi  adjuvante  natura  (456,  a). — 
Deo  juvante,  facilis  est  labor. — Tiberio  regnante,  Chris- 
tus mortuus  est. — Concilio  dim  is  so,  principes  ad  Caesarem 
reverterunt. — Die  constituta  causae  dictionis,  Orgetorix  ad 
judicium  omnem  suam  familiam,  ad  hominum  millia  decern, 
undique  coegit. — Caesar,  opere  perfecto,  praesidia  disposuit. 
—Caesar,  host! bus  pulsis  (457,  &)  in  fines  jEduorum  perve- 
nit. — Caesar,  duo  bus  be  11  is  confectis,  in  hiberna  exercl- 
tura  duxit. — B  e  1 1 6  c  o  n  f e  c  1 6,  princip6s  civltatum  ad  Caesji- 
rem,  gratulatum  (379),  conven6runt.  — CMlinft,  CiceronS 
consuls  (458),  conjurationem  fecit. — Natura  ducS,  nun- 
quam  enrabimus.  —  Orgetorix,  Marco  Messala  et  Marc 5 
PisonS  consullbus,  conjurationem  n5bilitatis  fecit. 

(461.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Our  precepts  will  avail,  ivhen  nature  assists  {^=  nature  assist- 
ing).—  V/hen  the  sun  rises  (=  the  sun  rising),  the  night  flees. 
—  When  the  couficil  was  dismissed  (=the  council  being  dis- 
missed), the  chiefs  began  to  beseech  Caesar. —  When  the  coun- 
cil was  dismissed,  Caesar  called  the  lieutenants  to  himself. — 
P  2 


174  ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 

Caesar,  when  the  work  was  finished  {=^the  work  being  finished)^ 
fortified  the  towers. — Csssar,  having  defeated  Pompey  {r=Pom- 
pey  being  defeated),  returned  to  Rome. — Caesar,  having  finish- 
ed the  war,  led-back  his  army  into  the  territories  of  the  ^Edu- 
ans.^ — In  the  consulship  q/"  Cicero,  Catiline  was  expelled  from 
Rome. —  When  God  assists  (=  God  assisting),  it  is  not  difficult 
to  labour. — With  God  for  our  guide  (=  God  leader),  we  shall 
never  err. 


LESSON  LXXV. 

Ablative  Absolute^  continued, 

EXERCISE. 

(462.)    Vocabulary, 


Phalanx,  phalanx,  (phalang)  Is  (233^. 
'To  hinder,  prohibere  (Hbu-,  hiblt-. 

pro+habere). 
Cnasus  Pompey,  CncBus  Pompeius. 
Of  one's  own  accord,  ultro  (adv.). 
To  change,  commutare  (av-,  &t-) 
To  be  born,  nasci  (natus),  dep. 
Senate-house,  curia,  s3. 
Augustus,  Augustus,  L 


To  abstain  from,  abstmere  (absti- 

nu-,  abstent-,   abs+tener6),  with 

abl. 
A  plan,  purpose,  consflium,  i  (not 

concilium). 
To  harass,  lacessSre   (iv-,  it-,  406, 

III.,  b). 
From  higher  ground,  e  loco  supe- 

riorfi. 
A  dart,  pilum,  i. 

(463.)   Translate  into  English. 

L^bienus,  monte  occiipato,  nostros  expectabat,  praBlioque 
abstinebat. — Barbari,  consilio  coramutato,  nostros  lacessere 
coeperunt. — Milltes,  e  loco  siiperiore  pilis  missis,  facile  hos- 
tium  phalangem  p^rfregerunt  (416,  b). — Cognito  Caesaris  ad- 
ventu,  Ariovistus  legatos  ad  eum  mittit. — Cnceo  Pompeio 
et  Marco  Crasso  consiilibus,  German!  flumen  Rhenum 
transiverunt.— Nullo  hoste  prohibente,  Crassus  legionem 
in  Helve  ties  perduxit,  ibique  hiemavit. — His  rebus  cognitis, 
imperator  ipse  ad  exercitum  contendit. — Hac  audita  pugn a, 
magna  pars  Aquitaniae  obsides  ultro  misit. — Belgae,  omnibus 
vicis  oppidisque  incensis,  ad  castrS  Caes^ri.'^  couiond^- 
runt. — A XI gusto  regnant e,  Christus  natus  est. 


ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE.  176 

(464.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  barbarians,  having  clmnged  their  plan  ( =  plan  being 
changed),  made  an  attack  upon  our  men. — The  soldiers,  hav- 
ing-hroTcen-through  the  phalanx,  began  to  harass  the  enemy. — 
The  Belgians,  having  heard  of  this  battle,  sent  ambassadors  to 
Ccesar. — The  soldiers,  having  taken-possession-of  the  mountain^ 
easily  put  the  enemy  to  flight  (391,  3).-^Cicero,  when  he  knew 
of  the  conspiracy,  went  to  the  Senate-hpuse. — As  no  enemy 
hindered  {=no  enemy  hindering),  the  lieutenant  led  the  army 
across  the  Rhine. —  When  this  battle  was  heard  {of),  the  Bel- 
gians, of-their-own-accord,  sent  hostages  and  ambassadors  to 
Caesar. — In  the  consulship  of  Cicero  and  Antony,  Augustus 
was  bom.  ' 


§  10. 
INFINITIVE.— (LXXVI.—LXXIX.) 

LESSON   LXXVI. 

Infinitive  Forms. 
(465.)  The  infinitive  expresses  action  as  completed 
or  incomplete,  but  without  reference  to  person  or 
time ;  e.  g., 

ACTIVE. 

to  love,  or  to  be  loving,  loving^ 

am-  are. 
to  have  loved, 

a  m  a  V  -  i  s  s  6. 


Action  Incomplete, 
(Inf.  Pros.  Act.) 

Action  Completed, 
(Inf.  Perf.  Act.) 


Action  Incomplete, 
(Inf.  Pres.  Pass.) 

Action  Completed, 
(Inf.  Perf.  Pass.) 


PASSIVE. 

to  be  loved, 

S,  m  -  a  r  1. 
to  have  been  loved, 

amatiis,  a,  um,  esse  orfuisse. 

[Rem.  The  names  present  and  perfect  do  not  distinguish  properly  thft 
two  forms  of  the  infiiiitive,  but,  as  they  are  in  universal  use,  we 
have  to  adopt  them.  The  student  must  remember  that  the  present 
expresses  action  mcomplete,  and  the  perfect  action  complete ;  but 
that  the  time  of  tfie  action  must  depend  upon  the  verb  with  which 
the  infinitive  is  connected  in  the  sentence.] 

(466.) 


FORMS   OF   THE  INFINITIVE. 


i                   PRESENT. 

PERFECT.                                                          [j 

Active. 

Passive. 

A(  tive. 

Passive. 

1.  am-ar6. 

2.  mon-ere. 

3.  rdg-ere. 

4.  aad-ir6. 

am-ari. 
mon-eri. 

''^/-  - 
aud-iri. 

amav-^ 
audiv-J 

amatus,  &,  um,  "] 
auditiis,  a,  um,  j 

Rem.  Observe  that  petf.  inf.  act.  simply  adds  the  ending  -IssS  to 
the  perf. -stem  of  the  verb ;  and  perf.  inf.  pass,  is  formed  by  the 
peif.  pass.  part,  of  the  verb,  combined  with  ess6  (sometime* 
fuissS). 


INFINJTIVB. 


177 


EXERCISE. 


(467.)   Vocabulary. 

To  lay  waste,  vastare  (av-,  at-). 
Ought,  debere  (deba-,  debit-). 
To  be  vacant,  v&care  (intransit.). 
I  am  able,   possum ;   /  was   able, 
p6tui. 

(468.)  Examples. 

{a)  I  wish  to  learn. 
The  enemy  began   to  cross 
the  river. 


Peace,  pax,  (pac)  is  (293). 
A  very  feio,  perpauci,  39,  a. 
Evil  deed,  mal6f  icium,  i. 
To  break  through,  perrumpere  (per- 
rup-,  perrupt'). 


Cupio  discere. 
Hostes  flumen  transire  ccb 
perunt. 

Rule  of  Syntax. — The  infinitive  is  used,  as  in  English, 
to  complete  the  imperfect  ideas  expressed  by  many- 
words. 

1^^  Such  words  are,  to  wish,  to  be  able,  ought,  to  be  accustomed,  to 
Uasten,  to  determine,  &c. ;  also,  the  adjectives  diguus,  iudignus, 


audax,  &c. 


(h)  The  Helvetians  intend. 


Helvetiis  est  in  jlnimo  (=  it  is 
in  mind  to  the  Helvetians). 

Nonnunqu^m  i  n  t  e  r  d  i  u,  sae 
pius  noctu. 

Itinere  prohibere  (153,  a). 

In  conspectu. 


(c)  Sometimes  by  day,  often- 

er  by  night. 
{d)  To  keep-off-from  the  road. 
(e)  In  sight  of. 

(469.)   Translate  into  English. 

Caesar  in  Gallia  hi6mare  constituit. — iEdui  se  suaque  ab 
Helvetiis  defendSre  non  potuerunt.  —  Agri  vastari  non 
debent. — Hostes  per  munitiones  perrumpere  conati  sunt. 
— Agri  Suevorum  v  S,  c  a  r  e  dicuntur. — Milites  inc61as  expel- 
1 6  r  e  non  potuerunt.  —  Multitude  puerorum  muliSrumque 
f  u  g  e  r  e  coepit. — Helvetii  maximum  niimerum  jumentorum  et 
carroi-um  c  o  e  m  6  r  e  constituerunt.  —  Germani  copias  suas 
Rhenum  transducSre  conati  sunt. — Helvgtii  cum  proximis 
civitatibus  pacem  et  amicitiam  confirmare  constituerunt. 

(470.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

[Place  the  infinitive  before  the  verb  on  which  it  depends.] 
Our  towns  ought  not  to-be-taken-by-storm. — In  sight  of  our 
army,  the  fields  ought  not  to  be  laid-waste. — The  enemy  en- 
deavoured sometimes-during-the-day,  oftener  by-night,  to  burst- 


]78  ACgUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE. 

through  the  fortifications. — The  jEduans  were  not  able  to  expel 
the  enemy  from  (their)  territories  (153,  a).  On  one  side,*  the 
lands  are  said  to  be  vacant. — The  boys  and  the  women  began 
to  fly-in-every-directibn  (passim,  adv).— The  Helvetians  intend 
to  make  (their)  way  through  our  province. — A  very  few  are 
able  to  keep-off  the  Helvetians  from  the  road.^ — The  Helvetians 
ought  to  cross-over  without  any  (ullo)  evil-deed. — The  remain- 
ing multitude  of  boys  and  women  began  to  fly  in-every-direc- 
tion. 


LESSON  LXXVn. 

Accusative  with  Infinitive. 

(471.)  Verbs  signifying  to  know,  to  see,  to  feel,  to 
think,  to  say,  with  some  others,  have  frequently  a 
sentence  depending  on  them,  the  subject  of  which  is 
in  the  accusative,  and  the  verb  in  the  infinitive. 


He  saw  that  war  was  prepa- 
rins  on  all 


Undique  be  Hum  p^rari  vi- 
debat. 

Hete  bellum,  the  subject,  is  accusative  before  the  infinitive  parari, 
after  the  verb  videbat,  ^  saw. 

(472.)  Many  dependent  sentences  which  are  introduced  in 
English  by  the  conjunction  thaU  are  expressed  in  Latin  by  the 
accusative  and  infinitive.  To  translate  such  sentences  into 
Latin,  observe  the  following  method: 

1.  Omit  the  word  that. 

2.  Change  the  nominative  following  that  into  the  Latin 
accusative. 

3.  Change  the  English  verb  into  the  Latin  infinitive. 


Nuntius    dicit,    ^quites    tela 
conjic^re. 


The  messenger  says  that 
the  horsemen  are  hurling 
darts. 

(473.)  If  the  predicate  of  the  sentence  containing  the  accu- 
sative and  infinitive  be  an  adjective,  it  must  agree  with  the 
accusative  subject  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 


Unft  ex  parts. 


ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE. 


179 


He  knows  that  Cicero  is  elo- 
-%.     quent. 
I  perceive  that  the  water  is 
cold. 


Scit   Cicgronem    ess6   616- 

quentem. 
Sentio    &quam    frigldam 

esse. 


EXERCISE. 


(474.)    Vocabulary. 

To  think,  existlmare  (ftv-,  at-). 

To  encamp,  considfire  (conaed-,  con- 

sess-,  con+sidere). 
To  knmo,  scire  (sciv-,  scit-). 
Stone,  lapis,  (lapid)  is  (m.). 
Nearer,  prSpius  (adv.,  376). 

(475.)  Examples. 

{a)  The  messenger  says  that 
the  horsemen  ar e  hurl- 
in  g  darts. 

(6)  The  messenger  said  that 
the  horsemen  icere  hurl- 
ing darts. 

(c)  The  messenger  said  that 
the  horsemen  had  hurl- 
ed darts. 

id)  Word  is  brought  to  Cce- 
sar. 

(e)   To  have  ah  out  himself. 

(476.)   Translate  into  English. 

Helvetii  existimant,  Romanos  disced^ re. — Explorator 

dixit,  hostes  consediss  e. — Ceesar  scit,  Dumnorigem 

f&vere  HelvStiis. — Helvetii  dicunt,  se  omnem  sSna- 

tum  a  m  1  s  i  s  8  e. — Caesari  nuntiatum  est,  m  i  1 1 1  e  s  magnitu- 

diaem    sylvarum   timere.  —  Nuntius   dixit,    gquites    tela 

conjicfire. — Galba  certior  factus  est,  Gallos  omnes  dis- 

cessisse.  —  Exploratores    dicunt,    oppidum   ab   hostibus 

t  e  n  S  r  i. — Dum  ha;c  in  coUoquio  geruntm*,  CsBsari  nmitiatum 

est,  gquites  Ariovisti  propius  accedere,  et  lapides  telaque 

in  nostros  conjicere. 

[Be  careful,  in  translating  the  following  English  into  Latin,  to  write 
first  the  leading  sentence,  and  after  it  the  accusative  and  the  infin- 
itive, observing  the  rules  in  (472),  and  following  the  order  of  word* 
in  the  examples  given  above.] 


To  favour,  favere  (fiv-,  faut-,  395, 

v.),  (governs  dat.). 
While,  dum  (adv.). 
To  lose,  amittfire  (a+mittere,  401, 

3.  i). 


Nuntius    d  i  0  i  t    gquites    tSlS, 
conj  icfire. 

Nuntius    dixit    equites    t6l&' 
conjice  re. 

Nuntius    dixit    Equites    tel4 
conj  ecisse. 

Caesari  nuntiatum  est  {==it  is 

told  to  Ccesar). 
Circum  se  habere. 


180  ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFIIVITIVE. 

(477.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Caesar  knows  that  this  (thing)  is  true  (473).  —  The  scouts 
say  that  the  horsemen  of  Ariovistus  are  approaching  (475,  a;. 
— The  ambassadors  said  that  the  Helvetians  had  lost  all  their 
cavahy  and  all  their  senate. — Word  Avas  brought  to  Caesar 
that  the  horsemen  of  Ariovistus  loere  hurling  stones  against 
(in,  iciih  accus.)  our  (men). — Word-was-brought  to  Caesar 
that  Ariovistus  had-departed  from  the  camp. — rCsssar  was  in- 
formed by  the  scouts  that  the  enemy  had  encamped  under 
(s  ii  b,  with  all.)  the  mountain. — The  lieutenant  says  that  the 
mountain  is  held  by  the  enemy. — The  general  thinks  that  our 
plans  are  told  to  the  enemy. — Word  was  brought  to  the  gen- 
eral that  all  the  Gauls  had  departed  by  night. — The  chiefs  say 
that  Divitiacus  always  has  a  gi-eat  number  of  horse-soldiers 
about  himself. 


LESSON  LXXVIII. 
Accusative  with  Injinitim.— Perfect  Infinitive  Passive. 

(478.)  It  has  been  stated  (466,  R.)  that  the  perfect  infinitive 
passive  is  formed  by  the  perfect  participle  passive,  combined 
with  esse  (sometimes  fnisse). 

When  the  accusative  is  used  with  this  infinitive,  the  participle 
must  agree  with  the  accusative  in  gender,  number,  and  case  ; 


Nuntius  dicit,  iEduos  victoa 
esse. 


ia)  The  messenger  says  that 

the   JEduans    have    been 

conquered. 
(6)  Ariovistus  said  that  all 

the  forces  had  been  routed 

in  one  battle. 
(c)   The  horsemen  brought- 

back-word   that  the   town 

had  been  talcen-by-storm. 
^^'  Observe  that  in  (a)  the  part,  victos  agrees  with  the  accus.  iE  duos 
in  {b),  f u  s  a s  with  c 6 p i  a s  ;  in  (c),  expugnatum  with  o p p i d u m- 


Ariovistus  dixit,  o  m  n  e  s  c  6  - 
pias  uno  praelio  fu  saw 

'    esse. 

Equites  renuntiaverunt,  op- 
pidum       expugnatum 


ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE.  181 


EXERCISE 

(479.)    Vocabulary, 

To  find-out,  reperire  (427,  V.). 


To  frighten  complelely,  pertertere 
(perterru-,  pertemt-,  pei-  +  ter- 
rere). 

Tributary,  stlpendiarius,  a,  um. 

To  bring  back  word,  renuntiai'e  (av-, 
fit-). 


3'o  rout,  fundere  (fud-,  fus-,  416,  a) 
To  overco'me,  superare  (av-,  at-). 
Bond,  chain,  vinculum,  i. 
To  hold  in  memory,  to  rem,ember, 

memoria  tSnere. 
To  put  (or  cast)  in  chains,  in  viucu- 

la  conjicere. 


(480.)   Translate  into  English. 

Caesar  reperiebat  initium  fugae  a  Dumnorige  factum  esse. 
— Impgrator  dixit,  eqmtatum  esse  perterritu m. — Caesar 
mSmoria  t^nebat,  L.  Cassium  consuiem  occisum  esse  ab 
Helvetiis.  —  Ariovistus  dicit,  ^Eduos  slbi  (54),  stipendiaries 
esse  factos.  —  Caesar  certior  factus  est,  legates  in  vincula 
conjectos  esse.  — Equites  renuntiavenint,  castra-esse 
munita. — Dixit  bella  gesta  esse. — Reperiebat  etiam  Cae- 
sar, initium  fiigse  a  Dmnnorige  atque  ejus  equitibus  factum 
esse;  eoruraque  fuga  (55,  a)  reliquum  eqmtatum  perter- 
ritum  esse.  —  Ariovistus  dixit  omiies  Gallorum  copias  uno 
a  se   praelio  (55,  a),  fusas  ac  super atas  esse. 

(481.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Caesar  found-out  that  the  cavahy  had  been  completely-fright- 
ened by  the  flight  of  Dumnorix. — The  JEduans  say  that  they 
(s  e)  have  been  routed  by  the  Germans. — Caesar  remembered 
(—held  in  memory)  that  the  consul's  army  had  been  defeated 
by  the  Helvetians. — Caesar  remembered  that  the  consul  had 
been  slain,  and  his  (ejus)  army  sent  ujader  the  yoke  (323,  N.). 
— Caesar  was  informed  by  the  chiefs  that  hostages  had  been 
given. — The  lieutenant  said  that  the  ambassador  had  been  cast 
into  chains. — Ariovistus  said  that  all  the  forces  had  been  over- 
come by  himself. — Ariovistus  said  that  the  Gauls  had  been 
overcome  by  himself  in  one  battle. — The  JEduans  say  that  they 
(s  e)  have  been  made  tributary  to  Ariovistus  {dat.). 

Q 


182 


INFINITIVE  FUTURE. 


LESSON  LXXIX. 
Infinitive  Future  Active  and  Passive. 

(482.)  By  the  combination  of  the  future  participle 
active  with  esse  (or  fuisse),  an  infinitive  future 
active  is  formed  ;  e.  g., 

6  m  a  t  u  r  ii  s,  a,  u  m,  e  s  s  6,  to  he  about  to  love,  to  intend  loving. 
„    „       ^  (to  have  been  about  to  love,  to 

Smaturus,  S,  um,fuis9«,  |      have  intended  l<mng. 

(483.)  Finally,  by  combining  the  supine  with  the 
verb  ir  i,*  we  form  the  infinitive  future  passive ;  e.g., 
a  m  a  t  u  m  1  r  1,   to  be  about  to  be  loved. 
doctumiri,     to  be  about  to  be  taught. 

Rem.  1.  This  form,  being  derived  from  the  supine,  is  appKed,  alike  to 

nouns  of  all  genders  and  of  both  numbers. 
2.  As  there  is  no  future  infinitive  in  English,  we  must  translate  the 

Latin ytt^Mre  infinitive  by  a  periphrasis,  as  above. 


EXERCISE. 

(484.)   Vocabulary. 


To  perstcade,  persuadere  (per-J-sua- 
dere,  sues-,  suas-) ;  governs  dat. 

To  refrain,  tempgrftre  (av-,  at-,  fol- 
lowed by  ab  with  abl.). 

To  neglect,  nSgligere  (n§glex-,  neg- 
lect-, ngc+l6g6re). 

'To  compel,   cdg6re   (co6g-,   coact-, 


To  restore,  reddere  (reddid-,  reddit-, 

r6+dare,  411,  c). 
Unfriendly,   inimicus,   a,  um   (In+ 

amicus). 
To  demand-bach,  rSpgtgre  (repfiliv-. 

r6p6tit-,  rg-{-p6t6re). 
To  refuse,  rScusare  (av-,  at-). 


c6n-fag6re). 

(484,  a.)  Example. 

The  general  said  that  he  I  Irap^rator  dixit  s  e  cum  sSlft 
would  come  loith  the  tenth  d^cima  Iggione  venturum. 
legion  alone.  J 

Rem.  The  e  s  s  S  in  the  future  infinitive  is  frequently  omitted  ;  e.  g., 
in  the  above,  venturum. 


I  r  i  is  the  infinitive  passive  form  of  the  verb  i  r  6,  ^  go.    It  is  not  in 
CMC   except  in  combination  as  above. 


INFINITIVE  FUTURE.  ^  183 

(485.)   Translate  into  English. 

Future  Infinitive  Active. 

Dumnorix  existimat  se  regnum  obtenturum  esse. — 
Helvetii  existimabant  se  finitimis  {dat.)  persuasuros. — 
Caesar  existimabat,  finitimos  temperatures  ab  injuria. — 
Ceesar  dicit,  se  jEduorum  injurias  non  n  e glee tu rum. — 
Helvetii  existimabant,  se  iEduos  vi  (301)  coacturos. 
—  Ariovistns  dixit,  jEduis  (54)  se  obsides  redditurum 
ess  e. — CcBsar  dicit  se,  proxima  nocte  (118,  II.,  c),  de  quarta 
vigilia,  castra  moturum. — Imperator,  homines  inimico  ^nimo 
(428,  a)  tempdraturos  ab  injuria  et  mal6ficio,  non  existi- 
mabat. 

(486.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Future  Infinitive  Active. 

Ccesar  said  that  he  would  move  his  camp. — Dumnorix  thought 
that  he  w^ould-hold  the  military-command  of  his  own  state. — 
The  general  says  that  he  is-about-to-demand-back  the  host- 
ages.— The  ^Eduans  say  that  they-are-about-to-implore  assist- 
ance from  (a)  the  Roman  people. — Dumnorix  assures  (them) 
tliat  he  is-about-to-seize  the  royal- power  with  his  own  (suo) 
army. — Ariovistus  said  that  he  would  not  restore  the  hostages. 
— Caesar  did  not  think  that  the  allies  would-refrain  from  injury. 
— Caesar  thought  that  he  would-compel  the  Germans  by  force. 
— Ariovistus  said  that  he  would-refuse  the  friendship  of  the 
Roman  people. 


§  11. 

THE  GERUND. 

LESSON   LXXX. 

(487.)  («)  The  gerund  expresses  the  action  of  the 
verb  under  the  form  of  a  noun  of  the  second  declen- 
sion, in  the  genitive,  dative,  accusative ,  and  ablative 
cases  (i,  6,  urn,  6). 

(6)  The  gerund-stem  is  formed  by  adding  to  the 
verb-stem, 

In  the  1st  conjugation,     -and;     e.g.,     am- and-. 
"      2d  "  -end;     e.  g.,     m  6  n  -  e  n  d  -. 

"      3d  '*  -end;     e.  g.^     reg-end~. 

"      4th    ,      "  -iend;*e.  ^.,     aud-iend-. 

(c)  The  gerund  of  any  case  is  formed  by  annexing  the  case- 
ending  to  the  gerund-stem ;  e.  g.,  gen.,  8,  ra  a  n  d  -  i ;  dat., 
a  m  a  n  d  -  6  ;  ace,  amand-um;  ahl.,  a  m  a  n  d  -  o. 

(488.)  As  the  infinitive  is  used  as  a  verbal  noun  in  the  noini- 
native  anad  accusative  cases,  so  the  gerund  is  used  in  the  re- 
maining cases ;  e.  g., 

Nom.     Scribere,  writing. 
Gen.      Scribendi,  of  writing. 
Dat.       Scribendo,  to  or  for  writing. 

(Scribere,  ) 

Ace.  <  „      •- 1_        1  -        /  writms^. 
(Scribendum,  j  '=' 

Abl.       Scribend5,  with  ivriting. 

(489.)  The  rules  for  the  use  of  the  cases  of  nouns  apply  also 
to  the  cases  of  the  infinitive  and  gerund  ;  e,  g.,  • 
Nom.      Writing  is  useful,  s  c  r  i  b  d  ;•  e  est  utile. 

,,  rrn  ^     j-         '.-  -  ri     (  Bl'S  S  C  T 1  b  O  U  d  i  OSt  utf- 

(jren.       The  art  ofvmting  is  useful,  I 

*  Also  in  the  io  verbs  ("199) ;  e.  g.,  cap-io,  cap-iendT. 


t^ 


THE  GERUND. 


Dat.       Paper  is  useful  for  writing,  } 


Ace. 


/  learn  writing, 

I  learn  during  writing, 


Abl.        We  learn  hy  writing. 


185 

eliarta  scribendo  est 

utilis. 
scribe  re  disco, 
inter    scribenduiu 

disco, 
scribendo  discimus. 


Rem.  "With  a  preposition,  the  accusative  gerund  must  be  used,  and 
not  the  infinitive  ;  a d  (inter,  ob)  scrxbendum,  not  a d  (inter,  ob) 
scribere. 

(490.)  The  gerund  governs  the  same  case  as  the  verb  from 
which  it  is  derived  \  e.  g., 

The  art  of  training  hoys  is  |  Ars      pueros      ediicandi 
difficult.  j      diffictlis  est. 

v       .  -  -        ~ 

EXERCISE. 


(491.)  Vocabulary. 

To  make  war,  bellare  (av-,  at-). 

To  plunder,  to  obtain-booty,  praedari 

(prasdat-),  dep. 
Wearied,  defessus,  a,  um. 
Sufficiently,  sitis. 
To  think,  cogitare. 
Opportrmity,  time  for,  spatium,  i. 

(492.)  Examples. 

(a)  Time  was  given  for 
(=  opportunity  w-^as  given 
of)  taking-up  arms. 

{b)  For  the  sake  of  collect- 
ing-corn. 


To  deliberate,  dellberftre  (ftv-,  at-). 
To  take,  sumere  (sumps-,  sumpt-). 
Agriculture,  agricultura,  ae.       , 
Desire,  stadium,  i. 
Life,  age,  aetas,  (ajtat)  is  (293). 
Mind,  mens,  (ment)  is  (355,  IL,  1,) 


SpS.tium     armS, 
datum  est. 


c&pi  end 


{ah- 


Frumentandi    ca 

lat.). 

(493.)   Translate  into  English. 

Spes  praedandi  homines  ab  agricultfira  rgvocabat. — Spa- 
tium defessis  ex  pugna  excedendi  non  datum  est. — BrSve 
tempus  aetatis  satis  est  longum  ad  bene  beateque  vivendum. 
— Hdminis  mens  d  i  s  c  e  n  d  5  ^litur. — Pars  eqmtatus,  p  r  ae  - 
cl  a n d i  causa,  missa  est. — Nox  f inem  oppugnandi  fecit. — 
Magna  pars  equitatiis,  frumentandi  causa,  missa  ^rat.— :^ 
Cognovdrat  enim  Caesar,  magnam  partem  Squitatus,  praedandi 
frumentandi  que  causa,  trans  Rh6num  missara  fuisse  (471). 
Q  2 


186  GERUNDS. 

— Imperator  diem  ad  deliberandum  sumit.  —  Imp6rator 
dixit,  se  diem  ad  deliberandum  sumpturum  (484,  a). — 
Spes  praedandi,  stiidiumque  bellandi  incolas  ab  figricul- 
cura  et  labore  revocabat. — D  6  c  e  n  d  6  docemur. 

(494.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  desire  of  plundering  and  making-war  has  recalled  the 
farmers  from  (their)  fields. — Time  for  (492,  a)  hurling  the 
darts  was  not  given  to  the  soldiers. — Time  for  (of)  fighting 
was  not  given  to  the  horsemen. — The  horsemen  were  sent  into 
the  territories  of  the  ^duans  for  the  sake  of-collecting-corn. — 
The  mind  of  man  is  nourished  hy  thinJcing. — Time  for  depart- 
ing-out-of  the  tbwn  was  not-  given  to  the  wearied  citizens. — 
The  citizens  ask  time  for  (of)  deliberating. — Wisdom  is  the 
art  of  living  well. — Caesar  recalled  the  tenth  legion  into  Gaul, 
for-the-sake-of  wintering. — We  learn  hy  teaching. — Oppor- 
tunity of  attacking  the  town  was  not  given  to  the  soldiery 
though  they  desired  it  (=  desiring  it). 


§  12. 

THE  GERUNDIVE,  OR  VERBAL  ADJECTIVE 
IN  DIJS,  DA,  DtJM. 


(495.)  {a)  The  gerundive  expresses  the  action  of 
the  verb  (generally  with  the  additional  idea  of  ne- 
cessity or  continuance)  under  the  form  of  an  adjec- 
tive of  the  ^rs^  class  (76). 

(6)  The  %erundive-stem  is  precisely  the  same  as 

the  gerund-stem.     The  cases  are  formed  by  adding 

the  endings  of  the  adjective  ;  e.  g., 

N.  am  and -us,  a,  urn. 
G.  S,mand-i,  ae,  i,  &c., 

and  so  through  all  cases  and  both  numbers. 


LESSON  LXXXI. 
The  Gerundive  used  instead  of  the  Gerund. 
(496.)  The  gerundive  is  used  (to  express  contin- 
ued action)  as  a  verbal  adjective,  agreeing  vfiih.  the 
noun,  instead  of  the  gerund  governing  the  noun ;  e.  g.^ 


Gen.   Of  writing  a  letter. 


Dat.   To  or  for  writing  let- 
ters. 

Ace.   To  write  a  letter. 


Abl.  By  writing  a  letter. 


Scribendse  Spistolae,  in- 
stead ofscribendi  Spis 
tolam. 

Scribendisgpietolis,  in- 
stead ofscribendo  6pi»- 
tolas. 

Ad  scribendam  6pist6- 
1am,  instead  of  ad  scri- 
bendum  6pist61am, 

Scribenda  6pist61a,  in- 
steadof  scribendo  fipis- 
tdlam. 


188 


GERU.\D1VE. 


Rem.  The  gerundive  must  be  used  for  the  dative  or  accusative  of  the 
gerund  when  it  has  an  active  government.  It  may  be  used  for  it 
in  any  otlier  case,  unless  the  object  of  the  gerund  is  a  neuter  ad- 
jective or  pronoun  ;  e.  g.,  of  learning  the  true  =  vera  discendi, 
not  veroi-um  disceridorum ;  of  hearing  this,  hoc  audiendi,  not 
kujus  audiendi. 

EXERCISE. 

(497.)   Vocabulary. 


2'o  choose,  deligSre  (delcg-,  delect-, 

de+l6gere). 
7'o  pursue,  conseqm  (cons5cut),  dep. 
To  fail,  to  be  insufficient,  def  ic6re 

(defec-,  defect-,  de-ff acere). 
To  form  a  design,  consilium  capfire 

(io). 
Space-of  two-years,  biennium,  I. 

(498.)  Examples. 

(a)  The  Helvetians  reckoned 

that  the  space-of -two-years 

was  enough  for  themselves. 
(&)  The  space  of  three-days. 

(c)  The  house  was  given  to 
the  rohhers  to  plunder. 

The  farmer'  gave  his  house 
io  the  rohhers  to  plunder. 

S^^  After  verbs  of  giving ^  going,  sending,  receiving,  and  the 
like,  the  gerundive  expresses  b.  purpose  or  object. 

(d)  For-  completing  {=fin-  ]  Ad  eas  res  c  o  n  f  i  c  i  e  n  d  a  s. 
ishing)  these  things.  \ 

(499.)   Translate  into  English. 

CJrbs  a  diice  militibus  diripienda  data  est. — Urbem  dux 
militibus  diripiendam  dedit. — Subito  Galli  consilium  belli 
gerendi  ceperunt.  —  Subito  Galli  legionis  oppugnandae 
consilium  ceperant.  —  Ad  eas  res  couficiendas  Orgetorix 
deKgitur. — Helvetii,  ad  eas  res  conficiendas,  bienniunl  sibi 
satis  esse  duxerunt. — Crassus  legates  tribunosque  militum  in 
finitimas  civitates  frumenti  petendi  causa  dimisit. — Plato 
Romam  (453,  c)ad  cognoscendas  NumaB  leges  contendit. 
— Tn  voluptate  spernenda  virtus  maxime  cernitur. — Multi. 


To    reckon,    deem,    duc6re    (dux-, 

duct-). 
To  discern,  cemfire  (406,  CI.  III.,  a). 
Care,  cura,  oe. 
To  apply,  adhiibere  (adhibu-,  adhib- 

It-). 
Negligent,  negUgens,  (negligent)  is 

(107). 

Helvetii     biennium     sibi 
satis  esse  duxerunt. 

Tridui  spatium. 
Doraus  latronibus  diripien- 

d  a  data  est. 
Agi'icola     domum      latronibus 

diripiendam  dedit. 


GERUNDIVE.  189 

in  equis  parandis,  adlilbent  curam,  sed  in  amiois  dSli- 
gendis  negllgentes  sunt. — Miiites,  ad  urbem  expugnan- 
dam,  trldui  spatium  sibi  sS,tis  esse  duxerunt. 

(500.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

For  completing  these  things  (498,  d)  Caesar  gave  to  the 
Gauls  the  space  of  three  days. — The  ^duans  had  suddenly 
formed  the  design  of  besieging  the  town. — Crassus  is  chosen 
for  canying-on  the  war  (498, cO^). — Pythagoras  went  to  Spai-ta 
(453,  c)  to  learn  (498,  EF")  the  laws  of  Lycurgus. — Caesar 
reckoned  that  the  space  of  two  years  was  enough  for  himself^ 
for  overcoming  the  Gauls  and  finishing  the  war. — The  general 
sent  all  the  cavalry  across  the  Rhine,  for  the  sake  of  seeking 
corn. — ^Ariovistus  hastened  (contendere),  with  all  his  forces, 
to  attack  the  town  (498,  E^"). — The  Britons  sent  ambassadors 
to  Caesar,  in-order-(ad)-to-seek  (408,  ^^)  peace. 


LESSON  LXXXII. 
The  Gerundive  used  to  express  Necessity,  ^c, 

THE    GERUNDIVE    AS    SUBJECT. 

(501.)  (a)  The  genindive  in  the  nominative  neuter  (diim) 
is  used  with  esse  to  express  necessity  or  duty.  If  the  person 
be  expressed,  it  must  be  put  in  the  dative. 


One  must  write. 
I  must  write. 


Sciibendiim  est. 
Sci-ibendum  est  mihi. 


^^  Here    the   gerundive   is  the  subject   of  the    sentence 
{the  duty  of  writing  is  to  me). 

(6)  This  neuter  nominative  may  be  combined  with  all  the 
tense's  of  e?se  ;  e.  g., 

Scribendum  est  mihi,  Imustivrite. 

Scribendum  erat  mihi,  /  had  to  write. 

Scribendum  erit,  I  must  write  hereafter, 
&c.,  &c. 


190 


GERUNDIVE. 


(c)  This  neuter  nominative  may  govern  the  case  of  its  verb ; 
e.g.* 


We  must  help  the  citizens. 
One  must  use  reason. 


Civibus   {dat.)   subvSniendum 

est. 
Ratione  utendum  est. 


THE    GERUNDIVE    AS    PREDICATE. 

(502.)  The  gerundive  is  also  used  with  esse,  in  ail  cases  anil 
genders,  as  a  verbal  adjective,  agreeing  with  the  noun,  to  ex- 
press necessity  or  worthiness ;  e.  g.,  I  am  to  he  loved,  amandus 
sum ;  thou  art  to  be  loved,  amandus  es,  &c.  The  person,  if 
specified,  is  put  in  the  dative. 

Tullia  mihi  ftmanda  est. 


I  must  love  Tullia  {=  Tul- 

lia  is  to  he  lo^ed  hy  me.) 
All  things  had  to  he  done 

hy  Caesar  {=iC(Esar  had 

to  do  all  things). 
\^  Here  the  gerundive  is  the  predicate 

EXERCISE. 


Omnia  Caesari  6rant  Agenda. 


(503.)    Vocabulary. 

Flag,  vexillum,  i. 

To  set-up,  proponere  (pr64-pon6re, 

p6su-.  p6sit-,  406,  b). 
To  ^o-forward,  pr6ced6re  (pr6+ce- 

dere,  401,  3,  b). 
A    little    too  far,    patdlo    longius 

{adv.). 
To  think,  putare  (av-,  at-). 

(504.)  Examples. 

(a)  Ccesar  causes  a  hridge  to 

he  made  {=  takes  care  that 

a  hridge  should  he  made). 
I  must  hear. 

Est  is  often  omitted  with  the 
(5)   The  centurions  thought 

that    nothing    should    be 

done  rashly. 


To  send  for,  arcessfire   (arcessIV', 

arcessit-). 
7^61  understand,  perceive,  intelligfire 

(intellex-.  intellect-). 
To  determine,  statuere  (statu-,  st5- 

tfit-). 
In  vain,  frustra. 
Moi-e  widely,  latius  [adv.,  376). 


Caesar  pontem  faciendum 
(esse)  curat. 

Mihi  audiendum. 
gerundive,  as  in  {a). 
Centuriones       nihil       temere 

ft  g  e  n  d  u  m  (esse)  existima- 

bant. 


*  The  accusative  is  hardly  ever  used  after  the  neut.  gerundive. 


GERUNDIVE.  191 

(505.)   Translate  into  English, 

(1.)  Gerundive  in  the  nominative  neuter  (dttm). 

Militibus  de  navibus  6rat  desiliendum.  —  Militibua 
simul  et  de  navibus  (erat)  desiliendum,  et  cum  hostibus 
eratpugnandum. 

(2.)  Gerundive  as  a  verbal  adjective,  agreeing  with  the  noun. 

Csesari  omnia  uno  tempore  (118,  II.,  c)  grant  agenda; 
vexillum  propone ndum;  revocandi  mllites  ;  qui  pauUo 
longius  processerant  a r c e s s e  n d i ;  acies  instruenda;  mi- 
lites  hortandi;  signum  dandum. — Prohibenda  est 
Tra. — Bellum  nobis  est  susci  pi  endu  m. — Caesar  sibi  latius 
distribuendum  exercitum  piitat. — Imperator  dicit,  jam 
sibi  legatos  a  u  d  i  e  n  d  o  s.— CaesS-r  iibi  intellexit  frustra  tan- 
tum  laborem  sumi  (471),  statuit  expectandara  classem. — 
Caesar  pontem  faciendum  curat  atque  it^  exercttum  trS.- 
ducit. 

(506.)   Translate  into  Latin,  .      -         "^^ 

(1.)  Gerundive  in  nominative,  neuter  (d  u  m).  ' 

We  micst  leap-down  from  the  ships. —  We  must  read. —  You 
must  hear. —  You  must  fight  for  liberty  (pro  libertate).— ^Zi 
must  hear ;  we  must  read. — -With  whom  (quibuscum)  must  I 
fight  ? —  We  must  leap  down  from  the  walls  and  fight  with  the 
horsemen. 

(2.)  Gerundive  as  a  verbal  adjective. 
I  must  do  all  things  at  once  (=:  all  things  7nust  he  done  by  me 
at  one  time). —  You  must  give  the  signal. — ^We  had  to  set  up 
the  flag. — Ccssar  must  send  ambassadors. — The  soldiers  must 
fortify  the  camp. — The  general  must  encourage  the  soldiers. — 
The  Helvetians  cause  bridges  to  he  made  over  the  river. — Cae- 
sar thought  that  the  army  must  be  led-over, — Caesar  thought 
that  the  army  must  be  divided  by  him  (sibi),  and  distributed 
more-widely. — The  general  says  that  he  must  wait-for  the 
fleet. — Divitiacus  says  that  this-thing  (hoc)  must  be  done  by  all 
the  Gauls. 


§  13. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


LESSON  LXXXIII. 

.(507.)  The  imperative  mood  expresses  the  £Ction 
of  the  verb  as  a  command,  wish,  entreaty,  &c. ;  e.  g., 
Love  thou  !     Hear  thy  parents. 

(508.) 


FORMS    or    THE    IMPERATIVE. 


\ 

ACTIVE. 

i2d  Sin','. 

3d  Sing. 

i2d  Phir. 

3il  Plur. 

am- 

a  or&to. 

ato. 

ate  or  atotd. 

anto. 

m5n- 

e  oY  eto. 

eto. 

ere  or  ^tote. 

eitto. 

rea:- 

6  or  Ito. 

Tto. 

ite  or  Ttote. 

unto. 

aud- 

1  or  Ito. 

Ito. 

ite  or  itote. 

mnto. 

passive/                                                            j 

am- 

are  or  ator. 

ator. 

aminl  or  aminor. 

antor.      I 

moa- 

ere  or  etor. 

efcor. 

emiiii  or  eminor. 

entor. 

reg- 

ere  or  itor. 

Itor. 

imini  or  Iminor. 

tintor. 

aud- 

ire  or  itor. 

itor. 

imini  or  iminor. 

iuntdr. 

Rem.  1.  Observe  that  the  2d  per s.  sing.  act.  can  be  obtained  from  any 
verb  by  striking  off  r  6  from  the  infinitive  ;  e.  gr.,  inf.,  a  m  ft  r  6  ; 
tmper.,  am  ft;  and  that  the  'Hd  pers.  sing.  pass,  is  the  infinitive 
form  precisely. 

2.  The  longer  forms  of  the  2d  person  are  used  especially  in  reference 
to  future  time  ;  e.  g.,  in  laws,  statutes,  and  the  like. 

3.  The  io  verbs  of  3d  conj.  take  the  imperative  endings  of  the  4th  in 
the  3d  pers.  plur. :  thus,  c  a  p  i u n t o,  let  them,  take ;  capiuntor, 
let  them  be  taken.    F  a  c  i  o  has  2d  pers.  sing,  f  &  c. 

EXERCISE. 

(509.)    Vocabulary. 

[Deponents  take,  of  course,  the  passive  endings.] 


Enmily,  inimicitia.  ffi. 

To  despise,  contemnSre  (con+tem- 

n6r6,  temps-,  tempt-). 
Fleeting,  fugax,  (fugac)  Is  (107). 


To  pursue,  follow,  pers6qm  (persS- 

cut-),  dep. 
Association, fellowship  socidtfts  (fttis, 

293). 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD.  1V)3 


Slunv,  spficiSs,  sp^ciei  (117). 

7'o  trust,  credSre  {cr€did-,  credit-, 

411,  c) ;  governs  dat. 
Admire,  admirari  (at-),  d^. 


Ns  audL 

Ne  cred6  c6l6ri. 


Frail,   perishable,   cSduciis,    5,   Qm 

(from  cddirS,  to  fall). 
To  shun,  avoid,  vitarS  (av-,  at-). 
Judge,  judex,  ( judic)  is  (306). 
To  reverCj  vtofirari  (v6n6rat-),  dep, 

(510.)  Examples, 
{a)  Do  not  hear. 
Do    not    trust    appearance 

(colour). 

Rule. — ^With   imperatives,   n6    must   be    used  for   not, 
(Non  would  be  veiy  bad  Latin.) 
{b)  Let  the  judge  neither  give  I  Judex  prsemia  n©  d&tS  nSvft 

nor  take  rewards.  j      c  a  p  1 1  o. 

Neither  —  nor  =  n6— rueve. 
(c)  Instead  of  parents  =        |Parentuml6co  (abl.) 

(511.)  Translate  into  English.  ,  * 
Pueri  (roc),  pS,rentes  am  ate. — Magistri  pueros  linguS,m 
LS-tinam  d  6  c  e  n  t  o. — Magna  vis  est  in  virtutibus ;  Sas  ( 150 ) 
e X c  1 1 a,  si  forte  dormiunt.  —  AbstinetotS  omni  injuria 
{ahl.)  atque  inimicitiis. — I  m  p  6  r  a  irae  ( 147 ).  —  Ne  p  e  r  s  6- 
q  u  6  r  e  omnia,  quee  speciem  glorise  habent.— Hsec  omnia,  quae 
habent  speciem  gloriae  c o n t em n 6  :  brevid,  f ugacia,  cadGcfi. 
exist! ma. — Ne  credite  omnibus. — Judices  praemium  nS 
cftpiunto,  neve  danto. — V i t a  sScietatem  improborum. — 
Venerar§  Deum,  ven^rarS  p&rentes,  et  quos  p§,rentum 
loco  (55,  a)  tibi  (54)  natura  dedit. — Pueri  praBC=ept5res,  a  qui- 
bus  docti  sunt,  amanto  etv6nerant6r. 

(512.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

Boys,  revere  (your)  parents. — Let  the  master  teach  the  boya 
the  Greek  language. — Do  not  rouse-up  (your)  vices  :  rouse-up 
(your)  virtues,  if  perchance  they  sleep. — Abstain  ye  from  {abl.) 
all  vices  and  enmities.— My  son,  rule  (your)  anger  {dat.^  147). 
— Do  not  admire  all  things  which  have  the  show  of  glory. — 
Do  not  ye  fear  death. — Do  not  trust  to  the  show  of  glory. — 
Love  those  whom  Nature  has  given  to  you  in  place  of  parents. 
— Do  not  seek  the  association  of  the  wicked.- — Neither  take 
(cdp^re)  nor  give  a  reward. — Hear  the  wise  and  good, 

a 


§  14. 
SENTENCES. 


[The  student  should  now  be  made  to  understand  something  of  sente»' 
ces.     The  following  simple  statements  can  readUy  be  imderstood.] 

(513.)  (a)  The  sentence,  '■'■  the  messenger  Jied"  is  a  simple 
sentence,  as  it  contains  but  one  subject  and  predicate. 

(6)  The  sentence,  "  the  messenger,  who  saw  me,  jied,''^  is  a 
compound  sentence,  as  it  contains  more  than  one  subject  and 
predicate. 

(c)  In  the  last  example,  ^'- the  messenger  jied"  is  called  the 
pRiNciPAii  SENTENCE  ;  and  "  who  saw  me,''''  the  subordinate 
sentence. 

(514.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  classes  of  subordinate 
sentences : 

(a)  The  accusative  ivith  the  infinitive  ;  e.  g.,  Nuntiiis  dixit, 
equites  tela  conjicere  (The  messenger  said  that  the 
horsemen  were  hurling  darts).  Here  equites  tel^  conji- 
cere  {that  the  horsemen  were  hurling  darts)  is  the  subordinate 
sentence  ;  nuntius  dixit,  the  principal  sentence. 

(b)  Conjunctive  sentences,  i.  e.,  such  as  are  introduced  by  a 
conjunction  or  adverb  of  time  ;  e.  g.,  Ccesar,  when  he  had 
crossed  the  river,  drew  up  his  army.  Here,  Ccesar  drew 
up  his  army  is  Xh&  principal  sentence;  when  he  had  crossed 
the  river,  the  subordinate  sentence. 

(c)  Relative  sentences;  e.  g.,  Nuntius,  qui  missus  est, 
dixit  {The  messenger,  who  was  sent,  said).  Here  nun- 
tius dixit  is  the  principal  sentence ;  qui  missus  est, 
the  relative  subordinate  sentence. 

{d)  Interrogative  sentences  {i.  e.),  such  as  are  introduced  by 
an  interrogative  word ;  e.  g.,  Tell  me  what  you  are  doing  ? 
Here  what  you  are  doing  is  a  subordinate  interrogative  sen- 
tence. 


§  15. 
CONJUNCTIONS.— (LXXXIV.—LXXXy.) 


LESSON  LXXXIV. 

Copulatwe  Conjunctions,   '         .'  ', 
(515.)  Copulative  conjunctions  unite  WOfds  or 
•sentences  together.     They  are, 


And. 

Et,  qug,  ac,  atquS. 

Neither,  nor. 

N6c,  nSqug. 

Also. 

Etiam,  necnon,  qu6qug,  itfim, 
itidgm. 

EX  ER 

C  I  s  E. 

(516.)    Vocabulary. 

Only,  solum ;  not  only,  nou  solGm. 
A  debtor,  obeeratua,  I. 
Formerly,  at  one  time,  quondam. 
Jiich,  opulens,  (Spulent)  is  (107). 
To  hasten,  to  march  rapidly,  pr6p6- 

rar6  (av-,  at-). 
To  give  largess,   to  hril>e,   largiri 

(largit-),  dep. 
Once  and  again,  sSm6l  atquS  ItS- 

rum. 
Estate,  rgs  f  Smiliai-is,  e  (104). 
A  wheel,  rota,  ae. 

(517.)  Examples, 
(a)  Darius  equipped  a  fleet, 
'  and  placed  over  it  Datis  and 
Artaphernes. 

(a)  E  t  comiects  independent  words   and  sentences  ;    q  u  6  joins  one 
word  or  sentence  to  another  rather  as  an  a.ppendage.     Thus,  in  (a),  &  t 


Some  [some  persons),  nonnulli,  w,.  S 

(ndn+nullfis). 
Javelin,  tragula,  ee. 
To  hurl  under,  subjicgrS  (jec-,  ject-, 

sub+jacSre). 
I  profit,  benefit,  prosum*  (pr5+stim) ; 

governs  dat. 
To  the  same  place,  eOdfim  (adv.). 
Too  much,  nimius,  ft,  iim. 
Top,  summit,  culmfin,  (culmin)   !l 

(345). 
To  pray,  6rare  (av-,  at-). 


Darius  classem  comp&ravit, 
e  i  q  u  6  Datim  prsef ?cit  6 1 
Artaphernem. 


*  Prosdm  is  inflected  like  sum,  but  inserts  d  before  the  vowoU' 
fc.g'.,  prod-ess e,  prod-Ss,  prod-est  (not  pro-es,  pro-est). 


196  COPULATIVE  CONJUNCTIONS. 

joins  Datim   and   Artaphernem;    and   qa6  joins   the   sentence. 
^placed  veer  it,"  &c.,  as  an  Appendage  to  tiie  equipment  of  the  fleet . 


Homines  £6ri  ac  barbari  in 
provinciam  veniebant  a  t  q  u  6 
in  Italiam  contendebant. 


(6)  Fierce  bjA  barbarous  men 
were  coming  into  the  prov- 
ince^ and  were  hastening 
into  Italy. 

(5)  Ac  is  used  before  consonants,  but  not  before  vowels  or  h.    Atqufl 
may  be  used  before  either  vowels  or  consonants. 


(c)    CcBsar  both  had  induU 
ged  and  was  greatly  con- 
fident in  the  tenth  legion. 
.(c)  E  t  followed  by  anotJuer  6 1  means  botli — and. 


Deciraae  legioni  Caesar  6t  in- 
dulserat  e  t  conf  idebat  max- 


{d)   (1)  Again  and  again. 

(2)  And  again. 

(3)  Not  only — but  also. 


E  t  i  a  m  a  t  q  u  6  e  t  i  S,  m. 

E  t  etiam. 

N  o  n  s  o  1  ii  m — s  6  d  6 1  i  a  m 


,  (51%) .  Translate  into  English, 
Org6t9rix  ad  judicium  omnem  suam  familiara  coegit,  6  t 
omnesclientesobaeratosque  eodeiii  {adv.)  conduxit. — Carthago 
6t  Corinthiis  atque  Nuraantia,  opulentissimae  quondam  et 
vSJidissimse  civitates,  deletse  sunt,  a  Romanis.  —  Cassar  finem 
properandi  (489)  f acit,  pontem  q  u  e  ad  flumen  Rhenum  ponit. 
— Discipuli  e  t  audiunt  e  t  amaut  praecept5res. — Romani  n  o  n 
solum  itinerura  causa  (135,  II.,  R.)  s6d  Stiam  possessionis, 
culminS,  montium  occupaverunt. — Non  sjoium  vires  {plural 
of  \is)  sgd  etiam  tela  nostris  {dat.)  deficiebant. — His  rebus 
Dumnorix  e  t  suam  r6m  f amiliarem  auxerat  e  t  facultates  ad 
largiendiim  magnas  comparav^rat. — Hostes  6 1  e  loco  superiore 
in  jjiostros  tela  conjiciebant  e  t  nonnulii  inter  carros  rotas  q  u  6 
tragiilas  subjiciebant,  nostros  que  vulnerabant. — Contemnuntiir 
ii  qui  nee  sibi  nee  alteri  (194,  R.  1)  prosunt. — Nee  melidr 
virfuit  Scipione  (360,  c)  quisquam,  nee  clarior. — Mdxn  nSquS 
obsides  r6petiverunt  n  6  q  u  e  auxilium  imploraverunt. — Sapi 
entem  neque  paupertas  neque  mors  neque  vinciila  tei 
rent. — Nimiussomnus  neque  corpori  neque  ammo  {dat.,  516) 
prodest. — Rogo  te,  et  oro ;  etiam  atque  etiam  te  rogo. — 
^dui  sem^l  atque  iterum  ciim  Germanis  contenderant. — 
Milites  ex  castris  grupgrunt  (er umpire)  atqufi  omnem 
spdm  sfiJutis  in  virtute  posuerunt. 


DISJUNCTIVE  A>'D  ADVERSATIVE  CONJUNCTIONS.     197 


LESSON  LXXXV.  - 

Disjunctive  and  Adversative  Conjunctions. 

^519.)  I.  The  disjunctive   conjunctions   (meaning 

or)  are  aut,  vel,  ve,  and  sive  or  seu. 

Rem.  1.  Aut  indicates  a  real  difference  of  object;  e.  g.. 

Here,  soldiers,  we  must  conquer  or  j  Hie  vincendum  aut  mdriendum, mi- 
die !  I      lites ! 

"When  a  u  t  is  used,  but  one  of  the  conditions  can  be  fulfilled, 
as  in  the  above  example. 

Rem.  2.  V  6 1  (derived  from  velle)  means  if  you  wish,  oi 
rather.     (Hence  it  is  used  for  even.) 

The  nobles  can  either  corrupt  or    Virl  nobiles  v6l  corrarap6r6  more* 
correct  the  morals  of  the  state        civitatis,  v  6 1  corng6r6  possunt. 
{i.   e.,   they  can   do   whiclicver 
they  please). 

Rem.  3.  Ve  is  alwrays  affixed  to  another  word;  duo,  tresv* 
=  two  or  three. 

Rem.  4.  These  conjunctions  are  frequently  repeated. 
c  aut  —  aut. 
Either — or,  }\^\  —  v61. 

(siy6  —  siv6. 
Whether — or,  |  seu  —  seu. 

(520.)  11.  The   adversative   conjunctions  express 
opposition  {but). 

The  most  important  are, 

l.t,  atqui,  autem,  csetgriim,  s^d,  v6rum  {hut). 
T  S.  m  §  n  {however) ;  v  e  r  5  {truly) . 
EXERCISE. 

(521.)   Vocabulary. 


To  run  up,  accurrfirS  (accurr-  and 
accucurr-,  accurs-,  ad+currSre). 

Very  rich,  perdives,  (divit)  is  (per+ 
dlv6s),  107. 

Chance,  cftaiis,  us.  By  cJiance,  casu 
(abl.). 

Goodness,  bSnTtas  (Stis). 


To  pay  up,  persolvgre    (solv-,  s6- 

lut-). 
To  suffer  full  punishment,  poau&s 

persolv6rS. 
Handsome,  formflaus,  ft,  iim. 
Eloquent,  facundiis,  ft,  um. 
Ulysses,  Ulysses,  (Ulyss)  ia. 


R2 


198 


CONJUNCTIOJJS. 


To  possess,  possJdgrfi  (possSd-^ 

Bess-). 
Weeping,  fletus,  us.' 
Effect,  eSectus,  us. 
Sorrow,  sadness,  tristitia,  ea. 
Generally,  plerumqu6  (adv.). 
Joy,  gaudiam,  I. 


pos- 


Daily,  quStidiftniis,  &,  um. 

A  living  being,  animans,  (animantl 

is  (107). 
Motion,  motus,  us. 
Various,  diversus,  a,  um. 
To  swim,  natarfi  (av-,  at-). 
Sometimes,  interdum. 


Fortes  sunt  h&bendi,  non  qui 
f  aciunt,  s  e  d  qui  propulsant 
injuriam^ 

Gyges  a  nullo  videbatur,  ips6 
a  u  1 6  m  omnia  videbat. 


{522,)  Examples. 
(a)  Those  are  to  he  esteemed 
brave,  not  who  do,  hut  who 
ward  off  injury. 
{b)  Gyges  was  seen  by  no- 
body, but  he  himself  saw 
all  things. 

(a)  S  6  d  indicates  a  strong  opposition ;  it  always  stands  first 
in  its  clause,  as  in  (a). 

(6)  AutSm  expresses  a  weaker  opposition  than  s6d.  Au- 
t6m  and  vero  never  stand  first  in  a  sentence,  but  always  after 
one  or  more  words. 

(523.)   Translate  into  English. 

Nostii  celSriter  accurrerunt;  &t  Germani  fortater  impgtum 
giadidrum  exceperunt. — Amici  regis  duo  tresve  (519,  R.  3)  per- 
divites  sunt. — Siv6  casu  (55, a)  sive  consilio  deorum  immorta,- 
lium,  pcEnas  persolverunt. — NonnuUi,  sive  felicitate  {ahl.) 
quadam,  sivS  bonitate  naturae,  rectam  vitsB  secuti  sunt  viam. — 
Fortes  et  magnS,nimi  sunt  hS,bendi,  non  qui  f  aciunt  s  6  d  qui 
propulsant  injuriam. — N5n  formosus  erat,  sed  drat  facundus 
Ulysses. — Avarus  non  possidet  divitias  (57,  R.)  sed  divitise 
possident  eum. — Fletus  plerumque  est  efFectiis  tristitise ;  inter- 
diim  vero  etiam  {even)  gaudii. — Helvetii  fere  quotidianis 
prgeliis  (55,  a)  ciim  Germanis  contendunt,  quum  aut  suis  fini- 
bus  e5s  prohibent,  aut  ipsi  in  eorum  f inibus  bellum  gSrunt. — 
Animantium  motus  diversus  est;  v61  ambulant  et  currunt, 
v61  volant,  vdl  natant. — Corpus  moritur  {dcp.),  veriim  &m- 
mus  nunquam  morietur. — Milites  nostri  fortes  f uer«nt,  s  6  d 
avari. 


§  16. 
i30i>5VNGTIVE  MOOD.— (LXXXVL— XCII.) 


(524,)  The  subjunctive  mood  expresses  affirma- 
fc'i'n  doubtfully f  indefinitely,  or  as  conceived  by  the 
mind;  e.  g.,  /  may  write;  I  might  write;  I  might 
have  written  ;  if  I  should  write  ;  if  I  had  written. 

Rem. — The  subjunctiv©  hcs  no  future  tense-form. 


LESSON   LXXXVL 
Subjunctive  Present. 
{5251)  Forais  of  e  s  s  e  (i{o  Oc)  in  subjunctive  present. 


Pres. 


sun, 
/  may  he. 


SIS,  Bit, 

thou    mayAhe,  she,  it 
est  be.  may  be. 


sirnus, 
we  may  he. 


sitis, 
ye  may  be. 


smt, 
they   may 


(526.)  Forms  of  regular  verbs. 
ia)  The  subjunctive  present  adds  the  person-endings 
m,  s,  t,  mus,  tis,  nt,  for  the  active,  and 
r,  ris  or  re,  tilr,  mur,  mini,  ntur,  for  \h.Q passive, 
to  the  verb-stem  by  means  of  the  following  connecting  vowels,  viz., 

Active.  Passive. 

1st  conj.,  e ;    e.  g.,  4m-6-m,  am-S-r. 

2d  conj.,  £a ;  e.  g',  mdn-e^-b^  iu5n-e&-r. 

3d  conj.,  a ;     e.  g.,  rSg-a-m,  rSg-fi-r. 

4th  conj.,  ia ;    e.  g.,  aud-Ia-m,  aud-Ja-r. 

(6)  PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE    PIU^iSENT. 


Active. — I  may  love,  advise,  rule,  hear.                                   | 

Stem. 

Singular. 

Plural.                              1 

am- 
mon- 
r6g- 
aud- 

em. 
Mm. 

am. 

iSm. 

6s. 

6as. 
as. 

las. 

6t. 
6it. 

at. 

iat. 

emus, 
eamus. 
amus. 
lamtls. 

§tis. 
6atis. 
&tis. 
jatis. 

ent. 

eant. 

ant. 

iant. 

I 

*ASsrvE. — I  may  I 

e  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 

Steni. 

Singular.                                   | 

PluraL                                11 

am- 

m6n- 
aud- 

6r. 
6ar. 
ftr. 
Kr. 

ens  m-  ere. 
6aris  or  ar6. 
aris  or  ar6. 
laris  or  jire. 

etur. 
6atur. 

atur. 
iatTjr. 

emur. 
6amur. 
amur. 
iamiir. 

eminl. 
6amini. 
amini. 
iaminl. 

entur. 
6antur. 
antur. 
iantur. 

200 


SUBJUNCTIVE  PRESENT. 


E3tERCI3E. 


(527.)    Vocabulary^ 

Value,  pretiam,  I. 

To  obey,  p4rer6  (paru-) ;  governs  dat. 

To  despair,  desperare  (av-,  at-). 

Otherwise,  ftlit6r  {adv.). 

To  hinder,  impfidire  (iy-,  It-). 

Carefully,  studiose  [adv.). 

To  exercise,  exerc6re  (exercii-,  ex- 

ercit-). 
To  grieve,  dolere  (d6lu-,  dolit-). 
Would  that,  utinam  (conj.). 
To  fear,  metuere  (mStii-). 
J7icredible,  incredibilis,  e  (104). 
Mind  {talent),  ingfinium,  L^ 

(528.)  Examples.  - '  '-■" 

[The  principal  use  of  the  subjunctive  in  Latin  is  in  dependent  sen- 
tences ;  but  in  this  lesson  we  show  its  usca  in  jyrindpal  sentences,  ia 
which  it  occurs  orJy  when  something  is  said  without  dejiniieness  or  ccT' 
tainty.] 

(a)  1.  No  sane  man  can  doubt 
about  the  value  of  virtue. 
2.  May  I  be  snfa  ! 


To  be  ignorant,  igiiorare  (§v-,  at-). 
To  deny,  n6gare  (av-,  at-). 
To  know,  noscSrS  (nov-,  n6t-). 
To  afford,  proebere  (pra?bu-,  prsebit-). 
To  make  one's  self'a  judge,  sS  jddl- 

cSm  prseberS. 
To  apply,  to  employ,  adhlberS  (\i-. 

It-). 
Cautious,  cautus,  5,  um. 
Rashly,  temSrS  {adv.). 
Ever,  unquSm  {adv.). 
Truly,  obviously,  prorsus  {adv.'^ 
Finally,  denlqu^  {adv.). 


3.  /  hope  you  are  icell 
(==raay  you  be  safe). 

4.  May  I  not  he  safe,  if 
I  write  otherwise  than 
Ithink. 

6.  /  hope  viy  father  is 
alive  {  =  would  .  that 
my  father  may  be 
alive). 

6.  I  wish  he  would  come. 


Nemo  sanus  de  virtutis  pr6tio 

d  u  b  i  t  e  t. 
Sim  salvus ! 
Sulviis  sis!   - 


Ne  Sim  salvus,  si  ilKtfir  sciibo 
ac  sentio. 

Utanam  p^ter  v  i  v  a  t. 


Utanam  v  d  n  i  S.  t. 


(a)  The  subjunctive  present  is  used  for  the  English  poten- 
tial, may,  can.  Sec-,  and  also  to  express  a'wish,  when  the  thing 
wished  is  possible.  A  negative  wish  is  expressed  by  n  e  pre- 
fixed, as  m  (4). 


(6)  1.  Let  us  believe. 

2.  Let  us  obey  virtue. 

3.  Do  not  despair. 


Credamus. 

Virtiiti  pareftmus. 

Ne  despSres. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  201 

(6)  The  subjunctive  present  is  used,  instead  of  the  impera 
tive,  to  soften  a  comniand.     N  e  is  used  for  prohibition. 


(c)  Who  would  not  love  vir- 
tue ? 
What  can  I  do  1 
Who  is  ignorant  1 
Who  can  doubt  1 


Quis  virtutem  non  &  m  e  t  ? 

Quid  faciarii  ? 

Quis  ignoret? 

Quis  diibitet? 

(c)  The  subjunctive  present  is  used  in  direct  questions  when 
any  doubt  is  implied.  (In  English,,  we  generally  use  can,  wilU 
would,  &c.,  in  such  questions.) 

(529.)   Translate  into  English. 

{a)  Use  of  subjunctive  as  potential,  or  to  express  a  wish  (the  latter 
indicated  by  ! ). 

Tempus  v  6  n  i  a  t.  ^—  Salvus  sis!  amic6.  —  F  a  v  e  a  t  for- 
tune ! — Utinam  hoc  veriim  sit ! — Diu  vivas  ! — Nemo  bonus 
de  Providentia  Dei  diibite t. — M 6 r i a r,  si  alitor  scribo  ac 
sentio. — Utinam  nemo  te  i  m  p  §  d  i  a  t !— Utinam  domum  meam 
veris  amicis  (55,  a)  i  m  p  1  e  a  m  ! 
(J)  Use  of  subjunctive  as  imperative. 

Se  quisque  studiose  ex  ere  eat. — Naturam,  optimam  ducem, 
sequamur,  cique  pare  am  us. — A  mem  us  pStriam,  parea- 
mus  senatui,  consulamus  bonis. — Suum  quisqud  noscat 
ing^nium,  Scremqu^  se  et  bonorum  et  vitiorum  suoriim  judi- 
c6m  prasbeat. — Ne  ametis  improbos. — ^Prudentiam  adhib- 
eamus. — Cautiorem  adhibeamus  prudentiam.  —  In  rebus 
gravioribus  cautiorem  adhibeamus  prudentiam,  s6d  n6c  in 
Ifivioribus  t6m6r6  unquam  agamus. — Ne  dole  as. 
(c)  Use  of  subjunctive  in  direct  questions. 

Quis  hoc  credat  ? — Quis  fabiilas  istas  c  red  at  ? — Quis  im- 
probos ac  stultos  diligat  ? — Quis  eiim  diligat  qu6m  mStuit? 
— Quis  credat  illud  quod  prorsiis  incredibil6  est? — Quis  dS 
virtutis  pr^tio  dubitet  ?  —  Quid  faciamus  ?  —  Qms  nSget 
omnes  16ves,  omnes  avaros,  omnes  denique  imprSbos  essA 
Bervos  ? 

(530.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

{a)  No  wrise  (man)  can  doubt  concerning  the  benevolence  of 
God. — My  friends,  I  hope  you  are  well  (=  may  you  be  safe). 


202 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


^^l-hope)~thsit{iUinam)  the  commander  is  alive  (=  may  live). — 
I  hope  our  friends  may  come  ! — May  these  things  be  true  ! — 
May  the  citizens  be  wise. 

(&)  Let  us  not  believe  this. — Do  not  believe  these  fables.— 
Let  us  exercise  ourselves  diligently. — Let  us  love  our  friends, 
let  us  obey  our  parents,  let  us  worship  God. — Know  your  (own) 
mind. — Let  the  soldiers  take-po!*aession-of  the  mountain. — Let 
us  not  love  the  wicked. 

(c)  Who  can  say  this  ? — Who  can  love  a  fool  ? — Who  would 
obey  a  wicked  king  ? — What  good  (man)  can  doubt  concerning 
the  value  of  virtue  ? — Who  can  deny  that  all  avaricious  men 
are  slaves  ? 


LESSON    LXXXYJL 
Suhjunciive  Perfect. 
(53  K)  Form  of  esse  (to  be)  in  subjunctive  perfect. 


fueriin,         fu6ris, 

/  may  havathou  mayest 

been.  have  been. 


fu^rit,        jj  fugrlmtis,    I  fufirftis, 
he,    she,  it}%oemayhave\yeina 
may  have\  been.  |  been, 

been. 


(532.)  Forms  of  regular  verbs. 

1.  The  subjunctive  perfect  active  adds  the  endings 

6rim,     6ris,     6rit,     6r!mus,     6r!tis,    6rint, 
to  the  indie,  perf.  stem  of  the  verb;  e.  g.,  amav-erlra,  &c. 

2.  The  subjunctive  perfect  passive  is  formed  by  combining 
the  perfect  participle  with  the  subj  unctive  present  of  e  s  s  e  : 
c.  ^.,  &  m  a  t  u  s  s  i  m,  &c. 

[  0^^  Deponents,  of  course,  are  formed  like  passives.] 

3.  PARADIGM,    SUBJUNCTIVE    PERFECT. 


Active. — I  may  have  loved,  advised,  nded,  heard. 


fimav- 
m6nu- 
rex- 

audiv- 


Srim, 


gris. 


6nt. 


grfnaus. 


6r!tis. 


firint. 


Passive. — I  may  have  been  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


(  amatus,  a,  um,        ^^^^ 
b;,,.,  J  mbnitus,  a,  um,  I     .^ 
^"^S-  i  rectus,  a,  um,      ^  «'«• 


i^  auditus,  a,  um, 


sit. 


ramati  8e,a    \  ^^^^^ 
I  auditi,  ae,  a,  j 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


EX  £RCISE« 


(533.)   Vocabulary, 

htialth,\&\etnd6,  (vaktudin)  is  (339), 
So,  thus,  ita  [adv.) 
Kindness,  pardon,  vfinia,  ae. 
To  take  captive,  cap6r5   (io,  c6p-, 
capt-,  199). 


Patience,  patientia,  oe. 

To  slay,  cut  to  pieces,  c»d6rS  (c6- 

cld-,  cass-,  413,  ^^). 
It  makes  no  difference,  it  matters 

not,  nihii  refert.  , 


mF*  Form  the  subjunctive  perfect  active  and  pass- 
ive of  the  following  verbs  : 


Absttm,  to  be  absent  (no  passive). 
Prosum,  to  projit  (do.). 

Desum,  to  be  wanting     (do.). 
V6carS,  to  caU. 
Confirm&r6,  to  assert. 
DicSrS,  to  say  (dix-,  diet-). 
TradSrS,  to  assert,  deliver  (tradid-, 

tradit-). 
Laudare,  to  praise. 
Videre,  to  see, 

(534.)  Examples, 

{a)  Do  not  do  it,  |  N  e  f  e  c  6  r  i  s. 

(a)  The  subjunctive  perfect  (as  well  as  the  present)  may  be 
used  in  prohibitions,  with  n  e,  or  nihil,  instead  of  the  imper- 
ative. 


Inv^nire,  to  find  (invSn-,  invezit^).  'v 
Scrib6r6,  to  write. 
FSc^rS  (io-,  fee-,  fact-),  to  do, 
Xoqui  (locut-),  to  speak  [dep.). 
Censer6  (eensu-,  cans-),  to  think. 
Opprim<SrS    (press-,   press-),   to  re- 
press, crush. 
Constita6re  (stitii-,  stitut-),  to  place. 
OppugnarS,  to  assaiUt. 
E/6v6car6,  to  recaU,  restore. 


{h)  By  your  leave  I  would 

say. 
Epicurus  may  have  said. 
Perchance  some  one  mziy  say. 


Pac6  tua  dixfirim ;   or,  Vdnia 

tua  dixdrim. 
Dixerit  Epicurus. 
Forsit8,n  fi,Kquis  d  i  x  6  r  1 1. 


(6)  The  subjunctive  perfect  may  be  used  with  or  without  an 
adverb,  to  express  a  supposed  case  (that  may  t)e  true). 

(c)  I  think  I  can  assert  this.   Hoc  confirmaverim. 
You  will  scarcely  find  a  man   Vix  uUius  gentis  hominem  irK- 
of  any  nation.  veneris. 

(c)  The  subjunctive  perfect  (as  well  as  present)  is  used  to 
soften  an  assertion.  (Such  phrases  as.  Probably  I  mighty  1 
think  I  can,  I  would,  perhaps,  &c.,  can  be  expressed  in  Latin 
by  one  word  in  the  perfect  subjunctive,  as  above.) 


204  SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD, 


Cur  rides  ? 

Die*  mihi  cur  rid  efts. 


UWfuisti? 
Nescio  iibi  fu6ris? 


{d)  (1)  Why  do  you  laugh? 
(2)    Tell    me   why   you 
laugh. 

(1)  Where  have  you  been  ? 

(2)  I  do  not  know  where 
you  have  been. 

The  sentences  marked  (1)  are  direct  interro^tive  sentences, 
and  take  the  indicative  mood  ;  those  marked  (2)  are  indirect  (or 
subordinate)  interrogative  sentences,  and  take  the  subjunctive. 
Hence, 

{e)Rule  of  Syntax. — The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  in  all  in- 
direct interrogative  sentences. 
Rem.  Such  sentences  are  introduced  by  the  interrogative  pronoons 
quis,  qui,  quantus,  qaalis,  uter,  &c.,  or  the  adverbs  ubi,  unde,  quan* 
do,  quo,  cur,  num,  utrum,  an,  &c. 

(535.)   Translate  into  English. 

(a)  Quod  diibitas,  ne  feceris. — Id  ne  dix8ris.— Nihil  in 
commodo  {to  the  injury)  v^letudinis  tuaB  f  e  c  e  r  i  s. — Cum  ira- 
probis  ac  stultis  ne  locutus  sis. 

(6)  F&ciat  hoc  aliquis. — Fecerit  hoc  aliquis. — Dix^rit 
Epicurus,  Deum  esse  nullum. — Forsitan  eiim  amaveris. — 
Forsitan  itS,  censu^ris. — Puerum  magistri  monuerint. — 
Urbem  hostes  oppugnavSrint. 

(c)  Frater  {voc),  bona  tua  venia  dixSrim,  meS,  sententii 
melior  est. — Patientiam  laudaverim  boum  (351,  2)  atque 
6qu6rum.  —  IngeniS,  studiaque  oppresseris  facilius  (376) 
quam  r  6  V  6  c  a  v  6  r  i  s. 

{d)  Nescio  cur  rideas. — Die,  cHr  ad  me  non  veneris. 
— ^Helvfttii  ibi  Srunt,  iibi  eos  Caesar  constituerit. — Magno 
eiim  pericul5  (89,  II.)  id  fecit. — Intelligit,  quan  to  cum  peri- 
ciilo  id  fec§rit. — Multi  in  prgelio  esesi  sunt. — Multi  in  prselio 
eapti  sunt. — Ubi  (when)  victoria  amissa  est  {is  lost)  nihil  refert, 
quot  in  prselio  esesi  aut  in  fugS  eapti  sint. — Die  mihi 
ubi  fufiris. 

(536.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

{a)  Do  not  love  the  wicked. — Do  not  hear  the  foolish. 

*  The  imperative  of  dIc6rS  is  die,  not  dicS. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOO. 


205 


(b)  Some  philosophers  may-have-denied  the  soul  to  be  im- 
mortal.— Perhaps-you-have- advised  the  young-man. 

(c)  I  think-I-can-advise  the  young  man. —  You  may  easily 
fepress  the  minds  of  young  men. —  You  cannot  easily  recall  the 
industiy  (studium)  of  men. 

{d)  The  mind  itself  knows-not  what  (quails)  the  mind  is. — 
Tell  me  where  you  ivere. — I-do-not-know  why  you  did  not  comt 
to  me. — Tell  (me),  were  you  (fuerisne)  in  school  yesterday? — 
It  makes  no  diiference  how  many  are  taJcen-captive. — -The  boy 
will  remain  (erit)  there,  where  the  master  may  appoint  him. — 
I  will  tell  you  what  I  have  seen. — I  will  tell  you  what  I  have 
heard. — Tell  me  what  y&ii  have  done. 


LESSON  LXXXVIII. 

Subjunctive  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect.  — Conditional 
Conjunctions  and  Sentences. 

(537.)  The  subjunctive  imperfect  simply  adds  the 
person-endings, 

m,  s,  t,  m  u  s,  t  i  s,  n  t,  for  the  active^ 

r,  ris  (re),  tur,  mur,  mini,  ntur,  for  the  passive^ 
to  the  present  infinitive  form  of  the  verb.     Thus, 


Inf.  Pres. 

esse,  to  he. 
SmarS,  to  love. 
r6gSr6,  to  rule. 


Imperf.  Subj.  Act. 

ess  em,  I  migJU  he. 

ftmare-m. 

rggfire-m. 


Imperf.  Subj.  Paj 

Jimare-r. 
rSgSre-r. 


(538.) 


PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE  IMPERFECT. 


1.  EssSm; — I  might,  could,  would,  or  should  be. 


ess6m. 


ess6t. 


essemus.  |  essetis.    |  essent. 


2.  Active. — I  might,  could,  would,  fy;.,  love,  advise,  rule,  hear. 


amar- 
mSner- 
rgggr- 
audir- 


6t. 


emus. 


6r. 


€ns  or  erg. 


j    3.  Passive. — I  might,  could,  would,  6fc.,  be  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 
j  Smar- 
I  monSr- 
■j  r6g6r- 
audlr- 


6tur. 


6mur. 


emJnl. 


entur. 


206 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


Rem. — ^The  vo\*'el  e  of  the  euding  is  long,  except  where  it  comes  before 
m  or  t  final,  when  it  is  short  of  necessity. 

(539.)  (a)  The  subjunctive  pluperfect  aciiue  simply 
adds  the  person-endings, 

m,  s,  t,  m  u  s,  t  i  s,  n  t, 
to  the  past  infinitive  form  of  the  verb.     Thus, 

Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

faiss6-m,  / might havehitti: 
fim a V i s  s  S  -m,  / might  have  loved, 

(b)  The  subjunctive  pluperfect  passive  is  formed 
by  combining  the  perfect  participle  with  the  subjunct- 
ive imperfect  of  e  s  s  e  ; 

E.g.,  ^matiis  essSm  (sometimes  with  the  subjunctive 
pluperfect  of  e  s  s  d  ;  e.  g.j  a  m  a  t  ii  s  f  u  i  s  s  e  m,  &c.). 

(c)  PARADIGM. SUBJUNCTIVE  PLUPERFECT. 


Past  Infinitive. 

f  u  i  s  s  e,  to  have  been. 
fimavisse,  to  have  loved. 


I  might,  could,  would,  should  have  been,  SfC. 


fuiss6m. 


fuisses.  I  fuisset.  ||  fuissemus.  |  fuissetis.   |  fuissgnt. 


2.  Active. — I  might,  could,  6fC.,  have  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


amav- 
monu- 
rex- 
audiv- 


issSm. 


isset. 


issSnt. 


3.  Passive. — I  might,%ould,  ifc.,  have  been  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard. 


C  amati,  w,  &,    i        .    ^ 
J,.       )  mSnitI,  oe,  &,  (  ^ssemus. 

^^^'')rectr,k^      (  e St ' 
f  oiiriTH  »  s     1  essent. 


Sing. 


amatus,  a,  um, 
monitus,  a,  um, 
rectus,  i,  um, 
auditus,  1  um. 


essem. 
esses. 


Conditional  Conjunctions  and  Sentences, 

(640.)  (a)  The  conditional  conjunctions  are  si,  if;  si'n,  but 
if;  nisi,  or  ni,  if  not,  unless. 

(&)  A  conditional  sentence  is  one  which  is  introduced  by  a 
conditional  conjunction;  e.  g.,  if  men  were  good,  they  would  be 
happy. 

Rem.  The  sentence  introduced  by  if  is  called  the  conditional  sen- 
tence  ;  the  other,  the  consequent  sentence  :  if  men  were  good  is  the 
conditional ;  they  would  be  happy,  the  consequent. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


207 


EXERCISE. 


(541.)   Vocabulary, 

To  diminish,  mlau6re   (miiju-,  mi- 
nut-). 
To  cross  over,  transirg  (irreg.). 
The  world,  orbis  terrariim. 


To  subdue,  subiggrS  (subeg  ,  subact> 

sub+ag6re). 
Longer,  diutius  {adv.,  compar.). 
I  wish  that,  utinam  (conj.). 


(542.)  Examples  and  Rules. 


{a)    Would   that   my  father 

were  alive  ! 
I  wish  he  could  come  ! 


Utinam  p&ter  vivdret! 
Utaoam  v  6  n  i  r  e  t ! 


E^  In  these  examples  (which  refer  to  present  time),  the  thing  wished 
Is  supposed  to  be  impossible  (the  wish  is  vain). 

I  wish  he  had  lived  !  Utinam  v  i  x  i  s  s  e  t ! 

Ivmh  he  had  come  !  •  Utinam  v  e  n  i  s  s  e  t ! 

J^^  In  these  examples  (which  refer  to  past  time),  the  thing  wished  i» 
supposed  to  be  impossible  (the  wish  is  vain). 

(a)  Rule  of  Syntax. — The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  sub- 
junctive are  used  to  express  an  impossible  supposition,  or 
a  vain  wish  ;  the  imperfect,  with  reference  to  present  or 
future  time ;  the  pluperfect,  with  reference  to  past  time. 

{h)  Conditional  Sentences. 

(1)  If  he  has  {any)  money,    Si  pecuniam  hftbet,  d&t. 
he  gives  (it). 

Here  the  man  is  supposed  to  have  money;  the  condition  expressed  by 
"if"  is  therefore  real. 


(2)  If  he  has  {any)  money, 
he  will  give  (it). 


Si     pecuniam 
d&bit. 


h  &  b  e  a  t, 


Here  the  condition  is  possible,  if  not  real.    The  man  may  have  money. 


(3)  If  he  had  any  money,  he 
would  give  it. 


Si    pecuniam    haberet, 
d  d,ret. 


Here  the  man  is  supposed  to  have  no  money :  the  condition  is  unreaL 
(Observe  that  it  refers  to  present  or  future  time.) 

{i)  If  helmdhsid  any  money,]  Si    pecuniam    h3.buisset, 
he  would  have  given  it.       \      d  e  d  i  s  s  e  t. 

Here  the  man  is  supposed  not  to  have  had  any  money ;  the  condition  i» 
therefore  unreal  (referring  to  past  time).    Hence, 

(fc)  Ride  o/*  <%tttex.— In  conditionai  sentenees  (l)i  a  real 


'^08  SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOI>. 

condition  is  expressed  by  the  indicative ;  (2)  a  possible 
condition  by  the  present  or  perfect  subjunctive ;  (3)  an 
unreal  or  impossible  condition  in  present  time  by  the  im- 
perfect subjunctive ;  and  (4)  an  unreal  or  impossible  con- 
dition in  past  time  by  the  pluperfect  subjunctive. 

Rem.  I.  In  cases  (3)  and  (4),  the  subjunctive  mast  be  used  in  the 
consequent  as  well  as  in  the  conditional  sentence. 

2.  It  follows  that  the  perfect  or  pluperfect  indicative  can  never  be 
used  with  si.    If  he  had  oome  =  sivenisset,  not  si  venerftt. 

(543.)   Translate  into  English, 

Utanam  salvus  esse  s.— S  i  hoc  d  i  c  i  s,  en-as. — S  i  h  6  c 
d i c a s,  erres. — -^ i  hoc  diceres,  errares.^ — S  i  hoc  d i x - 
isses,  erravisse  s. — Si  venisses  ad  exercitum,  ab  impera- 
tore  visus  esse s. — Frater  mihi  narrabat  quid  amicus  tuus 
fecisset  (534,  d). — Memoria  minuitur,  nisx  eS,m  exer- 
c e a s. — Si  HelvStii  flumen  transire  conentur,  Csesar  eos 
prohibebit. — Si  Helvetii  flumen  transire  conarentur,  Caesar 
eos  prohibere t.— Si  Helvetii  flumen  transire  conati 
essent,  Csesar  eos  prohibuisset. — Si  obsides  ab  Helvetiis 
Caesari  (54)  dentur,  cum  iis  pacem  faciet. — Si  obsides  ab 
Helvetiis  Caesari  d'arentur  cum  iis  pacem  face  ret. — Si 
obsides  ab  Helvetiis  Caesari  dati  essent,  ciim  iis  pacem 
f  e c is s e t. — Non  s  u  p  e  r  a r  e  m u r,  cives  {voc.)  s  i  nostri  fortgs 
essent.  —  Non  superati  essemus,  cives,  si  fortiores 
milites  nobis  {dat.^  125,  H.,  a)  fuissent. — Alexander  totum 
fer6  orbgm  terrarum  subegit. — Alexander,  si  diutius  vixis 
set,  totum  orbem  terrarum  siibegisset. 

(544.)  Translate  into  Latin, 

I  ivish  my  father  had  lived  longer. — /  wish  you  had  come 

Wbuld-that  the  soldiers  had  been  braver — If  you-would-read 
this  book  (542,  &,  2),  I  would  give  (it)  to  you. — I  unsh  the  gen- 
eral had  led  the  army  across  the  Rhine. — If  you  had  any  thing 
(quid),  you  would  willingly  give  (it). — If  they  had  had  the 
money,  they  would  willingly  have  given .  it. — If-you-had-loved 
the  boy,  you-would-have  advised  him. — If  you-love  the  boy, 
you-will-advise  him. — If  the  soldiers  would  come  to  the  army, 
ihey~would-be-praised  by  the  general. — 7)^  the  Germans  had-led 
(their)  army  across  the  Rhine,  Caesai'  would-have-made  an  at- 
tack upon  (in)  them. — Ifwe-are  brave,  we  shall  not  be  overcom« 


SUBJUNCTIVE  WITH  UT,  NE. 


209 


LESSON  LXXXIX. 

Subordinate   Sentences   expressing  a  Purpose.  —  tit 
and  Ne. 
(545.)  The  subjunctive  forms  of  the  verb  poss6, 
to  he  able,  are  the  following : 

[Observe  that  p  o  s  s  6  is  compounded  of  p  6 1  -,  the  stem  of  p  6 1  i  s,  able, 


and  e  s  s  6 ;  thus,  p  6 1  -  e  s  s  6,  contracted,  p  o  s  s  S. 
are  contracted,  and  the  t  changed  into  s  before  s.] 


So  all  similar  forms 


Subj.  Pres. 
pos-        Bim. 


(Potis  sim  =  pot-sim  =  possim.) 
SIS.  sit.  slmus.  sTtis. 


iSubj.  Imperf.        (Potis  essem  =  potessem  =  possem.) 
pos-         sfem.  ses.  set.  semus.  setis. 


sent. 


Suhj.  Perf.  (Potis  faerim  =  pot-fuerim  =  potuerim.) 

potu-       Srim.         eris.         erit.         erimus.         eritis.         erint. 


Subj.  Plup.  (Potis  fuissem  =  pot-fuissem  =  potuissem.) 

p6tu-       Iss6m,       Issfcs.       issSt.       issemus.       issetis.       Issent. 


(546.)  'VhQ  final  conjunctions  (i.  e.,  such  as  denote  &  purpose 
aim,  OT  result)  are  ut  (or  uti),  ne,  quin,  quo,  quominiis 
Ut,  or  iiti,  that,  so  that,  in  order 

that. 
N6,  that  not,  so  that  not,  lest. 


Cluin,  but  that. 


duo,  in  order  that,  to  the  end  that. 
Q,u6minus,  tliat  (after  verbs  of  hin- 
dering). 


EXERCISE. 


(547.)   Vocabulary. 

To  eat,  gderS  (601). 

A  Rauracian,  Rauracus,  i. 

A  Tulingian,  Tulingus,  i. 

To  burn  up,  exurSre  (exuss-,  ex- 

ust-). 
Together,  una  [adv.). 
Basely,  turpiter  (215,  2). 
To  surround,  circumvgnliS    (vgn-, 

vent-). 


To  resist,  resistSrg  (restit-,  restit-). 
To  fix,  hence   to  decide,  statuSra 

(statu-,  statu-). 
To  decide  on  something  quite  se 

vere,  aliquid  gravius  statuerg. 
To  enjoin,  praecipere   (io,  praecep- 

cept-),  prae+cSLpere). 
To  join  battle,  praelium  committ6re 
End,  finis,  is  (m.,  355,  Ex.  II.,  2). 


Subordinate  Sentences  expressing  a  Purpose,  End,  or  Object. 

(548.)  Examples  and  Rules. 
(a)  I  beseech  you  that  you " 


do  this 


I  beseech  you  to  do  this. 


>T^  obsScro,  lit  h6c  fftcii 


S2 


210  UT,  NE,  EXPRESSING    PURPOSE. 


Dux    impgravit,    ut    miKtes 
sta,tiones  suas  servarent 


The  general  commanded  that ' 
the  soldiers  should   keep 
their  stations ; 
or, 

The  general  commanded  the 
soldiers  to  keejp  tJieir  sta- 
tions. J 

(b)  I  beseech  you  tfiat  you  J 

do  not  do  this  ;  \  m, 

^^  >Te  obsecro  ne  n6c  f&cias. 

I  beseech  you  not  to  do  this,  j 
The  general  commanded  that ") 

the    soldiers    should    not 

desert  their  stations ; 
or^ 
The  general  commanded  ^^e 

soldiers  not  to  desert  their 

stations. 


Dux  impgravit  n6  milites 
st^tiones  su§,s  d6sdr- 
e  r  e  n  t. 


(a)  These  examples  show  that  a  purpose  or  aim  may  be  ex- 
pressed in  English  by  that,  in  order  that,  or  (especially  after 
verbs  of  asking  and  commanding)  by  the  infinitive.  In  Latin, 
such  sentences  are  expressed  by  u  t,  with  the  suhjunctive.* 

(6)  An  object  to  be  provided  against  is  introduced  in  English 
by  that  not,  in  order  that  not,  or  by  not,  with  the  infinitive.  In 
Latin,  such  sentences  are  always  expressed  by  n  e,  with  the 
subjunctive. 

(549.)   Translate  into  English, 

1.  Ut. 

Edimus  ut  vivamus,  non  vivimus  ut  6 damns. — Vfinio 
u  t  d  i  s  c  a  m.  — Veni  ut  discerem.  —  Orgetorix  persuaddt 
Castico  (dat.)  ut  regnum  occupet. — In  e5  itinere,  persuasit 
Castico,  cujus  pater  regnum  in  civitate  sua  multos  annos  (191,  a) 
obtanuSrat,  u t  regnum  in  civitate  sua  occupare t. — Orget- 
orix persuadet  Dumnorigi  ut  idem  (150)  conetur. — Orget- 
orix persuasit  Dumnorigi  iit  idem  conaretur.  —  HelvStii 
persuadent  Rauracis,  iiti  cum  iis  proficiscantur. — Helvg- 
tii  persuadent  Rauracis  St  Tulingis,  ii  t  i,  oppidis  suis  vicisque 

*  Jubiri  takes  accusative  with  infinitive. 


UT,  NE,  EXPRESSING    PURPOSE.  211 

exustis  (457),  una  ciim  ils  proficiscantur. — C3Bs§,r  casteM 
communit,  ut  Helvetios  prohibere  possit.  —  CsBsar  castella 
communivit  u  t  Helvetios  prohibere  posset.  —  Caesar  rogat 
Divitiacum  ut  f inem  orandi  faciat. — Csesar  rogavit  Divitia- 
cum  lit  finem  oraiidi  faceret.  —  Helvetiis  (147)  Caesar  im- 
pgrat  uti  perfugas  r6  due  ant. — Helvetiis  Caesar  impgravit 
u 1 1  perfugas  reduc^re nt. 

2.  Ne.  ' 

Te  obsecravi  ne  h5c  faceres. — Pater  f Ilium  obs^crat  nS 
quid  turpiter  f a c e r e t. — Milites,  n e  ab  hoste  circumven- 
irentur,  audaciiis  (376)  resistere  ac  fortius  pugnare  coepe- 
mnt. — Divitiacus  Caesarem  obsecrat,  ne  quid  gravius  in  fra- 
trem  statu  at. — Divitiacus,  multis  cum  laciymis  (89,  H.) 
Caesarem  obsecrare  coepit,  n  e  quid  gi-avius  in  fratrem  stS, tu- 
rret.— Praeceptum  est  (perf.  pres.,  it  has  heen  enjoined  to  or 
upon)  Labieno,  ne  praelium  committat,  nisi  Caes^ris  copiae 
visae  sint  (542,  6,  2). — Praeceptum  erat  Labieno,  ne  praelium 
committeret,  nisi  Caesaris  copiae  visae  essent. 

[Recollect  that  a  purpose  or  aim  is  often  expressed  in  English  by  the 
infinitive;  but  in  Latin  never — always  by  ut  with  the  subjunctive  for  a 
positive  axm,  by  n  e  with  the  subjunctive  for  a  negative  aim.] 

(550.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

The  general  commands  the  lieutenant  (147)  not  to  do  (=  that 
he  may  not  do)  this. — The  general  exhorted  the  soldiers  to  make 
(=  that  they  should  make)  the  attack  sharply. — The  father  be- 
seeches his  daughter  to  make  an  end  of  praying. — Some-men 
(quidam)  live  to  eat,  not  eat  to  live. — He  comes  to  see  the  gen- 
eral.— He  came  to  see  the  general. — The  Helvetians  persuade 
the  Tulingians  to  set  out  together  with  them. — The  captive 
beseeches  the  general  not  to  decide-on  any-thing  at-all-severe 
against  (in)  him  (se). — Caesar  commands  the  Gauls  (147)  to 
hring  back  {=that  they  should  bring  back)  the  deserters. — 
The  Romans,  that  they  might  not  be  surrounded  by  the  Gauls, 
began  to  fight  more  bravely. — The  commander  enjoins-it-upon 
the  lieutenant  not  to  join  battle. — The  commander  enjoined  it 
upon  thfl  lieutenant  not  to  join  battle. 


212 


SUCCESSION  OF  TENSES. 


LESSON  XC. 

Succession  of  Tenses. — tit  expressing  a  Result 

(551.)  (1.)  "We  cannot  say  in  English,  "  iJe  comes,  that  he 
might  see  the  general  ,•"  or,  "iJe  came,  that  he  may  see  the  gen- 
eral ;"  but  we  must  say,  •'  He  comes,  that  he  may  see  the  gen- 
eral," and,  "He  came,  that  he  might  see  the  general."  It  is 
obvious  that  this  tense  of  the  verb  in  the  subordinate  sentence 
depends  upon  that  of  the  principal  sentence  ;  and  this  depend- 
ence is  called  the  succession  of  tenses. 

2.  The  tenses  of  the  Latin  verb  are  divided  into  primary 
and  historical. 


(i)  Historical,  <  , 


Present 

Future. 

Pres.  Perf. 

imftt, 

amabit, 

amavit, 

he  loves. 

he  will  love. 

he  has  loved. 

Imperfect 

Pluperfect 

Perf.  Aorist 

Imabat, 

fimav6rat, 

amavit, 

le  was  loving. 

he  had  loved. 

he  loved. 

3.  The  Rule  for  the  succession  of  tenses  then  is :  If  there  be 
a  primary  tense  in  the  principal  sentence,  there  must  be  a  pri- 
mary tense  in  the  subordinate  sentence ;  if  a  historical  tense  in 
the  principal,  a  historical  tense  in  the  subordinate. 

[The  examples  in  the  preceding  lesson  illustrate  this  rale,  and  those  in 
the  present  lesson  wiU  farther  confirm  it.] 


EXERCISE. 


(552.)    Vocabulary. 

To  strive,  contend,  iiiti  (nis-  and 
nix-),  dep. 

Despair,  desperatiS,  (desperation) 
IS  (333,  R.). 

To  run  together,  concoirere  (con- 
cnrr-  and  concucurr-,  concurs-). 

Storm,  tempestas,  (tempestat)  is 
(293). 

To  vise  (as  a  storm),  cooriri  (cooi-t-, 
con-1-orIri). 

Palisade  {rampart  of  stakes)  val- 
lum, i. 


To  cut  or  tear  down,  scindSrS  (sold-, 

sciss-). 
To  begin,  incTpgre  (inc6p-,  incept-, 

in+cap6r6). 
To  afford  means  or  facilities,  dSrS 

fftcultatem. 
Deceit,  dolus,  i. 
Rather,  mSgis. 
Integrity,    probftfts,    (prObltftt)    U 

(293). 
Course,  cursQs,  us. 
Change,  commOtfttio  (onis,  333,  R.). 


UT   WITH   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE.  213 

Subordinate  Sentences  expressing  a  Result 
(553.)  Examples  and  Rules. 


Tanta  vis  probitatis  est,  dt 

earn  v61  in  hoste  diligS 

mus. 
Helvetii   ita   a   p§,tribus  suis 

didicerunt,  ii  t  mdgis  virtfite 

quam  dolo  nitantur. 


So  great  is  the  power  of  in- 
tegrity, that  we  esteem  it 
even  in  an  entmy. 
The  Helvetians  have  been  so 
taught  by  {=have  so  learn- 
ed from)  their  fathers,  that 
they  contend  (or,  as  to  con- 
tend) rather  with  valour 
than  deceit. 

(«)  These  examples  show  that  a  result  (especially  after  the 
words  such,  so,  so  great,  &c.)  is  expressed  in  English  by'  that 
with  the  indicative,  or,  as  to  with  the  infinitive ;  in  Latin,  by  ii  t 
with  the  subjunctive. 

(6)  Rule  of  Syntax. — Ut,  signifying  that,  and  introducing 

a  result,  governs  the  subjunctive. 
Rem.  U  t,  expressing  a  result,  generally  follows  the  correlative  words 
talis,  tantus  {such,  so  great);  &d6o,  sic,  ita  {so);  and  verbs 
signifying  to  accomplish,  to  briiig  to  pass,  &c. 

(554.)   Translate  into  English. 

Imperator  perficit,  uti  SequS-ni  dent  obsidSs. — Dumnorix 
perficit,  uti  Sequani  dent  obsides,  ne  itinere  (153,  a)  Hel- 
vetios  prohibeant  (548,  b) — Imperator  tanta  vi  (55,  a)  oppi- 
dum  oppugnat,  ii  t  desperatio  ^nimos  oppidanorum  o  c  c  ii  p  e  t 
(551,  3). — Imperator  tanta  vi  oppidum  oppugnavit  ii  t  desper- 
fitio  animos  oppidanorum  occupare  t. — T  a n t u s  timor  om- 
nem  exercitum  occupavit,  ii t  omniiim  animos  perturbaret. 
— Tanta  tempestas  siibito  coorta  est  {perf  aor.)  ii  t  naves 
cursum  tenere  non  p  o  s  s  e  n  t. — Imperator  t  a  n  t  a  m  sibi  (54) 
jam  in  Gallia  auctoritatem  comparaverat,  iit  undique  ad  eum 
legationes  concurrerent  (551,  3). — Galli  vallum  scindunt. — 
Galli  vallum  scindere  et  fossam  complere  incipiunt. — Galli  sic 
nosti-os  contemnunt,  iit  vallum  scindere  et  fossam  complere 
in  ci  pi  ant.  —  Oppidum  natura  (55,  a)  loci  sic  muniebatur, 
ii  t  magnam  ad  ducendum  (496)  bellum  d  S,  r  e  t  f  ^cultatem. — 
Auxiliorum  adventu  (55)  magn^  rerum  commutatio  facta  est. 


214     auo,  auiN,  auoMiNus,  with  subjunctive. 


— Horum  adventu  t  a  n  t  a  rerum  commutatio  facta  eat,  ti  t     is- 
tri  fortius  pugnarent  atque  hostes  rSpellSrent. 

(555.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

[Recollect  that  as  to  with  the  English  infinitive  must  be  transla'^jd  by 
ut  with  subjunctive.] 

The  commander  hrought-it-to  pass  that  the  Sequanians  gave 
hostages.  —  The  Sequanians  gave  hostages  that  they  would 
not  prohibit  the  Helvetians  from  (their)  journey  (153,  a). — So- 
great-a  fear  suddenly  seizes  the  whole  army,  that  it  alarms  the 
minds  of  all. — So  great  a  tempest  suddenly  arises^  that  the 
ships  can  not  hold  their  course. — The  commander  procures  for 
himself  50  great  authority  in  Italy,  that  even  the  senators  run- 
together  to  him. — The  Helvetians  begin  to  cut-down  the  bridge. 
— The  Helvetians  so  despised  our  men,  that  they  began  to  cut 
down  the  bridge. — By  the  approach  of  the  iEduans,  so  great  a 
change  was  made  that  the  Helvetians  began  to  fight  more 
bravely. — The  Helvetians  had  so  learned  from  their  fathers, 
as  to  contend  rather  with  valour  than  deceit. 


LESSON  XCI. 

Periphrastic  Conjugation,  Subjunctive. — Use  of  quo, 
quln,  quomtnus,  with  the  Subjunctive. 
(556.)  The  want  of  a  future  subjunctive  is  supplied  to  some 
extent  by  the  periphrastic  conjugation,  formed  by  combining 
the  participles  in  riis  and  diis  with  the  subjunctive  tenses  of 
esse,  to  be. 


ACTIVE. 


Pres. 
Imperf. 
Perf. 
Pluperf. 


ftmaturus  sim,         /  may  be  about  to  love. 
amaturas  essem,     /  migkt  be  about  to  love. 
toiaturus  fu6rim,    /  may  have  been  about  to  love. 
ftmaturus  fuiss6m,  /  misrht  have  been  about  to  love. 


Pres. 
Imperf. 
Perf. 
Pluperf. 


amandus  sim,  /  may  be  to  be  loved  [one  must  love  me) 

fimandus  ess6m,  /  misrht  be  to  be  loved. 

amandus  fuerim,  /  may  have  been  to  be  loved. 

amandus  fiiissem,  /  might  have  been  to  be  loved. 


Esse  (to  be). 


Pres. 
Imperf. 


f  fltttrus  sim, 
f  uturus  essem, 


/  Ttiay  be  about  to  be. 
I  might  be  about  to  be. 


auo,  auiN,  auoMiNus,  with  subjunctive.     215 


EXERCISE. 


(557.)   Vocabulary. 

To  hold  hack,  restrain,  retinere  (re- 

tinu-,  rgtent-,  re+t6nere). 
To  stand  in  the  way,  prevent,  ob- 

stare  (obstit-,  obstat-,  ob+stare). 
To  sustain,  sustiiiere  (tinu-,  teut-, 

Bub+tenere). 
Novelty,  ^ovitas,  (novitat)  is  (293). 
To  decree,  consciscere  (consciv-,  con- 

scit-). 
To  commit  suicide,  sTb!  mortem  cob- 

scisc6re   {=  to  decree  death  to 

one's  self). 


Cowardice,  ignavia,  se. 

To  take  away  from,  erip6r6  (lo-^ 
eripu-,  crept-) ;  governs  ace.  and 
abl. 

To  train,  educate,  educarS  (av-,  at-). 

To  deceive,  fallere  (ffifeU-,  fals-). 

It  was  Caesar's  fault,  Per  Caesi- 
rem  stetit  (=it  stood  through  Cae- 
sar). 

To  finish,  perficgre  (perfec-,  per- 
fect-). 

Suspicion,  suspicio,  6ms  (333,  B,.). 


(558.)  Examples  and  Rules. 


{a)  CsBsar  erects  forts,  that 
he  may  the  more  easily 
keep  off  the  Helvetians. 


Caesar  castella  communit,  quo 
f  a  c  i  1  i  u  s  Helvetios  prohib- 
ere  p  o  s  s  i  t. 


(a)  Quo  is  used  to  express  a  purpose  (instead  of  ii  t),  espe- 
cially when  a  comparative  enters  the  sentence. 

Caesar  castella  communit  ut  possit  {that  he  may,  &c.). 
Caesar  castellfi  communit  quo  facilius  possit   {that  he  may  tnort 
easily,  &c.). 


(6)  (1)  There  is  no  one  but 
thinks ; 
or, 
There  is  no  one  who  does 
not  thinJc. 

(2)  There  is  no  one  so 
brave  as  not  to  be  con- 
founded. 

(3)  It  is  not  doubtful  but 
that   the   soldiers  will 

fight  bravely. 

(4)  I  did  not  doubt  that 
the  soldiers  would  fight 
bravely. 

(5)  They  could  not  be 
restrained  from  hurl- 
ing darts  (=  but  that 
they  should  hurl  darts). 


Nemo  est  q  u  i  n  p  u  t  e  t. 


Nemo  est  tam  fortis  qu!n 
perturbetur. 

Non  dubium  est  q  u  i  n  milites 
fortiter  pugnatiiri  sint. 

Non  diibitabam  quin  milites 
fortiter  pugnatiiri  es- 
sent. 

Non  poterant  rfitineri  quin 
tel&  coniic^rent. 


Nihil    impSdit,    quominus 
hoc  fftciat. 


216        dUO,  QUIN,  aUOMINUS,  WITH    SUBJUNCTIVE. 

(6)  Qui  n  is  used  in  the  sense  of  "  but,''  or  "  as  not,''  after 
negative  sentences ;  and  in  the  sense  of  "  that  not,"  and  "  that,'* 
after  non  dubito,  non  dubium  est,  &c. ;  in  the  sense  of 
*'-from"  (.—  but  that)  after  verbs  of  restraining,  &c. 

(c)  (1)  What  stands  in  the   Quid  obstat  quominus  Ju- 
way  of  Julius   being       lius  sit  beatus? 
happy  {=  what  stands 
in  the  way   in  order 
that  Julius  may  not  be 
happy)? 
(2)  Nothing  hinders  him 
from  doing  this  (= no- 
thing impedes,  in  order 
that  he  may  not). 
(c)  Qudminus  is  used  (in  preference  to  ne)  after  verbs 
of  hindering,  preventing,  standing  in  the  way  of,  &c.     (It  can 
generally  be  rendered  into  English  by  of,  or  from,  with  a  parti- 
ciple, as  above.) 

■    (559.)   Translate  into  English. 

(a)  duo  (=  in  order  that,  used  instead  of  fi t,  with  comparatives). 

Caesar  milites  hortatus  est  ut  fortes  essent.— Caesar  milites 
hortatus  est  quo  fortiores  essent. — Eo  opere  perfecto 
(456)  Caesar  praesidia  disponit,  castella  communit,  quo  facil- 
ius,  si  Helvetii  ti-ansire  conentur  (542,  b,  2)  prohibere  possit. 
— Scrips!,  ut  auctoiitatem  haberem. — Scripsi  quo  in  suadendo 
(488)  plas  auctoiitatis  (186,  a)  haberem. — Auxilium  rogant, 
lit  hostiiim  copias  sustineant. — Subsidium  rogant,  quo  fS,- 
cilius  hostium  copias  sustineant. 
{b)  auln  {=  but  that). 

Nemo  est  tam  fortis  quin  rei  novitate  (55,  a)  perturbetur. 
— Orgetorix  mortuus  est,  neque  abest  suspicio  quin  ipse  sib! 
mortem  consciv6rit. — Helvetii  non  diibitantquin  Romani 
^duis  {abl.,  verb  of  depriving)  libertatem  ereptiiri  sint. — 
Non  dubium  est  quin  cives,  iibi  {when)  patriS,  in  periciilo 
futura  sit  (534,  e),  fortiter  pugnaturi  sint. — Non  dubito 
quin  puerumbene  educaturus  sis. — Turpe  estfalli. — Tur- 
pius  est  fallere. — Non  dubium  est  quin  turpius  sit  failure 
quam  falli.  —  Gennani  retineri  non  pot^rant  quin  in  nostros 
tela  conjicfirent. 


aUUM   WITH   SUBJUNCTIVE.  317 

(c)  Q, u  6  m  i  n  u  s  (=  iri  order  that  not). 
Per  Labienum  stetit  quominus  RomanI  oppidum  occupa- 
rent Nostrorum  ignavia  obstabat  quominus  hostes  super- 

arentur. — Non  me  impedies  quominus  id  f  aciam. — Sen- 
ectus  non  impedit  quominus  litterarum  studia  tenearaus. 

(560.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

[Remember  the  rule   for  the  Succession  of  Tenses  (551,  3).] 
(a)  duo. 
Caesar,  having  finished  the  work  (=  the  work  being  finished), 
exhorted  the  soldiers  to  he  of  a  braver  spirit  (fortiore  animo). — 
I  ask  your  assistance,  that  I  may  do  this  the  more  easily. 
{b)  auin. 
There  is  no  one  who  does  not  think  that  the  wise  are  always 
happy. — It  is  not  doubtful  that  Caesar  will  cross  the  Rhine. — I 
do  not  doubt  that  my  father  will  come. — I  was  not  doubting  that 
you  had  educated  the  boys  well. 
(c)  duominus. 
Nothing  hinders  me  from  being  happy. — It  was  the  fault  of 
the  commander  that  the  soldiers  did  not  fight  bravely. — The 
cowardice  of  the  commander  stood  in  the  way  of  our  taking- 
po8session-of  the  town. 


LESSON  XCII. 

Use  of  Qutim,  with  the  Subjunctive. 

(561.)  The  conjunction  quum  (sometimes  written  cum) 
has  two  uses :  (1)  to  denote  time  simply  {when,  while) ;  (2)  to 
denote  a  cause,  or  reason  {since).  The  former  is  called  quum 
temporal,  the  latter  quum  causal. 

EXERCISE. 

(562.)   Vocabulary. 


To  contemplate,  contemplari  (at-), 

dep. 
To  perceive,  anTmadvert6rS   (vert-, 

vers-,  animum-f  ad+vertere). 
To  delay,  tardarg  (av-,  at-). 


To  get  sight  of,  conspfcgre  (spex-, 

spect-). 
Incessant,     conti.vuous,    continens, 

(nent)  is  (107). 
Of  right.  jusHt/,  iixr&  [abl.  of  jus). 

T 


ai8 


aUUM   WITH  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


To  order,  jubere,  does  not  take  ut  \  Destruction,  interitus,  fls. 


with  subj.,  but  ace.  with  inf. ;  he 
ordered  them  to  await  =  jussit  eos 
expectarg. 


To  make-haste,  matuitire  (av^,  at-) 
To  announce,  uuntiarg  (av-,  at-). 
To  meet,  conv6nire  (ven-,  vent-). 


Quuni  ccelum  contempla- 
mur,  Dei  magnitudinem 
admiramur. 


(563.)  Examples  and  Rules, 
{a)  When  we  contemplate  the 

firmament,  we  wonder  at 

the  greatness  of  God. 

{a)  Rule  of  Syntax. — Quum,  when  used  simply  to  express 
the  time  (especially  with  the  primary  tenses),  is  followed 
by  the  indicative. 

(6)  Ccesar^  when  he  had  con-    Caesar,  quum  Pompeium  vi 
quered    (  =  having    con-        cisset,  in  Asiam  trajecit. 
quered)    Pompey,   crossed 
over  into  Asia. 

{b)  Rule  of  Syntax. — Quum  temporal  is  followed  by  the 
imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive,  if  the  events  de- 
scribed depend  on  each  other,  and  especially  when  the 
aorist  perfect  is  used  in  the  principal  sentence. 

[In  the  above  example,  the  verb  trajecit,  of  the  principal  sentence, 
is  in  the  aorist  perfect.  In  all  such  cases,  the  subordinate  sentence  with 
quum  can  be  rendered  by  the  English  participle,  as  in  the  example 
above,  and  in  the  two  following.] 


The  preetor,  having  come 
(=when  he  had  come) 
into  the  forum,  perceived. 

The  commander,  having  got 
sight  of  the  enemy,  or- 
dered. 

(c)  Since  these  things  are  so. 

Since  they  cannot  defend 
themselves. 

Although  the  soldiers  were 
retarded  by  rains,  yet  they 
overcame  all  (obstacles). 


Praetor,  quum  in  forum  v© - 
nisset,  animadvertit(perf.). 

ImpSrator,  quum  hostes  con 
spexissit,  jussit. 


Quse  q  u  u  m  ita  s  i  n  t. 

Quum  se  defendere  non 
possint. 

Milites,  quum  imbribus  tar- 
da r  e  n  t  u  r,  t&men  omnift 
superaverunt. 

(c)  Rule  of  Syntax. — Q  u  u  m  causal  (signifying  since,  or 
although)  is  always  followed  by  the  subjunctive. 


aUUM   WITH   SUBJUNCTIVE.  219 

(564.)   Translate  into  English. 

1.  duum  temporal,  with  subjnnctive  (563,  b). 

Caesar,  quum  id  nuntiatum  esset,  matruravit  ab  urbe 
proficisci. — Quum  legio  decima  constitisset,  omnes  hnstes 
ad  eiim  locum  contenderunt. — Quum  legatus  ad  oppidum  a  c  - 
cessisset,  pueri  mulieresque  pacem  ab  Romanis  petiverunt. 
— Quum  Caesar  ad  oppidum  accessisset,  oppidam  pacem 
ab  eo  petierunt. — Quum  imperator  signum  d  e  d  i  s  s  e  t,  milites 
in  hostes  impetum  fecerunt. — Csesar,  quum  Gallos  vicisset, 
in  Italiam  contendit  {per/.). — Quum  legati  Caesarera  in  itinera 
convenissent,  eos  suum  adventum  expectare  jussit. 

2.  duum  causal  {since,  or  although),  with  subjunctive  (563,  c). 
Milites,  quum  frigore  et  imbribus  tardarentur,  tamen 

continent!  labore  (55,  a)  omnia  superaverunt.  —  Cicero  jur6 
pater  p§,triae  dictus  est,  quum  urbem  ab  interitu  servasset.* 
— iEdui,  quum  se  suaque  ab  Helve tiis  defendere  non  pbs- 
s  i  n  t,  legates  ad  Caesarem  mittunt,  rogatum  (379)  auxilium. — 
Quum  omnes  honunes  mortales  s  i  n  t,  dtiam  tu  morieris. 

(565.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

1.  duum  temporal,  with  subjunctive  (563,  b). 

The  ambassadors  having  asked  (=  when  the  ambassadors  had 
asked)  peace  of  Caesar,  he  ordered  them  to  await  his  coming. — 
Caesar  having  ordered  th'em  {=  when  Ccesar  had  ordered  them) 
to  await  his  coming,  (they)  obeyed. — The  lieutenant,  when  that 
was  (=had  been)  announced,  returned  to  the  citadel. — The 
fifth  legion  having  halted,  the  enemy  made  an  attack  upon 
them. — The  praetor,  having  come  into  the  forum,  saw  the  cap- 
tives.— The  boy,  having  approached  the  wood,  heard  a  voice. 

2.  duum  causal,  with  subjunctive  (563,  c). 

Since  these  things  are  so,  let  us  believe  (528,  6, 1). — Nations, 
when  they  cannot  defend  themselves,  ask  assistance.  —  The 
scout,  though  he  was  delayed  by  the  cold,  came  to  the  camp.— 
Since  Caesar  took- away  (eripere)  liberty  from  the  iEduans, 
they  rightly  feared. 

•  Contracted  from  serv  avis  set. 


S20 


RELATIVE  SENTENCEa. 


LESSON  XCIII. 

Use  of  the  Subjunctive  in  Relative  Sentences. 

(566.)  The  relative  pronoun  often  takes  the  place  of  a  con- 
junction in  introducing  a  sentence,  and  is  therefore  followed  by 
the  subjunctive.  The  following  examples  illustrate  some  of 
these  uses. 

You  err  who  think. 

They  sent  men  who  should  seek  for 

peace. 
I  am  not  he  who  can  be  delighted 
with  vices. 


(a)  You  eiT  because  you  think  = 

(b)  They  sent  men  to   seek  for 
peace = 

(c)  I  am  not  such  a  man  as  to  be 
delighted  with  vices  = 


EXERCISE. 

(567.)   Vocabulary. 

A  herald,  a  proclaimer,  praeco,  (prae 

con)  is  (333). 
A  Nervian,  Nervius,  i. 
It  pleased,  plScuit  (with  dat.). 
At  length,  demum. 
Affection,  affectio,  (tion)  is  (333,  R.) 
To  hurt,  nocere  (with  dat.). 


To  be  present,  adess6  (ad+esse). 
To  bear,  ferre  [irreg.). 
Fortunate,  fortunatus,  fi,  tlm. 
A  youth,  adolescens,  (cent)  is  (m. 

and  f.,  25,  a). 
Innocence,  innbcentia,  sb. 
Fit  far,  xdoneus,  a,  um  (with  dot.). 


(568.)  Examples  and  Rule, 


(a)  Hannibal  did  wrong  in 
wintering  {=  because  he 
wintered)  at  Capua. 


Male  fecit  Hannibal,  qui  Ca- 
pusB  hiemaverit  {=■  whx) 
wintered  at  Capua). 


Here  qui  introduces  the  ground  or  cause  of  the  judgment  that  Hanni- 
bal erred. 

(6)   They  send  ambassadors    Legates  mittunt,  qui  dicant. 

to  say  {=who  may  say). 
They  sent   ambassadors    to 

say  {=:who  might  say). 
Here  qui  (=ut  ii)  introduces  a. purpose. 


Legates  miserunt,  qui  dicS- 
rent. 


(c)  You  are  not  the  man  to 
be  ignorant. 

He  ordered  all  (those)  who 
could  bear  arms  to  be 
present. 


Non    is    Ss,    qui    nescias 

(=  you  are  not  he  who  can 

be  ignorant). 
Omnes    (eos  understood)   qui 

arma  feiTe  p  o  s  s  e  n  t,  adessS 

jussit. 


RELATIVE   SENTENCES.  221 

In  these  examples,  qui  introduces  a  nearer  definition  of  the  demon- 
strative, which  is  expressed  or  implied. 

(d)  Rule  of  Syntax. — The  subjunctive  is  used  in  a  relative 
sentence  to  express  a  ground,  a  purpose,  or  to  give  a 
nearer  definition  of  a  demonstrative  expressed  or  implied. 

Rem.l.  Talis,  tarn,  tantus,  it  a,  &c.,  maybe  these  demonstra. 

tives,  aa  well  as  is,  ea,  id. 
2.  The  relative  to  express  a  purpose  is  very  common,  especially  in 

Caesar,  and  should  be  thoroughly  studied  and  practised. 

(569.)   Translate  into  English, 

[Remember  the  Tnile  for  the  Succession  of  Tenses  (551,  3).] 
(a)  dui,  ground,  cause,  or  reason. 

Erras  qui  censeas  Deum  esse  injustura.  — - Fortunatiis 
fuit  Alexander,  qui  virtutis  suae  Homerum  prseconem  (225,  a) 
invenerit. — O  fortunate  adolescens,  qui  tuae  virtutis  H6- 
merum  prseconem  i  n  v  e  n  e  r  i  s. — Nervii  incusaverunt  reliquos 
Belgas  q u i  se  popiilo  Romano  (54)  dedidissent. 
{b)  dui, purpose. 

Eripiunt  aliis  (153,  a)  quod  aliis  (54)  largiantiir. — 
liCgatos  ad  Romanes  miserunt,  qui  peterent  pacem. — Caesar 
equitatum  praemittit,  qui*  videant  quas  in  partes  hostes  itSr 
faciant  (534,  d). — ImpSrator  misit  exploratores,  qui  cognos- 
cerent  qualis  esset  (534,  d)  natura  mentis.  —  Caesar  copiaa 
suas  in  proximum  collem  subduxit,  equitatumque,  qui  s  u  s  - 
tineret  hostium  imp^tum,  misit. — Ariovistus  omnes  copias, 
qufe  nostros  perterrerent,  et  munitione  (153,  a)  pr6- 
hiberent,  misit. — Placuit  Caesari  iit  ad  Ariovistum  legatoar 
mitteret  (548,  a). — Placuit  Caesari  iit  ad  Ariovistum  legates 
mitteret,  qui  a,be6  postiilarent,  ut  aiiquem  locum  collo- 
quio  (54)  diceret  (548,  a). — Tiim  demum  Ariovistus  partem 
suarum  copiarum  q u ae  castra  oppugnarent  misit. 
(c)  dui,  defining  a  demonstrative  [express  or  implied). 

Imp^rator  omnes  cives  qui  arma  ferre  p  o  s  s  e  n  t  adesse 
jussit. — Legatus  poposcit  (411,  a)  obsides,  arma,  servos,  qui  ad 
Helvetios  perfugissent.  —  Milites  ea  quae  imperarentut 


*  Equitatum  [cavalry)  being  a  noun  of  multitude,  the  relative  qui 
may  be  in  the  pluraL 

T2 


222  RELATIVE   SENTENCES. 

Kbenter  f ecerunt. — Non  talis  siim  qui  te  fa  11a m. — Inno- 
centia  est  afFectio  talis  animi,  quae  noceat  nemini  (54). 

(570.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

(a)  Caesar  did  badly  in-crossing  {who  crossed,  perf.  subj.)  the 
Khine. — They  err  who  think  that  the  soul  is  not  immortal. — 
The  father  censured  his  son  for  setting-out*  (=  who  had  set  out, 
plup.  subj.)  from  the  city. 

(b)  Caesar  sends  forward  scouts,  to  choose  {=  who  may  choose) 
a  place  fit  for  the  camp. — Caesar  sent  ambassadors  to  Ariovistus 
to  defnand  {=who  should  demand). — The  general  brings  back 
his  forces  to  the  hill,  and  sends  forward  the  cavalry  to  sustain 
{=  who  may  sustain)  the  attack. 

•  Proficiscor. 


§  17. 
ORATIO  OBLIQUA.    (XCIV.) 

LESSON  XCIV. 
Or  alio  Ohliqua  {Oblique  Narration). 

(571.)  In  relating  the  words  of  another,  we  may  either,  (1) 
represent  him  as  speaking  in  the  first  person,  and  give  his  words 
precisely  as  they  were  uttered ;  e.  g.,  "  He  said,  '■I  will  come ;'  " 
or,  (2)  we  may  state  what  he  said  in  a  narrative  form ;  e.  g.^ 
•'He  said  that  he  would  come.^^  The  former  is  called  Oratio 
recta  {direct  narration) ',  the  latter,  Oratio  obliqua  {ob- 
lique narration). 

^^  The  example  above  given  shows  that  the  moods  must  be  different 
in  the  two  modes  of  narration. 

(572.)  The  sentences  introduced  in  the  oratio  obliqua 
are  ei^er  principal  or  subordinate  ;  e.  g., 

Ariovistus  said  that  he  would  not  wage  war  upon  the 
^duans,  if  they  paid  the  tribute  yearly. 

In  this  example, the  sentence  in  spaced  printing  is  the 
principal  sentence  ;  the  sentence  in  italic  the  subordinate 
sentence. 


EXERCISE. 


(573.)  Vocabulary. 

To  bring  upon,  to  wage,  inferre  (il- 

lat-).  irreg. 
Tribute,  stipendium,  i. 
Yearly,  quotannis  (used  as  adv.). 
To  pay,  pend6r6  (pep end-,  pens-). 
To  show,  point  oict,  ostendere  (os- 

tend-,  ostens-,  and  ostent-). 
To  excel,  praestarS  (praestit-,  praes- 

tit-,  and  praestat-). 
Because, /pro^t&reA  qpJod. 


To  get,  to  gain  for  another,  concfl- 

iar6  (av-,  at-). 
To  get  possession  of,  potiri,  (pfttit) 

dep.  (governs  gen.  or  abl.). 
Very  easy,  perfScilis,  e  (with  dot.). 
AffirrHj  confirmare  (av-,  at-). 
I^^  The  Helvetians   intend,  Hel- 

vetils   est  m  Snimo  (=  it  is  in 

mind  to  the  Helvetians). 


2S4  ORATIO   OBLiaUA. 


(574.)  Examples  and  Rules. 


{a)  Ariovistus  said  that  he 
would  not  wage  war  upon 
the  jEduans. 


Ariovistus  dixit,  se  ^duis 
bellum  non  illaturum 
esse. 

{a)  Rule  of  Syntax. — In  principal  sentences  in  oratio 
o  b  1  i  q  u  a,  the  accusative  with  Hie  infinitive  is  used. 
Kem.  When  they  express  a  command  or  wish,  the  subj.  is  used. 
{h)  Ariovistus   said   that  he  ^  Ariovistus   dixit,    s  e  iE  d  u  i  s 
would  not  wage  war  upon  \      bellum  non  esse  illa- 
the  JEduans,  if  they  paid  \      t  u  r  u  m,  5I  stipendium  quot- 
the  tribute  yearly.  j      annis  penderent. 

{b)  In  subordinate  sentences  in  oratio  obliqua,  the  sub- 
junctive  is  alv^rays  used  {e.  g..,  p  e  n  d  e  r  e  n  t). 


(c)  The  lieutenant  denied 
that  he  had  crossed  the 
Wiine. 

He  denies  that  he  can  give. 


Legatus  negavit  se  Rhenum 
transisse.* 

Negat  seposs6dare. 


(575.)  Ti^anslate  into  English. 

Caesar  dixit  se,  postquam  hostes  fusi  essent,  castra 
muniturum  esse. — De  decima  legione  Caesar  non  dubitabat. 
—  Caesar  dixit,  se  de  decima  legione  ijon  dubitare. — 
Caesar  dixit,  se  cum  sola  decima  legione  esse  ittirum.f 
— Caesar  dixit  se  cum  sola  decima  legione,  de  qua  non  diibi- 
taret,  esse  iturum. — Imperator  dixit,  maximas  nationes 
pulsas  superatasque  esse. — Helve tiis  (54)  perfacile  erat 
totius  Galliae  imperio  {dbl.)  potiri. — Dumnorix  ostendit,  Hel- 
vetiis  perfacile  esse,  quum  virtute  (55,  a)  omnibus 
{dat.)  praestarent,  totius  Galliae  imperio  potiri. — Dumnorix 
ipse  Castico  (54)  regnum  conciliaturus  erat. — Dumnorix  con- 
firmat  se  Castico  regnum  conciliatiirum  esse. — Hel- 
vetiis  est  in  animo  iter  per  provinciam  f  acere  ;  aliud  iter 
habent  nullum. — Sibi  esse  in  animo  (573,  i^"),dicunt  Hel- 
v^tii,  sine  ullo  maleficio  iter  per  provinciam  f acere,  prop- 
terea  quod  aliiid  iter  habeant  nullum. — Imperator  non 
potest  iter  Helvetiis  (54)  per  provinciam  dare.  —  Imperator 

*  Past  infill,  of  transirg.  t  Fut.  infin  of  !r6,  to  go. 


ORATIO  OBLiaUA.  225 

nggat  se,  morS  ^t  exemplo  popiili  Romani,  posse  iter  Hel- 
vetiis  per  provinciam  dare. 

(576.)   Translate  into  Latin, 

Caesar  said  that  he,  after  Pompey  was  conquered,  would 
cross-over  into  Asia.  —  Caesar  had  full  confidence  in 
{==did  not  doubt  concerning)  the  fourth  legion. — Caesar  said 
that  he  .would  attack  the  town  with  the  fourth  legion 
alone,  in  which  he  had  full  confidence. — Cicero  said  that  the 
greatest  cities  had  he  en  attacJce  d. — The  lieutenant 
affirms  that  he  will  lead  the  army  across  the 
Rhine,  if  the  enemy  attempt  to  hinder  (them)  (prohibere). — 
The  Helvetians  say  that  they  intend  (573,  ^^)  to  seek 
peace  of  Ctesar. 


§  18 
IMPERSONAL  VERBS.    (XCV.— XCVI.) 


LESSON  XCV. 
Impersonals. — Pudet,  Piget,  TcEdet,  SfC. 

(577.)  Impersonal  verbs  are  those  which  have  no  subject, 
and  take  the  pronoun  it  before  them  in  English;  e.  g.,  pluit, 
it  rains. 

(578.)  (a)  Some  impersonals  are  never  used  in  the  personal 
form;  e.g.,  piget,  it  grieves,  &c.;  {b)  others  are  simply  the  third 
person  of  personal  verbs :  e.  g.,  placet,  it  pleases  (placeo,  I 
please),  (c)  Again,  the  third  person  singular  of  many  intran- 
sitive verbs  is  used  impersonally  in  the  passive  :  c  u  r  r  1 1  ii  r, 
they  run  (it  is  run) ;  I  am  envied,  invideturmihi;  nun- 
ciatiim  est,  it  was  told. 

(579.)  {a)  The  following  impersonals  (which  express  certain 
feelings)  take  the  accusative  of  the  person  and  genitive  of  the 
cause  of  the  feeling. 

Piggt,  piguit,  it  grieves, 

it  shames, 


Pude  t,  pudult,  .  , 

i  one  IS  ashamed. 

Pcenitet,  poBnituit,  it  repents. 

Tasdet,  pertJBSum  est,      it  wearies,  disgusts. 

M  i  s  6  r  6 1,  one  pities. 

Your  foUy  grieves  m£.  [Me  pig6t  stultitiae  tuts  (=  it 

grieves  vie  of  your  folly). 

(6)  Sometimes  the  cause  or  object  of  the  feeling  is  expressed 
by  the  infinitive,  or  a  sentence  with  quod. 


/  am  not  ashamed  of  having  done 
this. 

I  repent  of  offending  you. 


Non  pudet  mfi  hoc  f  e  c  i  s  s  g  (=  zi 
does  not  shame  me  to  have  done 
this). 

Pcenitet  mo  quod  te  offendl 
{i=.it  repents  me  that  I  have  qf. 
fended  yo%i). 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS.  227 


EXERCISE. 

(580.)    Vocabulary. 


Indolent,  ignav-us,  a,  um. 
Folly,  ineptiae,  arum  (57,  R.). 
To  sin,  peccare  (av-,  at-). 
Business,  ii6gotium,  i. 
Undertaken,  susceptus,  a,  um  (part, 
of  suscipere). 


To  confess,  fateri  (fass-),  dep. 
Because,  since,  quoniftm  [conj.). 
Almost,  paene  [adv.). 
Some  day,  aliquand6  {adv^. 
Innocent,    imiocens,    (irmocent)    is 
Lot,  sors,  (sort)  is  (293).  [(107). 


(581.)   Translate  into  English. 

{a)  Ignavum  poenitebit  aliquando  ignaviae. — Non  poeni- 
tet  me  hujus  consiliT. — Tui*  me  miseret. — Eos  inep- 
t i a r u  m  poenitebat. — Pcenitebat  me  peccat i. — Miseret  t e 
aliorum,  tui*  nee  miseret,  nee  piidet. — Nos  miseret  ca- 
lamitatis  tuae. — Nunquam  Csesarem  suscepti  negotii 
pertaesum  est. — Me  civitatis  morum   piget,  taedetque. 

(6)  Ilium  poenitet  quod  me  offenderit.  —  Socratem 
non  piiduit  fateri  se  multas  res  nescire. — T  e  id  piiduit 
face  re.  —  N5n  poenitet  me  vixisse,  quoniam  non  frustra 
vixi. — Q u e  m  poenitet  peccasse,  psene  est  innocens. 

(582.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

{a)  Thou  wilt  repent  of  thy  folly. — He  will  be  ashamed  of 
his  indolence.  —  We  shall  be  ashamed  of  thee.  —  "We  pitied 
them. — He  was  ashamed  of  us. — We  shall  never  repent  of  our 
industry. — The  boy  will  some-day  be  ashamed  of  his  indolence. 
— Thou  wilt  some-day  repent  of  thy  folly. — We  are  weary  of 
life. — He  was  ashamed  of  the  citizens. — I  am  ashamed  of  you 
and  your  ignorance.  —  Many  are  grieved  (at)  their  lot  {gen.) 
(=  It  grieves  many  of  their  lot). — I  am  not  only  grieved  at,  but 
also  (sed  etiam)  ashamed  of,  my  folly  (=It  not  only  grieves, 
but  also  shames  me  of  my  folly). 

(&)  I  repent  of  having-sinned. — I  am  ashamed  of  doing  this. 
— A  wise  man  is  not  ashamed  to  confess  that  he  is  ignorant-of 
many  things. — I  am  weary  of  living  (vivere) . — I  repent  of  hav- 
ing lived  in- vain. — The  boy  repents  of  having  offended  (quod, 
with  perf.  suhj.)  the  master. — The  young  man  is  ashamed  of 
having  lived  in- vain. — The  general  repented  of  having  moved 
(inf.)  the  camp. — The  Helvetians  repented  of  having  crossed 
(inf.)  the  river. — The  barbarians  repented  of  having  approached 
{inf.)  the  rampart  (use  ad  before  the  accusative). 

*  Gen-oitn. 


228 


IMPERSONAL  VERB3 


LESSON  XCVI. 
Impersonal  Verbs,  continued, 
(583.)   Vocabulary. 


Ought,  it  behooves,  oportet,  6bat, 
uit,  &c.  (with  ace.  and  inf.). 

It  is  hecomi7ig,  dScet  (with  ace.  and 
inf.). 

It  pleases,  placet,  placuit,  &c.  (with 
dat). 

It  is  of  importance,  it  interests,  in- 
terest (with  gen.). 

It  concerns,  it  matters,  refert  (with 


It  is  agreeable,  libet,  or  lubet  (with 

dat.). 

It  is  allowed,  lawful  [one  must),  li- 
cet (licuit  and  licitum  est),  dat. 

It  happens,  contingit  [dot.).  AccidFt 
(used  rather  of  evil  accidents). 

It  is  expedient,  expedit  {dot.). 

With  my  pei-mission,  mea  voluntata 
{abl.,  55,  a). 


gen.). 

(584.)  Examples  and  Rules, 


Pueros    oportet    diligentes 
esse   {=.it  behooves  boys  to 
be  diligent). 
D  6  c  e  t     verecundum      essS 
&d61escentem. 

(a)  (3  p  o  r  t  e  t  and  d  e  c  e  t  are  followed  by  the  accusative 
and  infinitive. 

[H^*  Oportet  is  also  followed  by  the  subjunctive.] 


(a)  Boys  ought  to  be  dili- 
gent. 

It  becomes  a  young  man  to 
be  modest. 


Majori  parti  placuit  castrii 

defendere. 
Placuit  Caesari  iit  S,d  Ario- 

vistum  legates  mitteret. 


(b)  (1)  It  pleased  the  major- 
ity to  defend  the  camp. 
(2)  Ccesar  determined 
{==it  pleased  Ccesar)  to 
send  ambassadors  to 
Ariovistus. 

{h)  Placet  (expressing  a  purpose)  may  be  followed  by  tlio 
dative,  with  (1)  the  infinitive,  or  (2)  the  subjunctive  with  iit. 


(c)  I  may  go  (=  it  is  allowed 

to  me  to  go). 
You  may  go. 
I  might  have  gone  (=  it  was 

allowed  to  me  to  go). 
I  may  be  idle. 
I  do  not  choose  {=it  is  not 

agreeable  to  me). 


Mihi  ire  licet. 

Tibi  ire  licet. 
Mihi  ire  licuit. 

Mihi  otioso  esse  1  i  c  e  ti 
Non  libet  mihi. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS,  229 

(c)  Licet,  lib  St,  and,  in  short,  all  impersonals  which  admit 
to  or  for  after  them  in  English,  are  followed  by  the  dative. 


(d)  It  concerns  all  (=:it  is 

the  interest  of  all). 
It  concerns  me. 
It  is  your  concern. 
It  is  my  business. 


Interest  omnium. 

Mea  interest. 
Tua  refert. 
Mea  refert. 


(d)  Interest  governs  the  genitive ;  but  when  a  personal 
pronoun  is  to  be  used,  the  possessive  ablative  (mea,  tua,  &c.) 
is  used  instead  of  the  genitive  (mei,  tui,  &c.).  Refert  is 
rarely  used  except  with  these  ablative  forms. 

(585.)   Translate  into  English. 

Omnium  interest  vera  {accus.pl.)  dicere.  —  Interest 
mea  recte  facere. — Non  libet  mihi  praelium  committere. — 
Caesari  non  placuit  praelium  committere.  —  Interest  mea 
hoc  (accus.)  scribere.  —  Legatus  petebat,  ut  sibi  discedere 
liceret. — Expedit  reipublicsB  (Ja^,584,  c). — Tibi  licet 
id  facere.  —  Mea  voluntate  tibi  id  facere  licet. — Helvetii 
rogant  ut  (548,  a)  Caesaris  voluntate  id  facere  lie  eat. — CaesS,- 
rem  oportet  ad  Ariovistum  venire. — Ariovistus  dixit;  CaesS,- 
rem  oportere  (574,  a)  ad  se  venire. — Placuit  Caesari  ut 
dScimam  legionem  mitteret.  —  Amicitiam  immortalem  esse 
oportet.  —  Mihi  negligenti  esse  non  licet.  —  Nobis  venire 
licuit. — Liberorum  (65,  R.)  interest  parentes  vivere  et 
salvos  esse. — Tibi  ignavo  esse  non  licet. — Peccare  nemini 
lice  t. — D  e  c  e  t  te  esse  diligentem. 

(586.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Boys  ought  to  be  modest  (584,  a). — You  ought  to  do  this. — 
You  ought  to  have  done  this  (oportuit,  with  pres.  inf.^ 
f&cere).  —  It  becomes  us  to  follow  nature. — It  becomes  a 
young  man  to  love  his  parents. — The  general  determined  (=  it 
pleased  the  general)  to  make  the  attack. — The  Helvetians  de 
termined  to  send  ambassadors  to  Caesar.  —  You  may  do  this 
(584,  c). — You  may  not  do  this. — I  do  not  choose  (=it  is  not 
agreeable  to  me)  to  ride-on-horseback. — I  do  not  choose  to  come 
to  the  city. — It  is  every-body's  interest  (=  it  interests  all)  to  do 
rightly  (584,  d). — It  is  my  business  to  keep  (my)  word  (fides). 
— You  are  not  allowed  to  come. — We  ought  to  praise  the  brave. 

u 


§  19. 
IRREGULAR  VERBS.    (XCVII.— CII.) 


LESSON  XCVIL 

Possum f  Posset  Pot-ui,  to  he  able,  (can), 

(587.)  Pos-sum  is  compounded  of  pot-is,  able,  and  the 
verb  sum.  The  t  before  s  is  changed  to  s ;  e.  g.,  pot-siim, 
pos-siim;  pot-sunt,  pos-sunt. 


INDICATIVE. 


Pres.     Ipos-siim.  |  p6t-es.     |p6t-est.     Ipos-sumus.   Ipot-estis.  [pos-sunt. 


Imp.,  p6t-6ram;  Perf.,  p6t-ui;  Plup.,  p6t-ueram;  Fut,  p6t-er6;  Put. 
Per/.,  p6t-u6r6 ;  all  regular. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Pres.     Ipos-sim.     pos-sls. 
ImpeTf.\pos-a&m.    posses. 


pos-sit. 
pos-set. 


pos-simus. 
semus. 


pos-sitis.    possint, 


pos-setis 


Perf.,  p6t-u6rim ;  Plup.,  p6t-uiss6m :  regular 


pos-sent. 


Injin.  Pres.,  pos-s6 ;  Perf.,  p6t-uiss6 ;  Part.,  pot-ens  (used  only  as  an 
adjective). 


EXERCISE. 


(588.)  Vocabulary, 

Laughter,  risus,  us,  m. 

To  sow,  sfirSrS  (sev-,  sat-). 

Good  deed,  act  of  kindness,  b6n6f  i- 

cium,  i. 
Reap,  mgtfirS  (messu-,  mess-). 
To  do  good  to,  to  benefit,  pr6dess6 

(prof  U-,  prd+sum)  ;  governs  dat. 
Hang  over,  impendere. 

(589.)  Examples, 
{a)  To  be  very  powerful. 

(&)  Of  the  whole  of  Gaul,  the 
Helvetians  are  the  most 
poiperful. 


red' 


To  render,  reddfire   (reddid-, 

dit-). 
Influence,  gi-atia,  ve. 
Fraud,  fraus,  (fraud)  is  (293). 
Restrain,  retinere  (r^tinu-,  rStent-. 

re+t6nere). 
With  equanimity,  aequo  Snimo  {all. 

■=■  with  equable  mind). 


Plurimum  posse  (=  to  be  very 

much  able). 
Totius  Galliae  plurimum  Hal- 
vetii  possunt. 


(c)    A  very  few   can    keep 

#(many). 
{d)  In  the  rest  of  Gaul. 


POSSE,  TO  BE  ABLE.  231 

Perpauci  prohibere  possunt. 


In  reliqua  Gallia. 


[What  is  the  rule  for  the  Succession  of  Tenses  ?    551,  3.1 
[What  case  do  the  compounds  of  sum  (prosum,  desum,  &c.)  govern  ? 
267,  b.] 

(590.)   Translate  into  English. 

Beatus  esse  sine  virtute  nemo  potest. — Per  risum  multum 
poteris  cognoscere  stultum. — Sere  {imperative)  beneficia,  ut 
p  o  s  s  i  8  (548,  a)  metere  fructum. — Viri  boni  sumus,  si  (iis) 
prosiimus,  quibus  p  o  s  s  u  m  u  s. — Semper  ita  vivamus  (528,  b) 
ut  rationem  reddere  possimus  (553,  b). — Mons  altissimus 
impendet  ut  fS,cile  perpauci  prohibere  possint  (553,  b). — 
Mons  altissimus  impendebat  ut  facile  perpauci  prohibere  pos- 
se n  t. — Sine  agricultura  homines  vivere  non  p  o  s  s  u  n  t. — Nostri 
hostes  consequi  non  potuerunt,  quod  equites  insiilam  capers 
non  potuerant. — Divitiacus  plurimum  domi  {at  home)  atque 
in  reliqua  Gallia  poterat  (589,  a). — Fraus  est  accipere  quod 
non  poteris  reddere. — Non  est  dubium  quin  totius  Galliae 
plurimum  Helv6tii  possint  (558,  b). — Geraiani  rStineri  non 
poterant  quin  in  nostros  tela  conjicerent  (558,  &,  6). — Ceesar 
potest  iter  Helvetiis  (54)  dare. — Caesar  negat  se  posse  iter 
Helvetiis  dare. — Caesar  negat  se,  more  et  exemplo  (55,  a)  populi 
Romani,  posse  iter  ulli  (194,  R.)  per  provinciam  d&re. 

(591.)   Translate  into  Latin. 

Men  cannot  be  happy  without  virtue. — ^Without  arts  we  can- 
not live. — Let  us  always  so  live  (528,  b)  that  (553,  b)  we  may 
be  able  to  die  with  equanimity. — Let  us  sow  good-deeds,  that 
we  may  be  able  to  reap  fruit. — The  chief  was  very  powerful, 
not  only  (non  solum)  at  home,  but  also  (sed  etiam)  in  the 
rest  of  Gaul. — Caesar  denies  that  (574,  c)  he  is  able  to  give  a 
passage  to  the  ambassadors  through  the  province. — Caesar  finds- 
out  (r^perit)  that  the  chief  is  very  powerful  {accus.  with  inf.). 
— Caesar  finds  out  that  the  chief  is  very  powerful,  not  only  at 
home,  but  also  among  the  neighbouring  states. — The  enemy 
cannot  be  restrained  from  (quin)  hurling  darts  against  our 
soldiers. 


232 


VELLE,  NOLLE,  MALLE. 


LESSON  XCVIII. 

Velle,  to  be  willing. — Nolle,  to  be  unwilling, — MalU, 
to  be  more  willing,  to  prefer, 
(592.)  Nolo  =  non  volo  ;  malo  =  magis  volo. 


(a)   INDICATIVK. 


Pres.  5 


v6l6. 
nold. 
maid. 


VIS. 

nonvis. 
mavis. 


vult. 

nonvult. 

mavult. 


voliimus. 
nolumus. 
malumus. 


valtis. 

nonvultis. 

mavaltis. 


vfilTint. 
nolunt. 
inalunt. 


Rem.  The  following  tenses  are  regular:  Imperf.,  vole  bam,  nolQ- 
bam,  malebam;  Perf.,  volui,  nolul,  malui;  Fut,  vol&m, 
nolam,  malam;  Fut.  Per/,,  vdluero,  ndluerd,  malu6rd. 


V 

(6)    SUBJUNCTIVE. 

"  [ 

v6l- 
nol- 
mal- 

>     Tm. 

is. 

It. 

imus. 

itis. 

int. 

Imperf:). 

vell- 
noU- 
mall- 

>     6m. 

es. 

St. 

emus. 

6tis. 

ent. 

Rem.  1.  Regular  are,  Perf.,  volu6rIm,  nolufirim,  mftlu6riin ;  Pluperf, 
voluissem,  noluiss^m,  maluissem. 

2.  Imperative,  noli,  nolitd  ;  ndlite,  nolitote,  nSluntfi.     (Imperative  of 
v615  and  mal8  wanting.) 

3.  Participles,  vol-ens,  nol-ens. 

4.  Infinitives :   Pres.,  vell6,  nollS,  mallg ;    Past,  v6luissS,  n6luiss6, 
maloissS. 

EXERCISE. 


(593.)   Vocabulary. 

To  he  empty,   unoccupied,   vacar6 

(av-,  at-),  intrans. 
Neighbour,  finitimus,  ft,  um  (with 

dat.). 
Attentive,  attentus,  a,  um. 
Attentively,  attente  {adv.). 
Grant,  concession,  concessiis,  us. 
Content,   contentus,   fi,   fim    (with 

abl). 

(594.)  Examples, 
{a)  If  ihey  wish  anything. 
(a)  The  verbs  velle,  noil 
govern  the  accusative. 


To  seem,  viderl  {pass,  of  viderfi). 
To  return,  to  come  bach,  rSverti 

(revers-),  dep. 
Old  man,  senex,  (sen)  is  (108,  R.  1). 
On  the  Ides  of  April,  ad  Idus  Apri 

lis  (the  13th  of  April). 
April,  Aprllls,  is,  m.  (25,  a). 
Docile,  ddcilis,  6  (104), 


Si  quid  velint. 
e,  ma  lie,  as  transitive  verbs, 


VELLE,  NOLLE,  MALLE.  233 

(&)  He  is  loilling  to  hear.      \  Vult  audire. 
(6)   The  verbs  velle,  nolle,  malle,  take  the  infinitive 
after  them,  as  the  complementary  object  (210). 

(c)  Caesar  is  not  willing  that    Non  vult  Caesar  eum  locum 
that  country  should  remain       v  a  c  a  r  e. 
unoccu^pied. 
(c)  The  verbs  V e  1 1  e,  nolle,  malle,  admit  the  accusative 
with  the  infinitive  after  them. 

[What  is  the  rule  for  principal  sentences  in  oratio  obliqua  ?    (574,  a.) 
For  subordinate  sentences  ?     (574,  b).] 

(595.)   Translate  into  English, 
Ego  non  eadem  volo,  senex  (225,  a)  quae  volui  adolescens. 

—  Si  vis  amari,  ama  {imperative).  —  Non  vult  Caesar  eum 
locum  vacare.  —  Noluit  Caesar  eum  locum,  unde  Helvetii 
discesserant,  vacare ;  ne  Germani  f  initimi  Galliae  (54)  essent 
(548,  h). — Boni  homines,  miseri  quam  improbi  esse,  malunt. 

—  F6re  libenter  homines  id  quod  volunt,  credunt.  —  Idem 
velle  6t  idem  nolle,  ea*  firma  amicitia  est. — Docilis  est  qui 
attente  vult  audire.  —  Quem  docilem  velis  f^cere,  simul 
attentum  facias  oportet  (584,  a,  |^^). — Nisi  Caesar  Romanis 
(147)  soliis  imperare  voluisset  (542,  &),  a  Bruto  et  Cassio  non 
interfectus  esset. — Ariovistus  dixit  se  regnum  malle  (574,  a) 
Caesaris  concessu  (55,  a)  quam  jEduorum  ben^ficio  habere. — 
Maliimus,  ciim  virtu te,  paucis  (55,  a)  content!  esse,  quam 
Bine  virtute  multa  habere.  —  Aristides  bonus  esse  m  a  1  e  b  a  t 
quam  videri. — Habet  iracundia  hoc  mali  (186,  a,  R.) ;  non  vult 
regi. — Caesar  legatis  respondet  (574,  a)  diem  se  ad  deliberan- 
dum (489)  sumpturum  (esse);  si  quid  velint  (542,  6,  2)  ad 
idiis  Aprilis  revertantur  (574,  h). — Tam6n  Caesar,  ut  spatium 
intercedere  posset  (548,  a)  dum  milites  convenirent,  legatis 
respondit,  diem  se  ad  deliberandum  sumpturum ;  si  quid  v  e  1  - 
lent,  ad  Idus  Aprilis  reverterentur. — Caesar  ab  Helvetiis  dis- 

cedere  n  5 1  e  b  a  t.  —  Omnia  Srunt  f  ^cilia  si  v6 1  e  s  (542,  h) 

Ariovistus  respondet ;  si  quid  Caesar  a  se  v  e  1  i  t,  ilium  ad  se 
venire  oportere. — Ariovistus  respondit,  si  quid  Caesar  a  s6  vel- 
le t,  ilium  ad  s6  venire  oportere. 

•  Efi  is  in  apposition  with  the  clause  idem  velle  et  idem  nolle, 

U2 


II:  FERRE,  TO  BEAR,  BRING. 

LESSON  XCIX. 
F  e  r  o,  F  e  r  r  e,  T  u  1  i,  Latum,  to  hear,  bring, 

(596.)   (a)       PARADIGM    OF    IRREGULAR    TORMS. 


Pres.  Act.       f  er6. 
Pres.  Pass.     f6r6r. 


fers. 
feiTis. 


fert. 
fertur. 


ferimus.      fertis.  fgrurit. 

ferimur.      ferimlni.      feruntur. 


INFINITIVE. 


Act. 
Pass. 


Pres.,  ferr6,  to  bear. 
Pres.,  ferri,  to  be  borne. 


Per/.,  tulisse,  to  have 

borne. 
Perf.,  latus  essS,  to 

have  been  borne. 


Fut.,  laturiis  ess6. 
Flit.,  ferendum  esse. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Imperf.  Act.        ferr-     6m.      6s.  6t.  emiis.      etis.         ent. 

Imperf.  Pass,      ferr-      6r,        eris  (e).      etur.       emur.      emmi.      entur. 


IMPERATIVE. 


Singular. 


Active.        2.  f6r,  ferto.  3.  ferto. 

Passive.      2.  ferrg,  fertSr.      3.  fertor. 


2.  ferte,  fertotg.      3.  f  gruntd. 
2.  feriminl.  3.  fferuutor. 


(6)  The  remaining  tenses  are  formed  regularly  from  fer-, 
the  present  stem;  tul-,  the  perfect  stem;  and  lat-,  the  supine 
stem. 

1.  From  fdr-, 

Imperfect  active  and  passive,  f  6r6bam,  f  ereba,r. 
Future  active  and  passive,  f  eram,  es ;  f  erar,  eris. 
Participle  active  and  passive,  ferens,  f erendus.    Gerund, 
f  erendi,  &c. 

2.  From  tul-, 

Indicative  perfect,  tuli ;  pluperfect,  ttilSr&m ;  future  per- 
fect, tiilero. 
Subjunctive  perfect,  tiilftrim ;  pluperfect,  tulissSm. 

3.  From  lat-. 

Participle  passive,  latiis  :  hence  all  the  passive  forms,  latiis 

sum,  eram,  ero,  sim,  essem,  &c. ;  laturus  sum,  sim,  &c. 

(c)  The  compounds  are  inflected  in  the  same  way ;  e.  g,, 

inferre,  to  bring  against ;   intuli,  illatum  ;*  inf ero,  infers,  in- 

fert,  &c. 

{d)  ToUo,  tollere,  to  raise,  to  take  away,  forms  its  perfect 
and  supine  from  tiili,  latum,  viz.,  sustiili,  sublatiim. 


•  in  +  lfttuin=illatum,  n  being  changed  into  1  before  L 


FERRE,  TO  BEAR,  BRING. 


235 


EXERCISE. 


(597.)   Vocabulary. 

Frequent,  creber,  brft,  brum  (77,  a). 
Rumour,  riimor,  (nimor)  is  (319). 
To  bring  to,  bring,  afferr6  (attul-, 

allat-,  ad+ferre). 
To  bring  together,  conferre  (contul-, 

coUat-,  con+ferrS) ;  to  betake  one's 

self,  se  conferre. 
Poor,  helpless,  inops,  (inop)  is  (in+ 

ops),  adj.,  107. 
To  prefer,  praefen-g  (tul-,  lat-,  pr{B+  , 

ferre) ;  governs  ace.  and  dat. 
Mean,  sordid,  sordldus,  S,  tim. 

(598.)  Examples, 

{a)  It  is  the  part, 
It  is  the  duty, 
It  is  the  mark, 
It  is  the  characteristic, 
of  a  loise  man. 
(6)  The  poets  say. 

They  say. 
Ferunt  is  used  for  they  say. 
with  the  infinitive. 


To  bring  against,  inferrS  (tul-,  lat-) , 

governs  ace.  and  dat. 
To  make  war  upon  one,  bellum  ali- 

cui  inferrS. 
Especially,  pi-sesertim. 
Giani,  gigas,  (gigant)  is,  m.  (N.  on 

p.  133). 
To  conspire,  plot,  conjurftre  (av-,  at-). 
Impediment,  impedimentum,  i. 
Baggage,  impedimenta,  orum  {pi.). 
Whatever,  quicquid  (n.  of  quisquis), 


Est  s&pientis  {=itisofa 
loise  man). 


Poetse  fSrunt. 

F6runt. 

and  followed  by  the  accusative 


(599.)   Translate  into  English. 

Eas  res  Caesar  gr^-viter  fert. — Caesar  dicit,  eas  res  se  gravi- 
ter  ferr§. — Sapiens  bona  suS,  sectim  (125,  II.,  b)  fert. — 
Terra  circa  solem  ita  fertur  iit  circa  earn  simul  luna  fera- 
tur. — Crebri  rum5res  ad  Caesarem  afferebantur,  omnes 
Belgas  contra  popiilum  Rdmanum  conjurare,  obsides  que  inter 
se  dare. — Helvetii  nostrorum  impetus  {ace.  pi.)  sustinere  non 
}X)Ssunt. — Diutius  quum  Helvetii  nostrorum  impetus  sustinere 
non  possent  (563,  b)  alter!  se  in  montem  receperunt,  alteri  ad 
impedimenta  et  caiTos  se  contiilerunt. — Helvetii  in  iinum 
locum  impedimenta  contiilerunt. — Ferte  misero  (54)  atque 
inopi  (54)  auxilium. — Est  sapientis  (598,  a)  injurias  aequo  ani- 
mo  ferre. — Est  boni  (598,  a),  miseris  atque  inopibus  auxilium 
ferre. — Quid  quaeque  (178,  6)  nox  aut  dies  ferat,  incertum 


239  FIERI,  EDERE. 

est. — PScuniam  praeferre  ftmicitiae  sordidum  est. — Amlciti- 
am  praeferre  pecuniae  honestura  est. — Ariovistus  populo  Ro- 
mano bellum  intiilit. — Caesari'nunciatum  est  (578,  c)  Ariovis- 
tum  populo  Romano  bellum  intulisse. — Mqnb  animo  fera- 
m  u  s  quicquid  not)is  accidat. — F  erenda  est  fortuna,  prse- 
sertim  quae  abest  a  culpa. — ImprobI  ad  voluptatem  feruntur. 
— Poetae  ferunt  (598,  &),  gigantes  bellum  diis  (62,  R.  3)  in- 
tulisse.— Demeti'ius,  quum  pati'ia  pulsus  esset  (563,  b)  ad 
Ptolemaeum regem  se  contulit. — Catilinae  socii  arma  contra 
patriam  fere  bant.  —  Domos  suas  Helvetii  reliquerunt,  ut 
toti  (194,  R.  1)  Galliae  bellum  inferrent  (548,  a). 


LESSON  C. 

YierU  to  become,  to  be  done,  to  happen. — E  d  e  r  e,  or 
Esse,  to  eat, 

1.  Fieri. 
(600.)  Fieri  forms  the  passive  of  f  a  c  S  r  e,  to  maKe^  to  do. 
The  tenses  are  formed  regularly  with  the  endings  of  the  4th 
conjugation,  except  the  infinitive  and  the  imperfect  subjunctive. 


INDICATIVE. 


Pres.,       fi-o,  fl-s,  fi-t,  &c.  Imperf.,      fiebftm,  has,  &:c. 

Fvt.,         fiam,  fies,  &c.  -Pfi?/'!  factus  sum,  es,  est,  &c. 

Plvperf.,  factus  eritn,  eras,  &c.    Fut.  Perf.,  factus  ero,  eris,  &c. 


SUBJtmCTIVE. 


Pres.,  fislm,  fias,  &c.  Imperf.,  fierem,  fieres,  &c. 


INFINITIVE. 


Pres.,  fieri ;  Perf.,  factus,  a,  um,  esse  ;  Fut.,  factum  iri,  or  futurum 
esse,  or  f6r6. 


PAKTICIPLES. 


I^res.  wantiDg  ;  Per/.,  factus  ;  Fut.,  f  aciendus. 


Rem.  Observe  that  in  all  the  forms  of  this  verb  except  fieri  and 
f  ierem,  rSs,  &c.,  the  i  is  long,  contrary  to  the  general  rule  that  a 
vowel  before  another  is  short. 

2.  E d e r e  (esse). 
(601.)  E  d e r e  (or  esse),  to  eat,  forms  all  the  tenses  regu- 
larly with  the  endings  of  the  third  conjugation ;  but  it  has,  in 


FIERI,  EDERE. 


237 


addition,  a  few  forms  similar  to  those  of  esse,  to  be,  which 
are  shown  in  the  following  table  : 


c 

edis 

edit 

editis 

Indic.  Pres.    ■? 

edo. 

or 

es. 

or 

est. 

edimus. 

or 

estis. 

edunt. 

6d6rem 

ederes 

edergt 

ederemus 

edgretis 

edSrent 

SuBJ.  Imperf. ) 

or 

or 

or 

or 

or 

or 

i 

essem. 

esses. 

esset. 

essemus. 

essetis. 

essent. 

C 

ed6 

edito 

6dite 

editotS 

Imperative.  } 

or 

or 

or 

or 

edunta. 

I 

es. 

esto. 

este. 

estotg. 

Rem.  E  s,  from  esse,  to  be,  k  short ;  from  esse,  to  eat, it  is  long  (e s). 
EXERCISE. 

(602.)   Vocabulary. 

Sickness,   oegritudo,    (aegritudin)   ts 

(340). 
To  eat  up,  corrode,  ex6d6re  (ex+ 

6d6r6). 
Faie,  fatiim,  I. 
Perpetual,  perpetuus,  ft,  um. 
Poor,  pauper,  (paup6r)  is  (107). 
To  dnnJc,  blbere  (bib-,  bibit-). 


To  wander,  vftgart  [dep.). 
Fewness,    small   number,   paucitas, 

(paucitat)  is  (293). 
To  be  born,  nasci  (nat-),  dep. 
To  admonish,  admonere   (ad+mp- 

nere,  monu-,  mdnit-). 
Among,  apud  {prep.,  ace). 
According  to,  secundum  {prep.,  ace). 
Less,  minus  {adv.). 

(603.)  Examples, 
{a)  It  happens  (it  is  brought 

to  pass)  that  they  wander 

less  widely. 

Ut  with  subjunctive,  expressing  a  consequence,  frequently 
follows  f  i  t. 

(6)  He  was  informed  (=  he 


Fit,  lit  ramus  late  vagen- 
tur. 


Certior  factus  est  (may  be 
followed  by  ace.  with  infin.). 
Cicero  consul  factus  est. 


was  made  more  certain), 
(c)  Cicero  was  made  consul. 
The  verb  fieri  admits  vl predicate-nominative  after  it. 
{d)  Nothing  could  he  done.    \  Nihil  fieri  poterat. 

[Repeat  the  rule  for  the  Succession  of  Tenses  (551,  3).] 

(604.)   Translate  into  English. 

His  rebus  fit,  ut  Helvetii  minus  late  vagentur  (603,  a). — 
His  rebus  f  i  e  b  a  t,  ut  Helvetii  minus  late  vagarentur. — His 
rebus  f it  ut  Helvetii  minus  facile  finitimis  bellum  inferrS  pos- 
sint. — ^De  Csesaris  adventu  iEdui  certiores  facti  sunt.— Cae- 


1238 


IRE,  aUIRE,  NEaUIRE. 


sar,  litteris  (55,  a)  Labieni  certior  fie  bat,  omnes  Belgas  con 
tra  populum  Romanum  conjurare,  obsidesque  inter  se  dare.— 
Imperator  dixit,  id  fieri  posse. — Nostrorum  propter  paucita 
tern  nihil  f  i  e  r  i  poterat. — Labienus  praelium  commisit,  ut  un- 
dique  uno  tempore  (118,  II.,  c)  in  hostes  impetus  fie  ret. — 
Nemo  fit  casu  (55,  a)  boniis. — Poeta  nascitur,  non  fit. — Si 
fato  (55,  a)  omnia  fiunt  (542,  6,  1),  nihil  nos  admonere  potest 
ut  cautiores  f  i  a  m  u  s. — Contra  vim  sine  vi  nihil  f  i  e  r  i  potest. 
■ — Diligentia  (55,  a)  omnia  fi un  t  facilia  (603,  c). — Apud  vete- 
res  Romanes,  ex  agricolis  interdimi  fie  bant  consules ;  ita 
Cincinnatus  consul  (603,  c)  fact  us  est.  —  Omnia  quge  se- 
cundum naturam  f  i  u  n  t,  habenda  sunt  (502)  in  bonis.* — 
Saepe  qui  ex  pauperibus  divites  fiunt,  divitiis  {ahl.,  316,  b) 
uti  nesciimt. — Vivimus  ut  e  d  a  m  u  s  ;  non  e  d  i  m  n  s  ut  vi- 
vamus.^ — Edere  oportet  u-t  vivamus,  non  vivere  ut  6  dam  us. 
— E  s  s  6  (601)  oportet  ut  vivas,  non  vivere  ut  6das. — Perpetua 
cura  animum  avari  exes  t. — Bib6,  e  s. — Bibite,  e  s  1 6  — 
^grittido  animum  e  x  e  s  t. 


LESSON  CI. 
I  r  e,  to  go. — Q  u  i  r  e,  to  be  able  (can). — N  e  q  u  i  r  e,  ^o 
be  unable  (cannot). 
(605.)  Eo,  ire,  ivi,  itiim,  to  go,  mostly  follows  the  4th  conju- 
gation ;  but  is  irregular  in  the  present  tense,  gerund,  and  su- 
pine, as  appears  by  the  following 

PARADIGM. 


TENSES. 

INDICATIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. 

e6,  is,  it,  imus,  itis,  eunt 

earn,  eas,  eat,  eamus,  eatis,  6ant. 

Imperf. 

ibam,  ibas,  ibat,  &c. 

ir6m,  ires,  iret,  &c. 

Put. 

ibo,  ibis.  &c ibunt. 

itnrus,  sim,  sis,  sit,  &c. 

Peri. 

ivi  or  ii,  ivisti,  ivit  or'iit,  &c. 

iv6rim,  iveris,  iv6rit.  «5cc. 

Pluperf. 

iveram,  iveras,  &c. 

ivissem,  ivisses,  ivisset,  6cc. 

Put.  Perf. 

iver6,  iveris,  &c. 

1 

,IMPER.     jl         INFINITIVE. 

SUPINE. 

PARTICIPLE. 

GERUND. 

i,  ItO,  ltd. 

Pres.,  ire. 

Itum. 

Pres.,    iens  (euntis). 

eundi. 

it6,  itote. 

Perf.,  ivissS  or 

isse. 

itu. 

Put.,      iturus,  a,  um. 

eundo,  &c. 

etlntd. 

Put.,   ituriim 
ess6. 

Verbal,  eundiis,  a,  um. 

Habenda  sunt  in  bonis  =  should  be  reckoned  among  blessings. 


IRE,  aUIRE,  NEaUIRE.  239 

Rem.  1.  In  the  same  manner  the  compounds  ai'e  formed ;  e.  g.,  exirg, 

abire,  &c. ;  but  they  generally  drop  the  v  in  the  perfect-stem ;  thus, 

ab-ii,  ab-isti,  ab-iit,  abisse,  abissem,  &c. 
2.  Some  of  the  compounds  obtain  a  transitive  force,  and  then  take  a 

passive  form  like  other  transitive  verbs  ;  e.  g.,  praeterire,  to  pass 

by ;  prsetereSr,  I  am  passed  by,  &c. 

(606.)  Queo,  I  can,  I  am,  able ;  nequeo,  I  cannot,  I  am  un- 
able,  are  conjugated  like  eo,  I  go ;  but  they  rsirely  occur  except 
in  the  present  tense. 

EXERCISE. 

(607.)   Vocabulary.  ^ 

By  what  route?  qu6  itiner6  {aht, 

55,  a). 
To  perish,  p6rir6  (per+ir6). 
Manfully,  viriliter  (215,  2). 
Tell  m£,  die  {imperat.  of  dicerS). 
Whether — or,  utrum — an. 
Taken  away,  s'ublatus,  fi,  um  {part. 

pass,  o/'tollerg)  (596,  d). 
Of  Zurich,  Tigurinus,  a,  um. 
To  suffer,  allow,  pati  (pass-),  dep. 
To  fight,  decertare  (av-,  at-). 
To  be  sick,  aegrotare  (av-,  at-). 
Light,  lux,  (luc)  IS  (293). 


To  go  out,  exire  (ex+ire).  Takes 
abl.,  with  or  withotU  prep.  de. 

To  return,  rSdlre  (re+Ire ;  d  insert- 
ed for  euphony). 

To  undergo,  subire  (sub+ir6) ;  gov- 
erns accus. 

A  return^  returning,  reditio,  (rSdi- 
tion)  is  (333,  B.). 

Ready,  prepared,  piratfis,  a,  um 
{part,  of  pararg). 

To  pass  over,  transirS  (trans+irS). 

Before,  prse,  adv.  {or prep,  with  abl.]. 

Of  Cannes.  Cannensis,  6  (104). 

Whither,  quo,  adv. 

^^  BecoUect,  they  went  =  iveruntorierunt. 

he  departed  =^3.^ lit,  rather  than  Sbivlt;  and  so  of 
other  compounds. 
[Give  the  Rule  for  u  t  {purpose),  548,  a). 

(608.)   Translate  into  English. 

Helvgtii  de  f inibus  suis  e  x e u n t. — OrgStorix  Helvetiis  (dat.) 
persuadet,  ut  de  finibus  suis  ex e ant.  —  Orgetorix  Helvetiis 
persuasit,  ut  d§  finibus  suis  cum  omnibus  copiis  {property) 
exirent. — Domum  (113,  III.,  R.)  redeunt. — Omnia  peri- 
ciilS,  subeunt.  —  Helvetii,  domiim  reditionis  spe  sublata 
(456),  pS,rati6res  ad  omnia  peiicula  siibeunda  (496)  erant. 
— Caesar  in  Asiam  transiit. — Pompeius  in  Asiam  trans- 
it rat. — Domo  (abl.)  exirS  possunt. — ^Erant  omnino  itinera 
duo,  quibus  itineribus  domo  exire  possent. — ^dui  per  fines 
8U6s  Helvetios  ir6  patiuntur. — Pagus  Tigurinus  domo  exi- 


240  IRE,  aUIRE,  NEaUIRE. 

erat. — Hie  pagus  unus,  quum  domo  exisset,  L.  Cassium, 
consulem,  interfecerat,  et  ejus  exercitum  siib  jugum  miserat. 
— Helve  til  in  earn  partem  ibunt,  ubi  Csesar  constituent. — 
Qu6  itinere  (55,  a)  hostes  i  e  r  u  n  t  ?-^rE6dem  itinere,  quo  hos- 
tes  ierant,  Caesar  ad  eos  contendit,  equitatumque  omnem 
ante  se  mittit. — I  bam  forte  Via  Sacra  (55,  a)  sicut  meus  est 
mos. — i  prae,  ego  sequar. — Ex  pugna  Cannensi  admodum  pauci 
Romani  domum  redierunt. — I,  quo  tefortuna  vocet  (534,  d). 
— Quicquid  transiit  temporis  {186,  a^  Rule)  peril t. — Quidam 
ferro  (55,  a)  decertare  acerrime  possunt,  segrotare  viriliter  non 
queunt.  —  Sine  luce  colores  esse  nequeunt.  —  Pompeius 
periit.  —  Die  utrum  queas  an  nequeas  mecum  ire. — 
Risus  interdura  ita  repente  erumpit,  ut  earn  ciipientes  (442,  c) 
ttnerS  nequeamus  (553,  6,  R.). 


..A>..?i*T.v 


§  20. 
DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


LESSON  CII. 
Aio,  Inquanif  Novi,  Memini,  Caspi,  Odi. 
(609.)  Ai  o,  I  say,  say  yes,  affirm,  is  used  in  very  few  tenses. 


Ind.  Pres. 
Ind.  Imperf. 
Subj.  Pres. 
Part.  Pres. 


aio.  ais.      1    ait.  

aiebS,m.       -bas.        -bat.       -bamus. 

aias.    j    ault.  |        

aiens  (aientis)  used  orrly  as  adjec. 


batis. 


aiunt. 
bant, 
aiant. 


(610.)  Inquam,  I  say,  is  used  between  the  words  of  a  quo- 
tation. 


Ind.  Pres. 
Ind.  Imperf. 

Ind.  Fut. 
Ind.  Perf. 
Subj.  Pres. 


inquam.      mquis 


mquiam. 


inquiSs. 
inquisti. 
as. 


inquit. 

inquimus 

inquiebit 

or 

inquibat. 

inquiet. 

inquit. 

at. 

atis. 

inquiunt. 
inquiebant. 


(611.)  No VI,  I  know;  mSmlni,  I  remember ;  coepi,  / 
have  begun,  I  began ;  5  d  i,  J  hate,  are  perfect  forms  with 
present  meanings.  All  the  tenses  made  on  the  perfect  stem 
exist,  regularly  formed. 


rNFINITIVE. 


ndvissg, 
to  know. 


meminissg, 
to  remember. 


coepissS,  odissg, 

to  have  besrun.    to  haie. 


INDICATIVE   AND   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


.  (I,  isti.  it,  &c. 

^'         grim,  6rls,  6rit,  &c. 

l^issfim,  isses,  iss6t,  &c. 


6d- 


Ind.  Pres.,    /  kyiow. 
Ind.  Past,     I  remembered. 
Ind.  Fut.,     /  shall  begin. 
Subj.  Pres.,  /  may  know. 
Subj.  Past,    /  might  hate. 


Imperative,  m6ment6,  mementotfi  (the  others  wanting). 


^p*  Recollect,  ■a.bvi-=il  know  [not  I  have  known);  noveram,  I  knew 
(not  I  had  known),  &c. ;  and  so  of  the  others.  But  c  cb  p  i,  n  6  v  i,  Ac, 
may  be  used  as  Jierf.  pres.,  =  /  Jtave  known,  I  have  begun^  &,<:. 

X 


242 


AIO,  INaUAM,  NOVI,  ETC. 


EXERCISE. 


(612.)    Vocabulary. 

To  fall  back,  to  give  way,  pedem 

rSferrS  (=  to  draw  back  the  foot). 
Young,  raw,  inexperienced,  tiro,  (ti- 

ron)  13  (107). 
Surly,  fgroculiis,  a,  um. 
Lucius  Varius,  L.  Varius,  T. 
Forgetful,  immemor,  (immemor)  is 

(107) ;  governs  genit. 
Calmly,  quietly,  tranquillitSr  (ti-an- 

quill-us,  215,  2,    a). 

(613.)  Examples. 

{a)  He  exhorts  Oieni  to  re- 

member, 
(b)  ArisUdes,    when    asJoed 

what    icas   just,    replied, 

•'  Not  to  covet  what  belongs 

to  others.'^ 


Cruelty,  soevitia,  m. 

Demonax,  Deraouax,  (act)  is  (a  phi- 
losopher of  Hadrian's  time). 

To  pkilosophizf ,  pliil6s6phari  {dep.). 

In  no  way,  by  liO  means,  nullo  modo 
[ahl). 

Conscious,  conscivLS,  a,  iim  (with  dat. 
of  person,  gen.  of  diing). 

Livy,  Livius,  i. 


Hortatur  eos  ut   mSrainS- 

rin  £. 
Aristides  inten-ogatus  quid 
justum  esset  ?  "  Aliena," 
in  quit,  "non  concupiscSre'* 
(—  "  Not  to  covet,"  said  he, 
"what,"  &c.). 

t^  I  n  q  u  a  m  is  used  in  quoting  the  very  words  of  another 
(oratio  recta),  and  is  always  placed  among  the  words  quoted 
(as  "  said  he'"'  in  English).  A  i  t  is  used  generally  in  quoting 
the  sense^  not  the  exact  words  of  another  (oratio  obliqua). 


(c)  He  began  to  build  the 

city. 
The  city  began  to  be  built. 


Urb6m  sedificare  c  oe  p  i  t. 
Urbs  sedificari  coepti  est. 


t^^  If  a  passive  infinitive  is  used  with  the  word  begin,  you 
must  employ  the  passive  form,  coeptus  sum,  instead  of  c oe p i ; 
coeptiis  eram,  instead  of  cceperam,  &c. 

(614.)   Translate  into  English. 

MDites,  vulngribus  defessi,  pedem  r^ferre  coeperunt. — 
"Quid  tu,"  in  quit  Labienus,  "miles  tiro  {voc.)  tam  f  Srocu- 
lus  es?"  Turn  miles:  "Non  sum,"  in  quit,  "tiro,  Labiene, 
s6d  de  dgcima  16gion6  vSteranus." — Helvetii  nostros  lacessSre 
coeperunt. — Hostes,  qui  in  montem  sese  r^cepdrant,  praelium 
redintegiare  coep6runt. — Caesar  dicit  (574,  a),  id  fieri  posse, 
si  iEdui  finitimorum  Sgros  popular!  coepfirint  (574,  b). — 


AlO,  IXaUAM,  NOVI,  MEMINI,  ETC.  243 

Milites  in  murum  lapides  jacoro  coeperunt.  —  Undique  in 
murum  lapides  jaci  (613,  c,  t^")  coepti  sunt. — Dux  milites 
hortatur  ut  veteris  glorice  merainerint. — Legati  dixerunt  se 
portus  {accus.  pi.)  insulasque  n o  v  i  s  s  e. — Multi  te  o  d  e  r u  n  t, 
si  te  solum  amas. — Germani  superbiam  L.  Varii  et  saevitiam 
odisse  coeperant.  —  Omnes  immemorem  beneficii  6 d e - 
runt. — TuUus  Hostilius,  ut  Livius  ait,  f erocior  etiam  Romulo 
(360,  c)  fuit. — S6crS,tes  interrogatus  quinam  hSmines  tranquil- 
liter  viverent  (534,  e)1  "Qui,"  in  quit,  "nuUius  turpitudi- 
nis  sibi  conscii  sunt." — Demonax  inten-ogatus,  quando  coepisset 
(534,  e)  philosophari  ?  "  Tum,"  in  quit,  "cum  cognoscSre 
meipsum  (159)  ccEpi." — Hannibal  Romanos  sic  ode  rat,  ut 
in  gratiam  cum  illis  redire  null5  modo  (55,  a)  posset  (553,  &,  R.). 
— Is  miser  est,  quem  omnes  boni  oderunt. — ^^Novimus 
Aristidis  justitiam,  n  o  v  i  m  u  s  Socratis  sapientiam.  —  Non 
Smabimus  bonos  m5res,  si  non  oderiraus  malos. 


■]:r''-' 


PART    III. 


SUMMARY    OF    ETYMOLOQt. 


T    T 


SUMMARY  OF  ETYMOLOGY. 


§  1.  LETTERS,  QUANTITY,  &c. 

(615.)  1.  The  letters  are  the  same  as  in  English,  with  the  omission  of  w. 

2.  Six  are  vowels,  a,  e,  i,  o.  u,  y  :  the  remaining  nineteen  are  consoiiants. 

3.  The  consonants  are  divided  into 

(a)  Liquids,  1,  ni,  n,  r ;  ^ 

(b)  Spirants,  h,  b,  j  ; 

(c)  Mutes  ;  the  remaining  consonants,  among  which  there  are 

(1)  c-sounds,  c,  g  (eh) ;  q ; 

(2)  p-sonnds,  b,  p  (ph) ; 

(3)  t-sounds,  d,  t  (th)  ; 

(4)  Double  consonants,  x,  z. 

4.  The  diphthongs  are,  au,  eu,  ae,  oe  (rare,  ei,  oi,  ui), 

(file.)  GENERAL   RULES   OF   QUANTITY. 

(1)  A  vowel  before  another  is  sJiort ;  e.  g.,  via. 

(2)  A  vowel  before  two  consonants,  or  a  doable  one,  is  long  by  post- 
tio7t ;  e.  g.,  am  ant. 

f  As  a  mute  followed  by  a  liquid  causes  some  exceptions  to  this  role, 
we  shall  mark  the  quantity,  in  that  case,  doubtful ;  thus,  ftgri.] 

^3)  All  diphthongs  are  Isng ;  e.  g.,  mens  »,  aii-rum. 
(4)  Contracted  syllables  are  lo7ig ;  e.  g.,  edge  (coago). 


§  2.  NOUN. 

(617.)  1.  The  "noun  is  the  name  of  any  object  (person  or  thing).  Nouns 
are  proper  (13,  a),  common  (13,  h),  or  abstract  (13,  c). 

2.  There  are  three  genders,  masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter :  two  num- 
bers, singular  and  plural :  six  cases,  nomiiiative,  genitive,  dative,  accusa- 
tive, vocative,  and  ablative  :  and^tJe  declensions. 

3.  GENERAL  RULES  OF  GENDER. 

Males,  rivers,  wincLs,  and  mountains  most  we  find 
With  months  and  nations  MAsctrLiNE  declined  ; 
"RvLt  females,  cities,  countries,  trees  we  name. 
As  Feminine  ;  most  islands,  too,  the  same. 
Common  are  such  as  both  the  genders  take, 
And  Neuter  all  words  undeclined  we  make. 
[There  are  many  exceptions  from  these  rules,  which  must  bo  learned 
by  observation.] 


First  Declension. — {^Genitive- ending  se.) 


(618.) 

CASE-ENDINGS. 

Nom.,  Voc. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl.          1 

Sing. 
Plur. 

a. 
ee. 

ae. 
arum. 

aj. 

is. 

&m. 
ds. 

a. 

is. 

Rem.  1.  Quantity. — Final  syllables   all  long  but  S,  7wm.  and  voc.; 

am,  ace. ;  and  um,  gen.  plur. 
2.  Gender. — Nouns  of  first  declension  are  feminine,  except  names  of 

male  beings,  &c. 


Second  Declension. — {Genitive- ending  I.) 

(619.)  Masculine  nouns  of  second  declension  have  nominative-ending 
ns  ;  neuter  nouns,  um. 

(a)    CASE-ENDINGS,  MASCULINES. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Vc.c. 

AbL 

Sing. 
Plur. 

US. 

i. 

i. 
orum. 

6. 

Is. 

um. 

OS. 

I. 

6. 

Is. 

[b)    CASE-ENDINGS, 

NEUTERS. 

N.,  A.,  V. 

Gen. 

Dat.,  Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

um. 
fi. 

I. 

6rum. 

6. 

Is. 

NOUN. 


249 


Eem,  1.  Quantity. — Short  final  syllables,  us,  6,  um,  a. 
Long'  "  1,  6, 1  s,  6  s. 

2.  Gender. — A  few  nouns  are  feminine  in  us,  and  a  few  neuter  (see 

62,  a.  1). 

3.  Stems  in  r. — (1)  All  nouns  whose  stems  end  in  r,  reject  the  ending 
us  in  nom.  and  6  in  voc. ;  e.  g.,  field,  nom.,  ag6r  (not  ag6r-us) ;  voc., 
aggr  (not  %er-S).  (2)  Most  which  have  6  in  nom.  drop  it  in  the 
remaining  cases  ;  e.g.,  nom.,  ag6r  ;  gen.,  Sgri  (not  ag6r-I). 

4.  Exceptions  to  Case-endings. — (1)  Proper  names  in  ius,  with 
filius,  genius,  mens,  have  voc.  in  i  ;  e.  g.,  Georg-I,  fil-i,  mi.  (2) 
Deus  has  voc,  deus,  nom.  plur.,  dii,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  diis.  (3) 
A  few  take  um  in  gen.  plur.,  instead  of  orum ;  e.g.,  sestertium. 


Third  Declension. — {Genitive-ending  Is.) 

(620.)  [a)   CASE-ENDINGS,  MASCULINES  AND  FEMININES. 


Nom.,  Voc.     1           Gfn. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing. 
Plar. 

—           is. 

es.          um  (lum). 

ibus. 

em  (im). 

63. 

6(1). 
ibus. 

■ 

{b)    CASE-ENDINGS,  NEUTERS. 

N.,  A.,  V.         1             Gen. 

Dat. 

Abl.              1 

Sing. 
Plur. 

iO"*)- 

is. 

um  (ium). 

I. 

ibus. 

^ffl:     1 

Rem.  1.  Quantity. — Final  syllables  all  short  but  I  and  6  s. 

2.  Euphonic  Rules. — (a)  c-sound  +s  =  x:  arc-s  =  ant ;  1  e  g  -  s  =  lex. 
(b)  t-sound  before  s  is  dropped:  laud-s  =  laus  ;  mont-s  =  mons. 

3.  RtUes  of  Gender  from  the  Foi-mation  of  the  Nominative. 

[Learn  these  from  355.] 

4.  Peculiar  Case-e7idings. — (1)  Ace.  inim:  (a)  commonly  bx 

Febris,  puppts,  pulvis, 
SScurls,  restis,  turns : 
{b)  always  in 

STtis,  tussis. 

Vis,  amussis. 

(2)  Abl.  in  I :  (a)  sometimes  in  those  which  take  im  in  ace,  with 
ignis,  civis  :  {b)  always  in  vis  ;  and  in  neuters  whose  nom.  ends 
in  &1,  &r,  or  6. 

(3)  Gen.  plur.  ium:  [a)  in  all  which  take  i  in  abl.  sing.;  {b)  in 
monosyllables  whose  stems  end  in  two  consonants  {e.g.,  mont-, 

^ont-ium) ;  (c)  in  all  which  insert  a  vowel  before  adding  s  iu 
nom.  (ie.  g.,  nav-i-s,  uav-ium). 


250 


NOUN. 


Fourth  Declension, — {Gcntlive-ending  us.) 
(621.)  Masculine  nominative-ending  us  j  neuter  nominative-ending  fl. 

•      [a)   CASE-ENDINGS,  MASCULINES. 


1    Noiij..  Voa 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

,    Abl.           j 

Sing. 
Plur. 

us. 
us. 

US. 

uum. 

ui. 
ibils. 

um. 

us. 

ibus.        1 

[b]   CASE-ENDINGS,  NEUTERS. 

^ 

Norn.,  Ace,  Voc. 

1                  Gen. 

Dat.,  Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

U. 

ua. 

US,  or  u. 

uum. 

I 

U. 
ibus. 

Rem.  1.  Quantity. — U  s  long,  except  in  nom.  sing.,  and  dat.  and  abl. 
Ijlur. ;  u  and  1  long  always. 

2.  Genders.— Oidy  the  following  nouns  are  feminine : 

Acus,  manus,  tribus, 
DSmiis,  porticus,  and  Idus. 

3.  Peculiar  Case-ending. — The  following  take  iibus  in  dat.  and  abl. 
plur.,  instead  of  ib u s  : 

Avcus,  &CUS,  portfis,  vfii-u, 

Ficus,  lacus,  artus, 
Spficus,  quercus,  also  pecu, 

Trfous  too,  and  partus. 

4.  Ddmus,  house,  is  thus  declined  : 


Nom.,  Voc. 

Gen. 

Dat 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing. 
Plur. 

dom-us. 
dom-us. 

5  -US. 

<  -uum. 
"l  -drum. 

-ui. 
-ibus. 

-um. 

(-OS. 

I  -us  {rarely). 

-6. 

-ibus. 

Obs.  The  genitive  do  ml  is  used  only  in  the  sense  oi  at  home,  at  my 
house. 


Fifth  Declension. — {Genitive-ending  ei.) 

(622.)  There  are  but  few  nouns  of  this  declension :  all  feminine  except 
dies,  day,  and  merldies,  midday ;  and  even  di6s  is  feminine  in  singu- 
lai'  when  it  means  o.  fixed  day. 

(623.) 


case-endings. 


Nom..  Voc. 

Gen.                      Dat 

Ace. 

Abl.          1 

Sing. 
Plur. 

es. 

es. 

Si.                        61. 

erum.            ebus. 

6m. 

es. 

e. 
ebus. 

Rem.  1.  Quantity. — The  e  in  el  is  long  when  a  vowel  stands  before 

it,  as  di-e-i ;  short  when  a  consonant,  as  fid-6-i. 
2.  The  genitive,  dative,  and  ablative  plural  are  wanting  in  all  nouns 

of  this  declension  except  res,  dies,  sp6ciS.«?. 


§3.  ADJECTIVE. 


(624.)  The  adjective  expresses  a  quality  or  property  belonging  to  an 
object;  e.g.,  good,  sm-ail,  wktte,  &c.  In  Latin,  adjectives  are  divided 
into  three  classes,  according  to  their  endings. 

1.  CLASS  I.  (us,  a,  um).  • 

(625.)  These  take  the/em«i7«c-endingof  fii-st  declension  of  nouns  ;  mas- 
culine and  neuter  endings  of  the  second. 

(1.)   CASE-ENDISGS. 


1 

SINGULAR. 

.. 

FLUEAL. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Mdsc. 

Fein. 

Neut, 

N. 

US. 

a. 

um. 

N. 

1. 

SB. 

a. 

G. 

I. 

89. 

I. 

G. 

orum. 

arum. 

oram. 

D. 

6. 

88. 

6. 

D. 

is. 

IS. 

Is. 

A. 

um. 

am. 

um. 

A. 

OS. 

as. 

a. 

■V. 

6. 

a. 

fmi. 

V. 

1. 

ae. 

a. 

U^ 

6. 

a. 

6. 

A. 

IS. 

IS. 

IS. 

(2.)  Stems  in  er. — Adjectives  whose  stem  ends  in  er  reject  us  and  e 
ia  uom.  and  voc. 

(a)  Most  of  them  also  drop  6  in  the  nom.  in  the  other  cases ;  c.  g., 
beautiful,  pule  her. 

Nom.       Pulchfir,  pulchra,  pulchrum. 

Gen.        Pulchri,  pulchrssv  pulchrl,  &c. 

{b)  But  aspSr,  lac6r,  llb^r,  mis6r,  prosper,  tfinCr,  retain  the  6  ;  e.  g^ 
Nom.       Miser,  miserii  miseram. 

Gen.        Mis6rl,  niis6rae,  rnlserl,  &c. 

(3.)  Peculiar  Case-endings. — Some   adjectives,  numerals,  and  adjec- 
tive pronouns  have  gen.,  lus,  and  dat,  i;  e.g.,  unus,  unlfis,  unl. 
[They  are  unus,  totus,  solus,  nuUus,  ullus,  alius,  alt6r,  ilt6r,  neutfir, 
^nterquS.] 

2.  CLASS  II.  {Two  Endings). 
(626.)  Adjectives  of  the  secand  class  have  is  in  the  nominative  singular 
for  masculine  and  femiiune  ending,  and  6  for  neuter. 

(1.)  CASE-ENDINGS. 


SINGUtAK.                        j 

PLURAL.                           1 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

N.,V. 

is.      , 

Is. 

6. 

N.,V. 

es. 

es. 

ia. 

G. 

is. 

IS. 

is. 

G. 

lum. 

mm. 

ium. 

D. 

T. 

i. 

i. 

D. 

ibus. 

ibus. 

Ibus. 

Ace. 

6m. 

6m. 

6. 

Ace. 

6S. 

6s. 

ia. 

Abl. 

i. 

i. 

i. 

Abl. 

ibus. 

ibus. 

ibn..    1 

(2.)  Some  adjectives  of  this  qlass  take  6  r  for  the  ending  of  the  nom. 
sing.  masc.  instead  of  Is  ;  c.  g.,  ficer,  Sens,  Sere. 


262 


ADJECTIVE. 


.,1  h« 


more  common. 


(3.)  The  ablative  has  6  instead  of  i  in  juv6nis,  youth;  aedilisf, 
cBciile.  The  genitive  plural  has  tim  instead  of  ium  in  c6l6r, 
swift. 

3.  CLASS  III.  {One  Ending). 
(627.)  (1.)  Adjectives  of  the  third  class  have  but  one  ending  in  the  nom- 
inative for  all  three  genders  ;  e.  g.,  happy,  felix  (m.,  f.,  n.) ;  bold, 
and  ax  (m.,  f.,  n.).     Participles  in  ns  fall  under  this  dags. 
(2.)  The  case-endings  are  those  of  nouns  of  third  declension  (see  par- 
adigm, 108).     They  have  abl.  I  generally,  but  6  in  p  a  u  p  e  r,  s  e  n  e  x, 
and  a  fevp-  others  (108,  R.  1);  neut.  plur.,  ia;  gen.  plur.,  ium. 
VSttis  has  nom.  plur.,  v6t5r-5,  gen.  plur.,  v6t6r-um. 
For  participles,  abl.,  6 
"    adjectives,  abl., 

4.   COMPARISON   OF   ADJECTIVES. 

(628.)  Comparative-GnAm^,  i  6  r ;  superlative,  i  s  s  i  m  u  s. 

Brave,   fort-is,  fort-i6r,  fort-is simii*. 

Hard,    dur-us,  dur-i6r,  dur-issimus. 

Rem.  The  comparative  is  declined  (after  third  declension  of  nouns) 
thus  : 

Nom.     Dun  or,  dnriSr,         durius. 

^       Gen.      Durior-is,      durioris,     durioris,  &c.     (See  358.) 
(629.)  Adjectives  whose  stems  end  in  r  have  rimus  for  superlative-enA- 
ing  (instead  of  issimos) ;  e.  g., 

Mis6r,  mis6r-i  5  r,  miser-r  im  u  s. 

Pulchfir,  pulchr-idr,  pulcher-rJmus. 

(630.)  Several  adjectives  whose  stem  ends  in  I  have  l!ma8  for  guperla' 
<tt;e-ending ;  e.  g., 

f«cil-x6r,  fScil-limiis. 


Facfl-is, 
They  are 


(631.) 


Sinulis,  dissimilis,  and  fitcilis  ; 
Humilis,  difficilis,  and  gracilis. 

5.   IRREGULAR  COMPARISON. 

Irresrulars. 


Good. 

b6nus. 

m6li6r. 

optunus. 

Bad. 

mSlus. 

pej6r. 

pessimus. 

Great. 

magnus. 

major. 

maximus. 

Much. 

multus. 

(plu's  (n.  sing.). 
I  plurfis,  a  (pL). 

plnrimus. 

Small. 

parvus. 

minor. 

minimus. 

Old. 

s6nex. 

s6m6r. 

{wanting.) 

Young. 

juv6nis. 

juniSr. 

{wanting.) 

Outward. 

extenis. 

exterior. 

extremus. 

Below. 

inferiis. 

inferidr. 

(  infimus. 
?  imiSs. 

Above. 

sup6rus. 

sup6ri6r. 

5  supremus. 
I  summiis. 

Hind. 

postei-us. 

pcstfriSr. 

postremus. 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


253 


(632.)  Defectives. — {Comparative  and  Superlative  formed  from  a  Prepo' 
sition,  Adverb,  or  Obsolete  Word.] 


(on  this  side,  citra.) 
(within,  intra.) 

{beyond,  ultra.) 

(Tiear,  pr6pe.) 
{bad,  deter.) 


nearer,  cit6n6r. 
inner,  int6ri6r. 

further,  ult6ri6r. 

nearer,  pr6pi6r. 

worse,  deterior. 
former,  prior. 
swifter,  6ci6r. 


nearest,  citimus. 
inmost,  intimus. 

worst,  deterrimus. 
first,  primus. 
swiftest,  ocissimus. 


_  „.  ,    ,  .  ,        i  ditior,  ,        (  ditissunus. 

S^.  1.  Rv:h,  dives  -,      ru:her,  \  ^j^^^^.       rzchest,  \  divitissimus. 

[Ccesar  uses  the  shorter  form.] 

2.  Compound  adjectives  in  dicus,  ficiis,  v6lus,  add  entidr  for  tbo 
comparative  and  entissimusfor  the  superlative  ;  e.  g., 

B6n6vol-us,      b6ni8v6l-enti6r,     b6n6v6l-entissimus, 

3.  Adjectives  whose  stem  ends  in  a  vowel  prefix  to  the  positive 
mSgJs,  more,  for  the  comparative,  and  maxim 6,  most,  for  the 
superlative. 


Pious,  pius, 


mSgis  pliis, 

Y 


maximd  pius. 


§  4.  NUMERALS. 


(633.)  Numerals  are  divided  into  the  following  classes,  of  which  the 
first  three  are  adjectives,  the  fourth  adverbs. 


CARDINAL. 

ORDINAL. 

DISTRIBUTIVE. 

ADVERBIAL. 

One,  two,  SfC. 

First,  second,  Sfc. 

One  by  one,  6fC. 

Once,  twice,  fyc. 

1 

Unus. 

Primus. 

Singuli. 

Semel. 

2 

Duo. 

Secundus. 

Bini, 

Bis. 

3 

Tres. 

Tertius. 

Term. 

Ter. 

4 

Quattwor. 

Quartus. 

Quatemi. 

Quater. 

5 

Quinque. 

Q,uintU8. 

Quini. 

ftuinquies. 

6 

Sex. 

Sextus. 

Seni. 

Sexies. 

7 

Septem. 

Septimus. 

SeptenL 

Septies. 

8 

Octo. 

Octavug, 

Octoni. 

Octiea. 

9 

Novem. 

Nonus. 

NovenL 

Novies. 

10 

Decern. 

Decimus. 

Deni. 

Decies. 

11 

Undecim. 

Undecimtis. 

tindenL 

.  undecieg. 

12 

Duodecim. 

Duodecimus. 

Duodeni. 

Duodecies. 

13 

Tredecim.  [im. 

Tertius- 

Temi-       ] 

Tredecies. 

14 

Quattuordec- 

Quaitus- 

Quatemi- 

Quatuordecies. 

15 

Quindecun. 

Quintus- 

Qulni- 

Quindecies. 

16 

Sexdecim. 

Sextus- 

-decunus. 

Seni- 

•dem. 

Sedecies. 

17 

Septendecim. 

Septimus- 

Septenl- 

Decies  feseptiefl. 

18 

Octodecim. 

Octavus. 

Octoni- 

Duodevicies. 

19 

Novemdecim. 

Nonus-      J 

Noveni- 

Undevicrea. 

20 

ViginH. 

Vicesimus. 

Viceni. 

Vicies. 

30 

Triginta. 
Quadraginta. 

Tricesimus. 

Triceni. 

Tricies. 

40 

Qusldragesimus. 

QuSdragenl. 

Quadragiea. 

50 

Quinquaginta. 

Quinquagesimus. 

Quinquageni. 

Quinquagies. 

60 

Sexaginta. 

Sexagesimus. 

Sexagenf. 

Sexagies. 

70 

Septuaginta. 

Septuagesimus. 

Septuageni. 

Septuagies. 

80 

Octoginta. 

Octogesimus. 

Octogeni. 

Octogies. 

90 

Nonaginta. 

Nonagesimus. 

Nonageni. 

Nonagies. 

100 

Centum. 

Centesimus. 

Centeni. 

Centies. 

200 

Ducenti. 

Ducentesimus. 

Ducenteni. 

Ducenties. 

300 

Trecentl. 

Trecenteslmus. 

Trecenteni, 

Trecenties. 

400 

Quadringenti. 

Quadringentesimus. 

Quadringenteni. 

Quadrlngenties. 

500 

Quingenli. 

QuingentesTmus. 

Gluingentem. 

Quingenties. 

600 

SexcenS. 

Sexcenteslmus. 

Sexcenteni. 

Sexcenties. 

700 

Septingenfi. 

Septingentesimus. 

Septangentenl. 

Septingenties. 

800 

Octingenti. 

Octingentesimus. 

OctingentenL 

OctingenKes. 

900 

Noningenti, 

Nongentesimus. 

Nongentenl. 

Nongentaes. 

1000 

Mille. 

Millesimus. 

MIUenL 

Milligs. 

For  the  declension  of  unus,  duo,  and  tres,  see  194. 

Ducenti,  and  all  the  compounds  of  centi,  are  declined  Uke  the  plural 
of  bonus. 

Millia,  thousands,  the  plural  of  mille,  is  declined  like  a  neuter  noun 
of  the  third  declension. 

Ordinal  numbers  are  declined  like  bonus. 

Distributives,  like  the  plural  of  bonus. 

All  the  rest  are  undeclinable. 

In  the  combination  of  cardinal  numbers,  from  twenty  to  one  hundred, 
the  smaller  with  et,  or  the  larger  without  et,  precedes  ;  asquattuoret 
viginti,  or  viginti  quattuor.  Above  one  hundred  the  larger  number 
precedes,  with  or  without  e t ;  as  centum  et  unus,  or  centum  unus. 


§  5.  PRONOUN. 


(C34.)  The  pronoun  is  a  substitute  for  the  noun ;  e.  g.,  he,  she,  it,  may 
be  substitutes  for  man,  ■woman,  book. 

1.  PERSONAL   PROIfOUNS. 

(635.)  {a)  Substantive  Personal,  so  called  because  used  as  substantives, 
not  as  adjectives. 


8INGULAB. 

PLUKAL.                                      j] 

/. 

N. 

G. 

m6i. 

mihi. 

Ace,  AbL 

me. 

We. 

N.,  A. 

nos. 

Gen. 

nostrum,  or 

Dat.,  Abl. 

n6bis. 

Thou. 

tu. 

tui. 

tib!. 

t§. 

You. 

vos. 

nostd. 
vestrum,  or 

vobls.   ! 

Him,    I 
her,  it.  > 

— 

sui. 

sib!. 

Be. 

Tliem. 

i     vestrL      |                 1 
(same  as  sing.) 

{b)  Adjective  Personal,  or  Possessive  (derived  from  the  above). 


\Mine. 

i  Thine. 

\  His,  hers,  its. 


m6us,  a,  um  (voc.,  mi), 
tuus,  &,  um. 
siius,  a,  um. 


Ours. 

Yours. 

Theirs. 


nost^r,  nostra,  nostrum, 
vester,  vestra,  vestrum. 
suus,  sua,  siium. 


2.   DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

(636.)  The  demonstrative  pronouns  are  so  called  because  they  serve  to 
point  out  an  object ;  e.  g:,  this,  that,  these,  those,  &c. 

(1.)  Is,  6a,  id,  this,  that  (7te,  sh^,  it),  often  antecedent  of  qui; 


»mg. 
Plur. 


is,  6a,  id. 
ii,  68e,  6a. 


Gen. 

ejus. 

66rum,  6arum,  66rQm. 


Dat 

6i. 

ils,  or  6is. 


Aco. 

eum,  6am,  id, 
66s,  6as,  6a. 


Abl. 

66,  6a,  66. 

iis,  or  6Is. 


(2.)  id 6m,  ead6m,  id6m,  ^^e  very  same,  compounded  of  is  and  dem. 
Declined  like  is  with  dem  added;  thus,  ejus  dem,  eid6m, 
eund6m  (not  eumdem),  &c. 

(3.)  Hie,  haec,  hoc,  this,  points  out  an  object  present  to  the  speaker, 
and  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  the ^rst  person.  (It  is  also  used 
for  he,  slie,  it.) 


Nora. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

Sing,  hie,  hsec, 

hujus. 

huic. 

hunc,     banc, 

hoc,    hac, 

h6c. 

h6c. 

hoc. 

Plur.  hi,      has. 

hornm. 

harum. 

ho- 

his. 

hos,          has. 

bis. 

haec. 

rum. 

haec. 

(4.)  1st 6,  ista,  istud,  this,  that,  points  out  an  object  present  to  the 
person  spoken  to,  and  is  called  the  demonstrative  of  second  person. 


256    PRONOUNS,  RELATIVE  AND  INTERROGATIVE. 


1 

Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 

tiins;. 

iste,  ista, 

istms. 

isti. 

istum,  istam. 

isto,   ista, 

istud. 

istud. 

isto. 

Plur. 

isti,  istae, 

istorum,   istarum,   is- 

istis. 

istos,      istas, 

istis,  istis, 

L. 

ista. 

torum. 

ista. 

istis. 

B£#^  Iste  is  often  used  to  express  contempt. 
(5.)  Ille,  ilia,  illud,  points  out  an  object  remote  from  the  speaker 
{that,  the  former,  opposed  to  hie),  and  is  called  demonstrative  of 
third  person.     (It  is  often  used  for  he,  she,  it.) 

5^^  Declined  throughout  like  istS,  ista,  istud. 
(6.)  Ips6,  ipsa,  ipsiim,  self,  is  added  to  other  pronouns,  me,  te,  s6, 

&c.,  and  expresses  myself,  thyself,  himself,  Slc,  accordingly. 
I^"  Declined  like  istS,  except  that  neuter  is  ipsum  (not  ipsud). 

3.   RELATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

(637.)  The  relative  pronoun  [who,  which,  what)  is  so  called  l^ecause  it 
commonly  refers  to  some  other  word  called  the  antecedent. 
(1.)  dui,  quae,  qu6d,  who,  which,  what. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


qui,  quae, 
quod. 

qui,  quae, 
quae. 


CUJUS. 

quorum,  quarum, 
quorum. 


quibus. 


qu6m,  quam, 

quod, 
quos,     quas, 

quae. 


quo,  qua, 

quo. 
qufl>us. 


(2.)  dmcunque,  quae cun que,  quodcunqu6  {whoever,  whichever, 
whatever),  declined  like  qui,  quae,  qu6d,  with  cunque  added. 

(3.)  Qiyi\s(ixi.\s  {whoever,  whatever), usediwithout  &s-a\iS,tKa\Ave.  The 
following  cases  only  occur,  and  of  these  only  quisquis  and  quic- 
quid  commonly. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


Nom. 

quisquis    (m.,    f.). 

quicquid  (n.). 
quiqiii  (m.,  f.). 


qufbiis  qui- 
bus. 


Ace. 

quemqu6m  (m.,  f ), 
quidquid  (n.). 


qu6qu6,       quft- 
qua,  qu6qu6. 


4.  INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

f  (638.)  The  interrogative  pronmins  {who  ?  which  ?  what  ?)  are  used  in 

asking  questions. 

(1.)  duis,  quae,  quid  {who?  which?  what?),  is  declined  precisely 
like  the  relative  qui,  except  that  in  nom.  sing.  masc.  it  has  qu!s, 
and  in  nom.  and  ace.  sing,  neut.,  quid,  [dui,  quae,  qu6d,  is  also 
used  interrogatively,  as  an  adjective  (172).] 

(2.)  duisnSm,  quaenSm,  quidnam,  is  more  emphatic  than  quls. 
(Pray,  what  are  you  doing  ?  quidnam  Sgia  ?)  It  is  declined  liko 
quis,  quae,  quid. 


rUONOUNS,  INDEFINITE  AND  CORRELATIVE.  257 

5.   INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 

(639.)  The  indefinite  proTiouns  denote  an  object  in  a  general  way,  with- 
out reference  to  a  particular  individual  {any  one,  some  one,  &c.). 

,   ,   ^       ,  ,         (  quod  dam,  used  as  an  adjective,  ) 

(1.)  duidam,  quaedam,  <        .,.  ,  >  a    cer- 

^   '  ^  C  quiddam,  used  as  a  noun,  j . 

tain  (one) ;  plur.,  some.    Declined  like  qui ;  but  takes  n  generally 

before  d  instead  of  in  ;  e.  g., 

duendam,  quorundam  (not  quemdam,  quorumdam). 

(2.)  duivis,      >  {any  you  please).    Declined   like   qui.     In  neut., 

duilibSt,  J      qu6dusedas  adjective,  quid  as  substantive. 

(3.)  duisquam  {any,  any  one;  e.g.,  when  it  is  denied  that  there 

are  any).     Neut.,  quicquam  or  quidquam.     Declined  otherwise 

like  qui.     [This  pronoun  is  used  chiefly  in  negative  sentences.] 

,^ ,   ^     .      „„  „^       (  quod piam,  used  as  o^;.,    \  somebody, 

(4.)  duispiam,  quaepiam,  ^  ^    •  j    --  .  t^\ 

(  quid piam,  used  as  SMd'sf.,  )      some.. 

/r\   ti-      -     vi-       V   <  aliqu6d,  as  a<i;.,    ) 

(5.)  Ahquis,  ahqua,  \  ^„^^„^^  ^^  ^^^^^^  \  some  one,  sometUng. 

tB\  r\    •         «  w    <  quodqug,  as  adj.,    >        , 

(6.)  duisquS,  qucequfi,  ^  ^    .  ,^     '  /'    \  each. 

(  quidquS,  as  subst.,  ) 

TT  •  ^  ^   <  -quodqug,  as  adj.,    }        , 

Unusquisqu6, -qusequg,  ^   ^    ..      «  r  '    f  each    one 

(  -quidqug,  as  subst.,  ) 

(stronger  than   quisqug).     Genitive,  uniuscujusquS,  &c., 

both  unus  and  quis  being  declined. 

(7.)  EcquJs  ?     Used  interrogatively  {does) ;  any  one,  anything. 

T-         V  ^   {  ecqu6d,  as  adj.,    )  neut.  plural, 

Ecquis,  ecquae,  or  ecqua,  <  „,  /'    >  ^, 

<  ecquid,  as  subst.,  )      ecqua. 

O^Ecquis  expects  the  answer  none. 

6.    CORRELATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

(640.)  Correlative  pronouns  are  such  as  atiswer  to  each  other;  e.g., 
how  great  ?  so  great ;  as  many,  so  many,  &c. 
(1.)  The  following  are  declined 

{a)  Like  adjectives  of  Class  I.  (625) : 
Tantus,  so  great,  somtich;         quantuscunquS,  however  great 
du antus,  as  great ;  aliquantus,  somewhat  great, 

{b)  Like  adjectives  of  Class  IL  (626) : 
Talis,  such. 

duftlis,  as,  of  what  kind. 
CLn&llscnuqne,  of  whatever  kind. 

(2.)  The  following  are  indeclinable  : 

T6t,  so  muny;  SllquSt,  sovm. 

T6tid6m, ^tfsi  so  many ;  quotqufit,  however  many, 

Cin6t,  as  many. 

Y2 


§  6.  VERBS. 

(641.)  The  verb  declares  something  of  a  person  or  thing:  the  eagle 
flies ;  the  queen  loves  her  daughter. 

1.   CLASSES   OF   VERBS. 

(642.)  Verbs  are  active,  passive,  or  deponent. 

(1.)  Active  verbs  exprisss  action :  {a)  either  transitively,  requiring  an 
object ;  e.  g.,  the  queen  loves  {whom  ?)  her  daughter ;  or  (b)  intran- 
sitively,  not  requiring  an  object;  the  eagle ^i'es. 
(2.)  Passive  verba  express  the  receiving  or  suffering  of  an  action ; 
/  am  loved ;  I  was  punished. 

Obviously  intransitive  verbs  have  no  passive  form.    We  cannot 
say,  /  am  danced,  I  am  slept. 
(3.)  Deponent  verbs  have  the  passive  forrft,  but  an  active  signification. 

2.   PARTS   OF   THE  VERB. 

(643.)  The  verb  is  divided  into, 

(a)  The  indefinite  verb,  including  certain,  parts  which  do  not  refer  to 
a  definite  person  or  time. 

(b)  The  finite  verb,  including  the  parts  which  always  do  so  refer. 

Tfidejinite  Verb. 
(644.)  {a)  The  indefinite  verb  includes, 

(1.)  The  infinitive,  which  expresses  the  action  of  the  verb  without 
relation  to  a  definite  person,  and  partakes  also  of  the  nature  of  a 
noun  ;  e.  g.,  to  learn ;  to  love  is  pleasant. 

(2.)  The  participle,  which  expresses  the  action  of  the  verb  under  the 
form  of  an  adjective  ;  loving,  blooming. 

(3.)  The  gei-und,  which  expresses  the  action  of  the  verb  under  the 
form  of  the  noun,  in  all  cases  but  the  nominative,  and  supplies  ob- 
lique cases  to  the  infinitive. 

(4.)  The  gerundive,  which  expresses  the  action  of  the  verb  as  neces- 
sary or  continued,  under  the  form  of  an  adjective,  in  all  cases  and 
genders. 

(5.)  The  supine,  which  also  expresses  the  action  of  the  verb  in  the 
form  of  two  cases  (ace.  and  abl.)  of  the  noun. 

Finite  Verb. 
(645.)  [I)  The  finite  verb  includes  those  parts  which  express  the 
fl.)  DifPerent  varieties  of  affirmation,  viz.,  the  moods. 
(2.)  Different  times  at  which  the  action  of  the  verb  takes  place,  viz., 

the  tenses. 
(3.)  Different  relations  of  the  verb  to  persons  or  tilings,  viz.,  the  nwm- 
bc2-s  and  persons. 


PART3    OF    THE   FINITE    VERB.  259 

(1.)  The  Moods. 
(646.)  The  verb  expresses  affirmation ;  the  moods  of  the  verb  are  used 
to  vaiy  the  character  of  the  affinnation. 

(1.)  By  the  indicative,  affirmation  of  a.  fact  is  expressed  ;  e.  g.,  I  write, 

I  did  not  write. 
(2.)  By  the  subjunctive,  affirmation  is  expressed  doubtfully,  contin- 
gently,  or  indejinitely  ;  e.  g.,  I  may  write,  if  I  should  write,  perhaps 
some  [may]  think. 
(3.)  By  the  imperative,  affinnation  is  expressed  as  an  injunction  or 
request ;  e.  g.,  write.  • 

(2.)  The  Tenses. 
(647.)  Time  may  be  past,  present,  or  future,  and  the  verb  has  therefore 
three  tenses  to  express  these.     But  action  may  be  represented  as  going 
on  or  as  co-mpleted,  either  in  past,  present,  or  future  time,  and  therefore 
two  forms  are  required  for  each,  making  six  in  all. 


Present. 

Past. 

Future.                        | 

Action  gozTig  on, 
or  imperfect. 

Action  completed, 
or  perfect. 

/  love,  or  am 

loving. 
I  have  loved. 

(Perfect.) 

I  was  laving. 

(Imperfect.) 

/   had    loved. 

(Pluperfect.) 

I  shall  love,  or  be  loving. 
(Future.) 

/  shall  have  loved.  (Fu- 
ture Perfect.) 

Rem.  1.  The  Latin  uses  its  perfect  form  in  two  ways  :  (1)  like  the 
English  perfect,  to  express  action  complete  in  present  time  ;  c.  g., 
amavl,  /  liave  loved :  (2)  like  the  English  imperfect,  to  express  ac- 
tion indefinitely  in  past  tune  ;  e.  g.,  Smavi,  I  loved.  This  is  called 
the  perfect  aorist.  [The  latter  use  is  by  far  the  most  common. 
This  distinction  should  be  thoroughly  understood.] 

2.  The  subjunctive  mood  has  no  future  (it  uses  the  peripln-astic 
form  661). 

3.  The  present,  perfect,  and  future  are  called  primary  tenses,  refer- 
ring, as  they  do,  either  to  present  or  future  time  ;  the  imperfect, 
perfect  aorist,  and  pluperfect  are  called  historical  tenses,  referring, 
as  they  do,  to  pa.st  time. 

(3.)  Numbers  and  Persons. 

(648.)  As  there  may  be  more  than  one  person  engaged  in  an  action,  the 
verb  has  two  mimbers,  singular  and  plural.  These  persons  must  be  either 
/,  thou,  we,  ye,  or  some  other  person  or  thing ;  therefore  the  verb  has 
three  persons,  1st,  2d,  and  3d,  which  are  denoted  in  Latin  by  different 
CTtdings. 

3.    CONJUGATION. 

(649.)  Conjugation  is  the  inflection  (21,  R.)  of  a  verb  through  all  its 
parts.  There  are  in  Latin /our  conjugetions  of  verbs,  distinguished  by  the 
ending  of  the  infinitive  ;  thus  : 

1.  s.  3.  4. 

-arft.  -6r«.  ^rS.  -IrS. 


260 


PARADIGM   OF    ESSE,   TO    BE. 


4     THE   AUXILIARY    OR   SUBSTANTIVE   VERB   ESSE,  tO  be. 

(660.)  [Before  proceeding  to  the  conjugations,  we  must  give  the  forms 
of  e  s  s  6,  to  be,  called  an  auxiliary,  because  it  is  used  in  forming  some  of 
the  parts  of  the  verb  ;  and  substantive,  because  it  is  the  verb  expressing 
eimple  existence.] 


1.    INDICATIVE. 


ACTION   INCOMPLETE. 


Present. 
Imperf. 
Future. 


sum, 

I  am. 
erSm, 

/  teas. 

I  shall  be. 


6s, 

thou  art. 
eras, 

thouwast. 
eris, 

thou,  Spc. 


est, 

he  is. 
erfit, 
he  was. 
erit, 
he,  Src. 


sumus, 
we  are. 

eramus, 
we  were. 

erimiis, 
we,  Spc. 


estis, 

ye  art. 
eratis, 
ye  ivere. 
gritls, 
ye,  ^c. 


sunt, 

they  are. 
erant, 
they  loere. 
erunt, 

they,  SfC. 


ACTION   COMPLETED. 


Perfect. 

ful. 

fuisti,        Ifilit, 

/       have 

thouhastl  he  has 

been. 

been.        I  been. 

Pluperf. 

fugrSm, 

fueras,      Ifuerat, 

/        hadlthou          \  lie  had 

been. 

}iadst,Scc.\  been. 

FutPerf. 

fu6rd, 

fueris,       'fuerit, 

/       shall 

thmi          'he  shall, 

have  been. 

shait,  4-c.'   ^c. 

Plural. 

fuimus. 

fuistis, 

■  we  have 

ye  have 
been. 

been. 

fueramus, 

fueratis, 

toe  had 

ye  had 
been. 

been. 

fuerimus. 

fueritis. 

we  shall. 

ye  shall. 

Src. 

Src. 

fiierunt, 

they  have 

been. 
filerant, 

they  had 

been. 
fderint, 
they  shall, 

Src. 


2.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


INCOMPLETE. 


Present. 
Imperf. 


sxm, 

/  may  be. 
essem, 

/     might 

be. 


sis, 

thon,  Src. 
esses, 
thou,  Src. 


sit, 

he,  Src- 
esset, 
he,  SfC. 


simus, 

we,  Src. 
essemus, 

we,  ^-c. 


sitis, 

ye.  Src. 
essetis, 

ye,  Src. 


sint, 

they,  Src. 
essent, 

they,  Src. 


COBIPLETED. 


Perfect. 
Pluperf. 


Singular. 


fugrim, 
/        may 
have  been. 

fuiss6m, 
/     might 
have  been. 


fueris, 
tlum,  Src. 

fuisses, 
thou,  SfC. 


fuerit, 
he,  <^c. 

fuissSt, 
he,  SfC. 


fuerimus, 
we,  Sj'C. 

fiiissemus, 
we,  Src. 


fueritis, 
ye,  Src. 

fuissetis, 
ye,  Src. 


fuerint, 
tiiey,  <^c. 

fuissent, 
they,  4rc. 


3.    IMPERATIVE. 


2.  es,  est6,  be  thou. 

3.  esto,  let  him  be. 


2.  este,  estote,  be  ye. 

3.  suntfi,  let  them  be. 


4.    INFINITIVE. 


Esse,  to  be.    fuisse,  to  have  been,    futurus,  &,  iim,  esse,  to  be  about  to  be. 


5.   PARTICIPLE. 


Only  in  compounds  ;  absens,  abserU 
(from  absum)  ;  praesens,  present 
(from  prsesum). 


Futui-us,  a,  um,  one  who  vjUI  be. 


PARADIGMS   OF   REGULAR   VERBS.  261 

5.   PARADIGMS   OF    REGULAR  VERBS. 

(651.)  (1.)  Verb-stem. — The  stem  of  any  verb  is  found  by  striking'  off 
the  infinitive-ending ;  e.  g.,  of  &m-are,  m6n-ere,  r6g-er6,  and  aud-irS  the 
stems  are  &m-,  mon-,  reg-,  aud-,  respectively.* 

(2.)  Tense-stem. — Each  tense  has  its  own  tense-stem,  consisting  of  the 
verbnstem  with  or  without  some  additions.    Thus,  in  the  first  conjugation : 
Pres.  tense-stem  =  verb-stem  =  am-. 
lm.perf.  tense-stem  =  verb-stem  +ab  =  am ab-. 
Perf.  tense -stem  =  verb-stem  H-av  =  amav-. 

[In  the  annexed  paradigms  the  tens6-stems  are  shown  upon  the  left- 
band  side.  Observe  that  the  perfect  tense-stem  serves  also  for  the  stem 
of  the  pluperfect  and  future  perfect  tenses.] 

(3.)  Tense-ending. — Each  tense  has  its  own  endings,  which,  added  to 
the  tense-stem,  give  the  person-forms.     Thus  : 

Imperfect-stem  Smab-  -l-am=  amah  am,  1st  person. 

amab-  -fas  =  am  abas,  2d  person,t  &c. 
(4.)  The  perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  of  the  passive  voice  are 
formed  by  means  of  the  past  participle  and  forms  of  e  s  s  6  ;  thus  : 
ftmatus  sum,  Smatiis  eram,  amatus  ero. 

[No  farther  explanation  of  the  paradigm  is  necessary.  The  student 
should  learn  the  modes  of  formation,  and  the  tense-endings  for  each  tense, 
apart  from  the  stems  am-,  mon-,  &c.,  and  unite  them  afterward  with  those 
or  any  other  stems.] 

*  In  reality,  the  crude-forms  are  ama-,  mone-,  audi-  (the  three  pure 
conjugations),  and  reg-  (the  consonant  conjugation).  But  the  changes  of 
the  crude-form  in  inflection  form  too  great  a  difficulty  for  beginners  ,  we 
therefore  present  the  stem  as  the  language  afibrds  it  to  us,  without  going 
into  a  nicer  analysis. 

t  Farther,  the  person-ending  forms  part  of  the  tense-ending.  From  the 
paradigm  (active),  it  will  be  seen  that  in  every  tense  except  the  perfect 
the  endings  are 

o,  or  m,  s,  t,  mus,  tis,  nt. 

These  endings  are  added  to  the  tense-stem,  either  directly,  as  am-o,  or  by 
means  of  a  connecting-vowel,  as  reg-i-s,  or  of  a  flexion  syllable  and  con- 
necting-vowel, as  amav-er-a-s. 


■^ 


262  PARADIGMS  FOR  THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS. 

PARAPIGMS    FOR 


ACTIVE. 


(652.) 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Present,  I  love  or  am  loving,  thou  art  loving,  6fc. 


ftm- 
mon- 
reg- 
aud- 


6. 
ed. 
6. 
id. 


as. 

es. 
is. 
is. 


amtts. 
emus, 
imus. 
imus. 


atis. 
etia. 

itis. 
Itis. 


ant. 
eiit. 
unt. 
Junt. 


Imperfect,  I  was  loving,  advising,  ruling,  hearing,  6fC. 


&m-ab- 
mon-eb- 
r6g-eb- 
aud-ieb- 


am-ab- 
m6n-eb- 
reg- 
aud-i- 


am-av- 
mon-u- 
(reg-s) 
rex- 
aud-iv- 


am-av- 
mon-u- 
rex- 
aud-iv- 


fim-av- 
m6n-u- 
rex- 
aud-iv- 


(653.) 


am- 
mSii- 
r6g- 
aad- 


at. 


atj3. 


ant. 


Future,  I  shall  or  will  love,  advise,  rule,  hear,  6fC. 


6. 

am. 


IS. 

es. 


ICIUS. 

emus. 


It  IS. 

etis. 


unt. 
ent. 


Perfect,  /  have  loved.    (Perfect  Aorist,  I  loved.) 


istl. 


it. 


imus. 


erunt,  or 


Pluperfect,  I  had  loved,  Sfc. 


6ram. 


gras. 


6r5t. 


6ramus. 


gratis.        grant;. 




Future  Perfect,  I  shall  have  loved,  ffC. 


grS. 


6ris. 


grit. 


grimus. 


grltls. 


grint. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


2d  Singular. 


a,  at6. 
e,  eta. 
e,  its. 
I,  ltd. 


at6. 
6t6. 
it6. 
it«. 


2d  Plural. 


ate,  atote. 
etg,  etotg. 
itg,  itotg. 
Itg,  It6te. 


•3d  Plural. 


ant6. 
ent6. 
nnt6. 
iuntfl. 


PAllADIGiMS  FOR  THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS. 


263 


THE    FOUR   CONJUGATIONS. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Present,  I  am  loved,  ffc. 


Sxa- 

6r. 

mou- 

e6r. 

reg- 

or. 

aad- 

i6r. 

aris. 

are. 

eris. 
ere. 
eris. 
6re. 
iris, 
ire. 


atur. 
etur. 
itur. 
itur. 


amur. 
emur. 
imur. 
imur. 


amini. 
emini. 
imini. 

TminT. 


sLntiir. 
entur. 
untur. 
iuntur. 


Imperfect,  I  was  loved,  ^v. 


ain-ab- 
niou-eb- 
r6e:-eb- 
aud-ieb- 


(  aris. 
^are. 


atur. 


^mirii. 


antur. 


Future,  I  sJiali  be  loved,  6fc. 


am-ab- 
mon-eb- 
reg- 
aud-i- 


or. 
ar. 


itur. 
etur. 


imur. 
emur. 


irmni.' 
emini. 


untur. 
entur. 


Perfect,  I  have  been  loved,  SfC. 


amatus.* 
moiiitus.* 
rectus.* 
auditus.* 


ful. 


es, 

or 
fuisti. 


est. 

or 

fuit. 


sumus, 

or 
fuTmus. 


estis, 

or 

fuistis. 


sunt, 
or 
fuerunt. 


Pluperfect,  7  had  been  loved,  S,-c. 


araatus.'' 
mSnitus.* 
rectus.* 
auditus.* 


gram.t 


Sras. 


erat. 


Future  Perfect,  2  shall  have  been  loved,  4«. 


Smatus. 
m6mtus.* 
rectus.* 
auditus."* 


6r84 


6ris. 


6rit. 


6ritis. 


erunt. 


IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 


ani- 
m6n- 
r6g- 
aud- 


arS,  at6r. 
§r§,  6t6r. 
6r6,  itor. 
ir6,  itor. 


ator. 
etor. 
itor. 
it6r. 


2d  PluraL 


amiin,  aminor. 
emini,  eminor. 
imini,  iminSr. 
Imini,  iminor. 


3d  PluraL 


antor. 
entor. 
untur. 
iuntor. 


*  The  participle  must  be  inflected  in  gqnder  and  number  to  agree  witi 
the  subject, 
t  Sometimes  fuerarn,  ftieras,  &c. 
{  Sometimes  fuero,  fueris,  &c. 


264 


PARADIGMS  FdR  THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS. 


(654.) 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 


Prksent,  I  may  love,  4<. 


am- 
mon-e- 
reg- 
aud-i- 


em. 
am. 


6t. 
fit. 


emus, 
amus. 


atis. 


ent. 

ant. 


Imperfect,  /  might  love,  ifc. 


am-ar- 
m6n-er- 
r6g-€r- 
aud-ir- 


6m. 


es. 


6t. 


emus. 


etis. 


ent. 


Perfect,  I  may  have  loved,  ifc. 


Sm-av- 
mon-u- 
r6x- 
aad-iv- 


grim. 


eris. 


grit. 


erimus. 


6ritis. 


firint. 


Pluperfect,  I  might  have  loved,  tfc. 


am-av- 
mon-u- 
rex- 

aud-Iv- 


tssSm. 


isses. 


isset. 


issfimus. 


issetis. 


{655.) 


INFINITIVE. 


Present  \to  love  or  he  loving,  6fc.\. 


Sm-arg, 


mon-erS, 


r6g-6rS, 


aud-irg. 


Perfect  [to  have  loved,  6fc.]. 


amav-iss6, 


3. 

monu-IssS, 


rex-iase, 


audTv-Iss6. 


Future  [to  be  about  to  love,  ifC.]. 


fimaturus  ess6,   mSnituras  essS,    recturiis  essfi,       auditorus  essS. 


(656.) 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present  [loving,  advising,  ruling,  hearing]. 


&m-ans, 


rSg-ens, 


aud-iens. 


Perfect  [having  loved,  advised,  ruled,  heard]. 


Wanting :  supplied  by  abl.  absol.,  or  by  quum  v^^ith  subj. 


FtJTURE  [abotU  to  love,  advise,  rule,  hear]. 


ftmaturils, 


moniturus. 


rectdrus. 


audituras. 


(657.) 


GERUND   AND 


Gerunds  :     amandi,        mSnendl,        regendl,        audiendl. 


(658.) 


Supine  in  um :  fimatum, 
"  u :      ftmatu, 


s. 
monitum, 
monitO, 


3. 

rectum, 
rectn, 


audltum. 
audit*. 


PARADIGMS  FOR  THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS. 


265 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 


Pbesent,  I  maij  be  loved,  6fc. 


mon-e- 

r6g- 

aud-i- 


ar. 


j  ens. 
{  er6. 

<  aris. 
\  ar6. 


etur. 
atur. 


emur. 
amur. 


emini. 
aminl. 


entur. 
antiir. 


Imperfect,  I  might  he  loved,  <Vc. 


am-ar- 

ra6n-cr- 
r6g-6r- 
aud-ir- 


gr. 


ens. 
ere. 


etur. 


emini. 


entur. 


Perfect,  /  may  have  been  loved,  ffc. 


amatus. 
monitus. 
rectus, 
auditus. 


Pluperfect,  I  might  have  been  loved,  SfC. 


amatus. 
mdnitus. 
rectus, 
auditus. 


essem.t 


esses. 


esset. 


essetis. 


essent. 


INFINITIVE. 


Present  [to  be  (being)  loved,  Sfc.]. 


1.  2. 

fim-ari,  m6n-erT, 


r6g- 


aud-Iri. 


Perfect  [to  have  been  loved,  Sfc.]. 


amatus  ess6,        mOnitus  ess6,        rectus  essS,         auditus  ess6. 


Future  [to  be  about  to  be  loved,  fyc.]. 


1.  2. 

SmStiim  iri,  mSnitum  IrT, 


rectum  iri, 


auditum  iri. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present  ajjd  Perfect  [loved,  being  loved,  having  been  loved,  ffC.'\. 


amatus, 


mOnitus, 


rectus. 


4. 

auditus. 


t 

gerundive. 

1. 
Gerundive:  ainSndus, 

2. 

mftnendiis, 

3.                                4. 

rggendfls,        audxSndus. 

*  Sometimes  fuerim. 

t  Sometimes  fuissem. 

266 


VERBS    IN    lO    AND    DEPONENTS. 


6.   VERBS    IN   16    OF    THE   THIRD    CONJUGATION. 

(659.)  Some  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  assume  i  before  the  person- 
ending  in  some  of  the  tenses,  as  shown  in  the  following  paradigm  of  cftp- 
6  r  6,  to  take. 


\                                                                           ACTIVE. 

j                                                                                   INDICATIVE. 

j  Pres. 
Imperf. 
Fut. 

cap- 

capi-eb- 

cap-i- 

id. 

ftm. 
ftm. 

is. 
as. 
es. 

it. 
ftt. 
et. 

imus. 
amiSs, 
emus. 

itls. 
atis. 
etis. 

i-unt. 

ant.         { 
ent.         1 

SUBJUNCTIVE.                                                                                j 

1  Pres.     1  cap-1- 

1  am. 

as.         1  ftt. 

amus. 

atis. 

ant. 

PASSIVE. 

INDICATIVE.                                                                                   j 

Pres.     j  cftp- 
Imperf.   cap-i-eb- 
Fut.      1  cftp  i- 

i-6r. 

ftr. 

ftr. 

6ris. 
aris. 
eiis. 

itur. 
atur. 
etur. 

imur. 
amtir. 
emur. 

imini. 
amiui. 
emini. 

i-untur. 

antur. 

entur. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.     1  cap-i- 

ftr. 

aris.      1  atur. 

amiir. 

amini. 

antilr. 

IMPERATIVE. 

3d  Plnr.  Active, 

cftp-i-ur 

td. 

3d  Plur.  Pass.,  cftp- 

'-unt6r. 

PARTICIPLES.                                                                                j 

Pres.  Active,  cftj 

)-i-ens. 

Fut.  Pass.,  cap-i 

-endus. 

Geri 

JND,  cap  i-end-i, 

6,   &c. 

7.  DEPONENT  VERBS. 

(660.)  (1.)  Deponent  verbs  have  the  passive  form  with  active  significa- 
tion. As  the  endings  are  the  same  as  those  of  the  passives  (Paradigm, 
p.  263,  265),  we  need  not  repeat  them. 

(2.)  But  deponents  have  three  active  participles,  while  other  verbs  have 
but  two :  thus, 

Pres.,  exhorting,      Peif.,  Iiaving  exliorted,      Fut.,  about  to  exhort, 
hort-ans.  hort-atus.  hortat-urus. 

(3.)  Also,  all  transitive  deponents  have  the  verbal  adjective  in  d  u  s  ; 
e.g.,  hortandiis,  one  that  should  be  exhorted:  intransitive  deponents 
have  it  only  in  the  neuter ;  e.  ^.,  moriendum  est,  one  must  die. 

8.    PERIPHRASTIC    CONJUGATION. 

(661.)  By  means  of  the  tenses  of  ess  g,  combined  with  the  future  parti- 
ciple in  r  u  s,  and  the  verbal  in  d  u  s,  the  periphrastic  conjugation  is  form- 
ed ;  e.  §-.,  a  m  a  t  u  r  u  s  s  u  m,  7  am  about  to  love,  I  intend  to  love ;  ft  m  a  n  - 
d  ii  s  sum,/  am  to  be  loved,  I  must  be  loved,  one  must  love  me ;  and  so 
through  all  the  tenses  and  persons.  The  deponent  verbs  employ  this  per- 
iphrastic conjugation  also. 


FURMATION    OF    I'ERFEUT-STEM. 


267 


1.    WITH    PARTICIPLE    IN   rus. 


[|                                  INDICATIVE. 

sttbjunctivb:.                     | 

('sum,  6s,  est,  &c. 
x^«*-->-„       eram,  eras,  &c. 

^        '          fueram,  fueras,  &c. 
[&r6,  eris,  &c. 

fsim,  sis,  sit,  <fcc. 
amaturus,  J  essem,  esses,  &c. 
a,  um,        }  fuSrim.                           | 
l^fuissem.                         i 

INFINITIVE.                                                                          1 

Pres.,  amaturus  ess6,  to  be  about  (or  intending')  to  love. 
Perf.,   amatunis  fuissS,  to  have  been  about  to  love. 
Put.,    amaturus  fore,  to  intend  to  love  hereafter. 

2.   WITH    VKRBAL    IN   dfis. 


indicative. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I'sum. 
eram. 
Smandus,  a,  um,  \  fui. 

fu6ram. 
lerd. 

^sTm. 
Sma„dfe,»,um,  h-^- 

l^fuissem. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.,  amandas,  a,  um,  ess6,  ought  to  be  loved. 
Perf.,    Smandus,  a,  um,  iuins^,  ought  to  have  been  loved. 
Put.,    amandus,  S,  um,  forS,  aught  to  be  loved  hereafter. 

9.    ON    THE    FORMATION    OP    THE    J»ERFECT-STEM. 

(662.)  In  the  paradigms,  the  perfect-stems  are  formed  by  adding-  to  the 
verb-stem  in  the  Istconj.  av-  (am-av-);  in  the  2d,  u  (mon-u-);  in  the  3d, 
8  (reg-s);  in  the  4th,  iv-  (aud-iv-).  But,  although  most  Latin  verbs 
form  the  perf.-stem  thus,  many  use  different  endings,  which  are  exhibited 
in  the  following  classification : 

1.    FIRST    CONJUGATION. 

(663.)  Four  ways  of  forming  the  perfect-stem : 

I.  By  adding  av  to  the  verb-stem :  am-arg — Sm-av-i. 

II.  "  u  "  crSp-ar6 — cr6p-u-i. 

III.  By  reduplicating  the  first  consonaait :      darS— dSd-i. 

IV.  By  lengthening  the  stem-vowel :  juv-flre— juv-I. 


il.   SECOND   CONJUGATION. 


Five  ways : 
I.  By  adding  u  to  the  verb-stem ; 
II.  "         ev 

III.  •'         s 

rV.  By  reduplication : 


m6n-6re — mon-ii-I. 

del-erS — del-ev-I. 

alg-er6 — al(g)-s-I. 
mord-gre — mo-mord-I. 


V.  By  lengthening  the  stem-vowel :  c5v-6re— cftv-L 


268  FORMATION    OF   PERFECT-STEM. 

III.   THIRD   CONJUGATION. 

Six  ways : 

I.  By  adding  s  to  tlie  verb-stem  :  scrlb-ere — scrip-s-L 
11.           "          u               "-  al-6re— il-u-L 

III.  "  V  or  iv      "  cern-6r6 — crev-i. 

arcess-6re — arcess-iv-L 

IV.  By  reduplication :  '  curr-ere — cu-curr-i. 
v.  By  lengthening  the  stem-vowel :  6m-6re — em-i. 

VI.  By  presenting  the  simple  verb-stem :  Scu-ere — Scu-i. 

IV.    FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

Five  ways : 

I.  By  adding  iv  to  the  verb-stem :  aud-ir6,  aud-iv-i. 

n.  "  u  "  aper-lr6,  ap6r-u-i. 

III.  "  s  "  falc-ire,  fal(c)-s-i. 

IV.  By  lengthening  the  stem-vowel :  ven-ii'S,  ven-i. 

V.  By  presenting  the  simple  verb-stem  :  comp6r-ir6,     comper-i. 

[In  the  following  lists,  the  verbs  are  an-anged  according  to  the  abovo 
classification,  and  the  supines  also  given.  When  any  peculiarity  exists 
in  the  compounds,  it  is  stated.  Of  Class  I.  (which  embraces  most  of  the 
verbs  in  the  language),  only  one  example  is  given  in  each  conjugation,  as 
the  student  is  familiar  with  its  form ;  but  under  the  remaining  heads  all 
the  verbs  in  common  use  are  mentioned.] 

10.  LIST  OF  VERBS. 

(664.)  FIRST   CONJUGATION. 

I.  Perfect-stem  adds  av  to  the  Verb-stem. 

To  love,  am-6,  am-arS,  Sm-av-i,  am-ft-tum, 

II.  Perfect-stem  adds  u  to  the  Verb-stem. 

To  creak,  cr6p-o,  cr6p-are,  cr6p-u-i,  crgp-i-tum. 

/  ie  down,  cub-o,  cub-ar6,  cub-u-I,  cub-I-tum. 

8o  the  compounds ;  e.  g.,  accubo,  accubar6,  acciibuT,  accuMtum. 
Some  compounds,  however,  which  take  m  before  b,  follow  the  3d 
conj. ;  e.  g.,  accumbS,  accumberg,  accubui,  accubitiim. 


To  tame, 

dom-o. 

d6m-ar6. 

dom-u-i, 

dom-i-tum. 

To  rub. 

frfc-o, 

fric-are, 

fric-u-T, 

C  fric-t'um  and 
I  fric-a-tum. 

To  glitter. 

mic-o. 

mic-ar6, 

mic-u-i. 

To  gush  forth. 

emic-o, 

6mic-ar6, 

emic-u-i, 

6mic-a-tum. 

Tofold, 

plic-o, 

plic-ar6, 

plic-u-I, 

plic-i-tum. 

PUc-fl  is  used  only  in  composition :  supplied,  duplTcd,  multiplied,  have 
avi,  atum ;  explicd,  to  explain,  avi,  atum ;  to  unfold,  ul,  itum. 
To  cut,  sSc-o,  sec-are,  sec-u-i,  sec-t-iim. 

To  sound,  son-o,  s6n-arS,  s6n-u-i,  s6n-i-tani. 

To  thunder,       t6n-o,  ton-ar6,  ton-u-i,  t6n-i-tiim. 

Toforbid,         v6t-o,  vet-arS,  v6t-u-T,  v6t-i-tum. 


LIST   OF   VERBS,  SECOND   CONJUGATION.  269 

III.  Pei-fect-stem  reduplicates  the  first  Consonant  with  e. 
To  give,  d-o,  d-ar6,  ded-I,  da-tum. 

So,  also,  those  compounds  of  whicli  the  first  part  is  a  word  of  two  syl' 
lables ;  e.  g.,  circumdS,  circumdare,  circumdedi,  circumdatum,  to  sur- 
round; but  the  compounds  with  monosyllables  follow  the  3d  conj. ; 
e.  g.,  addo,  addSre,  addidi,  addituna,  to  add. 
To  stand,  st-o,  st-are,  stSt-i,  st-atiim. 

The  compounds  have  in  the  perfect  s  1 6  t  i^  when  the  first  part  is  a 
dissyllable ;  e.  g.,  circumsto,  circumstfiti ;  but  s  t  i  t  i  when  it  is  a 
monosyllable ;  e.  g.,  adst6,  adstiti.  , 

IV.  Perfect-stem  lengthens  the  Stem-vowel. 
To  assist,  juv-o,  juv-ar6,  juv-I,  ju-tum. 

lava- turn. 
To  wash,  liv-o,  lav-ar6,  lav-i,  ■(  lau-tiim. 


(  lava- tun 
<  lau-tiim 
(  16-tum. 


(665.)  SECOND   CONJUGATION. 

I.  Perfect-stem  adds  u  to  the  Verb-stem. 
To  admonish,    mon-eo,  m6n-erS,  mon-ii-i,  m6n-T-tum. 

II.  Perfect-stem  adds  6v  to  the  Verb-stem. 

To  blot  out,       del-eo,  del-er6,  d6l-ev-T,             del-e-tum. 

To  weep,            fl-eo,  fl-ere,  fl-ev-I,                fl-e-tum. 

To  spin,             n-eo,  n-er6,  n-ev-i,                n-e-tum. 

To  fill  up,          compl-eo,  compl-er6,  compl-ev-i,        compl-e-tum. 

To  abolish,        fibol-eo,  ab61-er6,  ab6l-ev-i,           abol-i-tum. 

The  primitives  6leo  and  pleo  are  obsolete:  like  compleo  are  con- 
jugated impleo,  expleo ;  like  aboleo,  adoleo,  and  exoleo. 

III.  Perfect-stem  adds  s  to  the  Verb-stem. 

Euphonic  Rules. 

1.  A  t-sound  before  s  is  dropped;  e.  g.,  ar(d)-si  =  ars-i. 
2   A  c-sound  +  s  =  x;  e.  g.,  aug-si  =  aux-i. 

3.  But  a  c-sound  after  1  or  r,  before  s,  is  dropped;  e.  g.,  £al{g)-Bl=i 
fuls-i. 

To      shiver  >     .  i    ,  «  (  al-s-i 

•^1.      7  J    }  alg-eo,  alg-erS,  <  ,  , 

with  cold,   )  o       '  ^  (alg-s-i). 

To  burn.  ard-eo,  ard-SrS,         s  /    j     -\ 

I  (ard-s-i). 

To  increase,      aug-eo,  aug-erS,         <  -  .<  >  auc-ttlm. 


To  be  bright,     fiilg-eo,  fulg-er6, 

Z2 


(aug-s-I). 

ful-s-i 

(fulg-s-i). 


270 


To  stick, 


LIST  OP  VERBS,  SECOND  CONJUGATION, 
haer-eo,  haer-gre,         |  (l^'-Li).         T*- 


To  indulge,       indulg-eo,        indulg-er6, 
To  command,  jub-eo,  jnb-erS, 


To  remain, 

mSn-eo, 

m4n-er6, 

To  assuage, 

mulc-eo, 

mulc-6r6, 

To  milk, 

mulg-eo. 

mulg-er6, 

To  laugh. 

rid-eo, 

rld-6re. 

To  advise, 

suad-eo, 

suad-ere, 

To  wipe, 

terg-eo. 

terg-er6. 

To  sweU, 

turg-eo, 

turg-6r6, 

To  twist, 

torqu-eo, 

torqu-6r6, 

To  press. 
To  shine, 
To  mourn, 

urg-eo, 
luc-eo, 
Idg-eo, 

urg-er6, 
lnc-6r6, 
lug-er6, 

indul-tum. 


inul-sfim. 
mulc-tuir.. 


indul-s-i 

(jndulgs-i) 

jus-s-i  (jub-s-i),  jus-sum. 

maii-s-i,  man-sum, 

mul-s-I 

(mulc-8-I), 

mul-s-i 

(mulg-s-I), 

ri-s-i  (rid-s-I),    rl-sum. 

sua-s-i  ?      _    „ 

,       ,     _.         >  sua-sui 
(suad-s-ij,       ) 

ter-s-I  ?  ^ 

>  ter-sun 
(terg-s-i),         5 

tur-s-i 

(turg-s-T). 

tor-s-I 

(torqu-s-i), 

ur-s-i  (urg-s-T). 

lux-i  (Itic-s-i). 

lux-I  (lug-s-I). 

IV.  Perfect-stem  reduplicates  ^rst  Consonant  and  Vowel. 

To  bite,  mord-eo,  mord-er6,  mdmord-l,  mor-sum. 

To  hang,  pend-eo,  pend-er6,  p6pend-i,  pen-sum. 

To  betroth,  spond-eo,  spond-er6,  sp6pond-i,  spon-sum. 

To  shear,  tond-eo,  tond-6r6,  totond-i,  ton-sum. 

The  compounds  of  these  verbs  drop  the  reduplication ;  e.  g.,  re-spondl 
(not  re-spopondl). 

V.  Perfect-stem  lengthens  the  Stem-vowel. 


tor-tum. 


To  fake  care. 

cav-eo, 

cav-erS, 

cav-i, 

cau-tum. 

To  favour, 

fav-eo. 

fav-er6, 

fav-I, 

fau-tum- 

To  cherish. 

f6v-eo. 

fbv-erS, 

fov-I, 

fo-tum. 

To  move, 

m6v-eo, 

m6v-er6. 

mov-T, 

mo-tum. 

To  dread. 

p5v-eo, 

pav-gr6, 

pav-I. 

To  sit, 

sed-eo. 

s6d-er6, 

sed-I, 

ses-sum. 

In  the  same  manner  are  conjugated  the  compounds  with  dissyllables  ; 
e.  g.,  circumsfideo,  circumsederg,  circumsedi,  circumsessum,  to  sit 
around  ;  but  those  with  monosyllables  change  6  of  tlie  stem  into  f ; 
e  g.,  assideo,  assidere,  assedl,  assessum,  to  sit  by. 

To  see,  vid-eo,  vid-6r6,  vid-i,  vl-sfim. 

To  VO10  v6v-eo,  vdv-er6,  v6v-i,  v6-tflm. 


LIST  OF  VERBS,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


271 


(866.) 


THIRD   CONJUGATION. 

I.  Perfect-stem  adds  s  to  the  Verb-stem. 
Euplwnic  Rules. 

1.  b  before  s  =  p  ;  e.  g.,  scrib-si  =  scrip-sT. 

2.  c-sound  +s  =  X  ;  e.  g.,  cing-si  =  cinx-i. 

[c,  g,  b,  qu,  are  regarded  as  c-sounds.] 

3.  t-sound  (d  or  t)  before  s  is  dropped  ;  e.  g.,  claud-s-i  =  claus-T. 

4.  m  before  s  is  either  changed  into  s,  or  p  is  interposed  (prem-s-1  aa 
pres-sl;  com-s-i  =  conip-s-i). 


To  write. 

To  hind, 
To  carry y 
To  cook, 

To  shut. 


scrlb-o, 

cing-o, 
veh-o, 
e5qu-o, 

claud-o, 


scrib-ere, 

cing-er5, 
veh-ere, 
c6qu-6re, 

claud-6re, 


scrip-tum. 


scnp-s-i 
(scrib-s-i), 

einxl  (cing-s-i),  cinc-tum. 
vexl  (vcli-s-i),  vec-tum. 
coxi  (coqu-s-T),  coc-tum. 
clau-s-I  ?   ,        ^ 

t  (claud-s-i),      5 

A  u  in  the  compounds  is  changed  into  u ;  e.  g.,  includo,  inclad6rS,  in- 
clusi,  incliisum,  to  shut  in. 
To  give  way,     ced-o,  ced-6r6,  cessi  (ced-s-i),  ces-Bum 

To  scatter,         sparg-o,  sparg-6r6,      <  ,  .,       >  spar-sura. 

(  (sparg-s-i),     5 

In  the  compounds   a  is  changed  into  e ;  e.  g.,  aspergo,  aspergSrfe. 
asper-s-i,  aspersum,  to  besprinkle. 
To  adorn,         c6m-o,  com-6re,  com-ps-i,  com-p-titm. 

To  press,  prSm-o,  pr6m-gre,       ^  J^       '    ..        >pres-sum 

In  the  compounds  6  is  changed  into  i ;  e.  g.,  comprimo,  comprimfirft, 
compressi,  compressum,  to  press  together. 
To  carry,  g6r-o,  g6r-6re,  gess-I  (g§r-s-I),  ges-tum. 

IL  Perfect-stem  adds  u  to  the  Verb-stem. 
(a)  Without  change  of  Verb-stem. 
To  nourish,       al-o,  fil-erS, 

To  till,  C61-0,  c6l-grS, 

To  ask  advice,   consul-o,  consul-6re, 

deps-ere, 
frem-erS, 
ggm-6re, 
m6l-6r6, 
occul-6r6, 
pins-6r6, 
r&p-Sre, 


To  knead, 
To  murmur. 
To  groan. 
To  grind. 
To  conceal, 
To  grind. 
To  snatch. 
To  join  to- 
gether 


deps-o, 
fr6m-o, 
gSm-o, 
mSl-o, 
occul-o. 


pms-o, 
rip-io, 


ftl-u-T, 

fil-i-tum. 

C61-U-1, 

cul-tum. 

consul-u-i, 

consul-turn. 

deps-u-I, 

deps-tum. 

frem-u-I, 

frem-i-tum. 

gem-u-I, 

gem-i-tilm. 

mol-u-T, 

mol-i-tum. 

occul-u-I, 

occul-tum. 

pins-u-I, 

pins-i-tum. 

rftp-u-T, 

rap-turn. 

sSr-o, 


g6r-6rS, 


Bgr-u-I. 


sertdm. 


272 

To  weave, 
To  tremble, 
To  vomit, 


To  beget, 
To  reap. 
To  place, 


LIST  OP  VERBS,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 

tex-o,  tex-Sre,  tex-u-I,  tex-tfim. 

trgm-o,  tr6m-erS,  trem-u-I. 

vom-o,  v6m-6re,  v6m-u-i,  v6m-i-tilm. 

(b)  With  change  of  Verb-stem, 
gign-o,  gign-erg,  ggn-u-T,  ggn-i-tum. 

m6t-o,  met-ere,  mess-u-I,  mes-sum. 

p6n-o,  pon-ere,  p6s-u-i,  pos-i-tum. 

[For  compounds  of  cumbSre,  see  664,  II.] 

111.  Perfect-stem  adds  v  or  Iv  to  the  Vcrh-stem. 
(a)  Adds  V,  and  lengthens  Stem- vowel  if  short 

cem-Sre,  crS-v-I,  cre-tum. 


cem-o, 


To  separate, 
perceive, 

The  perfect  and  supine  of  cemo  are  found  only  in  the  compounds 
e.  g.,  decemo,  decemere,  decrevi,  decretum,  to  decree. 
To  grow,  cresc-o,  cresc-ere,  cre-v-I,  cre-tum. 

To  smear,  lin-o,  lin-ere,  le-v-I,  or  II-v-i,  li-tum. 

To  know,  nosc-o,  nosc-ei-e,  no-v-i,  no-tum. 

So,  also,  the  compounds  inter,  ig,  per,  prse-nosco,  have  ovT,  otiim ;  buj 
cog,  ag,  praecog,  recog-nosco,  have  ovi,  ztum  ;  e.  g.,  agnosco,  agnosc- 
6rS,  agndvi,  agnitum,  to  perceive. 
To  feed,  pasc-o,  pasc-erg,  pa-v-i,  pas-tum. 

To  rest,  quiesc-o,  quiesc-6rg,        qui6-v-i,  '  quie-tum. 

To  decide,  scisc-o,  scisc-ere,  scl-v-i,  scl-tum. 

To  sow,  s6r-o,  ser-ere,  se-v-I,  sS-tum, 

The  compounds  have  the  supine  in  itum ;  e.  g.,  consero,  consgrJ-riS 
consevi,  consitum,  to  plant. 


To  allow. 

sin-o, 

sin-gre. 

sT-v4, 

8i-tum. 

To  despise. 

spem-o. 

spem-grg. 

spre-v-i, 

spre-tuio. 

To  strew, 

stem-o. 

stem-ere. 

stra-v-i, 

stia-tum. 

To     become  ) 

1 

accustom-  ; 

>  suesc-o, 

suesc-grS, 

suo-v-T, 

sug-tum. 

ed,             ] 

1 

(6)  Perfect-stem  adds  iv. 

To  summon. 

arcess-o, 

arcessere, 

arcess-iv-T, 

arcess-i-tu 

In  the  same  manner,  capesso,  facesso,  incesso,  lacessD. 
To         seek,  ^ 
strive    of-  >  pgt-o,  pgt-gre,  pgt-iv-I,  pSt-i-tilm. 

ter,  ) 

To  seek,  *  quser-o,  quaer-grS,  quass-Iv-i,  qusBS-i-tam. 

The  compounds  change  m  of  the  stem  into  I ;  e.  g.,  conqulro,  coH" 
qulrgrg,  conquislvi,  conqulsitum,  to  examine. 


To  rub, 


tgr-o. 


tgr-grg. 


(  tr-iv-I  >    .  ^^ 


LIST  OF  VERBS,  THIRD  CONJUGATION.  273 

IV.  Perfect-stem,  reduplicates  tlic  first  Consonant, 

Some  of  these  present  vowel-changes,  which  must  be  carefully  observed. 
(a)  When  the  first  vowel  is  i,  o,  u,  the  first  consonant  is  reduphcated  with 
that  vowel ;  {b)  in  other  verbs  with  e  ;  (c)  the  compounds  of  dare,  to  give, 
with  i. 

(a)  First  Vowel  i,  o,  or  u. 
To  run,  cuiT-o,  curr-ere,  cu-curr-i,  cur-sum. 

Most  of  the  compounds  have  the  perfect  both  with  and  without  the 
redupHcation ;  e.  g-.,  accurro,  accurrere,  accurri  and  accucurri,  ac- 
carsum,  to  run  to. 

To  learn,  disc-o,  disc-Sr6,  di-dic  I. 

The  compounds  also  reduplicate ;  e.  g.,  perdisc8,  perdidici,  to  learn 
thoroughly/. 

To  toeigh,  pend-o,  pend-er6,  p6-pend-z,         pen-sum. 

The  compounds  do  not  reduplicate ;  e.  g.,  append^,  appender6,  ap 
pendi,  appensum,  to  hang  to. 

To  demand,       posc-o,  posc-6r6,  po-posc-L 

The  compounds  reduplicate ;  e.  g.,  reposcferS,  rfipoposci,  to  demaruf 
hack  again. 

To  prick,  pung-o,  pung-6r6,  pu-pug-i,  punc-tum. 

Compomids  have  perf  p  u  n  x  i. 
To  beat,  tund-o,  tund-6rS,  tu-tud-i,  tun-sum. 

Compounds  have  supine  tusum;  e.  g.,  contundSrS,  contusum,  to 
crush. 

(5)  Other  Verbs  reduplicate  with  c. 

To  fall,  cdd-o,  cad-6r6,  cS-cid-i,  ca-sum. 

To  cut,  cosd-o,  csed-6rS,  cS-cId-i,  csB-sum. 

The  compounds  have  cidi,  cisum ;  e.  g.,  occldfirg,  occldi,  occlsiim,  to 
kill. 
To  sing,  ctoi-o,  can-6rg,  c6-cln  T,  can-tum. 

The  compounds  have  cinui ;  e.  g.,  succinerg,  succinul,  to  sing  to. 

To  cheat,  fall-o,  faU-6rS,  fg-fell-I,  fal-sum. 

To  bargain,       pang-o,  pang-er6,  p6-pig-i,  pac-tuni. 

The  compounds  have  pingd,  pegi,  pactum  ;  e.  g..  comping6r6,  compe.^t, 
comp  actum,  to  fasten  together. 


To  spare,          parc-o, 

parc-ere, 

p6-perc-i. 

par-Slim. 

To  bring  forth,  pftr-io. 

par-6rg, 

pe-p6r-I, 

par-turn. 

To  drive,          pell-o, 

pell-6r6, 

pg-pul-i, 

pul-stira. 

a"o  touch,           tango, 

tang-6rg, 

t6-tig-i, 

tac-tum 

274 


LIST  OP  VERBS,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


The  compounds  have  tingo,  tingSrg,  tigl,  tactum;   e.  g-*  attinggr*, 
attigi,  attactum,  to  reach. 


(c)  Compounds  oi  dUrc, 


To  hide, 
To  add, 
To  lay  up. 
To  believe, 
To  surrender. 
To  publish. 
To  put  in. 
To  oppose. 
To  destroy. 
To  betray. 
To  restore. 
To  deliver, 
To  sell. 


ab-do, 

ad-do, 

con-do, 

ere -do, 

de-do, 

e-do, 

in-do, 

ob-do, 

per-do, 

pro-do, 

red-do, 

tra-do, 

ven-do, 


abd-ere, 

add-ere, 

con-d-erS 

cred-6r6, 

ded-6r6, 

6d-ere, 

ind-erc, 

obd-ere, 

perd-er6, 

prod-er6, 

redd-ere, 

trad-6r6, 

vend-er6, 


reduplicate  witJi  i. 
ab-did-i, 
ad-did-i, 
con-did-I, 
cre-did-i, 
de-did-i, 
e-did-I, 
iu-did-i, 
ob-did-I, 
per-dld-i, 
pro-did-i, 
red-did-i, 
tra-did-i, 
ven-dld-I, 


ab-di-66m. 

ad-di-tum. 

cou-di-tum. 

cre-di-tum. 

de-di-tum. 

6-di-tum. 

in-di-tum. 

ob-di-tum. 

per-di-tum 

pro-dl-tum. 

red-di-tum. 

tra-di-tum. 

ven-di-tSm. 


em-i. 

em-tum. 

fod-I, 

fos-sum. 

fug-i, 

fu«^-T-tum. 

fQd-i, 

fu-sum. 

leg-I, 

lec-tum. 

v.  Perfect-stem  lengtliem  the  Stem-vowel  of  the  Verb, 
(a)  Without  Vowel-changes. 
To  take,  6m-o,  em-6r6, 

Compoands,  co6mo,  adimfi,  exiin8. 

To  dig,  f6d-io,  f6d-6re. 

To  fly,  fng-io,  fug-6r6. 

To  pour,  fund-o,  fund-6re. 

To  read,  leg-o,  I6g-6r6, 

Tlie  compounds  with  per,  prae,  re,  and  sub  retain  6  ;  e.  g.,  perlggfirSi 
perlegi,  perlectum,  to  read  through ;  but  those  with  col,  de,  e,  se 
change  6  into  i ;  e.  g.,  collig^rg,  collegi,  coUectum,  to  collect :  three, 
diligo,  I  love;  intelligo,  /  understand;  negligo,  I  neglect,  havo 
exi,  ectum ;  e.  g.,  dilig6r6,  dilexi,  dilectum. 

To  leave,  linqu-o,  linqu-er6,  liqu-I, 

To  burst,  rump-o,  rump-er6,  rup-I, 

To  conquer,       vinc-o,  viuc-ere,  vic-l, 

(b)  With  Vowel-change. 
To  drive,  Sg-o,  fig-grS,  §g-i. 

Three  of  the  compounds  retain  &,  circnmago,  perago,  sStfigo :  two  un- 
dergo contraction,  cogo  (con  +  ago),  dego  (de  +  ftgo) :  compounds 
with  ab,  amb,  ad,  ex,  prod,  sub,  change  a  into  i;  e.  g.,  abig6i-8, 
abegi,  abactum,  to  drive  away. 

To  take. 


lic-tum. 

rup-tum. 

vic-tum. 

ac-tum. 


cSp-io, 


cap-6r6, 


cep-i; 


cap-tum. 

All  the  compounds  change  a  into  i,  and  have  supine  ceptum;  e.  g^ 
accxp-6rg,  accepT,  acceptnm,  to  receive. 


LIST  OF  VERBS,  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


275 


fac-io, 


fac-6r6, 


fec-i, 


fac-tum. 


To  make,       ) 
To  do,  S 

1.  Compounds  with  verbs  retain  a ;  e.  g.,  Iabefac6r6,  labgf eci,  labe* 
factum,  to  tceaken. 

2.  Compounds  with  prepositions  change  a  into  i ;  e.  g.,  aiFicSre,  aff  ecT, 
affectum,  to  affect. 

To  break,  frang-o,  frang-6r6,  freg-i,  frac-tum. 

Compounds  change  a  into  i ;  e.  g.,  refringere,  refregi,  refractum,  to 
break  open. 
To  cast,  jac-io,  jac-er6,  jfcc-T,  jac-tum. 

Compounds  ab,  ad,  de,  e,  in,  ob,  re,  trans,  all  change  &  into  I ;  e.  g^ 
abjicerfi,  abjeci,  abjectiSm,  to  throto  away. 

VI.  TJie  Perfect-stem  presents  the  simple  Verb-stem, 
(a)  Steins  ending  in  u  or  v. 


To  refuse. 

abnu-o, 

abnu-er6. 

abnu-!. 

To  sharpen, 

acu-o. 

acu-erS, 

acu-i,. 

acu-tfim. 

To  show, 

argu-o, 

arga-6r6. 

argu-i. 

argu-tflm. 

To  agree, 

congru-o. 

.  congru-6rS, 

congru-i. 

To  put  off. 

exu-o. 

exu-erg, 

exu-i. 

exu-tum. 

To  put  on. 

indu-o. 

indu-6re. 

indu-i, 

indu-tum. 

To  imbue. 

imbu-o, 

imbu-6r6, 

imbu-i, 

imbfi-tum. 

To  pay, 

lu-o. 

lu-6re, 

lu-i. 

lu-tum. 

Tojear, 

m6tu-o, 

mStu-ere, 

mStu-i. 

To  lessen, 

minu-o. 

minu-erg, 

minu-I, 

minu-tum. 

To  rush. 

ru-o, 

ru-6rS, 

ru-I, 

ril-tum. 

To  loose, 

solv-o, 

solv-6rg, 

solv-i, 

solu-tilm. 

To  spit, 

spu-o, 

spu-er6, 

spu-T, 

spu-tfim. 

To  place. 

statu-o. 

statu-6r6, 

statu-i. 

statu-tfim. 

To  sneeze, 

stemu-o. 

stemu-ere, 

stemu-i, 

stemu-tum. 

To  sew, 

su-o. 

su-6rS, 

su-I, 

su-tum. 

To  give, 

tribu-o, 

tribu-6r6. 

tribu-i, 

tribu-tum. 

To  roll. 

volv-o, 

volv-6rg. 

volv-I, 

volu-tum. 

(6)  Consonan^stems. 

To  weigh. 

append-o, 

append-grg, 

append-T, 

appen-sdm. 

So,  also,  the  other  compounds  of  pendo. 

To  attend. 

attend-o, 

attend-erg, 

attend-T, 

atten-gum. 

So,  also,  the  other  compounds  of  tendo 

To  drink, 

blb-O, 

bib-erg, 

bib-i, 

bibi-tum. 

To  forge, 

ciid-o. 

cud-gre. 

Clid-i, 

cu-silm. 

To  eat, 

6d-o, 

ed-grc. 

6d-f, 

•-sum. 

To  lick. 

lamb-o. 

lamb-gre. 

lamb-T. 

To  chew. 

mand-o, 

mand-grg. 

mand-i, 

raan-suin. 

To  spread. 

pand-o. 

pand-grg. 

pand  i, 

pas-si5m. 

276 


LIST  OF  VERBS,  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


To  take,  prghend-o,       prghend-ere,     prghend-i,         prehen-sum. 

To  scratch,        scab-o,  scab-ere,  scab-I. 

To  climb,  scand-o,  scand-ere,         scand-L  soan-suni. 

Compounds  (a,  e,  de,  con,  in)  change  a  into  e ;  e.  g.,  ascendo. 
To  sink  down,  sid-o,  sid-6r6,  sid-i. 

The  compounds  take  the  perf,  and  supine  from  s6de6;  e.  g.,  coosH 
derS,  consedi,  consessum,  to  sit  together. 
To  hiss,  strid-o,  etrid-gre,  strid-i. 

To  turn,  vert-p,  vert-6r6,  vert-i,  ver-sum. 

Deverto,  proeverto,  and  r6verto  are  also  used  in  the  passive  form  as 
deponents  ;  e.  g.,  rSvertSr,  reverti,  reversus  sum,  /  tiir7i  back. 


2h  brush,  verr-o,  verr-6rS,  verr-i, 

To  pluck,  vell-o,  vell-SrS,  vell-i, 

Compounds  of  cand6  and  fendd  belong  here,  viz. 


To  burn, 
To  defend, 

(667.) 


incend-o, 
d§fend-o. 


incend-6rS, 
d6fend-Sr6, 


incend-i, 
defend-i. 


ver-sum. 
^^ll-sum. 


mcenrsum. 
dSfen-sum. 


FOURTH   CONJUGATION. 

I.  Perfect-stem  adds  iv  to  the  Verb-stem. 

{Obs.)  This  class  contains  most  of  the  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation; 
the  following  alone  has  a  peculiar  supine  : 
To  bury,  s5p6l-io,  sepel-ir6,  sSpSl-iv-i,        ,  s6pul-tum. 

II.  Perfect-stem  adds  u  to  the  Yerb-st-em. 
To  clothe,          Smic-io,  Smic-ii-e, 
To  open,            ap8r-io,            SpSr-ire, 
To  cover,           6p6r-io,  6per-ire, 
To  leap,             s&l-io,  sSl-irS, 

Compounds  change  a  into  i ;  e.  g.,  desilirS,  desilui,  desultum,  to  leap 
down. 

III.  Perfect-stem  adds  s  to  iJte  Verb-stem. 


amic-u-i, 

amic-tiim. 

ap6r-u-i. 

aper-tum.* 

6p6r-u-I, 

6per-tum. 

sal-u-i, 

sal- turn. 

To  cram. 


farc-io. 


farc-ir6, 


<  far-s-i 


farc-tum. 


ai-c-s-i), 
The  compounds  change  a  intoe;  e.  g.,  confercire,  confersi,  confertum, 

to  Jill  up. 


To  prop. 

fulc-io. 

fulc-ire, 

To  draw. 

haur-io. 

haur-ire, 

To  decree. 

sanc-io. 

sanc-ir6, 

ful-s-i 

(fulc-s-i), 
(  hau-s-i 
\  (haur-s-i), 
C  sanx-i 
(  (sanc-s-i),- 


ful-tum. 


haus-tum. 


sanc-i-tum  and 
sanc-tum. 


*  The  compounds  of  par-i6  which  begin  with  a  vowel  have  ui,  ertum, 
as  in  Class  IT. ;  those  beginning  with  a  consonant  have  i,  eitflm,  as  in 
Class  V. 


^ST 

OF  DEPONENT  VERBS. 

JJ75 

To  patch, 

sarc-io, 

sarc-TrS, 

sar-s  i 

(sarc-s-i), 

>sar-tiSm. 

Tofed, 

sent-io. 

sent-ir6. 

(  sen-s-i 

\  (sent-s-i), 

>  sen-sum. 

Instead  of  assentid)  ass'entior,  deponent  i^  more  common, 

To  hedge  in,     sSp-io,  sep-ii-g,  sip-s-i,  sep-tunl. 

To  hind,  vinc-io,  vinc-iru,         \,  ■         -x  >  vine- turn. 

(  t^uic-s-i),        ) 

IV-  Perfect-stem  lengthens  the  Stem-vowel. 
Contains  hut  a  siiigle  einiple  verb.. 
To  coTue,  ven-io,  v^n-ire,  ven-i,  ven-tiim. 

v.  Perfect-stem  takes  the  simple  Verb-stem^ 
To  ascertain,    comper-io,       comp6r-ire,       comp6r-i,  comper-tum.* 

To  discern,        rep6r-io,  r.6p6r-ire,  rep6r-i,  i*6per-tum.* 

(668.)      •  DEPONENT  VERBS. 

FIRST    CONJUGATION. 

To  exhort,-  hort-6r,  hort^aii,  hort-at-us. 

The  deponents  of  the  first  conjugation  are  the  most  numerous,  but  are 
formed  like  liortor,  with  arl,  atiis. 

SECOND   CONJUGATION. 

To  acknowledge,       fat-eor,  fat-eri,  fas-siis. 

The  compounds  make  f itedr,  fessus  ;  e.  g.,  conf ite6r,  confiteri,  coa 
fessus,  to  confess  :  difFiteor  has  no  participle. 


To  bid. 
To  heal. 
To  deserve, 

lic-e6r, 

mSd-edr, 

m6r-e6r, 

lic-Sri, 

m6d-6ri. 

mSr-eri, 

Iic-It-us. 
m6r-Tt-iis. 

To  pity, 
To  think. 

mTsSr-e6r, 
re  or. 

misgr-grl, 
r-eri. 

(  miser-it-us,    or 
\  miser-tus. 
ra-tus. 

To  look  upon, 
Tofear, 

ta-e6r, 
v6r-e6r, 

tu-6rl, 
ver-eri, 

(  tu-it-us,  or 
I  tu-tus. 
v6r-it-us. 

THIRD 

CONJUGATION. 

To  devise, 

comminisc-6r, 

comminisc-i, 

commen-tus 

Il6miniscor, 

to  remember,  has 

1  no 

perfect. 

To  obtain, 
To  be  weary, 

adipiBc-6r, 
defetisc-6r, 

adipisc-i, 
defetisc-i. 

adep-tiis. 
defes-sus. 

*  See  note,  p.  276. 
A   A 

278 

To  awake, 
To  enjoy, 
To  perform, 


LIST  OF  DEPONENT  VERBS. 


expergisc-6r, 

fru-6r, 

fung  6r, 
grid  i6r, 


expergisc-i, 

fru-i, 

fung-i, 
grftd-i, 


experrec-tfia. 
fruc-tus    and 
fru-it-us. 
fanc-tus. 
gres-sus. 


To  proceed, 

Compounds  change  the  S  into  6  ;  e.  g.,  aggrSdi,  aggressus,  to  assaiL 


To  be  angry, 
To/all, 
To  speak, 
To  die. 
To  obtain. 
To  be  bom, 
To  lean  %ipo% 

strive, 
Toforget, 
To  bargain, 
Tofeed, 


,to  ) 


irasc-6r, 

lab-6r, 

I6qu-6r, 

m6r-i6r, 

nancisc-6r, 

nasc-6r, 

mt-6r, 

6blivisc-6r, 

pScisc-Or, 

pasc-6r, 


irasc-i. 

lab-i, 

l6qu-i, 

mor-i, 

nancisc-i, 

nasc-i, 

nit-i, 

oblivisc-i, 

pScisc-i, 

pasc-I, 


lap-sus. 

locu-tiia. 

mor-tuus- 

nac-tus. 

na-tus. 

lii-sus,  or 

nix-US. 

obll-tus. 

pac-tns. 

pas-tas. 


This  verb  is  the  passive  of  pascSrS,  to  give  food. 
To  svffer,  pftt-i6r,  pfit-I,  pas-sus. 

PerpStiOr,  perpessus,  to  endure,  changes  &  into  6. 

(From  plect5,  to  twine.) 


To  embrace,         5 

amplect-6r, 

amplect-i, 

amplex-fis. 

complect-6r. 

complect-I, 

,      complex-tis. 

To  set  out, 

pr6ficisc-6r. 

proficisc-i, 

pr6fec-tus. 

To  complain. 

qa6r-6r, 

qu6r-I, 

ques-tus. 

To  gnn. 

ring-6r, 

ring-L 

TofoUaw, 

s6qu-or. 

s6qu-i, 

sScu-tfts. 

To  revenge, 

Tilcisc-6r, 

ulcisc-L 

ul-tus. 

To  use. 

flt-or, 

iit-i. 

u-sus. 

FOURTH 

CONJUGATION. 

To  assent, 

assent-i6r, 

assent-M, 

assen-sus. 

To  flatter. 

bland-iOr, 

bland-iri, 

bland-it-iis. 

To  try. 

exper-ior, 

expgr-iri, 

exper-tus. 

To  bestow  money, 

larg-i6r, 

larg-iii, 

larg-it-us. 

To  lie. 

ment-i6r, 

ment-iri, 

ment-it-us. 

To  measure, 

met-ior, 

met-iri. 

men-sus. 

To  m/rve  a  mass. 

mol-ior, 

mol-M, 

mol-it-us. 

To  wait  for. 

opp&--i6r 

opp6r-iri, 

opper-tiis. 

To  begin, 

ord-ior, 

ord-Iri, 

or-sus. 

INCHOATIVE   AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


279 


To  rise, 

6r-iQr, 

6r-irl, 

or-tas. 

To  divide, 

pait-idr, 

part-iri, 

part-it-iis. 

To    possess  \ 
myself  of, 

p6t-i6r, 

pot-iri, 

p6t-it-us. 

To  cast  lots, 

sort-ior. 

sort-iri, 

sort-it-US. 

INCHOATIVE  VERBS. 


Inchoatives  ai-e  verbs  derived  from  nouns,  adjectives,  or  other  v6rbs, 
expressing  a  beginning  or  becoming  of  the  act  or  state  denoted  by  the 
primitive.  Their  stems  always  end  in  sc,  and  they  all  follow  the  form  of 
the  3d  conj. ;  e.  g., 

From  puer,  boy,  we  have  puerasc-Sre,  to  become  a  boy  [again). 
"      matur-us,  ripe,  we  have  maturesc-6re,  to  become  ripe. 
"      dorm-ire,  to  sleep,  we  have  obdormisc-6re,  to  fall  asleep, 

(1.)  It  is  enough  to  observe  on  those  derived  from  adjectides  and  nouns 

that  they  either  have  no  perfect,  or  else  form  it  in  ui. 
(2.)  As  to  those  deriv'ed  from  verbs, 

(a)  Most  are  from  verbs  in  the  second  conjugation,  and  form  their 
perfect-stem  by  adding  u  to  the  stem,  rejecting  sc;  or,  in  other 
words,  their  perf.-stem  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  simple  verb  from 
which  they  are  derived ;  e.  g., 

To  become  gray,        canesc-erS  (caner6),        canu-i. 
To  groio  sour,  acesc-6re  (ac6re),  acu-i. 

(5)  Those  derived  from  verbs  of  the  other  conjugations  take  the  per- 
fects of  the  simple  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived. 

To  grow  old,    inv6terasc-6r6  {inveterdr8),   inveteriv-i,  invetera-tum. 
To  come  to  life,  rtivivisc-&r6  [vlvSre),  rSvix-i,  rSvic-tum. 

To  fall  asleep,  obdormisc-ero  (dormlr^],       obdonniv-i,    obdormi-tum 


11.  IRREGULAR  VERBS.* 


(670.)                                              INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

Tenses  for  Incomplete  Actiom 

Tenses  for  Complete  Action. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 

Perfect  and  Plup^erfect. 

|l.  posse,  to  be  able. 

potuisse,  to  have  been  able. 

2.  velle,  to  be  loiUing. 
'■^.  noils,  to  be  unwilling. 

voluisse,  to  have  been  willing. 

noluisse,  to  have  been  unwilling. 

4.  malle,  to  be  more  willing. 

maluisse,  to  have  been  more  willing. 

■■,.  6derS,  or  esse,  to  eat. 

edisse,  to  have  eaten. 

6.  ferre,  to  bear. 

tulissS,  to  have  borne,  or  suffered. 

7.  iieri,  to  become. 

factum  esse,  to  have  been  made,  o: 

done. 
latum  ess6,  to  have  been  hnnie. 

8,  ferri,  to  be  borne. 

*  See  note,  next  page. 


28a 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


(671.) 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Pkssent,  lam  able,  fyc. 

Peri'ect,  Ifiave  been  able,  SfC. 

1.  possum,* 

potgs,         potest. 

1.  p6tu-i,             isti,      it, 

possumus, 

potestis,      possunt. 

pgtu-imus,      istis,     grant  or  erg. 

2.  v616,  ■ 

vis,              vuit, 

2.  v61u-i,             isti,      it. 

voiiimus. 

vultis,          volunt. 

volu-imus,       istis,     erunt  or  erg. 

3.  nolo, 

nonvis,        nonvuit, 

3.  nolu-i,              isti,       it. 

nolumus, 

nonvultis,  nolunt. 

nolu-Imus,       istis,     erantorerg. 

4.  malO, 

mavis,         mavdt, 

4.  malu-i,             isti,       it. 

znalumus, 

mavultis,     malunt. 

malu-imiis,      istis,     erunt  or  erg. 

5.  edd, 

edis  ar  es,  edit  or  est, 

5.  ed-i,                isti,       it. 

edimus, 

editis  orestTs ;  edunt. 

ed-imiis,          istis,     erunt  or  ere. 

6.  f  ero, 

fers,            fert. 

6.  tul-i,                 isti,       it, 

ferimus, 

fertis,          ferunt. 

tul-imus,          istis,     erunt  or  erg. 

7.  fio,t  • 

fis,              fit, 

7.  factus  sum,     es,        est. 

fimus, 

fitis,            fiunt. 

facti  siimus,    estis,    sunt. 

8.  f  eror. 

feiTis  or  ferre  ;  fertur, 

8.  latus  sum,       es,         est. 

ferimur. 

ferimini,     fSrantur. 

lati  siimus,      estis,    sunt. 

Impkbfect,  I  was  able,  6fC. 

Plupebfect,  I  had  been  able,  6fC. 

1.  pot-erSm, 

6ras,          erat, 

1.  pota-eram,     eras,          erat. 

pot-evamuE 

,    gratis,       grant. 

potu-eramiis,  eratis,        grant. 

'a.  vol-ebam, 

ebas,          ebat. 

2.  volu-eram,      eras,         erat, 

vol-ebamus,    ebatis,       ebant. 

voiu-gramus,  eratis,        grant. 

3.  nol-ebam. 

ebas,         ebat; 

3.  noia-eram,      eras,          erat. 

nol-ebamus 

,    ebatis,       ebant. 

nolu-gramus,  gratis,       grant. 

4.  mal-ebam, 

ebas,         ebat, 

4.  mala-eram,     eras,          grit, 

mal-ebainus,  ebatis,       ebant. 

malu-eramus,  eratis,       erant. 

5.  ed-ebam, 

ebas,          ebat. 

5.  ed-gram,         gras,         grat, 

ed-ebamus 

ebatis,       §bant. 

ed-gramus,     gratis,       erant. 

6.  f  er-ebam. 

ebas,         ebat. 

6.  tul-gram,         griis,          erat. 

f6r-ebamu£ 

,    ebatis,       ebant. 

tul-eramus,     eratis,       erant. 

7.  f  i-ebam. 

ebas.          ebat. 

7.  factus  eram,  eras,          erat. 

fi-ebamus, 

ebatis,      ebant. 

facti  eramus,  eratis,       grant. 

8.  f  er-ebar. 

ebarisorS,  ebatur. 

8.  latus  gram,     eras,          grat. 

fer-ebamur,    ebamiui,   ebantui-. 

lati  eramus,    gratis,        grant. 

Future, 

f^uTURE  Perfect, 

I  shall 

or  will  be  able,  SfC. 

I  shall  or  will  have  been  able,  ffC. 

|1,  pot-6r5, 

eris.,          grit. 

1.  p6tu-grd,        gris,          grit, 

pot-eiimus 

eritis,        grant. 

p6tu-erimus,  gritis,        grint. 

2.  vol-am, 

es,             et. 

2.  volu-erd,         eris,           erit, 

vol-eimis, 

etis,           ent. 

volu-erimus,  eritis,        erint. 

3.  nol-am, 

es,             gt. 

3.  nolu-ero,         gris,           erit. 

nol-emus, 

etis,          ent 

nolu-erimiis,  eritis,        grint. 

4.  mal-am, 

es,             et. 

4.  malu-ero,        eris,          erit. 

mal-emus. 

etis,          ent. 

malu-erimiis,  eritis,        erint. 

5.  ed-am. 

es,             et. 

5.  ed-erd,             gris.           erit. 

.    ed-emus, 

etis,           ent. 

ed-erimus,      eritis,        grint. 

6.  f  er-am, 

es,             ct. 

6.  tul-ero,            eris,           erit, 

fer-emus, 

etis,           ent. 

tul-erimus,      eritis,        grint. 

7.  fi-am, 

es,             gt. 

7.  factus  grd,      gris,          6rit, 

fi-emus. 

etis,           ent. 

facti  grimus,  eritis,        grint. 

8.  f  6r-ar, 

erisorerg,  etur, 

8.  latQs  gro,        gris,           grit, 

fer-emur, 

emini,       entur. 

lati  ei-imus,     eritis,        grint. 

*  As  many  of  these  verbs  are  nearly  related  to  each  other,  it  seems  un- 
necessary to  separate  their  forms  of  inflection.  The  con-espondent  num- 
bers will' be  sufficient  direction  iti  tracmg  the  several  tenses  of  each  verb. 

t  Via,  contrary  to  the  general  rale  (24,  o),  has  i  Ioni>-  throngiioat.  before* 
vowels  :  but  before  er  it  is  short ;  as,  fifiri. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


281 


(672.)                                             IMPERATIVE  MOOD.                                                              | 

Note. — Possum,  volo,  malo,  have  no  imperative  mood. 

1 

3.  noli,  or  nolito,  be  thou  unwilling. 

7.  f  i,  or  f  ito,  become  thou 

• 

nolite,  or  nolitote,  he  ye,  Spc. 

f  ite,  or  f  itote  :  3.  f  iunt6.               1 

5,  &de,  edito,  or  es,  estd,  eat  thou. 

8.  f  en-e,  or  fertor,  be  thou  borne.      || 

edits,  editote  :  3.  eduntd. 

f  erimini,  or  f  eriminor 

.  3.  ferun- 

6.  fer,  or  fertS,  bear  thou. 

tor. 

fertS,  or  fertotS :  3.  f  6runt6. 

(673.)                                            SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.                                                              j 

Present,  I  may  be  able,  ^-c. 

Perfect,  I  may  have  been  able,  6fC.    | 

1.  poss-Tm,             is,            it, 

1.  potu-erim,         eris, 

6rit, 

poss-imiis,         itis,          int. 

potu-erimiis,      eritis. 

erint. 

2.  vel-im,               is,            it, 

2.  volu-erim,         eris. 

urit,^ 

vel-imus,           itis,          int. 

volu-erimus,      eritis. 

erint. 

3.  iiol-im,               is,             it, 

3.  nolu-erim,         eris. 

erit. 

nol-imus,           itis,          int. 

nolu-erimus,      eritis. 

6rint. 

4.  mal-im,              is,            it, 

4.  malu-erim,         eris. 

erit, 

mal-Imus,           itis,          int. 

malu-6rimus,     eritis. 

erint. 

5.  ed-am,                as,            at, 

5.  ed-erim,             eris, 

erit. 

ed-amus,            atis,         ant. 

ed-erlmus,         gritis. 

eriut. 

6.  f  er-am,               as,            St, 

6.  tul-erim,             eris, 

grit. 

fer-amus,           atis,         ant. 

tul-6rimus,         Sritis, 

ferint. 

7.  f  i-am,             as,         at, 

7.  faclus  sim,         sis, 

sit, 

fi-amus,             atis,         ant. 

fact!  simus,        sitTs, 

sint. 

8.  f  er-ar,                 arTs  or  are,  atur, 

8.  latassim,           sis. 

sit, 

fer-amur,           amini,      antur. 

lati  simus,          sitis. 

sint. 

laiPERFECT,  I  might  be  able,  SfC. 

Pluperf.,  I  might  have  been  able,  fyc.  | 

1.  Poss-em,            es,            6t, 

1.  potu-iss6m,       isses. 

iss6t, 

poss-emus,        etis,         ent. 

potu-issemus,   issetls, 

is  sent. 

2,  vell-em,              6s,            6t, 

2.  volu-issem,        iss?s. 

isset, 

veil-emus,         etis,        ent. 

volu-issemus,    issetis. 

issent. 

3.  noll-em,             es,           6t, 

3.  nolu-issem,        isses. 

isset. 

noll-emus,         etis,         ent. 

nolu-issemus,    issetis. 

issent. 

4.  mall-6m,             es,            6t, 

4.  maluissem,      isses, 

issfit. 

mall-emus,        etis,         ent. 

malu-issemus,  issetis, 

issent. 

5.  eder-Smar  essgm ;  es,      6t, 

5.  ed-iss6m,           isses, 

isset, 

eder-emus,        etis,         ent. 

ed-issemus,        issttis. 

issent. 

6.  ferr-6m,              es,            6t, 

6,  tul-issem,          isses. 

iss6t, 

ferr-emus,         etis,         ent. 

tui-issemQs,       issetis. 

issent. 

7.  f  ier-em,              6s,            6t, 

7.  factiis  ess6m,    esses. 

ess6t. 

fiyr-emus,          ttas,          ent. 

fact!  essemiis,  essetis. 

essent. 

8.fen--er,               grisorere,  etur. 

8.  latus  ess6m,      esses, 

ess6t, 

ferr-f'mur,          emini,      entur. 

lati  essemus,     essetis, 

essent. 

(674.)                                                  GERUNDS. 

, 

2.  volendi,  volendo,  volendum,  cf  being,  in  being,  to  be,  willing. 

3.  noleudT,  nolendo,  nolendum,         "                "             "      unwiUi?is: 

4.  malendi,  malendo,  malendiim,     "               "            "      more  willing:. 

5.  edendi,  gdendo,  edeudiira,  of  eating,  -in  eating,  to  eat. 

6.  ftrendi,  f(5rendo,  ftreudum,  of  bearing,  in  bearing,  to  bear.                 [ 

(675.)                                                 SUPINES.                                                                I 

i    Accusative.  5.  esum,  to  eat. 

Ablative.  6sfl,  to  be  eaten,  to  eat.    1 

\                        6.  latum,  to  bear. 

l&tii,  to  be  borne.              \ 

A  A  2 


282 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


(676.) 


PARTICIPLES. 


Active.  1.  potens,  being  able. 

2.  volens,      "      willing. 

3.  nolens,      "      'unwilling. 

4.  malens,     "      more  willing. 

5.  6dens,  eating.  esurus,  about  to  eat. 

6.  ferens,  bearing.         laturus,  about  to  bear. 

7.  -faciendus,  to  be  made  or  done. 

8.  f6rendus,  to  be  borne. 

Passive.  7.  factus,  being  or  having  been  m^ade  or  done. 
8.  latus,  being  or  having  been  borne  or  suffered. 


(677.) 


Eo,  /  go. 


Eft,  I  go,  is  conjugated  like  audio,  except  in  the  following  tenses  : 

Singular.  Plural. 

Imp.  Tnd.  Pres.  ed,  is,  Jt.  Imus,  itis,  eunt. 

Past.  IbSm,      Ibas,       ibat.  ibamus,       Ibatis,      ibant. 

Fut.    ib6,         ibis,       ibit.  iblmiis,       ibTtls,       ibunt. 

Imperative.  i,  or  itd.  it6,  or  itotS.     3.  euntd. 

Imp.  Pot.  Pres.  earn,       eas,        eat.  eamfis,       eatis,        eant. 

Gerunds.  eundi,     eundo,    eandum. 

Particips.  Pres.  iens  [gen.  euntis),  going. 
Supines.  itum,  itu. 

Rem.  In  like  manner,  the  compounda  of  eo  are  formed:  also,  queo,  ro  6c 
able,  and  ngqueo,  to  he  unable ;  except  that  these  two  have  no  imper- 
ative mood  or  gerunds. 


Fut.  ituriis,  about  to  go. 


12.  DEFECTIVE  VERBS 


(678.)  Are  tbose  which  have  only  some  particular  tenses  and  moods ; 
as,  aio,  /  say ;  ausTm,  /  dare ;  av©,  hail  !  &c. 


(1.)  Aio,  I  say. 

Ind.  Pres. 
Imperfect. 
Imperative. 
Subj.  Pres, 
Participle. 

Singular.                                                   Plural. 

aio,            fiis,           &it. 

ai-ebam,    ebas,         6b4t.     ebimus,       ebatis, 

ai. 

aifts,         aiat. 
ftiens. 

aiunt. 
ebant. 

aiant. 

(2.)  AusTm,  /  dare. 

Ind.  Pres. 

ausim,       ausis,        ausit. 

ansint. 

(3.)  Ave,  hail! 

Imperative. 
Infinitive. 

ave,  or  aveto.                         avet6,  or  ftvetote. 
averS. 

(4.)  Salve,  God  save  you  ! 

Imperative. 
Inknitive. 
Ind.  Fut. 

salve,  or  salvetfi.            salvetg,  or 
salvgfg. 

salvebTs. 

salvetotS. 

IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


283 


1 

(5.)  Cedo,  give  me. 

Imperative. 

Singular. 

c6d6. 

riural. 

c6ditg. 

(6.)  F 

axo,  or  faxim  [ior  faciam),  I  will  or 

may  do  it. 

Ind.  Pres. 

fax-o,  or  fax-im,     is,     it.     imus, 

itis. 

int. 

(7.)  ausesS.  I  pray. 

Ind.  Pres. 
Infinitive. 
Participle. 

quaBS-6,     is,              it.          umus. 

quaesere. 

quaesens. 

(8.)  Inquam,  or  InquiS,  /  say.    ,                                     | 

Impf.  Ind.  Pres.  inqu-iS,  or  am,     is,     it.     imus, 
Past.                                                   inquiebat. 
Fut.                                    inquies,    inquigt. 
Perf.  Ind.  Pres.                 inquisti. 
Imperative.      inqu6,         inquitd. 
Participle.       inquiens. 

inquite. 

iunt. 
inquie- 
[bant. 

(9.)  These  verbs, 

Nov-i,  /  kn/}w ; 

Memin-i,  I  remember; 

Coep-i,  /  begin ; 

Od-I,  /  hate, 
have  the  forms  of  the  perfect  tenses  combined  with  the  meanings  of  the 
imperfect.     Nosco,  the  present  of  novl,  is  in  use,  and  denotes  to  learn, 
whence  novl  expresses   the   actual  knowledge  which  is  the  result  of 
past  learning. 


r  i,                       isti,  &c.     [Pres.) 

Ndv- 

6rfim,                 6ras,  &c.     [Past.) 

MemTn- 

6r3,                    6ris,  &c.     [Fut.) 
6rim,                6ris.  &c.     [Siibj.  Pres.) 

Coep- 

Od- 

iss6m,               isses,  &c.     [Subj.  Past.) 
,  iss6,                                      (Infinitive.) 

MementS,  mementote.     [Imperative.) 

Osus,  osurtis  ;  coeptus,  coepturus.     [Participles.) 

13.  IMPERSONAL  VERBS 
(679.)  Are  those  which  have  no  subject,  and  take  the  pronoun  it  before 
them  in  English  ;  e.  ^.,  pluit,  it  rains. 
1.  Impersonals  never  used  personally. 


libet,  libuit,  it  pleases. 
Ilc6t,  licuit,  or  >  one  may, 

llcitum  est,   5  *^  ^^  lawful. 
6port6t,  6portuit,  ^  J*/^  ^^- ^'^^ 


bcfiooves. 


'*mis6r6t,  one  pities. 
*prggt,  it  grieves  [or 


*poenTtet,  pcemtuit,  it  repents. 

*-j>fi.      -j-^      { it  shames, 
*pud6t,  puduit,     ]^^,i,^,j:^„,,j,_ 

wearies, 
iisffusts. 
refert,  it  concerns. 


*t8Bd6t,  pertaesum  est,  \  * 


*  Those  marked  *  take  ace.  of  person  and  gen.  of  the  thing  (or  object  of 
the  feeUuc). 


284 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


2.  Impersonals  sometimes  used    ersonally  in  thirc^  person  singular  oi 
plural. 


fulminat,    }  -.  ;•   i./^„ 
fulgurat,    l^ii^S^i^'' 


grauamat, 
lucescit, 


it  hails. 

it  grows  light. 


nmgit,  tt  snovjs. 

iluit,  it  rains. 

,  on4t,  it  thunders. 

vesperascit,  it  grows  dark. 


3.  Personal  verbs  used 
gular. 


specially  as  impersonals  in  third  person  sin- 


accidit, 

accedit,* 

apparet, 

attinet, 

couducit, 

constat, 

coutingit, 

conveuit, 

delectat, 

decet, 

dedecet, 

evenit, 

expSdit, 

excidit,} 


it  happens. 

it  is  added. 

it  appears. 

it  belongs  to. 

it  is  conducive.  ■ 
^  it  is  known, 
"l  it  is  agreed  upon. 

it  happens. 

it  suits,  agrees. 

it  is  deliglitful. 

it  is  becoming. 

it  is  unbecoming. 

it  turns  out. 

it  is  expedient. 

it  has  escaped  me. 


fit, 

interest, 

juvat, 

latet, 

liquet, 

patet, 

placet, 

prsestat, 

restat, 

solet, 

assolSt, 

Stat, 

sufficit, 

vacat. 


it  happens, 
it  concerns, 
it  is  pleasant, 
it  is  unknown,  con- 
cealed, 
it  is  clear. 
it  is  plain,  open, 
it  pleases  [I  resolve), 
it  is  better, 
it  remains. 

it  happens  usually. 

it  is  resolved. 

it  suffices. 

{I)  have  leisure. 


Rem.  These  may  be  used  in  the  diflPerent  tenses  of  indie,  and  subj. 
moods. 

4.  The  third  person  singular  of  many  intransitive  vejrbs  'Is  used  im- 
personally in  the  passive;  e.  g-.,  curritur,  they  run  (it  is  run  by 
them);  pugnatum  est,  they  fought  (it  was  fought  by  them). 
Those  which  govern  the  dative,  govern  it  also  in  the  impersonal 
form ;  e.  g.,  I  am  envied,  mlhl  invidetiir. 


*  Accedit  quod(orut)=  moreover. 

t  /.  e.,  d  e  m  6  m  6  r  i  a  e  x  c  i  d  i  t  =  eY  has  slipped  from  my  memory--is 
forgotten. 


§  7.  ADVERB. 


The  adverb  qualifies  a  verb,  adjective,  or  another  adverb. 

I.  Derivative  Adverbs. 

(680.)  Derivative  adverbs  (a)  are  nearly  all  formed  fix>m  adjectives  at 
participles,  by  adding  e  or  U  6  r  to  their  stems ; 

1.  Add  e  to  stem  of  adjectives  in  u  s,  &,  um;  e.  g., 

c  1  a  r  -  u  s,  illustrious.  c  1  ft  r  -  6,  illustriously. 

Rem.  B  6  n  u  s  makes  b  S  n  6,  well ;  and  mains  {bad) ;  m  ft  1 6,  badly. 
All  others  end  in  6  {long). 

2.  Add  itSr  to  the  stem  of  adjectives  of  2d  or  3d  class ;  e.  g., 


b r 6 v - i s,  brief.  br6v-itSr, 

f  e  r  o  X  (feroc-s),  fierce.  f 6  r  6  c  -  i  1 6  r,  fiercely. 

Rem.  1-  Those  which  end  in  ns  do  not  take  the  connecting  vowel  1 ; 
eg-., 

p  r  u  d  e  n  s,  jpruieTi^.  "^rxiL^Qn-t^v, 'prudently. 

2.  A u d  a X,  bold,  makes  a u d  a c- 1 S r,  boldly. 

(i)  A  few  are  formed  from  nouns,  by  adding  t  u  s  or  t  i  m  to  the  stem 
by  means  of  a  connecting  vowel ;  e.  g., 

c  09 1  -  u  m,  heaven.  c  oe  1  -  i  - 1  u  s,  from  heaven. 

f  u  n  d  -  u  s,  bottom.  f  a  n  d  -  i  - 1  u  s,from  the  bottom,  totally. 

grex  (greg-s),  j^cA;.  grSg-a-tim,  by  flocks. 

(c)  Cases  of  adjectives,  especially  in  the  neuter,  are  often  used  as  ad- 
verbs ;  e.  ^.,  dulc g,  sweetly ;  f  al  s  b,  falsely ^  &c. 

II.  Primitive  Adverbs. 

.  (681.)  Primitive  adverbs  are  such  as  cannot  conveniently  be  classed 
among  the  derivatives  above  mentioned.  The  most  common  are  arranged 
in  the  following  lists : 


)iiHi 

ADVERBS. 

1.   ADVERBS    OF   PLACE    (fivefold). 

(1.)  In  a  Place. 

ubi? 
jhic, 
liUic, 
jistic, 
lb!, 
Untus, 
foris, 

tohere  1 

here. 

there. 

there,  where  you  are. 

there. 

within. 

without.  " 

ubiqug,              everywhere. 
nusquSm,           nowhere. 
alicubl,              somerchere. 
alibi,                  elsewhere. 

Ibidfim,              in  the  same  place. 

(2.)  ToaPlace—[o,uc). 

quo? 
hue, 
iUuc, 

istuc, 

intrd, 

whither! 

hither. 

thither. 
\  thither,  to  where  you 
:      are. 

to  within. 

f  6rfts,                to  without. 
eo,                     to  that  place. 
alio,                   to  anottier  place. 
aliquo,                to  some  place. 
e6(fem,              to  the  same  place. 

(3.)   Towards  a  Place.                                         i 

quorsiim, 
versus, 
sursum, 
deorsum, 

whitherward  1 
towards, 
upward, 
downward. 

rStrorsum,         backward. 
dextrorsum,      to  the  right  hand. 
simstrofsum,    to  the  left  hand. 

(4.)  From  a  Place— {nc,  nde). 

und6? 

hinc, 

illie, 

istinc, 

indg, 

whence  ? 

hence. 

thence. 
( thence,  from    where 
\      you  are. 

thence. 

aliunde,             from  elsewhere. 
alicundg,           frorn  some  place. 
sicunde,            if  from  any  place. 
utrinqug,           on  both  sides. 
supeme,            from  above. 
infeme,             from  below. 

(5.)   Through  or  by  a  Pla(e. 

qua? 
hac, 

illic, 

which  way  1 
this  way. 
that  way. 

istftc,                 that  way,  by  you. 
alia,                   another  way. 

ADVERBS. 


287 


2.  ADVERBS  OF  TIME  (threefold). 


(1.)  Being  in  time,  either,                                        j| 

1.  Present. 

protinus,            instantly. 

nunc. 

nmo. 

illico,                 straightway. 

h6di6, 

to-day. 

[Remote.) 

2   Past 

eras,                   to-morrow. 

\  then, 
yesterday. 

postridie,          the  day  after. 

perendie,          ttco  days  hence. 

h6ri, 

nondum,            not  yet. 

dudum, 
prid6m. 

^  heretofore. 

4.  Indefinite. 
quando  ?           when ? 

pridie, 

the  day  before. 

aliquando,      "^ 

nuper, 

lately. 

nonnunquam  >  sometimes. 

3.  Future. 

interdum,      j 

sempfer,            always. 

( Very  Near.) 

nunquSm,          never. 

jamjam, 

■^  'presently. 

SS?et          H"'*' «"'»»• 

mox, 

>  immediately. 

statim, 

J  hy-and-hy. 

quotidie,           daily. 

(2.)  Cqutinui 

xnce  of  Time. 

quamdiu  1 

how  long  1 

jamdiu,          "^ 

diu, 

lon^. 
so  long. 

jamdudum,    >  long  ago. 

tamdiu, 

jaxnpridem,   j 

(3.)    Vicissitude,  or 

Repetition  of  Time. 

1.  Indejinite. 

subinde,            immediately  after. 

qu6ties  ? 

how  often  7 

identidem,        several  times. 

saepS, 
tSties, 

often, 
so  often. 

2.  Definite,  or  in  Number. 

aliquotiSs, 

for  several  times, 
"by  turns. 

semel,               once. 

vicissim, 

bis,                    twice. 

rursus. 

again. 

tt^r,                    thrice. 

iterum. 

a  second  time. 

quatSr,              four  times. 

3.   ADVERBS   OF   ORDER. 


indg,      then. 

deinceps,      successively. 

prime,*  -um,t  first.         j 

deindg,  thereafter. 
dehinc,  henceforth. 

denuo,           anew. 

secundo.t         secondly.) 

denique,        finally. 

&c. 

porrd,    moreover. 

(postr6m6,t  lastly. 

4.   ADVERBS   OF   QUALITY,   MANNER,  &C. 

adeo. 

SO,  and  therefore. 

nempg,      truly. 

adraodum 

very,  greatly. 

nimium,    too  much. 

an. 

whether  7  or  else  7 

non,           not. 

cur. 

why. 

num  ?   .    whether  ? 

demum, 

at  length. 

omnino,    at  all,  in  genei 

al. 

6tiam, 

likewtse,  yes. 

parum,      little. 

fere, 

almost. 

satis,        enough. 
sic,            so,  thus. 

haud. 

not. 

immd, 

yes,  truly. 

scilicet,    namely. 
videlicit,  namely. 

its, 

so,  thus. 

magis. 

more. 

vix,           scarcely. 

ne, 

not. 

,    _ 

*  Primo  =  at  first ;  primum  •=  first,  in  the  first  place. 
t  These  fall  under  (680,  c). 


§  8.  PREPOSITION. 


^682.)  1.  Prepositions  governing  the  occMsojjtJC.' 

Ante,  Spud,  ftd,  adversiis, 
Circtim,  circa,  citra,  cis, 
Erga,  contra,  intfir,  extra, 
Infra,  intra,  juxta,  6b, 
Pgnes,  pone,  post,  and  prsetgr, 
Propg,  propter,  p6r,  secundum, 
Sfipra,  versus,  ultra,  trans. 

[Versus  is  placed  after  the  noun  which  it  governa.J 

2.  Gk)veming  the  ablative : 

Absque,  a,  ab,  abs,  and  dS. 
Coram,  clam,  cum,  ex,  and  6. 
Tenus.  Bine,  pro,  and  prae. 

3.  Governing  both  accusative  and  ablative: 

in,  sub,  sup6r,  cvbtwr 


§  9.  CONJUNCTION. 


(683.)  Conjunctions  connect  words  and  sentences.    They  may  be  di. 
vided  into  the  following  classes  : 

I.  Copulative,  which  simply  unite  sentences  together  {and):  they  are 
6t,  atqu6  or  ac,  que,  neqa6  or  nee,  necnon,  Stiftm,  quo- 
que,  with  the  adverbials  item  and  ItidSm. 

II.  Disjunctive,  which  connect  unlike  prepositions  [or) :  they  are  aut, 
v6l,  the  suffix  v6,  and  sivg  or  seu;  [either — or):  aut — aut,  vel— 
V  e  1 ;  [whether — or) :  s  i  v  6 — s  i  v  6. 

III.  Comparative  [as,  like,  its  if,  &c.) :  they  are  u  t,  s  i  c  u  t,  v  6 1  u  t, 
prout,  ceu,  quftm,  tamquim,  quisl,  utsT,  acsi,  together 
with  ac  and  at  que,  when  they  mean  as. 

IV.  Adversative,  expressing  opposition  of  thought  [but) :  they  are  s  6  d, 
autem,  verd,  &t  and  its  compounds,  t a m S n  (and  its  compoimds 
with  a  t  s  e  d  and  v  e  r  u  m),  and  c  e  t  e  r  u  m. 

V.  Concessive,  expressing  something  granted  [although,  even  if) :  they 
are  etsi,  etiamsi,  tSmetsi,  quamquSm,  quamvis,  quan- 
tumvis,  quamlibet,  ItcSt,  with  ut  and  quum,  when  they 
mean  although. 

VI.  Conditional,  expressing  a  condition  [if,  if  only,  if  but) :  they  are 
si,  sin,  ni  or  nisi,  sim6d6,  dummodo,  m6done,  and  some 
times  d  u  m  and  m  6  d  6  used  alone. 

VII.  Conclusive,  expressing  a  conclusion  or  inference  [therefore) :  they 
are  ergo,  igitur,  TtaquS,  eo,  ide6,  idcirco,  proindS,  prop- 
tSrea,  and  the  relatives  [wherefore)  quapropter,  quare,  qua- 
mobrem,  quocirca,  unde. 

Vin.  Causal,  expressing  a  cause  or  reason  [for,  because) :  n  &  m, 
namqug,  6nim,  6tenim,  quia,  qu6d,  quoniam,  quippS, 
quum,   quando,  quandO  quidem,  siquid6m. 

IX.  Final,  expressing  a  purpose  or  aim  [in  order  that,  in  order  that 
not):  ut  or  uti,  quo,  ne,  utne,  nevS,  neu,  quin,  qudmT- 
nus. 

X.  Temporal,  expressing  a  relation  of  time  [wlien,  as  soon  as,  after 
that,  just  as):  quum,  ut,  ubi,  postquam,  antequam,  pri- 
usquam,  quando,  simul,  Simula c,  dum,  usquS  dum,  do* 
n6c,  quoad. 

-  XI.  Interrogative,  used  in  asking  questions:  niim,  utrtlm,  an,  n8 
(guffix) 

B  b' 


§10.  INTERJECTION. 


(684.)  Interjections  are  simply  signs  of  emotion. 

ah,                  ah  ! 
Spage,             away ! 
ecc6,               behold ! 
eccum,            see  him  ! 
eu,                  lo ! 
hei,  hetl,         alas  1    . 

1 

hem,            hem!  how! 

i5,                huzza ! 

oh,               oh  !   alas  ! 

papsB,          O  strange  !  good  ! 

pr5,              alas ! 

voe,             woe ! 

Vfth,             O  rare  1                    j 

I 


PART     IV 


SUMMARY    OF    SYNTAX 


SYNTAX. 


INTRODUCTION. 


(685.)  A  proposition  is  a  thought  expressed  in  words  ;  e.  g.,  the  rose 
blooms ;  the  rose  is  beautiful. 

(686.)  A  simple  sentence  consists  of  a  single  proposition  ;  e.  g.,  the  mes- 
senger was  sent ;  the  swift  messenger  arrived. 

(687.)  A  compound  sentence  is  one  made  up  of  two  or  more  propositions ; 
e.  g;  the  messenger,  who  had  been  sent,  arrived. 

(688.)  Syntax  treats  of  the  use  of  words  in  the  formation  of  sentences, 
and  of  the  relation  of  sentences  to  each  other.    We  speak  first, 

PART   L 

OF  SIMPLE  SENTENCES. 
I.  SUBJECT  AND  PUK  ^ICATK. 

^  1 .  Definition  of  Subject  and  Predicate. 

(689.)  Every  sentence  (e.  g.,  the  eagle  flies)  consists  of  two  parts,  the 
subject  {e.  g.,  eagle)  and  the  predicate  {e.  g.,  flies). 

{a)  The  subject  is  that  of  which  anything  is  declared,  and  is  generally  (1) 
a  noun,  or  (2)  some  word  used  instead  of  a  noun. 

1.  The  eagle  flies.    Here  the  noun  eagle  is  the  subject. 

2.  To  err  is  human.    Here  the  infinitive  to  err  is  used  as  a  noun, 
and  forms  the  subject. 

(b)  The  predicate  is  that  which  is  declared  of  the  subject,  and  is  gener- 
ally either  (1)  a  verb,  (2)  an  adjective  or  participle,  or  (3)  a  noun,  con- 
nected with  the  subject  by  some  form  of  the  verb  to  he. 

1.  The  eagle  ^ie«.    Here  the  verbj^^  is  the  predicate. 

2.  To  err  is  human.    Here  the  adjective  human  is  the  predicate. 

3.  John  is  a  man.    Here  the  noun  m^n  is  the  predicate. 

(j  2.  Agreement. 
(690.)  Rule  I.  The  verb  of  the  predicate  agrees  with  the 
subject  in  number  and  person. 

The  trees  are  green.  |  Arbores  virent. 

Art  thou  happy  7  1  E  s  n  e  tu  beatus  ? 

Rem.  1.  If  the  subj.  consists  of  two  or  more  singular  nouns  denoting 
persons,  the  verb  is  generally  in  the  plural. 

B  B  2 


?n4  SUBJECT  AND  PREDICATE. 

2  A  collective  noun  sometimes  has  a  plural  verb. 

Th^  crowd  rushes.  \  Turba  ruunt. 

[This  construction  is  not  used  by  Cicero,  and  seldom,  if  at  all,  by 
Caesar.] 

3  A  plural  verb  is  sometimes  used  with  uterque  and  qui s que. 
Eoch  of  them  leads  his  army  out  I  Uterque  eorum  ex  castris  exercitum 

of  the  camp.  I      educunt. 

4.  The  verb  agrees  with  the  first  person  rather  than  the  second  ;  the 
second  rather  than  the  third. 
If  yott  and  Tullia  are  well,  Cicero  j  Si  tu  et  Tullia  valetis,  ego  et 

and  I  are  well.  I      Cicero  vale mus. 

(C91.)  An  adjective  may  stand  either 

(1.)  As  predicate  ;  e.  g.,  the  man  is  happy ; 

(2.)  As  modifying  the  subject ;  e.  g.,  the  good  man  is  happy ; 

(3.)  As  modifying  the  predicate  ;  e.  g.,  the  good  man  is  a  happy  man. 
In  either  case  we  have 

Rule  II.  Adjectives  agree  with  the  nouns  to  which  they 
'^/rCer  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

[This  rule  applies  to  all  adjectives,  pronouns,  and  participles.] 

Rem.  If  there  be  two  or  more  nouns  denoting  joersons,  the  most  wor- 
thy* gender  prevails  ;  if  things,  the  neuter  is  used. 

My  f oilier  and  mother  are  dead.      I  Pater  mihi  et  mater  mortui  sunt. 
Labour  and  enjoyment  are  united.  1  Labor  voluptasque  juncta  sunt. 

(692.)  Rule  III.  If  the  predicate  be  a  noun,  it  takes  the 
case  of  the  subject. 
Numa  was  made  king.  \  Numa  rex  creabatur. 

^  3.  Apposition. 
(693.)  A  noun  may  stand 
(o)  In  the  subject,  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing  with  the  sub- 
ject-noun ;  e.  g.,  the  general,  a  brave  man,  led  the  army. 
{b)  In  the  predicate,  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing  with  a  noun 
in  the  predicate  ;  e.  g.,  vre  have  sent  the  consul,  a  brave  man. 
Nouns  thus  expressing  the  same  person  or  thing,  whether  in  the  sub 
ject  or  predicate,  are  said  to  be  in  apposition  with  each  other ;  and  in 
either  case  we  have 

Rule  IV.  Nouns  in  apposition  with  each  other  agi-ee  in 
case. 


*  The  masculine  is  said  to  be  more  worthy  than  the  feminine;  the  fern 
inine  than  the  neuter. 


GENITIVE  CASE.  295 


The  commander,  a  brave  man,  led 

the  army. 
We  sent  the  consul,  a  brave  man. 


Imperator,  vir   fortis,    exerci- 

tum  duxit. 
Consulem,  virum  fortem,  misi- 
mus. 

Rem.  1.  A  noun  in  apposition  with  two  or  more  nouns  is  commonly 
put  in  the  plural. 
M.  Antony  and  C.  Crassus,  trib-  I  M.  Antouius,  C.  Crassus,   tribuni 
unes  of  the  people.  |      plebis. 

2.  A  noun  in  apposition  with  the  name  of  a  town  may  be  put  in  the 
ablative,  with  or  without  the  preposition  in. 
At  RoTne,  the  chief  aV^r  of  Italy.     |  Romaa,  (in)  prima  urbe  Italiae. 

II.   USE   OF   CASES. 

i)  4.  Nominative. 
(694.)  Subject-nominative. — The  subject  of  a  proposition  takes  the  nom- 
^inative  case,  and  is  called  the  subject-nominative. 

(2.)  Predicate-nominative. — The  predicate-nominative  (692)  is  always 
connected  with  the  subject  by  esse,  to  be,  or  some  verb  expressing  an 
incompleve  idea.  ^ 

Rem.  Of  tliis  class  of  verbs  are  to  appear,  apparere,  videri;  to 
become,  fieri,  evader e,  existere;  to  be  named,  dici,  ap- 
pellari,  nominari ;  to  be  esteemed,  existimari,  haberi,  &c. 


Ariovistus  was  called  king  by  the 
senate. 


Ariovistus  a  senatu  rex  appel« 
latus  est. 


(j  5.  Genitive. 
(695.)  Rule  V.  The  genitive  answers  the  questions  whose  1 
of  whom  1  of  what  1   e.g.,  the  love  of  glory,  amor  gloriae; 
Cicero's  orations,  C  i  c  e  r o  n  i  s  orationes. 

Rem.  The  genitive  is  subjective  when  it  denotes  that  which  does 
something,  or  to  which  a  thing  belongs ;  e.  g.,  Ciceronis  oratio- 
nes. It  is  objective  when  it  denotes  that  which  is  affected  by  the 
action  or  feeling  spoken  of ;  e.  g.,  amor  gloriee  :  the  taking  of  the 
iown,  expugnatio  urbis. 

(696.)  Rule  VI.  Genitive  of  Quality. — The  genitive  (with 
an  adjective,  or  pronoun  of  quality,  number,  &c.)  is  used  to  ex- 
press the  quality  of  a  thing. 

A  man  of  great  bravery.  I  Vir  magnae  virtutis. 

A  ditch  of ff teen  feet.  1  Fossa  quindecim  pedum. 

Rem.  1.  The  ablative  is  also  used  in  the  same  way  (724). 
2.  If  the  two  nouns  are  connected,  not  immediately,  but  by  another 
part  of  speech,  the   accusative  must  be  used :   fossa  quindecim 
pedes  lata. 


296  GENITIVE  CASE. 

(697.)  Rule  Vir.  Partitive-genitive. — The  genitive  is  used 
to  express  the  whole  of  which  anything  is  a  part.     Hence, 

(a)  With  comparatives  and  supei-latives  : 


Doctior  fratrum  duorum. 


Doctissimtis  Romanorum. 


The  more  leariied  of  the  two  broth- 
ers. 
The  most  learned  of  the  Romans. 

[b]  "With  aD  words  expressing  number  or  quantity,  yvhether  adjectives, 
pronouns,  numerals,  or  adverbs  ;  e.  g.,  many  of  the  soldiers,  m  u  1 1  i 
militum;  which  of  you?  quia  vestrum?  the  last  of  tJie  Romans, 
ultimus  Romanorum;  enough  eloquence,  satis  eloquentiae; 
iohere  (in  what  part)  of  the  world?  ubinam  gentium? 

Rem.   This   rule   includes   the   neuters    tantum,   quantum,    ali- 
Quantum,  quid,   aliquid,  &c. 

(698.)  Rule  VIII.  Genitive  of  Mental  Affections,— The 
genitive  is  used  with  verbs  and  adjectives  expressing  certain 
operations  of  the  mind  or  feelings,  to  denote  the  ohject  thereof. 

(a)  Operations  of  the  mhid, 

1.  Adjectives  oi  knowledge  and  igTwrance,  rem,embering  and /or- 
getting,  certainty  and  doubt. 

Mindful  of  a  kindness. 
He  was  not  ignorant  of  the  re- 
sult of  the  v)ar. 

2.  Verbs  of  remembering  kdA  forgetting  (recordor,  memini,  reminis- 
cor,  obHviscor). 


Beneficii  memor. 

E  ventus  belli  non  erat  ignarus. 


To  remember  past  events. 
He  exhorts  the  u^duans  to  for- 
get their  disputes. 


Meminisse  prseteritorum. 
Cohortatur  ^duos  ut  controver- 
si  arum  obliviscantur. 


[The  thing  remembered  is  often  put  in  the  accusative.] 
(b)  Operations  of  the  feelings. 

1.  Adjectives  expressing  desire  or  aversion,  patience  or  impatiende, 
appetite  or  passion.  Participles  used  as  adjectives  fall  under  thig 
rule. 

Desirous  of  praise.  I  Avidus  1  a  u  d  i  s. 

A  lover  of  (=  one  loving)  virtue.  1  Amans  V  i  r  t  u  t  i  s. 

2.  Verbs. 

(a)  Those  expressing  pity,  viz.,  miseresco,  misereor. 

I  pity  the  unfortunate.  \  Miseresco  infelicium. 

(b)  The  impersonals  pudet,  piget,  pcenitet,  taedet,  miseret  {shame, 
disgust,  repentance,  loathing,  pity). 


GENITIVE  CA&E.  297 


/  am  not  only  sorry  for  my  fol- 
ly, but  ashamed  of  it. 
I  am  weary  of  my  life. 


Me  non  solum  pcenitet  stulti 

t  i  OB  meae,  sed  etiam  p  u  d  e  t. 
Me  taedet  vit39. 
Rem.  1.  Observe  that  the  person  feeUng  is  expressed  by  the  accusa 

tive. 
2.  The  cause  of  feeling  may  be  a  verb,  or  part  of  a  sentence,  instead 
of  a  noun  in  the  genitive. 
/  am  not  sorry  (=  it  does  not  re- 1  Non  pojnitet  me  v  i  x  i  s  s  e 
pent  me)  that  I  have  lived.  |  ^ 

(699.)  Rule  IX.  Genitive  of  Participation. — The  genitive 
is  used  with  adjectives  and  participles  expressing  {!)  plenty  or 
want,  {2)  power  or  weakness,  (3)  sharing  or  its  opposite,  (4) 
likeness  or  unlikeness. 

(1.)  Full  of  wrath.  '         Plenus  irae. 

(2.)  Master  of  one's  faculties.  Compos  mentis. 

(3)  He  is  like  his  brother.  Simihs  estfratris. 

(4.)  Man  is  a  sharer  of  reason.  Homo  particeps  est  rationis. 

Rem.  1.  Those  oi plenty  dcoAwant  take  also  ablative  (716,  R.  4). 

2.  Those  of  likeness  and  unlikeness  take  also  the  dative  (704,  4). 

(700.)  Rule  X.  Genitive  of  Value.— The  genitive  of  cer- 
tain adjectives  is  used  Avith  verbs  of  valuing,  esteeming,  buying, 
selling,  &c.,  to  denote  the  price  or  value. 

The  poor  man  estimates  riches  at\  Pauper  divitias  magni  sestimat. 
a  great  valn£.  I 

Rem.  1.  Such  genitives  are  magni,  permagni,  pluris,  maximi, 

minor  is,  and  others. 
2.  If  the   price  be  a  noun,  the  ablative  is  used   (719).    Also,   the 
ablatives  magno,  permagno,  plurimo,  parvo,  minimo,  nihi- 
lo,  are  often  used. 
(701.)  Rule  XI.  Genitive  of  Crime. — The  genitive  is  used 
with  verbs  of  accusing,  condemning,  acquitting,  &c.,  to  denote 
the  crime  or  offence  charged. 


Proditionis  accusare. 
Praetor  reum  cri minis  absolvit. 


To  accuse  of  treachery. 
The  judge  acquitted  the  prisoner 
of  the  crime. 

(702.)  Rule  XII.  Genitive  of  Property. — The  genitive  is 
used  with  esse  to  denote  (1)  that  to  which  something  belongs  ; 
(2)  that  to  which  something  is  peculiar. 


(1.)  This  book  belongs  to  my  father. 
(2.)  It  is  peculiar  to  the  brave  to 
endure  pain  with  fortitude. 


Hie  liber  est  mei  patris. 
Fortium  est  dolorem  fortiter  pati 


208 


DATIVB  CA»B. 


It  is  - 


•  of  a  wise  man  =  est  sapientis. 


Rem.  1.  Under  this  last  head  come  the  following  constructicmi 

the  property 
peculiarity 
duty 
mark 

characteristic 
&c. 

8.  Observe  carefully,  that  instead  of  the  genitive  of  the  personal  pro- 
nouns   (mei,   tui,  &c.),  the   neuter  possessives    (meum,   tuum, 
suum,  nostrum,  vestram)  are  used;  e. g:,  it  is  my  duty,  &c.; 
est  meum,  &c. 
(703.)  Rule  XIII.  The  genitive  is  used  with  the  impersonal 
interest  {it  concerns)^  to  express  the  person  concerned. 
Jt  concerns  my  brother.  [Mei  fratris  interest. 

It  coTicerns  the  state.  \  Reipublicae  interest. 

Rem.  But  instead  of  the  genitives  of  the  personal  pronouns  (mei, 
tui,  &c.),  the  possessive  forms  me  a,  tua,  &c.,  are  always  used; 
and  with  them  the  impersonal  r  e  f  e  r  t  has  the  same  force  as  i  n 
teresL 


It  concerns  you. 

It  is  of  great  importance  to  me  to 
see  you. 


Tua  interest  (not  tui  interest) 
Magni  m  e  a  refert  ut  te  videam 


§  6.  Dative. 

(704.)  Rule  XIV.  The  dative  case  is  used  to  express  the 
person  or  thing  to  or  for  whom  (or  which),  to  or  for  whose  advan- 
tage  or  disadvantage  anything  is  done  or  tends. 

Ep*  Almost  every  instance  in  which  the  dative  occurs  may  be  ex- 
plained  by  a  proper  application  of  this  rule.     For  the  sake  of  fuller 
illustration,  however,  we  add  the  following  heads  : 
(1.)  Dative  of  Remote  Object. — The  dative  is  used  to  express  the  remote 
object, 

[a)  With  transitive  verbs  governing  also  a  direct  object. 


Mitto  tibi  librum. 

Pisistratus  sibi  Megarenses  vicit. 


/  send  you  a  book. 
Pisistratus  conquered  the  Mega- 
renses for  himself. 
Rem.  The  accusative  is  often  omitted,  and  the  dative  alone  appears 
with  the  verb  ;  e.  g.,  I  persuade  you,  tibi  suadeo  ;  he  told  tJie  gen- 
eral, nuntiavit  imperatori. 
[b)  With  int?-ansitive  verbs  expressing  an  action  done  to  or  for  some 
person  or  thing. 
I  have  leisure  for  nhilofophy.  |  Vico  philosophiw. 


DATIVE   CASE,  ,      SOU 

(2.)  On  the  same  principle  [advantage  or  disadvantage),  the  dative  ii 
ased  with  verbs  of  the  following  meanings,  viz. : 
Envy,  'profit,  please,  displease,  obey, 
Help,  hurt,  resist,  excel,  or  disobey, 
Command,  indulge,  be  angry,  Spare,  upbraid, 
Marry,  heal,  favour,  meet,  trust,  and  persuade. 
Rem.  1.  Javo,  laedo,  delecto,  offendo,  rego,  gubemo,  govern  the  accu- 
sative. 
2.  Impero,  credo,  minor,  comminor,  are  also  used  transitively,  with 
accusative  and  dative. 
(3.)  Dative  with  Compound  Verbs. — The  dative  is  used  with  m^st  verbs 
compounded  with  ad,  con,  in,  inter,  ob,  pros,  sub  ;  and  with  many  of 
those  compounded  with  ab,  ante,  de,  e,  post,  prae,  re,  super. 

Rem.  These  verbs  govern  the  dative  when  they  acquire  a  meaning 
from  the  preposition  which  calls  for  the  dative ;  e.  g.,  to  join,  j  u  n  g  e  r  e, 
takes  accusative;  but  to  join  to,  adjungere,  takes  dative  also. 
When  they  are  transitive,  they  take  both  accusative  and  dative  ; 
but  when  intransitive,  the  dative  only. 
To  prefer  unknown  men  to  known,  llgnotos  notis  anteferre. 
Vices  creep  upon  us.  \  Vitia  nobis  obrepunt. 

(4.)  So,  also,  the  dative  is  used  with  adjectives  expressing  advantage, 
likeness,  usefulness,  fitness,  facility,  nearness  to,  and  their  opposites. 


Be  kind  to  all. 
Hurtful  to  the  body. 
A  place  fit  for  ambush. 
They  are  neighbours  to  the  Ger- 
mans. 


Cunctis  esto  benignus. 
Corpori  pemiciosum. 
Locus  inaidiis  aptus. 
Proximi  sunt  Germanis. 


Rem.  1.  Adjectives  of  likeness  or  unlikeness  may  take  the  genitive 

(699,  3). 
2.  Those  of  fitness  and  unfitness  often  take  the  accusative  with  ad ; 

e.  g.,  locus  ad  insidias  aptus. 

(705.)  Rule  XV.  Dative  of  Possession. — The  dative  is  used 
with  esse  to  express  the  person  who  has  or  possesses  some- 
thing. 

/  have  a  book.  \  Est  mihi  liber  (=  habeo  librum). 

Rem.  1.  I  have  a  name  z=z  est  mihi  noraen ;  but  if  the  name  be  ex- 
pressed, it  may  be  put  either  in  nominative  or  dative  ;  e.  g.,  my 
name  is  Lcelius  =  mihi  est  nomen  L  os  1  i  u  s  (or  L  se  1  i  o). 

2.  The  possessor  is  expressed  by  the  dative  when  the  mind  refers 
chiefly  to  the  possession  [e.  g.,  I  have  a  book  =  est  mihi  liber) ; 
but  by  the  genitive  when  the  mind  refers  chiefly  to  the  possessor 
(e.  g.,  this  honk  is  my  father's  =  Iiio  lihor  est  moi  patris). 


Pausanias  venit  Atheniensibus 
auxilio. 


300  ACCUSATIVE    CASK.      ' 

(706.)  Rule  XVI.  Dativeof  the  End  {Double  Dative).— Two 
dative9  are  used  with  esse,  and  With  verbs  of  giving,  comings 
sending,  imputing  ;  one  to  express  the  person,  the  other  the 
object  or  end. 

The  Boians  were  (for)  a  protection,   Boiinovissimis  prossidio  eranfc 

to  the  rear. 
Pausanias  came  to  aid  (for  an  aid 
to)  the  Athenians. 
Rem.  The  verbs  used  with  double  dative  are  esse,  dare,  due  ere, 
tribuere,  vertere,  accipere,  relinquere,  delig'ere,  mit- 
tercj  venire,  habere. 

[The  dative  is  used  with  ge^raidives,  for  which  see  737,  b.] 
^  7.  Accusative. 
^707.)  The  accusative  is  the  case- of  the  direct  object,  and 
answers  the  questions  whom  ?  what?  to  what  place? 

^^  Under  this  general  statement  we  make  three  heads  :  (1)  the  ac- 
cusative with  verbs ;  (2)  the  accusative  with  prepositions  ;  (3)  the 
accusative  according  to  the  usage  of  the  language. 

I.  Accusative  with  Verbs. 
(708.)  Rule  XVII.  Accusative  of  the  Direct  Object. — The 
accusative  is  used  with  transitive  verbs,  to  express  the  direct 
object. 

CcBsar  recalls  the  lieutenant.  |  Caesar  legatum  revocat. 

Item.  1.  Some  verbs  are  used  both  transitively  and  intransitively; 
the  use  of  these  must  be  learned  by  practice. 

2.  Some  intransitives  (especially  those  of  motion),  compounded  with 
prepositions,  acquire  a  transitive  force  easily  recognised  from  their 
meaning;  thus  :  to  go,  ire  ;  to  go  across,  trans  ire,  which  takes 
the  accusative. 

3.  Some  intransitives  take  an  accusative  of  a  noun  from  the  same 
root  with  themselves  ;  e.  g.,  to  live  a  life,  vivere  vitam. 

(709.)  Rule  XVIII.  Accusative  with  Impersonals.  —  The 
accusative  of  the  person  affected  is  used  with  the  impersonals 
pudet,  pigot,  taedot,  miseret,  poenitet. 
J  am  tired  of  life.  \  Tsedet  me  vitaa. 

Rem.  Decet  and  its  compounds  (which  admit  a  personal  subject),  also 
juvat  and  delectat,  take  the  accusative. 
Anger  becomes  wild  beasts.  \  Decet  ira  f  e  r  a  s. 

(710.)  Rule  XIX.  Double  Accusative. 
{a)  Two  accusatives,  one  of  the  person,  the  other  of  the 


*    ACCUSATIVE   CASE.  301 

thing,  are  used  with  verbs  of  teachings  concealing,  askings  or 
entreating,  and  also  with  those  verbs  Whose  passives  have  a 
double  nominative  (694^  2,  Jl.). 


(1.)  Who    taught    Epaminondas 

music  1 
(2.)  /  conceal  nothing  from  you. 
(3.)  /  aslc  this  of  you  earnestly. 
(4.)  Avarice  renders  men  blind. 


Ciuis    musicam    docuit   Epami- 

nondam. 
Nihil  tjj  celo. 

Hoc  te  vehemeater  roga,     .  .      ' 
Avaritia  hominescseco  s  reddit. 
Rem.  1.  "With  verbs  oi  asking,  demanding^,  the  ablative  with  a  prep- 
osition is  Tised'instead  of  one  of  the  accusatives. 
The    ambassadors    were    as/cwg- hLegati  pacem  a  Ceesare.posce- 
peace  of  Gcesar.  I      bant. 

2.  Petere  and  postulare  always  take  the  ablative  with  ab ;  and 
qaseterp,  the  ablative  with  ab,  de,  or  ex. 

(6)  Two  accusatives  are  used  also  with  verbs  compounded 
with  trans.        '         . 

Caeiar  led  tJte  army  across  ^AelCaesar      e:^ercitum      Rhemim 

Rhine.  \      transduxit. 

The  tran's  is  often  repeated;  e.  g.^  Caesar  exercitum  trans  Rhenum 
transduxit.. 

Rem.  1.  In  the  passive  construction  of  verbs  which  take  a  double  ac- 
cusative, the  person  takes  the  nominative,  but  the  thing  generally 
remains  in  the  accusative. 
1  was  ashed  my  opinion.  Ego  rogatus  sum  sententiam. 

The  multitude  is  led  across  the   Multitudo  Rhenum  transducitur. 
Rhine, 

2.  But  with  verbs  of  demanding  the  ablative  with  a  preposition  is 
generally  used. 
Money  is  demanded  of  me.  \  Pecimia  a  m  e  poscitur. 

II.  Accusative  with  Prepositions. 
(711.)  Rule  XX.  The  accusative  is  used  with  the  preposi- 
tions ad,  apud,  ante,  adversus,  cig,  citra,  circa,  circum, 
circiter,  contra,  erga,  extra,  infra,  inter,  intra,  juxta, 
ob,  penes,  per,  pone,  post,  praeter,  prope,  propter,  se- 
cundum, supra,  trans,  versus,  ultra.  Also,  with  in  and 
sub,  when  motion  is  expressed  ;  with  super,  when  it  means 
(wer,  and  with  subter  nearly  always.  .,. 

111.  Accusative  according  to  the  Usage jjf  the  Language. 
(712.)  Rule  XXI.  Accusative  of  Measure. — The  accusative 
is  used  in  answer  to  the  questions  hoxofarl  hoio  deep?  how 

Cc 


302  .  ABLATIVE  CASE. 

thick  ?  how  broad  7  how  old  1  how  long  1  (whether  of  iimt  or 
distance). 


The  city  is  two  miles  off. 

The  ditch,  is  ten  feet  vjide  [deep,  or 

long). 
Only  one  hour. 
Twenty  years  old. 


Urbs  duo  mi  Hi  a  abest. 

Fossa    decern    pedes    lata    (alta, 

long-a). 
Unam  modo  horam. 
Viginti  annos  natus. 


Rem.  1.  Hotofar?  is  sometimes  answered  by  the  ablative. 

Six  miles  from  Ccesar's  Camp.      I  Millibus  passuum  sex  a  Caesaris 
I      castris. 
2.  For  time  liow  long,  the  accusative  with  per  is  sometimes  used,  and 
sometimes  the  ablative  along. 
Through  tJie  whole  night.  I  P  er  totam  noctem. 

He  was  absent  six  months.  \  Sex  mensibus  abfuit. 

(713.)  Rule  XXII.  Accusative  of  Direction^  Whither? — 
The  accusative  is  used  with  names  of  towns  and  small  islands^ 
in  answer  to  the  question,  whither  1 

To  %et  out  for  Athens.  \  A  t  h  e  n  a  s  proficisci. 

Rem.  1.  "With  names  of  countries  or  large  islands  the  prepositions 
in,  ad,  must  be  msed. 
He  'crossed  into  Europe.  \  In  Europam  trajecit. 

2.  Domus  and  rus  follow  this  rule. 
To  go  home.  I  Ire  domum. 

I  will  go  into  the  country.  I  Rus  ibo. 

(714.)  Greek  Accusative. — The  accusative  is  used  to  express  a  special 
limitation. 
Naked  as  to  his  limbs.  I  Nudus  membra. 

For  the  most  part  [men)  say  so.      )  Max  imam  partem  ita  dicunt. 

Rem.  This  is  a  Greek  usage,  common  in  Latin  poetry,  but  not  in 
prose. 
(715.)  Exclamations. — The  accusative  is  used  in  exclamations,  either 
with  or  without  an  interjection. 
Miserable  me!  I  Me  miserum. 

Behold,  four  altars  !  \  En  quattuor  aras. 

[For  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  see  751.] 

^  8,  Ablative. 
(716.)  Rule  XXIII.   General  Rule. — The  ablative  is  used 
to  express  the  (1)  cause;  (2)  manner;  (3)  means,  material,  or 
instrument ;  (4)  supjthj. 


ABLATIVE    CASE.  3(^ 

1.  Cause. — The  ablative  of  cause  is  used  with  passive  verbs,  and  with 
the  participles  natus,  genitus,  ortus,  contentus. 


The  world  is  illuminated  by  the 

sun. 
I  am  content  loith  my  lot. 
O  thou,  bom  of  a  goddess  ! 


Sole  mundus  iUustratur. 


Sorte  mea  contentus  sum. 
Nate  Deal 

1^^  If  the  cause  be  a  person  (or  a  thing  personified),  a  or  ab  must  be 
used  with  passive  verbs. 
The  world  was  built  by  God.  |  A  D  e  o  mundus  cedificatus  est. 

2.  Manner. — {a)  This  ablative  generally  occurs  in  nouns  denoting  man- 
ner ;  e.g.,raos,  modus,  ratio,  &c. 

In  this  way  I  wrote.  \  Hoc  modo  scripsi. 

(Z»)  With  other  nouns,  cum  is  generally  used,  unless  an  adjective  is 

joined  with  the  noun. 
He  hears  with  pleasure.  I  Cum  voluptate  audit. 

He  bears  the  injury  with  firmness.  |iEquo  animo  fert  injuriam. 

3.  Means,  Material,  Instrument. — Ablative  without  a  preposition. 
To  travel  by  horse,  carriage,  ships .    Bquo,  curru,  navibus,  vehi. 
Bulls  defend  themselves  with  their    Cor  nib  us  tauri  se  tutantur. 

horns. 

^^  If  the  instrument  or  means  be  a  person,  per  or  propter  is 
used,  with  the  accusative. 
I  was  freed  by  you.  |  Per  te  liberatus  sum. 

4.  Supply. — As  supply  may  be  either  abundant  or  defective,  the  abla- 
tive is  used  with  verbs  and  adjectives  of  abounding,  wanting,  filling, 
emptying,  &c. ;  e.g.,  abundare,  egere,  carere,  inops,  refertus, 
praeditus,  &c. 


Germany  abounds  in  rivers. 
The  mind  is  endowed  ivith  per- 
petual activity. 


Germania  fluminibus  abundat. 
Mens   est  prsedita    motu    sempi- 
temo. 


(717.)  Rule  XXIV.  The  ablative  of  the  thing  needed,  and 
the  dative  of  the  person,  are  used  with  opus  est  {there  is 
need). 

We  have  need  of  a  leader.  j  D  u  c  e  nobis  opus  est. 

Rem.  If  opus  est  be  used  personally,  the  thing  needed  is  put  in  the 
nominative  as  subject. 
Leaders  are  necessary  for  us.  \  Duces  nobis  opus  sunt. 

(718.)  Rule  XXV.  The  ablative  is  used  with  the  depo- 
nents utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  vescor. 

To  make  use  of  advice.  I  Consilio  uti. 

They  were  enjoying  pe^ace.  [Pace  fniebantur. 


304  ABLATIVE   CASE. 

Eem.  Potior  is  used  also  with  the  genitive.  ..  <   .      ■. . 

To  obtain  possession  of  all  Gaul.  |  Totius  G-allise  potiri, 

(719.)  Rule  XXVI.  Ablative  of  Price.  — The  ablative  is 
used  with  verbs  of  buying,  selling,  valuing,  &c. ;  also  with 
the  adjectives  dignus  and  in di gnus,  to  express  the  jprice  or 
value. 

He  sold  Ms  country/ for  gold. 
Worthy  of  hatred. 
That    battle    east   the   blood   of 
many. 

^^  If  the  price  or  value  be  an  adjective,  it  is  generally  put  lo  the 
genitive  (7G0).  - 

(720.)  Rule  XXVII.  Ablative  of  Limitation. — The  abla- 
tive is  used  to  denote  the  limitation  generally  express^sd  in 
English  by  as  to,  in  respect  of,  in  regard  to. 


Patriam  auro  vendidit. 

Odio  dignus. 

Multorum.  sanguine    ea  victoria 

stetit. 


Older  (i.  e.,  greater  in  age). 
Skilled  in  the  law. 
In  affection  a  son. 


Major  natu. 
Jure  peritus. 
P  i  e  t  a  t  e  filius. 


(721.)  Rule  XXVIII.  Ablative  of  Separation.— The  abla- 
tive is  used  with  verbs  of  removing,  freeing,  depriving,  and  the 
like. 

CtBsar  removed  his  camp  from  tlie    Csesar  castra  loco  movit. 

spot. 
The  trees  are  stripped  of  leaves. 


Arbores  f  o  1  i  i  s  nudantur. 


Rem.  Many  of  these  verbs  also  take  the  prepositions  a,  a  b,  d  e,  e  x. 

(722.)  Rule  XXIX.  Ablative  of  Quality.— The  ablative  is 
used  (with  an  adjective  of  quality)  to  express  that  one  thing  is 
a  quality  or  property  of  another. 

C(zsar  was  a  man  of  consummate  \  Caesar  sum  mo  fuit  ingenio. 

talent.  \ 

Agesilaus  was  a  man  of  low  stat-  i  Agesilaus  statura  fuit  humili. 

ure.  1 

Rem.  The  genitive  is  also  thus  used  (696). 

(723.)  Rule  XXX.  Ablative  of  Comparison. — The  ablative 
is  used  with  the  comparative  degree  (quam  beuig  omitted)  to 
express  the  object  with  which  another  is  compared. 

Cicero  was   more  eloquent  Man.  I  Cicero  fuit  eloquentior   Horten- 
Hortensins.  |      s  i  o. 


ABLATIVE.  3<^ 

(724.)  Rule  XXXI.  Ablative  of  Measvf'i.—The  ablative  of 
measure  is  used, 

{a)  With  comparatives  and  superlatives,  to  express  the  meas- 
ure of  excess  or  defect. 

(6)  To  express  the  measure  of  time  before  or  after  any 
event. 


Much  greater. 

Themistocles  lived  many  years  he- 
fore  Demosthenes. 


Multo  major. 

Themistocles  permultis  annis 
ante  fuit  quam  Demosthenes. 


(725.)  Rule  XXXII.  Ablative  of  Time  When.— The  abla- 
tive is  used  to  express  the  point  of  time  at  which  anything 
occm-s. 

On  the  sixth  day.  |  Sexto  die. 

Rem.  The  time  within  which  anj-thing  occurs  is  expressed  by  the  ab- 
lative with  or  v?-ithout  i  n  or  d  e.  1 


Within  ten  years. 
Within  those  days. 


Decern  annis. 
In  his  diebiis/ 


(726.)  Rule  XXXIII.  Ablative  of  Place, 
{a)  The  place  ti^^ence  is  expressed  by  the  ablative. 
He  departed  from  Corinth.  \  Corintho  profectus  est. 

(6)  The  place  where  is  expressed  by  the  ablative,  if  the  noun 
be  of  the  third  declension  ov  plural  number. 

Alexander  died  at  Babylon.  I  Alexander  B  abylone  mortuus  est. 

At  Athens.  1  A  t  h  e  n  i  s. 

Rem.  If  the  noun  be  of  the  1st  or  2d  declension  sin^lar,  the  genitive 
is  used. 
At  Rome.    At  Corinth.  jIlomaB.    Corinth  i. 

(Domi  follows  this  rule.) 

(727.)  The  ablative  is  used  with  the  following  prepositions. 
viz.: 

Absque,  a,  ab,  abs,  and  de. 
Coram,  clam,  cum,  ex,  and  e, 
Tenus,  sine,  pro,  and  prse. 
Also  with  i n  and  sub  (implying  rest,  not  motion),  and  super,  when  it 
means  upon.    S  u  b  t  e  r  is  sometimes,  also,  used  with  ablative, 

(728.)  Rule  XXXIV.  Ablative  with  Compound  Verbs.— 
The  ablative  is  used  with  some  verljs  compounded  with  a  (ab, 
a  b  s),  d  e,  e  (e  x),  and  s  u  p  e  r. 

Cc2 


306 


infj;nitive. 


To  he  absent  from  the  city.  Urbe  abesse. 

Ccesar  resolved  to  desist  from  hat-    Caesar    praelip    supersedere   sta- 
tle.  tuit. 

Rem.  The  preposition  is  sometimes  repeated. 
To  depart  from  life  (=  to  die).      \  Exire  de  vita. 

[For  the  Ablative  Absolute,  see  750.] 
(729.)  Verbs  followed  by  genitive,  dative,  or  ablative,  where  we  use  no 
preposition,  and  should  therefore  be  likely  to  put  the  accusative.     (Those 
with  asterisks  take  also  an  accusative  of  the  thing,  though  some  of  them 
only  when  the  accusative  is  a  neuter  pronoun.)* 


obtain, 

pity, 

forget, 

remember, 
recollect, 

require. 


potior  [abl.). 
misereor. 
miseresco. 
obliviscor  [ace). 
'memini  {ace). 
recordor  {ace). 
reminiscor  {ace). 

SfdTgeo^-^^-)- 


abuse, 
revile. 


ayiswer, 

believe, 

command, 

commission, 

charge, 

congratulate, 

displease, 

direct, 

envy. 

favour, 

flatter, 

give, 

help, 

did, 

assist, 

succour, 

heal, 
cure. 


maledico. 

*suadeo. 

*respondeo. 

credo.- 


>  *mando. 

*gratulor. 

displiceo. 

*praecipio. 

*invideo. 

faveo. 

adulor  (ace). 

*do. 

f  auxilior. 
C  opitulor. 

5  subvenio. 
"l  succurro. 

>  medeor. 


hurt, 

indulge, 

marry, 

obey, 

pardon, 

permit, 

persuade, 

please, 

resist, 

oppose, 

rival, 

satisfy, 

spare, 

suit, 

threaten, 
trust, 


*indulgeo. 

nubo. 
Tpareo. 
<  obedio. 
Cobtempero. 

*ignosco. 

^permitto. 

*persuadeo. 

placeo. 
?  resisto, 
>  repugno. 

aemulor  (ace). 

satisfacio. 

parco. 

convenio. 
5  *minor. 
/  *minitor. 

lc"nfid„^"«■) 


ABLATIVE. 


abuse, 

discharge, 

perforrn, 

enjoy, 

obtain, 

require, 

need, 

want, 

iise, 

want, 

am  witftout. 


abutor. 

fungor. 

fruor. 
potior  {geiu). 

{gen.). 


Cine 


indigeo 
utor. 


III.  USE   OF   THE   INDEFINITE  VERB. 

<5  9.-  Infinitive. 
(730.)  Rule  XXXV.  Infinitive  as  Subject.— The  infinitive 
is  used  as  the  subject  of  a  verb,  and  is  then  regarded  as  a  neu- 
ter noun. 

To  love  {—  lowing)  is  pleasant.       \  Jucundum  est  a  m  ar  e. 
*  Arnold. 


PARTICIPLE.  307 

(731.)  Rule  XXXVI.  Infinitive  as  Complementary  Object. 
— The  iiifinitive  is  used  (exactly  as  in  English)  to  complete  the 
-mperfect  idep,s  expressed  by  certain  words. 

/  wish  to  learn.  I  Capio  d  i  s  c  e  r  e. 

Worthy  to  be  loved.  I  Digrnis  a  m  a  r  i. 

Rem.  1.  The  cemplementary  infinitive  occurs  after  verbs  denoting  to 
wish,  to  be  able,  to  be  accustomed,  ought  (debere),  to  hasten,  Sec. ; 
after  the  adjectives  dignus,  indignus,  audax,  &c. 

2.  Observe  that  this  construction,  which  occurs  after  all  verbs  in 
English,  can  only  stand  in  Latin  after  those  expressing  imperfect 
ideas,  as  above  stated.  A  purpose  cannot  be  expressed  in  Latin, 
as  in  English,  by  the  simple  infinitive' ;  e.  g.,  he  conies  to  learn  == 
venit  ut  discat,  ngt  venit  discere. 

(732.)  Historical  Infinitive. — In  animated  nai^ative  the  in- 
finitive is  sometimes  used  for  the  indicative. 

The  Romans  hastened,  made  ready,  I  Romani  festinare»  parare,  &c. 

4-c.  •  1 

(This  construction  is  quite  common  in  SaUust.) 

[For  Accusative  with  Infinitive,  see  751.] 

"^  10.  Participle. 

(733.)  Rule  XXXVII.  The  participle  agrees  with  its  noun 
in  gender,  case,  and  number,  and  the  active  participle  governs 
the  same  case  as  its  verb. 


The  honoured  man. 
The  blooming  rose. 
I  saw  him  readin^r  a  book. 


Vir  laudatus. 
Rosa  f  lor  ens. 
Eum  legentem  librum  vidi. 


(734.)  The  participle  future  active  is  used  to  express  a  pur- 
pose (where  in  English  we  should  use  to,  in  order  to,  with  the 
infinitive). 


Alexander  goes  to  Jupiter  Ammon, 
in  order  to  inquire  concerning 
his  descent. 


Alexander  ad  Jovem  Ammonem 
pergit,  consulturus  de  origine 
sua. 


(735.)  The  passive  participle  is  often  used  to  supply  tho 
place  of  a  noun. 

After    Tarentum  taken   (=  after 

the  taking  of  Tarentum). 
From  the  city  built  {==■  from  the 

building  of  the  city). 


Post  Tarentum  c  a  p  t  u  m. 
Ab  urbe  c  o  n  d  i  t  a. 


[For  Participle  in  Subordinate  Sentences,  see  749.] 


Scribere  est  utile. 

Ars  scribendi  est  utilis. 

Charta  scribendo  est  utilis. 

Scribere  disco. 

Inter  scribendum  disco. 

Scribendo  discimus. 


308  GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE. 

<^  11.  Gerund. 

(736.)  Rule  XXXVIII.  As  the  infinitive  is  used  as  a  noun 
in  the  nominative  or  accusative,  so  the  gerund  is  used  in  the 
remaining  cases,  and  geverns  the  same  case  as  its  verb. 

Nom.    Writing  is  useful. 
Gen.    The  art  of  writing  is  us  eful. 
Dat.     Pap>er  is  nsefnl  far  loriting. 
.       (I  leam  writing. 

'  \  I  leam  during  writing. 
Abl.     We  leam  bi/  writing. 

Rem.  1.  With  a  preposition  the  gerund  in  the  accusative  must  be 
used,  not  the  infinitive:  ad  (inter,  ob)  scribendum,  not  ad 
^        (inter,  ob)  scribere. 

2.'  The  general  rales  for  the  use  of  cases  of  nouns  (695-7JJ8)  apply  to 
the  cases  of  the  infinitive  and  gerund,  as  above  given. 

Special  Remark.  The  gerund  is  not  used  in  the  dative  or  accusative 
with  an  active  government ;  e.  g.,  we  can  say  scribendi  episto- 
las,  ofwritiiig  letters,  or  s  c  rib  e  n  do  epis tolas,  by  writing  letters, 
but  not  charta  utilis  est  scribendo  {dat.)  epistolas,  nor  charta 
utilis  est  ad  scribendum  literas.  In  these  last  cases  the  ge- 
rundive must  be  used  (738). 

^  12.   The  Gerundive,  or  Verbal  in  dus,  da,  dum. 

(737.)  Rule  XXXIX.  {a)  The  gerundive  in  the  nomina' 
live  neuter  (dum)  is  used  with  the  tenses  of  esse,  to  denote 
that  an  action  should  or  must  be  done  ;  and  these  may  govern 
the  case  of  the  verb. 

{One)  must  write.  I  Scribendum  est. 

(&)  The  person  by  whom  the  action  should  or  must  be  done 
is  put  in  the  dative. 

I  must  write.  I  Scribendum  est  m  i  h  L 

Caius  must  write.  Scribendum  est  C  aio. 

One  must  use  reason.  I  Ratione  utendum  est. 

(738.)  Rule  XL.  {a)  The  gerundive  is  used  with  esse,  in 
all  cases  and  genders,  as  a  verbal  adjective,  agreeing  with  the 
noun,  to  express  necessity  or  worthiness. 

I  am  to  be  loved  •  sJie  is  to  ^e'Amandussum;  amandaes'> 

laved,  SfC  1     &c. 

(6)  When  the  person  is  specified,  it  must  be  put  in  the  da 
tive. 


SUFINE.  309 


/  must  love  Tullia. 
All  things  were  to  be  chne  by  Cae- 
sar at  one  time. 


Tallia  mi  hi  amanda  est. 
Caesari       omnia      xvaa     tempore 
erant  agenda. 


Bjem.  a  or  ab  with  ablative  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  dative. 
My  cause  must  be  managed  by  the  \  A  consuli b u s  mea  causa  s u s- 
consuls.  1     cipienda  est. 

(739.)  Rule  XL  I.  The  gerundive  is  used  {to  express  con- 
tinued action)  as  a  verbal  adjective,  in  all  genders  and  cases 
(but  the  nominative)  agreeing  with  the  noun,  instead  of  the 
gerund  governing  the  noun  ;  c.  ^., 
Gen.  Of  writing  a  letter. 

Scribendae  epistolae,  instead  of  scribendi  epistolam. 
Dat.  To  or  for  writing  letters. 

Scribendis  epistolis,  instead  of  scribendb  epistolas. 
Ace.   To  write  a  letter. 
Ad  scribe n dam  epistolam,  instead  of  ad  scribendum  epis» 
tolam.  • 

Abl.  By,  SfC,  writing  a  letter. 
Scribenda  epistola,  instead  of  scribendo  epistolam. 

Rem.  As  observed  in  (736),  the  gerundive  must  be  used  for  the  dative 
or  accusative  of  the  gerund  when  it  has  an  active  government.  It 
may  be  used  for  it  in  any  other  case,  unless  the  object  of  the  ge- 
rund is  a  neuter  adjective  or  pronoun  ;  e.  g.,  of  learning  the  true  = 
vera  discendi,  not  veromm  discendorum ;  of  hearing  this  = 
hoc  audiendi,  not  hujus  audiendi. 

§  13.  Supines. 
(740.)  Rule  XLII.  (1.)  The  supine  in  um  is  used  with 
verbs  of  motion,  to  express  the  design  of  the  motion,  and  gov- 
erns the  same  case  as  its  verb. 
/  come  to  ask  you.  |  Venio  te  rogatum. 

(2.)  The  supine  in  u  is  used, 

(a)  With  adjectives,  to  show  in  what  respect  they  are 
used ;  e.  g., 
Pleasant  as  to  taste.  \  Dulce  gustatu. 

(6)  With  the  nouns  fas,  nefas,  opus,  in  the  same  sense  : 
fas  est  dictu. 


PART  II. 

or    COMPOUND    SENTENCES. 

(741.)  A  compound  sentence  is  one  made  up  of  two  or  more  simple  sen- 
tences.   The  sentences  thus  comUned  are  either  co-ordinate  or  subordinate. 


810  SENTENCES. 

1.   CO-ORDINATE   SENTENCES. 

^  14.   Classes  of  Co-ordinate  Sentences. 

(742.)  Co-ordinate  sentences  are  united  together,  but  yet  independent 
of  each  other  :*  co-ordination  is  either, 

(a)  Copulative ;  e.  g.,  His  father  has  abandoned  him,  and  his  friends 

have  deserted  him,  and  the  son  remains. 
{b)  Disjunctive ;  e.  g.,  Either  his  father  has  abandoned,  or  his  friends 

have  deserted  him. 
(c)  Adversative ;  e.  g.,  His  father  has  abandoned  him,  but  his  friends 

have  not. 
{d)  Causal;  e.g.,  His  friends  will  abandon  him, /or  his  father  has 

done  so. 
(c)  Conclusive ;   e.  g.,   His  father  has   abandoned  him,   therefore  his 

friends  will  desert  him. 

II.    SUBORDINATE   SENTENCES. 

^  15.   Classes  of  Subordinate  Sentences. 

(743.)  Subordinate  sentences  are  so  united  to  others  (called  principal 
sentences)  as  to  be  dependent  upon  them. 

The  rae^sen^QT,  who  was  sent,  an-  I  Nuntius,  qui  missus  est,  nun- 
nounced.  I      tiavit. 

Here  the  messenger  announced  is  the  principal  sentence ;  who  was  sent. 
the  subordinate  sentence.* 

{744.)  Subordinate  sentences  are  of  five  classes  : 

A.  Participial  seiitences. 

B.  Accusative  with  infinitive. 

C.  Conjunctive  sentences,  i.  e.,  such  as  are  introduced  by  a  conjunc- 

tion or  adverb  of  time. 

D.  Relative  sentences,  i.  e.,  such  as  are  introduced  by  a  relative 

word. 

E.  Interxogative  sentences,  i.  e.,  such  as  are  introduced  by  an  inter- 

rogative word. 
We  shall  treat  these  in  order,  premising  a  few  remarks  upon  the  use  of 
tlie  moods  and  tenses,  which  must  be  thoroughly  understood. 

^  16.   The  Moods. 

(745.)  The  verb  expresses  affirmation.  The  moods  of  the  verb  are  used 
to  vary  the  character  of  the  affirmation. 

*  It  must  be  obvious  that  all  co-ordinate  sentences  are,  for  grammatical 
•^MT^oses,  principal  sentences.  Moreover,  the  doctiines  and  rules  applied 
to  simple  sentences  (Part  I.)  are  applicable  to  all  principal  sentences :  it  is 
only  in  subordinate  sentences  that  difficulty  is  likely  to  occur.  The  pupil 
should,  therefore,  obtain  as  accurate  a  knowledge  as  possible  of  the  vari- 
ous kinds  of  subordinate  sentences,  and  the  different  modes  of  affirmatinn 
which  they  express,  as  it  is  upon  these  that  their  sjTitax  depends. 


PARTICIPIAL  SENTENCES. 


311 


1.  By  the  indicative,  affirmation  of  a  fact  is  expressed  ;  e.  g.,  I  write, 
I  did  not  write* 

2.  By  the  subjunctive,  affirmation  is  expressed  doubtfully,  contingently, 
or  indefinitely ;  e.  g.,  I  may  write,  if  /  should  write,  perhaps  some 
(may)  think. 

3.  By  the  imperative,  affinnation  is  expressed  as  an  injunction  or  re- 
quest ;  e.  g.,  write. 

(746.)  It  must  be  obvious  that  in  principal  sentences  the  indicative 
mood  chiefly  occurs,  and  in  subordinate  sentences  the  subjunctive,  as  af- 
firmations of  fact  ai'e  made  more  frequently  in  the  former  than  in  the  lat- 
ter.   But, 

(a)  The  subjunctive  is  used  (of  course),  even  in  principal  sentences, 
when  the  affirmation  is  doubtful,  contingent,  or  indefinite  (745,  2). 

[b)  The  indicative  is  used,  even  in  subordinate  sentences,  when  the  af- 
firmation is  positive. 


True  friendships  are  everlasting, 
because  nature  cannot  be  chang- 
ed. 


Ver89    amicitisB    sempitemsB    sunt, 
quia  natura  mutari  non  potest. 


(j  17.  The  Tenses. 

(a)  DIVISION. 

The  tenses  are  either  primary  or  historical  (647,  B;.  3). 


(747 

(  ai 

(a)  Primary,   2  ^^ 

I 

(b)  Historical,}  , 


Present. 

mat, 
loves. 

Imperfect. 

bat. 


Future. 

a  m  a  b  i  t, 
he  will  love. 

Pluperfect. 

amaverat, 
he  had  loved. 


Pres.  Perf. 

amavit, 
he  has  loved. 

PerC  Aorist. 

amavit, 

he  loved. 


was  loving. 

(6)  SUCCESSION   OP   TENSES. 

(748.)  Rule  XL  III.  If  there  be  a  primary  tense  in  the 
pi-ipcipal  sentence,  there  must  be  a  primary  tense  in  the  sub- 
ordinate ;  if  an  historical  tense  in  the  principal,  an  historical  in 
the  subordinate. 


PrincipaL 

Subordinate. 

Principal. 

Subordinate. 

I  kiuyw 

what  you  are  doiitg. 

Sclo, 

quid  agas. 

I  was  ktwwing 

what  you  were  doing. 

S  c  i  e  b  a  m, 

quid  age  res. 

I  have  learned 

what  you  are  doing. 

Cognovi, 

quid  agas. 

J  learned 

what  you  were  doing. 

C  o  g  n  0  V  i. 

quid  age  res 

(A.)  (j  18.  Participial  Sentences. 
[The  participle  is  used  to  abridge  discourse,  instead  of  a  relative,  ad- 
verb, or  conjunction  with  a  verb.    Thus  (1),  Tarquin,  when  he  was  expelled 

*  Of  course  the  action  may  be  either  positive  or  negative,  without  af- 
fecting  tbo  affi,rmMion. 


312  ACCUSATIVE  WITH  INFINITIVE. 

from,  Rome  =  Tarquin,  expelled  from  Rome.     (2)  Caesar,  when  tlce  work 
teas  finished,  departed  =  Caesar,  the  work  having  been  finished,  departed 
These  are  abridged   subordinate   sentences,  (1)  being  called  the  con- 
junctive participial  construction,  and  (2)  the  ablative  absolute.] 

(749.)  Conjunctive  Participial  Construction. — The  participle 
in  a  subordinate  sentence  which  has  for  its  subject  the  subject  or 
object  of  the  princiiml  sentence^  agrees  with  this  last  in  gender, 
immber,  and  case. 


Aristides,  patria  pulsus,  Lace- 
daemonem  fugit. 


Aristides,  when  he  was  expelUd 
from  his  country,  ^.ed  to  Lace- 
dasmon. 

^^  Observe,  in  this  example,  that  Aristides  is  the  subject  of 
both  thd  principal  and  the  subordinate  seiitence,  and  pulsus 
agrees  with  Aristides  in  gender,  number,  and  case.  In  Eng- 
lish such  sentences  are  generally  expressed  by  an  adverb  or 
conjunction  with  a  verb. 

(750.)  Rule  XLIV.  Ablative  Absolute. — If  the  subordinate 
sentence  contains  a  noun  and  participle  independent  of  the  sub- 
ject of  the  leading  sentence,  both  noun  and  participle  are  placed 
in  the  ablative.  (This  construction  is  called  the  ablative  abso- 
lute.) 


When    Tarquin    was    reigning; 

Pythagoras  came  into  Italy. 
All  things  having  been  provided, 

they  appoint  a  day. 


Pythagoras,  Tarquinio  regnan- 

te,  in  Italiam  venit. 
Omnibus  rebus  comparatis, 

diem  dicunt. 


Eem.  Nouns,  adjectives,  and  pronouns  are  often  used  in  the  ablative 
absolute  without  a  participle. 

Under  the  guidance  of  iVai.Mre  I  Nat ur a  due e. 

(=» Nature  being  guide). 
In  the  consulship  of  Manlius.         J  Manlio  consul e. 

(B.)  <5  19.  Accusative  with  Infinitive. 

(751.)  Rule  XLV.  Many  subordinate  sentences,  which  in 
EngUsh  are  introduced  by  the  conjunction  that  (especially  after 
verbs  of  thinking,  saying,  knowing,  &c.),  are  expressed  in 
Latin  by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive. 

They  said  that  they  did  not  fear    Dicebant  non  se  hostem  vereri. 

the  enemy. 
He  knpws  that  Cicero  is  eloquent.    Scit  Ciceronem  esse  ©loquen- 

tern. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  WITH   UT,  NE,  aUIN,  ClUO,  aUOMlNUS.    313 

Rem.  1.  Observe  that  the  subject  of  the  sentence  thus  subordinated 
is  put  in  the  accusative,  and  the  predicate  in  the  infinitive.  If  the 
predicate  contain  an  adjective,  it  must  agree  with  the  subject. 

J  perceive  that  the  water  is  cold.    |  Sentio  aquam  f  r  i  g  i  d  a  m  esse. 

2.  The  accusative  with  infinitive  occurs  .chiefly, 

(a)  After  verba  sentiendi  et  dicendi  ( thinking,  feeling, 
perceiving,  knowing,  saying,  announcing,  wilhng,  forbidding, 
&c.). 

[b)  After  such  expressions  as  a  p  p  a  r  e  t  (z^  is  evident),  constat 
[it  is  known),  opus  est,  oportet,  necesse  est,  justum 
est  {it  is  necessary,  right,  just,  &c,).  In  this  case  the  accusative 
with  infinitive  becomes  the  subject  of  the  entu-e  sentence. 

It  is  known  to  all  that  the  Romans  [Constat  inter  omnes  II  o  m  a  n  o  s 
were  very  brave.  \     fuisse  fortissimos. 

^^  Oportet  and  necesse  est  may  take  the  subjunctive,  in- 
stead of  the  accusative  with  infinitive. 

We  ought  (  =  it  behooves  us)  ^olOportetnos  virtuti  studere  ;  or 
practice  virtue.  \  Virtuti  stude-amus  oportet. 

(C.)  (^  20.   Conjunctive  Sentences. 

Relation  of  Conjunctions  to  the  Moods. 

(752.)  From  what  has  been  said  (745,  746),  it  is  obvious,  that  as  the 
moods  express  the  varieties  of  aifimiation,  and  as  the  conjunctions  are 
used  to  indicate  difiereat  relations  of  thought  (as  positive,  conditional, 
causal,  &c.),  there  must  be  a  close  connexion  between  the  use  of  the  con- 
junctions and  that  of  the  moods.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that 
the  nat^ire.  of  the  ajjirmation  (except,  perhaps,  in  purely  idiomatic  ex- 
pressions) decides  both  the  mood  and  the  conjunction  that  shall  be  used. 
It  cannot  properly  be  said,  therefore,  that  the  conjunctions  govern  the 
moods  ;  but,  for  convenience'  sake,  we  treat  them  together. 

GENERAL   RULE. 

(753.)  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  all  subordinate  sentences 
in  which  affirmation  is  expressed  as  dependent  upon  some  pre- 
vious affirmation,  either  as  purpose,  aim.,  consequence,  condition^ 
or  imaginary  comparison. 

SPECIAL   RULES. 

1.  Final  Conjunctions,  ut,  ne,  quin,  quo,  quominus. 
(754.)  Rule  XL VI.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  sentences 
.expressing  a  purpose  or  a  consequence,  introduced  by  the  final 
conjunctions  ut,  ne,  quin,  quo,  quominus. 


314 


SUBJUNCTITE  I  1  CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES. 


1.  Ut,  ne,  expressing  j9ztr/v7se. 
I  did  not  write  that  in  »  der  to 

instruct  you. 
I  beseech  you  Ttot  to  do  thir. 

2.  Ut,  expressing  consequence. 

Tlie  soldiers  went  with  sucli  vio- 
lence that  the  enemy  be'(  oh 
themselves  to  flight. 

(3.)  duo  is  used  to  express  h.  purpose,  instead  of  ut,  especially  when 
a  comparative  enters  into  thf  sentence. 


Ea    non    ut    te    instituerei 

scripsi. 
Te  obsecro  n  e  hoc  facias. 


Eo  impetu  milites  ierunt,  ut  hostes 
se  fugse  mandarent. 


CfiBsar  erects  forts,  that  he  may 
the  more  easily  keep  off  the 
Helvetians. 


Caesar  castella  communit,  quo  fa^ 
cilius  Helvetios  prohibere  pos. 
sit. 


(4.)  duin  is  used  in  the  sense  ox   'but  that"  [as  not,  Ice.)  after  negor 
tive  sentences,  and  after  non  dibito,  non  dubium  est,  &c. 


There  is  no  one  but  thinks. 
It  is  not  doubtful  but  that  the 
soldiers  will  fight  bravely. 


NeiDO  est  quin  putet. 
Non  dubium  est  quin  milites  for 
titer  pugnaturi  sint. 
(5.)  duominus  is  used  (in  preference  to  ne)  after  verbs  g?  hinder 
in'g,  preventing,  standing  in  tlie  way  of,  &.c.    (It  can  generally  bo 
rendered  in  English  by  "  of"  or  "from"  with  &  participle.) 
Nothing  hinders  him/rom  doing  I  Nihil  impei'^  quominus  hoc  fa 
this.  I     ciat. 

2.  Conditional  Conjunctions,  si,  nisi,  dum,  dttUKflod  \  modo. 

(755.)  Rule  XLVII.  Conditional  conjunctions  take  tho  ^n 
dicative  if  the  condition  is  expressed  as  real  or  cctain ,  i\ 
subjunctive,  where  it  is  not. 

If  he  has  any  money,  he  will  give     S  i  pecuniam  h  a  b  e  a  t,  dab^t. 
it  (it  is  uncertain  whether  he 
has  any). 

Rem.  1.  If  the  condition  is  represented,  as  impossible  or  unreal,  (1)  f» 
imperfect  subjunctive  must  be  used  for  present  or  future  tiip* 
(2)  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  for  past  time. 

(1)  If  he  had  any  money,  he  would    S  i  pecuniam  h  a  b  e  r  e  t,  daret. 
give  it  (but  he  has  none). 

(2)  If  he  had  had  any  money,  he 
would  have  given  it. 

i2em.  2.  As  dum,  dummodo,  modo,  in  the  sense  oi  providt 
that,  can  never  express  a  real,  existing  condition,  tliey  alwa^ 
take  the  subjunctive. 


Si   pecuniam   habuisset,  dedi 
set. 


■^y^vf  SUBJUNCTIVE  WITH  UUUM.  316 

3.  Concessive  Conjunctions  (683,  5). 
(756.)  The  concessive  conjunction's  take  the  indicative  when  they  intro- 
duce a  definite  statement  of  fact,  but  the  subjunctive  when  something  is 
expressed  as  possible,  not  actual.  Etsi,  quamquam,  and  t a m e t s  1 
are  used  principally  in  the  former  sense  ;  in  the  latter,  etiamsi  more 
commonly,  and  licet  and  q  u  a  m  v  i  s*  nearly  always.     Hence, 

Rule  XL VIII.  Licet  and  quaravis  {although)  are  al- 
ways followed  by  the  subjunctive  :  etiamsi,  generally. 


Veritas  licet  nullum  defensorem 

o  b  t  i  n  e  a  t. 
Sapiens  dobrem  patienter  tolerat, 

quamvis  acerbus  sit. 


Though  truth  should  obtain  no 

defender. 
The  wise  man  endures  pain  pa- 
tiently, even  though  it  be  griev- 
ous. 

Rem.  The  comparative  conjunctions,  when  used  concessively,  velut, 
quasi,  acsi,  tanquamsi,  &c.  (meaning  as  if,as  though),  al- 
ways take  the  subjunctive,  for  the  reason  given  (75§)  for  licet  and 
qnamvis. 


Why  do  I  use  witnesses,  as 
though  the  matter  were  doubt- 
ful? 


duid  testibus  utor,  quasi  res  du- 
bia  sit? 


4.   Temporal  Conjunctions. 

(757.)   Temporal  conjunctions  {when,  after  that,  05  soon  a*, 
just  as,  &c.)  of  course  generally  take  the  indicative. 


After  CfEsar  drew  up  the  line  of 

battle. 
Every  animal,  as  soon  as  it  is 

born. 


Postquam     Caesar    aciem    in- 

s  t  r  u  X  i  t. 
Omne  animal,  simulac  or  turn 

est. 


SPECIAL   REMARKS. 

(A.)  Quum  has  two  uses  :  temporal  and  causal. 

(a)  Temporal. 

1.  As  a  pure  particle  of  time,  quum  takes  the  indicative. 

2.  In  historical  narrative  (especially  where  the  principal  clause  hM 
the  indicative  perfect)  quum  temporal  is  followed  by  the  sttft- 
junctive  imperfect  or  pluperfect. 

When  C(ssar  had  conquered  Pom-  [  Caesar,  quum  Pompeium  v  i  c  i  s 
pey,  he  crossed  over  into  Italy.   I      s  e  t,  in  Italiam  t  r  a  j  e  c  i  t. 

[In  many  such  cases,  the  action  introduced  by  when  is  in  some  sens* 
the  cause  of  the  action  in  the  principal  sentence.] 


*  Quamvis  is  used  by  the  later  writers  in  the  sense  of  quamquam,  with 
the  indicative. 


316  RELATIVE  SENTENCES. 

(J)  duum  causal,  expressing  the  relation  of  cause  and  ^ect  {since, 
because,  although),  obviously  requires  the  subjunctive. 
Since  these  things  are  so.  \  Ctuae  cum  ita  sint. 

Hence, 

Rule  XLIX.  Quum  causal  is  always  followed  by  the 
subjunctive  ;  and  quum  temporal  by  the  imperfect  or  pluper- 
fect subjunctive,  when  the  aorist  perfect  indicative  is  used  in 
the  principal  sentence. 

(B.)  Antequam  and  priusquam  are  used, 

1.  To  express  simple  priority  of  one  action  to  another,  and  here  the 
indicative  is  obviously  required. 

All  these  things  xoere  done  before\  Hoec    omnia    ante    facta    sunt 
Verres  touched  Italy.  I      q  u  a  m  Verres  Italiam  a  1 1  i  g  i  t. 

2.  To  express  a  connexion  between  one  action  and  another,  and  here 
the  subjunctive  is  obviously  required. 


Before  Ccesar  attempted  anything, 
he  orders  Divitiacus  to  be  sum- 
moned. 


Cffisar,  priusquam  quidquam 
conaretur,  Divitiacum  ad  se 
vocari  jubet. 

3.  To  introduce  a  general  or  indefinite  statement,  requiring,  of  course, 
the  subjunctive. 
The  tempest  threatens  before   it  I  Tempestas    minatur,   antequam 
rises.  |      surgat. 

(C.)  Dum,  donee,  quoad,  in  the  sense  oi  until,  take  the 
tuhjunctive  when  the  affirmation  is  expressed  as  possible  or 
future. 

He  was   unwilling  to   leave  ^Zt^lDum   Milo  veniret,   locum  relin-. 
spot  until  Milo  came.  I      quere  noluit. 

,[For  interrogatives,  see  $  22.] 

(D.)  ^21.  Relative  Sentences. 
(758.)  In  the  compound  sentence,  "the  messenger,  icho  was  sent,  an- 
nounced," the  clause  "the  messenger  announced"  is  the  principal  sen- 
tence ;  and  the  clause  "wJw  %oas  sent"  the  relative  sentence.     The  word 
"  mf,ssenger"  is  the  antecedent  of  the  relative  "who." 

1.  Agreement. 
(759.)   Rule   L.    The    relative    pronoun    agrees    with   its 
antecedent  in  gender  and  number ;  but  its  case  depends  upon 
tlie  consti'uction  of  the  relative  sentence. 

Tlie  bridge  which  was  at  Geneva  I  Pontem,    qui    erat    ad    Genevam^ 
he  orders  to  be  cut  down.  I     jubet  rescindi. 


RELATIVE  SENTENCES.  317 


Genus  hoc  e^at  pagiiae,  quo  Ger- 
mani  se  exercuerant. 


This  was  a  kind  of  fighting  in 
rohich  the  Germans  had  exer- 
cised themselves 

Rem.  The  verb  in  the  relative  sentence  tak'^s  the  person,  of  the  ante- 
cedent. 

We  who  write.  |  Nos  qui  scribimus. 

2    The  Moods  in  Relative  Sertences. 

(760.)  (a)  The  indicative  mood  occurs  in  the  relative  sen- 
tence only  when  it  states  a  fact  distinctlr,  with  reference  to  a 
particular  subject. 

TTie  messenger  who  was  sent.         \  Nuntius  qri  missus  est. 

(6)  But  qui  is  used  in  Latin  very  comn»only  (1)  to  avoid  the 
use  of  a  conjunction,  and  (2)  to  introduce  indefinite  statements, 
or  the  words  or  opinions  of  another ;  and  in  such  cases  is  al- 
ways followed  by  the  subjunctive. 

(761.)  Rule  LI.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  relative  senten- 
ces expressing  the  purpose,  result,  or  grourd  of  the  principal 
sentence. 

1.  Purpose  (qui  =  ut  with  demonstrative). 

They  sent  ambassadors  to  sue  for  I  Misemnt  legato*,  qui  pacem  pet* 
(=  who  should  sue  for)  peace.     |      erent  (=  ut  ii  pacem  peterent). 

2.  Result  (qui  =  ut  after  is,  tam,  talis,  dignus,  ita,  &c.). 
Non  is  sum  qui  h?^  faciam. 


7"  am  not  the  man  to  do  this  (=  I 

am  not  such  who  can  do). 
Pollio  is  worthy  of  our  love  (= 

worthy,  whom  we  may  love). 

3.  Ground  or  cause  (qui  =  cur  or  quod). 
You  err,  who  think  (=  because  you    Erras  qui  censeas — 


Dignas  est  Pollio,  \j "»*♦!»  diliga- 
mus. 


Hannibal  did  wrong  in  wintering    Male   fecit   Hannibal    q*^  i    Capun 
(=  because  he  wintered)  at  Ca-        h  i  e  m  a  r  i  t. 
pua. 

(762.)  Rule  LII.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  relat've  sen- 
tences containing  indefinite  statements,  especially  aft/^v  thr 
words  there  are,  there  can  he  found,  there  is  no  one,  &c. 


There  are  those  who  say. 

I  have  nothing  whereof  to  accuse 

(=  no  reason  to  blame)  old  age. 

Rem.  When  the  sentence  introduced  by  the  relative  expresses  th9 

D  I)  2 


Sunt  qui  dicant. 
Nihil  habeo  quod  incusem  so- 
nectutem. 


318  INTERROGATIVE  SENTENCES. 

sentiments  of  another  (rathei*  tlmn  of  the  writer),  the  subjunctiv©  If 
used. 


Helvetii  constituerunt  ea  quaa  ad 
proficiscendam  pertinerent 
comparare. 


The  Helvetians  determined  to  get 
together  those  things  which 
(they  thought)  belonged  to 
inarching  (were  necessary  for 
Betting  out). 

^  22.  Interrogative  Sentences. 
1.  Questions, 
(763.)  Cluestions  are  often  expressed  in  English  without  any  interrog. 
fttive  word ;  e.  g.,  Is  Caius  writing  ?  but  in  the  Latin,  ahnost  invaria- 
bly, an  interrogative  word  is  used.  These  are  either  (a)  interrogative 
particles,  [b)  interrogative  pronouns,  or  (c)  interrogative  adverbs  or  con- 
junctions. 

{a)  Interrogative  Particles :  ne,  nonne,  num,  utrum,  an. 

(1.)  Ne  simply  asks  for  information. 
Is  Caius  writing  7  jScribitne  Caius  ? 

(2.)  Nonne  expects  the  answer  yes. 
Do  you  not  think  the  wise  man  I  Nonne  putas  sapientem  beatum 
happy  ?  I      esse  ? 

(3.)  Num  expects  the  answer  no. 
Do  you  think  the  fool  happy  ?        |  N  u  m  putas  stultum  esse  beatom  ? 

(4.)  Utrum  is  used  in  double  questions,  with  a  n  (whetlter — or). 
(Whether)  is  that  your  fault  or  I  Utrum  ea  vestra  an  nostra  culpa 

ours  ?  j      est  ? 

{b)  Interrogative  Pronouns:    quis,  qui,   qualis,  quantus,   ec- 

quis,  &c. 
Who  taught  Epaminondas  mu-  t  d  u  i  s  Epaminondam  musicam  do- 

sic  ?  &c.  I      cuit  ? 

(c)  Interrogative  Adverbs  or  Conjunctions:    quare,   cur,   quando, 

ubi,  quomodo,  &c. 
(764.)  Cluestions  are  either  direct  or  indirect :  direct,  when  they  are 
not  dependent  on  any  word  or  sentence  going  before  ;  e.  g.,  Is  Caius  wri- 
ting ?    Indirect,  when  they  are  so  dependent ;  e.  g.,  Tell  me  if  Caius  is 
writing. 

2.  Use  of  the  Moods  in  Questions, 
(a)  jyirect. 
(765.)  In  direct  questions  the  indicative  is  used  when  the  quescion  tl  put 
positively,  and  the  subjunctive  when  it  is  put  doubtfully ;  e.  g., 
(Positive.)   What  are  you  doing  ?  I  duid  a  g  i  s  ?     (Indie.) 
(Doubtful.)   What  can  we  do?        \  Cluid  a g a m u b  ? 


ORATIO     ^LiauA.  S19 

(b,  indirect. 

(766.)  Rule  LIII.  In  indirect  questions  the  subjunctive  ia 
always  used. 

I  do  not  know  what  book  you  are    Nescio  quern  librmn  leg  as. 

reading^. 
Tell  me  what  you  are  doing.  Die,  quid  agas. 

«J  23.   Oratio  Obliqua. 
1.  Nature  of  Oratio  Obliqua. 
(767.)  W  hen  any  one  relates  the  words  or  opinions  of  another,  he  may 
do  it  ia  two  ways  : 

(a)  He  may  represent  him  as  speaking  in  the  Jlrst  person,  and  giveliis 
words  precisely  as  they  were  uttered;  e.  g.,  Ariovistus  said,  " I  have 
crossed  tlie  Rhine^' — Ariovistus  dixit,  Bhenum  transii.  This  is 
called  oratio  recta,  direct  discourse, 
{h)  He  may  state  the  substance  of  what  the  speaker  said  in  narrative 
form ;  e.g.,  Ariovistus  said  that  lie  had  crossed  the  Rhine — Ariovistus 
dixit  se  Rhenum  transisse.  This  is  called  oratio  obliqua, 
indirect  discourse, 

2.  The  Moods  in  the  Oratio  Obliqua. 
(768.)  The  sentences  introduced  in  the  oratio  obliqua  are  either  pnrunr 
pal  or  subordinate ;  e.  g.,  Ariovistus  said  that  he  would  not  wage  war  on 
the  ^duans  if  they  paid  the  tribute  yearly.  Here  the  sentence  that  he 
would  not  wage  war  upon  the  u^duans  is  a  principal  sentence,  and  if 
they  paid  the  tribute  yearly  is  a  subordinate  sentence. 

(769.)  Rule  LIV.  {a)  Principal  sentences  inilae  oratio  ohli- 
qua  are  expressed  by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive ;  e.  g,, 
Ariovistus  dixit,  s e  iEduis  bellum  non  esse  illaturum. 

Rem.  If  the  principal  sentence  contains  a  command  or  wish,  it  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  subjunctive ;  e.  g., 
The  leader  said  that  the  troops  I  Dux  dixit,  milites  suae  saluti  con- 
should  consult  their  own  safety.  \      sulerent. 

(&)  Subordinate  sentences  in  oratio  obliqua  always  take  the 
subjunctive ;  e.  g.,  Ariovistus  dixit,  se  JEduis  bellum  non  esse 
illaturum,  si  stipendium  quotannis  penderent  {if 
Oiey  paid  the  tribute  yearly) , 


tl 


APPENDICES 


APPENDIX  I. 


OF  PROSODY. 

^  1.   Quantity. 

(The  rules  of  quantity  in.  Lesson  XLII.  shotild  be  reviewed,  and  tibe 
following  additional  rules  learned.] 

1.  Penults. 
(770.)  Dissyllabic  supines  lengthen  the  penult;  e.g.,  visum. 
Rem.  The  following  are  short,  viz. : 

Datum,  rStum,  satum,  stitum,  itum, 
Cituna,  litum,  situm,  rutum,  qtutum. 
(771c)  Reduplicated  perfects  shorten  both  penult  and  antepenult , 
e.^-.,  cScIdi,  didici. 

Rem.  Penult  is  long  in  cecidi  (csedSre)  and  pSpfidi  (pfidSre). 
(772.)  In  ADJECTIVE  PENULTS  observe  the  following : 

1.  Short  Penults :  -Sous,  -Icus,  -idus,  imus  ;  e.  g.,  .ffigyptiftcus,  mo- 
dicus,  cupidus,  legitimus. 

Exceptions. — Meracus,  opflcus,  amicus,  apricus,  anticus,  posticus, 
mendicus,  umbilieus,  fidus,  inf idus,  bimus,  trimus  (of  two,  three 
years,  &c.),  matrimus,  opimus,  patrimus,  imus,  primus. 

2.  Long  Penults:  -alis,  -anus,  ddas,  fitns,  with  all  before  -rus, 
-vus,  -SUB  ;  e.g.,  dotalis,  montanus,  percrudus,  astutus,  avfirus,  sin- 
cSrus,  delirus,  decdrus,  octavus,  sestivus,  famdsns. 

Exc. — InfSri,  postSri,  barbarus,  opiparua. 
i.  Penults  sometimes  long,  sometimes  short:  -ilis,  -inus. 
(<^  -ilis,  fh)m  verbs,  is  short ;  fix>m  nouns,  long;  e. g.,  faciflis  {short) ; 

civilis  {long).    Exilis,  subtilis,  and  the  names  of  months  (Aprilis 

&c.),  are  long. 
{b)  -inus,  from  nouns  denoting  time  or  material,  is  short;  from 

other  words,  long ;  e.  g.,  crastinus,  elephantinus  {short) ;  caninus, 

Latanus  {long). 

2.  Compound  Words. 
(77o.)  Compound  words  generally  retain  the  quantity  of  the  simple 
words;  e. ^.,  per+16go  =  perl6go ;  per+l6gi  =  perl6gi. 


324^ 


APPENDIX    I. PROSODY. 


Rem.  1.  A  change  of  vowels  does  Jiot  aflPect  the  rule ;  e+lego  = 

eligo. 
2.  Dejero,   pejero  (juro) ;  maledicus,   &c.   (dico) ;  cognitum,    agmtum 
(nottun),  are  short,  though  the  simple  words  are  long. 
(774.)  a,  e,  de,  dl,  pro,  s  e,  in  composition  are  long,  but  re  is  short. 
■Exc. — Dirimo,  disertus,  refert.-   Pro  is  short  in  Greek  words,  and  in 
the  compounds  of  cello,  fanum,  fari,  fateor,  festus,  fugio,  fxmdo, 
nepos,  neptis,  toi-vus ;  also  in  proficiscor.     In  prSpago,  prdpino,  it 
is  doubtful.* 
(775.)  If  the  first  part  of  a  compound  word  end  in  a,  it  is  generally  long ; 
if  in  c, «,  or  u,  generally  short ;  e.  g.,  traduce,  trade  (contracted  from  trans) ; 
trScenti,  agricola,  quadrupes. 

<5  2.  Rhythm,  Arsis,  Thesis,  Verse,  Feet. 
(776.)  (a)  By  Rhythm  we  mean  a  regular  alternation  of  elevations 
(stress)  and  depressions  of  the  voice.    In  poetry  this  alternation  follows 
certain  fixed  laws. 

(b)  The  effort  of  voice  by  which  stress  is  laid  upon  one  syllable  is  called 
Ictus,  or  rhythmical  accent.  A  syllable  so  raised  by  the  ictus  stands  in 
the  Arsis  The  syllable  or  syllables  on  which  the  voice  rests  or  sinks 
are  said  to  be  in  the  Thesis. 

(c)  A  Foot  is  formed  by  the  union  of  arsis  and  thesis.  A  combination 
of  feet  forms  a  Verse. 

Thus,  in  the  line  vts6rg  mantes,  the  ictus  falls  on  the  syllables 
marked  with  the  accent ;  vis  and  mon,  therefore,  are  in  the  arsis, 
s6re  and  tes  in  the  thesis.  The  union  of  arsis  and  thesis  in 
viserg  forms  a  foot;  so  also  in  mon  tes.  The  combination  of 
these  two  feet  forms  the  verse 

VisSrg  montes. 
fd)  A  Dactyl  is  a  foot  composed  of  one  long  syllable  (arsis)  and  two 
•hort  syllables  (thesis) ;  e.g.,  vtserg  :  a  Spondee  of  two  long  (arsis  and 
thesis) ;  c.  g'.,  m6nt6s. 

ij  3.   Scanning. 
(777.)  Scanning  is  the  measuring  of  a  verse  into  the  feet  which  com- 
pose it.     Observe  the  following  points  in  scanning  : 

1 .  Syrudcepha  cuts  off  a  vowel  at  the  end  of  a  word  when  the  next 
word  begins  with  a  vowel  or  h  ;  e.  g.,  instead  of  r  e  g  i  n  a  a  d,  we 
read  re  gin'  ad;  instead  of  atque  hinc,  atqu'  hinc. 

2.  Ecthlipsis  cuts  off  m  with  the  vowel  before  it  at  the  end  of  a  word 

*  The  following  lines  contain  the  exceptions  : 

At  rape  quae  fundo,  fugio,  neptisque,  neposque, 

Et  cello,  fari,  fateor,  fanumque,  festumque  ; 

Atque  procus,  proficiscor,  cumque  propheta,  profecto. 


4. 

5. 

6. 

trrepa- 

rdbil6 

tempus. 

b^s  r6n&- 

vdr6  d6- 

I6rem. 

APPENDIX    I.— PROSODY.  325 

■when  the  next  begins  with  a  vowel;  e.  g.,  instead  ofignotum 
est,  we  read  i g n o t'  est. 

3.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  ending  with  a  consonant  is  always 
long  if  the  next  word  begins  with  a  consonant ;  e.  g.,  m  a  n  i  b  u  s 
tremor;  here  bus  (naturally  short)  is  made  long. 

4.  Synceresis  contracts  two  syllables  into  one;  e.  g.,  aur6a  into 
aurea  (pronounced  aurya). 

5.  DicEresis  divides  one  syllable  into  two  ;  e.  g.,  pictse,  pictai. 

^  4.  Hexameter  Verse. 

(778.)  (a)  Hexameter  verse  is  so  called  because  it  has  six  measures, 
of  a  foot  each.  The  first /owr  feet  may  be  either  dactyls  or  spondees  ;  the 
Jiffh  is  regularly  a  dactyl,  the  sixth  a  spondee. 

11.        1       2.       11      3* 
Sed  fuglt   tntere-     4,fugit 
I  infan-    |dtijnB.e-l|gjbiaju- 

Rem.  1.  Sometimes  a  spondee  is  found  in  the  5th  place,  especially 
when  anything  grave  or  solemn  is  expressed.    The  line  is  then 
called  spondaic. 
2.  The  final  syllable  of  a  verse  is  always  reckoned  long ;  e. g.,  rem, 
indolorem. 
{h)  Caesura  is  the  separation,  by  the  end  of  a  word,  of  syllables  enter- 
ing into  a  foot.    If  the  feet  of  a  verse  be  marked  off  like  bars  in  music, 
whenever  a  bar  falls  in  the  middle  of  a  word  there  is  a  caesura ;  e.  g.,  the 
following  hexameter  hB.s  Jive  caesuras  : 

nie  la-  1  tus  nive-  ]  um  mol-  ]  li  ful-  |  tus,  hyi-  j  cintho. 
(c)  The  ccBsural  pause  in  hexameter  verse  is  a  pause  or  rest  of  the 
voice  on  a  caesural  syllable,  designed  to  give  harmony  to  the  entire  verse. 
(1.)  The  most  approved  caesural  pause  {the  heroic)  falls  on  the  arsis  of 
the  third  foot,  as  m  the  following  examples  : 

Sed  fugit  I    Intere-    I    a    11  fiigit  I  itrepai  I    rabilS     j  tempus. 
ille  la-     I  tus  nivS  1  um  1]  mol-  |  li  ful   |  tus  hyi-  |   cintho. 

(2.)  Next  in  excellence  is  the  caesural  pause  in  the  thesis  of  the  third 
foot,  or  in  the  arsis  of  the  fourth.  Occurring  in  other  places,  it 
mars  the  hannony  of  the  versp. 

Ee 


APPENDIX  11. 


(779.) 


GREEK  NOUNa 


{jEne-as,      IB,  08, 

Anchis-es,  te,  ae, 

Pen6l6p-6,  es,  sb, 

^Del-OS,        i,  o, 

I  Orph-eus,  ei,  eo, 


Voo.  sometimes  d  and  d 


,or&&,  eu  eo. 


oA    n    7  J  ^^'■if'^  ^^°'  ^'■'    ^"»   *"**">"•'  »^"»  ^^  ^•^' 

I  [or,  N.  e^,  G.  eos,  D.  6i  (ei),  Ace.  64  poetical.) 
[Athos,       6,     6,     6n, or 6,      6s,  6.    (In  Greek,  wf.) 
Poes-is,       isi       M,  im,   Hs,  i.      |      gb,  eon.  i^wB  not  found), 

(eos,)  5     (in,)  > 
NerS-is, 
G.  Nereid-is, 
(6s, 
Pericl-es,  is,  )i,  em,  )         es,  )    ^ 

i,  >      ea,  5  e,  > 

.Did-6,       us,    6,    6.  6.        |    (also,  onis,  &c.) 

Ohs.  Neuters  in  a,  gen.  fttis,  have  dat.  plur.  in  atis ;  thus :  poema,  dat. 
plur.  poemfitis,  not  poematibus. 


Zd  DecU 


is,  >  i,  em,  7  (Nerei),  6.  \  es,  um,  ibus,  es.  > 

3,)  S     (s,)  5  (to.)  i 


(780.)  EXAMPLES  OF  PATRONYMICS 

(or  names  from  a  father  or  ancestor). 
^n6as,       Anchises,       Tyndirus,       Theseus, 
Masc.    ^neddes,  Anchisiddes,   Tyndarides,  Thesides* 

Fern,     {j^neis,)     Anchisias,      Tynddris,      Theseis, 


Atlas  (antis). 

Atlantldes, 

Atlantiades. 

Atlantis, 

Atlantias. 


(781.) 


EXAMPLES  OP  NAMES 
(derived  from  one's  town  or  native  country). 
Masc.  Persa,     Ores,        Tros,        Thrax,        Laco  (Lacon),    Phoenix. 
Fern.    Persis,    Cressa,     Troas,     Tkreissa,    Laccena,  Phcenissa. 

Creth,  Thressa. 

RomAnus  Clusicns         Atheniensis         Abderitfis  {fern.,  Abderttis). 

{Roman).      {of  Chisium).  {an  Athenian).     {ofAbdera). 
Milesias  Arpinas 

{of  Miletus).  {of  Arpinum). 

•  For  ThesSides.    Hence  ides  oomes  from  nom.  in  eus. 


APPENDIX  III. 


(782.)  THE  CALENDAR. 

(1.)  The  Roman  months  had  the  same  number  of  days  as  ours,  tmt 
were  diflFerently  divided. 

1.  The  Kalends  were  the  1st  day  of  the  month. 

2.  The  Nones  "        5th  or  7th  day  of  the  month. 

3.  The  Ides  "        XSth  or  15^^  day  of  the  month. 

5^*  "We  make  in  March,  July,  October,  May, 

The  Nones  the  seventh,  the  Ides  ^e  fifteenth  day. 

In  all  the  other  months  the  5th  and  13th  were  used. 

(2.)  The  names  of  the  months  are  used  as  adjectives  agreeing  witb 
KalendsB,  Nonas,  and  Idas. 


The  Ist  of  January. 

The  5ih  of  June. 

The  13th  of  September. 


Kalendis  Januariis. 

Nonis  Jnniis. 

Idibns  Septembribus. 


(3.)  (a)  Instead  of  beginning  at  the  1st  of  the  month  and  nTimbering  the 
days  regularly  2d,  3d,  &c.,  as  we  do,  the  Romans  counted  them  backward 
from  the  Kalends,  Nones,  and  Ides.  Thus,  the  2d  of  January  was  called 
the  ith  day  before  the  Nones  of  January,  quarto  (die  ante)  Nonas 
Jannarias;  the  3d,  tertio  Nonas;  the  4th,  pridie  Nonas ;  the 
5th,  Nonis. 

(b)  From  the  above  cases  it  will  be  seen  that  the  day  with  which  the 
reckoning  commences  is  included  (except  pridie),  i.  e.,  the  2d  day  before 
the  Nones  is  tertio  Nonas  ;  the  3d  day  before,  quarto  Nonas,  &c. 

The  12th  of  October.  Tertio  (die  ante)   Idus   Octo 

bres. 
TheZdofJune.  Tertio  (die  ante)  Nonas  Ju- 

nias. 

(c)  Special  care  must  be  taken,  in  designating  any  day  between  the 
Ides  of  one  month  and  the  Kalends  of  another,  to  ensure  correctness. 
Thus,  in.  (die  ante)  Kalend.  Januar.  will  be  December  30 ;  but  III.  KaL 
Maias  =  29th  April,  inasmuch  as  December  has  31  days  and  April  but  30. 
<3o  in.  Kal.  Martias  =  27th  February. 


328 


APPENDIX    III.— CALENDAR. 


(4.)  The  following  table,  exhibiting  the  correspondence  between  the 
Romaji  calendar  and  ours,  can  now  be  readily  understood  : 


The  Days 

March,    May,    July,'january,  August,  and 

AprU,  June,  Septem- 
ber, and  November 

February    {has    28, 

of    our 

and  October  (hare 

December    (  have 

and  iu  Leap-years 

Months. 

31  days). 

also  31  days). 

(have  30  days). 

29  days). 

1. 

Kalendis. 

Kalendis. 

Kalendis. 

Kalendis. 

2. 

VI.  ^ 

IV.  ?ante 
III.  (Nonas. 

IV.  ;ante 

IV.  ?  ante 

3. 

V.    1  ante 

III.  5  Nonas. 

III.  5  Nonas. 

4. 

IV.  [Nonas. 

Pridie  Nonas. 

Pridie  Nonas. 

Pridie  Nonas. 

5. 

III. ; 

•  Nonis. 

Nonis. 

Nonis. 

6. 

Pridie  Nonas. 

VIII.  1 

VIII.  ^ 

VIII.  ^ 

7. 

Nonis. 

VII. 

VII. 

VII. 

8. 

VIII.  > 

VI. 

ante 

VI. 

ante 

VI. 

ante 

9. 

VII. 

V. 

Idus. 

V. 

Idus. 

V. 

'Idus. 

10. 

VI. 

ante 

IV. 

IV. 

IV. 

11. 

V. 

Idus. 

III.  ^ 

III. 

III.  . 

1 

12. 

IV. 

Pridie  Idus. 

Pridie  Idus.   , 

Pridie  Idus.    11 

13. 

III.  J 

Idibus, 

Idibus. 

Idibus.        11 

14. 

Pridie  Idus. 

XIX.     ^ 

XVIII.  ^ 

XVI. -^1 

15. 

Idibus. 

XVIII. 

SP 

XVII. 

.1 

XV. 

. 

16. 

XVII.' 

ha   - 

XVII. 

.S 

XVI. 

XIV. 

S 

17. 

XVI. 

a 

XVI. 

1 

XV. 

o 

XIII. 

■-g 

18. 

XV. 

1 

XV. 

XIV. 

% 

XII. 

1 

19. 

XIV. 

1 

XIV. 

e2 

XIII. 

o 

XI. 

20. 

xm. 

c2 

XIII. 

■2  • 

XII. 

■B  . 

X. 

S 

21. 

XII. 

XII. 

<v..a 

XL 

-^1 

IX. 

"§ 

22. 

XI. 

4J     J" 

XI. 

.^"S 

X. 

al  9 

VIII. 

-1 

23. 

X. 

..O,^ 

X. 

'a 

IX. 

us  g 

VII. 

^ 

24. 

IX. 

li 

IX. 

VIII. 

1 

VI. 

o 

25. 

vm. 

VIII. 

(U 

VII. 

13 

V. 

1 

26. 

VII. 

VII. 

! 

VI. 

t4 

IV. 

27. 

VL 

'3 

VI. 

V. 

o 

III.  , 

28. 

V. 

V. 

i 

IV. 

d 

Prid.  ] 

?:alendas 

29. 

IV. 

S 

IV. 

III.     . 

CS 

Martias. 

30. 

III. 

§ 

III. 

Prid.  Kalendas 

31. 

Prid.  Kalendas 

Prid.  Kalendas     (of  the  foUow- 

(of  the  follow- 

(of the  follow-     ing  month). 

ing  month). 

ing  month). 

(5.)  The  5lh  day  before  the  Kalends  oj  April  (for  instance)  may  be  ex- 
pressed in  three  ways  : 

(a)  Die  quinto  ante  Kalendas  Apriles. 
(&)  duinto  Kalendas  Apriles. 

(c)  Ante  diem  quintum  Kalendas  A  p r  11  e s ;  or,  abbrevi- 
ated, a.  d.  V.  KaL  Apr. 


APPENDIX  IV. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 

(783.)  The  following  abbreviations  of  words  occur  in  Latin  authow, 

(a)  NAMES. 


A.     Aulus. 

M'. 

Manius. 

Sept.       Septimius. 

Ap.  Appius. 

M. 

Marcus. 

Serv.      Servius. 

C.     Caius. 

Mam. 

Mamercus. 

Sex.       Sextus. 

CI.    Claudias. 

M.  T,  C.  Marcus  TuUi-  | 

Sp.          Spurius. 

Cn.  CnsBUS. 

t       us  Cicero. 

T.           Titus. 

D.     Decimus. 

N. 

Numerius. 

Ti-^  Tiberius. 

D.     Decius. 

P. 

Publius. 

L.     Lucius. 

a 

auintus. 

TuU.       TuUius. 

(b)                                                  PUBLIC    EXPRESSIONS. 

^d.            iEdilia. 

Id. 

Idus. 

Pr.        Prajtor. 

Aug.           Augustus. 

Imp. 

Imperator. 

Praaf.    Praefectus. 

^i'^     ^  Kalends. 

Impp. 
Non. 

Imperatores. 
NonsB. 

Pont.    Max.     Pontifex 
Maximus. 

Cos.            Consul. 

0.  M. 

Optimus  Maxi- 

Resp.  Respublica. 

Coss.          Consules. 

mus. 

S.         Senatas. 

D.               Divus. 

P.  C. 

Patres        Con- 

S.  C.    Senatus   consuJ- 

Des.            Designatas. 

scripti. 

tum. 

Eq.  Rom.  Eques     Ro- 

PI. 

Plebis. 

S.  P.  a.  R.  Senatus  po- 

manus. 

Pop. 

Populus. 

pulusque  Rom. 

F.                Filius. 

P.  R. 

Populus  Rom. 

Tr.       Tribunus. 

(c)                                                OTHER 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

A.                 Anno. 

S.              S 

alutem. 

A.  C.            Anno  currente. 

8.  P.  D.    S 

alutem  dicit  plurimam. 

A,  pr.           Anno  prseteiito. 
A.  M.           Anno  mundi. 

c.               c 

aput. 

cf.             c 

onfer. 

A.  Cbr.        Anno  Christi. 

e.  g.          e 

xempli  gratia. 

A.  D.           Anno  Domini. 

i.  e.           i 

iest. 

A.  U.  C.      Anno  urbis  conditae. 

1.  c.            1( 

3co  citato 

D.  D.            Dono  dedit. 

pag.  m.     F 

agina  mea. 

D.  D.  D.      Dono  dedit  dicavit. 

q.  d.            q 

uasi  dicat. 

D.  D.  C.  q.  Dedit  dicavit  consecra- 

q.l.             q 

uantum  libet. 

vitque. 

q.  s.           c 

uantum  sufBcit. 

D.  M.           Diis  Manibus. 

scil.            s 

cilicet. 

L.  S.             Loco  sigilli. 

seq.           s 

equens. 

M.  S.            Manuscriptus. 

V.                   \ 

-^ersus. 

P.  8.             Postscriptum. 

V.  g.            \ 

erbi  gratia. 

Q,.D.B.V.  auod  Deus  bene  vertat. 

viz.             -v 

ndelicet. 

8.  V.  B.  E.  E.  V.  Si  vales  bene 

est 

vid.            \ 

';^de. 

ego 

valeo. 

• 

E  e2s 


WORD-BUILDING 

AND 

READING   LESSONS. 


.Il 


WORD-BUILDING. 


(784.)  1.  Thk  generic  meaning'  of  a  word  is  contained  in  its  root ;  the 
specific  meaning  is  generally  given  by  its  ending.  Thus,  in  all  the  words 
a  m  -  o  (/  love),  a  m  -  o  r  (love),  a  m  -  a  t  o  r  {a  lover),  a  m  -  i  c  u  s  (friend),  we 
find  the  same  generic  idea  (lave)  expressed  by  the  root  am ;  while  the 
specific  meanings,  I  love  (verb),  love  (noun),  lover  (noxm),  friend  (adjective 
noun),  are  given  by  the  endings  o,  or,  a t o r,  i c u  s,  respectively. 

2.  The  meanings  of  words  are  farther  modified  by  certain  prefixes  ; 
f  g.,  ire  (io  go),  a  m  b  -  i  r  c  {io  go  rouiid). 

3.  Again,  words  may  be  compounded  with  each  other,  and  form  new 
words  ;  e.  g.,  with  agr-  (the  stem  of  ager, field),  and  col-  (the  stem  of 
c  o  1 6  r  e,  to  till),  we  form  a  g  r  i  c  o  1  -  a,  a  tiller  of  thejield  =  a  farmer. 

Thus  there  are  three  modes  of  forming  words  :  by  suffixes,  prefixes,  and 
composition.    We  treat  them  in  order. 

(l.)    WORD-BUIIiDING    BY    SUmXES. 

(A.)  Nouns. 
(785.)  First  Declension. 
1.  The  ending  -a,  suSixed  to  verb-stems,  expresses  an  agent  or 
doer. 

s  c  r  i  b  -  a,        writer,        from        s  c  r  i  b  -  6  r  e,        to  write. 
p  e  r  f  u  g  -  a,    deserter,     from        p  e  r  f  u  g  -  6  r  e,     to  desert. 
S  -i  a,  -  i  t  i  a,  with  adjective-stems,  a  disposition  or  co7idition. 

i  g  n  a  V  -  i  a,  cowardice,    from    i  g  n  a  v  -  u  s,         cowardly. 

prudent-ia,    prudence,      from     pruden(t)-s,  prudent. 
trist-itia,         sadness,        from    trist-is,  sad. 

victor-ia,         victory,         from    v  i  c  t  -  o  r,  victorious 

3.  -ura,  with  supine-stems,  the  action  or  co7idition  of  the  verb, 
pict-ura,  painting;      pingere  (pict-),  to  paint. 

prsefect   ura,  prefectship ;  praeficere  (p  r  ae  f  e  c  t  -),  to  place  over. 
(786.)  Second  Declension. 

1.  -us,  -ius,  with  verb-stems,  form  nouns  denoting  the  agent  or  the 
action  of  the  verb. 


s  e  r  V  -  u  s. 

slave ; 

s  e  r  V  -  i  r  e. 

to  serve. 

fluv-ius, 

river ; 

flu(v)-6re, 

to  flow. 

ooqu-as, 

cook ; 

coqu-ere, 

to  cook. 

lud-us, 

sport ; 

lud-ere, 

to  play. 

334  WORD-BUILDING. 

2.  -um,  -ium,  with  verb-stems,  gives  a  result  Oi  the  action  of  the 
verb. 

jug-um,  yoke,  jung-6re,         tojoin. 

V  a  d  -  u  m,  ford ;  v  a  d  -  6  r  e,  to  go. 

incend-ium,  Jlre ;  i n c  e n d - e r  e,   ^o  bum. 

3.  -ium,  with  noun-stems,  {a)  an  office,  or  [h)  an  assemblage  of  men 
exercising  an  office  or  function. 

(a)    sacerdot-ium>  office  <?/*sacerdos. 

minister-ium,  office  o/^minister. 

(J)    c o  1 1  e  g •  i u m,  assemblage  of  coWegm. 

conviv-ium,  assemblage  of  convivae. 

4.  .mentum,  with  verb-stems,  the  m^ans  of  doing  what  the  verb 
expresses. 

teg-u-mentum,        covering ;        t e g - 6 r e,        to  cover. 
adju-mentum^  aid;  adjxir -Are,  to  assist. 

5.  -ulum,  -bulum,  -culum,  with  verb-stems,  means  or  instru- 
ment. 

jac-ulum,  javelin;  jac-gre,      to  hurl. 

venab-ulum,    hunting-spear ;    v  e  n  -  a  r  i,     to  hunt. 

vehiculum,     carriage ;  v  e  h  -  6  r  e,     to  carry. 

Rem.  d  u  1  u  m  also  sometimes — the  place  where ;  e.  g-.,  c  oe  n  a  -  c  u  1  u  m, 

cubi-culum. 

6.  -c  r  u  m,  -strum,  with  verb-stems,  place  or  thing  prepared  for  any 
purpose. 

lava-crum,  bath  ;  1  a  v  -  a  r  e,  to  wash. 

claus-trum,  lock;  claud-6re,       to  shut. 

(787.)  Diminutives  of  First  and  Second  Declensions. 

I  us,  -la,  -Ium,  with  noun-stems,  form  diminutive  nouns,  of  mascu- 
line, feminine,  and  neuter  genders. 

{a)  Connecting  vowels  i,  o,  u,  the  latter  sometimes  with  c. 

fili-o-lus,  fili-o-la,  little  son,  daughter — (filius) ;  frater- 
culus  (frater) ;  opus -culum  (opus). 
(b)  Sometimes  1  is  doubled:   lap-illus  (lapis);   codic-illai 
(codex,  codicis) ;  sac-ellum  (sacrum). 

(788.)  Third  Declension. 

1.  -tas,  -tiis  (with  or  without  i  as  connecting  vowel),  form,  with  ad- 
jective-stems, abstract  nonns  denoting  quality,  &c. 

bon-i-tas,  goodness;  bon-us,  good. 

hones-tas,  honour;  honest-us,      honourable. 

fort-i-tndo,  bravery;  fort -is,  brave. 


WORD-BUILDING.  335 

•.  (a)  -or,  with  verb-stems,  the  action  or  condition  of  the  verb, 
pav-or,       fear;  pav-6re,        to  fear, 

am-or,         love;  am-are,  to  love, 

(b)  -or,  with  saphie^stems,  the  agent  or  doer. 

doct-or,  teacher;         doc-ere  (doct-),  to  teach. 

mo  nit -or,        adviser;        mon-Sre  (monit-),        to  advise. 

3.  -io,  with  supine-stems,  the  action  of  the  verb,  especially  the  doing 
of  it. 

act-io,  action;  ag-ere  (act-),  to  act,  do, 

caut-io,        caution;  cav-6re  (caut-),        to  take  care. 

4.  -tudo,  with  adjective-stems,  the  abstract  quality/. 

fort-i-tudo,  bravery;  fort-is,  brave. 

(789.)  Fourth  Declension. 

Most  nouns  of  the  4th  declension  are  abstracts  formed  from  verb- 
stems  or  supine-stems. 

us -us,  use;  uti  (us-),  to  use, 

mot -us,  motion;  m6v-ere  (mot-),        to  move. 

(790.)  Fifth  Declension. 

1.  -es,  -ies,  -ities,  with  verb  or  adjective-stems,  a  property,  oper* 
ation,  quality,  &c. 

fid-es  (fid-6re) ;  ser-ies  (ser-6re) ;  fac-ies  (fac-6re) ;  dur- 
ities  (dur-us) ;  mund-ities(mund-uB). 

2.  [Those  in  -ities   coexist  with  others  in  -itia  (784,  2);   e.  er. 
munditia,  duritia,  &c.] 

(B.)  Adjectives. 
(791.)  First  Class,  us,  a,  urn. 

1.  -us,  quality  in  general  (coexisting  with  verb  and  noun  stems). 

alb-US,  white;  alb-are,  alb-umen. 

curv-us,         curved;  curv-are,  curv-amen. 

dur-us,  hard;  dur-are,  dur-ities. 

viv-us,  alive;  viv-ere,  vit-a. 

8.  -Id us   and  uus,  chiefly  with  stems  of  intransitive  verbs,  the 
quality  of  the  verb,  without  addition. 

turg-idus,        swelling;  turg-ere,        to  swell. 

cal-idus,  warm;  cal-Sre,  to  be  warm. 

noc-uus,  hurtful;  noc-ere,  to  hurt. 

3.  -bundus,  with  verb-stems,  force  of  present  participle,  intensified. 

hfflsita-bundus,  full  of  hesitation ;       ha)s  it-are,  to  hesitate. 
lacryma-bundus,  weeping  profusely  •  lacrym-are,  to  weep 


336  WORD-BUILDING. 

4.  -cQudus,  same  as  bundus,  generallywith  the  additional  idea  of 
permanency, 

ira-cundus,     passionate;        ira-sc-i,  to  be  angry 

vere-cundus,  bashful;  yerS-ri,  tofear. 

5.  -i  c  u  s,  with  noun-stems,  belonging  or  relating  to  a  thing. 

class-icus,    belonging  to  a Jleet ;        class-is,   Jleet. 
c  i  V  -  i  c  u  s,         civic ;  c  i  v  -  i  s,         citizen. 

6.  -e  u  s,  -a  c  e  u  s,  -i  c  i  u  s,  with  noun-stems,  material  or  origin. 

ferr-eus,  of  iron;  ferr-um,        iron. 

chart-aceus,  of  paper;  chart-a,        paper. 

7.  -i  n  u  s,  with  noun-stems,  similarity,  quality,  or  material. 

&sin-imjLS,  Sisimne,  like  an  ass ;        asin-us,  an  ass 

m  a  r  -  i  n  u  s,  marine ;  m  a  r  -  e,  the  sea. 

crystall-inus,       crystalline;         crystall-um,  crystal. 

8.  -anus,  with  names  of  towns  ending  in  a  or  ce,  a  native  of  such 
place. 

B/Om-anus,        a  Roman ;  Roma,        Rome. 

9.  -OS us,  -lentus,  with  noun-stems,  fulness,  abundance  (like  the 
English  -ous). 

fam-osus,  famous;  fam-a,       fame. 

vino-lentus,      drunken;  vin-um,     wine. 

(792.)  Second  Class,  is,  is,  e. 

1.  -i  s,  quality  in,  general  (coexisting  commonly  with  noun  and  verb 
forms). 

lev -is,        light;  lev-are,  lev-itas. 

2.  -ilis,  -bxlis,  with  verb-stems,  the  quality  of  the  verb,  or  the 
capacity  of  it,  in  two  senses,  (a)  active  and  (J)  passive. 

[a)  t  e  r  r  i  -  b  1 1  i  s,    exciting  terror ;        t  e  r  r  -  ere,    to  terrify. 
(i)  doc-ilis,  docile;  doc-Sre,      to  teach. 

amab-ilis,      amiable ;  a  m  -  a  r  e,       to  love. 

3.  -ilis  (i  long),  with  noun-stems,  belonging  or  relating  to  a  thing. 

c  i  V  - 1 1  i  s,     belonging  to  a  citizen,  civil ;        c  i  v  -  i  s,    citizen. 
host-ilis,  hostile;  hos-tis,  enemy. 

[Observe  that  ilis,  with  verb-stems,  is  short ;  with  noun-'stems,  long.} 

4.  -alis,  -aris,  withjioun-stems,  of  or  belonging  to. 

conviv-alis,        convivial;  conviv-a. 

capit-alis,  capital;  caput, 

consul-aris,        consular;  consul. 

5.  -e  n  s  i  s,  with  names  of  towns — a  native  of  such  town. 

Cann-ensis,        an  inhabitant  of  Cannae. 
Arimin-ensis,    an  inhabitant  o/"  Ariminum. 


WORD-BUILDIN€,  337 

(793.)  Third  Class,  one  ending. 
-ax,  with  verb-stems,  the  tendency  of  the  verb,  generally  in  a  bad 


pugn-ax,       pugnacious;  pugn-are,        tofigkt. 

rap-ax,  rapacious;  rap-6re,       to  seize, 

(C.)  Verbs. 
(794.)  First  Conjugation. 

1.  -are,  generally  a  transitive  ending,  with  noun-stems. 

numer-are,        to  count ;  numer-us,  number. 

nomin-are,         to  name;  nomen  (nomin-is),      name. 

2.  Frequentative  verbs,  expressing  a  repetition  or  increase  of  the 
action  of  the  original  verb,  are  formed  by  the  endings  -are  and 
-it are  ;  thus  : 

(a)  -are,  added  to  supine-stems, 
c  u  r  s  -  a  r  e,       to  run  to  and  fro ;  currfire  (c  u  r  s  -  u  m),       to  run. 
dormlt-are,  to  be  sleepy ;  dormire  (dormit-um),  to  sleep. 

(J)  -It are,  added  to  verb-stems, 
rog-itare,        to  ask  often;  rog-ftre,        to  ask. 

vol-itare,         to  fly  to  and  fro  ;  vol-are,        to  fly. 

3.  -ftri,  deponent-ending,  with  noun-stems,  is  much  used  for  express- 
ing "  to  be  that  which,  or  of  the  character  that,"  the  noun  indicates. 

»^  .    .    {to  attend  as  com-  \  ,         .^  .  x 

comit-ari,  <  > comes  (comit-is),  com»a7i^on; 

\     panion ;  )  n        i- 

domin-ari,     to  rule  as  master ;  ^.o-min-Tia,  master. 

(795.)  Second  Conjugation. 

-ere,  frequently  an  intransitive  ending,  with  noun  and  adjective  stems. 

alb-ere,        to  be  white;  alb-us,  white. 

luc-ere,        to  shine ;  lux  (luc-is),   light. 

(796.)   Third  Conjugation. 
Inchoative  verbs  express  the  beginning  or  increase  of  the  action  of 
the  verb  from  which  they  are  derived.    They  are  formed  by  adding 
sc  to  the  verb-stem,  with  the  connecting-vowels  a,  e,  or  i.     Most  of 
them  are  formed  on  stems  of  verbs  of  second  conjugation. 

pallesc-6re,        to  grow  pale ;  pall-6re,        to  be  pale. 

labasc-6re,         to  totter ;  lab-are,  toicaver. 

(797.)  Fourth  Conjugation.  * 

Desidbrative  verbs  express  a  desire  of  that  which  is  implied  in  the 
primitive,  and  are  formed  by  adding  -urire  to  supine-stems, 
e  s  •  ii  r I r  e.        to  want  to  eat ;  edSre  (e  s  -u m),      to  eat. 

Ff 


338  WORD-BUILDING 

(ll.)    WORD-BUILDING  BY  PREFIXES. 

(798.)  Under  this  head  we  place  only  the  inseparable  prepositions  (229), 
viz.,  amb-,  dis-  (di-),  re-,  se. 

1.  Arah- =  about,   around,   on  both  sides;  e.  g.,   amb -Ire,   to  go 
round  (amb+ire). 

E^^  Before  js>  the  b  is  dropped;  e.  5-.,  am -p  lector:  before  c-sounds 
amb  is  changed  into  an;  e.  §•.,  an-ceps,  an-quiro. 

2.  Dis  {dil)  =  asunder ;  e.^.,dis-jung6re,  to  disjoin  (dis+jungere), 
^p"  Di  is  used  before  d,  g,  I,  m  ;  e.  g.,  digerere,  &c.     Before/ the 

s  is  assimilated;  e.g.,  differre  (dis+ferre). 

3.  II 6  =  back,  again,  away,  un- ;  e.  g'.,  r  6  p  e  1 1  e  r  e,  drive-back  (re+ 
pellere) ;  r  e  f  i  c  e  r  e,  refit  (re+facere). 

j^*  Before  vowels,  d  is  inserted  ;  e.  g'.,  red-Ire  (re+irey. 
[Be  long  occurs  only  in  r  e  f  e  r  t.] 

4.  S  6  =  {fside  ;  e.  g.,  s  e  d  u  c  §  r  e,  lead  asiragj   seduce  ^s©+dticere)  j 
s €p  o n d r  e,  lay  aside  (se-fponere). 

(ill.)    WORD-BUILDING    BY    COMPOSITION. 

I.  Prepositions  in  Composition  with  other  Words. 
(799.)  %^  Most  prepositions  are  used  to  form  compound  words,  and 
generally  modify  their  meaning  in  a  way  easily  understood ;  e.  g-.,  s  t  ar  e, 
to  stand;  praestare,  to  stand  before,  to  cxcd.    We  notice  here  only 
those  which  present  some  peculiarities. 

1.  a,  ab,  abs  =  atvay,  from,  (a)  a  is  used  before  m  and  v;  e.g., 
a-mittere,  to  send  away,  lose;  a-vertere,  turn  away.  (5)  au  is 
used  before  f err e  andfuggre:  auferre,  aufugfire.  (c)  as,  be- 
fore p  or  s^  ;  asperto,  aspernor. 

2.  ad  =  fo.  (a)  Assimilated  before  consonants,  except  d,j,  v,  m  ;  e.g., 
arripere,  assurggre,  adduc6re,  &c.  (b)  d  dropped  before 
gn  ;  e.  g*.,  agnoscere,  agnatus, 

3.  con  (a  variation  of  cum)  =  with,  (a)  co  before  h  and  vowels  ;  e.  g., 
co-ortus,  co-hibere.  {b)  com  before  b,  p:*  com-bur6re, 
com-pell6re.  (c)  Assimilated  before /,  w,  r  .•  col-lig6re,  com- 
movere,  cor-rip6re. 

4.  e  or  eyi  =  out  of.  {a)  Assimilated  before  /;  e.  g.,  effero  (ex+ 
fero).     {b)  e  before  liquids  and  b,  d,  g,  v. 

5  in,  with  verbs  =  mto,  on,  in,  against ;  with,  adjectives  has  privative 
force;  e.  g.,  doc t us,  learned;  indoctus,  unlearned. 

(a)  Assimilated  before  I,  r,   e.g.,  illatum  (in-f-latum) ;  irrum 
"  '  p8re  (in+rumpere). 

*  And  sometimes  before  vowels  :  comedere. 


WORD-BUILDING.  339 

(b)  Changed  into  im  before  b,  p;  e.g.,  imbibSre   (in+bibere); 
imponere  (in+ponere). 

6.  ob  =  jxgainst ;  e.  g.,  obtrudSre  (ob  +  trudere),  thrust  against. 
5^°  Assimilated  before  c,  f,  p;  e.g.,  oc-cidere  (ob+cadere)  j 
of-ferre,  op-ponere. 

7.  ^ro=  forth,  forward;  e.  g.,  projicSre  (pro+jacere),  cast  forth. 
1^="  Before  vowels,  d  is  inserted ;  e.  g.,  prod-esse  (pro+esse), 

8.  ipr^  — before;  e.  g.,  praecedere  (prse+cedere),  to  go  before,  to 
surpass. 

9.  Bnh=:  under,  from  under;  e.  g.,  snhdac&re,  to  draw  from  under. 
(a)  Genei-ally  assimilated;  e.g.,  suni-;movSre,  snp-ponere,  &c. 
{b)  Sometimes  ans-';  c.  g.,  sns-cipore,  sus-tinere,  &c. 

10.  trans  =  across,  over;  e.  g.,  transducers,  to  lead  across. 
^p°  Tra,  instead  of  trans,  occurs  in  tradere,  traducgre,  trft- 
jic6re. 

(800.)  II.  Adverbs  in  Composition  with  other  Words. 

\.  n§,  v6,  have  a  privative  force  ;,  e.  g.,  nefas,  wicked  (ne+fas) ; 

ve  s  anus,  insane  (ve+sanus). 
8.  ben6,  well;   male,  ill;   satis,  eno^igh;   e.  g.,  beneficium,  a 

good  deed;  malieficium,  an  evil  deed;  satisfacere,  to  satisfy 

(=  to  do  enough). 
3.  bis  (and  other  numerals),  twice  (thrice),  &c. :  bicorpor,  two-bad- 

ied  (bis+corp-us). 

(801.)  III.  Nouns  and  Adjectives  in  Camposition  with  other  Words, 
^^  When  a  noun  or  adjective  is  compounded  with  another  word, 
the  connecting  vowel  is  always  short  i. 

agri-cola  (agr-+col-),        a  husbandman. 
arti-fex     (art-+fac-),        an  artificer. 

(802.)  IV.   Verbs  in  Composition  with  other  Words. 

None  occur,  except  in  composition  with  facere  ;  e.g'.,  calefacere 
(calere+facere),  to  make  hot;   pate  fa  cere  (patere+facere),  to 
lay  open. 
[  ^^  Observe  that  the  vowel  «  in  facere  remains  unchanged.] 
(803.)  V.  Common  Vowel-changes  in  Composition. 

1.  a  into  i;  e.g.,  arripere  (ad+rapere),  conficere  (con+fa 
cere),  constituere  (con+statuere),  &c. 

2.  a  into  e  (more  rarely) ;  e.  g.,  ascendere  (ad+scandere). 

3.  e  into  i  (not  always);   e.  g.,  colligfire  (con+legere),  absti 
nere  (abs  +  tenere),  &c. 

4.  (B  into  i;    e.  g.,  occidQre    (ob+coedere),  r6quir6rQ    (re-h 
quaerere). 


READING  LESSONS. 


I. 

Gallia  est  omnis  divisa^  in  partes  tres. — Belgae  unam  inco- 
lunt  f  Aquitani  alteram ;  Celtae  tertiam. — Hi,  ipsorum*  lingua^ 
Celt  as*  appellantur  ;^  nostra*  lingua,  Galli.* 

Gallia  est  omnis  divisa  in  partes  tres  ;  q  u  a  r  u  m  unam  inco- 
lunt  Belgae,  alteram  Aquitani,  tertiam  qui^  ipsorum  lingua 
Celtae,  nostra  Galli  appellantur. 


Hi  omnes  inter  se  differunt  J — Lingua,  institutis,^  legibus  dif- 
ferunt. — Garumna^  flumen  Gallos  ab  Aquitanis  dividit. — Ma- 
trona  flumen  Gallos  a  Belgis  dividit. — Horum  omnium^"  fortis- 
simi  sunt  Belgae. — Ab  humanitate^^  Provincise  longe  absunt.^^ — 
A  cultu^^  Provinciae  longissime  absunt. — Minime  ad  eos  merca- 
tores^^  commeant. —  Quaedam^^  animos  effeminant.*^ — Qusedam 
ad  efFeminandos  animos  pertinent.^^ 

Hi  omnes  lingua,  institutis,  legibus,  inter  se  difFerunt. — Gallos 
ab  Aquitanis  Garumna  flumen,  a  Belgis  Matrona  e  t  Sequana 
dividit. — Horum  omnium  fortissimi  sunt  Belgae,  propterea 
quod  a  cultu  at  que  humanitate  Provinciae  longissime  ab- 
sunt, minime  q  u  e  ad  eos  mercatores  saepe  commeant,  a  t  q  u  e 
«ea,  quae  ad  efieminandos  animos  pertinent,^^  important.** 


Proximi  sunt  Germanis.^^ — Germani  trans  Rhenum  incolunt. 
— Belgse  cum  Germanis  continenter^^  bellum  gerunt. 

1  435,  c— 3  in-fcolere.— 3  716.— 4  694,  2,  R.—^  ad+pellare  (obsolete), 
799,  2,  a.— 6  167,  d,  4.-7.798,  f^.—^7BQ,  2,  institaere  =  in+statuere, 
803,  1.-9  225,  a.— 10  697,  «.— ^  788,  1  (humanus),  humanitas  =  refinement. 
— 12  ab+sum,  799,  1. — 13  cultas  (civilization),  from  colere  (cult-),  789.— 
14  mercator,  from  mercari  (mercat-),  788,  2,  b. — 1°  Some  things. — 16  effeminare 
(to  make  effeminate),  ex-j-feminare,  799,  4,  a :  feminare,  from  femina  (wom- 
an), 794,  1. — 17  tend  to  make  minds  effeminate,  739. — is  per-|-tenei*e,  803 » 
3. — 19  in-f-portare,  799,  5,  b. — 20  704,  4. — ^21  from  continens  (con-}-tenere) 
215,  2,  b. 

*  Ipsorum  and  nostra  precede  lingui,  instead  of  following  it,  becaose  op 
posed  to  each  other,  and  therefore  emphatic. 


READING    LESSONS.  341 

Proximi  sunt  Germanis,  qui  trans  Rhenura  incolunt,  qui 
b  u  s  c  u  m  23  continenter  bellum  gerunt. 


II. 

Helvetii  quoque^  reliquos^  Gallos  virtute^  praecedunt.^ — Fere 
quotidianis  prseliis  cum  Germanis  contendunt. — Aut^  suis  finibus 
Germanos  prohibent,^  aut  ipsi  in  eorum  finibus  bellum  gerunt. 

Qua''  de  causa^  Helvetii  quoque  reliquos  Gallos  virtute 
prsecedunt,  q  u  o  d  ^  fere  quotidianis  praeliis  cum  Germanis  con- 
tendunt, quum  aut  suis  finibus  eos  prohibent,  aut  ipsi  in  eorum 
finibus  beUum  gerunt. 


Galli  unam  partem  obtanent.^° — Unam  partem  Gallos^ ^  obti- 
nere  dictum  est.^^ — Ea  pars  initium  capit  a  flumine  Rhodano. 
— Continetur  Garumna  flumine,^^  Oceano,^"  finibus^^  Belgarum. 
— Attingit^''  ab  Sequanis  flumen  Rhenum. — Vergit  ad  Septen- 
triones. — Belgse  ab  extremis^^  GaUiae  finibus  oriuntur. — Perti- 
nent^^ ad  inferiorem  partem  fluminis  Rheni.  —  Spectant*  in 
Septentriones  et  orientem^''  solem. 

Eorum  una  pars,  q  u  a  m  ^^  Gallos  obtinere  dictum  est,  ini- 
tium capit  a  flumine  Rhodano ;  continetur^^  Garumna  flumine, 
Oceano,  finibus  Belgarum ;  attingit  etiam  ab^o  Sequanis  et 
Helvetiis  flumen  JRhenum ;  vergit  ad  Septentriones.  —  Belgae 
ab  extremis  Gallise  finibus  oriuntur ;  pertinent  ad  inferiorem 
partem  fluminis  Rheni;  spectant  in  Septentriones  et  orientem 
solem. 


Aquitania  a  Garumna  flumine  ad  Pyrengeos  montes  pertinet. 
— Una  pars  Oceani  est  ad^o  Hispaniam.  —  Aquitania  ad  eam 

22  125,  IL,  h. 

1  duo  que  never  begins  a  sentence.— 2  from  relinquere  (reliqu-),  791, 1. 
--3  718,  in  valour.—'*^  799,  8.-5  519,  R.  4.-6  721.— 7  89,  II.— 8  aua  de  cau- 
sa =/or  which  reason. — 9  because. — ^o  ob-f-tenere,  803,  3. — n  751. — 12  751^ 
R.  2.— 13  716.— 14  ad-ftangere,  799,  2,  a,  803,  1.— 15  78,  IL,  Z>.— 16  Pertinent 
-=  they  extend,  per+tenere. — i^  438,  a. — is  759. — 19  is  bounded. — 20  on  the 
side  of,  or  near. 

*  Spectant  in  Septentriones,  &c. :  they  look  into  the  north  and  the  rising  grtn^ 
I.  e.,  Oiaj  lie  in  a  N.E.  direction. 

F  r2 


842  READING    LESSONS. 

partem  Oceani,  quae  est  ad  Hispauiam,  pertinet.—  Spectat  inter 
occasum^^  solis  et  Septentiiones. 

Aquitania  a  Garumna  flumine  ad  Pyrenaeos  montes,  e  t  e  a  m 
partem  Oceani,  q  u  se  est  ad  Hispaniam,  pertinet ;  spectat*  in- 
ter occasmn  solis  et  Septentriones. 


III. 

Orgetorix  nobilis  fuit.  —  Apud  Helvetios  nobUissimus  fmt 
Orgetorix. — Apud  Helvetios  longe  ditissimus^  fuit  Orgetorix. — 
Is  regni  cupiditate^  inductus  conjurationem^  nobilitatis^  fecit. — 
Is  civitati^  persuadet,  ut  de  finibus  suis  exeant.^ — De  finibus  suis 
exeunt. — Perfacile  erat  totius  Gallias  imperio'^  potiri. — Perfacilo 
esse^  (dixit),  quum  virtute  omnibus  prsestarent,^  totius  Gallise 
imperio  potiri. 

Apud  Helvetios  longe  nobilissimus  et  ditissimus  fuit  Orget- 
orix.—  Is,  Marco  Messala  et  Marco  Pisone  consul- 
ibus,^°  regni  cupiditate  inductus,  conjurationem  nobilitatis  fecit; 
et  civitati  persuasit,  ut  de  finibus  suis  cum  omnibus  copiis 
exirent:^^  perfacile  esse  (dixit),  quum  vhtute  omnibus  prsBS- 
tai-ent,  totius  Galliee  imperio  potiri. 


Id  facile  eis  persuadet.^^ — j^  Jjqc  facilius  eis  persuasit — Un- 
dique  natura  loci^^  Helvetii  continentur. — Una  ex  parte  conti- 
nentur  flumine  Rheno  latissimo  atque  altissimo.  —  Altera  ex 
parte  continentur  monte  Jura  altissimo ;  tertia  ex  parte  lacu 
Lemanno  et  flumine  Rhodano. — Flumen  Rhenus  agrum  Hel- 
vetium  a  Germanis  dividit. — Mens  Jura  est  inter  Sequanos  et 
Helvetios. — Flumen  Rhodanus  provinciam  nostram  ab  Helve- 

tiis  dividit. 

• 1 — 

21  789,  from  occidere,  ob+cadere. 

1  371,  R.  1.— 2  from  cupid-us,  by  788, 1.— 3  788,  3,  con+jurare.— *  788, 1. 

— 5  704,  2:  he  persuades  the  state;  i.  e.,  the  citizens. — ^  ut  exeant  =  2;o  go 

out  of:  subj.  pres.,  754  (ex+ire).— ''  abl.,  718. — ^  The  sentence  peifacile 

esse,  &c.,  is  in  orat.  obliqua;  769,  a,  applies.— 9  799,  8. — 1°  458,  6.— ^  Why 

is  exirent  in  subj.  imperf.  ?  748. — 12  guadere,  to  recommend ;  persuadere, 

recommeyid  thoroughly,  i.  e.,  persuade. — ^^  by  the  nature  of  the  country. 

*  It  looks  between  the  setting  of  the  sun  and  the  north ;  i,  e.,  in  a  N.W.  directimi 


READING    LESSONS.  343 

.1*  Id  hoc  fiicilius  eis  peisuadet,  quod  undique  loci  natura  Hel- 
retii  continentm- ;  una  ex  parte,  flumine  Rheno  latissimo  atque 
ftltissimo,  q  u  i  agi-um  Helvetium  a  Germanis  dividit ;  altera  ex 
parte,  monte  Jura  altissimo,  qui  est  inter  Sequanos  et  Helve- 
tios;  tertia,  lacu  Lemanno  et  flumine  Rhodano,  qui  provin- 
ciam  nostram  ab  Helvetiis  dividit. 


Minus  late  vagantur. — His  rebus  fit,^*  ut  minus  late  vagen- 
tur.15 — ^Bellum  inferunt.^^ — Bellum  inferred''  possunt. — Minus 
facile  bellum  finitimis^^  inferre  possunt.— His  rebus  fit,  ut  minus 
facile  bellum  finitimis  infen-e  possent. — Magno  dolore  afficie- 
bautur.^^ — BellandJ^o  erant  cupidi.^^ 

His  rebus  fiebat,  ut  e  t  minus  late  vagarentur,'  e  t  minus 
facile  finitimis  bellum  inferre  possint. — Qua  de  causa,  homines 
bellandi  cupidi  magno  dolore  afficiebantur. 


IV. 

Pro^  multitudine^  hominum,  angustos  habebant  fines. — Pro 
gloria^  belli  atque  fortitudinis,^  angustos  habebant  fines. — An- 
gustos se*  fines  habere  arbitrabantur.^ — Hi  (i.  c,  fines)  millia 
passuum  ducenta  (CC)  patebant.^ — Hi  in  longitudinem^  millia'' 
passuum  ducenta  et  quadraginta  (XL.)  patebant. 

Pro  multitudine  autem^  hominum,  et  pro  gloria  belli 
atque  fortitudinis,  angustos  se  fines  habere  arbitrabantur,  qui 
in  longitudinem  millia  passuum  CCXL.,  in  latitudinem 
centum  et  octo^ta  (CLXXX.)  patebant. 


Ducti  sunt. — Adducti^  sunt. — Moti  sunt. — Permoti^"  g^nt. — 
Auctoritate^^  Orgetorigis  adducti  et  permoti  sunt. — Qusedam  ad 
proficiscendum^2  pertinent. — Constituerunt^^  ea  comparare.^^ — 
Constituerunt  jumenta  et  cari-os  emere.^^ — Constituerunt  se- 

1*  By  these  circumstances  it  is  brought  about. — ^^  754^  2. — 16  in+ferre. — 
17  731.— 18  704,  3.— 19  ad+facere,  799,  2 ;  803,  1.— 20  736.^21  cnpere,  791,  2. 

1  For,  or,  in  view  of. — 2  mult-us,  788,  4. — 3  reputation  for  war  and  cour- 
age.—* 471.— 5  from  arbit-er,  by  794,  3.-6  extended— ^  712.— 8  522,  b.— 
9  Ducti  stint=^^e;y  were  led:  adducti  isunt=i;^^  were  led  to,  i.  e.,  they 
were  induced. — 1°  Moti  sunt  =  tfiey  were  moved :  permoti  sunt  =  they  were 
thoroughly  moved,  i.  e.,  prevailed  upon. — n  788, 1. — ^^  487. — 13  con-j-stata- 
ere,  803, 1.— i^  con+parare,  799,  3,  6.— is  731. 


344  READING    LESSONS. 

mentes  magnas  faceie,^^  ^^  in  itinere  copia  trumenti  suppet- 
eret.^'' — Cum  proximis  civitatibus  pacem  et  amicitiam^*  con- 
firmant. 

His  rebus  adducti,  e  t  auctoritate  Orgetorigis  permoti, 
constituerunt,  ea,  q  u  ae  ^^  ad  proficiscendum  pertinerent,  com- 
parare ;  j umentonim  et  carrorum  quam  maximum  nu- 
m e r  u m 2"  coemere  ;2'  sementes  quam  maximas^^  facere,  ut 
in  itinere  copia  frumenti  suppeteret ;  cum  proximis  civitatibus 
pacem  et  amicitiam  confirmare. 

Biennium  Helvetiis^^  satis  erat. — Biennium  sibi^^  Helvetii  satis 
esse  duxerunt.^ — Ad  eas  res  conficiendas^^  biennium  satis  erat. 
— Profectionem'^s  jgge  confirmant.^^ — In  tertium  annum  profec- 
tionem  lege  confirmant.  —  Ad  eas  res  conficiendas*^  Orgetorix 
deligitm'.28 — Is  sibi  legationem^^  suscepit.^^ — In  eo  itinere  per- 
suadet  Castico. — Casticus  Catamantaledis  erat  filius,  Sequanus. 
— Pater  Castici  regnum  in  Sequanis  multos  annos^°  obtinuerat. 
— Pater  Castici  a  senatu  populi  Romani  amicus  appellatus  erat. 
— Orgetorix  Castico  persuadet,  ut  regnum  in  civitate  sua  occu- 
paret.3^ 

Ad  eas  res  conficiendas  biennium  sibi  satis  esse  duxerunt; 
in  tertium  annum  profectionem  lege  confirmant.  Ad  eas  res 
conficiendas  Orgetorix  deligitur.  Is  sibi  legationem  ad  civi- 
tates  suscepit.  In  eo  itinere  persuadet  Csistico,  Catamantale- 
cis  filio,  Sequano,  cujus  pater  regnum  in  Sequanis  multos 
annos  obtinuerat,  eta  senatu  populi  Romani  amicus  appellatus 
erat,  ut  regnum  in  civitate  sua  occuparet,  q  u  o  d  ^^  pater  ante 
habuerat. 


V. 
Item   Dumnorigi  persuadet.  —  Dumnorix  erat  iEduus. — 
Dumnorix  erat  frater  Divitiaci.  —  Dumnorix  principatum^  in 

16  to  make  great  sowings,  i.  e.,  to  sow  much  land. — i''  Sub+petere,  799, 
9,  a,  neuter;  suppeteret =w«g'/ii  be  in  store:  subjunc.  by  754, 1. — is  735,  2. 
— 19  759,  Rem. — ^20  j^g  great  a  number  as  possible. — 21  con+emere,  to  buy 
together,  to  buy  up,  799,  3. — 22  ^5  great  sowings  as  possible. — 23  704.- 
2*  reckoned.—^  498,  d.—'^^  788,  3.-27  Tliey  fix  the  depaHure  by  a  law 
«  de+legere,  803,  3.-29  799,  9,  Z>.— 3°  712.— 3l  754.-32  759. 

1  chief  power,  from  princeps. 


READING    LESSONS.  345 

civitate  obtinebat.  —  Dumnorix  plebi*  acceptus'  erat.  —  Dum- 
norigi,  ut  idem  conaretur  persuadet,*  eique  filiam  suam  in 
matrimonium  dat. 

Item  que  Dumnorigi  ^duo,  fratri  Divitiaci,  qui  eo  tern- 
pore''  priocipatum  in  civitate  obtinebat,  ac  maxime^  plebi  ac 
ceptus  erat,  ut  idem  conaretur  persuadet,  eique  filiam  suam  in 
matrimonium  dat. 


Perfaci]e  factu^  erat  conata  perficere.''' — Ipse  suae  civitatis 
imperium  obtenturus  erat. — Totius^  GalliaB  plurimum  Helvetii 
possunt. — Non  est  dubium  quin  plurimum  Helvetii  possint.9 — 
Ipse  illis  regnum  conciliaturus'°  erat. — Ipse,  suis  copiis  suoque 
exercitu,  illis  regnum  conciliatm-us  erat. 

{Oblique  Narration,  769.)  "  Perfacile  factu  esse,"  illis 
pro  bat,  "conata  perficere,  propterea  quod  ipse  suae 
civitatis  imperium  obtenturus  esset ;  non  esse  dubium,  quin 
totius  Gallise  plurimum  Helvetii  possent;"  "  Se,  suis  copiis 
suoque  exercitu,  illis  regna  conciliaturum,"  confirm  at. 

Helvetii  jam^^  se^^  ad  eam  rem  paratos  esse  arbitrantur. — 
Oppida  sua  omnia,  numero  ad  duodecim,^^  incendunt. — Vices 
sues  ad  quadringentos  incendunt. — Reliqua^^  privata  eedificia^* 
incendunt. — Frumentum  secum  portaturi  erant. — Frumentum 
omne  comburunt.  —  Domum^^  reditionis^''  spes  sublata^^  est. — 
Paratiores  ad  omnia  pericula  subeunda^^  erant. 

U  b  i  20  jam  se  ad  eam  rem  paratos  esse  arbitrati  sunt,  oppida 
sua  omnia,  numero  ad  duodecim,  vices  ad  quadringentos,  reliqua 
privata  gedificia  incendunt ;  frumentum  omne,  praeter  quod 
secum  portaturi  erant,  comburunt,  ut,  domum  reditionis  spe^^ 
sublata,^^  paratiores  ad  omnia  pericula  subeunda  e  s  s  e  n  t.^^ 

2  702,  was  acceptable  to  the  common  people  (a  favourite). — 3  ad+capere, 
803,  1.— 4  725.-5  376.-6  330.  It  was  a  very  easy  thing  to  do.—''  to  ac- 
complish, per  +  facere,  803,  1. — 8  Qf  the  whole  of  Gaul,  the  Helvetians 
are  the  most  powerful. — "^  754,  4. — 10  446. — ^  ^axa  =  at  last.—i-^  751. — 13  in 
number  (amounting)  to  twelve.  —  i*  relinquere. — i'"'  801,  cedes  +  facere.—^ 
16  713,  Rem.  2.-17  738,  3.  — is  toll  ere.  —  i^  sub+ire,  gerundive,  739.— 
20  when.-^^  750.— 22  754, 


*  Csesar  often  uses  the  historical  present,  as  in  this  instance,  instead  of  the  per- 
fect aorist.  If  persuadet, were  used  really  as  the  present,  then  conaretur 
would  have  to  he  conetur,  hy  748;  but,  as  the  historical  present,  it  requires  a 
past  tense  in  the  subordinate  sentence. 


346  READING    LESSONS. 


VI. 

Omnes  res  ad  profectionem  comparant — Diem  dicunt^  qua 
die  omnes  conveniant.^ — Is  dies  erat  ante  diem  quintmn  Kalen- 
das^  Aprilis,  Lucio  Pisone,  Aulo  Gabinio  consulibus. — Is  dies 
erat  a.  d.  V.  Kal.  Apr.,  L.  Pisone,  A.  Gabinio  Coss. 

Omnibus  rebus^  ad  profectionem  comparatis,  diem  dicunt, 
qua  die  ad  ripam  RHodani  omnes  conveniant :  is  dies  erat 
ante  diem  quintum  Kalendas  Aprilis,  Lucio  Pisone,  Aulo  Gabi- 
nio Consulibus. 


Helvetii  per  provinciam  nostram  itei-^  facere  conautur. — Id 
Csesari  nuntiatum  erat.— Csesari  nuntiatum  erat,  eos  per  pro- 
vinciam nostram  iter  facere^  conari.'^ — Maturat  ab  urbe  profi- 
cisci,^  et  magnis  itineribus  in  Galliam  contendit,  et  ad  Genevam 
pervenit.  —  De  ejus  adventu^  Helvetii  certiores  facti  sunt. — 
Legates  ad  eum  mittimt. — Helvetiis  est  in  animo^  sine  ullo 
maleficio^^  iter  per  provinciam  facere  ;  aliud  iter  habent  nuilura  ; 
Togant,  ut,  Caesaris  voluntate,  id  facere  liceat.^^ 

Csesari  q  u  u  m  id  nuntiatum  esset,^^  eos  per  provinciam 
nostram  iter  facere  conari,''^  maturat  ab  urbe  proficisci,  et  q  u  a  m 
m  a  X  i  m  i  s  potest  itineribus,  in  Galliam  u  1 1  e  r  i  o  r  e  m  con- 
tendit, et  ad  Genevam  pervenit.  Ubi  de  ejus  adventu  Hel- 
vetii certiores  facti  sunt,  legates  ad  eum  mittunt,"  qui  d  i  c  e  - 
rent,^*  '■'■  sihi^'"  esse  in  animo  sine  ullo  maleficio  iter  per  provin- 
ciam facere,,  propterea  quod  aliud  iter  haheant  nullum ; 
rogare,  ut  ejus  voluntate  id  sibi  facere  liceat.^^ 


Lucius  Cassius,  consul,  ab  Helvetiis  occisus  erat. — Exer- 
citus^e  <:;assii  ab  Helvetiis  pulsus^''  erat,  et  sub  jugum  missus. — • 
Ea  Caesar  memoria^^  tenebat. — Concedendum^^  non  putabat. — 
Facultas™  per  provinciam  itineris  faciendi^^   non  data   est. — 

1  Tliei/  appoint. — 2  con+venire ;  subj.  pres.,  766. — 3  78-2,  5. — ^^  750. — &  iter 
ia.cere=-to  make  journey  •=■  to  march. — ^  731. — ''  751. — »  advenire  (advent-), 
789.-^  468,  *.— 10  800,  2.— n  754.— 12  757,  A.  2.— 13  historical  present. 
— '4  761*  1. — 15  oblique  narration. — 16  exercere,  789. — ^^  pellere. — ^^  me- 
moria  tenebat,  held  in  mevioi-y,  i.  e.,  rememhered. — ^9  737  (esse  understood, 
504,  a). — ^20  power  of  marchirig  thronc;li,  or  permission  to  march  through 
facultas,  788,  1,  from  facil-is,  facio.— 21  496. 


READING    LESSONS.  347 

Homines    inimico^^    animo  ab   injuria  et   maleficio   non   tem- 
perant. 

Csesar,  quod  memoria  tenebat,  L.  Cassium  consulem  occi- 
5um,  exercituraque  ejus  ab  Helvetiis  pulsum  et  sub  jugum 
missum,  concedendum  non  putabat;  neque,2=^  homines  inim- 
ico  animo,  data  facultate  per  provinciam  itineris  faciendi,  tem- 
peratures ab  injuria^*  et  maleficio,  existimabat. 


VII. 


Hujus  legationis  Divico  princeps  fuit. — Divico,  bello  Cassi- 
ano,^  dux  Helvetiorum  fuerat.— Is  ita  cum  Csesare  egit.^^ — Hel- 
vetii  in  earn  partem  ibunt,  atque  ibi  erunt,  ubi  Caesar  constitu- 
etrit.^ — Caesar  veteris  incommodi*  reminiscitur.^ — Caesar  pristinae 
virtutis*^  Helvetiorum  reminiscitur. 

{Oblique  Narration,  present  time.'')  Is  ita  cum  Caesare 
a  git:  '■'■  Si  pacem  populus  Romanus  cum  Helvetiis  facial,^ 
in  earn  partem  ituros^  atque  ihi  futures^  Helvetios,  uhi  eos 
Ccesar  constituerit  atque  esse  voluerit ;  sin  hello  per- 
sequi  persevere i,^°  r eminisca'tur'^^  et  veteris  incommodi 
populi  Romani  et pristinee  virtutis  Helvetiorum. 

Hujus  legationis  Divico  princeps  fuit,  qui  bello  Cassiano  dux 
Helvetiorum  fuerat.  Is  ita  cum  Caesare  egit  (obi.  nwcv.,  past 
time) :  "  Si  pacem  populus  Romanus  cum  Helvetiis  fa  ceret^ 
in  earn  partem  ituros,  atque  ibifuturos  Helvetios,  uhi  Ccesar  eos 
constituisset  atque  esse  voluisset ;  sin  hello  persequi 
per  s  ever  ar  et,  reminisc  eretur  et  veteris  incommodi 
populi  Romani  et  pristinee  virtutis  Helvetiorum.^'' 


23  722. — ssneque  existimabat  =  wor  did  he  think. — 24  outrage. 

1  In  the  Cassian  war,  i.  e.,  in  which  Cassius  had  been  the  Roman  gen- 
eral.— 2  Hq  treated  with  Ccesar  as  foUotos. — ^  803,  1 ;  subj.  by  766. — 4  in, 
conomodum,  disaster,  in+commodus,  799,  5 ;  con+modiis,  799,  3,  c ;  geni- 
tive by  698,  a,  2. — ^  re+miniscor,  stem  of  memini,  meno. — 6  vir,  gen.,  698, 
a,  2. — 7  Observe  carefully  the  tenses  in  this  and  the  following  paragraph. 
— *  If  the  Roman  people  will  mahe  peace.— ^  484,  a. — lo  542^  6.— if  -528  b 


348 


READING    LESSOIVS. 


His  Ceesar  ila^^  respondet. — Csesari  nihil  dubitationis^^  datur.** 
— Legati  Helvetii  quasdam  res  commemoraverunt.^^ — Eas  res 
Caesar  in  raemoiia  tenet.^^  —  -^qU  Caesari  minus  dubitationis 
datur,  quod  eas  res,  quas  legati  Helvetii  commemoraverunt,  in 
memoria  tenet.— Eas  res  graviter^^  fert.^^ — Eae  res  non  merito^ 
popuH  Romani  acciderunt.^^ — Eas  res  graviter  fert,  quod  non 
merito  populi  Romani  acciderunt.  —  Eo^^  gravius  fert,  quo^ 
minus  merito  Populi  Romani  acciderunt. 

His  Caesar  ita  respond  et^^  {oblique  narration,  present 
time) :  '■'■  Eo  sibi  minus  dubitationis  dari,  qv^d  eas  res,  quas 
legati  Helvetii  commemoraverint,  memoria  teneat : 
atque  eo  gravius  ferre,  quo  minus  merito  populi  Romani 
acciderint." 

His  Caesar  ita  respondit  {oblique  narration,  past  time)  : 
*^ Eo  sibi  minv£  dubitationis  dari,  quod  eas  res,  quas  legati 
Helvetii  commemorassent,  memoria  teneret :  atque  eo 
gravius  ferre,  quo  minus  merito  populi  Romani  acci- 
dissent.^* 


vni. 


Helvetii  postSro  die^  castra  ex  eo  loco  movent. — Idem^  Caesar 
facit. — Quas  in  partes^  hostes  iter  faciunt  1^ — ^Equitatum^  omnem 
praemittit.^ — Hi  videbunt,  quas  in  partes  hostes  iter  faciant.'^ — 
Equitatus  ex  omni  Provincia  et  ^duis  atque  eorum  sociis  coac- 
tus^  erat.  —  Hunc  equitatum  praemittit,  qui  videant,^  quas  in 
partes  hostes  iter  faciant.''' — Hi  cupidius^"  novissimum^^  agmen 
insequuntur.^^ — Cum  equitatu  Helvetiorum  prcelium  commit- 

13  as  follows. — ^3  788,  3,  dubitare  (dubitat-). — ^^  To  Ccesar  noiking  of 
doubt  is  given  =C<Bsar  has  no  doubt.  —  i^  con  +  memorare  (memor). — 
16  holds  in  memory,  i.  e.,  remembers. — ''''  On  this  account  Ceesar  has  less 
doubt,  because. — '^  215,  2,  a. — 19  ferre  graviter  =^o  bear  heavily,  to  be  in- 
dignant at.—'^  73  6.— 21  accadere  =  ad+cadere,  803,  1,  to  happen.— ^"^  By 
so  much. — 23  l,y  how  much. — ^24  Observe  the  moods  and  tenses  carefully  in 
this  and  the  following  paragraph  of  oblique  narration. 

1  725.-2  150.— 3  Into  what  parts  (of  the  country)  ?— •*  765.-5  Equitare 
(equitat-),  789. — 6  795,  8. — ^  766. — »  fiad  been  collected;  cogere  =  con+ag- 
ere.— 9  who  may  see,  i.  e.,  to  see,  761, 1.— 10  too  eagerly,  adv.,  376.— n  novis- 
simum  agmen  =  the  7iewest  rank,  i.  e.,  the  rear  rank. — 12  in+sequi 


READING    LESSONS.  &«d 

tunt.  —  Alieno^3  Iqco  proelium  committunt. — Pauci  de  nostris 
eadimt. 

Postero  die  castra  ex  eo  loco  movent:  idem  Caesar  facit; 
equitatumque  omnem  ad  numerum  quattuormillium, 
quern  ex  omni  provincia  et  ^Eduis  atque  eorum  sociis  coactum 
h  a  b  e  b  a  t,  praemittit,  qui  videant  quas  in  partes  hostes  iter  faci- 
ant. — Qui,  cupidius  novissimum  agmen  insecuti,^^  alieno  loco 
cum  equitatu  Helvetiorum  proelium  committunt,  et  pauci  de 
nostris  cadunt. 


Hoc  proelio  sublati^^  sunt  Helvetii.  —  Quingentis  equitibus 
tantam  multitudinem  equltum  propulerant.^^ — Audacius^''  sub- 
sistere^^  coeperunt. — Nonnunquam^^  et^  proelio^^  nostros  laces- 
sere  coeperunt.  • — Caesar  sues  a  proelio  continebat.^^  —  Hostem 
rapinis,^  pabulationibusque  prohibere^^  volebat.  —  Hoc  satis 
habebat  in  praesentia.^ 

Quo  proelio  sublati  Helvetii,  quod  quingentis  equitibus 
tantam  multitudinem  equitum  propulerant,  audacius  subsistere, 
nonnunquam  et  novissimo  agniine  proelio  nostros  lacessere  coep- 
erunt.— Caesar  sues  a  proelio  continebat,  ac  satis  habebat  in 
praesentia  hostem  rapinis  pabulationibusque^^  prohibere. 


IX. 

Multa^  antehac  tacuSrat^  Liscus.  —  Haec  oratione^  Caesaris 
adductus  proponit^.  —  Sunt  nonnulli,*  quorum  auctoritas  apud 
plebem  plurimum^  valet. — Hi  privatim"^  plus  possunt^  quam  ipsi 

13  In  a  place  not  their  own,  i.  e.,  on  disadvantageous  ground. — i*  451,  c. — 
15  sub-f-latus,  irreg.  perf.  of  tollere :  the  Helvetians  were  elated. — 16  tJi^y  Jiad 
driven  off,  pro-Hpellere. — "  376. — is  to  halt,  sub-f-sistere  ;  inf.,  731.— 19  non 
+nunquam,  not  never,  i.  e.,  sometimes. — ^20  also. — 21  ly  an  assault. — 22  to 
hold  together,  i.  e.,  to  restrain. — 23  721^  from  plunder  and  from  foraging 
parties. — ^24  pro+liabere. — 25  ace.  pi.  of  praesens ;  in  prsesentia  (tempora), 
for  the  present. — ^26  517^  a. 

1  Many  things,  before  this,  Liscus  had  kept  secret. — 2  tacgre,  intrans  = 
to  he  silent ;  trans  =  to  keep  secret. — ^  788,  3,  orare  (orat). — ^  pro+ponere, 
to  set  before,  to  relate. — ^  nonH-nullus,  not  none,  i.  e.,  some. — 6  plarimum 
valet  =  avails  very  much  (has  very  great  weight). — 7  215,  3. — >8  pj^g  pog, 
Bunt  =  can  more,  i.  e.,  Itave  mxjre  power. 

Gg 


350  READING    LESSONS. 

magistratus.9— Hi  seditiosa^o  atque  improbaV^  oratione  multitu- 
dinem  deterrent.^- — Frumentum  non  conferunt.^^^ — Hi  multitu- 
dinem  deterrent,  ne  frumentum  conferant,^^ — Ipsi  quidem  prin- 
cipatum  Gallige  obtinere  non  possunt.  —  Satius^^  est  Galiorum 
quam  Romanorum  imperia  perfen-e.^^ 

Si  Helvetios  superaverint^''  Romani,  una^^  cum  reliqua  Gallia 
^duis  libertatem  eripient.^^ — Dubitare  non  debent,  quin  Roma- 
ni ^duis  libertatem  sint  erepturi.^o — Satius  est  si  jam  principa- 
tum  Galliae  obtinere  non  possint,  Galiorum  quam  Romanorum 
imperia  perferre. 

Tum  demum  Liscus,^^  oratione  Caesaiis  adductus,  quod  antea 
tacuerat  proponit. — {Oratio  obliqua) :  "Esse  nonnuUos,  quorum 
auctoritas  apud  plebem  plurimum  valeat;  qui  privatim  plus 
possint  quam  ipsi  magistratus ;  hos  seditiosa  atque  improba 
oratione  multitudinem  deterrere,  ne  frumentum  conferant, 
quod  prsestare  debeant.  Si  jam  principatum  Galliae  obtinere 
non  possint,  Galiorum  quam  Romanorum  imperia  perferre 
satius  esse,  neque  dubitai-e  debere,  quin  si  Helvetios  super- 
averint  Romani,  una  cum  reliqua  Gallia  iEduis  libertatem  sint 
erepturi." 


X. 

Hac  oratione  Lisci,  Dumnorix,  Divitiaci  frater,  designabatur.^ 
— Id  Ceesar  sentiebat.^ — Pluribus  prsesentibus^  eas  res  jactari* 
nolebat.  —  Celeriter'^  concilium  dimittit  ;  Liscum  retinet.  — 
QuBerit,^  ex  solo,^  ea  quge  in  conventu^  dixerat. — Dicit  liberius^ 
atque  audacius.^ — Eadem  secret©^"  ab  aliis  quserit. — Reperit^^ 
esse  vera. 

9  The  magistrates  themselves.— ^^^  791,  9  (seditio).— ii  in+probus,  799, 5.— 
13  de+terrere.— 13  con+ferre,  contribute. — '■*  ne  conferant,  that  they  may 
not  contribute,  i.  e.,  deter  \!a.Qxa.from  contributing,  548,  b. — i^  Satius,  com- 
-par.  of  satis,  376:   it  is  better. — i^  per  +  ferre,  to  endure. — ^''  542,  b,  2. — 

18  they  will  wrest  liberty  from  the  ^duans,  together  with  the  rest  of  Gaul. — 

19  e+rapere,  803, 1.— 20  754,  4.— 21  Then,  finally  (then,  and  not  till  then). 

1  was  alluded  to,  de+signare. — ^  was  aware  of. — 3  750,  many  being 
present,  i,  e.,  in  the  presence  of  many. — "*  794^  2,  a;  from  j  acio  (jact-) : 
iactare  =  to  toss  to  and  fro;  hence,  to  discuss. — ^  215,  2. — ^  He  inquires 
into. — ■'  ex  solo  =^  of  him  alone. — 8  789. — 9  376. — ^^  privately. — 11  He  finds 
(the  siaienentsj  are  true. 


i 


HEADING    LESSONS.  351 

Ipse  est  Dumnorix/^  summa  audacia/^  magna  apud  plebem 
propter  liberalitatem  gratia/'^  cupidus  rerum^'^  novarum. — Com- 
plures  aiinos^^  portoria^^  reliquaque  omnia  ^duorum  vectigalia 
habet.— Hsec  vectigalia  parvo  pretio^^  redemta  sunt.^^ — Vecti- 
galia-o  parvo  pretio  redemta  habet,  propterea  quod,  illo^i  licente,*^ 
contra  liceri^  audet  nemo.  —  His  rebus  suam  rem  familiarem 
auxit. — His  rebus  facultates^*  ad  largiendum^^  magnas  compar- 
avit. — Magnum  numerum  equitatus  suo  sumptn^*^  semper  alit. — 
Magnum  numerum  equitatus  semper  circum  se  habet. — Non 
solum  domi,^'^  sed  etiam  apud  finitimas  civitates  largiter^  potest. 

Caesar  hac  oratione  Lisci  Dumnorigem,  Divitiaci  fratrem, 
designari  sentiebat  :  sed,  quod  pluribus  praesentibus  eas  res 
jactari  nolebat,  celeriter  concilium  dimittit,  Liscum  retinet : 
quaerit,  ex  solo,  ea  quae  in  conventu  dixerat.  Dicit  liberius 
atque  audacius.  Eadem  secreto  ab  aliis  quaerit;  reperit  esse 
vera :  "  Ipsum  esse  Dumnorigem,  summa  audacia,  magna  apud 
plebem  propter  liberalitatem  gratia,  cupidujn  rerum  novarum  : 
complures  annos  portoria  reliquaque  omnia  iEduorum  vectigalia 
parvo  pretio  redemta  habere,  propterea  quod  illo  licente  contra 
liceri  audeat  nemo.  His  rebus  e  t  suam  rem  familiarem  aux- 
isse,  et  facultates  ad  largiendum  magnas  comparasse  :  magnum 
numerum  equitatus  suo  sumtu  semper  alere  et  circum  se 
habere :  n  e  q  u  e  solum  domi,  sed  etiam  apud  finitimas  civitates 
iargiter  posse." 


XL 

Ad  has  suspiciones  certissimse  res^  accedebant. — Dumnorix 
per  fines  Sequanorum  Helvetios  trans duxerat.^ — Obsides  inter 
eos  dandos^  curaverat. — Ea  omnia  jussu*  Csesaris  fecerat. — Ea 

12  Dumnorix  is  the  very  person,  (a  man)  of  the  highest  audacity,  Sec. — 
13  722.— 14  influence.— ^^  698,  i.— 16  712.— i^  transit  duties,  custom  duties. 
— 18  719.  — 19  were  contracted  for.  —  so  vectigalia  .  .  .  habet,  he  holds  the 
taxes  contracted  for  at  a  low  price;  i.  e.,  holds  them  under  a  very  favour-' 
able  contract. — 21  455,  a,  tohen  he  bids. — ^22  Hceor,  liceri,  to  bid. — 2.3  731. 
— ^24  Means  for  making  largesses. — 25  489.-26  gao  sumpta,  at  his  own 
expense.  Samptus,  789,  from  sumere. — 27  736^  ^.^  ^t  home. — 28  Iargiter 
potest,  he  can  largely,  i.  e.,  he  has  extensive  paioer. 

1  certissimae  res  =  most  certain  for  undoubted)  facts. — accedebant  = 
were  added ;  ad+cedere,  intransitive.^ — "^  trans-f-ducere. — ^  504,  a. — ^  789 ; 
from  jubere  ( juss-) :  by  the  command,  716. 


362  READING    LESSONS. 

omnia  injussu^  Caesaris  et^  civitatis  fecerat. — Ea  omnia  inscien- 
tibus  ipsis'^  fecerat. — Ea  omnia  non  mo  do  injussu  Caesaris  et 
civitatis,  sed  e  tiam^inscientibus  ipsis  fecerat. — A  magistratu^ 
^duorum  accusabatur. — Satis  est  caussae,^  quare  in  eum  ani- 
madvertat.^o — Satis  est  caussas,  quare  in  eum  civitatem  animad- 
vertere  jubeat. — Satis  erat  caussse,  quare  in  eum  aut  ipse  ani- 
raadverteret,  aut  civitatem  animadvertere  juberet. — Satis  esse^^ 
caussae  arbitrabatur. 

Quibus  rebus  cogniti s/^  q u u m ^^  ad  has  suspiciones 
certissiraae  res  accederent — quod  per  fines  Sequanorum  Hel- 
vetios  transduxisset^"* — q  u  o  d  obsides  inter  eos  dandos  curasset 
— quod  ea  omnia  non  modo  injussu  suo  et  civitatis,  sed  etiam 
inscientibus  ipsis,  fecisset — q  u  o  d  a  magistratu  jEduorum  accu- 
saretur;  satis  esse  caussae  arbitrabatur,  quare  in  eum  aut  ipse 
animadverteret,  aut  civitatem  animadvertere  juberet. 


His  omnibus  rebus^^  unum  repugnabat.'^s — Divitiaci  fratris^' 
summum  in  populum  Romanum  studium^*'  cognoverat  Caesar. 
— Divitiaci  summam  in  se  voluntatem  cognoverat. — Divitiaci 
egregiam  fidem,  justitiam,^^  temperantiam,i^  cognoverat. — Dum- 
norigis  supplicio^"  Divitiaci  animum  oflfendet.  —  Ne^^  Divitiaci 
aniraum  ofFendat,  veretur.^ — Ne^^  Divitiaci  animum  offenderet, 
verebatur. 

His  omnibus  rebus  unum  repugnabat,  quod  Divitiaci  fratris 
summum  in  populum  Romanum  studium,  summam  in  se  vol- 
untatem, egregiam  fidem,  justitiam,  temperantiam  cognoverat : 
nam  ne  ejus  supplicio  Divitiaci  animum  offenderet,  verebatur. 

6  without  the  command ;  in+jussu. — ^  The  English  idiom  demands  or 
instead  of  and  :  without  the  command  of  Ccesar  or  the  state. — ">  themselves 
not  knowing-  it,  i.  e.,  without  the  knowledge  of  Ctesar  and  the  ^Eduan 
government. — ^  Bi/  a  magistrate,  93,  II.,  b. — 9  697,  b. — 1°  in  emn  animad- 
vertere, to  animadvert  upon  him,  i.  e.,  to  punish  him.  —  ii  751,  R.  2.— 
^2  Q,uibus  rebus  cognitis  =^  Which  things  being  known  by  inquiry,  i.  e., 
after  he  had  inquired  into  these  things. — ^^  Since  (seeing  that),  757,  A,  b. 
— 14  transduxisset,  curasset,  &c.,  are  subjunctives,  because  they  express, 
not  Caesar's  own  sentiments  or  knowledge,  but  what  he  had  heard  from 
others  :  certissimtB  res  accederent. — ^^  704,  To  all  tliese  considerations  one 
(thing)  opposed  itself. — ^^  re+pugnare. — i''  Of  his  brother  Divitiacus.i.  e., 
the  brother  of  Dumnorix. — is  zeal. — 19  785,  2. — ^20  j^^  {fig  punishment  of 
Dumnorix  he  will  hurt  the  feelings  of  Divitiacus. — 21  veretur  ne  .  .  .  4e 
fears  that  he  shall. — ^22  verebatur  ne  .  .  .  he  feared  that  he  should. 


READING    LESSONS.  353 


XII. 

Caesar  graviter^  in^  Dumnorigem  statuet. — Divitiacus  CaesS.- 

rem  complectitur Divitiacus  multis^  cum  lacrymis  Csesarem. 

complectitur. — Obsecrare  incipit  ne^  quid  gravius^  in^  fratrem 
statuat.  —  Scit  Divitiacus  ilia  esse  vera.  —  Nemo  ex  eo^  plus 
quam  Divitiacus  doloris^  capit.  —  Divitiacus  gratia^  plurimum 
domi  atque  in  reliqua  Gallia  poterat.  —  Dumnorix  minimum^ 
propter  adolescentiam  poterat.  —  Dumnorix  per  Divitiacum 
crevit.^° — His  opibus^^  ac  nervis^^  ad  minuendam'^^  gratiam  Divit- 
iaci  Tititur. — His  opibus  ad  perniciem^^  Divitiaci  utitm-. — Qui- 
bus  opibus  ac  nervis  non  solum  ad  minuendam  gratiam,  sed 
pene  ad  perniciem  Divitiaci  utitm-.  —  Divitiacus  tamen  et^^ 
amore  fraterno  et  existimatione^^  vulgi  commovetur.^^ — Divit- 
iacus summum  locum  amicitiae  apud  Caesarem  tenet. — Nemo 
existimabit  non  ejus  voluntate  factum.'^ — Ex  hac  re  totius  Gal- 
liae  animi  a  Divitiaco  avertentur.^^ 

{Direct  Narration,  Present  Time.^)  Scit  Divitiacus  ilia  esse 
vera,  nee  quisquam  ex  eo  plus  quam  ipse  doloris  capit, 
propterea  quod,  quum  ipse  gratia  plurimum  domi  atque 
in  reliqua  Gallia,  ille  minimum  propter  adolescentiam  posset, 
per  se  crevit ;  quibus  opibus  ac  nervis  non  solum  ad  minuendam 
gratiam,  sed  pene  ad  perniciem  ipsius  utitur.  Divitiacus  tamen 
et  amore  fraterno  et  existimatione  vulgi  commovetur,  quod, 
si^^  quid  fratri  a  Caesare  acciderit,  quum^  ipse 
t  a  1  e  m  locum  amicitiae  apud  eum  teneat,  nemo  existimabit  non 

1  graviter  statuet  =  7«t7Z  decide  severely. — ^  against. — ^  89,  II. — ^  548,  a. 
^  quid  gravius  =  anything  more  severe  (than  usual) :  anything  at  all  se- 
vere.— ^  from  him,  i.  e.,  Dumnorix. — ^  plus  doloris,  more  pain,  697. — ^  jjy 
his  influence  (popularity). — ^  minimum  -poterat  =  had  very  little  poicer. — 
'0  crescere:  grew  (in  power). — ^i  resources. — 12  sinews,  abl.  by  716.— 
'3  739,  for  diminishing  the  influence  of  Divitiacus. — i"*  790,  1. — 15  517^  c. 
—16  existimare,  788,  3  :  existimatione  vulgi  =  by  tlie  opinion  of  the  public. 
—17  con-f-movere  ;  commovetur  =  is  strongly  moved. — is  ]^q  one  will  think 
it  was  not  done  toith  his  (Divitiacus's)  consent. — 19  a+vertere.-  the  affec' 
tions  of  all  Gaul  will  be  turned  away  from  him. — 20  Observe  '•arefully 
the  moods  and  tenses  in  the  following  paragraphs  of  direct  an.  "jblique 
narration. — 21  ^  anything  happen  to  his  brother  from  Ccesar.-  \uum 
ipse  teneat,  seeing  that  he  himself  holds. 

Gg2 


354  BEADING    LESSONS. 

ejus  ^oluntate  factum;   qua  ex  re  fiet^^  uti  totius  Galliae 
animi  ab  eo  avertantur.^^ 

{Direct  Narration,  Past  Time.)  Sciebat  Divitiacus  ilia  esse 
vera,  nee  quisquam  ex  eo  plus  quam  ipse  doloris  capiebat,  prop- 
ter ea  quod,  quum  ipse  gratia  plurimum  domi  atque  in  reliqua 
Gallia,  ille  minimum  propter  adolescentiam  posset,  per  se  crev- 
erat;  quibus  opibus  ac  nervis  non  solum  ad  minuendam  giati- 
am,  sed  paene  ad  perniciem  ipsius  utebatur.  Divitiacus  taraen 
et  amore  fraterno  et  existimatione  vulgi  commovebatur,  quod  si 
quid  fratri  a  Caesare  gi"avius  accidisset,  quum  ipse  talem  locum 
amicitiae  apud  eum  teneret,  nemo  erat  existimaturus  non  ejus 
voluntate  factum,  qua  ex  re  futurum  erat  uti  totius  Galliae 
animi  ab  eo  averterentur. 

Divitiacus,  multis  cum  lacrymis  Caesarem  complexus  obse- 
crare  incipit  {ohlique  narration,  present  time),  "Ne  quid  gravius 
in  fratrem  statuat ;  scire  se,  ilia  esse  vera,  nee  quemquam  ex  eo 
plus  quam  se  doloris  capere,  propterea  quod,  quum  ipse  gratia 
plurimum  domi  atque  in  reliqua  Gallia,  ille  minimum  propter 
adolescentiam  posset,  per  se  creverit ;  quibus  opibus  ac  nervis 
non  solum  ad  minuendam  gratiam,  sed  psene  ad  perniciem  suam 
utatur :  sese  tamen  et  amore  fraterno  et  existimatione  vulgi 
commoveri,  quod,  si  quid  ei  gravius  a  Caesare  accident,  quum 
ipse  eum  locum  amicitias  apud  eum  teneat,  neminem  existima- 
turum  non  sua  voluntate  factum ;  qua  ex  re  futurum  uti  totius 
Galliae  animi  a  se  avertantur." 

Divitiacus  multis  cum  lacrymis,  Caesarem  complexus,  obse- 
crare  coepit  {ohlique  narration,  past  time),  "  Ne  quid  gravius  in 
fratrem  statueret ;  scire  se,  ilia  esse  vera,  nee  quemquam  ex 
eo  plus  quam  se  doloris  capere,  propterea  quod,  quum  ipse 
gratia  plurimum  domi  atque  in  reliqua  Gallia,  ille  minimum 
propter  adolescentiam  posset,  per  se  crevisset;  quibus  opibus 
ac  nei-vis  non  solum  ad  minuendam  gratiam,  sed  paene  ad  per- 
niciem suam  uteretur :  sese  tamen  et  amore  fraterno  et  exist 
imatione  vulgi  commoveri,  quod  si  quid  ei  a  Csesare  gravius 
accidisset,  quum  ipse  eum  locum  amicitiae  apud  eum  teneret, 
neminem  existimatm*um  non  sua  voluntate  factum ;  qua  ex  re 
futurum,  uti  totius  Galliae  animi  a  se  averterentur." 

23  from  which  thing  it  will  result. — ^24  754,  2. 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


LATIN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


^^  The  numbers  refer  to  paragraphs.  In  verbs,  the  perfect  and  su- 
pme-stems  are  placed  in  brackets,  immediately  after  the  infinitive  end- 
ings. The  declensions  of  nouns  may  be  known  by  the  genitive  endings  : 
the  conjugations  of  verbs  by  the  infinitive  endings. 


A,  ab,  abs,  prep,  with  abl.,  by,  from. 
Abesse  (abfti-,  ab+esse),  to  be  away 

from,  to  he  distant,  to  be  absent. 
Abrog-are  (av-,  at-),  to  abrogate. 
Abstin-ere  (abstinu-,  abstent-,  abs-|- 

tenere),   to  abstain  from,   (with 

abl.). 
Abund-are  (av-,  at-),  to  abound  (with 

abl.). 
Ac,  conj.,  and,  as  well  as. 
Acced-ere  (access-,  access-,  ad+ced- 

ere,  401,  3),  to  approach. 
>^ccid-6re    (accid-,   ad  +  cadere),   to 

happen. 
Accidit,  impers.,  583,  it  happens. 
Accip-ere   (io,   accep-,  accept-,  666, 

v.,  b),  to  receive:  acceptus  erat, 

he  teas  popular,  or  acceptable. 
Accurr-ere   (accurr-,   and  accucurr-, 

accurs-,  ad+currere),  to  run  to,  to 

run  up  to. 
Accus-are  (av-,  at-),  to  accuse. 
Acer,  acris,  acre,  105,  R.  1,  sharp, 

sjnritcd. 
Acerrime  (superl.  of  acriter),  very 


Acies,  ei,  lin£  of  battle. 

Acriter,  adv.,  217,  sharply,  spirit- 
edly. 

Acut-us,  %  um,  sharp,  acute. 

Ad,  prep,  with  accus.,  to,  near. 

Add-6re  (addid-,  addit-,  ad  +  dare, 
411,  c),  to  add. 


Adduc-gre  (addux-,  adduct-),  to  lead 

to,  induce. 
Adeo,  adv.,  to  this  point,  to  such  a 

degree. 
Adesse  (adfu-,  ad-J-esse),  to  be  pres- 
ent (with  dat.). 
Adhib-ere  (adhibu-,  adhibit-,  ad+ha- 

bere),  to  apply,  employ,  admit. 
Adhort-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  exhort. 
Adjung-ere   (adjunx-,   adjunct-),   *,o 

join  to. 
Adjuv-are  (adjuv-,  adjut-),  to  assist. 
AdmSdum,  adv.,  very. 
Admon-ere  (admonu-,  admonit-),  to 

advise,  admotcish. 
Adolescens,  (adolescent)  is,  young 

man. 
Adolescenti-a,  as,  youth. 
Ador-are  (av-,  at-),  to  adore,  tcorship. 
Advent-us,  us,  approach. 
Adversus,  or  adversum,  prep,  with 

accus.,  against,  towards. 
^dific-are  (av-,  at-),  to  build. 
.^difici-um,  i,  building. 
-lEdu-us,  i,  u^duan  (people  of  Gaul). 
Egens,    (egent)  is,  107,  poor. 
jEger,  gra,  grum,  sick. 
jEgritudo,   (osgritudin)  is,  339,  sor- 

roto,  affliction,  sickness. 
iE grot-are  (av-,  at-),  to  be  sick. 
iEgyptus,  i,  f.,  25,  a,  u^gypt. 
^quor,  (aequor)  is,  327,  sea. 
iEstas,  (aestat)  is,  293,  summer. 


JI58 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


^tas,  faetat)  is,  293,  age,  tirg^  of  life. 
^temitas,  (aeteruitat)  is,  293,  eter 

nity. 
iEtem-us,  a,  um,  eternal;  in  oeter 

wvsa,  forever. 
Affectio,  (affection)  is,  293,  affection. 
AiFerre  (attul-,  allat-,  ad+ferre),  to 

bring,  bring  to,  adduce. 
Affic-ere  (affec-,  affect-,  ad+facei-e), 

to  affect,  move,  influence. 
Afric-a,  ae,  Africa. 
African-US,  i,  Africanus. 
Ager,  gri,  6i,field. 
Ag-ere  (eg-,  act-),  to  do,  act,  drive ; 

to  treat  (as  an  ambassador). 
Agmen,  (agmin)  is,  344,  a,  army  on 

m,arch,  or  in  marcliing  order ;  no- 

vissimum  agmen.  the  rear. 
Agn-us,  i,  lamb. 
Agricol-a,  ae,  m.,  husbandman. 
Agricultur-a,  ae,  agriculture. 
Agripp-a,  ae,  Agrippa. 
Aio,  609,  /  say,  say  yes,  affirm. 
Al-a,  ae,  wing. 

Al-6re  (alu-,  ^It-),  to  nourish,  sup- 
port, maintain. 
Alexander,  -dri,  Alexander. 
Alien-US,  a,  um,  foreign,  belonging 

to  another. 
Aliquando,  at  some  time,  some  day, 

at  last. 
Aliquant-US,   a,  um,   184,   someichat 

great ;   aliquantum  agri,  a  pretty 

large  piece  of  ground. 
Aliquis,   quas,   quid   (quod),  178,   5, 

some  one,  something ;  aliquid  novi, 

something  new,  180. 
Aliter,  otJierwise. 

Ali-us,  a,  ud,  gen.  alius,  &c.,  194,  R.  1, 
other,  another.  [of  Gaul. 

Allobroges,  um,  Allobroges,  people 
Allu-ere  (allu-).  to  wash. 
Alpes,  ium.  ^Z/)«,  mountains  between 

Gaul  and  Italy. 
Alter,  a,  um,  gen.  ius,  194,  R.  1,  an- 
other, the  secovd  (in  a  series). 


Alt-US,  a,  um,  high,  lofty,  deep;  al- 
tum,  i,  the  deep,  the  sea. 

Amabilis,  is,  e,  104,  amiable. 

Am-are  (av-,  at-),  \o  love. 

Ambo,  89,  o,  both. 

Ambul-are  (av-,  at-),  to  walk. 

Amiciti-a,  as,  friendship. 

Amic-us,  i,  friend. 

Amitt-ere  (amis-,  amiss-),  to  lose. 

Ample,  adv.,  largely. 

Amplius,  comp.  of  ample,  more,  lar- 
ger, greater  than. 

Aucill-a,  ae,  maid-servant. 

Angli-a,  ae,  England. 

Angusti-ae,  arum,  defiles,  57,  B. 

Angust-us,  a,  um,  narrow. 

Animadvert-6re  (vert-,  vers-),  anl- 
mum+ad+vertere),  to  turn  the 
mind  to,  to  observe ;  with  in,  t-o 
punish  ;  Caesar  in  Dvmmorigem 
animadvertit,  Ccesar  punishes 
Dumnorix. 

Animal,  (animal)  is,  325,  animal. 

Animans,  (animant)  is,  living ;  as 
noun,  a  living  being. 

Anim-us,  i,  soul,  mind. 

Ann-us,  i,  year. 

Anser,  (anser)  is,  319,  goose. 

Ante,  prep,  with  accus.,  before. 

Antebac,  adv.,  before,  before  this. 

Antepon-ere  (posu-,  posit-),  to  place 
before,  to  prefer. 

Antonin-us,  i,  Antonine. 

Antoni-us,  i,  Antony. 

Aper-Ire  (aperu-,  apert-,  427,  II.).  to 
open. 

Apert-us,  a,  um,  open. 

Apis,  (Ap-)  is,  Apis,  Egyptian  deity. 

App ell-are  (av-,  at-),  to  call,  name. 

Aprilis,  is  (sc.  mensis),  m.,  25,  a, 
April.  [proach. 

Appropinqu-are    ( av-,    at- ),    to   ap- 

Apud,  prep,  with  accus.,  am-ong ; 
apud  te,  with  you  (at  your  house) ; 
apud  Ciceronem,  in  Cicero  {i.  e., 
his  writings). 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


359 


Aqu-a,  ae,  water. 
Aquil-a,  33,  eagle. 
Aquitan-us,  i,  Aquitanian  (people  of 

Gaul). 
Arar,   (ArSr)  is,  the  Saone  (river  of 

Gaul). 
Ar-are  (av-,  at-),  to  plough. 
Arbitr-ari  (at-),  dap.,  to  judge,  think. 
Arbor,  (arbor)  is,  f.,  tree. 
Arcess-ere    (arcesslv-,  arcessit-),   to 

sendfor. 
Aretbus-a,  se,  Arethusa. 
Argent-um,  i,  silver. 
Arid-um,  i,  the  sand  (neuter  of  ari- 

dus,  a,  um,  dry). 
Ariovist-us,  i,  Ariovistus,  a  German 

chieftain. 
Aristides,  (Aristid-)  is,  Aristides. 
Anna,  orum,  arms. 
Ann-are  (av-,  at-),  to  arm. 
Arrip-6re  (arripu-,  arrept-,  ad-frap- 

ere),  to  snatch  up,  to  seize. 
Arroganti-a,   ae,  haughtiness,   obsti- 
nacy, arrogance. 
Ars,  (art)  is,  293,  art. 
Asper,  a,  um,  rough. 
At,  conj.,  hut. 
Atbenae,  arum,  Athens. 
Atheniensis,  is,  an  Athenian. 
Atque,  conj.,  and. 
Atrox,  (atr6c)  is,  101,  fierce. 
Attent-e,  adv.,  attentively. 
Attent-us,  a,  um,  attentive. 
Attic-a,  ae,  Attica. 
Atting-ere  (attig-,  attact-),  to  touch 

on,  border  upon. 
Auctoritas,   (auctoritat)  is,  293,  au- 

tlwrity,  influence. 
Audacius,  comp.  of  audacter,  376, 

more  boldly. 
Audacter,  adv.,  boldly. 
Aud-ere  (ausus  sum),  to  dare. 
Aud-Ire  (audiv-,  audit-),  to  hear. 
Aug-ere  (aux-,  auct-),  to  increase. 
August-us,  i,  Augustus. 
Aur-um,  i,  gold. 


Aut,  conj.,  or. 

Autem,  conj.,  315,  but,  moreover,  also. 

Auxili-um,  i,  assistance ;  auxilia,  pL, 

auxiliary  troops. 
Avar-US,  i,  avaricious. 
Avert-ere    (avert-,  avers-),   to  turn 


Avien-us,  i,  Avienus. 
Avis,  (av)  is,  300,  bird. 


Barbar-us,  a,  um,  barbarian,  jor- 
eign ;  used  as  a  noun,  a  barba- 
rian. 

Beat-us,  a,  um,  happy. 

Beat-e,  215,  1,  happily. 

Belg-a,  ae,  a  Belgian,  people  of  GauL 

Bell-are  (av-,  at-),  to  wage  war. 

Bellicos-us,  a,  um,  warlike. 

Bell-um,  i,  war. 

Bene,  adv.,  well,  215,  1,  K. 

Benefici-um,  i,  good  deed,  act  of 
kindness. 

Beuign-us,  a,  um,  kind,  with  dat. 

Besti-a,  ae,  least,  brute. 

Bib-6re  (bib-,  bibit-),  to  drink. 

Bieimi-um,  i,  space  of  two  years 

Bini,  ae,  a,  dist.,  189,  two  apiece,  two 
at  a  time. 

Bis,  1S9,  twice. 

Bonitas,  (bonitat)  is,  293,  goodness. 

Bon-US,  a,  um,  good  ;  bona,  neut.  pi., 
blessings,  advantages. 

Bos,  bovis,  351,  2,  ox  or  cotv. 

Brevis,  is,  e,  104,  short. 

Britanni-a,  se,  Britain. 

Britann-us,  i,  a  Briton. 

Brat-US,  i,  Brutus. 


Cad-ere  (cecid-,  cas-,  411,  b),  to  fall. 

Cadm-us,  i,  Cadmus. 

Caduc-us,  a,  um,  frail. 

Caed-ere  (cecid-,  cees-,  411,  b),  to  fell, 

kill,  cut  down. 
Caesar,  (Caesar)  is,  CcBsar 


360 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


Caius,  i,  Cams. 

Calamitas,  (calamitat)  is,  calamity. 

Calcar,  (calcSr)  is,  325,  spur. 

Camp-US,  i,  field,  plain. 

Can-is,  (can)  is,  c,  dog. 

Cant-ai-e  (av-,  at-),  to  sing. 

Cant-US,  us,  singing. 

Cap-ere  (cep-,  capt-),  to  take. 

Captiv-us,  i,  captive,  prisoner. 

Car-6re  (caru-,  398),  to  want,  with 
abl. 

Carmen,  (carmin)  is,  344,  a,  song. 

Caro,  (earn)  is,  340,  "Si.,  flesh. 

Carthaginiensis,  is,  a  Carthagin- 
ian. 

Carthago,  (Carthagin)  is,  Carthage. 

Carr-us,  i,  wagon. 

Car-us,  a,  um,  dear. 

Cassi-us,  i,  Cassius. 

Castell-um,  i,  fortress,  tower. 

Castic-us,  i,  Casticus. 

Castra,  orum,  camp. 

Cas-us,  us,  accident,  chance. 

Catamentales,  edis,  Catamentales, 
proper  name. 

Catilin-a,  m,  Catiline,  proper  name. 

Cato,  (Caton)  is,  Cato. 

Caus-a,  se,  cause,  reason;  abl.,  causa, 
for  tlie  sake  of,  135,  II.,  b ;  salutis 
causa, /or  the  sake  of  safety. 

Caut-us,  a,  um,  cautious. 

Celebr-are  (av-,  at-),  to  celebrate. 

Celer,  (celer)  is,  107,  swift. 

Celeriter,  adv.,  215,  2,  b,  swiftly. 

Celta,  se,  a  Celt,  people  of  Gaul. 

Centum,  indecl.,  a  hundred. 

Cens-ere  (censu-,  cens-),  to  think, 
judge,  believe. 

Centurio,  (centurion)  is,  centurion. 

Cem-6re  (crev-,  cret-),  to  separate, 
decide,  judge. 

Cert-US,  a,  um,  certain ;  certiorem 
facere,  to  make  more  certain,  i.  e., 
to  inform. 

Cerv-us,  i,  stag. 

Ceteri,  oram,  the  rest. 


Christ-US,  i,  Christ. 
Cicero,  (Ciceron)  is,  Cicero. 
Cing-ere  (cinx-,  cinct-),  to  gird,  sur- 
round. 
Circa,  prep,  with  ace,  about,  around. 
Circiter,  prep,  with  ace,  about,  near; 

circiter  viginti,  about  twenty. 
Circum,   prep,   with   accus.,   about, 

around. 
Circumst-are  [or  circumsistSre),  cir- 

cumstet-,  391,  1,  to  surround,  to 

stand  about 
Cito,  adv.,  quickly. 
Cit-us,  a,  um,  quick,  swift. 
Civis,  (civ)  is,  c,  citizen. 
Civitas,  (civitat)  is,  293,  state. 
Clamor,  (clamor)  is,  319  noise,  clam- 
our. 
Clar-us,  a,  um,  illustrious. 
Classis,  (class-)  is,  300,  fleet. 
Claud-ere  (claus-,  claus-),  to  shut. 
Cliens,  (client)  is,  m.,  a  dependant. 
Coel-um,  \,  firmament,  heaven. 
Coem-6re   (coem-,  coempt-),  to  buy 

up  (con+emere). 
Ccen-are  (av-,  at-),  to  sup. 
Coepi,  used  only  in  perf.  tenses.  / 

begin,  611. 
Cog-6re  (coeg-,  coact-),  to  bring  to- 

gether,  collect,  compel. 
Cogit-are  (av-,  at-),  to  think. 
Cognosc-6re    (cognov-,   cognit-),   to 

learn,  find  out,  know. 
Cohors,  (cohort)  is,  293   cohort,  the 

tenth  part  of  a  legion. 
Cohort-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  encourage. 
Col-ere    (colu-,   cult-),   to    cultivate, 

serve,  honour. 
Collig-6re  (colleg-,  collect-,  con+le- 

gere),  to  collect. 
CoUis,  (coll)  is,  m.,  302,  R.,  hill. 
CoUoc-are  (av-,  at-),  to  place. 
CoUoqui-um,  i,  conference. 
Color,  (color)  is,  319,  colour. 
Colamb-a,  se,  dove.  [bum  up 

Combur-ere  (combuss-,  combust-),  t^o 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


361 


Comies,  (comit)  is,  c,  companion. 
Comme  are  (av-,  at-),  to  go  to,  to  go 

and  return. 
Commemor-are  (av-,  at-),  to  mentiok, 

to  call  to  mind. 
Committ-6re  (coirimis-,  commisi?-),  to 
intrust  to,  with  dative ;  prselium 
committere,  to  join  battle. 
Commov-ere  (commOv-,  commot-),  to 

move  greatly,  to  excite. 
Commun-ire  (iv-.  It-),  to  fortify. 
Communis,  is,  e,  104,  common. 
Commut-are  (av-,  at-),  to  change. 
Commutatio,      (  commutation )      is, 

change. 
Compar-are  (av-,  at-),  to  get  together, 

procure. 
Compell-6re  (compul-,  compuls-,  con 

4-pellere),  to  compel,  drive  on. 
Comper-Tre  (comper-,  compart-,  427, 

v.),  to  find  out,  discover. 
Complect-i  (complex-),  dep.,  to  em- 
brace. 
Compl-ere  (complev-,  complet-,  395, 

II.),  to  fill  up. 
Complures,  ium,  327,  very  many. 
Con-ari  (at-),  to  attempt,  try. 
Conat-um,  1,  attempt. 
Conced-ere    (concess-,   concess-),  to 

yield  to,  to  grant,  give  way. 
Concess-us,  us,  grant. 
Concili-are  (av-,  at-),  to  gain  (for  an- 
other). 
Concili-um,  i,  assembly,  council. 
Concit-are  (av-,  at-),  to  stir  up,  to 

excite. 
Concupisc-ere  (concupiv-),  to  desire. 
Concurr-ere   (concurr-,  concurs),  to 

run  together. 
Condemn-are  (av-,  at-),  to  condemn, 

348. 
Conditio,  (condition)  is,  333,  R.,  con- 
dition. 
Condi  tor,  (conditor)  is,  builder, found- 
er, {lead  or  bring  together. 
Conduc-cre    (condux-,   conduct-),   to 

H 


I  Conferre  (contul-,  collat-),  to  bring 
together,  contribute. 
Contic-ere  (confec-,  confect-),  to  fin- 
ish. 
Confid-6re  (confisus  sum),  to  trust 

to,  to  confide  in. 
Confirm-are  (av-,  at-),  to  confirm,  es- 
tablish, affirm,  fix. 
Conflu-6re  (conflux-,  conflux-),  tofiato 

together. 
Congreg-are  (av-,  at-),  to  gather  into 

fiocks. 
Congress-US,  us,  meeting. 
Conjic-ere  (conjee-,  conject-,  con-fja- 

cere,  416),  to  hurl. 
Conjung-ere  (conjunx-,  conjunct-),  io 

join^ogether,  unite. 
Conjur-are    (av-,    at-),   to   conspire, 

plot. 
Conjuratio,  (conjuratidn)  is,  333,  R., 

conspiracy. 
Conjux,  (conjug)  is,  c,  husband  or 

wife. 
Conscend-gre  (conscend-,  conscens-, 

con+scandere,  309),  to  climb  up. 

Conscisc-6re   (consciv-,  conscit-),  to 

decree,   determine ;    mortem   sibi 

consciscere,    to    commit    suicide, 

555. 

Consci-us,  a,  um,  conscious,  privy  to. 

Conscrib-6re  (conscrips-,  conscript-), 

to  enrol,  levy. 
Conseut-ire  (consens-,  conaens-),  to 

agree. 
Consid-ere  (consed-,  consess-),  to  sit 

doion,  to  encamp. 
Consili-um,  i,  plan,  judgment,  coun- 
sel, deliberation. 
Consist-6re    (constit-,   couBtit-),    to 

stand,  halt. 
Conspect-us,  us,  sight,  beholding. 
Conspic-6re  (conspex-,  conspect-),  to 

see,  get  sight  of. 
Const-are  (stit-,  stit-  or  stat-),  to  stand 

together,  to  halt. 
Constitu-6re    (constitu-,    constitdt- 
H 


362 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


con+statuere),  to  place,  fix,  ap- 
point 

Consuesc-Sre  (consuev-,  consuet-),  to 
be  accustomed. 

Consuetude,  (consuetudin)  is,  339, 
custom,  usage. 

Consul,  (consul)  is,  consul,  chief  ma- 
gistrate of  Rome. 

Consul-gre  (consulu-,  consult-),  to 
consult. 

Consult-um,  i,  decree. 

Consum-6re  (consumps-,  consumpt-, 
con+sumere),  to  consume. 

Contemn-6re  (contempg-,  contempt-), 
to  despise. 

Contempl-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  contem- 
plate.  ^ 

Contend-€re  (contend-,  content-),  to 
contend,  strive  after,  hasten. 

Content-us,  a,  nm,  content,  with  abl. 

Contin-ere  (continu-,  content-,  con+ 
tenere),  to  contain,  restrain,  hold 
together. 

Continens,  (continent)  is,  107,  suc- 
cessive, continiisd. 

Continenter,  215,  2,  b,  continually. 

Contingit,  impers.,  580,  it  happens. 

Continuatio,  (continuation)  is,  333, 
R.,  continuance. 

Contra,  prep,  with  accus.,  against ; 
adv.,  in  opposition  to. 

Contrah-6re  (contrax-,  contract-,  con 
4-trahere),  to  draw  together,  col- 
lect. 

Conv6n-ire  (conv6n-,  convent-,  con+ 
venire),  to  come  together,  meet, 
agree. 

Convent-US,  us,  meeting,  assembly. 

Convert-6re  (convert-,  convers-),  to 
turn  completely  round. 

Convoc-are  (av-,  at-,  con+vocare),  to 
call  together. 

Coor-iri  (coort-),  dep.,  to  rise,  as  a 
stomx. 

Copi-a,  89,  abundance ;  pi.,  copiw, 
amm,  troops,  forces. 


Cor,  (cord)  is,  n,,  Jieart. 

Corinth-US,  i,  f.,  Corinth. 

Comiger,  a,  um,  hoi-ned. 

Com-u,  111,  horn,  wing  of  an  aj-my, 

Coron-a,  86,  crown. 

Corpus,  (corpSrI  is,  344,  b,  body. 

Corrig-ere    (correx-,   correct-,   con+ 
regere),  to  correct,  make  straight, 

Corv-us,  i,  crow. 

Cras,  adv.,  to-morroxo. 

Crass-US,  i,  Crassus. 

Cre-are  (av-,  at-),  to  create. 

Creber,  bra,  hTam,  frequent. 

Cred-ere  (credid-,  credi^),  to  believe, 
intrust,  with  dat. 

Crep-are   (crepu-,  crepit-,  387,  11.), 
to  chide,  creak  (as  a  door). 

Cresc-Sre  (crev-,  cret-),  to  groio. 

Crimen,  (crimin)  is,  344,  a,  crime. 

Crus,  (crur)  is,  n.,  leg. 

Cubicul-um,  i,  bed-chamber. 

Cubile,  (cubil)  is,  314,  bed,  place  to 
lie  down. 

Culmen,  (culmin)  is,  344,  a,  top,  sum- 
mit. 

Culp-a,  tB,  fault. 

Cultus,  us  (from  colere),  cultivatwUf 
civilization,  refinetnent. 

Cum,  prep,  with  abl.,  with;   cum, 
conj.,  same  as  quum,  when. 

Cunct-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  delay. 

Cunct-us,  a,  um,  all,  the  v:hole. 

Cup-ere   (io,  199,  cupiv-,  cupit-),  to 
desire. 

Cupide,  adv.,  with  desire,  215,  1  (cu 
pidus). 

Cupiditas,  (cupiditat)  is,  293,  desire. 

Cupid-US,  a,  um  (with  gen.),  desi- 
rous, eager. 

Cur,  adv.,  why. 

Cur-a,  33,  care. 

Cur-are  (av-,  at-),  to  take  care,  to  set 
that. 

Curi-a,  09,  senate-house. 

Curr-6re  (cucurr-,  curs ,  411,  a),  U 
ruK. 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


863^ 


Curs-US,  4s,  course,  running. 
Gustos,    (custod)   is,   25,   a, 

guardian. 
Cyrus,  i,  Cyrus. 

D. 

Danubi-us,i,  I>a»»5e  (river). 

D-are  (ded-,  dat-),  to  give. 

Dari-us,  i,  Darius,  Persian  king. 

De,  prep,  with  abl.,  of,  from,  con- 
cerning. De  tertia  vigilia,  in 
(about,  or  after)  the  third  watch. 

Deb-ere  (debu-,  debit-),  to  owe — 
ought. 

Deced-6re  (decess-,  decess-,  de+ce- 
dere),  to  go  away,  depart,  retire. 

Decern,  indecl.,  ten. 

Decem-Sre  (decrev-,  decret-,  407), 
decree,  determine. 

Decert-are  (av-,  at-),  to  contend, 
Jlght. 

Decet,  impers.,  583,  decuit,  it  is  he- 


Decim-us,  a,  um,  tenth. 

Ded-6re  (dedid-,  dedit-),  to  surren- 
der. 

Deditio,  (dedition)  is,  333,  11.,  sur- 
render. 

Deduc-ere  (dedux-,  deduct-),  to  lead 
away. 

De-esse  (defu-,  de+esse),  to  be  want- 
ing (with  dat),  to  be  away. 

Defend-6re  (defend-,  defens-),  to  de- 
fend. 

Defess-us,  a,  um  (part,  of  defetisci, 
obsol.),  wearied,  worn  out. 

Defic-6re  (defec-,  defect-,  de  + fa- 
cere),  to  fail,  to  be  wanting,  with 
dat. 

Delect-are  (av-,  at-),  to  delight. 

Del-ere  (delev-,  delet-),  to  destroy. 

Deliber-are  (av-,  at-),  to  deliberate. 

Delig-gre  (delSg-,  delect-,  de  +  le- 
gere),  to  choose. 

Demetri-us,  i,  Demetrius  (proper 
name). 


Demum,  VidiV.,  finally,  at  last. 
Denique,  adv.,  at  last,  in  short. 
Dens,  (dent)  is,  m.,  295,  H.  1  tooth. 
Dens-US,  a,  um,  thick,  dense. 
Depon-ere   (deposu-,  deposit-,   de-f 

ponere),  to  lay  aside,  put  down. 
Deser-ere  (deseru-,  desert-),  to  leave, 

desert, 
Desert-um,  i,  a  desert. 
Desil-ire  (desilu-,  desult-,  de+salire, 

428),  to  leap  doion. 
Design-are  (av-,  at-),  to  point  out, 

allude  to. 
Desper-are  (av-,  at-,  de-f  sperare),  te 

despair. 
Desperatio,  (desperation)  is,  despair 
Deterr-ere  (deterru-,  deterrit-),  to  de- 
ter, frighten  from. 
Deus,  i,  God,  62,  R. 
Dic-6re  (dix-,  diet-),  to  say,  tell. 
Dictio,  (diction)  is>  333,  K,.,  speak- 
ing, pleading. 
Dies,  ei,  day. 
Differre  (distul-,  dilat-,  dis+ferre),  to 

differ,  to  put  off. 
Difficilis,  is,  e  (dis+facilis),  difficult. 
Dignitas,  (dignitat)  is,  293,  dignity, 

rank. 
Dign-us,  a,  um,  worthy,  with  abl. 
Diligens,  (diligent)  is,  careful,  dili' 

gent. 
Dihgenter,  215,  2,  b,  carefully,  dili- 

gently. 
DUig-Sre  (dilex-,  dilect-,  di-f-legere), 

to  love  (with  esteem). 
Dimitt-ere  (dimis-,  dimiss-,  di-fmit- 

tere),  to  send  aioay,  dismiss. 
Dirip-Sre   (diripu-,   dirept-,  di  +  ra- 

pere),  to  plunder. 
Disced-6re  (discess-,  discess-,  dis+ 

cedere,  401,  3,  h),  to  go  away,  de- 

part. 
Disc-6re  (didic-,  411,  a),  to  learn. 
Discess-us,  us,  departure. 
Disciplin-a,  se,  instruction,  discipline 
Discipul-us,  i,  scholar,  pupil. 


364 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY, 


Disert-us,  a,  um,  Jluent,  Hoquent. 
Displic-ere  (displicu-,  displicit-,  dis 

+placere),  to  displease,  with  dat. 
Dispon-ere  (disposu-,  disposit-,  dis-|- 
ponere),  to  place  in  different  di- 
rections, arrang'e,  dispose. 
Disput-are  (av-,  at-),  to  dispute,  dis- 
cuss. 
Dissent-ire  (dissens-,  diss  ens-,  dis-+- 
sentire,    427,    III.),   to   differ  ir\ 
opinion,  dissent. 
Disser-6re  (disseru-,  dissert-,  407),  to 

treat  of,  discuss. 
dissolv-ere  (dissolv-,  dissolat-,  dis+ 

solvere),  to  dissolve. 
Dist-are,  to  be  distant,  or  apai't  (di+ 

stare). 
Distribu-ere  (distribu-,  distribut),  to 

divide  or  distribute  among;  422. 
Ditissimus,  superl.  of  dives. 
Diu,   adv.,  lo7ig ;    compar.,  diutius, 

longer. 
Divers-US,  a,  um,  different. 
Dives,  (divit)  is,  371,  R.  1,  rich. 
Divico,  (Divicon)  is,  Divico,  proper 

name. 
Divid-ere  (divis-,  divis-),  to  divide. 
Divin-us,  a,  um,  divine. 
Divitiac-us,    i,    Divitiacus,    proper 

name. 
Divitiae,  arum,  57,  R.,  ricJies,  wealth. 
Doc-ere  (docu-,  doct-),  to  teach. 
Docilis,  is,  e,  104,  docile,  teaehalle. 
Dol-ere  (dolu-,  dolit-),  to  grieve. 
Dolor,  (dolor)  is,  319,  grief,  pain. 
Dol-us,  i,  fraud,  deceit. 
Dom-are  (domu-,  domit-,  387,  II.),  to 

subdue. 
Domicili-um^  i,  dwelling. 
Domin-us,   i,   master,   of  house    or 

slaves. 
Dom-us,   i    and    us,   112,   3,   house, 
home;  domi,  at  home;  domuni,  to 
one's  house. 
Dorm-Ire  (dormiv-,  dormit),  to  sleep. 
Draco,  (dracon)  is,  331,  dragon. 


Druides,  um,  Diuids,  priests  of  ait- 
cient  Britain. 

Dubit-are  (av-,  at-),  to  doubt,  hcsi' 
tate. 

Dubitatio,  (dubitation)  is,  333,  II., 
doubt. 

Dubi-us,  a,  mti,  doubtful. 

Duc-ere  (dux-,  duct-),  to  lead. 

Dulcis,  is,  e,  104,  sweet. 

Dum,  couj.,  while,  so  long  as,  until. 

Doninorix,  (Dumnorig)  is,  DUmno 
rix,  proper  name. 

Duo,  two,  194. 

Duodecim,  indecl.,  twelve. 

Duplic-are  (av-,  at-),  to  double. 

Dur-are  (-av-,  at-),  intrans.,  to  endure 
last ;  trans.,  to  harden. 

Dur-us,  a,  um,  hard. 

Dux,  (due)  is,  leader,  guide,  com- 
mander. 

E. 

E  or  ex,  prep,  with  abl.,  out  of, 

from. 
Ecquis,  interrog.  pron.,  178,  7,  any 

one? 
Ed-6re,  or  esse  (ed-,  es-,  601),  to  cat. 
E due-are  (av-,  at-),  to  train,  educate. 
Educ-ere  (edux-,  educt-),  to  lead  out. 
Eflfect-us,  us,  effect. 
Effemin-are  (av-,  at-,  ex+femina),  to 

geminate,  make  womanish. 
Ego,  I,  120. 
Egregi-us,  a,  um,  excellent,  remark 

able. 
Elegans,  (elegant)  is,  107,  elegant. 
Eloquens,    (eloquent)    is,   107,    elo 

quent. 
Em-Sre  (em-,  empt-),  to  buy. 
Emic-are  (emicu-),  387,  II.,  to  shint 

or  flash  forth. 
Enim,  conj.,/c»r,  442,  e. 
Enunti-are  (av-,  at-),  to  divulge. 
Eo,  adv.,  there,  to  that  place,  on  that 

account,  by  so  much. 
Eodem,  adv.,  to  the  same  place. 


.ATIN-ENG1.1SH   VOCA  lUI.ARV. 


365 


Epistol-a,  £B,  leller. 

Eques,  (eqait)  is,  horse  soldier. 

Equester,  tris,  tre,  428,  a,  belonging 

to  cavalry.    Equestri  projlio,  in  a 

battle  of  cavalry. 
Equit-are  (av-,  at-),  to  ride  on  horse- 
back. 
Equitat-us,  us,  cavalry. 
Equ-os,  i,  horse. 
Erip-ere  (eripu-,  erept,  e+rapere),  to 

take  aioay  from,  snatch  away 
Err-are  (av-,  at-,)  to  err,  wander. 
Erump-6re  (erup-,  erupt-),  to  burst 

forth,  sally  ont. 
Esse,  to  be,  650 ;  esse,  to  eat,  see 

edere. 
Et,  conj.,  and.     Et — et,  both — and. 
Etenim,  conj., /or. 
Etiam,  conj.,  also,  even. 
Etsi.  conj.,  although. 
Europ-a,  ae,  Europe. 
Evoc-are  (av-,  at-,  e-|-vocare),  to  call 

out. 
Ex,  prep,  with  abl.     See  E. 
Exced-6re  (excess-,  excess-,  ex+ce- 

dere),  to  go  away,  depart  out  of. 
Exclam-are  (av-,  at-),  to  cry  out. 
Excip-Sre  (excep-,  except-,  ex+ca- 

pere),  to  receive. 
Excit-are  (av-,  at-),  to  raise,  kindle, 

excite. 
Bxcusatio,  (excusation)  is,  333,  R., 

excuse. 
Exe-dere  (exed-,  exes-,  ex+edere), 

to  eat  up,  consume,  corrode. 
Exempl-um,  i,  example. 
Exerc-ere  (exercu-,  exercit-),  to  ex- 
ercise, practice. 
Exercit-us,  us,  army. 
Exign-us,  a,  urn,  $mall. 
Ex-Ire  (exiv-  and  exi-,  exit-),  to  go 

out,  depart. 
Existim-are  (av-,  at-),  to  think,  judge. 
Existimatio,  (existimation)  is,  333, 

R.,  opinion. 
Expect-are  (av-,  at-),  lo  wait  for. 

II 


Expedit,  impers.,  583,  it  is  cxpedierd. 
Expeditio,  (expedition)  is,  333,  R., 

military  expedition. 
Expell-ere  (expul-,  expuls-,  ex-j-pel- 

lere),  to  expel,  drive  out. 
Expei's,  (expert)  is,  107,  devoid  of, 

with  gen.  or  abl.,  336. 
Expet-6re    (expetiv-,    expetit-),   to 

covet,  desire  earnestly. 
Explorator,  (explorator)  is,  319,  scout. 
Expon-6re  (exposu-,  exposit-,  ex+ 

ponere),  to  place  out,  set  forth,  ex- 
plain. 
Expugn-are  (av-,  at-,  ex+pugnare), 

to  take  by  storm. 
Extra,  prep,  with  accus.,  outside  of, 

without. 
Extrem-us,  a,  um,  superl.  of  exterus, 

370,  the  last,  outermost. 
Exur-6re  (exuss-,  exust-,  ex+urere), 

to  burn  up. 


Faber,  bri,  artificer,  workman. 

Fabul-a,  m,  fable,  story. 

Fac-ere  (io,  fee-,  fact-),  to  make,  do. 

Facile,  adv.,  easily. 

Facilis,  is,  e,  104,  easy. 

Facultas,  (facultat)  is,  293,  power  of 

doing ;  hence  'means,  resources. 
Facund-us,  a,  um,  eloquent. 
Fall-ere  (fefell-,  fals-),  to  deceive. 
Fam-a,  se,  rumour,  fame. 
Fames,  (fam)  is,  300,  hunger. 
Famili-a,  te,  family,  gang  of  slaves. 
Familiaris,  e,  belonging  to  the  fami- 

lia.     Res  familiaris,  property. 
Fat-eri  (fass-),  dep.,  to  confess. 
Fat-ura,  i,  fate. 
Fav-ere  (fiv-,  faut-,  395,  v.),  to  f<u 

vour. 
Felix,  (fellc)  is,  104,  happy. 
Femin-a,  se,  v>oman. 
Fer-a,  se,  wild  otast. 
Fere,  adv.,  almost. 
!  Ferre  (tul-,  lat-,  596),  to  bear 

n2 


566 


LATIN-ENGLIBII    VOCABULARY. 


FerotAil-us,  a,  um,  surly.  1 

Ferox,  (feroc)  is,  IQl,  fierce. 

Ferr-um,  i,  iron. 

Festia-are  (av-,  at-),  to  hasten. 

Fid-es,  ei,  faith. 

Fieri  (fact),  600,  used  as  pass,  of  fa- 
cere  ;  to  be  made,  to  become. 

Figxir-a,  go,  figure. 

Fili-a,  oe,  daughter,  dat.  and  abl.  pi. 
filiabus. 

Fili-us,  i,  son,  62,  R.,  2. 

Fin-is,  (fin)  is,  m.,  end,  boundary; 
fines,  boundaries,  territories. 

Finitim-us,  a,  um,  neighbouring. 

Firm-US,  a,  um,  strong,  firm. 

Fit,  it  happens,  pres.  indie,  of  fio, 
fieri. 

Flagiti-um,  i,  disgraceful  crime,  in- 
famy. 

Flamm-a,  ^,  flame. 

Fl-ere  (flev-,  flet-,  395.  IT.),  to  weep. 

Flet-us,  us,  weeping. 

Flos,  (flor)  is,  331,  b,  fiower. 

Pluet-us,  us,  wave. 

Flumen,  (flumin)  is,  344,  a,  river. 

Fluvi-us,  i,  river. 

Fcedus,  (feeder)  is,  344,  b,  treaty, 
league. 

Foli-um,  i,  leaf. 

Fons,  (font)  is,  ra.,  293,  "K.,  fountain. 

Foris,  (for)  is,  300,  door ;  used  most- 
ly in  plur.,  fores. 

Form-a,  ae,form. 

Formid-are  (av-,  at-),  to  fear,  le 
afraid  of. 

Formos-us,  a,  um,  handsome. 

Forsitan,  adv.,  perhaps. 

Forte,  adv.,  by  chance. 

Fort-is,  is,  e,  107,  brave. 

Portiter,  215,  2,  b,  bravely. 

Fortitudo,  (fortitudin)  is,  339,  fotii 
tude,  courage. 

Fortun-a,  re,  fortune. 

Fortunat-us,  a,  um,  fortunate. 

For-um,  \,  forum. 

Fossa,  oe.  ditch. 


Fraen-um,  i,  bridle,  396;  pi.,  fraenl 

and  frsena. 
Frater,  (fratr)  is,  brother. 
Fraterorus,  a,  mvci,  fraternal. 
Fraus,  (fraud)  is,  293,  fraud. 
FrigTis,  (frigor)  is,  344,  b,  cold. 
Fruct-us,  us,  fruit. 
Frument-ari    (frumentat-),   dep.,   to 

collect  corn. 
Frument-um,  i,  com. 
Frustra,  adv..  in  vain. 
Fug-a,  ^,  flight. 
Fug-are   (av-,  at-),  to  rout,  put  to 

flight. 
Fug-ax,   (fugac)   is,    107,  fugitive, 

fleeting. 
Fug-6re  (io,  fug-,  fngit),  to  flee. 
Fulgur,  (fulgur)  is,  325,  lightning. 
Fund-ere  (fud-,  fus-),^o  pour  out,  to 

overthroio,  discomfit. 
Funditor,  (funditor)  is,  319,  slinger. 
Futur-us,  a,  van,  future. 

Q. 

Galb-a,  se,  Galba. 
Galli-a,  se,  Gaul. 
Gallin-a,  gb,  hen. 
Gall-us,  i,  a  Gaul. 
Garumn-a,  ae,  Garonne  (river). 
Gaud-ere  {gavisus  sum),  to  rejoice. 
Gaudi-um,  i,joy. 
Gener,  i,  son-in-law. 
Gene V- a,  jb,  Geneva. 
Gens,  (gent)  is,  293,  nation. 
Genus,  (gener)  is,  344,  b,  race,  class. 
Ger -ere  (gess-,  gest-),  to  carry  on  ; 

gerere  bellum,  to  carry  on  war. 
Gemian-us,  i,  a  German. 
Gladi-us,  i,  sword. 
Glori-a,  oe,  glory. 
Graec-us,  a,  um,  Greek. 
Grando,  (grandin)  is,  339,  hail. 
Grati-a,  se,  influence,  favour,  poptir- 

larity. 
Gratul-ftri  (gratulat-),  dep.,  to  con 

gratulate. 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


S67 


Grat-us,  a,  um,  agreeable. 

Gravis,  is,  e,  heavy,  severe. 

Graviter,  adv.,  heavily,  disagreea- 
ble ;  graviter  fert,  he  is  indignant 
at. 

Gregatim,  adv.,  in  flocks. 

Gubem-fire  (av ,  at-),  to  steer,  direct, 
govern. 

Gubemator,  (gubematdr)  is,  319,  pi- 
lot, governor. 

H. 

Hab-ere  (habu-,  habit-)>  to  have,  hold, 

esteem. 
Hannibal,  (Hannibal)  is,  Hannibal. 
Haud,  adv.,  not. 
Helveti-us,  i,  a  Helvetian. 
Herb-a,  ae,  herb. 
Hercyni-us.  a,  um,  Hercynian;  Her- 

cynia  sylva,  the  Hercynian  forest. 
Heri,  adv.,  yesterday. 
Hibem-a,  orum,  winter-quarters. 
Hiberni-a,  ae,  Ireland. 
Hie,  haec,  hoc,  this,  156. 
Hiem-are  (av-,  at-),  to  winter. 
Hiems,  (liiem)  is,  293,  winter. 
Hirundo,  (hirundin)  is,  339,  swallow. 
Hispani-a,  ae,  Spain. 
Hispan-us,  i,  a  Spaniard. 
Histori-a,  ae,  history. 
Hodie,  adv.,  to-day. 
Homer-US,  i,  Homer. 
Homo,  (homin)  is,  m.,  man. 
Honest-e,  adv.,  honourably. 
Honest-us,  a,  um,  honourable. 
Honor,  (honor)  is,  319,  honour. 
Hor-a,  ae,  hour. 
Horati-us,  i,  Horace. 
Hort-ari  (hortat-),  to  exhort,  dap. 
Hort-us,  i,  garden. 
Hospes,  (hospit)  is,  c,  guest,  host. 
Hostis,  (host)  is,  c,  enemy. 
Human-us,  a,  um,  human. 
Humanitas,  (humanitat)  is,  293,  cul 

tivation,  refinement,  humanity. 
Humilis,  is,  e,  107,  loic. 


Ibi,  adv.,  there. 

Idem,  eadem,  idem,  the  sam£,  150. 

Idone-us,  a,  \nn,fit,  suitable. 

Idus,  iduum  (4th  declen.),  the  Ides, 
112,  2. 

Ignavi-a,  ae,  indolence,  cowardicd 

Ignav-us,  a,  um,  indolentf  coicardly. 

Ignis,  (ign)  is,  m.,  302,  'SL.,fire. 

Ignomini-a,  ae,  disgrace,  ignominy. 

Ignor-are  (av-,  at-),  to  be  ignorant. 

Ignoratio,  (ignoration)  is,  333,  R., 
ignorance. 

nie,  ilia,  illud,  this,  that,  158. 

Imago,  (imagin)  is,  339,  image. 

Imber,  (imbr)  is,  320,  shower  of  rain, 

Immemor,  (immemor)  is,  107,  wn- 
mindful,  with  gen. 

Immens-us,  a,  um,  immense. 

Immortalis,  is,  e,  104,  immortal. 

Impediment-um,  i,  hinderance;  im- 
pedimenta, pi.,  the  baggage  of  an 
army. 

Imped-ire  (iv-,  it-),  to  hinder,  im- 
pede. 

Impend-Sre,  to  hang  over. 

Imper-are  (av-,  at-),  to  command, 
with  dat. 

Imperator,  (imperator)  is,  319,  com- 
mander, general. 

Imperi-um,  i,  command. 

Impetr-are  (av-,  at),  to  accomplish, 
effect,  obtain. 

Impet-us,  us,  onset,  attach ;  impetum 
facere,  to  make  an  attack. 

Impie,  adv.,  215,  1,  impiously. 

Impi-us,  a,  um,  impious. 

Impl-ere  (implev-,  implet-),  to  fill  vp. 

Implor-are  (av-,  at-),  to  implore. 

Impon-ere  (imposu-,  imposit-,  in+ 
ponere,  407),  to  place  in  or  upon. 

Import-are  (jrt-,  at-),  to  bring  ir 
import. 

Improb-us,  a,  um,  wicked,  dishone. 

In,  prep,  with  ace.,  into,  agains 
with  abl.,  in,  among. 


368 


LATIN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


Incend-6re  (incend-,  incens-),  to  set  \ 
Jire  to,  to  burn.  \ 

Incert-us,  a,  um,  doubtful,  uncer- 
tain. 

Incip-ere  (io,  incep-,  incept),  to  be- 
gin. 

Incol-a,  8B,  inhabitant. 

Incol-Sre  (incolu-,  incult-),  dwell  in, 
inhabit. 

Incommod-um,  i,  inconvenience. 

Incredibilis,  is,  e,  104,  incredible. 

Increp-are  (increpa-,  increpit-,  390), 
to  chide. 

Incus-are  (av-,  at-),  io  blame. 

Inde,  adv.,  thence. 

Indici-um,  i,  private  infoi-mation. 

Indign-us,  a,  um,  umoorthy. 

Induc-6re  (indux-,  induct-),  to  lead 
to,  induce. 

Indulg-ere  (induls-,  iadult-),  with 
dat.,  to  indulge. 

Ineptioe,  arum,  57,  Ti.,  folly. 

Inerti-a,  ae,  idleness. 

Infans,  (infant)  is,  c,  infant;  (in+ 
fari,  that  cannot  speak). 

Inferior,  (inferior)  is,  comp.  of  infe- 
rus,  370,  inferior,  lower. 

Inferre  (intul-,  illat-,  in+ferre),  to 
bring  upon;  bellum  alicui  inferre, 
to  wage  war  upon  any  one. 

Ingeni-um,  i,  talent. 

Ingens,  (ingent)  is,  107,  great,  enor- 
mous. 

Inimiciti-a,  ?b,  enmity. 

Inimic-us,  a,  um,  hostile,  unfriendly, 
with  dat. 

Initi-um,  i,  beginning. 

Injuri-a,  ee,  injury,  outrage. 

Injust  us,  a,  um,  unjust. 

Innocens,  (innocent)  is,  107,  in7W- 
cent. 

Innocenti-a,  ae,  innocence. 

Innumerabilis,  is,  e,  104,  innumer- 
able. 

Inops,  (inop)  is,  107,  poor. 

Inquam,  /  say ;  inquit,  says  he,  610. 


Insciens,  (inscient)  is,  107,  not  know- 
ing. 

Insect-um,  i,  insect. 

Insequ-i  (insecut-),  dep.,  to  pursue. 

Insidi-ae,  arum,  57,  R.,  snares,  am- 
bush. 

Instig-are  (av-^  at-),  to  instigate. 

Institut-um,  i,  purpose,  plan. 

Instru-ere  (instrux-,  instruct-,  in-| 
struere),  to  draw  up  in  battle  at 
ray. 

Insul-a,  ae,  island. 

Intellig-ere  (intellex-,  intellect-),  t 
perceive,  understand. 

Intent-us,  a,  um,  intent,  bent  upon. 

Inter,  prep,  with  accus.,  between 
among. 

Interced-6re  (intercess-,  intercess-) 
to  intervene. 

Interdiu,  adv.,  by  day. 

Interdum,  adv.,  sometimes. 

Inter-esse  (interfa-),  to  be  among,  to 
differ ;  nihil  interest,  it  makes  n» 
difference. 

Interfector,  ( interfector )  is,  319 
slayer. 

Interfic-ere  (interfec-,  interfect-,  in- 
ter+facere),  to  slay,  kill. 

Interim,  adv.,  in  the  mean  while. 

Interitus,  us,  perishing,  destruction, 
death. 

Interi'egn-um,  i,  intcrreign. 

InteiTog-are  (av-,  at-),  to  ask,  inter- 
rogate. 

Intu-eri  (intuit-),  dep.,  to  look  upon. 

Inven  ire  (inven-,  invent-),  to  _find, 
discover. 

Invoc-are  (av-,  at-),  to  call  upon,  in- 
voke. 

Ipse,  a,  um,  159,  self. 

Ir-a,  36,  anger. 

Iracundi-a,  ae,  wrathfulness,  wrath. 

ire  (iv-,  it-),  605,  to  go. 

Irramp-6re  (irrup-,  irrupt-,  in+rum 
pei'e),  to  break  into. 

Is,  ea,  id,  this,  that,  he,  she,  it,  153. 


LATIN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


369 


Iste,  a,  ud,  that,  157. 
Ita,  adv.,  so,  thus. 
Italia,  88,  Italy. 

Iter,    (itiuer)   is,   n.,  journey,   way, 
march. 


Jac-ere  ( jec-,  jact-),  to  cast,  hurl. 

Jact-are  (av-,  at-),  to  disctiss. 

Jacul-um,  i,  dart. 

Jam,  «tlv.,  noio,  already. 

Jan-US,  i,  Jamis. 

Jub-ere  ( juss-,  juss-),  to  order. 

Jucund-us,  a,  um,  pleasant. 

Judex,  (judic)  is,  306,  judge. 

Judic-\ire  (av-,  at-),  to  judge. 

Judici-um,  i,  trial,  jxtdgment. 

Jugurth-a,  se,  Jugurtha, 

Jug-um,  i,  yoke. 

Jument-uui,  i,  heast  ofhurdLen. 

Jnng-ere  ( junx-,  junct-),  to  join. 

Juno,  (Junon)  is,  f.,  Juno  (goddess). 

Jupiter,  Jovis,  351,  Jupiter. 

Jura,   89,  Jura   (mountain   east   of 

Gaul). 
Jur-are  (av-,  at-),  to  swear. 
Jus,  (jur)  is,  344,  law,  right. 
Juss-us,  us,  command. 
Justiti-a,  33,  jvstice. 
Just-us,  a,  vim,just. 
Juv-are  ( juv-,  jut-),  to  hdp. 
Juvenis,  is,  a  youth. 
Juventus,  (juventut)  is,  293,  youth. 
Juxta,  prep,  with  ace,  near. 

K. 
Kalend-OB,  arum.  Kalends. 


Labienus,  i,  Labienus,  one  of  Cne- 

sar's  lieutenant-generals. 
Labor,  (labor)  is,  319,  labour,  toil. 
Labor-are  (av-,  at-),  to  labour. 
Lac,  (lact)  is,  346,  2,  milk. 
Lacess-6re  (iv-,  it-,  406,  III.,  b),  to 

provoke,  harass. 
Lacrj'm-a,  cb,  tear 


Lac -us,  us,  lake.  , 

Lapis,  (lapid)  is,  295,  3,  stone. 
Larg-iri  (it-),  dep.,  to  give  largest, 

to  bribe,  515, 
Larg-iter,  adv.,  215,  2,  b,  largely, 

largiter   potest,    he   can   largely ^ 

i.  e.^  lie  is  quite  powerful. 
Lat-e,  adv.,  215,  1,  widely-  (lat-us, 

wide). 
Latin-us,  a,  um,  Latin. 
Latitudo,  (latitudin)  is,  340,  breadth 

(from  latus,  broad). 
Latins,  adv.,  more  widely  (compar 

of  late,  376). 
Latro,  (latron)  is,  331,  a,  robber. 
Lat-us,  a,  um,  broad,  wide. 
Laud-are  (av-,  at-),  to  praise. 
Laus,  (laud)  is/  293,  praise. 
Legatio,  (legation)  is,  333,  R.,  em- 


Legat-us,  i,  lieutenant,  ambassador'. 
L6g-6re  (leg-,  lect-,  416,  a),  to  read. 
Legio,  (legion)  is,  333,  R.,  legioru 
Lemann-us,  i.  Lake  Leman,  or  Ge^ 

neva. 
Leo,  (leon)  is,  333,  lion. 
Lepus,  (lepor)  is,  m.,  345,  4,  hare. 
Lev-are   (av-,  at-),   to  lighten,  alio 

viate. 
Lex,  (leg-)  is,  293,  law. 
Libenter,  adv.,  willingly,  gladly. 
Liber,  libri,  64,  book. 
Liberalitas,  (libcralitat)  is,  293,  lib 

erality. 
Liber-e,  215,   1,  freely   (from  liber 

free). 
Liber-i,  orum,  65,  R-.,  children. 
Liber-tas,  (libertat)  is,  2^2,  freedont 

liberty. 
Libet,  583,  libebat,  libuit,  or  libitum 

est,    impers.,   it  is   agreeable,   it 

pleases,  it  suits. 
Lic-eri  (licit),  dep.,  to  bid  money,  to 

offer  a  price. 
Licet,  licuit,  licitum  est,  it  is  allow 

ed,  it  is  lawful,  one  must,  583. 


370 


LATIN-ENGllSH   VOCABULARY 


Lili-um,  i,  lily. 

Lingu-a,  oe,  language. 

Litter-a,  m,  a  letter  (as  of  the  alpha- 
bet) ;  litter-ae,  arum  (pi.),  a  letter, 
i.  e.,  a7i  epistle. 

Littus,  (littor)  is,  344,  b,  shore. 

Livi-us,  i,  Livy,  a  Roman  historian. 

Loc-us,  i,  pL,  i  and  a,  309,  place. 

Long-e,  adv.,  215, 1,/ar,  long :  (long- 
us.) 

Longitudo,  ( longitudin )  is,  339, 
length:  (longTis.) 

Long-US,  a,  um,  long. 

Loqu-i  (locut-),  dep.,  to  speak. 

Lubet.     Sec  libet. 

Luct-us,  us,  grief. 

Lad-6re  (lus-.  Ids-,  401,  3,  b),  to 
play. 

Lud-Tis,  i,  sport,  game,  play. 

Lun-a,  88,  moon. 

Lup-us,  i,  toolf. 

Lux,  (luc)  is,  293,  light. 

M. 
Macul-are  (av-,  at-),  to  stain. 
Magis,  adv.,  more. 
Magister,  tri  (64),  master,  teacher. 
Magistrat-us,  us,  a  magistrate. 
Magnanimus,  a,  um  (magn-us+ani- 

mus ),     high-spirited,     viagnani- 

m,ous. 
Magnitudo,    (magnitudin)    is    (340), 

extent,  greatness. 
Magnus,  a,  um,  great ;  comp.,  ma- 
jor, greater. 
Male,  adv.  (215,  1,  R.),  badly. 
Maleficium,  i   (800,    2),   evil  deed, 

crime.. 
Malle  (592),  to  be  more  mlling,  to 

prefer;  perf,  malui. 
Malum,  i,  einl,  misfort^ine. 
Man-ere  (mans-,   mans-),   665,   III., 

to  remain. 
Manus,  iis  (f.,  112,   2),  hand,  band 

of  soldiers. 
Mare,  (mar)  is  (314),  sea 


Massilia,  se,  Marseilles. 
Mater,  (matr)  is  (f.,  25,  2),  mother. 
Matrimonium,  i,  matrimony. 
Matrona,  ee,  the  Marne,  a  river  of 

Gaul. 
Matur-are  (av-,  at-),  to  hasten. 
Maxim-e    ( adv.,    376 ),    most,   most 

greatly,  in  the  highest  degree. 
Maxim-US,   a,  um  (sup.  of  magnus, 

370),  greatest. 
Me  [ace.  and  abl.  of  ego,  /),  me; 

mecum,  with  me  (125,  IL,  b). 
Medicin-a,  ae,  medicine. 
Mediterrane-us,    a,  um,   Mediterra- 
nean (medi-us+terr-a). 
Medi-us,  a,  um,  middle. 
Meli-us,  adv.  (376),  better. 
Memini  (defect.,  611),  I  remember; 

meminisse,  to  remember. 
Memori-a,  ae,  memory ;  memoria  te- 

nere,  to  hold  in  memory,  to  re- 

member. 
Mens,  (ment)  is,  f.,  mind. 
Mercat6r,  (mercator)  is  (319),  m^- 

chant. 
Meridi-es,    ei    (m.,   115),    mid-day, 

noon. 
Merit-um,  i,  m^erit,  desert. 
Metall-um,  i,  metal. 
Met-ere  (messu-,  mess-,  666,  IL,  b), 

to  reap. 
Met-iri  (mens-),  dep.,  to  measure. 
Metu-ere  (raetu-,  666,  VI.,  a),  to  fear. 
Me-us,  a,  um  (122),  my,  mine. 
Mic-are  (micu-,  664,  II.),  to  glitter, 

shine. 
Migr-are  (av-,  at),  to  migrate. 
Miles,  (milit)  is,  soldier. 
Mille  (sing,  indecl.,  pi.  millia,  ium), 

thousand. 
Minerva,  k,  Minerva. 
Minim-us,   a,  una,  least  [superl.  of 

parvus,  370). 
Minor  (minus),  358,  less  (compar.  of 

parvus,  370). 
Minu-6re  (minu-,  minotO,  1o  diminish. 


LATIN-ENOLISH    VOCARULARV 


371 


Mii-abil-is,  is,  e,  wonderful.  I 

Mii-ific-us,   a,  um,   causing  wonder,  \ 
astonishing  (mir-us+facere). 

Miser,    a,    um    (77,    b),    fniserahle, 
wretched. 

Miseret  (impers.,  579,  a),  one  pities  ; 
me.miseret,  I  pity. 

Mitig-are  (av-,  at-),  to  mitigate. 

Mitt-6re  (mis-,  miss-,  401,  3,  b),  to 
send.  . 

Mod-US,  i,  measure,  manner. 

Moeaia,  ium  (used  only  in  pi.),  walls. 

Moeror,  (moeror)  is  (319),  sadness. 

Moa-6re  (monu-,  monit-),  to  advise, 
warn,  remind. 

Monstr-are  (av-,  at-),  to  show. 

Mord-ere  (momord-,  mors-,  395,  IV.), 
to  bite,  champ. 

Mor-i,  and  mor-iri  (mort-),  dep.,  to 
die. 

Mortal-is,  is,  e,  mortal. 

Mors,  (mort)  is,  293,  death. 

Mos,  (mor)  is,  331,  ],  b,  custom,  man- 
ner. 

Mot-US,  us,  motion,  mxrving. 

Mov-ere    (mov-,   mot-,   395,  V.),   to 
inove. 

Miilier,  (mulier)  is,  (f.),  woman. 

Multitudo,  (multitudin)  is,  340,  mul- 
titude. 

Mult-us,  a,  um,  much,  mxiny. 

Mund-us,  i,  world. 

Mua-ire  (iv-,  it-),  to  fortify. 

Munitio,  (mumtion)  is,  333,  'R..,  forti- 
fication. 

Munus,  (muner)  is,  344,  3,  b,  office, 
gift. 

Marus,  i,  wall. 

Miit-are  (av-,  at-),  to  change. 

N. 
Nam,  conj.,/<?r. 
Nasc-i  (nat-),  dep.,  to  be  born,  spring 

from. 
Nat-are  (av-,  at),  to  swim. 
Naut  n,  re  (ra.),  sailor 


Natio,  (nation)  is,  333,  R.,  natioji. 

Natur-a,  83,  nature. 

Naval-e,  (naval)  is,  314,  a  dock-yard. 

Navigatio,  (navigation)  is,  333,  B,., 
navigation,  voyage. 

Nav-is,  (nav)  is,  300,  ship. 

Ne,  interrogative  particle,  135,  II.,  a. 

Ne,  adv.,  not,  used  imperatively, 
534,  a ,  conj.,  that  not,  548,  b. 

Nee,  conj.,  nor. 

Neg-are  (av-,  at-),  to  deny,  refuse. 

Neglig-ere  (neglex-,  neglect-i  666, 
v.,  a),  to  neglect. 

Negligeus,  (negligent)  is,  107,  neg- 
ligent. 

Negoti-um,  i,  matter,  business. 

Nemo,  (nemiu)  is,  c,  no  one. 

Neque,  conj.,  neither,  nor,  515. 

Nequidem,  adv.,  not  even,  217;  al- 
ways separated  by  the  words 
which  have  the  emphasis  ;  e.  g., 
ne  Socrates  quidem,  not  even  SoC' 
rates. 

Nervi-us,  i,  a  Nervian  (people  of 
Gaul). 

Nerv-us,  i,  a  sinew. 

Nesc-ire  (Iv-,  it-),  to  be  igTiorant,  not 
to  knozv  (ne-fscire). 

Neuter,  tra,  trmn,  194,  1,  neither  of 
the  two. 

Nidific-are  (av-,  at-),  to  build  a  nest 
(nidus-ffacere). 

Niger,  nigra,  nigrum,  77,  a,  black. 

Nihil,  n.,  indecL,  nothing. 

Nimi-us,  a,  um,  too  much. 

Nit-i  (nis-  and  nix-),  dep.,  to  strive. 

Nisi,  conj.,  unless,  if  not. 

Nobilis,  is,  e,  noble,  illustrious. 

Nobilitas,  (nobilitat)  is,  293,  nobil- 
ity. 

Noc-ere  (nocu-,  nocit-),  to  hurt,  with 
dat. 

Noctu,  adv.,  by  night. 

Nolle,  nolui,  to  be  unwilling,  592. 

Nomen,  (nomin)  is,  344,  a,  name.         | 

N6n,  adv.,  7}of. 


872 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY 


Nonne,  interrogative  particle  (ex- 
pects answer  yes). 

Nonnullus,  a,  um,  some ;  nonnuUi, 
some  {persons). 

Nonnunquam,  adv^.,  sometimes. 

Non-US,  a,  um,  ninth. 

Nos,  ice,  120. 

Nosc-ere  (nov-,  not-),  to  learn,  knoro. 

Noster,  tra,  trum,  122,  onr. 

Nov-i  (gen.  of  novus),  news,  174  (vo- 
cab.). 

N6v-i,  defective,  /  know,  611 ;  no- 
visse,  to  knoiD. 

Novissimus,  a,  um  (superl.  of  no- 
vus), newest,  latest ;  novissimum 
agmen,  the  rear-ranh. 

Novitas,  (novitat)  is,  293,  novelty 
(novus). 

Nov-us,  a,  um,  new. 

Nox,  (noct)  is,  293,  night. 

Nub-es,  (nub)  is,  300,  cloud. 

Nud-us,  a,  um,  naked. 

Nullus,  a,  um,  gen.  nullius,  dat. 
nulli,  194,  1,  n/)  one,  none. 

Num  (interrog.  particle),,  whether 
(expects  the  answer  no,  174). 

Numa,  8B  (m.),  Numa. 

Numer-us,  i,  number. 

Nunti-are  (av-,  at-),  to  announce. 

Nunti-us,  i,  a  messenger. 

Nunquam,  adv.,  -never. 

Nuptiae,  arum,  57,  R.,  a  marriage. 

Nutrix,  (nutric)  is,  293,  nurse. 

O. 

Ob  (prep,  with  ace),  on  account  of. 
Obseratus,  a,  um,  a  debtor. 
Obscur-are  (av-,  at-),  to  obscure. 
Obsecr-are  (av-,  at-),  to  beseech. 
Obses,  (obsid)  is  (c),  hostage. 
Obstring-ere  (obstrinx-,  obstrict-),  to 

bind :  ob+stringerc. 
Obtin-ere  (obtinu-,  obtent-),  to  hold, 

maintain :  ob+tenere. 
Occas-us,  us,  setting,  e.  g.,  of  the  sun ; 

oceasfi  solis,  sutiset,  118,  IT.,  c. 


Occidens,  (Occident)  is,  m.  (sol  un. 
derstood),  tcest. 

Occid-ere  ( occid-,  occas-,  ob  +  ca- 
dere),  to  fall,  set,  die. 

Occld-ere  (occid-,  occis-,  ob  +  ca9- 
dere),  to  slay,  kill. 

Occup-are  (av-,  at-),  to  seize,  take 
possession  of. 

Oceanus,  i,  ocean. 

Octavus,  a,  um,  eighth. 

Octogiuta  (indecl.),  eighty. 

Octoni,  ae,  a,  eight  each,  eight  at  a 
time,  197.  ' 

Ocul-us,  i,  eye. 

Odi  (defect.,  Ql\),Ihate;  odisse,  to 
hate. 

Odi-um,  i,  hatred. 

Oifend-ere  (offend-,  offens-,  ob+fen- 
dere),  to  offend. 

Olim,  adv.,  once  upon  a  time,  for- 
merly. 

Omnino,  adv.,  altogether,  in  all. 

Omnis,  is,  e,  all,  every,  the  whole', 
omnis  res,  the  whole  affair. 

Onus,  (oner)  is,  344,  b,  burden,  load. 

Oper-a,  03,  toil,  labour. 

Oportet  (impers.,  583),  oportebat, 
oportuit,  it  behooves,  one  oxtght. 

Oppidan-US,  a,  um,  of  or  belonging 
to  a  town,  a  townsman. 

Oppid-um,  i,  a  town. 

Opprim-ere  (oppress-,  oppress-,  ob 
+premere),  to  repress,  crush. 

Oppugn-are  (av-,  at-),  to  attack,  be- 
siege (ob+pugnare). 

Ops,  opis,  293,  power ;  opes,  resour- 
ces, means. 

Optim-us,  a,  um,  best  {superl.  of 
bonus). 

Opulens,  (opulent)  is,  107,  rich,  opu- 
lent. 

Opus,  (oper)  is,  344,  b,  work. 

Oracul-um,  i,  oracle. 

Or-are  (av-,  at-),  to  pray,  beg,  beseech. 

Oratio,  (oration)  is,  333,  R.,  m-atiov. 
speech. 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


373 


Orator,  (orator)  is,  319,  orator. 

Orb-is,  (orb)  is  (m.,  302,  R.),  orh,  cir- 
cle ;  orbis  teiTarum,  the  woi'ld. 

Ordo,  (ordin)  is  (m.,  340,  exc),  order. 

Orgetorix,  (Orgetorig)  is,  OrgetoHx, 
a  Helvetian  chieftain. 

Origo,  (origin)  is,  339,  oHgin. 

Or-iri  (ort-),  dep.,  to  rise. 

Om-are  (av-,  at-),  to  adorn. 

Omatus,  a,  um,  adorned,  part,  of  or- 
nare. 

Ostend-^re  (ostend-,  ostens-,  db+ 
tendere),  to  show. 

Ostent-are  (av-,  at-),  to  vaunt. 

P. 

Pabulatio,  (pabulation)  is,  333,  R.. 

foddering,  foraging. 
Peene,  adv.,  almost. 
Pag-us,  i,  village,  canton. 
Palus,  (palud)  is,  293,  marsh. 
Par-are  (av-,  at-),  to  'prepare. 
Parat-us,    a,    um,   prepared,   ready 

(part.  pass,  of  parare). 
Parc-ore  (peperc-,  pars-  and  paicit-, 

666,  IV.,  V),  to  spare,  -v^'Vih.  dat. 
Par-6re  (paru-),  with  dat.,  to  obey. 
Pars,  (part)  is,  293,  part. 
Parsimoui-a,  ee,  parsimony,  frugal- 
ity. 
Parv-us,  a,  um,  small,  little. 
Pastor,  (pastor)  is,  319,  sheplierd. 
Pater,  (patr)  is,  father ;  patres,  um, 

patricians  of  Rome. 
Pat-ere  (patii-),  to  he  open,  extend. 
Pat-i,  (pass-),  dep.,  to  svffer. 
Patienter,  adv.,  215,  2,  h,  patiently. 
Patienti-a,  a3,  patience,  endurance. 
Paucitas,  (paucitat)  is,  ^^Z,  fewness. 
Pauci,  E8,  di,few. 

PauUisper,  adv.,  for  a  little  zohile 
Paullo,  adv.,  a  little;  paullo  longius, 

a  little  too  far. 
Pauper,  (pauper)  is,  107,  poor. 
Paupertas,  (panpertat)  is,  293,  pov- 
erty. 


Pax,  (pac)  is,  293,  peace. 

Pecc-are  (av-,  at-),  to  sin. 

Peccat-um,  i,  sin. 

Pecuni-a,  se,  money. 

Pedes,  (pedit)  is,  ^QQ,  foot-soldier. 

Pell-6re    (fJepul-,   puis-,   411,    b),  to 

drive,  rout,  expel,  defeat. 
PeUis,  (pell)  is,  300,  hide,  skin. 
Pend-efe  (pepeud-,  pens-,  666,  IV., 

a))  to  tceigh,  pay. 
Pene,  adv.,  almost. 
Peninsula,  se,  peninsula  (pene+iu- 

Bula). 
Per   {prep,   vfiih   accus.),   through, 

during. 
Perdives,    (perdivit-)   is,    107,  very 

rich. 
Perduc-6re  (perdux-,  perduct-,  per-f 
ducere),   to  lead  through,   bring 
along. 
Perfacilis,  is,  e,  very  easy. 
Peiferre  (pertul-,  perlat-,  pei4-ferre), 

to  convey,  bear  through. 
Perfic-ere  (perfec-,  perfect-,  per+fa- 
cere),  to  accomplish,  finish,  bring 
to  pass. 
Perfring-ere  (perfreg-,  perfract-,  per 

+frangere),  to  break  thi-ough. 
Pei-fug-a,  se,  deserter. 
Perg-ere   (perrex-,  perrect-),   to  go 

on,  go  straight. 
Pericul-um,  i,  danger. 
Per-iro    (peri-,    perit-,    per+ire),    to 

perish. 
Peritus,    a,    um,   skilful,  skilled  in 

(with  geji.). 
Perm6v-ere   (permov-,  permot-),  to 

move  thoroughly,  to  induce 
Pemici-es,  ei,  destruction 
Perpauci,  oe,  a,  very  few. 
Perpetu-us,  a,  um,  perpetual. 
PeiTump-ere  (perrup-,  pernipt-,  per 

+rumpere),  to  break  through. 
Pers-a,  se,  a  Persian. 
Persequ-i   (persecut-,  per  +  sequi). 
dep.,  to  follow  after,  pursue. 


Il 


374 


J.ATm-ENGlJSH    VOCABULARY. 


Persever-are  {&v-,  at),  to  persevere. 
Persolv-ere  (persolv-,  persolut-j  per 

+solvere),  to  pay  up,  pay  in  full ; 

poenas   persolvere,  to  suffer  full 

punishment. 
Perspic-ere  (perspex-,  perspect-),  to 

observe,  get  sight  of,  see  plainly. 
Persuad-ere  (persuas-,  persuas-),  to 

persuade,  convince. 
Perterr-ere  (perterru-,  perterrit-),  to 

frighten  thoroughly. 
Perttn-ere  (pertina-,  per+tenere),  to 

reach,  belong  to,  extend  to. 
Perturb-ai-e  (av-,  at-),  to  disturb,  con- 
found. 
Perven-ire  (ven-,  veut-),  to  arrive  at, 

co7ne  to. 
Pes,  (ped)  is  (m.,  295,  3),  foot ;  pe- 

dem   referre,   to   draw   back   the 

foot,  to  retreat. 
Pet-6re  (petiv^  petit-),  to  seek,  aim 

at,  strive  after. 
Petr-a,  ee,  rock. 

Phalanx,  (phalang)  is,  293,  phalanx. 
Pilars  al  us,  i,  Pharsalus,  a  town  in 

Thessaly. 
Philosoph-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  philoso- 
phize. 
Piget    (impers.,    579,    a),    pigiiit,   it 

grieves,   pains,    disgusts ;    I  am 
Pil-um,  i,  javelin.  [grieved  at. 

Pisc-is,  (pise)  is  (m.,  302,  Ii.),fsh. 
Pius,  a,  um,  pious. 
Plac-ere    (placu-,  placTt-),  to  please 

(with  dat.). 
placet   (impers.,  584,  a),  placuit,  it 
pleases ;    Cffisaii    placuit,    Ccesar 

determined. 
Placid-us,  a,  um,  calm,  placid. 
Plant-a,  83,  plant. 
Plan-us,  a,  um,  level,  plain. 
Plato,  (Platoa)  is,  Plato. 
Plebs,  (pleb)  is,  293,  common  people. 
Plen-ns,  a,  nm,  full. 
Plerique,  pleroeque,  pleraque,  most, 

the  grenfei-  pni  *.. 


Plerumque.  a.Av.,for  the  most  pari, 

Plum-a,  se,featJi€r. 

Plui-im-us,  a,  um  (superl,  of  multas), 

Tnost,  very  many. 
Plurimum,  adv.,  very  much,  in  the 

highest  degree. 
Pocul-um,  i,  cup. 

Poen-a,  te,  punishment ;  poenas  per- 
solvere, pay  the  full  penalty. 
Pcenitet  (impers.,  579),  poeuituit,  it 

repents  ;  me  poenitet,  /  repent. 
Poet-a,  oe  (m.),  poet. 
Pompeius,  i,  Pompey. 
Pon-ere    (posu-,    posit-),    to   place, 

castra  ponere,  to  pitch  the  camp. 
Pons,  (pont)  is  (m.,  295,  1),  bridge. 
Popul-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  plunder,  lay 

waste. 
Popul-us,  i,  people. 
Port-a,  85,  gate. 
Port-are  (av-,  at-),  to  carry. 
Port-iis,  us,  harbour. 
Portori-um,  i,  tax,  customs  duty. 
Posc-ere  (poposc-,  411,  a),  to  demand 

(admits  two  accusatives). 
Posse,  potui,  to  be  able,  can,  587. 
Possessio,  (possession)  is,  333,  R-., 


Possid-ere    (possed-,    possess-),    to 


Post,  prep,  with  ace,  after,  behind. 
Postea,  adv.,  afterward. 
Poster-US,  a,  um,  after ;  postero  die, 
on  the  day  after,  on  the  next  day. 
Postquam,  adv.,  after  that. 
Postul  are  (av-,  at-),  to  demand. 
Potens,  (potent)  is,  107,  poiverful. 
Potestas,  (potestat)  is,  293,  poicer. 
Pot-Iri  (it-),  dep.,  with  gen.  or  abl. 

to  acquire,  get  possession  of. 
Prae  (prep,  with  abl.),  before. 
Praeb-ere   (praebu-,    pra9bit-),  to    of 

ford. 
Prasced-ere  (cess-,  cess-),  to  go  be 

fore,  excel. 
Vrreceps,  fnraecipit)  is,  107,  headlong 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


375 


Pi  oeceptoi ,  (proBceptoi')  is,  a  teacher, 
preceptor. 

Praecept-um,  i,  -precept. 

Praecip-ere  { cep-,  cept-,  prae  +  ca- 
pere),  to  command,  enjoin. 

Prseclar-us,  a,  una,  illustrious. 

Praeco,  (praecon)  is,  herald. 

Praed-a,  ae,  booty,  prey. 

PraeJ-ari  (at-),  dep.,  to  plunder,  gel 
booty. 

Praedic-are  (av-,  at-),  to  declare. 

Praedo,  (praedon)  is,  pirate. 

Praeesse,  proefui,  to  be  over,  com- 
mand (pj-ae-fesse),  with  dat. 

Praeferre  (tnl-,  lut-),  to  prefer. 

Praefic-ere  (lee-,  feet-,  prae+faceve), 
to  place  over. 

Praemitt-ere  (?jqIs-,  miss-),  to  send  be- 
fore. 

PraBmi-um,  i,  rewai-d. 

Praemuiti-a,  or  praenuncia,  ae,  har- 
binger. 

Praesertim,  adv.,  especially. 

Praesidi-um,  i,  garrison,  defence. 

Praestans,  (praestant)  is,  107,  excel- 
lent. 

Prasst-are  (stit-,  stit-),  to  stand  be- 
fore, excr.l. 

Praeter,  prep,  with  ace,  besides,  ex- 
cept. 

Praeter-iro  (iv-  and  i-,  it-,  praeter-l- 
ire,  605,  2),  to  pass  by. 

Praetor,  (praetor)  is,  a  prcetor  (Roman 
magistrate). 

Preti-um,  i,  price,  reward. 

Prex,  (prec)  is,  293,  prayer. 

Primus,  a,  um,  ^rsf. 

Princeps,  (princip)  is,  107,  chief  {used 
only  as  a  nomi). 

Principat-us,  us,  chieftainship,  chief 
authority. 

Principi-um,  i,  beginning,  principle. 

Pristin-us,  a,  um,  ancient,  former. 

Privatim,  adv.,  privately. 

Privat-us,  a,  nm,  private. 

Pritisquara,  adv.,  before  that. 


Pro  (prep,  with  abl),  before,  for,  in 

view  of. 
Prob-are  (av-,  at-),  to  prove. 
Prob-itas,  (probitat)  is,  293,  honesty. 
Prob-us,  a,  um,  honest. 
Proced-ere  (cess-,  cess-,  401,  3,  b),  to 

advance,  go  forward. 
Procell-a,  ae,  tempest. 
Procurr-6re '"  (curr-,  curs-,  pro  +  cur- 

rere),  to  run  foi^ward. 
Prod-esse  (pro-j-esse),  to  profit,  vfx\^ 

dat.  _ 
Proelium,  i,  battle,  fight. 
Profectio,    (profection)    is,   333,   R., 

setting  out,  departure. 
Proficisc-i  (profect-),  dep.,  to  set  out, 

depart. 
Prohib-ere  (prohibu-,  prohibit-,  pro-(- 

habere),  to  restrain,  keep  off. 
Projic-ere   (jec-,  ject-,  pro+jacere), 

to  throio  forward,  throw. 
Prope  (prep,  with  ace),  near,  nigh 

to ;     propius,    nearer ;    proxime, 

nearest. 
Propell-6re    (pul-,   puis-,   pro  +  pel- 

lere),  drive  on,  drive  away. 
Proper-are  (av-,  at-),  hasten. 
Propinquus,  a,  um,  near  to,  related 

to;  propinquus  (used  as  noun),  a 

relation. 
Propius.     See  prope. 
Propon-6re  (posu-,  posit-,  pro-f-po- 

nere),  to  set  before,  propose. 
Propter  (prep,  with  accus.),  on  ac- 
count of. 
Propterea,   adv.,   therefore;   propte- 

rea  quod,  because,  for  the  reason 

that. 
Propuls-are   (av-,   at-),  to  ward  off, 

avert,  repel. 
Prorsus,  adv.,  straight  on,  truly,  pre- 
cisely. 
Prosequi  (prosecut-),  dep.,  to  pursue. 
Proverbi-um,  i,  proverb. 
Providenti-a,   88,  Providence  (pro+ 

\ad6re). 


376 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


Provinci-a,  as,  province. 

Proxim-us,  a,  um  (super!.,  371),  next. 

nearest. 
Ptolemaeus,  i,  Ptolemy. 
Pudet   (impers.,  579,  a),  puiduit,   it 

shames,  one  is  ashamed. 
Puell-a,  te,  girl. 
Paer,  i.  boy. 

Pugn-are  (av-,  at-),  iojiglit. 
Pulvis,  (pulver)  is,  331,  b,  dust. 
Pun-ire  (iv-,  it-),  to  punish. 
Put-are  (av-,  at-),  to  suppose,  think, 

reckon. 
Pyrenaei    (montes),    tlie    Pyrenees, 

mountaius     between    Gaul     and 

Spain.. 


Uaadringenti,  tB,  z.,four  hundred. 
duagr-ere  (quaesiv-,  quaesit-),  to  seek, 

ask,  inquire  into. 
daalis,  is,  e,  of  tohat  kind ;  talis — 

qualis,  such — as,  184. 
Cluam,  conj.,  than. 
duamdiu,  adv.,  how  long. 
duamvis,  conj.,  although. 
duando,  adv.,  when. 
duantus,  a,  um,  hovj  great,  184. 
duantuscunque,  -acunque,  -umcun- 

que,  horcever  great,  184. 
duasi,  adv.,  as  if. 
duateni-i,  ae,  Q.,four  apiece,  four  at 

a  time,  189. 
duattuor,  indecl.,/o«r. 
due,  conj.,  and,  517,  a. 
dueo,  /  am  able,  606. 
duer-i  (quest-),  to  complain. 
dui,  quae,  quod,  who,  which,  what, 

164. 
duia,  conj.,  because. 
ddid,  neut.  of  quis,  used  interrog., 

what  ?  as  adv.,  why  ? 
duicunque,  iohosoever,  164,  R. 
duidam,  quaedam,  quoddam,  or  quid- 
dam,  a  certain  one ;  plur.,  some, 

178.  1. 


duidem,  adv.,  indeed. 

duilibet,  quoelibet,  quodlibet,  any 
one,  any  you  please,  178,  2. 

duin,  conj.,  but  that,  that  not,  558,  b 

duindecim,  mdecX.,  fifteen. 

duinge^t-i,  oe,  %five  hundred. 

duinque,  indecl.,^z;e. 

duint-us,  a,  um.,  fifth. 

duire,  to  be  able,  606. 

duis,  quae,  quid,  interrog.,  who, 
which,  what  1  170. 

duisnam,  qua)nam,  quidnam  ?  pray 
\ohol  what?  171. 

duispiam,  quaspiam,  quodpiam,  quid 
piam,  somebody,  some,  178,  4. 

duisquam,  quicquam,  or  quodquam, 
any,  any  one,  178,  3. 

duisque,  quaeque,  quodque,  quid- 
que,  each,  every  one,  178,  6. 

duisquis,  whoever,  whatever,  637,  3. 

duivis,  any  one  you  please,  178,  2. 

duo,  adv.,  whither,  in  which  direc- 
tion 1 

duo,  conj.,  to  the  end  that,  that,  so 
that,  558,  a. 

duod,  conj.,  because. 

duod,  rel.  pron.  neut.  of  qui. 

duomimis,  that  the  less,  that  not,  af- 
ter verbs  of  hindering,  &.C.,  558,  c, 

duondam,  adv.,  formerly,  at  on^ 
time. 

duoniam,  conj.,  since,  because. 

duoque,  conj.,  also. 

duot,  so  many,  how  many  1  184. 

duotannis,  adv.,  yearly. 

duotidian-us,  a,  um,  daily. 

duot-us,  a,  um,  what  one  1  quota 
hora,  what  d  clock  1 

duum,  conj.,  when,  since,  561 


Rapin-a,  oe,  rapine,  plunder. 
Ratio,  (ration)   is,  333,  R.,  reason, 

manner,  plan. 
Rauracus,  i,  a  Ranracian,  people  of 

Gaul. 


LATIN-ENGLISH   VOCABLLARY. 


377 


Rebellio,  (rebellion)  is,  333,  R.,  re- 
bellion. 

Ileced-6re  (cess-,  cess-,  401,  3,  h),  to 
give  way,  retreat. 

Recip-ere  (cep-,  cept-,  re+capere, 
io,  416,  c,  199),  to  receive  back, 
take  back ;  se  recipere,  to  take 
one's  self  back,  to  go  back. 

Rect-e,  adv.,  215,  1,  rightly. 

Redd- ere  (reddid-,  reddit-,  re+dare), 
666,  IV.,  c),  give  back,  return,  re- 
store. 

Redintegr-are  (av-,  at-),  to  renew. 

Redim-ere  (redem-,  redempt-,  re  + 
emere),  to  buy  back,  redeem,  farm 
(as  revenues). 

Reditio,  (redition)  is,  333,  R.,  return 
(redire). 

Reduc-6re  (dux-,  duct-,  re+ducere), 
to  bring,  bring  back. 

Referre  (retul-,  relat-,'  re+ferre),  to 
bring  back,  to  draw  back ;  pedem 
referre,  to  retreat. 

Refer t,  it  matters,  it  concerns,  it  in- 
terests, 584,  d. 

Refic-ere  (fee-,  feet-,  re+facere),  to 
renew,  rebuild, 

Reg-6re  (rex-,  rect-)  to  rule. 

Regin-a,  ae,  queen, 

Regn-are  (av-,  at-),  to  reign. 

Regn-um,  i,  kingdom,  royal  power. 

Relinqn-6re  (reliqu-,  relict-),  to  leave. 

Reliqui  ae,  arum,  57,  R.,  remains, 
remnant. 

Reliqu-us,  a,  um,  remaining. 

Reminisc-i  (dep.),  to  remember  (with 
gen). 

Rem6v-ere  (remdv-,  remot-),  to  re- 
move. 

Renunti-are  (av-,  at-),  to  bring  back 
word,  report. 

Repell-6re  (repul-,  repuls-,  re+pel- 
lere),  to  repd,  drive  back. 

Repente,  adv.,  suddenly. 

Repentin-us,  a,  uni,  sudden;  repen- 
fina  res,  the  sitdden  occurrence. 


Reper-Ire  (reper-,  repert-,  427,  V.), 
to  find  out,  to  discover. 

Repet-Sre  (repetiv-  and  repeti-,  re- 
petit-),  to  demand  back,  to  ash 
again 

Repugn-are  (av-,  at-,  re+pugnare) 
io  oppose,  resist. 

Res,  rei,  thing ;  res  novae  (pi.),  rev 
olutioTi^;  res  familiaris,  private 
property. 

Rescind-ere  (rescid-,  resciss-),  to  cut 
down,  to  cut  in  pieces. 

Resist-ere  (restit-,  restit-),  390,  in- 
trans.,  to  halt,  stop;  with  dat.,  to 
resist. 

Respond-ere  (respond-,  respons-,  665, 
IV.),  to  answer. 

Respublic-a,  reipublicae,  351,  3,  re- 
public, state.     ^  .     -      ■ 

Ret-e,  (ret)  is,  312,  net. 

Retin-ere  (retinu-,  retent-,  re+te- 
nere),  to  restrain,  hold  back,  re- 
tain. 

Revert-ere  (revert-,  revers-,  422),  to 
turn  back,  return. 

Revert-i  (revers-),  dep.,  to  return, 

Revoc-are  (av-,  at-),  to  call  back,  re- 
call. 

Rex,  (reg)  is  (m.),  king 

Rhen-us,  i,  Rhine  (river). 

Rhetoric-a,  ae,  rhetoric. 

Rhodau-us,  i,  Rhone  (river). 

Rid-ere  (ris-,  ris-),  to  laugh. 

Rip-a,  ae,  bank  of  a  river. 

Ris-us,  us,  laughter. 

Robur,  (robor)  is,  344,  a,  strength. 

Rog-are  (av-,  at-),  to  ask. 

Roman-US,  a,  um,  Roman;  Roma 
nus  (used  as  noun),  a  Roman. 

Romul-us,  i,  Romulus.  ' 

Ros-a,  ae,  a  rose. 

Rot-a,  ae,  tvheel. 

Ruber,  bra,  brum,  77,  a,  red. 

Rumor,  (rumor)  is,  319,  rumour,  re» 
port. 

Rursus,  adv.,  backward,  again. 

i2 


378 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


S. 
Sacer,  era,  cram,  77,  a,  sacred,.   Mons 

Sacer,  the  Sacred  Mount;  sacra, 

oi-um,  sacred  rites. 
Saepe,  adv.,  oftcTt,. 
SsBviti-a,  oe,  cruelty. 
Sagittari-us,  i,  archer. 
Sagunt-um,  i,  Saguntum,  &  town  in 

Spain. 
Salt-are  (av-,  at-),  to  dance. 
Salus,  (salut)  is,  293,  safety^ 
Salv-us,  a,  um,  saje. 
San-are  (av-,  at:),  to  heal,  cure. 
Sanct-us,  a,  um,  sacred. 
Sanguis,  (sanguin)  is  (m.),  blood. 
Sapiens,   (sapient)   is,   107,  wise,  a 

wise  man. 
Sapienter,  215,  2,  b,  wisely. 
Sapienti-a,  »,  wisdom. 
Satis,  adv.,  enough. 
Satius,  comp.  of  satis  ;  satius  est,  it 

is  better. 
Scliol-a,  as,  school. 
Scienti-a,  se,  science,  knoicledge. 
Scind-6re  (scid-,  sciss-),  to  cut,  cut 

down. 
Scipio,  (Scipion)  is,  Scipio. 
Sc-ire  (sciv-,  scit-),  to  k?tow. 
Scrib-ere  (scrips-,  script-),  to  write. 
Scriptor,  (scriptor)  is,  319,  writer. 
Se,  ace.  of  sui,  142. 
Seced-6re   (secess-,  secess-),  to  se- 
cede. 
Secreto,  adv.,  secretly,  privately. 
Secund-us,  a,  um,  second,  following. 
Sed,  but. 
Sed-ere  (sed-,  sess-,  394,  V.),  to  sit, 

sit  down. 
Seditios-us,  a,  um,  seditious. 
Semel,  adv.,  once ;  semel  atque  ite- 

ram,  once  and  again. 
Sementis>  (sement)  is,  a  sowing  (of 

com). 
Semper,  adv.,  always. 
Bempitern-us,  a,  um,  eternal. 
8euat-us,  us,  senate. 


Senex,  (sen)  is,  107,  old,  old  man. 
Senectus,  (senectut)  is,  293,  old  age 
Sen-i,  ae,  a,  six  each,  six  at  a  time, 

distiib.,  189. 
Sententi-a,  as,  opinion. 
Sent-ire  (sens-,  sens-),  to  feel,  think, 

perceive. 
Separ-are  (av-,  at-),  to  separate. 
Septem,  indecl.,  seven. 
September,  bris  (m.),  September. 
Septentrion-es,   um,   the  north,   the 

seven  stars  composing  Ursa  Major. 
Septim-us,  a,  um,  seventh. 
Septuaginta,  indecl.,  seventy. 
Sequan-a,  se,  Seine  (river). 
Sequan-us,  i,  Sequanian  (people  of 

Gaul). 
Sequ-i  (secut-),  dep.,  to  follow. 
Ser-6re  (sev-,  sit-),  to  sow,  plant. 
Sermo,  (sermon)  is,  331,  sjjeech. 
Sei-v-are  (av-,  at-),  to  keep,  preserve. 
Serv-us,  i,  slave. 
Severitas,  (severitat)  is.  293,  sever- 

ity. 
Sex,  indecl.,  six. 
Sext-us,  a,  um,  sixth. 
Si,  conj.,  if. 
Sic,  adv.,  so,  thus. 
Sicut,  conj.,  so  as,  just  ais. 
Sidus,   (sider)  is,  344,  b,  star,  coi^ 

stellation. 
Sigu-um;  i,  standard,  signal. 
Simil-is,  is,  e,  104,  like  (with  gen.  or 

dat.). 
Simul,   adv.,  together,  at  the  same 

time;  simulac,  simulatque,  as  soon 

as. 
Sin,  conj.,  but  if. 
Sine,  prep,  with  abl.,  witJiout. 
Sitis,  (sit)  is,  300,  thirst. 
Socer,  i,  65,  "R.,  father-in-law. 
Societas,  (societat)  is,  293,  society, 

fellowship. 
Soci-us,  i,  companion,  ally. 
Socrates,  (Socrat)  is,  Socrates. 
Sol,  (Sol)  is,  the  Sun. 


I.ATIN-ENGLISll    VOCABULARY. 


379 


So/um,  adv.,  only;  non  solum — sed 
etiam,  not  only — hut  also. 

Sol-US,  a,  um,  gen.  solius,  194,  R.  1, 
alone. 

Somn-us,  i,  sleep. 

Sordid-US,  a,  um,  sordid,  mean. 

Soror,  (soror)  is,  sister. 

Sors,  (sort)  is,  293,  lot. 

Spati-um,  i,  space,  opportunity ;  spa- 
tium  arma  capiendi.  time  for  ta- 
king up  arms,  492,  a. 

Speci-es,  ei,  appearance. 

Spect-are  (av-,  at-),  to  look,  look  at. 

Spes,  ei,  hope. 

Splendid-US,  a,  um,  brilliant,  .splen- 
did. 

Splendor,  (splendor)  is,  319,  sjtlen- 
dour,  glare. 

St-are  (stet-,  stSt-,  387,  III.),  to  stand. 

Statim,  adv.,  immediately. 

Statio,  (station)  is,  333,  R.,  station, 
post. 

Statu-6re  (statu-,  statut-),  to  appoint, 
fix,  decide. 

Stell-a,  te,  star. 

Stipendi-um,  i,  tribute,  tax. 

Stipendiari-us,  a,  um,  tributary. 

Stoicus,  i,  a  Stoic. 

String-6re  (strinx-,  strict-),  to  draw 
-.  (as  a  sword). 

Studios©,  215,  1,  zealously,  studi- 
ously. 

Studi-um,  i,  zeal,  study,  desire. 

Stultiti-a,  ae,  folly. 

Stult-us,  a,  um,  foolish ;  stultus,  a 
fool. 

Suad-ere  (suas-,  suas-),  to  advise,  to 
persuade. 

Suav-is,  is,  e,  104,  sweet. 

Sub,  prep,  with  ace.,  up  to,  under; 
with  abl.,  under. 

Subesse  (sub+esse),  to  be  ttnder,  to 
be  near. 

Subig-ere  ( subeg-,-  subact-,  sub  + 
agere),  to  subdue. 

8ub-ire  (iv-,  it-),  to  go  under,  to  un- 


dergo;  ad  pericula  subeunda,/or 

undergoing  perils. 
Subito,  adv.,  suddenly. 
Subjic-^efe   (subjec-,  subject-,  sub  + 

jacere),  to  throto  under,  to  throw 

up. 
Sublatus,  a,  um,  part,  of  toUere,  ela- 
ted, puffed  up,  taken  away. 
Subsist-6re  (substit-),  to  stand  still, 

to  halt. 
Subsidi-um,  i,  assistance,  a  reserve 

of  troops. 
Suev-us,   i,  a  Suevian   (people  of 

Germany). 
Sufferre  (sustul-,  sublat-,  sub+ferre^ 

to  bear,  sustain. 
Sui,  reflex,  pron.,  142,  himself,  h-er- 

self,  &c. 
Sum,  I  am.     (See  esse.) 
Sum-ere  (Sumps-,  sumpt-,  401,  4,  b), 

to  take. 
Summ-us,  a,  um  (superl.  of  superus, 

370),  highest,  top  of  a  thing ;  in 

summo  monte,  on  the  top  of  the 

mountain. 
Sumpt-us,  us,  expense  ;  sumptu  suo, 

at  his  own  expense. 
Super-are  (av-,  at-),  to  overcome. 
Superior,  oris   (compar.  of  superus, 

370),  higher. 
Suppet-6re  (suppetiv-  and  suppeti-, 

suppetit),  to  be  at  hand,  to  be  in 

store. 
Supplici-um,  i,  punishment. 
Suscip-6re  (susoep-,  suscept-,  sub+ 

capere),  to  undertake. 
Suspicio,  (suspicion)  is,  333,  R.,  sms- 

picion. 
Sustin-ere  (sustinu-,  sustent-,  sub-4* 

tenere),  to  sustain. 
Suus,  a,  um,  one's  own,  143. 

T. 

Tac-ere  (tacu-,  tacit-),  intrans,,  to  bo 

silent ;  trans.,  to  keep  secret. 
Toedet,  pertaesum  est  (impcrs.,  576), 


380 


LATIN-frNGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


it  wearies,  it  disgusts ;  me  tsedet, 
r  am  disgusted. 

Talis,  is,  e,  184,  such. 

Tarn,  adv.,  so. 

Tameii,  conj.,  nevertheless. 

Tang-6re  {  tetig-,  tact-,  411  ),  to 
touch. 

Tanquam,  adv.,  as,  like. 

Tantum,  so  much  (neut.  of  tantus) ; 
taiitum  aari,  so  much  gold,  186. 

Tant-us,  a,  um,  184,  so  great. 

Tard-are  (av-,  at-),  to  delay.. 

Taur-us,  i,  bull. 

Tel-um,  i,  weajyon,  dart. 

Temere,  adv.,  rashly. 

Temeritas,  (temeritat)  is,  293,  rash- 
ness. 

Temper-are  ( av-,  at- ),  to  refrain 
from ;  ab  injuria  temperare,  to 
refrain  from  outrage. 

Temperanti-a,  ae,  temperance. 

Tempestas,  (tempestat) is,2QZ,storm, 
tempest. 

Templ-um,  i,  temple;  templum  de 
marmcre,  temple  of  marble,  mar- 
ble temple. 

Tempus,  (temper)  is,  344,  h,  time. 

Tenax,  (tenajs)  is,  107,  tenacious, 
firm,. 

Tener,  a,  um,  77,  b,  tender. 

Ten-ere  (tenu-,  tent-),  to  hold. 

Terg-um,  i,  bach. 

Terni,  ae,  a  (distrib.,  189),  three  apiece, 
three  at  a  time. 

Terr-a,  ae,  earth ;  terra  marique,  by 
land  and  sea. 

Terr-ere  (terru-,  territ-),  to  terrify. 

Terti-us,  a,  um,  third. 

Tiberi-us,  i,  Tiberius. 

Themistocles,  (Themistocl)  is,  J^he- 
inistocles. 

Tigurinus  pagus,  The  canton  of  Zu- 
rich. 

Tim-ere  (timu-),  to  fear. 

Timid-US,  a,  um,  timid. 


Timor,  (timor)  is,  319, /mr. 

Tiro,   (tiron)   is,  107,  inexperienced,, 

raio. 
Toler-are  (av-,  at-),  to  endure. 
ToU-ere  (sustul-,  sublat-),  to  lift  up^ 

take  away. 
Tot,  so  many,  184. 
Tot-US,  a,  um,  gen.  lus,  194,  R.  1, 

whole,  all. 
Trabs,  (trab)  is,  beam,  293. 
Trad-6re  (tradid-,  tradit-),  to  surren^ 

der. 
Tragul-a,   se,  a  dart  (used  by  the 

Gauls). 
Trah-ere    (trax-,   tract-,   401,    2),    to 

draw. 
Trajic-6re  (trajec-,  ti'aject-),  transit, 

to  throto  or  convey  over ;  intrans., 

to  cross  over. 
Tranquill-iter,    adv.,    calmly,   tran- 
quilly (215,    2,   tranquillus,   tran- 
quil). 
Tra.nsduc-6re  (transdux-,  transduct-) 

to  lead  across. 
Trans-ire  (iv-,  it-),  to  cross  or  pass 

over. 
Transn-are  (av-,  at-),  to  swim  across, 
Tredecim,  indecl.,  thirteen. 
Tres,  tria,  194,  three. 
Tribuu-us,  i,  tribune. 
Triginta,  thirty. 
Triplex,  (triplic)  is,  107,  triple,  th  fe« 

fold. 
Tripartite,  adv.,  in  three  divisions. 
Tristiti-a,  ae,  sadness. 
Tu,  thou,  130. 

Tullus  Hostilius,  Tullus  Hostilius. 
Turn,  adv.,  then. 
Turbo,  (turbin)   is   (m.,  340),  whirl 

wind. 
Turp-is,  is,  e,  104,  base. 
Turpiter,  adv.,  215,  2,  a,  basely. 
Tun-is,  (turr)  is,  302,  tower. 
Tut-us,  a,  um,  safe. 
Tu-us,  a,  um,  thy,  thine,  134. 


i 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


381 


u.  . 

Ubi,  adv.,  wJiere,  wfien. 
Ubinam?  whe7-e  in  the  world?  297,  d. 
UU-us,  a,  um,  gen.  ius,  194,  1,  any. 
Ulterior,  ius  (compar.  of  ultra,  371), 

farther. 
Ultro,  adv.,  of  one's  own  accord. 
Ulysses,  (Ulyss)  is,  Ulysses. 
Umbr-a,  ae,  shade,  shadow. 
Una,  adv.,  together. 
Uiide,  adv.,  whence. 
Undecim,  indecl.,  eleven. 
Undique,  2A\.tfrom  all  sides. 
Univers-us,    a,   um,    universal,    the 

whole. 
Unquaru,  adv.,  ever. 
Un-us,  a,  um,  gen.  unlus,  194,  one. 
Unusquisque,  178,  6,  each  one. 
Urbs,  (urb)  is,  293,  city. 
Usque,  adv.,  as  far  as  ;  usque  ad, 

even  up  to. 
Ut,  or  uti,  conj.,  that,  546. 
Uter,  utra,  utram,  194,  which  of  the 

two. 
Ut-i  (us-),  dep.  (with  abl.,  316,  R.),  to 

use,  employ 
Util-is,  is,  e,  104,  useful. 
Utinam,  conj.,  would  that,   O  that, 

528. 
Utrum,  conj.,  zvhether ;  utrum — an, 

whether — or. 
Uxor,  (uxor)  is  (f.),  wife. 


Vac-are  (av-,  at-j,  to  be  empty,  to  re- 
main unoccupied. 

Vag-ari  (vagat-),  dep.,  to  wander. 

Val-ere  (valu-),  to  avail;  plurimum 
valet,  is  most  powerful. 

Valid-us,  a,  um,  strong. 

Valde,  adv.,  greatly,  very  much. 

Valetudo,  (valetudin)  is,  339,  health. 

Vall-um,  i,  rampart. 

Vast-are  (av-,  at-),  to  lay  waste. 

Vast-US,  a,  um,  vast.  [ute. 

Vectigal,  (vectigal)  is,  325,  fax,  trih- 


Veh-6re  (vex-,  vect-),  to  carry,  drive 
Vehementer,  adv.,  vehemently,  215, 

%h. 
Vel,  conj.,  or,  519,  2. 
Velle,  volui,  592,  to  wish,  to  be  able. 
Velox,  (veloc)  is.  107,  swift. 
Venator,  (venator)  is,  hunter. 
Vener-ari    (at-),  dep.^  to^  revere,  to 

venerate.     ,  .     * 

Venetus,  a,  um,  Venetiaru      '      - 
Veni-a,  sd,  pardon. 
V6n-ire    (ven-,  vent-,   426,   IV.),  to 

come. 
Vent-us,  i,  wiiid. 
Ver,  (ver)  is,  n.,  325,  spring 
Verber-ai-e  (av-,  at-),  to  flog 
Verb-um,  i,  word. 
Ver-eri  (verit-),  dep.,  tofeoft 
Verg-ere  (vers-),  ta  incline,  tend. 
Vero,  conj.,  but,  truly,  certainly,  173. 
Verres,  (Verr)  is,  Verres. 
Vert-ere  (vert-,  vers-,  421,  b),  to  turn. 
Ver-us,  a,  um,  true. 
Versus,  prep,  with  ace,  towards. 
Vester,  tra,  trum,  your,  134. 
Veteran-US,  a,  um.,  veteran. 
Vetus,  (veter)  is,  108,  B,.  2,  old. 
Vexill-um,  i,  standard. 
Vi-a,  86,  way ;  Via  Sacra,  the  Sacred^ 

Way,  a  street  in  Rome. 
Victori-a,  8B,  victory. 
Vic-us,  i,  village. 
Vid-ere  (vid-,  vis-,  394,  V.),  to  see; 

videri,  pass.,  to  seem,  appear. 
VigUanti-a,  as,  vigilance. 
Vigil-are  (av-,  at-),  to  watch. 
Vigili-a,  se,  watch ;  de  tertia  vigilia, 

about  or  after  the  third  watch. 
Viginti,  indecl.,  twenty. 
Vil-is,  is,  e,  104,  cheap,  vile. 
Vinc-Sre  (vie-,  vict-),  to  conquer. 
Vincul-um,  i,  bond. 
Vindex,  (vindic)  is,  avenger. 
Vin-um,  i,  wine. 

Viol-are  (av-,  at-),  to  violate,  lay  wasH 
Vir,  i,  man. 


382 


LATIN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


Virgili-us,  i,  Virgil. 
Virgo,  (virgin)  is,  33&,  virgin. 
Viriliter,  adv.,  maTily,  courageously. 
Virtus,  (virtut)  is,  293,  valour,  ifir- 
•  tue. 
Vis,  vim,  vi,  301,  2,  strength,  force ; 

pi.-,  vires,  ium. 
Vit-a,  ae,  life. 

Vit-are  (av-,  at-),  to  shun,  avoid. 
Viti-iHn,  i,  vice. 
Viv-ere  (vix-,  vict-)l  to  live, 
Vix,  adv.,  scarcely  : 

Voc-ftre  (av-,  at-),  o  call. 


Vol-are  (av-,  at-),  tajly.j 

Yo\o,  I  wish.    (/SeeveUe.) 

Voluntas,  ( voluntat )  is,  293,  will^ 
wish. 

Voluptas,  (voluptat)  is,  293,  pleas- 
ure. 

Volv-6re  (volv-,  volut-),  to  roll 

Vos,  you^  130. 

Vox,  (voc)  is,  293,  voice. 

Vulg-us,  i,  n.,  62,  R.  1,  the  common 
people. 

Vulner-are  (av-,  at-),  to  wound. 

Vulnus,  (vulner)  is,  344,  b,  wound. 


m 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY. 


"^ 


-^ 


'■^  If 


^- 


i 


,,0^'- 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


Ability,  facultas,  (facultat)  is,  293. 

Able  (to  be),  posse,  quire  (queo). 

Abode,  domiciliiun,  i. 

Abound,  abundare. 

About,  circiter  (concerning) ;  de,  abl. 

Abrogate,  abrogare. 

Absent  (to  be),  abesse. 

Abstain  from,  abstingre  (abstinu-, 
abstent-). 

Accuse,  incusare. 

Accustomed  ( to  be ),  consuesc^re 
(suev-,  suet-). 

Acquit,  absolvere,  421,  a. 

Act,  agere. 

Act  of  kindness,  beneficium,  i. 

Add,  addere,  411,  c. 

Admire,  mirari,  admirftri  (dep.). 

Admonish,  monere. 

Adore,  adorare. 

Adorn,  ornare. 

Advice,  consilium,  i. 

Advise,  monere,  admon6re. 

^duan,  ^duuB,  i. 

Affair,  res,  117. 

Affection,  affectio,  333,  B, 

Affirm,  confirmare. 

Affoi-d,  proebSre,  527. 

After,  post  (with  accus.) ;  de  (with 
abl.). 

After  that,  postquam. 

Again,  rursus  ;  itenim,  adv. 

Against,  contra ;  adversus  (with  ac- 
cus.) ;  against  Cicero,  in  Cicero- 
nem. 

Age  (time  of  life),  aetas,  (aetat)  is,  293. 

Agree,  consentire,  427,  III. 

Agreeable,  gratus  a,  um  (with  dat.) ; 
it  is  agreeable,  libet,  or  lubet,  583. 

K 


Aid,  auxilium,  i;  to  aid,  adjuvar». 

390. 
Alarm,  perturbflre. 
All,  omnis,  e ;  cuncttiS,  a,  um ;  in  all 

adv.,  omnino. 
Allowed  (it  is),  licet,  583. 
Ally,  socius,  i. 
Almost,  fere ;  pene,  advr. 
Alone,  solus,  194,  R.  1 ;  onus. 
Already,  jam,  adv. 
Also,  etiam,  adv. 
Altogether,  omnino,  adv. 
Although,  quamvis,  conj. 
Always,  semper. 
Ambassador,  legatus,  i. 
Ambush,  insidioe,  57,  R. 
Amiable,  amabilis,  e,  104. 
Among,  inter  (with  ace). 
Ancients  (the),  veteres ;  pi.  of  vetus, 

old. 
And,  et,  que,  ac,  atque  ;  and  not, 

neque. 
Anger,  ira,  ob. 
Animal,  animal,  320. 
Announce,  nuntiare. 
Answer,  respondSre. 
Antony,  Antonius,  i. 
Any,  uUus,  a,  um,  194,  K.  1  ;  any 

one,  any  you  please,  &c.    See  178. 
Apart  (to  be),  distare. 
Apiece,  use  the  distrib.  numerals,  1S9. 
Apply,  adhibere  (u-,  it-). 
Appoint,  constituere,  421,  a. 
Approach,    adventus,    us  ;    to    ajh 

proach,  appropinquSre :  accedgru. 
Archer,  Sagittarius,  i. 
Arise  (as  a  stonn),  cooriri  (coort-), 

dep. 
Arm,  armai'e. 


38G 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


Arms,  arma,  orum. 

Army,  exercitus,  us. 

AiTange,  disponere,  406,  b. 

Arrival,  adventus,  us. 

Arrive  at,  pervenire,  427,  IV. 

Art,  ars,  (art)  is,  293. 

Artificer,  faber,  fabri,  77,  a. 

As,  conj.,  ut ;  as,  of  what  kind,  qua- 
ils, lfe4 ;  as  far  as  to,  usque ;  as 
soon  as,  simulatque. 

Ashamed  (one  is),  pudet,  579.    , 

Ask,  rogare,  postulare. 

Assemble,  convenire,  427,  IV; 

Assist,  adjuvare,  390. 

Assistance,  auxilium,  i. 

Association,   societas,    (societat)    is. 

Assure,  confii-mare.  [293. 

At,  ad,  apud ;  at  hortte,  domi  j  ai 
length,  deraum. 

Athenian,  Atheniensis,  is. 

Athens,  Athenae,  arum. 

Attack  (noun),  impetus,  us;  (verb), 
oppugnare. 

Austerity,  severitas,  (severitat)  is, 
293. 

AiLxiliaries,  auxilia,  orum. 

Avail,  valere. 

Avaricious,  avarus,  i. 

Avoid,  vitare. 

Await,  expectare. 

B. 

Back,  tergum,  i. 

Badly,  male,  adv.,  215,  R. 

Band  (of  men),  manus,  us. 

Barbarian,  barbarus,  i. 

Base,  turpis,  e,  104 ;  basely,  tui-pi- 

ter,  215,  2,  a. 
Battle,  proelium,  i. 
Be,  esse ;  be  among,  interesse,  174  ; 

he  over,  prseesse  ;  be  wanting,  de- 

esse,  with  dat. 
Beam,  trabs,  (trab)  is,  293. 
Bear  (verb),  fen'e,  596. 
Beast,  bestia,  ae  ;  beast  of  burden, 

junientum,  i 


Beautiful,  pulcher,  chra,  cliru  Di,  77,  a. 
Because,  conj.,  quod,  quia,  propterea 

quod. 
Becoming  (it  is),  decet,  583. 
Bed,   cubrle,    (cubil)    is,   312  ,    bed 

chamber,  cubiculum,  i. 
Before,  prep.,  ante  (ace.)  ;  adv.,  an- 

tea  ;  befoi'e  that,  antequam. 
Beg,  rogare,  orare. 
Begin,  incipere,   416,   c;   I  begin, 

ccepi,  611. 
Beginning,  initium,  i. 
Behold,  spectare. 
Behooves  (it),  oportet,  583. 
Belgian,  Belga,  se. 
Believe,  cred6re,  411,  c. 
Belong,  pertinere,  394,  I. 
Benevolent,  benevolus,  a,  um. 
Benevolence,  benevolentia,  as. 
Beseech,  obsecrare. 
Besiege,  oppugnare. 
Best,  optimus,  a,  um,  370. 
Betake  on^s  self,  se  recipere,  418,  a 
Better^  melior,  370. 
Between,  inter. 
Bind,  obstringere. 
Bird,  avis  (avis),  300. 
Bit,  fraenum,  i;  pi.,  i  and  a,  396. 
Bite,  mordere,  395,  IV. 
Black,  niger,  gra,  §mra,  77,  a 
Blame,  incusare,  vituperare. 
Blood,  sanguis,  (sanguin)  is  (m.). 
Blooming,  florens,  (florent)  is,  107 
Boast,  praedicare. 
Body,  corpus,  (coi-por)  is,  344 
Bond,  vinculum,  i. 
Book,  liber,  bri. 
Booty,  preeda,  ae. 
Born  (to  be),  nasci  (nat),  dep. 
Boundary,  finis,  (fin)  is  (m.). 
Boy,  puer,  i. 
Brave,  fortis,   e ;    bravely,  fortitsr 

215,  2. 
Bravery,  virtus,  (virtut)  is,  293. 
Break  through,   perfriugere    (page 

275) ;  perrumpere,  666,  V.,  a. 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


387 


Bridge,  pons,  (poat)  is,  295,  R.  1. 
Bring,  ducere,  ag^re ;  bring  back,  re- 

duc6re  ;  bring  back  word,  renun- 

tiare  ;   b7-ing  to  pass,  perficSre ; 

bring  together,  cogere,  416,  b. 
Britain,  Britannia,  ae ;  Briton,  Bri- 

taunus,  i. 
Broad,  latus,  a,  um. 
Brother,  frater,  (fratr)  is. 
Build,  sedificare ;  buUd  a  nest,  nidi- 

ficare. 
Bull,  taui'us,  i. 
Burn,  incendSre ;  burn  up,  exurgre, 

545. 
Burden,  onus,  (oner)  is,  344. 
Burst  into,  irrump6re,  666,  V.,  a. 
Business,  negotium,  i. 
But,  sed,  autem. 
Buy,  emere  ;  buy  up,  coemSre. 
By,  prep,  with  abl.,  a  or  ab,  93,  2. 
By  night,  noctu,  adv. 


Ccesar,  Caesar,  (Caesar)  is. 

Call,  vocare ;  to  name,  appellare ; 
to  be  called,  nominari,  appellari. 

Call  together,  convocare. 

Call-upon,  invocare. 

Camp,  castra,  cram. 

Can  (to  be  able),  posse,  587  ;  /  can- 
not, non  possum,  nequeo. 

Captive,  captivus,  i. 

Care  (noun),  cura,  se;  (verb),  curare. 

Carefully,  diligenter,  studiose. 

Carry,  portare,  veh6re ;  carry  on, 
gerere,  401,  4,  a. 

Carthage,  Carthago,  (Carthagin)  is. 

Cassius,  Cassius,  i. 

Casticus,  Casticus,  i. 

Catiline,  Catilina,  ae. 

Cause,  causa,  ae. 

Cautious,  cautus,  a,  um. 

Cavalry,  equitatus,  us ;  belonging 
to  cavalry,  equestris,  e,  104. 

Celebrate,  celebrarc. 

Celt,  Celta,  ae. 


Censure,  incusare. 

Centurion,  centurio,  (centurion)  is. 

Certain,  cei'tus,  a,  um ;  a  certain 
one,  quidam,  178. 

Certainly,  adv.,  certe :  profecto,  vero. 

Chain,  vinculum,  i. 

Change  (noun),  commutatio,  (com- 
mutation) is ;  (verb),  mutare,  com 
mutare. 

Champ,  mordere,  395,  IV. 

Chide,  increpare,  390. 

Chief,  princeps,  (princip)  is,  107. 

Child,  infans,  (infant)  is,  107;  chil- 
dren, liberi,  orum. 

Choose,  deligere,  666,  V.,  a. 

Christ,  Christus,  i. 

Cicero,  Cicero,  (Ciceron)  is. 

Citadel,  arx,  (arc)  is,  293. 

Citizen,  civis,  (civ)  is,  c,  25,  a. 

City,  urbs,  (urb)  is,  293. 

Cloud,  nubes,  (nub)  is,  300 ;  clond, 
of  dust,  vis  pulveris. 

Cohort,  cohors,  (cohort)  is,  293. 

Cold,  frigidus,  a,  um ;  (noun),  frigus, 
(frigor)  is,  344. 

Collect,  coUigere  (leg-,  lect-) ;  co- 
gere (coeg-,  coact-) ;  collect  corn, 
fnimentari,  dep. ;  collect  into  a 
flock,  congregare. 

Colour,  color,  (color)  is,  319. 

Come,  venire,  427,  IV. ;  come  tiear, 
appropinquare ;  come  to,  pei-ve- 
nlre ;  come  together,  convenlre. 

Coming,  adventus,  us. 

Command,  imperare,  with  dat. 

Commander,  imperator,  (imperator) 
is,  319. 

Commit,  committ6re ;  commit  svi' 
aide,  mortem  sibi  conscisc6re. 

Comm,on,  communis,  e,  104. 

Common-people,  plebs,  (pleb)  is,  293. 

Companion,  socius,  i;  comes,  (co 
mit)  is. 

Compel,  poggre,  416,  h. 

Complain,  queri  (quest),  dep 

Complete,  conficSre. 


388 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY. 


Concerning  (prep,  with  abl.),  de* 

Concerns  (it),  interest,  refert,  584.  d. 

Condemn,  daxonai-e,  condemnare, 
348. 

Conference,  colloquium,  i. 

Confess,  fateri,  dep. 

Canjines,  fines,  pi.  o/"  finis. 

Conflict,  congressus,  us. 

Confirm,  confirmare. 

Confound,  perturbsirte. 

Congratulate,  gratulari,  dep. 

Conquer,  vincere  (vie-,  vict-) ;  supe- 
rare. 

Conqueror,  victor,  (victOr)  is,  319. 

Conspiracy,  conjuratio,  (conjuration) 
is,  333,  R. 

Consul,  consul,  (consul)  is. 

Consult,  consulSre  (consulu-,  con- 
sult-). 

Contemplate,  contemplari,  dep. 

Contend,  contendere. 

Content,  contentus,  a,  urn  (with  abl.). 

Continuous,  continens,  (continent) 
is,  107. 

Continuance,  continuatio,  (continua- 
tion) is. 

Corn,  frumentum,  i. 

Council,  concilium,  i. 

Counsel,  consilium,  i. 

Course,  cursus,  us. 

Covetous,  cupidus,  a,  um. 

Cow,  vacca,  ae. 

Cowardice,  ignavia,  ae. 

Creak,  crepare,  390. 

Create,  creftre. 

Crime,  crimen,  (crimin)  is,  344,  a. 

Cross  over,  transire,  trajicfire. 

Croto,  corvus,  i. 

Crown,  corona,  ce. 

Cry  out,  exclamare. 

Cultivation,  cultus,  us  ;  humanitas. 

Ctip,  poculum,  i. 

Cure,  sanare. 

Custom,  mos,  (mor)  is,  331,. Z*. 

Cut  dozon,  rescindgre  (rescid-,  re- 
sciss-). 


Cut  to  pieces,  caedere,  411.  b. 
Cy7-us,  Cyrus,  i. 

B. 

Daily,  adj.,  quotidianus,  a,  um ;  adv^ 
quotidie. 

Dance,  saltare. 

Danger,  periculom,  i. 

Danube,  Danubius,  i. 

Dare,  audere  (ausus  sum). 

Dart,  telum,  i ;  pilum,  i. 

Daughter,  filia,  a;. 

Day,  dies,  ei,  116,  R,.,  by  day;  in- 
terdiu,  adv. ;  to-day,  hodie,  a6v 

Dragon,  draco,  (dracon)  is. 

Dead,  mortuus,  a,  um. 

Dear,  carus,  a,  um. 

Death,  mors,  (mort)  is,  293. 

Deceive,  fall6re  (fefell-,  fals-). 

Decide  on,  statuSre. 

Decree  (verb),  decemSre  (decrev-, 
decret-) ;  (noun),  decretuni,  i ;  de- 
cree of  the  senate,  senatus  consul- 
turn. 

Deep,  altus,  a,  um. 

Defeat,  pell6re,  411,  b. 

Defend,  defendere,  421,  c 

Defence,  munitio,  333. 

Defender,  vindex,  (vindic)  is,  306. 

Defiles,  angustiae,  arum,  57,  B. 

Delay,  cunctari  (dep.) ;  active,  tar- 
dare  (to  retard). 

Deliberate,  deliberai-e. 

Delight,  delectare. 

Delight  (with),  libenter,  adv. 

Demand,  posc6re,  411,  a;  postulare, 
imperare,  390;  demand  back,  re- 
petSre. 

Deny,  negare. 

Depart,  discedSre,  401,  3,  b. 

Depart  out  of,  excedgre. 

Departure,  discessus,  us. 

Dependant,  cliens,  (client)  is,  c 

Descend,  descendere. 

Desert,  desergre,  406,  a;  a  desert, 
desertum,  i. 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


3Sg 


Deserter,  perfuga,  as. 

Desire,    cupiditas,    ( cupiditat )    is  , 
(verb),  cupere  (io) :  studium,  L 

Desirous,  cupidus,  a,  um. 

Despair  (verb),  desperare ;  (noun), 
desperatio,  333,  R. 

Despise,  spem6re,  406,  III.,  a:  con- 
temnSre. 

Destroy,  delere,  394,  II. 

Destruction,  interitus,  us. 

Determi?ie,  constituSre,  statuSre. 

Devoid,  expers,  336. 

Die,  moriri,  or  morl  (mortu-),  dep. 

Difference  (it  makes  no),  nihil  inter- 
est, nihil  refert. 

Differerd,  diversus,  a,  um ;  alius,  194, 
11.1. 

Difficult,  difficilis,  e,  104. 

Dignity,  dignitas,  (dignitat)  is,  293. 

Diligence,  dihgentia,  se. 

Diligent,  diligens,  (diligent)  is.  107 ; 
diligently,  adv.,  diligenter. 

Diminish,  minuere,  diminu6re. 

Direct  (of  a  ship),  gubemare. 

Disagree,  dissentire,  427,  III. 

Discipline,  disciplina,  m. 

Discomfit,  fagare. 

Discover,  invenire,  427,  IV. 

Discourse,   disserere    (disseru-,  dis- 
sert-). 

Discretion,  consilium,  i. 

Dismiss,  dimittere  (mis-,  miss-). 

Displease,  displicere  (displicu-,  dis- 
plicit-),  with  dat.,  161,  R. 

Dispute,  disputare. 

Dissolve,  dissolvere,  421,  a. 

Distant  (to  be),  distare. 

Distribute,  distribuere,  406,  a;  ar- 
range, dispongre. 

District,  pagus,  i. 

Divide,  dividere,  401,  3,  a ;  divide 

among,  distribuere,  423,  c. 
Divulge,  enuntiare. 
Do,  agere,  fac6re. 
Dock-yard,  navale,  (naval)  is,  312. 
Doer,  canis,  (can)  is. 

K 


Door,  foris,  (for)  is,  300. 

Double,  duplicare. 

Doubt,  dubitare. 

Doubtful,  incertus,  a,  um ;  dubiua, 
a,  um. 

Dove,  columba,  a;. 

Draw,  trah^re  (trax-,  tract-)  ;  du- 
cere  (dux-,  duct-) ;  draio  up,  in- 
struSre,  401,  2 ;  draw  as  a  sword, 
stringere,  401 ;  draw  out,  educSre. 

Dread,  formidare. 

Drive,  ag6re  ;  drive  back,  repellere  j 
drive  on,  or  together,  compell6re. 

Druids,  Druides,  um,  pi. 

Duty,  munus,  (muner)  is,  344. 

E. 
Each,  quisque,  178  ;  omnis,  e ;  each 

of  the  two,  uterque. 
Eagle,  aquila,  se. 
Earth,  terra,  aj. 
Easily,  facile  (adv.). 
East,  Oriens. 

Easy,  facilis,  e  ;  very  ms5^,perfacilis. 
Educate,  educare. 
Egypt,  Egyptus,  i  (f.). 
Eighty,  octoginta. 
Eloquent,  facundus,  a,  um ;  disertuB, 

a,  um ;  eloquens,  107. 
Embark  (upon),  conscendSre,  309 
Embrace,  amplecti  (amplex-),  dep. 
Emperor,  imperator,  (imperator)  is, 

319. 
Employ,  uti  (us-),  dep.,  with  abl. 

adhibere. 
End,  finis,  (fin)  is  (m.). 
Endeavour,  conari  (conat-),  dep. 
Endure,  durare ;  to  bear,  tolerftre. 
Enemy,  hostis,  (host)  is,  a 
Enjoin  upon,  proecip6re 
Enmity,  inimicitia,  se. 
Enough,  satis,  adv. 
Enrol,  conscribere. 
Entreat,  rogare. 
Equanimity  (with),  aequo  animo. 
Erect,  communire. 
K  2 


?^0 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY. 


Err,  errare. 

Especially,  adv ,  prsesertim. 

Establish,  confinxiare. 

Eternity,  aeternitas,(aetemitat)  is,  293 

Even  up  to,  usque  ad. 

Ever,  unquam. 

Everlasting,  sempitemus,  a,  um. 

Every,  omnis,  e,  104. 

Evil,  malum,  i. 

Evil-deed,  maleficium,  i. 

Example,  exemplum,  i. 

Excel,  prsBstare  (praestit-),  with  dat. 

Excellent,  jjraBclarus,  a,  um;  prses- 

tans,  107. 
Excite,  excitare. 
Excuse,  excusatio,  333,  IL 
Exercise,  exercere. 
Exhort,  hortari,  dep. 
Expedient  (it  is),  expedit,  583. 
Expel,  expellers. 
Expense,  sumptus,  us;  at  his  own 

expense,  sumptu  suo. 
Eye,  oculus,  i. 

F. 
Fahle,  fabula,  ee. 
Faith,  fides,  ei. 
Fail,  deficere. 
Fall,  oadere,  411,  b. 
Fame,  fama,  aa. 
Family  of  slaves,  familia,  09. 
Far,  longe,  adv. 
Farm  (as  revenues),  redim6re. 
Farmer,  agricola. 
Father,  pater,  (patr)  is. 
Father-in-laio,  socer,  i. 
Fault,  culpa,  se;  peccatum,  i;Jlnd 

fault  with,  culpare,  incusare. 
Favour,  venia,   83 ;    (verb),  favere, 

395,  V. 
Fear,  timor,  (timor)  is,  319 ;  (verb), 

timere,  metuere. 
Feather,  pluma,  as. 
Fell  (cut  down),  casdere,  413,  I^^. 
Few,  pauci,   8e,  a ;   very  feto^  per- 

pauci. 


Fidelity,  fides,  ei. 

Field,  ager,  gri. 

Fierce,  ferox,  (feroc)  is,  107:  atrox, 

107. 
Fifth,  quintus,  a,  um. 
Fight,  pugnare. 
Figure,  figura,  se. 
Fill,    implere  ;  Jill    up,   complere 

395,  IL 
Finally,  denique,  adv. 
Find,  invenire,  427,  IV.;  find  out, 

reperire,  427,  V. 
Find  fault  with,  incusare. 
Finish,  conficere. 
Fire,  ignis,  (ign)  is  (m.). 
Firmament,  coelum,  i. 
First,  primus,  a,  um. 
Fish,  piscis,  (pise)  is  (m.). 
Fit  for,  idoneus,  a,  um,  with  dat. 
Five,  quinque  ;  five  at  a  time,  quini 

189. 
Flag,  vexillum,  i. 
Flame,  flamma,  se. 
FUe,  fugere  (io),  416,  c. 
Fleet,  classis,  (class)  is,  300. 
Flesh,  caro,  (cam)  is  (f.). 
Flight,  fuga,  oe. 
Flock,  grex,  (greg)  is  (m.) ;  in  flocks, 

gregatim,  adv. 
Flog,  verberare. 
Flow,  •  finer e;  flow  together,  conflu- 

ere,  401,  2,  422. 
Flower,  flos,  (flor)  is,  331,  b. 
Fly,  volare. 

Folloio  sequi  (secut-),  dep. 
Folly,  stultitia,  se ;   ineptiaa,  anim, 

57,  H. 
Fool,  stultus,  i;  foolish,  stultus,  a. 

um. 
Foot,  pes,  (ped)  is  (m.). 
Foot-soldier,  pedes,  (pedit)  is. 
For,  conj.,  enim,   etenim;  for  my 

sake,  mea  causa. 
Force,  vis,  vim,  vi,  301,   1 ;  forces 

(troops),  copise,  arum,  57,  a. 
Foreign,  alienua,  a,  um. 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY. 


391 


Forest,  sylva,  ae. 

Forever,  in  aetemum. 

Forget,  oblivisci,  with  gen. 

Form,  fonna,  ae. 

Fortification,  munltio,  (munition)  is. 

Fortify,  munire. 

Fortunate,  fortunatas,  a,  um. 

Fortune,  fortixna,  £b. 

Forum,  foram,  i. 

Four,  quattuor ;  four  apiece,  189.  - 

Founder,  conditor,  319. 

Fountain,  fons,  (font)  is  (m.). 

Frail,  fragilis,  e,  104. 

Free  from  (to  be),  cargre,  348. 

Friend,  amicus,  i. 

Friendship,  amicitia,  sb. 

Frighten,  terrere  ;  frighten  com- 
pletely, perterrere. 

From,  a,  de ;  from  every  side,  undi- 
que,  adv. ;  from  my  boyhood,  a 
puero. 

Frugality,  parsimonia,  ae. 
Fruit,  fructus,  us. 
Full,  plenus,  a,  um,  348,  b. 
Future,  futurua,  a,  van. 

G. 

Galba,  Galba,  se. 

Gain,  potiri,  209;  gain  for  another, 

conciliate. 
Game,  ludus,  i. 
Garden,  hortus,  i. 
Garrison,  prsesidium,  i. 
Gate,  porta,  se. 
Gather,  colligSre,  416,  b. 
Gaul,  Gallia,  oe;  the  Gauls,  Qalli, 

orum. 
General,  imperator,  319. 
German,  Germanus,  a,  um. 
Get  sight  of,  conspicfire  (conspex-, 

conspect-). 
Gift,  donum,  i. 
Girl,  puella,  ae. 
Give,  dare,  387,  III. 
Give  largess,  largiri  (It-),  dep. 
Glare,  splendor,  319. 


Glory,  gloria,  ae. 

Go,  ii-e,  605;  go  straight,  perg-gre; 
go  away,  discedere,  401,  3,  b ;  go 
fonoard,  procedere  ;  go  forth^  or 
out,  exire. 

Goad,  concitare. 

God,  Deus,  i,  62,  R.  3. 

Gold,  aurum,  i. 

Good,  bonus,  a,  um ;  good  deed,  ben- 
eficium ;  good-unll,  voluntas,  293. 

Govern,  gubemare. 

Grant  (verb),  concedere,  401,  3,  b , 
dare :  (noun),  concessus,  us. 

Great,  magnus,  a,  um;  comp.,  ma- 
jor; superl.,  maximus. 

Greatly,  valde. 

Greatness,  magnitudo,  339. 

Greek,  Graecus,  a,  um. 

Grief,  mosror,  319 ;  luctus,  us,  113,  N. 

Grieve,  dolere  ,  it  grieves  one,  piget. 
579. 

Guardian,  custos,  (custod)  is,  c, 
25,  a. 

Guest,  hospes,  (hospit)  is,  c,  25,  a. 

Guide,  dux,  (due)  is. 

H. 

Hail,  grando,  (grandin)  is,  339 

Halt, 

Hand,  manus,  us  (£). 

Hannibal,  Hannibal,  (Hannibal)  is. 

Happen,  accidSre ;  it  happens,  ac- 

cidit,  580. 
Happily,  beate. 

Happy,  beatus,  a,  tim ;  felix,  107 
Harass,  lacessSre,  406,  III.,  b. 
Harbinger,  praenuntia,  oe. 
Harbour,  portus,  us. 
Hard,  durus,  a,  um. 
Hasten,  festinare,  contendere. 
Hate  (to),  odisse,  611. 
Hatred,  odium,  1. 
Have,  habere  (habu-,  habit-).    I  have 

a  book,  est  mihi  liber,  125. 
He,  is,  hie,  iUe. 
Headlong, -j^rsice^B,  (praecipifc)  is  107 


392 


ENaLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


Heal,  sanare. 

Health,  valetudo,  339. 

Hear,  audire. 

Heart,  cor,  (cord)  is  (n.). 

Heaven,  coBlum,  i. 

Heavy,  gravis,  e,  104. 

Help,  auxilium,  i. 

Helvetian,  Helvetius,  a,  um. 

Herald,  praeco,  (praacon)  is. 

Herb,  herba,  oe. 

Hesitate,  dubitare. 

High,  altus,  a,  um ;  higher^  superior, 

comp.  of  superus,  370. 
HiU,  coUis,  is  (m.). 
Hillock,  tumulus,  i. 
Hinder,  impedire,  prohibere. 
His,  suus,  a,  um:  ejus. 
History,  bistoria,  se. 
Hold,  tenere,  obtin6re :  hold  bach, 

retinere. 
Home  (at),  domi,  gen.  of  domus. 
Honest,  probus,  a,  um. 
Honour,  honor,  319 ;  (verb),  colfire 

(colu-,  cult-)- 
Honourable,  honestus,  a,  um. 
Hove,  spes,  ei. 
Htfrn,  comu,  112: 
Homed,  comiger,  a,  um,  77,  b. 
Horse,  equus,  i. 
Morse-soldier,  eques,  (equit)  is. 
Hostage,  obses,  (obsid)  is,  c,  25,  a. 
Hour,  bora,  ae. 

House,  domus,  i  and  us  (f.),  112,  3. 
Household,  familia,  88. 
How  great,  how   many?    quantus, 

186,   obs. ;   however  great,   quan- 

tuscunque,  184  ;  how  long,  quam- 

diu,  adv. 
Humanity,  humanitas,  (humanitat) 

is,  293. 
Hunger,  fames,  (fam)  is,  300. 
Hurl,  conjicere,  416,  c  (conjee-,  con- 

ject-). 
Hurt,  nocero. 


/,  ego,  120. 

Ides,  Idus,  iduum  (f.). 

If»  si. 

Ignorance,  ignoratio,  339. 

Ignorant,  ignarus,  a,  um;  to  be  ig^ 

norant  of,  ignorare,  nescire. 
Illustrious,  clarus,  a,  um ;  pmscla' 

rus,  a,  um. 
Image,  imago,  339. 
Immediately,  statim. 
Immense,  immeusus,  a,  um. 
Immortal,  immortalis,  e,  104. 
Impious,  impius,  a,  um. 
Implore,  implorare. 
In,  prep.,  in,  with  abl. 
Incessant,  continens,  (continent)  is, 

107. 
Increase,  augere  (aux-,  auct-). 
Incredible,  incredibilis,  e,  104. 
Indeed,  quidem. 

Indolence,  inertia,  ae ;  ignavia,  89. 
Indolent,  ignavus,  a,  um. 
Induce,  inducfire,  adducSre 
Indulge,  indulgSre,  dat. 
Infant,  infans,  (infant)  is,  c. 
Influence,  auctoritas. 
Inform  any  one,  aliquem  certiorenB 

facere. 
Inhabitant,  incola,  ae. 
Injure,  violare. 

Injury,  injuria,  ae  ;  incommodum,  i 
Innocence,  innocentia,  m. 
Insect,  insectum,  i. 
Instead  of,  pro  (prep,  with  abl.). 
Instigate,  instigare. 
In  the  mean  time,  interea. 
It  interests,  interest. 
Intrust,  committere  (with  dat]. 
Invoke,  invocare. 
Ireland,  Hibernia,  ee. 
Iron,  ferrum,  i. 
Island,  insula,  CB. 
Italy,  Italia,  m. 
Itself,  159. 


UNQWSH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


393 


Javdin,  telum,  i ;  tragula,  ae. 

Join,  jungere   ( junx-,  junct-) ;  join 

together,  conjungere. 
JouTTiey,  iter,  (itiner)  is  (n.). 
Junior,  junior,  370. 
Jupiter,  351. 
Just,  Justus,  a,  um ;  just  so  many, 

totidem. 
Justice,  justitia,  se. 

K. 

Keep,  tenere,  servftre. 

Kind,  benignus,  a,  um,  with  dat.  : 

Buavis,  e,  335. 
Kiridle,  excitare. 
King,  rex,  (rag)  is. 
Kingdom,  regnum,  i. 
Kill,  occidere,  interficSre,  390. 
Know,  scire,  noscfire,  525 ;  cognos- 

cSre  :  not  to  know,  nescire. 
Knowledge,  scientia,  ae. 


Labour  (noun),  labor,  319  ;    (verb), 

laborare. 
Lamb,  agnua,  1. 
Land,  terra ;  by  land  and  sea,  terra 

marique. 
Language,  lingua,  «:  sermo,  331. 
Large,  magnus,  a,  um. 
Last  (to),  durare. 
Latin,  Latinus,  a,  um. 
Laugh,  ridere  ;  laughter,  risus,  iis. 
Law,  jus,  ( jur)  is  (n.). 
Lawful  (it  is),  licet. 
Lay  aside,  depongre,  406,  b. 
Lay  waste,  populari  (at-),  dep. 
Ijead,   ducere   ( dux-,   duct- ) ;    lead 

back,   reduc6re  ;    lead  out,   edu- 

c6re  ;    lead  together,   conducSre ; 

lead  over  or  across,  transducSre, 

113,  II. 
Leader,  dux,  (due)  is. 
Leaf,  folium,  i. 
Ijeagtie,  foedus,  (feeder)  is,  344. 


Leap  down,  desilire,  428. 

Learn,  discere,  411,  a:  cognoscSre. 

Leave,  relinquere. 

Legion,  legio,  (legion)  is,  333,  R. 

Letter,  epistola,  oe ;   litterae,   arum, 

58,  N. 
Level,  planus,  a,  um ;  aequus,  a,  um. 
Levy,  conscribere. 
Lieutenant,  legatas,  i. 
Lightning,  fulgur,  (fulgur)  is,  325. 
Life,  vita,  sa. 

Like,  similis,  e,  104  (vyith  dat.). 
Line  of  battle,  acies,  ei. 
Lion,  leo,  (leon)  is. 
Literature,  litterse,  arum,  57,  R. 
Little,  parvus,  a,  um. 
Live,  vivgre. 
Living  -  being,  animans,  ( animant  \ 

is. 
Lofty,  altus,  a,  um. 
Long,  longus,  a,  um ;  adv.,  longe ;  a 

long  time,  diu. 
Look  at,  intu6ri,  dep. 
Lose,  amittgre,  perdSre. 
Lot,  sors,  (sort)  is,  293. 
Love  (verb),  amare,  diligSre ;  (noun), 

amor,  319. 
Low,  humilis,  e,  104. 
Lycurgus,  Lycurgus. 

M. 
Magnanimous,  magnanimus,  a,  um. 
Maid-servant,  ancilla,  ae. 
Maintain,  alfire. 
Make,  fac6re,  199;  make  war,  bel- 

lare ;  make  war  upon,  bellum  in- 

ferre,  with  dat. ;  make  an  attack, 

imp  e  turn  facere. 
Maker,  faber,  bri. 
Maltreat,  violare. 
Man,  homo,  vir. 
Many,  multus,  a,  um. 
Marble,  marmor,  325. 
Master  (of  school),  magister,  tri ;  ((rf 

slaves),  heras,  dominus. 
Matters  \\t),  interest,  rrfert,  583. 


394 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY 


Measure,  metiri,  206. 
Medicine,  medicina,  83. 
Mediterranean,    Mediterraneus,    a, 

um. 
Meet,  convenire. 

Memory,  memoria,  ob. 

Merchant,  mercator,  319. 

Messenger,  nmitius,  i. 

Metal,  metallum,  i. 

Mid-day,  meridies,  ei. 

Middle,  medius,  a,  um. 

Migrate,  migrare. 

Mile,  millia  (passaum),  191,  b. 

Military  command,  imperium,  i. 

Milk,  lac,  (lact)  is  (n.). 

Mind,  mens,   (ment)    is    (f.) ;     ani- 
mus, i. 

Mine,  mens,  a,  um. 

Minei-va,  Minerva,  ae. 

Miserable,  miser,  a,  um,  77,  b. 

Mitigate,  mitigare. 

Moderation,  modus,  1. 

Money,  pecunia,  ob. 

Moon,  luna,  ae. 

More,  plus,  pluris  ;  adv.,  magls. 

Mortal,  mortalis,  e,  104. 

Most,  plurimus,  a,  um;  most  men, 
plerique,  195. 

Mountain,  mons,  (mont)  is  (m.). 

Move,  movere. 

Much,  multus,  a,  um;  much  money, 
magna  pecunia. 

Multitude,  multitude,  339. 

My,  mens,  a,  um. 

N. 
Naked,  nudus,  a,  um. 
Name,  nomen,   (nomin)  ia,  344,  a ; 

to  name,  nominare. 
Narrotv,  angustus,  a,  um. 
Natioji,  natio,  333,  R. ;  gens,  293. 
Nature,  natura,  se. 
Navigation,  navigatio,  333,  R. 
Near,  prope,  juxta ;  nearest  to,  prox- 

imus,  a,  um. 
Neglect,  negligfire. 


Neighbouring,  finitimus,  a,  umj 
proximus,  a,  um. 

Neither,  conj.  —  nor,  nee  —  neque  ; 
neither  (of  two),  neuter,  tra,  tmm, 
194,  R.  1. 

Net,  rete,  (ret)  is. 

Never,  nunquam  (adv.). 

Nevertheless,  tamen,  conj. 

New,  novus,  a,  um. 

Next,  posterus,  a,  um,  118;  proxi- 
mus, 371. 

Night,  nox,  (noct)  is,  293. 

Nine,  novem. 

Ninth,  nonus,  a,  um. 

Nobility,  nobilitas,  (nobilitat)  is  293. 

Noble,  nobilis,  e,  104. 

Nobody,  nemo,  (nemin)  is,  c. 

Noise,  clamor,  319. 

No  one,  nuUus,  a,  um,  194,  R.  1 

Not,  non ;  with  imper.,  nS. 

Nothing,  nihil. 

Notice,  (see)  conspic6re. 

Nourish,  alSre. 

Novelty,  novitas,  (novitat)  is,  293. 

November,  November,  bris. 

Nurse,  nutrix,  (nutric)  is,  293 

O. 

Oath,  jusjurandum,  351,  4. 

Obey,  parere  (with  dat.). 

Obscure,  obscurare. 

Obtain  booty,  proedari  (dep.) 

Obviously,  prorsus. 

Ocean,  oceanus,  i. 

Of,  de. 

Of  one's  own  accord,  ultro. 

Old,  vetus,  (veter)  is,  107. 

Old  man,  senex. 

Old  age,  seuectus,  293. 

On  the  other  side  of,  trans  (ace.) ;  on 

account  of,  ob,  with  ace. 
Owe,  unus,  a,  um,  194,  1. 
Ope7i,  apertus,  a,  um ;  to  open,  ape- 

rire. 
Opinion,  opinio,   333,  R. ;    senten. 

tia,  e. 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY. 


395 


Opportunity  of  (with  gerund  in 
gen.),  spatium,  i. 

Oracle,  oraculum,  L 

Oration,  oratio,  333,  R. 

Orator,  orator.  319. 

Order,  ordo,  (ordin)  is  (m.) ;  to  or- 
der, jubere. 

Orgetorix,  Orgetorix,  (Orgetorig)  is. 

Origin,  origo,  339. 

Other,  alius,  a,  ud,  194,  R.  1 . 

Otherwise,  aliter. 

Ought  (one),  oportet,  583 

Our,  noster,  tra,  tram. 

Out  of,  e,  or  ex  (abl.). 

Overcome,  snperare. 

Ox,  bos,  351,  2. 

P. 

Pain,  dolor,  319. 

Paltry,  vilis,  e,  104, 

Pardon,  venia,  ae. 

Parents,  parentes,  inm. 

Part,  pars,  (part)  is. 

Pass,  iter  facere,  210. 

Passage,  iter,  (itiner)  is  (n.). 

Patience,  patientia,  ae. 

Patiently,  patienter,  adv. 

Pay,  pendere. 

Peace,  pax,  (pac)  is,  293. 

Peninsula,  peninsula,  ae. 

People,  populus,  i. 

Perceive,  animadvertfire. 

Perchance,  forsitan,  forte,  adv. 

Persian,  Persa,  se. 

Persuade,  suadere,  persuadere. 

Phalanx,  pbalanx,  (phalang)  is. 

Philosopher,  philosophus,  i. 

Philosophize,  phUosophari,  dep. 

Pilot,  gubemator,  319. 

Pious,  pius,  a,  um. 

Pirate,  prsedo,  335. 

Pity,  miserere ;  I  pity,  me  miserSt, 

579. 
Place,  locus,  i ;  pi.,  i  and  a :  to  place, 

pon6re. 
Place  into,  imponSre 


Placid,  placidus,  a,  um. 

Plain,  planus,  a,  um;  sequus,  a,  um: 

a  plain,  aequor,  327. 
Plan,  consUiam,  i. 
Plant,  planta,  se ;  to  plant,  ser6re. 
Plato,  Plato,  334. 
Pleading,  dictio,  333,  R. 
Pleasant,  jucundus,  a,  um. 
Please,  placere  (with  dat.) ;  it  pleas- 
es, placet,  583. 
Pleasure,  voluptas,  (tat)  is,  293. 
Plough,  arare. 

Plunder,  diripere:  priBdari,dep.,491 
Poet,  poeta,  ae  (m.). 
Pompey,  Pompeius,  i. 
Poor,  egens,  inops,  pauper,  107. 
Port,  portus,  us. 
Post,  statio,  333,  R. 
Possess   one's  self  of,  potiri  (with 

gen.  or  abl.). 
Power,  vis,  vim,  vi,  301, 1 ;  potestas, 

(tat)  is,  293. 
Powerful,  potens,  (potent)  is,  107. 
Praise,  laus,  (laud)  is,  293  ;  to  praise, 

laudare. 
Prayers,  preces,  um,  pi.  of  prex. 
Precept,  praeceptum,  i. 
Preceptor,  proeceptor,  319. 
Precious,  carus,  a,  um. 
Prefer,  antepongre. 
Prepare,  p arare. 
Present  (to  be),  adesse ;  interesse, 

267. 
Preserve,  servare;  preserve  modera' 

tion,  modum  habere. 
Preside  over,  praeesse. 
Prevail  upon,  permovere. 
Prevent,  prohibere,  obstare. 
Principle,  principium,  i. 
Prisoner,  captivus,  i. 
Private  information,  indicium,  L 
Proceed,  pergSre,  447. 
Proclaimer,  praeco,  331,  a. 
Procure,  comparare. 
Promise,  fides,  ei ;  to  promise,  spon- 

dSre,  395,  IV. 


d9G 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


Property,  res  fainiliaris :  familia,  se. 

Providence,  Providentia,  83. 

Province,  provincia,  ee. 

Prudence,  prudentia,  ee. 

Prudent,  prudens,  (prudent)  is,  107. 

Ptolemy,  PtvAlemaeus,  i. 

Punish,  punire. 

Punishment,    poena,    as :    supplici- 

um,  i. 
Pursue,  perseqni  (dep.)- 
Put-to-Jiight,  ftigare  :  d4re  in  fugam. 
Pyrenees,  Pyrenaei  (montes). 
Pythagoras,  Pythagoras,  ae. 

Queen,  regina,  ea. 
Quickly,  cito,  adv. 


Race,  genus,  (gener)  is,  344;  gens, 

(gent)  is. 
Rain,  imber,  bris. 
Raise,  tollgre :  excitflre. 
Rank,  ordo,  (ordin)  is  (m.). 
Rapidly,  celeriter,  adv. 
Rashly,  temere. 
Rashness,  temeritas,  (temeritat)  is, 

293. 
Reach,  pervenire. 
Read,  leggre. 
Reap,  met6re. 
Reason,  ratio,  333,  R. 
Rebellion,  rebellio,  333,  B,. 
Recall,  revocare. 
Receive,  accipfire;  receive  back,  re- 

cipgre. 
Reckon,  ducgre- 
Recollection,  memoria,  ae. 
Red,  raber,  bra,  brum,  77,  a. 
Refrain,  temperare. 
Refuse,  recusare. 

Reign,  regnum,  i ;  to  reign,  regnfire. 
ftejotce,  gaudere. 
Relate,  narrare :  commemorare. 
Relieve,  levare. 
Religion,  religio,  333,  R. 


Remmn,  man6re. 

Remains,  reliquiae,  arum,  57,  H. 

Remove,  removere. 

Renew,  renovare :  redintegrare. 

Repair,  reficere. 

Repel,  propulsare  (ward  ofF). 

Repent,  poenitere ;  /  repent,  me  pea 

nitet,  579. 
Repress,  opprimere. 
Reprove,  increpare. 
Republic,  respublica,  351,  3. 
Resist,  resistere,  with  dat. 
Restrain,  retinere. 
Retreat,  recedere. 
Return  (restore),  reddgre ;  (go  back), 

revertere,  or  reverti. 
Revenue,  vectigal,  (vectigal)  is. 
Revere,  venerare. 
Revoke,  revocare,  abrogare. 
Revjard,  praemium,  i. 
Rhine,  Rhenus,  i. 
Rhetoric,  rhetorica,  ae. 
Rich,  dives,  (divit)  is,  107. 
RicJies,  divitisB,  arum,  57,  R. 
Ride  (on  horseback),  equitare. 
Right,  jus,   (jur)   is;   rightly,  juro 

(abl.  of  jus) :  recte,  adv. 
Rise,  oriri,  dep. 

River,  fluvius,  i;  flumen,  (flumin)  is 
Robber,  latro,  331,  a. 
Rock,  petra,  aa. 
Roll,  volvere. 
Roman,  Romanus,  a,  una. 
Rome,  Roma,  ee. 
Rose,  rosa,  ae. 
Rotise  up,  excitare. 
Rout,  fugare,  pellere :  fundere,  416,  a. 
Royal-power,  regnum,  i. 
Rule,  reg6re :  imperare,  with  dat. 
Run,  curr6re. 


Sacred,  sanctus,  a,  um:  sacer,  era, 
cram;  sacred  rites,  sacra,  orum; 
Sacred  Way,  Via  Sacra ;  Sacred 
Mount,  Mons  Sacer. 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


39'7 


Sadness,  tristitia,  ae :  moeror,  319. 

Safe,  salvus,  a,  um;  tutus,  a,  um. 

Safety,  salus,  (salut)  is,  293. 

Sailor,  nauta,  ae. 

Sake— for  the  sake  of,  causa,  abl., 
135,  II.,  b. 

Same,   is,  ea,  id ;    the  very  same, 
idem,  150. 

Sand,  aridum,  i. 

Say,  dicere ;  /  say,  aio,  inquam. 

Scarcely,  vix. 

Scatter,  spargere. 

Scholar,  discipulus,  i. 

School,  schola,  ae. 

Scout,  explorator,  319. 

Sea,  mare,  312;  sequor,  325. 

Secede,  secedere. 

Second,  secundus,  a,  um. 

Sedition,  seditio,  333,  B,. 

See,  videre  ;  (notice),  conspicere. 

Seek,  quaerere. 

Seize,  occupare ;  seize  up,  arripfire. 

Self,  ipse. 

Senate,  senatus,  us. 

Senate-house,  curia,  ae. 

Senator,  senator,  319. 

Send,  mittere ;    send  away,  dimit- 

t6re  ;  send  for,  arcessere. 
Senior,  senior,  (senior)  is,  107  (comp. 

of  senex),  370. 
Separate,  separare :  dividSre. 
Sepulchre,  sepulchrum,  i. 
Sequanian,  Sequanus,  i. 
Serve  (worship),  colere. 
Set  (as  heavenly  bodies),  occidfire. 
Set  out,  proficisci ;  set  forth,  expo- 

nere ;  set  up,  proponSre. 
Setting  (of  heavenly  bodies),  occa- 

sus,  us. 
Seven,  septem ;   seventh,  Septimus, 

a,  um. 
Seventy,  septuaginta. 
Severe,  gravis,  e,  104. 
Severity,  severitas,  (severitat)  is, 

293. 
Shadow,  umbra,  aa. 


Sharp,  acutus,  a,  um. 

Sharply,  acriter,  adv. 

Shine,  micare,  389, 1^=" ;  shine  forth 
emicare. 

Ship,  navis,  300. 

Shore,  littus,  (littor)  is,  344. 

Shoi-t,  brevis,  e,  104. 

Show,  monstrare,  ostendere ;  (noun) 
species,  ei. 

Shower,  imber,  bris. 

Shun,  vitare. 

Shut,  claudgre. 

Sick,  ceger,  gra,  grum. 

Sign,  signum,  i. 

Sight,  conspectus,  us;  in  sight  of 
conspectu. 

Silent  (to  be),  tacere. 

Silver,  argentum,  i. 

Similar  to,  similis  (dat.). 

Sin,  peccatum,  i ;  to  sin,  peccare. 

Since,  quum,  quoniam. 

Sing,  cantare. 

Singing,  cantus,  us. 

Sister,  soror,  (sor6r)  is  (f.). 

;S^f^,  sedere,  394,  V. 

Six,  sex ;  sixth,  sextus,  a,  um. 

Slave,  servus,  i. 

Slay,  occidgre,  interficfire. 

Slayer,  interfector,  319. 

Sleep,  somnus,  i ;  to  sleep,  dormire 

Slinger,  funditor,  319. 

Small,  parvus,  a,  um. 

Snatch  up,  arripSre. 

So,  ita,  tam ;  so  great,  tantus ;  so 

long,  tamdiu  ;  so  many,  tot. 
Socrates,  Socrates,  is. 
Soldier,  miles,  (milit)  is. 
Some  (persons),  nonnulli. 
Somebody,  some,  178 ;  some  one,  ali. 

quis. 
Sometimes,  interdum,  nonnunquai» 
Sometvhat  great,  aliquantus,  184 
Son,  filius,  i. 
Son-in-laio,  gener,  i. 
Song,  carmen,  344,  a. 
Soul,  animus,  i. 


898 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCADULARY. 


Spain,  Hispania,  se. 

Spaniard,  Hispanus,  i. 

Spare,  parc6re  (dat.). 

Sparta,  Sparta,  ae. 

Speak,  dicere,  loqui. 

Speech,  sermo,  331. 

Spend,  consumere. 

Spiritedly,  acriter. 

Splendid,  splendidas,  a,  um. 

Spoil,  praeda,  ae. 

Spur,  calcar,  325. 

Stag,  cervus,  i. 

Stain,  maculare. 

Stand,  stare ;  stand  in  the  way,  ob- 
stare. 

Standard,  signum,  i. 

Star,  sidus,  (sider)  is,  344;  Stel- 
la, ae. 

State,  civitas,  (civitat)  is ;  respubli- 
ca,  351,  3. 

Station,  static,  333,  R;  to  station. 
constituere,  collocftre. 

Stimulate,  induc6re. 

Stir  up,  instigare. 

Stoic,  Stoicus,  i. 

Stone,  lapis,  (lapid)  is  (m.). 

Stormy,  turbidas,  a,  unif 

Strange,  novus,  a,  um. 

Strength,  vis,  301 ;  robur,  344. 

.Strengthen,  confinnare. 

Strive  after,  persequi,  206. 

Strong,  validus,  a,  um. 

Strong  desire,  cupiditas,  293. 

Study,  studium,  i. 

Subdue,  subigere. 

Succour,  subsidium,  i. 

Such,  talis,  e,  184. 

Sudden,  repentinus,  a,  um. 

Suddenly,  subito,  adv. 

Sufficiently,  satis. 

Sum  of  money,  pecunia,  ob. 

Summer,  aestas,  (aestat)  is,  293. 

Sun,  sol,  (sol)  is  (m.). 

Sup,  caenare. 

Superior,  superior,  oris. 

Support,  al6re. 


Surrender,  deditio,  333,  R. 
Surround,    circumvenire  ;    circum- 

stare,  391 ;  cingere,  401,  2. 
Sure,  certus,  a,  um. 
Suspicion,  suspicio,  333,  R. 
Sustain,  sustinere. 
Swallow,  hirundo,  339. 
Sweet,  dulcis,  e,  104. 
Swift,  celer,  velox,  107. 
Swiftly,  celeriter,  217. 
Swim,  natare ;  swim  across,  trans- 

nare. 
SiDord,  gladius,  i. 
Syracuse,  Syracusse,  arum. 


Take,  sum6re ;  take  away,  eripgre ; 
take  back,  recipere ;  take  captive. 
cap6re ;  take  care  of,  curare  ;  take 
by  storm,  expugnare  ;  take  pos- 
session of,  occupare. 

Talent,  ingenium,  i. 

Tame,  domare. 

Teach,  docSre. 

Teacher,  magister,  tri. 

Tear,  lacryma,  ae. 

Tell,  dicere,  nuntiare. 

Tempest,  procella,  ae :  tempesfcas. 

Temple,  templum,  i. 

Tenaciotcs,  tenax,  (tenac)  is,  107 

Tender,  tener,  a,  um. 

Tent,  pellis,  322. 

Tenth,  decimus,  a,  um. 

Terrify,  terrere. 

Territory,  finis  (m.). 

Than,  quam. 

That  (pron.),  ille,  is,  iste. 

That,  conj.,  in  order  that,  ut ;  that 
not,  ne. 

Themselves,  sui,  142. 

Then,  tum,  adv. 

There,  ibi. 

Thick,  densus,  a,  um. 

Thine,  tuus,  a,  um. 

Thing,  res,  rei;  this  thing,  hoc; 
these  things,  haeo. 


ENGLISH-LATIN    VOCABULARY. 


399 


TUtik,  putare,  cogitare,  existimftre, 

sentire,  censSre. 
Third,  tertius,  a,  um. 
Thirst,  sitis,  300. 
Thirteen,  tredecim. 
Thirty,  triginta. 
This,  hie,  hsec,  hoc 
rhitlier,  eo. 
Chree,  tres,  ia. 

Chrough,  per  (prep,  with  ace.).     , 
Throw,  jac6re ;   throw  before,  pro- 

jicere. 
Thunder  (verb),  tonftre. 
Thus,  ita. 
Thy,  tuus,  a,  um. 
Tiber,  Tiberis,  is. 
Time,  tempus,  (teinp6r)  is,  344. 
2Hmid,  timidus,  a,  um. 
To,  ad  (prep,  with  ace.). 
To-day,  hodie. 
Together,  una  (adv.). 
Toil,  labor,  319  :  opera,  88. 
To-morrow,  eras  (adv.). 
Tongue,  lingua,  te. 
Too  much,  nimius,  a,  um. 
Tooth,  dens,  (dent)  is  (m.). 
Top  of,  summus,  297,  a. 
Touch,  tangere;  touch  upon,  attin- 

gere. 
Toioer,  turris,  300 :  castellum,  i. 
Town,  oppidum,  i. 
Townsman,  oppidanus,  i. 
Treaty,  foedus,  (feeder)  is,  344. 
Tree,  arbor,  (arbor)  is  (f.). 
Trial,  judicium,  i. 
Tribune,  tribunus,  i. 
Tributary,  stipendiarius,  a,  um. 
Tribute,  stipendium,  i. 
Time,  verus,  a,  um. 
Truce,  indatiae,  aram,  57,  B,. 
Trust  to,  credere  (with  dat.). 
Turbid,  turbidus,  a,  um. 
Turn,  vertere. 
Twenty,  viginti. 
Two-a-piece,  bini,  189. 


U. 

Ulysses,  Ulysses,  is. 
Uncertain,  incertus,  a,  um. 
Under,  sub,  prep.,  323. 
Understand,  intelligere. 
Undertake,  suscipere. 
Unfriendly,  inimicus,  a,  um. 
Unjust,  injustus,  a,  um. 
Unless,  nisi  (conj.). 
Unmindful    of,    immemor     (  with 

gen.). 
Until,  donee,  dum  (conj.). 
Use,  us  us,  us  ;  to  use,  uti,  dep.  abl., 

316,  b. 
Useful,  utilis,  e,  104. 


Vacant  (to  be),  vacare. 
Vain — in  vain,  frustra  (adv.). 
Valour,  virtus,  (virtut)  is,  293. 
Value,  pretium,  i;   to  value,  aesti- 

mare. 
Vast,  vastus,  a,  um. 
Vaunt,  ostentare. 
Vehemently,  vehementer  (adv.) 
Venetian,  Venetus,  i. 
Very,  valde,  admodum;  very  easy. 

perfacilis,  e;  very  few,  perpauci: 

very  near,  proximus. 
Vice,  vitium,  i. 
Victory,  victoria,  se. 
Vile,  vUis,  e,  104. 
Village,  vicus,  i. 
Violate,  violare. 
Virgin,  virgo,  339. 
Virtue,  virtus,  (virtut)  is,  293 
Virtuous,  probus,  a,  um. 
Voice,  vox,  (v6c)  is,  293. 
Voio,  spondere,  395,  IV. 

Wage  (e.  g.,  icar),  gerere:  bellum 

inferre. 
Wagon,  carrus,  i. 
Wait  for,  expectare. 


400 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARy. 


Walk,  ambulare. 

Wall,  mums,  i  ;  walls,  moania,  um. 

Wander,  vagari,  errare. 

Want,  carere,  348. 

Wanting  (to  be),  deesse,  267,  b. 

War,  bellum,  i. 

Warlike,  bellicosus,  a,  um. 

Warn,  monere. 

Wash,  allu6re. 

Watch,    watching,    vigilia,    se  ;    to 

watch,  vigilare. 
Water,  aqua,  83. 
Wave,  fluctus,  us. 
Way,  via,  ae ;  to  make  (their)  way, 

iter  facere. 
Wearied,  defessus,  a,  um. 
Weary  of,  taedet,  579, 
Weep,  flere. 
Well  (to  be),  valere. 
West,  Occidens. 
Whai  (in  number)  ?  quotus  1  what 

is  the  difference  ?  quid  interest  ? 
When,  quum  (conj.). 
Whence,  unde  (adv.). 
Whether,  num,  174 :  utrum. 
Where,  ubi  (adv.). 
Which  of  the  two,  uter,  194,  R.  1. 
Whirlwind,  turbo,  (turbin)  is  (m.). 
Who,  qui,  quae,  quod ;  who  ?  quis, 

quae,  quid  ? 
Whole,  omms,  e ;  universus,  a,  um ; 

totus,  a,  um ;  cunctus,  441. 
Why?  cur? 

Wicked,  improbus,  a,  um. 
Wide,  latus,  a,  um ;    widely,  lat5 ; 

more  widely,  latius. 
Wild  beast,  fera,  ag. 
Wind,  ventus,  i. 
Willingly,  libenter. 
Wine,  vinum,  i. 
Wing,  ala,  s. 
Winter,  hyems,  (byem)  is,  293;  to 

winter,  hiemare ;  winter-quarters, 

hibema,  orum  (pL). 
Wisdom,  sapientia,  ae. 


Wise,   sapiens,   (sapient)   is,   107 j 

wisely,  sapienter. 
Wish,  velle,  cup6re. 
With,  cum  (prep.,  abl.). 
Without,   sine    (prep.,  abl.);   to  be 

without,  carere. 
Withstand,  resist6re,  390. 
Wolf,  lupus,  i. 

Woman,  femina,  oe  ;  mulier,  is  (f.). 
Wonder  at,  admirari,  dep. 
Wonderful,  mirabilis,  e,  104, 
Wood  (a),  sylva,  ae. 
Word,  verbum,  i ;  word  is  brought, 

nuntiatum  est. 
Work,  opus,  (oper)  is,  344. 
World,  mundus,  i :  orbis  terrarum. 
Worse,   pejus,   adv. ;   worst,   pessi- 

mus,  370, 
Worship,  col6re,  adorare. 
Worthy,  dignus,  a,  um  (with  abl.), 
Would-that,  utinam,  526. 
Wound,  vulnus,  (vulner)  is,  344 ;  to 

wound,  vulnerare. 
Wretched,  miser,  77,  b. 
Write,  scribgre. 
Writer,  scriptor,  319. 

X. 

JCenophon,  Xenopbon,  (Xenopbont) 

is. 

Y. 
Year,  annus,  adv. 
Yearly,  quotannis,  i. 
Yes,  immo. 
Yesterday,  heri. 
Yet,  tamen. 
Yoke,  jugum,  i. 
Young-man,  juvenis,  is  (ni.) :    ado. 

lescens. 
You,  vos  {sing.,  tu). 
Your,  vester,  tra,  tram,  134. 
Youth,  juventus,  ( juventut)  is,  293 

a  youth.    See  young  man. 

Z. 

Zeal,  studium,  i. 


EXAMINATION  QUESTIONS. 


What  is  a  monosyllable  7  a  dissyllable  7  a  polysyliable  7  (8.) — ^What  is 
injtection7 — What  is  the  inflection  of  nowres  called  ?  oi verbs  7  (21,  2  R.) — 
Name  the  vowels :  the  liquids  :  the  c-sounds :  p-sounds :  t-sounds  :  double 
consonants  :  diphthongs,  (23.) — Repeat  the  general  rules  of  quantity,  (24.) 
— Repeat  the  general  ruks  of  gender,  (25,  a.) 


Has  the  Latin  any  article  7  (27.) — ^What  is  the  stem  of  a  noun  ?  (30.) — 
How  many  cases  of  nouns  are  there  ?  (31.) — What  is  the  use  of  the  n,omi- 
native  ?  the  vocative  7  the  genitive  7  (33.) — How  many  declensions  7 — How 
distinguished  ?  (34.) — Give  nom.,  voc,  and  gen.  endings  of  1st  decl.  (nom. 
and  voc,  a  short ;  abl.,  a  long). — What  is  the  gender  of  1st  decl.  ?  (36,  c.) 


Where  do  you  put  the  unemphatic  gen.  ?     {After  its  noun,  38,  a.) — The 
emphatic  ?     {Before  its  noun,  38,  b.) 


What  is  the  subject  of  a  sentence  ?  the  predicate  ?  (41.) — ^What  is  an 
active  verb  ?  transitive  7  intransitive  7  (42.) — ^What  does  the  infinitive 
express  1  the  indicative  7  (43.) — ^What  does  the  present  tense  express  ? 
the  imperfect  7  the  future  7  (44.) — What  is  the  infinitive-ending  of  1st 
conj.  ? — How  do  you  find  the  stem  of  a  verb  ?  (45.) — Give  the  3d  person 
endings  of  the  indicative,  (46.) — Are  the  personal  pronouns  necessarily 
used  in  Latin  ?  (47,  R.) — Where  do  you  put  the  subject  nominative  in  a 
sentence  ?  (48,  11.) 


What  is  the  case  of  the  direct  object  7  (51.) — Give  the  accusative-end 
ings  of  1st  decl.  (52.) — Rule  of  position  for  the  object  accusative  7  (53,  II.) 


What  does  the  dative  express  ?  (54) :  the  ablative  ?  (55.) — Give  th*» 
case-endings  complete,  1st  decl.  (618) :  quantity  of  final  syllables  (618,  R: 
1) :  gender  (618,  R.  2) :  rule  of  position  for  remote  object  (58,  II.,  a) :  for 
preposition  and  its  noun  (58,  II.,  b.) 


Case-endings,  2d  decl.,  masc.  (61.) — Name  the  feminine  nouns  of  2d  decl. 
(alvns,  c6lus,  humus,  vannus). — ^What  nouns  have  i  for  vocative-ending? 
(62,  R.  2.) — When  to  implies  motion,  how  do  you  render  it  in  Latin? 
(63,  &^.)  

What  ?W?SPt  PC  2d  deol.  reject  the  endings  tis  and  S  ?  (64-) — ^Which  of 


402  EXAMINATION   aUESTIONS. 

these  retain  the  6  in  the  oblique  cases  ?  (65,  R.) — "What  case  is  used  with 
words  of  abounding  and  wanting  1  (66,  II.,  a) 

Case-endings,  2d  dec!.,  neut.  (68.)  -Short  final  syllables  in  2d  decl.  (us, 
6,  una,  a). — Long  final  syllables  (i,  6,  is,  6s). — What  is  the  infinitive-end- 
ing' of  verbs,  2d  conj.  ?  (70.) — Give  the  3d  person  endings,  indie,  present: 
imperfect:  future,  (71.) 


Give  the  endings  of  adjectives  of  Class  I.  (76.) — What  adjectives  reject 
the  endings  u  s  and  e  ?  (77.) — Where  do  you  put  the  unemphatic  adjective 
in  a  sentence  ?  (78,  II.,  a.) — WTiere  do  you  put  the  adjective  belonging  to 
a  noun  which  governs  another  in  the  genitive  ?  {Before  the  genitive,  78 
II.,  b.) 

Give  the  3d  pers.  endings  of  e  s  s  e,  indie.  (79) :  rule  of  syntax  for  predi- 
cate noun  (80,  a) :  for  predicate  adjective,  (81,  b.) 


Infinitive-ending,  3d  conj.  (83.) — Indie,  3d  pers.  endings,  present :  im- 
perfect: future,  (84.) — Infinitive-ending,  4th  conj.  (86.) — Indie,  3d  pers., 
present :  imperfect :  future,  (87.) — Where  do  you  put  the  adjective  be- 
longing to  a  noun  governed  by  a  preposition  ?  (89,  II.) 


What  syllable  forms  the  3d  pers.  pass,  ending,  indie.  ?  (90.) — In  putting 
an  active  sentence  into  the  passive  form,  what  changes  occur  1  (93,  II.) — 
WTien  is  the  preposition  omitted  ?  (93,  II.,  R.) 


Case-endings,  3d  decL  (98.) — ^What  is  the  gender  of  most  nouns  which 
add  s  to  form  the  nom.  ?  (99.) — Decline  sermo:  urbs:  lex. 


What  is  the  gender  of  nouns  in  al,  ar,  e  ?  (102,  R.  2.) — Endings  of  ad- 
jectives of  2d  class?  (104.) — Decline  brSvis.  (105.) — What  adjectives 
take  6  instead  of  i  in  abl.  ?  (105,  R.  2.) — What  case  is  used  with  adjec- 
tives of  advantage  or  disadvantage  ?  of  likeness  or  unliketiess  1  (106, 
XL,  c.) 

Whafadjectives'lonn  Class  ni.?  (107.)— Decline  felix.  (108.)— Which 
ending  do  participles  in  n  s  take  in  abl.  sing.,  6  or  i  ?  (108,  R.  1,  b.) 


I 


What  nouns  belong  to  4tb  decl.  ?  (110.) — Give  the  case-endings,  masc. 
(Ill)  :  neut.  (Ill)  :  quantity  of  final  syllables,  4th  decl.  (621,  II.  1)  :  fem. 
nouns  of  4th  decl.  (621,  R.  2.)— What  nouns  take  ubus  in  abl.  plur.  ?  (621, 
R.  3.)— Decline  dSmiis,  (112,  3.)— What  does  d6mi  mean?  (112,  4.)— 
Rule  of  sjTitax  for  verbs  compounded  with  trans,  (113, 11., a.) — Is  trans 
ever  repeated  ? 

WTiat  nouns  belong  to  5th  decl.  7  (114.)— Case-endings,  5th  decl.  ?  (116.) 
-When  is  the  e  in  ei  long  7  when  short  ?  (116.  R.)— What  nouns  of  5th 


EXAMINATION   aUESTIONS.  403 

decl.  have  plur.  complete  ?  (117,  R.) — Time  when  is  put  in  what  case  ? 
(118,  IL,  c.) 


Decline  ego,  (120.) — vVhat  is  the  adj.  personal  pron.  of  1st  pers.  sing.  ? 
of  1st  pers.  plur.  ?  (122.) — Give  1st  pers.  endings,  1st  conj.,  act.  indie,  pres- 
ent :  imperfect :  ful^ire. — Also,  pass,  present :  imperfect :  future.  (123.) — 
What  case  is  used  with  esse  to  denote  the  possessor  ?  (125,  II.,  a.) — Is 
cum  prefixed  or  suflSxed  to  the  personal  pronouns  ?  (125,  IL,  b.) 


What  are  the  1st  person  endings,  act.  and  pass.,  for  2d  conj.,  indie, 
present  ?  imperfect  ?  fature  ?  (126.) — The  same  for  3d  conj.  (127.) — 
Fourth,  (128.) 


Decline  tu,  (130.) — What  are  the  2d  pers.  tiidings,  1st  conj.,  act.  and 
pass.,  indie,  present  ?  imperfect  ?  future  ?  (131.) — The  same  for  2d  conj. 
(133.) — ^What  are  the  possessive  pronouns  of  2d  pers.  ?  (134.) — How  is  nS 
used  ?  (135,  n.,  a.) — ^Where  is  causa  placed  in  a  sentence  ?  (135,  IL,  b.) 


What  are  the  2d  pers.  endings  of  verbs,  3d  conj.,  act.  and  pass.,  indie, 
pres.  ?  imperfect  ?  future  ?  (136.)— The  same  for  4th  conj.  (137.) 


Decline  the  reflexive  pronoun  sui,  (142.) — What  is  the  adjective-personal 
pronoun  of  3d  pers.  ?  (143.) — What  case  does  imperare  govern  ?  (147.) 


Why  are  demonstrative  pronouns  so  called?  (149.) — ^Decline  is,  e a,  id, 
(150.) — Inflect  esse,  pres.,  imperf,  and  fut.  indie.  (151.) — Distinguish 
Buus  and  ejus,  (153.) — ^What  is  the  demonstrative  of  the  1st  person? 
(156)  :  of  2d  ?  (157)  :  of  3d  ?  (158.) 


Decline  qui,  (164.) — Syntax  of  the  relative,  (167,  b.) 


Decline  quis,  (170.) — How  is  the  answer  ^es  given  ?  (173.) — What  an- 
swer does  num  expect  ?  (175,  b.) 


Name  the  seven  indefinite  pronouns,  (178.) — How  are  indef.  pronouns 
used  with  a  genitive  ?  (180,  a.) 


Name  the  correlative  pronouns,  (184.) — Give  the  Latin  for  much  gold 
'186,  a)  :  for  much  money  (186,  a). — Distinguish  tantum  and  tantus, 
(186,  obs.) 

Hepeat  the  first  twelve  numerals  in  all  four  classes,  (189.) — Give  the 
j«ule  for  accus.  of  time  or  space,  (191.) 


Decline  anas,  dao,  and  tres,  (194.) — WTiat  words  are  decUned  like 
anus  1  (194,  R.  1.) — Is  the  penult  of  unius  long  or  short? 


404  EXAMINATION    QUESTIONS. 

Inflect  capSi-e  in  pres.,  imperf.,  and  fut.  indie.  (199.) 


What  are  deponent  verbs  ?  (206.) — ^How  are  they  conjugated?  (Ans., 
like  passives.) 

How  do  you  form  deHvative  adverbs  from  adjectives  of  Class  I.  ?  (215, 
1) :  of  Class  II.  ?  (215,  2.) — What  is  the  general  position  of  the  adverb  in 
a  sentence  1  (218,  a.) — Where  is  fere  placed  1  (218,  b.) — How  is  nequi- 
de mused?  (218,  c.) 

What  prepositions  govern  the  accus.  or  ablat.  ?  (223.) — Give  the  rule  of 
apposition,  (225,  a.) 

Give  the  person-endings,  pres.  indie,  act. :  tense-stem :  connecting- 
vowel :  1st  eonj.:  2d:  3d:  4th,  (234.) 


Imperfect  tense,  person -endings  :  tense-stem,  four  conj's. :  connecting- 
vowel,  (237.) — Future  tense,  1st  and  2d  conj.,  person-endings  :  tense- 
stems  :  connecting-vowels  (238)  :  3d  and  4th  conj.,  fut.,  person-ending : 
tense-stem:  connecting-vowel,  (240.) 


Passive-endings,  (243.)^- Apparent  irregularities,  viz.,  1st  pers.  pres. 
indie. :  3d  conj.,  2d  pers.  sing.  pres. :  1st  and  2d  conj.,  fut.,  2d  pers.  sing. 
(244.)  

Rules  of  Quantity. — Monosyllables  ending  in  a  vowel  (247,  a.) :  excep- 
tions,—  Monosyllables  ending  in  a  consonant:  exceptions,  (247,  b.) — 
auantity  of  a  final  (248)  :  e  final  (249)  :  of  i  final  (250) :  of  o  final  (251) : 
of  u  final,  (252.) — Final  syllables  ending  in  a  consonant,  (253.) — Final  as, 
es,  OS :  exceptions,  (254.) — Final  is  and  us :  exceptions,  (255.) — Increase 
of  nouns  (257) :  of  verbs,  (258.) — Penults  of  perf.  tense,  (259.) — Adjectives 
in  idus,  icus  :  in  inus  :  in  ilis,  bills,  (260.) 


What  are  the  tenses  for  action  completed  ?  (262) :  their  endings  ?  (263.) 
— Give  the  perf.,  pluperf.,  and  fut.  perf.  of  esse,  (264.) — Distinguish  perf. 
pres.  from  perf  aorist,  (265.) — What  case  do  the  compounds  of  esse  with 
prepositions  govern  ?  (267,  b.) 


How  is  perf.  stem  formed  in  most  verbs  of  1st  conj.  ?  of  2d  ?  of  4th  t 
(270.) — Give  perf.  of  amare,  monere,  audire,  (271.) 


How  is  perf.  stem  formed  of  most  verbs  of  3d  conj.  ?  (276.) — Euphonic 
rules  :  (1)  k-soand  before  s :  (2)  b  before  s :  (3)  t-sound  before  s,  (277.)— 
What  answer  does  nonne  expect?  (280.) — How  is  the  pluperf.  formed? 
the  fut.  perf.  ?  (283.) 


EXAMINATION   aUESTIONS.  405 

Name  the  six  classes  of  nouns  of  3d  decl.  (291.)— Euphonic  rales,  (S92.) 
-How  do  you  express  "on  the  top  of  the  mountain"  in  Latin  ?  (297.) 


Decline  Jupiter :  Bos:  Respublica:  Jusjurandum,  (351.) 


Repeat  the  rules  of  gender,  3d  decl.,  from  nominative  formation,  with 
the  exceptions  under  each,  (355.) 


Comparison  of  Adjectives. — ^What  is  the  compar.  ending  ?  (357.) — If  the 
stem  ends  in  a  vowel,  how  is  the  compar.  formed  ?  (357,  R.) — Syntax  of 
compar.,  when  quam  is  omitted,  (360,  c.) 


Superl.  ending,  (363.)— Stems  in  er  add  what  ending?  (364.)— Stems 
in  1,  what  ending  7  (365.)— What  case  is  used  with  superlatives  ?  (367,  h.) 


Compare  bonus,  malus,  magnus,  multus,  parvus,  senex,  juve- 
nis,  extern s,  inferus,  superus,  posterus,  (370.)— Comp.  dives, 
benevolus. 


Are  adverbs  ccMoapared  ?— How  ?  (376.) 


What  is  the  supine  ?  (377.) — Form  supine-stem,  1st  conj. :  2d  :  3d  :  4th, 
(378.)— How  is  supine  in  um  used?  (379.)— How  is  supine  in  u  used? 
(380.) — Name  the  supines  in  u  which  are  in  common  use,  (381.) — What 
case  answers  the  question  whither  7  (383.) 


What  are  the  four  ways  of  forming  perf.  stem,  1st  conj.  ?  (387.)— How 
many  verbs  does  each  class  contain  ?  (387.)— How  do  you  form  perf., 
pluperf.,  or  fut.  perf.  of  these  verbs  ?  (388.) 


What  are  the  Jive  ways  of  forming  the  perf.  stem,  2d  conj.  ?  (394.) — 
How  many  verbs  does  each  class  contain  ?  (395.)— What  rules  of  euphonv 
are  to  be  applied  here  ?  (395,  III.,  a,  b,  c.) 


Name  the  six  ways  of  forming  the  perf.  stem,  3d  conj.  (400.)— What 
rules  of  euphony  are  to  be  applied  in  forming  perf.  stems  of  verbs  of  1st 
class  ?  (401,  1,  &c.) 

How  do  verbs  of  2d  class  form  perf.  stem  ?  (406) :  verbs  of  3d  class  ? — 
In  what  sense  is  ad  often  used  by  Caesar?  (408,  c.) 


How  do  verbs  of  4th  class  form  perf.  stem  ?  (411.) — What  vowel  chan- 
ges  must  be  observed  here  ?  (411,  a,  h,  c.) — Give  the  rule  for  verbs  of  de- 
manding (413,  1):  for  verbs  of  sparing  '  i\Z^  4.) — What  is  the  perf.  of 
cad6r6?  ofcoedgrft?  (413,  ^p".) 


406  EXAMINATION   aUESTIONS. 

How  do  verbs  of  5th  class  form  perf  stem  ?  (416.)— Form  the  perf. 
Items  of  the  io  verbs  in  (416,  c), — What  is  said  of  the  prcenomen  1  (418,  c.) 


How  do  verbs  of  6th  class  form  perf.  stem  1  (421.) — What  cases  are 
osed  after  distribuSre  ?  (423,  c.) 


What  are  the  Jive  ways  of  forming  the  perf.  stem  in  4th  conj.  ?  (426.) — 
How  many  verbs  does  each  class  contain  ?  (427.) — How  is  the  manner  of 
an  action  expressed  in  Latin?  (428, a.) 


How  are  the  passive  tenses  for  completed  action  formed  ?  (431.) — How 
is  the  perf.  part,  formed  ?  (432,  b.) — How  is  it  inflected  ?  (432,  a.) — Inflect 
the  perf,  plnperf,  and  fut.  perf  pass,  of  a  mar  6,  (433.) — How  is  the  perf. 
pass.  part,  sometimes  used  with  est?  (435,  c.) 


How  many  participles  are  there  in  Latin,  act.  and  pass.?  (438.) — Give 
the  endings  of  the  present  part.  act.  in  the  four  conjugations,  (439,  a.) — 
How  is  it  declined?  (440.) — Has  the  Latin  any  active  part,  to  express 
compile  action  ?  (None,  excepting  in  deponent  verbs,  440,  a,  i.) — What 
is  the  use  of  the  part,  in  discourse  ?  (442,  c) — Give  the  words  in  which 
cannot  stand  first  in  a  clause  or  sentence,  (442,  c.) 

How  is  the  fut.  part.  act.  formed  ?  (445.) — Inflect  the  periphrastic  pres., 
past,  and  fut.  of  amarS,  (446.) — Give  the  rule  for  the  use  of  the  fut.  part, 
with  verbs  of  motion,  (448.) 

How  is  the  perf.  pass.  part,  formed  ?  (451,  a.) — How  is  it  inflected  ? 
(451,  J.) — How  do  deponent  verbs  use  the  perf.  part,  form  ?  (451,  c.) — What 
is  the  case  of  the  place  tohere  1  (453,  a) :  of  the  place  tohence  7  (453,  b] :  of 
the  place  whither  1  (453,  c.) 

When  is  the  part,  used  in  the  ablative  with  a  noun  ?  (456.) — How  ia 
the  want  of  a  perf.  act.  part,  supplied  in  Latin?  (457.) — Can  a  noun  be 
used  in  the  ablative  absolute  with  another  noun  ?     (Yes  :  458.) 


How  does  the  infin.  express  action  ?  (465.) — Give  the  infin.  forms,  aet 
and  pass.,  in  all  the  conjugations,  (466.) — Give  the  rule  for  the  comple- 
mentary infin.  (468,  a.) 

Name  the  classes  of  verbs  which  take  after  them  the  accns.  and  infin. 
^471.) — Give  the  method  of  changing  English  sentences  commencing  with 
hcd  into  the  Latin  accus.  and  infin.  (472,  1,  2,  3.) 


Give  the  formation  of  the  perf.  infin.  pass.  (478.) — ^When  the  accus.  ia 
dged  with  this  infin.,  with  what  does  its  pait.  agi-ee  ?  (478.) 


How  is  the  infin.  fut.  act.  formed  ?  (482) :  the  infin.  fut.  pass.  ?  (483.) 


EXAMINATION    aUESTlCNS.  407 

Under  what  form  does  the  gerund  express  the  action  of  the  verb  ?  (487 
a.) — How  is  the  genind-stem  formed?  (487,  b.) — How  the  cases  of  the  ge- 
rund ?  (487,  c.) — What  rules  apply  to  the  cases  of  the  infin.  and  gerund  7 
(489.) — Is  the  infin.  or  the  accus.  ger.  used  with  a  preposition  ?  (489,  R.)— 
What  case  does  the  ger.  govern  ?  (490.) 


How  does  the  gerundive  express  the  action  of  a  verb  ?  (495,  a.) — How 
are  its  cases  formed  ?  (495,  b.) — How  is  it  used  ?  (496.) — When  must  the 
gerundive  be  used  instead  of  the  gerund  ? — When  mai/  it  be  so  used  ? 
(496,  R.) — After  what  verbs  does  the  gerundive  express  a  purpose  or  ob- 
ject ?  (498,  |^=.) 


What  does  the  gerandive  in  the  nom.  neut.  with  esse  express  ?  (501, 
a.) — What  does  it  express  when  used  with  esse  as  a  verbal  adjective  7 
(502.) — ^What  is  the  case  of  the  person  in  both  these  consti'uctions  ? 
(The  dative.) 


How  does  imper.  mood  express  the  action  of  the  verb  ?  (507.) — ^What  is 
not  with  the  imper.  ?  (510,  Rule.) 


When  is  a  sentence  compound  ?  (513,  a.) — Give  an  example  of  a  prin- 
cipal sentence :  of  a  subordinate  sentence,  (513,  c.) — Give  some  of  the 
classes  of  subordinate  sentences,  (514,  a,  &c.) 


Repeat  the  copulative  conjunctions,  (515.) — How  are  et  and  qu  e  used  ? 
(517,  a):  ac?  (517,  b) — What  does  et  followed  by  another  et  mean? 
(517,  c.) — What  is  the  Latin  for  again  and  again  7  for  not  only — but 
also  7  (517,  d.) 


Name  the  disjunctive  conjunctions,  (519.) — ^What  does  aut  indicate  ? 
vel?  (519,  R.  1  and  2.)— How  is  ve  used?  (519,  R.  3.)— What  do  these 
conj.  mean  when  repeated  ?  (519,  R.  4.) — Give  the  adversatives,  (520.) — 
What  does  sed  express  ?  (522,  a):  aut  em?  (522,  b.) 


How  does  the  subjunc.  mood  express  affirmation  ?  (524.) — Inflect  subjunc. 
pres.  of  esse,  (525.) — Inflect  subjunc.  pres.  act.  and  pass,  of  amarS, 
m6ner6,  rSgSre,  audire,  (526,  b.) — How  may  a  wish  be  expressed  in 
Latin?  (528,  a.) — How  may  a  softened  command  be  expressed  ?  (528,  b.) — 
How  do  you  express  a  direct  question  when  doubt  is  implied  ?  (528,  c.) 


Inflect  subjunc.  perf.  of  e  s  s  e,  (531,)— How  do  regular  verbs  form  subjunc. 
perf.  act.  1  (532,  1) :  subjunc.  perf  pass.  ?  (532,  2.)— Inflect  the  subjunc. 
perf.  act.  and  pass,  of  amarS,  m6n6r6,  r6g6r6,  audirS,  (532,3.) — How 
is  the  subjunc.  perf  used  imperatively  ?  (534,  a.) — How  may  a  supposed 
case  be  expressed  ?  (534,  b.) — How  may  a  softened  assertion  be  express- 
ed ?  (534,  c.)— What  interrogative  sentences  take  the  subjunc.  ?  (534,  e.) 


408  EXAMINATION   QUESTIONS. 

How  is  the  subjunc.  imperf.  formed?  (537.) — Repeat  the  paradigm 
^38.) — How  is  the  subjunc.  pluperf.  act.  aud  pass,  formed  ?  (539,  a  and  h.) 
— Give  the  paradigm,  (539,  c) — Repeat  the  conditional  conjunctions,  (540, 
c.) — What  is  a  conditional  sentence  ?  (540,  i.) — In  conditional  sentences 
how  do  yoa  express  a  real  condition  ?  a  possible  condition  ?  an  unreal  or 
impossible  in  present  time  ?  an  unreal  or  impossible  condition  in  past 
time  ?  (542,  b,  Rule.) — Can  the  perf.  or  pluperf.  indie,  ever  be  used  with 
%\1     (No.) 

Inflect  posse  in  subjunc.  pres. :  imperf. :  perf. :  pluperf  (545.) — State 
the  composition  of  posse. — Repeat  the  final  conjunctions,  (546.) — How  is 
purpose  or  aim  expressed  in  English  ?  how  in  Latin  ?  (548,  a.) — How  is  an 
object  to  be  provided  against  introduced  in  English?  how  in  Latin  ?  (548, 
0.) — Can  a  purpose  or  aim  be  expressed  in  Latin  by  an  infin.  ?     (No.) 


Give  the  primary  tenses  of  the  Latin  verb  :  the  historical,  (551,  2,  a,  b.) 
— What  is  the  rule  for  the  succession  of  tenses  ?  (551,  3.) — How  is  a  result 
expressed  in  English?  how  in  Latin?  (553,  a.) — ^What  is  the  rule  for  ut 
signifying  that  7  (553,  b.) 


How  is  the  want  of  a  fut.  subjunc.  supplied  in  Latin  ?  (556.) — Give  the 
pkradigm,  periph.  conj.  subjunc.  (556.) — When  does  quo  express  a  pur- 
pose instead  of  ut  ?  (558,  a.) — In  what  sense  is  quin  used  ?  (1)  after  neg- 
ative sentences?  (2)  after  non  dubito,  &c.  ?  (558,  b.) — When  is  quo- 
minus  used  in  preference  to  ne  ?  (558,  c.) 


What  are  the  two  uses  of  quum  ?  (561.) — What  is  the  first  use  called  ? 
the  second?  (561.) — When  is  quum  followed  by  the  indie?  (563,  a.) — 
When  is  quum  temporal  followed  by  the  imperf.  or  pluperf.  subjunc? 
(563,  i.)— What  is  the  rule  for  quum  causal  ?  (563,  c.^ 


When  is  the  rel.  pronoun  followed  by  the  subjunc.  ?  (566.) — Give  the 
rule  for  the  use  of  subjunc.  in  a  rel.  sentence,  (568,  d.) — Is  the  rel.  to  ex- 
press a  purpose  very  common  in  Caesar?     (Yes.) 


In  what  two  ways  may  we  relate  the  words  of  another  ?  (571.) — What 
is  each  method  called  ?  (571.) — What  kinds  of  sentences  are  introduced  in 
oratio  obliqua?  (Either  principal  or  suboi'dinate.) — What  mood  is 
used  in  principal  sentences  in  oratio  obliqua?  (574,  a):  in  subordinate 
sentences  ?  (574,  b.) 

What  are  impersonal  verbs?  (577.) — Give  the  classes  of  impersonala 
(578.) — What  impersonals  are  followed  by  the  accus.  of  the  person  and 
the  gen.  of  the  cause  ?  (579,  a.) 


EXAMINATION    aUESTlONS.  409 

Give  the  rale  for  oportet  and  decet  (584,  a) :  for  placet  (584,  b)  * 
for  Ixcet  andlibet  (584,  c) :  for  interest  and  refert  (584,  d). 


State  the  composition  of  possum,  and  repeat  the  paradigm,  (587.) 


Give  the  composition  of  nolo  and  malo,  and  repeat  the  paradigms 
(592.) — Give  the  three  rules  for  velle,  nolle,  and  mall  e,  in  (594). 

Hepeat  the  paradigm  of  irregular  forms  of  ferre,  (596.) — How  are  the 
remaining  tenses  formed?  (596,  b.) — What  is  the  meaning  of  fSrunt? 
(598,  b.) 

Of  what  verb  does  fieri  form  the  pass.?  (600.) — How  are  the  tenses 
formed  ?  (600.) — Give  the  paradigm. — What  is  the  quantity  of  i  in  fieri  ? 
(600,  U.) — ^What  forms  of  edere  are  similar  to  those  of  esse  ?  (601.) — 
Give  the  paradigm. — What  is  the  quantity  of  e  s,  from  esse?  of  e  s,  from 
edere?  (601,11.) 

What  conjugation  does  ire  follow  ?  (605.) — Give  the  paradigm. — What 
is  said  of  the  compounds  ?  (605,  1,  2.) — How  are  queo  and  nequeo  con- 
jugated ?  (606.) 

Inflect  aio  (609) :  inquam  (610) :  novi  (611). — How  do  you  distinguish 
between  the  use  of  aio  and  of  inquam?  (613,  b,  ^T-) — What  fonn  of 
COB  pi  is  used  with  a  pass,  infin.?  (613,  c  ^^.) 
M  M 


THE    END 


PROF.  M'CLINTOCK  AND  CROOKS'S 

Series  of  QElementarg 

GREEK  AND  LATIN   BOOKS. 

PUBLISHED    AND   IN    JOURSE    OF    PUBLICATION 

By  Harper  and  Brothers,  New  7ork. 

DESIGNED   FOR  THE   USE  OF  SCHOOLS  AND  COLLEGES. 

ICP  At  the  request  of  many  teachers,  the  plan  of  the  Series  has  been  altered  for  the 
purpose  of  introducing  a  Latin  Reader  as  the  "  Second  Book  in  Latin."  The  First 
and  Second  Books  in  Latin  and  Greek  will  thus  afford  all  that  is  necessary  in  pre- 
paratory training,  before  beginning  the  regular  reading  of  the  classic  authors.  The 
"  Introduction  to  Writing  Latin"  will  form  the -work  heretofore  announced  as  the  "Sec 
ond  Book  in  Latin,"  which  has  been  long  in  careful  preparation, 

iFirst  iSook  in  Catin. 

Containing  Grammar,  Exercises,  and  Vocabularies,  on  the  Method  o< 
constant  Imitation  and  Repetition.  With  Summaries  of  Etymol- 
ogy and  Syntax.     12mo,  Sheep  extra,  75  cents.     {Fifth  Edition.) 

Quonh  Book  in  £atin. 

Being  a  siifficient  Latin  Reader,  in  Extracts  from  Cassar  and  Cicero, 
with  Notes  and  full  Vocabulary.     12mo.     (Soon.) 

SixQt  Book  in  C^reek. 

Containing  a  full  View  of  the  Forms  of  Words,  with  Vocabularies 
and  copious  Exercises,  on  the  Method  of  constant  Imitation  and 
Repetition.     12mo,  Sheep  extra,  75  cents.     {Second  Edition.) 

Bccorib  Book  in  (3xtck, 

Containing  a  Syntax,  with  Reading  Lessons  in  Prose;  Prosody  and 
Reading  Lessons  in  Verse.  Forming  a  sufficient  Greek  Reader, 
with  Notes  and  copious  Vocabulary.     12mo.     {Nearly  ready.) 

Sntrobuction  to  toriting  Catin. 

Containing  a  full  Syntax,  on  the  Basis  of  Kiihner,  with  Loci  Memo- 
riales  selected  from  Cicero,  and  copious  Exercises  for  Imitation 
and  Repetition.     12mo. 

Intended  for  higher  classes  in  schools  and  lower  classes  in  colleges. 

Practical  Introbnction  to  £atin  Stgle. 

Principally  translated  from  Grysar's  "  Theorie  des  lateinischen 

Stiles." 

This  work  will  supply  a  want  which  has  long  been  felt  in  our  high  schools  and  col- 
leges. 

Testimonials  to  the  First  Books  in  Latin  and  Greek. 

The  "  First  Book  in  Latin,"  by  Professors  M'Clintock  and  Crooks,  I  prefer,  on  many 
accounts,  to  any  other  of  the  elementary  Latin  grammars  now  used  in  our  schools  ; 
and  I  have  no  doubt  that  its  philosophical  and  eminently  prac^ica/  character  will  se- 
cure for  it  great  popularity,  both  among-  teachers  and  pupils. — Rev.  J.  F.  Schro.eder, 
Rector  of  St.  Ann's  Hall,  New  Yoik. 

If  the  rest  of  the  series  are  equal  to  the  "  First  Book  in  Greek,"  they  form  the  best 
introduction  to  the  classical  tongues  with  which  we  are  acquainted. — Prof.  Hart, 
Principal  of  the  Central  High  School,  Philadelphia. 

The  authors  have  been  very  happy  in  the  distribution  and  arrangement  of  the  sub- 
jects, so  as  to  introduce  the  beginner  gradually  to  the  difficulties,  and  yet  carry  him 
forward  rapidly  to  an  acquaintance  with  the  essential  forms  and  principles  of  Greek 
grammar.  There  is  also  a  perspicuity,  definiteness,  and  conciseness  in  the  languago 
with  which  I  am  exceedingly  pleased  — Prof.  W.  S.  TvLER,  Amherst  Coihge,  Mass 


4    Testimonials  to  the  First  Books  in  Latin  <xnd  Greek 

A  pretty  careful  examination  convinces  me  of  its  great  value  as  an  introducv  •« 
book,  and  its  decided  superiority  to  every  other  I  have  seen.  L  ippesii's  to  me  j  »• 
have  greatly  improved  upon  Arnold,  and  been  eminently  successsful  in  e  gradual  and 
not  too  rapid  unfolding  of  grammatical  principles.— Prof.  Stukges,  Hanover  College, 
Indianna. 

I  had  tried  all  sorts  of  books,  from  Adams's  and  Ross's  down  to  Andrews  and  Stod 
dard's,  Wells's,  Krebs's,  Cleveland's,  and  lastly  Arnold's,  and  think  the  "  First 
Book"  is  incomparably  superior  as  a  practical  work  to  any  other  in  use. — C.  W. 
Blake,  Principal  of  Prune  Street  Classical  Academy,  Philadelphia, 

1  have  given  the  classical  books  of  Professors  M'Ulintock  and  Crooks  a  thorough 
examination,  and  am  highly  pleased  with  them.  I  have  introduced  both  the  First 
Latin  and  First  Greek  into  my  school,  and  am  convinced  that  they  elicit  and  keep  up 
a  greater  interest  in  the  study  of  those  languages  than  any  I  have  yet  used. — Rev. 
Charles  Reynolds,  A.M.,  Rector  of  Williamsburgh  Grammar  School. 

I  have  examined  with  much  attention  the  "First  Book  in  Latin"  of  Professors 
M'Clintock  and  Crooks,  and  am  happy  to  bear  testimony  to  the  practical  i.act  and  sound 
scholarship  which  they  have  shown  in  the  preparation  of  the  work.  The  arrange- 
ment is  simple  and  lucid,  and  the  gradual  steps  by  which  the  youthful  student  is  in- 
troduced to  the  grammatical  laws  of  the  language,  both  as  it  regards  etymology  and 
syntax,  are  such  as,  in  my  estimation,  to  render  the  book  deserving  of  the  patronage 
of  every  instructor.  I  most  heartily  wish  it  the  extensive  circulation  it  so  eminently 
deserves. — John  J.  Owen,  Principal  of  the  Cornelius  Institute. 

I  have  examined  and  used  in  my  school  M'Clintock  and  Crooks's  First  Books  in 
Latin  and  Greek,  and  fully  approve  of  the  design  of  the  works.  I  think  they  are  cal- 
culated to  awaken  greatly  the  interest  of  the  scholar  in  lessons  that  have  generally 
been  considered  tedious,  at  the  same  time  that  they  convey  a  thorough  knowledge  of 
elementary  principles. — Aaron  Rand,  Collegiate  and  Mercantile  School,  New  York 

I  regard  the  "  First  Book  in  Latin"  as  the  best  yet  published  in  our  country.-- 
Prof.  Lewis,  Woodward  College,  Ohio. 

The  writers  have  added  valuable  improvements  to  the  excellent  works  of  Kiihuer 
and  Arnold.  The  analysis  of  the  Third  Declension  is  more  satisfactory  and  philo- 
sophical than  any  thing  of  the  kind  that  I  have  met  with.  The  rules  of  syntax  are 
more  clearly  and  briefly  expressed  than  those  of  any  grammar  within  my  knowledge. 
-Prof.  Stafford,  University  of  Alabama. 

I  think  the  "  First  Book  in  Latin"  better  calculated  than  any  work  I  know  to  in- 
duce students,  from  the  beginning,  to  study  Latin  critically.  We  have  made  it  one 
of  the  works  required  as  preparatory  to  college. — Prof.  H.  B.  Lane,  Wesleyan  Uni- 
versity, Middletown,  Conn. 

\  "e  have  introduced  the  "  First  Book  in  Latin,"  and  find  it  far  superior  to  any  other 
el*  jentary  work. — Prof.  Wheeler,  Indiana  Asbury  University. 

1  ne  solid,  well-arranged,  and  perspicuous  "  First  Book  in  Latin,"  completely  sup 
plies  the  want  I  have  long  felt,  as  a  teacher  of  Latin,  of  a  liook  for  beginners.  The 
unusual  progess  my  pupils  make  in  accurate  knowledge  of  the  language — knowledge 
which  they  can  apply  without  error  or  difficulty — is  the  best  proof  I  possess  of  the 
practical  value  of  the  book. — Rev.  J.  H.  Dashiell,  Principal  of  tho  Light  Street  In 
stitute,  Baltimore. 

The  most  thorough,  practical,  and  philosophical  method  of  teaching  Greek  that  we 
have  ever  seen. — Savannah  Republican. 

The  best  introduction  to  the  classical  tongues  with  which  we  are  acquainted.  The 
"  First  Book  in  Greek"  is  "  Greek  made  easy,"  not  by  leaving  out  all  the  hard  parts, 
but  by  presenting  the  difficulties  one  at  a  time,  and  in  the  order  most  consonant  to 
nature  and  reason.  It  does  equal  credit  to  the  scholarship  and  the  practical  good 
lense  of  its  authors.  We  have  seen  no  school  book  for  many  a  long  year  that  has 
given  us  more  unmingled  and  entire  satisfaction.— Sartain's  Union  Magazine. 
'  The  "  First  Book  in  Latin"  combines  all  the  advantages  of  recently-improved  meth- 
ods, and  contains  many  decided  improvements.  A  more  philosophical  and  practical 
system  of  teaching  Latin  we  have  never  seen. — Prof.  Salkeld,  Naugatuck,  Conn. 

The  grammatical  part  of  the  work  is  very  complete,  although  condensed  into  a 
wonderfully  short  compass. — Philadelphia  Inquirer. 

Among  many  other  advantages,  it  contains  i)recisely  such  remarks  and  explanationa 
as  a  student  wishes  to  have  in  the  early  part  of  his  course,  but  which,  in  common 
grammars,  are  strangely  omitted.— J.  A.  Devinney,  High  School,  Carlisle,  Penn. 

M'Clintock  and  Crooks's  First  Books  in  Latin  and  Greek  are  incomparable,  and 
certainly  the  best  books  for  beginners  ever  published,  and  I  am  convinced  will  meet 
with  the  heartiest  commendation  from  teachers  throughout  the  country.— W.  C.  S 
Rich ARBsoa,  Professor  of  Languages,  Tuscaloosa. 

The  lessons  in  the  "  Fi-rst  Book  in  Greek"  are  so  easy,  natural,  and  interestinf ,  ■ 
that  they  must  win  every  boy  to  the  study  of  the  language.  I  shall  -reaommend  it  tc 
every  teacher.— Proft  Martin,  Hamj^n  Si/dney  CcHhgs. 


^^ta^^-^. 


> 


> 


iJf^lt:^ 


YB  3625 


924208 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


